GAZETTEER NO. 14
=OGRAPHIC NAMES
OF ANTARCTICA
Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution
ATLAS - GAZETTEER COLLECTION
UNITED STATES BOARD ON GEOGRAPHIC NAMES
H. Thompson Straw, Chairman
Meredith F. Burrill, Hxecutive Secretary
Department of State... .......
Department of the Army. .......-
Department of the Navy. .......-
Post Office Department. ........
Department of the Interior. ..... .
Department of Agriculture. .......
Department of Commerce. ...... .
Government Printing Office .......
Lilia Or OWE. so bog! 0 6 6 6.0. c
Department of the Air Force
@: tors Toki pe™ utallatet mre:
Central Intelligence Agency
Vacant
Sophia A. Saucerman, deputy
F. C. Shepard, member
Walter M. Leech, deputy
W. G. Watt, member
Charles D. Rouse, deputy
Norman R. Grant, member
C. B. Gelston, deputy
Arthur A. Baker, member
John B. Bennett, deputy
Edward P. Cliff, member
Fred W. Grover, deputy
Lawrence W. Swanson, member
Lewis Heck, deputy
John W. Dollins, member
Walter W. Ristow, member
Leo LaMontagne, deputy
H. Thompson Straw, member
Robert Y. Ota, deputy
DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
Dovetas McKay, Secretary
OFFICE OF GEOGRAPHY
Merepitu F, Burriu, Director
Communications should be addressed to the Executive Secretary
Nv PLEASE RETORN
\ To” Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution
INSTITUTION S. Cc le ATLAS - GAZETTEER COLLECTION
"Woods Hole Oceanegraphic Institution
Data Library
Referer iGo Colles On, .
G Av.Z7 Er TE E R NO. | 4
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES
OF ANTARCTICA
With a Foreword by Meredith F. Burrill and a List of Expeditions by Kenneth J. Bertrand and Fred G. Alberts
Revised Edition
OFFICIAL STANDARD NAMES
approved by the
UNITED STATES BOARD ON GEOGRAPHIC NAMES
Prepared in the
Office of Geography, Department of the Interior
Washington, D.C. © January 1956
For sale by the Sunenmendert of Documents, U. S. Government Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C.
Price $2.25 (paper cover)
0 0301 0094905 3
NNN MUNI
Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily
reflect recognition of the political status of an area
by the United States Government
Page
3
12
oy
20
23
31
34
34
Page
* 50
59
59
63
65
72
89
101
106
111
111
112
126
131
Column
1
1
1
Column
2
1
CORRECTIONS——ANTARCTICA
Paragraph——Line
last——2
first——7
last——2
last——5
second——24
first—-—14
third——2
last——10
Entry——Line
Bailey Mount——1
Bertram Glacier——2
Bienvenue, Cape——4
Black Ridge——1
Bolle, Mont——1
Bruce Cape——1
Colbeck, Cape——4
Davis Islets——5
Detroit Plateau——4
Downshire, Cape——1
Drygalski Mountains——4
Dudley, Mount——3
Ferrar Glacier——29
Fort Rock——2
Board Meredith
Nathanial
Beckman
Salveson
slighting
Canisto
Covandonga
Belleny
BAILEY MOUNT
Scott Polar Inst.
140°15' E.
BLACK RIDGE
BOLLE, MONT
BRUCE CAPE
1908
Budd Coast
Russel Gl.
DOWNSHIRE, Cape
72°50' Ss.
side
medcal
Greenwhich I.
Board, Meredith
Nathaniel
Beckmann
Salvesen
sighting
Canisteo
Covadonga
Balleny
Should Read
BAILEY, MOUNT
Scott Polar Research
Inst.
140°31' E.
BLADE RIDGE
BOLLE, MOUNT
BRUCE, CAPE
1902
Knox Coast
Russell Gl.
DOWNSHIRE, CAPE
72°00' S.
sides
medial
Greenwich I.
Page
131
132
135
143
143
148
154
157
163
173
174
182
183
192
194
201
209
211
211
224
224
224
Column
Entry——Line
Fort William——2
Fox Mount——1
Frost Glacier——7
Grace, Cape——9
Graham Coast——8
Habermehl Peak——3
Hatree, Cape——1
Herd Point——5
Horsburg Point——1
Johansen Islands——3
Jomfruene Island——12
Kreitzer Glacier——6
Kukri Hills——9
Lichen Peak——2
Little America——3
Madigan, Nunatak——1
McLennan Mount——1
Mentzel, Mount——4
Mercury Glacier——3
Neumayer Channel——1
Neumayer Escarpment——2
Neumayer Escarpment——4
Greenwhich I.
FOX MOUNT
boaswain
J. Gist
1831
Muhlig-Hofman
HATREE, CAPE
R. D. Hard
HORSBURG POINT
72°07! W.
probably
72245)
Gurikha
20 mi.
Little America I.
MADIGAN, NUNATAK
McLENNAN MOUNT
(PAC &,
flowing W.
George von Neumayer
11,800 ft.
Should Read
Greenwich I.
FOX, MOUNT
boatswain
J. Grace
1832
Muhlig-Hofmann
HARTREE, CAPE [move
to correct alph.
place]
R. D. Herd
HORSBURGH POINT
72°52" W.
probable
71°45' E.
Gurkha
6 mi.
Little America I,
MADIGAN NUNATAK
McLENNAN, MOUNT
Tile sO Ss
flowing E.
Georg von Neumayer
8,100 ft.
[after “*Schwabenland”’ insert “«. in about 73°15" ‘Sa
1°25" w.??]
ii
Page
226
236
239
256
258
259
260
294
303
308
309
313
326
Column
Entry——Line
Nielson Glacier——1
Parpen Crags——4
Penelop Point——1
Renaud Island——3
Richard Black Coast——6
Ritscher Peak——4
Roberts Cape——1
Stygian Cove——9
Tofe Glacier——1
Tucker Inlet——2
Tu Rocks——4
Vedel Islets——5
Will Hayes Mountains——1
NIELSON GLACIER
Surveyed and named by...
PENELOP POINT
Rabat... Briscoe
USAD
TD p2DUES:
ROBERTS CAPE
Cliffs
TOFE GLACIER
Diniell
58°33! W.
Vadel
WILL HAYES
MOUNTAINS
CHANGES IN ALPHABETIZATION
Should Read
NIELSEN GLACIER
Named by...
PENELOPE POINT
Rabot... Biscoe
USAS
Tilia ZONES:
ROBERTS, CAPE
cliffs
TOFTE GLACIER
Daniell
58°53! W.
Vedel
WILL HAYS MOUNTAINS
Correct the alphabetization of the decisions and cross-references listed below:
Page
47
47
82
93
120
127
128
129
131
Entry
Arrival Heights
Arronax, Mount
Cee Port
Cornwallis Island
Emm Rock
Fish Islands
Flagon Point
Flatiron, The
Foreland Islet
iii
Page
131
131
133
135
252
258
265
265
Entry
Fort William
Fortress Hill
Frank Newnes Glacier
Fryer Point
Rabot, Mount
Rex, Mount
Rosamel Island
Rosenthal Islets
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
CONTENTS
The geographic name problem .
The nature of the problem .
Resolution of the problem .
Statement of policy covering peocrapiich names
Application of policy in decisions .
Expeditions .
List of expeditions .
Geographic names
Abbreviations
Page
=
(vo) Aa PNW Fe
11
37
The following abbreviations are frequently, but not universally, used in the
text of the name decisions included in this publication.
Acadaenea.s Academy, Académie
INOW, socone Admiral
INAV, csdace Archipelago
(ASSN ace Association
IASSUeee Assistant
AMEE 3 333s August
Brig. Gen. . Brigadier General
Captismcnerc Captain
Cdr ee Commander
Chanteeneer Channel
COS Pits is Company
Colweacsminn: Colonel
CCN Sie sities: December
Depts rasan: Department
DIPS yeh ices. Director
DISC een. discovered
DE ee ovaxete Doctor
1 St apie aber east
(2) eee elevation
1) ee east-northeast
INK Ses omes Ensign
MHS Socane east-southeast
(9° SORE expedition
lots ou te ae February
1 TS Abate ees Pret feet
Gens sssn.c General
GIP a ae Glacier
Gov 0.5 voor Governor
GOVES ane Government
lsheyes deennoe Harbor
ELON eee Honorable
ABBREVIATED TERMS
Tast, Peete ea
Soest encoun
iv
Island
Institute, Institution
Islands
January
Junior
Lieutenant
Major
mile, miles
Member of Parliament
Mount
Mountain
Mountains
north
northeast
north-northeast
north-northwest
November
northwest
October
Peninsula
President
Professor
Point
. Rear Admiral
Royal Australian Navy
Representative
Royal Navy
Royal Navy Reserve
.. Royal Navy Volunteer Reserve
. Right Honorable
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ABBREVIATED TERMS (Continued)
Sie. deaetauee south Univers University
SES eek southeast USCGHrerE United States Coast Guard
Seq aes Secretary WSMC irr United States Marine Corps
Sep September WSNieeereee United States Navy
ea bes F NeEe USNR ..... United States Navy Reserve
ae cate eee Societe USiy aoe. United States
Some Vee ca eee V. Adm. ... Vice Admiral
SSE. ....... south-southeast V. Pres. .... Vice President
SSWeareacrre south-southwest SUA ae eee west
SHI wise oor Strait WNW. ..... west-northwest
SWer ee southwest WSwW...... west-southwest
ABBREVIATIONS FOR COMMITTEE TITLES
IBT=APCh a eee nee tee British Antarctic Place-names Committee
SAGAN Gn aiken eae ne United States Advisory Committee on Antarctic Names, 1947-
WS=SCAN eeu Washes c ere United States Special Committee on Antarctic Names, 1943-1947
ABBREVIATIONS FOR EXPEDITION TITLES
AA Sl Ot 14 ee ania Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-14
ENN UNS) Oh eae ee ie erhate aaa tir Australian National Antarctic Research Expedition (various
dates and leaders)
IAT EON OXP ec siceu ies acnereiinvees Argentine expedition
BANZARE, 1929-31 ........
BelgAE, 1897-99
BGLE, 1934-37
BrAE, 1898-1900
BrAE, 1907-9
Brat 910-3 eeee eee
IBROX ae Mets fer at tacts
BrNAE, 1901-4
ByrdAE, 1928-30
ByrdAE, 1933-35
Chil¥vexp ia oan sceee cones
FrAE, 1903-5
FrAE, 1908-10
FrAE, 1948-53
EPOX Dey Netgear eae: ae
GerAE, 1901-3
GerAE, 1911-12
GerAE, 1938-39
Gerstexp sii ets ao ee eaens
NBSAE, 1949-52
NOTMEXDE ote e i otras
RARE, 1947-48
RUSS SOX DA salaries estate
ScotNAE, 1902-4
SGS, 1951-52; 1953-54
SwedAE, 1901-4
USAS, 1939-41
USEE, 1838-42 ............
USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47
USN Op. Wml., 1947-48 .
British-Australian-New Zealand Antarctic Research Expedi-
tion, 1929-31
. Belgian Antarctic Expedition, 1897-99
British Graham Land Expedition, 1934-37
British Antarctic Expedition, 1898-1900
British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9
British Antarctic Expedition, 1910-13
British expedition
British National Antarctic Expedition, 1901-4
Byrd Antarctic Expedition, 1928-30
Byrd Antarctic Expedition, 1933-35
Chilean expedition
Discovery Investigations (various dates and leaders)
Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey (various dates and
leaders)
French Antarctic Expedition, 1903-5
French Antarctic Expedition, 1908-10
French Antarctic Expeditions, 1948-49;
1952-53
French expedition
German Antarctic Expedition, 1901-3
German Antarctic Expedition, 1911-12
German Antarctic Expedition, 1938-39
German expedition
Norwegian-British-Swedish Antarctic Expedition, 1949-52
Norwegian expedition
Ronne Antarctic Research Expedition, 1947-48
Russian expedition
Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, 1902-4
South Georgia Survey, 1951-52; 1953-54
Swedish Antarctic Expedition, 1901-4
United States Antarctic Service, 1939-41
United States Exploring Expedition, 1838-42
United States Navy Operation Highjump, 1946-47
1949-51; 1951-52 and
. United States Navy Operation Windmill, 1947-48
iy
races se! tid
“Tah
doo haa
% sal) coll thi oth
Oe
AP AE Rye,
bean: iy
; Y
: : vo’
dP ,
f : HY Day
‘4
1 Buu
Hi
nee
‘
Sh Ube ie nea
* =
:
tives mu if PAO KN
} i y
pact
) ‘ , *
¢.
Pad
i)
* '
|
yer |
ray i
a
VTS
Uo
eo
44
ee |
u
her et
‘rats
A
i
73) 4
Wee ts
diy j
wi
‘i
Bi
‘
5 j
it
u ,
at
M
1 Max
yt Ve
Ray i
PRUE ts =a
bh
¥ \e
er i
ee es
7 75,
1, -s \
vi 4) *
pn is
gen) wrt
Late 4
Wea
eager i
Fa
OA 4
We
7 \
Sieh
vf ;
uy
‘- 7] 4 ‘
7 ist
Cay “
ry cal
he ‘
Wr ay
‘* Lani
} ‘
a a
ye
‘fps 7
Tay ted
i
=
i
r j
he : vee
4 \ Caw Ny q 7
ae : meine on 1 nds,
f TURF U i
Pe) Le ab ;
ae 4 ‘
*
ie
m
‘t's %
4
A t
Weg
nary
ats
‘
ii
4
A
‘
Posi
a
eh " a or
heer) i “tdi
Oe :
; } |
Joey
j mA
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
The Geographic Name Problem
The Nature of the Problem
The geographic nomenclature of Antarctica was
long in need of an overall systematic treatment,
objective in approach and based upon thorough
examination of all the evidence. The results of
such treatment over a period of about three years
were presented in Geographical Names of Ant-
arctica, Special Publication No. 86 of the Board on
Geographical Names, in May 1947, two supple-
ments to which were issued in 1949 and 1951.
The continuing program since that publication
has now covered most of the geographic naming in
Antarctica. As research has filled in many of the
previous gaps in Knowledge, a number of names
have been modified and minor amendments have
been made in the policies. This revised publica-
tion brings together the greatly enlarged body of
names Officially standardized for use by the United
States Government, together with new pertinent
background information.
Questions of political sovereignty have not
entered into consideration of the name policy, or
of individual names. This statement of non-
political character of the geographic name policy
and decisions is also applicable to all statements
in this publication. The Board on Geographic
Names has therefore considered each name on its
merits in the light of historical studies of explora-
tion and of successive improvements in the
mapping of Antarctica. The names of “lands”
and “coasts” have been considered without politi-
cal connotation, and have been described and
delimited as physical entities as far as present
knowledge permits.
The Antarctic continent presents many nomen-
clature problems for varied reasons. Modern spe-
cialized tools were not available to the early ex-
plorers primarily responsible for initial activity in
Antarctic naming, and the nature of Antarctica
put great obstacles in their way. The great size
of the continent and its relative inaccessibility
make it difficult to develop accurate concepts of
the whole and the relationship of its parts. Many
of the natural features in Antarctica are markedly
similar in appearance, and, conversely, the appear-
ance of a given feature varies with the angle of
view or from time to time. It has not been easy
for explorers to describe and locate features unmis-
takably or to identify a feature reported previously
by someone else. The extraordinary hazards of
travel and frequent poor visibility have restricted
observation. Practically all of the interior that is
known, and much of the coast, are masked with a
cover of snow and ice through which protrude only
the upper parts of mountains or mountain ranges.
Although many glaciers are perfectly distinct,
except perhaps at their sources, the relationship
of ice masses to one another is commonly not
obvious.
Another contributing difficulty in identification
of features has been that the available records of
exploration do not always permit exact fixing of
positions at the present. Chronometer errors in
the early days of Antarctic exploration resulted
sometimes in considerable errors in reported longi-
tude; looming and mirages may have caused wide
errors in latitude; flight positions have not always
been determined with the precision necessary to
permit full and accurate use of aerial photographs;
and many features have been named upon being
viewed either from such a great distance or from
such an angle that their relation to the local
topographic detail could not be seen.
Superimposition of names on previously named
features in Antarctica has been largely the result
either of mistaken identity or location of features
arising from the foregoing causes, of simultaneous
exploration, or of lack of knowledge of previous
naming. The records of early sealers and some
other visitors to Antarctica have contributed little
to the literature on Antarctic nomenclature.
Explorers and cartographers of many nations and
languages have contributed to the nomenclature
of Antarctica, often without recording for posterity
an explanation of their naming actions and often
without full appreciation of everything that had
preceded. In some instances the preceding events
could not possibly have been known by explorers,
since priority of occurrence was a matter only of
weeks or even days.
Prior to the study of Antarctic names resulting
in the first publication, resolution of problems
arising from these natural causes had been com-
plicated in the case of a few important features by
strongly expressed differences of opinion. Sub-
sequent resolution of these matters is being facil-
itated by the adoption of developed policy.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
The kinds of nomenclature problems encoun-
tered in Antarctica fall largely in these classes:
determination of the facts, circumstances and, in-
sofar as possible the intent, of original and any
subsequent naming; the choice between multiple
names for a feature; the choice between alterna-
tive generic terms such as land or coast; the correc-
tion of generic terms for features whose nature
was not accurately known at the time of naming,
such as a peninsula which turns out to be an
island; identification and fixing of location; defini-
tive description; and determination of the appro-
priateness of names for application to specific
features.
Resolution of the Problem
The need for systematic overall treatment of
Antarctic names was brought to the attention of
the then United States Board on Geographical
Names by the requirements of the 1939-41 United
States Antarctic Service expedition and by the
concomitant preparation of a chart of Antarctica
and a companion volume of Sailing Directions by
the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office.
The chart and Sailing Directions were prepared
under the direction of Rear Admiral (then Lieu-
tenant Commander) Robert A. J. English, USN
(Retired), who was Executive Secretary of the
United States Antarctic Service Interdepartmental
Executive Committee. Admiral English discussed
informally many problems of nomenclature and
specific name proposals with Lawrence Martin
(Library of Congress), and W. L. G. Joerg (Na-
tional Archives), who had concerned themselves
for some time with Antarctic nomenclature. Also
available to Admiral English was such general
information on policy and background as the Board
had developed up to that time, which unfortunately
did not include a definite and comprehensive state-
ment of policy specifically pointed to the problems
of Antarctic names.
In preparing the chart and Sailing Directions,
it became evident that the resolving of name con-
flicts which had arisen over many years and the
examination of new name proposals would involve
specialized research. The U.S. Navy Hydrographic
Office on Nov. 27, 1939 formally referred to the
then Board on Geographical Names for its consid-
eration, all names then appearing on the chart.
A Special Committee on Antarctic Names was
appointed on July 23, 1943, with, as members
W. L. G. Joerg, Chairman, Capt. Harold EK. Saun-
ders, U.S.N., and, for a few months, Lawrence Mar-
tin. The Committee met with the then Director of
the Board on Jan. 5, 1944, made a preliminary
appraisal of the situation, and considered several
key names upon which it made recommendations.
These recommendations were accepted and the
names were approved and promulgated. In Ant-
arctica, as elsewhere, it is necessary to examine
the whole of the nomenclature before the relation
of any one name to the general pattern becomes
clear, and as further examination proceeded some
of these decisions were appropriately revised.
The Committee met at intervals during the
early part of 1944 and worked out additional
names, but the task progressively assumed ever-
increasing size until staff assistance was neces-
sary. A member of the then Division of Geog-
raphy, Dept. of the Interior, was assigned in Dec.
1944 to research, compile, index and analyze evi-
dence of exploration and specific names. In
March 1946 the Special Committee on Antarctic
Names agreed to devote two or three half-days a
week to their part of the program. Kenneth
Bertrand was assigned the staff work on Antarctic
names, and after joining the faculty of Catholic
University of America in Sep. 1946 he continued
his investigations as part of his University research
program. Fred G. Alberts, in charge of the pro-
gram since October 1949, was joined in March 1951
by Gardner D. Blodgett.
An act of Congress in July 1947 abolished the
former Board and created the present one, respon-
sible conjointly with the Secretary of the Interior
for standardization of geographic names. Joerg
and Saunders were appointed members of a new
Advisory Committee on Antarctic Names that con-
tinued without break the work of the former Spe-
cial Committee. Bertrand was appointed a mem-
ber of the Committee in October 1947 and rounded
out an effective team. Meeting regularly one-half
day or more each week for nine years, and irregu-
larly after that, this group worked over a great
quantity of data in the consideration of practically
every name known to have been applied to, or
proposed for, features in Antarctica. The Com-
mittee was reduced to two by the death of Joerg
in January 1952.
The Office of Naval Research in May 1949, recog-
nizing the value of an orderly Antarctic nomencla-
ture, the availability of the members of the Com-
mittee and the start that had been made in Special
Publication No. 86, contracted for the completion
of the study as a part of its program of support
of basic research. Under that contract the greater
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
part of the remaining names were worked out, but
not all. In two instances, Totten Coast and Norths
Coast, the information gathered by Wilkes in 1840
on the occasion of the original application of the
names Totten and North and the subsequent ob-
servations by Mawson in the periods 1911-14 and
1930-31, though justifying the retention of these
names, did not suffice for continuous delineation
of the coast line. These “coasts” could not be
delimited until the shore line was drawn on maps,
and they were therefore defined as extending for
an undetermined distance east and west of the
respective landfalls that occasioned the original
naming.
The coast of Wilkes Land also presented a
series of other name problems that could not be
solved until the coast line was delineated. Aerial
photographs of much of this coast were obtained
by Operations Highjump and Windmill. A sec-
ond contract was therefore made with the Office of
Naval Research in December 1952 to produce a
delineation of the coast between longitudes 98°E.
and 160°K. (subsequently amended to 86°E. and
144°E.), using techniques described by Saunders
in the April 1933 Geographical Review, and fur-
ther, on the basis of this delineation to assign
limits to ‘coasts’; to determine the proper appli-
cation of names from the Wilkes expedition, and
Operations Highjump and Windmill; to suggest
locations where ground control should be obtained
by future expeditions; and to correlate the findings
of Wilkes, Mawson and others with those of Oper-
ation Highjump. This project was brought to vir-
tual completion early in the summer of 1955, in
time for the new information to be incorporated
in maps and charts, and used in planning, for
United States participation in the International
Geophysical Year. The delineation and newly
fixed nomenclature was also made available to
several other countries participating in the Inter-
national Geophysical Year.
The formulation of a statement of guiding policy
was a prerequisite to an objective approach not
only to overall problems of nomenclature but also
to specific problems of individual names. Board
policy, in making decisions on domestic geographic
names, has long been not to use the names of living
persons, but the application of this policy to Ant-
arctica appeared neither desirable nor possible.
In the absence of specific positive policy to the
contrary, however, this question has been one of
the most serious obstacles to the resolution of the
problem of Antarctic place names.
A statement of policy for Antarctic names was
drafted by the then Director of the Board Meredith
F. Burrill, and Bertrand and reviewed by the Special
Committee in the spring of 1946. It was further
refined after discussion with several Antarctic
explorers and particularly with Admiral English.
The resulting policy statement was approved by
the then Advisory Committee on Geographical
Names on July 9, 1946, and by the Secretary of the
Interior on July 13, 1946. Two minor amend-
ments, covering commemoration of universities
and university people that have helped train polar
explorers, were approved on April 4, 1947. A fur-
ther draft with minor changes that did not alter
the provisions was approved on May 9, 1947. Since
that time the policy has been tested through appli-
cation to the choice of names in the many contro-
versial cases considered.
Special Publication No. 86 was especially con-
cerned with the area covered by United States
Navy Hydrographic Office publication No. 138,
Sailing Directions for Antarctica. Thus the extent
of Antarctica was not in question, and no decision
on the name Antarctica was included. This pub-
lication covers the names in a wider physical area
and therefore includes a decision on “Antarctica,”
defined as the continent, together with the islands
rising from the continental block.
Since the terms “the Antarctic’ and the “Ant-
arctic region” have both been widely employed in
reference to the area physically associated with
Antarctica, it did not seem advisable to the Com-
mittee to decide upon one to the exclusion of the
other. It did seem advisable, however, to state
precisely to what the terms referred. The Com-
mittee therefore uses the terms “the Antarctic”
or “Antarctic region” as denoting the area south
of the Antarctic Convergence, the line encircling
the globe roughly between 50° and 60°S., where
the colder, fresher Antarctic waters sink beneath
the warmer, saltier sub-Antarctic waters. This
revision includes the names of features in the Ant-
arctic region with exception of those in the Ker-
guelen Islands, which lie on the line of conver-
gence and which are not as closely associated with
this history of Antarctic exploration.
In Special Publication No. 86, a small group of
non-personal Scandinavian and German names
were processed into English forms. Experience
proved that confusion resulted when comparing
charts carrying these revised forms with charts
carrying the original foreign names. Correlation
of the English and foreign forms in gazetteers was
hindered by the fact that their alphabetical list-
ings were far removed from one another.
The Statement of Policy was therefore amended
in 1952, and the section on translation and treat-
ment of the generic term in non-personal foreign
names has been revised to provide for retention of
the specific term in most cases as originally given;
retention of the original name if it is well estab-
lished in international usage; substitution of an
English generic for an included foreign generic, or
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
generic plus definite article that is not readily
understood, e.g., “Rund Bay” and “Trilling Peaks”
for “Rundvika” and ‘“‘Trillingnutane”’; addition of
an English generic to the foreign name so that the
Anglicized form will agree basically with the
original name, particularly with names containing
frequently used specific terms of a numerical or
locational nature, e.g., ‘““Tvistein Pillars” and “Vor-
posten Peak” for “Tvistein” and ‘Vorposten’;
acceptance, in rare instances, of well established
translated forms, e.g., “Ice Bay,’ that has become
established for the feature originally named
“Tsfjorden.”
The definitive descriptions of the decisions on
Antarctic names include reference to the actual
naming and the attendant circumstances when
known, to clarify as far as practicable the basis for
approval. When the record is not explicit on the
facts of naming but the attendant circumstances
and association of names indicate a strong pre-
sumption as to the identity of the person for whom
a name is given, the feature has been described as
“probably named for [such person].”
The approval of surnames only, instead of full
names, involved the question of naming for male
relatives and friends on the basis of relationship
or friendship and the commemoration of feminine
relatives or friends because custom and usage for-
bade commemoration of the explorers themselves.
It was felt that orderly and appropriate geographic
nomenclature for Antarctica would be achieved
best by naming for persons who qualify under the
policy.
The Board on Geographic Names has essen-
tially accomplished the bringing of order into the
geographic names of Antarctica up to the present.
A basis has been established upon which new geo-
graphic nomenclature can be added, name by
name, as exploration and survey proceed. This
does not mean that every problem encountered has
been solved. A few named features do not exist in
the positions where they were thought to be.
Some of these have been identified nevertheless
and the error satisfactorily explained; others are
still riddles that may never be solved. A great
many positions assigned to features are correct in
relation to nearby or associated features but un-
doubtedly off in latitude and longitude. Most of
these may some day be tied in to control points,
of which there are relatively few so far. As more
are established it will be possible to make much
more use of the pictures, sketches, maps and
charts that are already in hand.
Photography is a valuable aid to identification
of features to be named. Photographs may show
many things other than the intended subject, and
pictures of people or nearby objects have often
furnished the necessary clues to the identity of
distant features in the background. A few dark
objects in a featureless white foreground and
middle distance can be of great value, as can be a
complete circle panorama from an identifiable
spot, or the selection of a feature identifiable on
aerial photographs as the site for an astronomical
fix.
In view of the publication of the extensive
Antarctic Bibliography by the Department of the
Navy in February 1951, the selected bibliography
included in the Special Publication No. 86 has
been omitted.
While great care has been taken to focus on each
name all the pertinent information that could be
found, it is highly probable that the present pub-
lication will bring forth additional data not now
available. In the light of new evidence it may
appear desirable to modify, as to description and
perhaps as to name, some of the decisions listed
herein. It is hoped that users of this present
gazetteer who have pertinent information that
appears not to have been considered will make it
available for the record.
Statement of Policy Covering Geographic Names
A. Introduction
These policies are for the guidance of the Board
in deciding cases and should be helpful to ex-
plorers and others in proposing names for natural
features in Antarctica.
The problem of geographic nomenclature in
Antarctica is unlike that of any other area of com-
parable size. Antarctica has no permanent settle-
ments and even in the stations continuously occu-
pied for a number of years the personnel is gener-
ally rotated. There are undoubtedly many fea-
tures that have never been seen by man, and even
in the explored portions of the continent many of
the features are unnamed. Antarctica has been
visited and explored by the nationals of many na-
tions, who, by their heroic efforts to broaden man’s
knowledge of this land of ice and snow, have fully
demonstrated the international nature of the world
of science. Names, therefore, will be considered
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
without reference to the nationality of the person
honored.
Under the policy here set forth, decisions on
Antarctic names will be based on priority of appli-
cation, appropriateness, and the extent to which
usage has become established. The grouping of
natural features into three orders of magnitude,
with corresponding categories of persons according
to the type of contribution which they have made,
is intended to provide the greatest possible objec-
tivity in determining the appropriateness of a
name. It does not, however, exclude the use of
other than personal names when appropriate.
Non-personal names are discussed under a sep-
arate heading.
B. Types of Natural Features
The kinds of things that have been named in
Antarctica are roughly grouped below in three
categories. There is considerable latitude for judg-
ment in classifving individual features, since it is
practically impossible to set size limits for “large
glaciers,” “great mountains,” or “large bays,” but
this should facilitate rather than hamper the appli-
cation of the principles and policies.
Features having special significance or promi-
nence in geographic discovery, scientific investiga-
tion, or the history of Antarctica may be placed in
the next higher category than their magnitude
alone would warrant.
1. FIRST-ORDER FEATURES
. Regions or “lands”
. Coasts
Seas
. Plateaus
. Extensive mountain ranges
Major submarine deeps, ridges, plateaus, or
swells
g. Ice shelves
h. Large glaciers
mHoaeo0p
2. SECOND-ORDER FEATURES.
. Peninsulas
. Mountain ranges, except the most extensive
. Great or prominent mountains
. Glaciers, except the largest
Prominent capes
Islands
Gulfs
. Large bays
Straits or passages
Harbors
. Extensive submarine reefs, shoals, or shal-
lows
ATM pe ho ao of
3. THIRD-ORDER FEATURES
a. Minor mountains and hills
b. Nunataks
c. Cliffs
d. Rocks
e. Minor shore features
f. Points
g. Capes
h. Glaciers
i. Bays
j. Coves
k. Anchorages
1. Parts of these features
m. Submarine reefs, shoals, and shallows of
small extent
n. Camps or camp sites and depots (not nat-
ural features and not necessarily perma-
nent)
except the greater or more prom-
inent ones
C. Scheme for Application of Personal Names to
These Features
1. FIRST-ORDER FEATURES
a. The leader or organizer of an expedition to
Antarctica
b. Persons who have made discoveries of out-
standing significance in Antarctica, or lead-
ers of field parties, or captains of ships, that
have made such discoveries
c. Persons who, through their work with Ant-
arctic expeditions, have made outstanding
contributions to scientific knowledge or to
the techniques of Antarctic exploration
d. A person who has provided the major finan-
cial or material support to an expedition,
thereby making such an undertaking pos-
sible
2. SECOND-ORDER FEATURES
a. Persons whose outstanding heroism, skill,
spirit, or labor has made a signal contribu-
tion to the success of an expedition
b. Persons who have made important contribu-
tions in the planning, organization, out-
fitting, or operation of expeditions to Ant-
arctica
c. Ship captains or leaders of field parties of
such expeditions
d. Persons whose contributions to the knowl-
edge of the Arctic either have advanced our
knowledge of Antarctica or have expanded
the possibilities of Antarctic exploration
e. Persons who have made outstanding con-
tributions to equipment for polar explo-
ration
f. The directors or heads of learned societies
that have given significant support or made
material contributions to Antarctic explo-
ration
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
g. Persons who by substantial contributions of
funds or supplies have made possible an
Antarctic expedition
h. Persons who have done outstanding work in
the utilization of data, identification of
specimens, or interpretation of the results of
Antarctic exploration
3. THIRD-ORDER FEATURES
a. Persons who have assisted in the work of
organizing or conducting Antarctic explo-
ration, or who have assisted in analysis of
information gathered in the course of such
exploration
b. Members of expeditions, including ship-
based personnel
c. Persons whose contributions to knowledge
in their respective fields have facilitated the
discovery, recognition, identification, or re-
cording of Antarctic phenomena
d. Teachers or administrators in institutions
of higher learning who have contributed to
the training of polar explorers
e. Persons who have made material contribu-
tions in any form to Antarctic expeditions,
and who have by their words or actions dem-
onstrated an interest in further scientific
exploration rather than in seeking commer-
cial exploitation of such contributions
D. The Application of Non-Personal Names
In accord with the tradition of Antarctic explo-
ration, it is considered appropriate to apply non-
personal names to natural features. Names in the
following categories may be appropriately applied
to a feature in any order of magnitude with which
there is association. Examples of non-personal
names are:
1. Names which commemorate events (e.g.,
Charcot’s “Point Délivrance”’ and Nor-
denskjold’s “Hope Bay’’)
2. Names of ships from which discoveries have
been made (e.g., “Cape Groénland” and ‘“‘Cape
Norvegia’”’)
3. Names of organizations which have sponsored,
supported, or given scientific or financial as-
sistance to Antarctic expeditions (e.g., ‘““Royal
Society Range,” “Admiralty Range,” ‘““Banzare
Coast”), or names of institutions of higher
learning that have contributed to the training
of polar explorers
4. Names which are peculiarly descriptive of the
feature name (e.g., ‘Deception Island,”
“Mount Tricorn,” or “Three Slice Nunatak”).
Descriptive names which are not unique or
particularly appropriate and for which there
are likely to be duplicates are, however, un-
desirable
. Any other non-personal name which because
of its acknowledged importance occupies a
major role in Antarctic exploration or Ant-
arctic history
E. Criteria of Appropriateness
1. Newly proposed names will be considered for
features of the first, second, or third order, as
described above, in the light of their appropri-
ateness, as evidenced by the following factors
arranged in order cf weight:
a. Chronological priority of discovery, naming,
or other relevant action
b. Actual association of the person, ship, or-
ganization, event, etc., with the feature
c. Association of the person, ship, organiza-
tion, event, etc., with Antarctic exploration
d. Contribution of the person to the knowledge
of Antarctica
e. Association of the person, ship, organization,
event, etc., with other polar exploration
f. Contribution of the person to relevant fields
of knowledge
g. Extent to which financial or material con-
tributions have contributed to the success
of an expedition or to the collection of valu-
able scientific data
h. Previous recognition through a geographic
name in Antarctica. To prevent confusion,
it is considered advisable, in future naming
in Antarctica, to apply the name of one
person or the names of persons having the
same surname, to no more than one feature
of a kind
i. The possibility of ambiguity or confusion
with names already in use
(1) The duplication of names already in
current usage is undesirable and, ex-
cept in special cases, is to be avoided
(2) Since descriptive names are often am-
biguous and easily duplicated, they
should be avoided, unless a descriptive
name is peculiarly appropriate
(3) The duplication in Antarctica of names
well Known in other parts of the world
is undesirable even though qualified by
adjectives such as “new,” “south,” and
“little.”
2. Names already in use will be considered in
the light of:
a. Appropriateness, as outlined above
b. Wideness of acceptance, as evidenced by use
in scientific and popular map and other
literature. Usage which is considered suf-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ficiently fixed and/or unanimous may be
accepted as valid grounds for approval of
a name which would not otherwise qualify.
F. Fields of Knowledge Pertinent to Antarctica
The following is a list of fields of knowledge in
which outstanding contributions may be consid-
ered justification for commemoration in an Ant-
arctic place name. It is to be considered neither
exclusive nor exhaustive, and no order of priority is
intended.
1. Navigation and astronomy
2. Oceanography and hydrography
3. Surveying, photogrammetry, and cartog-
raphy
4. Meteorology and climatology
5. Geodesy and geophysics
6. Glaciology and ice physics
7. Radio, radar, and allied fields
8. Geology, voleanology, and seismology
9. Geography
10. Botany and its subdivisions
11. Zoology and its subdivisions
G. Recommended Language and Form
In keeping with long-established policies based
upon trends in the normal evolution of geographic
names, consideration will be given to brevity, sim-
plicity, and unambiguity in selecting the form of
names derived by these procedures:
1. The application of full names and/or titles
of persons will be considered appropriate only
when required to avoid ambiguity, duplica-
tion, or other confusion, or in the case of well
known persons who were almost invariably
referred to by their full names. Titles will
be translated where their use is required.
2. The names of organizations, ships, and other
non-personal names, when unduly long and
cumbersome, will ordinarily be used in some
shortened, though intelligible, form.
3. English generics will be used. Complete
translation of names will generally be avoided,
but well established translated forms may be
accepted.
4. An English generic may be added, or may be
substituted for an included generic term, in
the case of non-personal, non-English, single-
word names that include a generic or a defi-
nite article, or both.
H. Inappropriate Names
Names in the following categories will not be
considered, unless otherwise appropriate according
to the principles stated herein, or unless such
names are widely and firmly established as of the
date of approval of these principles.
1. Names suggested because of relationship or
friendship
2. Names of contributors of funds, equipment,
and supplies, who by the nature and tone of
their advertising have endeavored to capital-
ize or to gain some commercial advantage as
a result of their donations. This would not
include advantages resulting from testing of
donated equipment under Antarctic condi-
tions. In cases of doubt, the decision shall
be in favor of the individual whose name has
been proposed.
3. The names of products, sled dogs, or pets will
ordinarily not be considered as appropriate
for application to natural features in Ant-
arctica.
Application of Policy in Decisions
In applying the principles outlined in the pre-
ceding pages, the Board on Geographic Names has
attempted to disturb previous naming as little as
possible, while giving recognition to the most ap-
propriate associations of names and features. In
general, old established names have been retained.
Even when this resulted in two closely similar
names for features in the same category, as two
mountains or two bays, the names have been kept
if particularly appropriate or without alternatives.
In general, too, the Board has done little naming
on its own part. It has shifted some names to
features with which they are more logically asso-
ciated, and in some instances after deciding be-
tween two names for the same feature, the Board
has applied the rejected name to another feature
for which it is appropriate. For example, after
rejecting Wilkes’ name “Cape Hudson” in favor of
Cape Freshfield, a mountain range in the Thurston
Peninsula area approached by Hudson was named
for him. Some new names were supplied for
prominent unnamed features to which reference
has been necessary for purposes of this study, such
as Bingham Glacier and Trail Bay. Other new
names have been applied to commemorate mem-
bers of expeditions or those who played a promi-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
nent part in furthering Antarctic expeditions or
Antarctic exploration in general, but whose names
had by some chance not been selected previously
for application to Antarctic features. These in-
stances of naming by the Board, however, are few
in relation to the number of names considered.
In a number of cases it has not been possible,
with data collected from all available sources, to
find or to identify features previously discovered
and named by Antarctic explorers, due to factors
referred to above. In most cases these are either
minor features or are not required for general
reference at this time.
Where the data at hand have been insufficient
for locating on the latest maps various features
discovered by explorers who worked earlier in Ant-
arctic history, and where explorers have been un-
able to find features reported by previous explorers,
no recommendations have been made to assign or
to fix the specific or generic parts of names, the
positions, or the types of features.
A case in point is Bob Island in the Palmer
Archipelago. This island, which apparently lies
off the southeast coast of Wiencke Island in De
Gerlache Strait, cannot be located with certainty
on the rather definitive maps now available. This
name should be assigned as originally intended
if that becomes possible. Of two examples cited
in Special Publication No. 85, Mount Saint Michael
has subsequently been identified; Underwood
Rock, whose identification is less certain, may be
Broka Island.
If it becomes apparent that the nomenclature
cannot be applied as originally intended, some
of the names might be assigned to local features
which will serve as distinctive landmarks to future
explorers and travelers approaching the area either
by sea or from the air. Names in this category
have therefore been placed on file for considera-
tion after future definitive exploration.
Over a period of hundreds of years the terms
“land” and “coast” have been applied quite un-
systematically in Antarctica. The definitions de-
veloped by the Committee are set forth at this
point.
As applied in the decisions on Antarctic names,
the term “land” refers to a major physical (geo-
graphical) subdivision of the continent. It implies
a concept of area, as opposed to linear extent,
gained either through observation over a great
extent or through recognition of the areal unity
of the named area. Although full or precise de-
limitation of these entities is of course not pos-
sible from the information now available, it seems
logical to assume that regions delimited on the
basis of physical or areal unity will be used more
and more as terms of reference in Antarctica. It
should be noted that a “land” may include
“coasts” that may be differentiated and separately
named on its seaward margin, and it may include
fairly extensive features such as peninsulas or
plateaus.
As applied in the decisions on Antarctic names,
the term “coast” refers to a zone or strip on the
seaward margin of the continent, possessing a
recognized degree of unity resulting either from
physiographic homogeneity, or from marked
breaks in the configuration of the coast line, or
from the history of its exploration. A “coast”
is usually of indeterminate depth. It includes the
small islands immediately off shore and marine
features of the transition zone. Whenever a
“coast” presents recognized physical unity, it has
been delimited by physical features. In the de-
limitation of each coast due account has been
taken of the history of its exploration, and when
physical unity is lacking or not known, “coasts”
have been delimited on the basis of exploration
history alone, subject to later modification when
more physiographic data are available.
The name Mac-Robertson Coast illustrates the
procedures followed. It is so designated, instead
of as Mac-Robertson Land, because it was seen
mostly from the sea and from short flights over
the coast line without deep penetration inland.
The delimiting breaks in the shore line at Cape
Darnley and William Scoresby Bay correspond with
its exploration by Mawson, who named it. Simi-
larly Lars Christensen Coast has been delimited
to include the section discovered by the Nor-
wegians, a somewhat more restricted application
than has been suggested before but one that
coincides with significant breaks in the coast line
and does justice to the facts of exploration.
Although it is customary to express distances
in statute miles on land maps and in nautical
miles on charts used by mariners, nautical miles
are used in the texts of all decisions in this
volume for several reasons. It is understood that
in air navigation it is the practice to express
distances and speeds in nautical miles, whether
flying over either land or sea, and navigation
around Antarctica will probably be principally
by air or water for some time to come. The fact
that a nautical mile is, to all intents and pur-
poses, equal to one minute of latitude regardless
of position on the earth, makes the scaling of
distances from maps or the recording of distances
in surface exploration on the land easier in terms
of nautical miles. Furthermore, many of the geo-
graphical positions on most of the various recon-
naissance maps and miscellaneous charts used
up to this time in the nomenclature work will
be considerably revised as to positions of features
as exploration proceeds. Since a nautical mile
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
is longer than a statute mile by only 15 percent,
the difference is not of great consequence at this
stage, particularly since practically no distances
referred to in the texts of the decisions exceed
150 miles and in those cases are ordinarily only
approximations.
Expeditious treatment of new names is in large
part dependent upon the adequacy of the data
relevant to the features under consideration. Ex-
perience has shown that much of the labor in
the approval of a new name can be eliminated
if the proposal is accompanied by full informa-
tion on the name, the reasons for its choice,
and a definitive description of the feature to be
named. As a step in this direction a form has
been prepared for proposal of new Antarctic names.
Copies may be obtained from the Board on Geo-
graphic Names.
The fact that a few names now entrenched in
usage and some others bestowed by nationals of
another country cannot well be brought into con-
formity with the general framework of the prin-
ciples set forth herein need not be disturbing.
The names given by Americans since enunciation
of the policy in 1947 have been in conformity with
its letter and spirit. There has been general ac-
ceptance abroad of the principles underlying the
policy, and any points of difference are not in-
soluble ones.
The British Antarctic Place-names Committee,
which has cooperated closely with this Commit-
tee since 1948, has been of inestimable aid. The
two Committees, through free exchange of infor-
mation and views, have arrived at nearly com-
plete agreement on both policy and names. Simi-
lar cooperation with committees and individuals
in other countries has helped greatly in establish-
ing the facts of naming and in reducing the num-
ber of different names for the same features.
The following list of more than 3,000 standard-
ized Antarctic names is the bulk of those known
to have been applied or proposed cn which there
is adequate information. The list is the result
of more than a decade of effort toward an orderly
Antarctic geographic nomenclature attained by
objective application of sound principles and re-
flecting the history of Antarctic exploration. The
list will require maintenance, improvement, and
expansion. Further information is needed on the
nature and the precise location of many fea-
tures already named. New expeditions or new
research can be expected to result in new names
to be incorporated through the developed pro-
cedures for the maintenance of orderly nomen-
clature on Antarctica.
Expeditions
The following chronological listing of Antarctic
exploration has been revised and brought up to
date for this publication. First required as a
ready reference for salient features of Antarctic
history for use in the names study, the data proved
so generally useful that much scattered informa-
tion was filled in and the list published in the
first edition of this publication so that dates, com-
manders, ships, sponsors, and summaries of op-
erations could be readily found for each expedition.
Subsequently the second edition of the British
Admiralty’s Antarctic Pilot in 1948 carried a list
that was considerably longer, mainly because a
larger area involving sub-Antarctic islands was
included. The Committee’s acceptance, for this
publication, of a physical concept of the Antarctic,
namely the area within the Antarctic Convergence,
excepting Kerguelen Islands, has necessitated the
expansion of this revised list to include voyages
earlier than the second voyage of Capt. James
Cook with which the first list began.
424589 O -57 -2
It is difficult, because of the scanty and con-
fusing evidence of several almost legendary voy-
ages, to state positively which expedition marked
the beginning of Antarctic exploration. It may
be doubted whether Amerigo Vespucci was any-
where near South Georgia in 1502. The South
Shetland Islands, however, may have been sighted
by Laurens Claess, boatswain of the Dutch ship
Blijde Bootschap (commanded by Dirck Gherritz
before its capture), and his Spanish captors when
they were driven as far as 64°S. in 1603, and there
is substantial evidence that the English merchant
Antonio de la Roché discovered South Georgia
and sought shelter there while running before a
storm in 1675. Undoubtedly several merchant
ships in the days of sail sighted, perhaps for the
first time, portions of Antarctic islands while being
driven from their courses by storms. Such was
the Spanish merchantman Leon which sighted
and circumnavigated South Georgia in 1756.
Rarely, however, have permanent geographic
names resulted from such occurrences.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Events since 1941 have emphasized the advis-
ability of listing only those operations which
have, either by design or accident, resulted in
geographical or scientific discovery, or the naming
of features in Antarctica. On the other hand,
although they resulted in no geographical discov-
eries there is ample justification for the inclusion
of such historically important operations as Capt.
C. A. Larsen’s establishment of the first whaling
station on South Georgia in 1904-5 and the maiden
voyage of the Admiralen, the first floating factory,
in 1903-6.
Of the many voyages by sealers during the first
half of the nineteenth century, only those have
been included for which sufficient information was
available to complete the listing. More may be
gleaned from the records of that period, as old
newspapers, diaries, and logbooks are occasionally
brought to light. This material, however, is not
expected to add much to Antarctic nomenclature,
for the areas that were probably visited by the
sealers are now fairly well charted and the geo-
graphical names are well fixed by usage.
Tt is believed that most of the whalers credited
with actual discovery of new land have been listed,
but it is beyond the scope of this work fo list all
the modern whaling cruises in the Antarctic.
Widespread publicity accompanied the Antarctic
visit of the Soviet floating factory Slava which
reported sighting Princess Martha Coast on March
20, 1948, but such landfalls are commonplace
among.whalers. The number of ships annually
engaged since 1905 has risen until in the 1938-39
season 34 fioating factories and 281 whale-catchers
operated in Antarctic waters. Antarctic whaling
was virtually suspended and most of the factory
ships were lost during World War Ii. Only nine
factories were active during the 1943-46 season,
but their number increased until 19 were in use
during the 1950-51 season. Whaling has been
most actively carried on in three areas, the Scotia
Sea and surrounding waters, the southern Indian
Ocean westward of Enderby Land, and the waters
off the Queen Mary Coast. Errors detected in
existing charts are generally reported by the
whalers, but the ships usually operate at sea and
only incidentally sight land. Whaling captains
employed by Lars Christensen have been instructed
to investigate and chart new land when in the
course of their work an opportunity presents
itself.
From 1925 until World War II the Discovery
Committee of the British Colonial Office carried
on, under the title “Discovery Investigations,” a
comprehensive program of oceanographic and bio-
logic research in Antarctic waters focusing on the
10
study of whales and their habitat. In the course
of these operations portions of the coast of Ant-
arctica and several island groups were charted.
The work of the Discovery II and its predecessor,
the Discovery, has been outlined for each year of
operation. The William Scoresby was principally
engaged in the marking of whales, with incidental
cooperation in the oceanographic work of the Dis-
covery II; therefore, her activities have been listed
only when they have included exploration or sur-
veying. In 1949 the two ships, along with the
staff and equipment of the Discovery Committee,
were taken over by the newly created National
Institute of Oceanography, in whose research pro-
gram Antarctic work is only a part.
Because they were not exploring expeditions and
added no geographical names to the Antarctic
recent voyages such as the 1941 cruises of the
German commerce raiders “33” and “45,” which
first carried warfare into the far south, and the
counter voyages of H.M.S. Queen of Bermuda and
H.M.A.S. Australia in 1941 and H.M.S. Carnarvon
Castile in 1943 are not included. Argentina car-
ried on extensive naval maneuvers in Antarctic
waters in the summer of 1947-48, but only those
vessels which were in some degree concerned with
establishing or supplying Antarctic base camps
are listed.
As a result of the contested territorial claims in
the Palmer Peninsula sector Great Britain, Argen-
tina, and Chile have for the past several years
maintained continuously-occupied bases in this
area. While these bases have been ostensibly
set up as meteorological stations and as focal
points for geographical surveys, their maintenance
has important political implications. Since 1904
Argentina has maintained a weather station on
Laurie Island in the South Orkney Islands and
since 1906, when H.M.S. Sappho investigated con-
fiicting whaling rights, Great Britain has admin-
istered the whaling industry on South Georgia.
These operations as well as the more recent accel-
erated activity have resulted in numerous admin-
istrative cruises for the relief of personnel and/or
inspection. Unless such operations have been defi-
nitely associated with geographical discovery or
scientific investigation they are not included in
the list.
Because of incomplete information on some of
the latest activity and because no names later than
1954 have been included in the names section,
except for a minute number of name corrections
based upon preliminary reports of exploration, the
list of expeditions is terminated with the 1954-55
season.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
List of Expeditions
1675. British expedition.
LeapER: Antonio de la Roché. Sures: Unknown.
Summary: Two commercial vessels returning from
Peru via Cape Horn in April were blown eastward
from their course and sighted snow-covered land,
now believed to be South Georgia, in 55°S. The
ships were forced by a storm to anchor there two
weeks.
1738-39. French expedition.
Leaver: J. B. C. Bouvet de Lozier.
and Marie.
Summary: Discovered Bouvetgya on January 1,
1739. Ships stayed near the island 12 days but ice
and fog prevented a landing. Then cruised east
along edge of pack to 38°E. before turning north on
January 25.
Sues: Aigle
1756. Spanish expedition.
LEADER: Unknown. Sure: Leon.
SumMMary: Sighted and circumnavigated South
Georgia. Knowledge of expedition based upon
narrative by passenger Ducloz Guyot.
1772-75. British expedition.
LEADER: Capt. James Cook. Surps: Resolution and
Adventure.
Summary: Sponsored by the British Admiralty.
A circumnavigation was made south of 50°S., ex-
cept for the area south of New Zealand. Pene-
trated south of Antarctic Circle three times.
Roughly charted the north coast of South Georgia,
making the first known landing there near Posses-
sion Bay. Discovered that part of the South Sand-
wich Islands southward of the Traverse Islands
and roughly charted them. Cook’s voyage dis-
proved existence of a ‘“Terra Australis” in latitudes
north of 60°S. and thus profoundly modified con-
cepts on which subsequent exploration was based.
Farthest south reported, 71°10’S., 106°54’W., Janu-
ary 30, 1774.
1800. United States sealing expeditions.
LEADERS: Various. SuHtps: Various.
Summary: Documentary evidence of sealing oper-
ations in south Pacific and Atlantic Oceans exists,
but desire for secrecy resulted in few contemporary
announcements. Known records too scanty to re-
construct actual routes.
1808. British whaling expedition.
LEADERS: Captains James Lindsay and Thomas
Hopper. Suips: Snow Swan and Otter.
11
Summary: Lindsay in the Enderby whaler Snow
Swan sighted Bouvetgya October 6; Hopper in
Otter sighted the island October 10. Attempts to
land were unsuccessful.
1819. British expedition.
Leaver: Capt. William Smith. Sure: Williams.
SuMMaARY: Discovered South Shetland Islands on
commercial voyage from Buenos Aires to Valpa-
raiso, February 1819. Confirmed discovery in Oc-
tober by second voyage. Landed on King George
Island on October 16.
1819-20. Argentine sealing expedition.
LeaDER: Capt. Carlos Timblon. Sai: San Juan
Nepomuceno.
SuMMarRyY: First ship known to have taken fur
seals in the South Shetland Islands.
1819-20. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Unknown. Sure: Espirito Santo.
SuMMaARY: Set out from Buenos Aires. Met Capt.
Nathaniel B. Palmer in Falkland Islands and later
in South Shetland Islands.
1819-20. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. James P. Sheffield. Sur: Hersilia.
SumMmMmarRyY: Sponsored by Edmund Fanning, Wil-
liam A. Fanning and others. Hunted seals in
South Shetland Islands. Met British in the
Espirito Santo.
1819-20. ; British expedition.
LEADER: Edward Bransfield, Master, RN. Sure:
Williams.
SuMMaARY: Roughly charted South Shetland Is-
lands. Sailed through Bransfield Strait, reported
sighting land to the south.
1819-21. Russian expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Thaddeus Bellingshausen. Sues:
Vostok and Mirnyy.
SumMmMmaryY: Sponsored by Alexander I and Russian
Navy. Made a circumnavigation, mostly south of
60°S., but no claims were made to have actually
sighted the mainland. Discovered Traverse Is-
lands, Peter I Island, and Alexander I Island.
Bellingshausen made fairly accurate charts of the
South Shetland and South Sandwich Islands, and
was first to chart the south coast of South Georgia.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1820-21. United States sealing expedition.
LEeaDER: Capt. Benjamin Pendleton. Suips: Fred-
erick, Hersilia, Express, Free Gift and Hero.
Summary: Financed by Edmund Fanning, Wil-
liam A. Fanning and others. The vessels explored
South Shetland Islands for sealing grounds: Capt.
Nathanial B. Palmer in the Hero sailed south from
Deception Island, drawing close to the Antarctic
mainland on November 17,1820. In January 1821,
Palmer further explored the west coast of Palmer
Peninsula. [Eduard A. Stackpole’s The Voyage of
the Huron and the Huntress, published shortly be-
fore this volume went to press suggests a different
interpretation of the Hero’s log for November IL,
but time has not allowed reexamination of the
original evidence. ]
1820-21. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Richard Sherratt.
Trowbridge.
Summary: Lady Trowbridge wrecked on December
25, 1820 off Cape Melville, King George Island.
Sherratt sketched a rough chart of central part of
South Shetland Islands while awaiting relief of his
crew at end of season.
Suip: Lady
1820-21. United States sealing expedition.
LeapEers: Captains John Davis and Christopher
Burdick. Surips: Huron, Huntress and Cecilia.
Summary: The three vessels arrived in company
at the South Shetland Islands on December 1, 1820.
On December 8 they entered Yankee Harbor at
Greenwich Island where the Huron and Huntress
remained. Short cruises were made in the Cecilia
along the south side of Livingston Island. Sailing
northeastward on December 28, Davis circumnavi-
gated the South Shetland Islands, transporting the
crew of a wrecked British vessel, perhaps the Lady
Trowbridge, from Cape Melville to Rugged Island.
On January 30, 1821, Captain Davis in the Cecilia
began a long cruise to the west and south. Coast-
ing Livingston Island, he passed through Morton
Strait and landed on the south coast of Smith Is-
land on February 1. On February 2 he landed on
Low Island, departing on February 6 and sailing
past Hoseason Island toward high lands to the
south. At 10 a. m. on February 7, 1821, he put
men ashore at Hughes Bay, the first known in-
stance of a landing on the Antarctic continent.
Davis reported in his log, “I think this Southern
Land to be a Continent.” That afternoon, the
weather deteriorating, he departed for Yankee Har-
bor, arriving after a rough passage on February 10.
On a second cruise, this time by Captain Burdick in
the Cecilia, between February 12 and 19, a second
landing was made on Low Island and the mainland
was again sighted.
12
1820-21. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Captain Clark. Suip: Lord Melville.
Summary: Provided with a hut and supplies, the
chief officer and ten men engaged in sealing along
northeast side of King George Island, making what
may prove the first wintering in the Antarctic.
1820-21. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Charles H. Barnard. Suips: Char-
ity, Aurora, Jane Maria and Henry.
Summary: Sponsored by James Byers of New
York. Captains Barnard, Macy, Johnson and
Bruno carried on sealing operations in the South
Shetlands from Rugged Island and later from
Yankee Harbor. Between January 5 and 27, 1821,
Capt. Robert Johnson, in the Jane Maria, cruised
southwestward to a reported position of 66°S.,
70°W. where the land continued to the south, “but
appeared to be nothing but solid islands of ice and
snow”—probably the Biscoe Islands.
1820-21. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. James Weddell. Suips: Jane and
Eliza.
Summary: Carried on sealing operations in the
South Shetlands.
1820-21. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Thomas Ray. Suips: Harmony and
William and Nancy.
Summary: Captains Ray and Folger, from Nan-
tucket, carried on sealing in the South Shetland
Islands. Their headquarters on Nelson Island was
named Harmony Cove.
1820-21. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Jonathan Winship. Surps: O’Cain
and Stranger.
Summary: Captains Winship and Stranger of
Boston conducted sealing operations in the South
Shetland Islands with headquarters at Potter Cove.
Nelson Island was called O’Cain Island by the early
American sealers.
1820-21. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Alexander Clark. Suips: Clothier,
Emiline, and Catherine.
Summary: Captain Clark with Captains Jeremiah
Holmes and Joseph Henfield, of Stonington, carried
on sealing operations in the South Shetland Is-
lands from headquarters at Clothier Harbor where
the Clothier went aground and was wrecked on
December 9, 1820.
1820-21. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. William B. Orne. Suips: General
Knox, Nancy and Governor Brooks.
Summary: Captain Orne with Captains Upton and
Withem of Salem, Massachusetts, carried on seal-
ing operations in the South Shetland Islands.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1820-21. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. William Smith. Snip: Williams.
SumMmary: Carried on sealing operations in the
South Shetlands.
1820-21. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Robert Fildes. Sure: Unknown.
Summary: Carried on sealing operations in the
South Shetlands.
1820-21. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Captain McFarlane. Surip: Dragon.
SummMmarRY: Carried on sealing operations in the
South Shetland Islands, principally on the north
side of Livingston Island.
1820-22. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. George Powell. Snip: Dove.
SumMMary: Charted north side of South Shetland
Islands. Made joint sealing cruise with Capt.
Nathaniel B. Palmer, resulting in discovery and
charting of South Orkney Islands, December 1821.
The names on Powell’s map of the South Shetland
and South Orkney Islands, because of their early
publication in 1822 and wide distribution, have
been more widely accepted than those on later
maps of contemporary explorers.
1821-22. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Benjamin Pendleton. Suips: Frederick,
Alabama Packet, Express, Free Gift, James Monroe
and Hero.
Summary: Sponsored by Edmund Fanning, Wil-
liam A. Fanning and Benjamin Pendleton. Car-
ried on sealing operations in the South Shetland
Islands from Deception Island. Because of scar-
city of seals, beaches, especially on King George,
Clarence and Elephant Islands were extensively
explored by Capt. Benjamin Cutler, Free Gift,
Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, James Monroe, and
Capt. Harris Pendleton, Hero. Capt. Harris Pen-
dleton in the Hero appears to have skirted the
Palmer Peninsula on a southwesterly cruise from
Deception Island in November 1821, and then
sailed northwestward to Smith Island. Captain
Palmer in the James Monroe met Captain Powell in
the South Shetlands, and with him made a joint
cruise eastward in December 1821 on which the
South Orkney Islands were discovered and mapped.
Evidence suggests that Palmer also made a cruise
along the coast of the Palmer Peninsula.
1821-22. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. John Davis. Suips: Huron and
Cecilia.
Summary: Carried on sealing in the South Shet-
land Islands.
13
1821-22. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. James Weddell. Surp: Jane.
Summary: Visited South Orkney and South Shet-
land Islands.
1821-22. United States sealing expedition.
LEADERS: Captains Benjamin Morrell and Robert
Johnson. Suips: Wasp and Jane Maria.
Summary: Sponsored by James Byers of New York.
Sailed separately for sealing in the South Shetland
Islands. Returned in company.
1822-23. United States sealing expedition.
LeaDER: Capt. Benjamin Morrell. Suip: Wasp.
Summary: Sailed from New York to Bouvetgya to
Kerguelen Islands to 64°52’S., 118°27’W. Sailed
west to South Sandwich Islands, from whence
Weddell Sea was penetrated to reported 70°14’S.,
40°03’ W. Retired northward.
1822-24. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. James Weddell. Suips: Jane and
Beaufoy.
SuMMARY: Matthew Brisbane in the Beaufoy
roughly charted the south coast of South Orkney
Islands. Weddell penetrated Weddell Sea to re-
ported 74°15’S., 34°17’W. South Georgia visited,
thence north to Falkland Islands for wintering.
Visited and charted South Shetland Islands before
returning home via Tierra del Fuego. Weddell’s
narrative, including a map of the South Shetlands,
was published in 1825.
1824-25. British sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Edward Hughes. Suip: Sprightly.
SumMMarRY: Sealing operations in South Shetland
Islands. Hughes Bay along west coast of Palmer
Peninsula was roughly charted by James Hoseason,
first mate.
1828-31. British expedition.
LeaDER: Capt. Henry Foster, RN. Sure: Chanti-
cleer.
SumMmary: Government sponsored scientific expe-
dition. Magnetic and pendulum observations in
South Shetland Islands, especially at Deception
Island. Approached the north end of Palmer
Archipelago, producing rough chart of this area.
1829-31. United States expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Benjamin Pendleton.
aph, Annawan, and Penguin.
SUMMARY: Sponsored by Edmund Fanning, Ben-
jamin Pendleton and public subscription. Com-
bined sealing operations and scientific observa-
tions. The Annawan, Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer,
and the Penguin, Capt. Alexander S. Palmer, car-
ried on sealing at Elephant Island and westward in
the South Shetland Islands during January and
SHIPS: Ser-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
February 1830. The two vessels sailed westward
on February 22, holding a course between 62°S. and
58°S. as far as 103°W., in an unsuccessful search of
islands reported by Captains Swain, Gardiner and
Macy. James Hights, geologist from Albany and
the first American scientist to visit the Antarctic,
was aboard the Annawan. He made remarkably
accurate observations on the South Shetland
Islands, published in 1833, and from evidence on
the western cruise, surmised the existence of an
extensive land area to the south. Meanwhile, Cap-
tain Pendleton in the Seraph made an independent
voyage to the west from the South Shetland
Islands, reaching as far as 101°W. south of 60°S.
1829-31. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. James Brown. Sup: Pacific.
Summary: Sealing operations carried on at South
Georgia from December 1829 to March 1830. Vis-
ited north part of South Sandwich Islands in De-
cember 1830, making a landing on Zavodovski
Island.
1830-32. British expedition.
LEADER: Capt. John Biscoe.
Lively.
Summary: Made a circumnavigation, beginning in
Falkland Islands. Land was discovered at Cape
Ann, Enderby Land. Wintered in Hobart, Tas-
mania. Returned south and proceeded eastward
without sighting land until the peaks of Adelaide
Island were viewed from a distance. Landed in
Palmer Archipelago, probably at Anvers Island.
Sailed north to Falkland Islands.
SHIPS: Tula and
1831. Australian sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Samuel Harvey. SHIP: Venus.
Summary: Sent out from Hobart, January 9, 1831,
by Capt. J. Kelly to carry on sealing and whaling
operations in the vicinity of Macquarie Island.
Ship penetrated to 70°S., apparently in entrance
to Ross Sea. Returned to Sydney December 31,
1831.
1833-34. British expedition.
LraDER: Lt. Henry Rea, RN. Suips: Hopeful and
Rose.
Summary: Sent out by Enderby Brothers to con-
tinue Biscoe’s explorations. A proposed westward
circumnavigation was abandoned when the Hope-
ful was crushed west of South Shetland Islands.
1833-34. British expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Peter Kemp. Sure: Magnet.
Summary: Sent out by Enderby Brothers, Kemp
sailed south from Kerguelen Islands sighting land
in vicinity of Kemp Coast.
14
1837-40. French expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Dumont D’Urville.
labe and Zélée.
Summary: Sponsored by Ministry of Marine.
During the 1837-38 season D’Urville sailed from
Cape Horn across outermost part of Weddell Sea,
thence north to South Orkney Islands before sail-
ing southwest to South Shetland Islands and north
tip of Palmer Peninsula. Moved to Pacific Ocean,
March 1838. Returned from Oceania to the Ant-
arctic in January 1840, exploring south of 60°S.
between 125°E. and 145°E. Discovered Adélie
Coast and made a landing on a small islet group
close off coast. Discovered Clarie Coast before re-
tiring north.
Suips: Astro-
1839. British expedition.
LEADER: Capt. John Balleny. Suips: Eliza Scott
and Sabrina.
Summary: Sent out by Enderby Brothers, Balleny
sailed from New Zealand to Antarctic Circle at
178°E. Moved southwest to discover Balleny
Islands, thence west toward Sabrina Coast, where
“appearance of land” was noted. Retired north at
93°E.
1838-42. United States Exploring Expedition.
LEADER: Lt. Charles Wilkes, USN. Surps: Vin-
cennes, Peacock, Porpoise, Sea Gull, Flying Fish
and Relief.
Summary: Sponsored by United States Navy with
congressional appropriation.- Squadron split in
Tierra del Fuego, February 1839, one group going
south and east via South Shetland Islands to Louis
Philippe Peninsula; the other sailing southwest to
a point off Thurston Peninsula, seeing no land.
Work in Pacific Ocean followed. Ships returned
to the Antarctic, December 1839, and sailed west
along coast of Wilkes Land, charting a series of
landfalls for some 1,500 miles between about 160°E.
and 98°E. In this voyage Wilkes established the
existence of an Antarctic land mass of continental
proportions. Ships retired north February 21,
1840.
1839-43. British expedition.
LEADER: Capt. James Clark Ross, RN. SHIPS:
Erebus and Terror.
Summ™Mary: Sponsored by British Admiralty, with
cooperation of British Association and Royal So-
ciety. Sailed south from Hobart to Cape Adare,
discovering Ross Sea and Victoria Land, thence
east along Ross Ice Shelf. Returned to Cape
Adare and continued west, skirting coast to about
140°E. Wintered in Australian waters, returning
to Ross Sea in December 1841. Sailed north, then
east to Falkland Islands, arriving in April 1842.
Season of 1842-43 spent exploring Erebus and
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Terror Gulf and attempting penetration of Wed-
dell Sea.
1841-42. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. William H. Smyley. Sure: Ohio.
SummMary: Sealing in South Shetland Islands and
along west coast of Palmer Peninsula. Some of
Smyley’s explorations in Palmer Archipelago may
antedate investigation of the islands by Dallmann.
A reading of —5° F. was reported by Smyley from
the minimum thermometer, left at Deception
Island by Captain Foster in 1829, which he found
there. This was the lowest temperature reported
for Antarctica until 1898.
1845. British expedition.
LEADER: Lt. T. E.L. Moore,RN. Suip: Pagoda.
SumMMary: Sponsored by British Admiralty.
Sailed from Cape Town to Albany, Australia, for
purpose of magnetic observations in south Indian
Ocean. Observations made from about 4°E. to
about 98°E., south of 60°S. No claim of land
sighted.
1853-54. United States expedition.
LEADER: Capt. John J. Heard. Surp: Oriental.
SumMMary: Discovered Heard Island on November
25, 1853, while on voyage from Boston to Mel-
bourne.
1853-54. British expedition.
LEADER: Captain McDonald. Suip: Samarang.
SumMMarRY: Discovered McDonald Islands January
3, 1854.
1855-56. United States sealing expedition.
LEADERS: Captains Erasmus Darwin Rogers and
Franklin F. Smith. Suips: Corinthian and
Laurens, with tenders Atlas, Exile, Franklin and
Mechanic.
Summary: Sent out by Perkins and Smith, whalers
of New London, Conn.; Rogers in the Corinthian
made the first landing on Heard Island in March
1855. His report of numerous elephant seals to
his employers caused Smith in the Laurens to join
him at Heard Island. Together they engaged in
extensive sealing operations, and exploration and
mapping of the island.
1857. United States sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Henry Rogers. SHIP: Zoe.
Summary: Shore party of 25 men engaged in ele-
phant sealing operations; the first party to winter
on Heard Island.
1873-74.
LEADER:
land.
German expedition.
Capt. Eduard Dallmann. SHIP: Gron-
15
Summary: Sponsored by Albert Rosenthal and the
German Society for Polar Navigation. Dallmann
combined sealing and exploration in the South
Shetland Islands and along the west coast of
Palmer Peninsula, especially in the Palmer Archi-
pelago. Returned north via South Orkney Islands.
1874. British expedition.
LEADERS: Capt. George S. Nares, RN, and Prof. C.
Wyville Thomson. Surp: Challenger.
Summary: Sponsored by the British Admiralty in
cooperation with the Royal Society as part of a
world-wide cruise, 1872-76, for oceanographic ob-
servation. Antarctic waters were penetrated in
February 1874 when Heard and McDonald Islands
were visited. They published what long remained
the standard chart of Heard Island. From Heard
Island they sailed southward to 66°40’S., 78°22’E.
on the outer margin of Prydz Bay. The ship re-
mained south of 60°S., skirting the pack eastward
to about 99°E., off Queen Mary Coast, then re-
treated northward. The mainland was _ not
sighted.
1874. German expedition.
LEADER: Captain von Reibnitz. Suiv: Arkona.
SumMMaryY: Investigated Kerguelen and Heard
Islands as possible site for German base for the
observation of the Transit of Venus.
1882-83. German expedition.
LEADER: Dr. K. Schrader.
Marie.
SumMMaRY: This expedition, the German group of
the International Polar Year Investigations, estab-
lished a base and wintered at Moltke Harbor, South
Georgia. Took meteorological, magnetic, and
astronomical observations and charted Royal Bay
area.
SuHips: Moltke and
1892-93. Dundee (Scottish) whaling expedition.
LEADERS: Captains Alexander Fairweather, Robert
Davidson, Thomas Robertson and James Davidson.
Suips: Balaena, Diana, Active and Polar Star.
SumMMarRY: A whaling expedition sent out by R.
Kinnes of Dundee on which the ship’s doctors, Wil-
liam S. Bruce and C. W. Donald acted as natural-
ists. Ships sailed from Falkland Islands to north-
west part of Weddell Sea. Only the Active did
actual exploring, discovering the channel between
Dundee and Joinville Islands and making investi-
gations in Erebus and Terror Gulf. Bruce on the
Balaena succeeded in making incidental but valu-
able observations.
1892-93. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. C. A. Larsen. SHIP: Jason.
Summary: Sent out by Oceana Co. of Hamburg
and Christen Christensen of Sandefjord. Larsen
combined whaling, sealing and exploring in Erebus
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
and Terror Gulf, returning with fossils from Sey-
mour Island.
1893-94. Norwegian sealing expedition.
LEADERS: Captains C. A. Larsen, C. J. Evensen, and
M. Pedersen. Surps: Jason, Hertha and Castor.
Summary: Sent out by Oceana Co. and Christen
Christensen. Sealing and exploring was carried
on by Larsen in the Jason in the James Ross Island
group and along the edge of Larsen Ice Shelf.
Foyn Coast, Oscar II Coast, and Seal Nunataks
were discovered by Larsen; Cumberland Bay, South
Georgia, was visited. The Castor and Hertha
worked in the South Shetland Islands and along
west coast of Palmer Peninsula. Evensen in the
Hertha sailed south to within sight of Alexander I
Island.
1894-95. Norwegian expedition.
LreaDErS: Capt. Leonard Kristensen and H. J. Bull.
SuHip: Antarctic.
Summary: Sent out by Svend Foyn, the group car-
ried on sealing at Macquarie Island. Later sailed
from New Zealand to Balleny Islands. Sighted
Cape Adare January 16, 1895, after two months in
pack. Landed on Possession Islands. Reached
74°S. off Coulman Island; returned to make a
landing at Cape Adare.
1897-99. Belgian Antarctic Expedition.
LeapDER: Lt. Adrien de Gerlache. Surp: Belgica.
SuMMary: Sponsored by government grants and
private contributions. Broad program of scien-
tific observations from Tierra del Fuego through
Palmer Archipelago via South Shetland Islands.
Discovered and charted De Gerlache Strait, thence
moved southwest to within sight of Alexander I
Island. Belgica penetrated to 71°30’S. before being
beset in pack. Ship drifted with pack in Bellings-
hausen Sea for year before released; first scientific
expedition to winter in Antarctic realm.
1898. German expedition
LreapbErR: Prof. Karl Chun. Sup: Valdivia.
SumMmary: Sponsored by German government.
Antarctic waters penetrated in November and De-
cember incidental to more extensive oceanographic
observations. Proceeded from Cape Town to Bou-
vetgya, thence to 64°15’S., 64°20’E., about 100 miles
north of Enderby Land. Retreated to Kerguelen
Islands.
1898-1900. British Antarctic Expedition.
LrabER: C. K. Borchgrevink. Sure: Southern Cross.
Summary: Sponsored by Sir George Newnes. Dif-
ficult passage through pack from Hobart to Cape
Adare where, in February 1899, a winter camp
was set up for scientific staff. Ship returned in
January 1900 and sailed south along Victoria Land
16
with landings at Coulman Island, Wood Bay,
Franklin Island, and Cape Crozier. Ross Ice Shelf
skirted from Ross Island to Bay of Whales where
landing was made. Returned to New Zealand.
1901-3. German Antarctic Expedition.
LEADER: Prof. Erich von Drygalski. SHIP: Gauss.
SumMMarRyY: Sponsored by government grant and
support from Counts Baudissin and Posadowsky.
Sailed south from Cape Town via Kerguelen
Islands and Heard Island, penetrating Antarctic
waters in 90°E. Wilhelm II Coast discovered Feb-
ruary 21, 1902. Gauss frozen in pack 50 miles
from coast until February 8, 1903. Attempts to
sail west proving futile, ship retreated north.
Much scientific observation, but little exploration
accomplished.
1901-4. Swedish Antarctic Expedition.
LEADER: Dr. Otto Nordenskj6ld. Suip: Antarctic.
Summary: Supported by private donors. Sailed
south through South Shetland Islands to chart
De Gerlache Strait; returned northeast to Weddell
Sea via Antarctic Sound. Winter quarters set up
on Snow Hill Island, from which Nordenskjold
sledged southwest on Larsen Ice Shelf to Richt-
hofen Valley. Ship’s crew under Capt. C. A. Lar-
sen in the Antarctic wintered at South Georgia,
charting Cumberland and Royal Bays and explor-
ing north side of island. The Antarctic was beset
and crushed February 1903, trying to return to
Snow Hill Island. Following a second winter in
camp, Nordenskjold sledged northeast through
Prince Gustav Channel, meeting two men from
the ship at Cape Well-met, Vega Island. Entire
expedition rescued November 1903 by Capt. Julian
Irizar in Argentine ship Uruguay.
1901-4. British National Antarctic Expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Suir: Dis-
covery.
Summary: Supported by government grant, Royal
Geographical Society, Royal Society, and large
private donations. Sailed from New Zealand,
meeting pack near Antarctic Circle January 1,
1902. Landed at Cape Adare and other places in
Victoria Land on way to Ross Island. Skirted
Ross Ice Shelf eastward and discovered Edward
VII Peninsula. Returned to Hut Point, Ross
Island; winter hut built and ship frozen in. Con-
ducted scientific observation and geographic ex-
ploration. Several sledge journeys made; one 380
miles southward on Ross Ice Shelf, two westward
via Ferrar and Taylor Glaciers onto 9,000-foot
plateau of Victoria Land for 130 and 300 miles,
respectively. Relief brought by the Morning,
1902-3, and by the Morning and Terra Nova, 1903-4.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Discovery freed in 1904 and sailed north via Bal-
leny Islands, thence west along Oates Coast and
north to New Zealand.
1902-3. British relief expedition.
LEADER: Lt. William Colbeck, RNR. Sure: Morn-
ing.
Summary: Relief expedition for British National
Antarctic Expedition at Ross Island. Scott Island
discovered enroute from New Zealand.
1902-4. Scottish National Antarctic Expedition.
LEADER: Dr. William S. Bruce. Surp: Scotia.
SumMmMary: Sponsored by Coats family and other
private donors. Sailed southeast from Falkland
Islands to South Orkney Islands, thence east
toward South Sandwich Islands and south to
70°25’S., 17°12’W., where the pack forced a retreat
February 22, 1903 to winter quarters in South
Orkney Islands. Laurie Island charted. Sailed
southeast into Weddell Sea February 14, 1904;
Coats Land discovered March 6, but landing im-
possible. Retreated northward.
1903. Argentine relief expedition.
Leaver: Capt. Julian Irizar. Snip: Uruguay.
Summary: Dispatched by Argentine government;
sailed south to Snow Hill Island, relieving shore
party of Swedish Antarctic Expedition November
8, and rescuing ship party on Paulet Island No-
vember 10.
1903-4. British relief expedition.
LeapER: Lt. William Colbeck, RNR. Suips: Morn-
ing and Terra Nova.
Summary: Relief expedition for British National
Antarctic Expedition at Ross Island. Aided in
freeing the Discovery.
1903-5. French Antarctic Expedition.
Leaper: Dr. Jean B. Charcot. Sup: Francais.
Summary: Financed by Charcot, government
erant, and private contributions. Sailed from
Falkland Islands to South Shetland Islands, thence
south along west coast of Palmer Peninsula.
Palmer Archipelago charted; wintered there at
Port Charcot, Booth Island: Sailed south Decem-
ber 25, 1904; Biscoe Islands roughly charted and
Loubet Coast discovered. Alexander I Island
sighted before turning north to South Shetland
Islands.
1904. Argentine expedition.
Leaver: Cdr. Ismael F. Galindez. Suip: Uruguay.
Summary: Sponsored by Argentine government;
took over meteorological station at Laurie Island
in South Orkney Islands. Station continuously
operated since 1904 by annual Argentine relief
parties.
17
1904-5. Norwegian-Argentine whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. C. A. Larsen, manager. Suips: For-
tuna, Louisa, Rolf and Guardia Nacional.
Summary: Financed by Compania Argentina de
Pesca; engaged in whaling in vicinity of South
Georgia. Established first whaling station in
South Georgia at Grytviken.
1905-6. Norwegian whaling expedition.
Leaver: Alexander Lange, manager. Surp: Admi-
ralen.
Summary: Visit of first floating factory, the Ad-
miralen, to South Shetland Islands marked begin-
ning of Norwegian whaling industry in the Ant-
arctic and increased tempo of whaling activity in
southern waters.
1906. British expedition.
LEADER: Capt. M. H. Hodges, RN. Sure: Sappho.
Summary: Sent by British Admiralty to investi-
gate whaling situation at South Georgia. Charted
portions of Cumberland Bay.
1907-9. British Antarctic Expedition.
LEADER: Lt. Ernest H. Shackleton, RNR. Sup:
Nimrod.
Sum™MaryY: Sponsored by Sir William Beardmore,
the Misses Dawson-Lambton, and other private
and public donors. Sailed south from New Zealand
January 1908, entering Ross Sea and skirting Ross
Ice Shelf eastward to Bay of Whales. Failing
to reach Edward VII Peninsula, returned to Cape
Royds, Ross Island, and set up winter base. Short
gealogical trips made from base, including scaling
of Mount Erebus. South Pole journey begun Octo-
ber 29, 1908, southward on Ross Ice Shelf, ascend-
ing polar plateau via Beardmore Glacier. Lack of
rations forced retreat from 88°23’S., 97 miles from
pole, January 9, 1909. Another journey made
north to Drygalski Ice Tongue, thence northwest
on Victoria Land plateau, locating magnetic pole
at 72°25’S., 155°16’E. Ferrar and Taylor Glaciers
explored. Ship returned in January from winter-
ing in New Zealand; entire expedition embarked
March 4, 1909.
1908-10. Second French Antarctic Expedition.
LeapER: Dr. Jean B. Charcot. SuHip: Powrquoi-
Pas?.
Summary: Financed by government grant-in-aid
with support and contributions of learned societies,
government bureaus, and public and private do-
nors. Sailed south from Punta Arenas to Palmer
Archipelago via South Shetland Islands, thence
south along west coast of Palmer Peninsula to
beyond Adelaide Island. Marguerite Bay and Fal-
liéres Coast discovered and area charted. Re-
turned north to winter on Petermann Island, from
whence short journeys were made onto Palmer
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Peninsula. Left winter base for Deception Island
November 26, 1909, where ship was coaled; Decep-
tion Island and Admiralty Bay, King George Island
charted. Returned south; Charcot Island discov-
ered and Alexander I Island sighted. Continued
west across Bellingshausen Sea south of Antarctic
Circle to beyond 120°W. before turning northward.
1910. British expedition.
LEADER: Unknown. Sup: Wakefield.
Summary: Searched for survivors of Australian
liner Waratah. Lt. H. W. T. R. Seymour, RN, and
four naval ratings lent by British Admiralty, car-
ried out hydrographic observations in visits to
Prince Edward, Crozet, Kerguelen, Heard and Mc-
Donald Islands.
1910. British-Norwegian sealing expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Anton Evensen. Suip: Mangoro.
Summary: A landing was made on Heard Island
March 25, 1910.
1910-12. Norwegian expedition.
LEADER: Roald Amundsen. SHIP: Fram.
Summary: Sponsored by Don Pedro Christopher-
sen and other private donors; Fram lent by Nor-
wegian government. Sailed from Norway via
Madeira to Bay of Whales in Ross Ice Shelf, arriv-
ing January 14, 1911. Before winter set in, quar-
ters were built and depots laid for next season’s
South Pole journey. Led by Amundsen, polar
party left base October 19, 1911, sledging south
on Ross Ice Shelf, ascending polar plateau via
Axel Heiberg Glacier, and reaching vicinity of
South Pole on December 14, 1911. December 15
occupied taking numerous astronomical observa-
tions indicating party’s position as 89°55’S. Next
day party continued south and on December 16
and 17 took 24 hourly observations with satisfac-
tion that position attained was as near South Pole
as could be determined by instruments available.
Return journey begun December 17, reaching Bay
of Whales January 25, 1912. Meanwhile, Lt. K.
Prestrud left base on November 7, 1911, sledged
south to 80°S., thence east to about 158°W., thence
north to edge of Ross Ice Shelf from where he
traveled northeastward to Scott Nunataks. He
returned to base December 15, 1911. Bay of
Whales later charted. Following oceanographic
work in south Atlantic Ocean during winter of
1911, the Fram returned to Bay of Whales and
expedition left January 29, 1912.
1910-13. British Antarctic Expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Sure: Terra
Nova.
SumMMary: Financed by private contributions with
support of Royal Geographical Society. Sailed
from New Zealand, reaching Ross Island January 3,
18
1911, where main base was set up on Cape Evans.
After cruise to Bay of Whales and back, northern
party was left on Cape Adare for winter; Terra
Nova proceeded to New Zealand, discovering Oates
Coast enroute. Remainder of season at main base
occupied laying depots for polar journey. After
preliminary journeys, which opened the 1911-12
season, polar party headed south via Ross Ice Shelf
and Beardmore Glacier, with two supporting
parties. Reached South Pole January 17, 1912,
but Scott and four companions succumbed on re-
turn journey. Northern party charted Robertson
Bay area before being removed by the Terra Nova,
January 1912, to Terra Nova Bay where they were
marooned during winter of 1912. From there the
party sledged south to Ross Island.. Meanwhile,
geological party under Griffith Taylor explored
McMurdo Sound region. Part of expedition re-
turned home in 1912 and, after finding bodies of
the polar party, remainder embarked on the
Terra Nova January 1918.
1911-12. Japanese expedition.
LEADER: Lt. Choku Shirase. Snip: Kainan Maru.
SuMMarRyY: Sponsored by Count Okuma. From
Japan to Ross Sea via New Zealand, sighting Ad-
miralty Range March 6, 1911. On March 12,
forced by ice to retreat northward from 74°16’S.,
172°07’E., southeast of Coulman Island. Win-
tered in Sydney, from which they departed Novem-
ber 19, 1911, reaching Cape Adare January 3, 1912.
Sailed southeastward and landed at Kainan Bay
January 16. Then landed at Bay of Whales, from
where 160-mile journey was made southeast on
Ross Ice Shelf to 80°05’S., 156°37’W. Meanwhile,
ship sailed east to 76°06’S., 151°20’W., off Edward
VII Peninsula. From 76°56’S., 155°55’W., a party
landed for sledge trip to edge of Alexandra Moun-
tains. Okuma Bay visited on return to Bay of
Whales, from where expedition embarked Febru-
ary 4.
1911-12. German Antarctic Expedition.
Leaver: Dr. Wilhelm Filchner. Suip: Deutschland.
Summary: Sponsored by government grant and
private contributions. From Germany to South
Georgia via Buenos Aires, with oceanographic
work enroute. Scientific work in South Georgia.
Made survey among South Sandwich Islands. Left
South Georgia for Weddell Sea December 11, 1911.
Luitpold Coast discovered January 30, 1912. Ship
stopped by Filchner Ice Shelf in 77°45’S. Attempts
to erect base on ice failed when ice broke up dur-
ing process. Depots laid on land ice February 24,
and short reconnaissance journey made. Deutsch-
land frozen in March 6, and began to drift with
the ice on March 15. Ship drifted for nine months
and 600 miles until freed November 26, 1912, in
63°37’S., 36°34’W. Returned to South Georgia.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1911-12. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Ole JOrgensen. Suip: Thulla.
Summary: Sought satisfactory anchorages for fac-
tory ships in South Shetland and South Orkney
Islands. Experimental whaling operation was car-
ried on at South Sandwich Islands.
1911-14. Australasian Antarctic Expedition.
LEADER: Sir Douglas Mawson. Sup: Aurora.
SumMMaRY: Sponsored by Australian State and
Commonwealth governments, British government,
scientific societies and private contributors. In-
termediate base set up on Macquarie Island to
operate radio station and conduct scientific inves-
tigation. Sailed south from Macquarie Island, De-
cember 25, 1911, to George V Coast, establishing
Main Base on Commonwealth Bay January 8, 1912.
The Aurora sailed westward, skirting coast of
Wilkes Land as near as ice and storms would
permit. West Base established on Shackleton Ice
Shelf, about 17 miles north of Queen Mary Coast.
The Aurora left February 20, 1912, to conduct sub-
Antarctic oceanographic investigations. From
Main Base five major surveys were conducted:
(1) Mawson led Far Eastern Party along edge of
continental plateau for 316 miles to 68°54’S.,
151°33’E., (2) Southern Party sledged 301 miles
to 70°36’S., 148°10’E., (3) Eastern Coastal Party
sledged along coast, mostly on sea ice, across
Mertz and Ninnis Glacier Tongues to 68°18’S.,
150°12’E., midway between Cape Freshfield and
Horn Bluff, (4) Near Eastern Party made two
journeys, exploring area between base and Mertz
Glacier, and (5) Western Sledging Party sledged
across Adélie Coast to 138°E., back of Cape Robert.
From West Base the Eastern Party made a major
trek across Shackleton Ice Shelf to Denman Gla-
cier, while the Western Coastal Party journeyed
on land to Gaussberg. West Base evacuated Feb-
ruary 23, 1913, but delayed return of Far Eastern
Party due to fatalities caused small search party
to be left at Main Base during winter of 1913.
This group relieved by the Awrora in December
1913, following which the coast of Wilkes Land
was again skirted to Wilhelm II Coast before re-
tiring northward.
1912-13. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Petter Sgrlle. Snip: Palmer.
SumMmMmary: Whaling operations in South Orkney
Islands. Made running surveys of Coronation,
Signy, Powell, and Fredriksen Islands, plotting in
detail the rocks and islets which fringe their
coasts. Numerous soundings taken; sketch-plans
made of important anchorages, notably Ellefsen,
Paal, and Falkland Harbors, and Borge Bay.
19
1912-13. United States whaling expedition.
LEADERS: Capt. Benjamin D. Cleveland and Robert
Cushman Murphy. Suir: Daisy.
Summary: A private whaling and sealing expedi-
tion on which Murphy served as naturalist. Sailed
east from West Indies, July 31, 1912, to Cape Verde
Islands, thence south to South Georgia, arriving
there November 24. Sealing carried on for four
months at South Georgia. Murphy engaged in
natural history studies and made accurate sketch-
chart of Bay of Isles. Left South Georgia March
16, 1913.
1913-14. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Hans Borge. Surp: Polynesia.
Summary: In the course of whaling operations,
Borge undertook additional charting of Borge Bay
in South Orkney Islands, supplementing Sgrlle’s
chart of previous year.
1914-16. British expedition.
LeEaDER: Sir Ernest Shackleton.
and Aurora.
SuMMaARY: Sponsored by Sir James Caird and
other private donors, with aid from government
and Royal Geographical Society. The Endurance
sailed for Weddell Sea from South Georgia Decem-
ber 5, 1914. Caird Coast discovered January 12,
1915. Ship beset five days later in 76°34’S.,
31°30’W., from where she drifted with the ice 573
miles northwestward until crushed October 27,
1915, in 69°05’S., 51°30’W. Crew lived on the ice,
drifting northward until they took to boats on
April 9, 1916, within sight of Elephant Island,
which was reached April 15. From there Shackle-
ton, with five others, sailed in open whale boat 800
miles to South Georgia where he chartered the
whaler Southern Sky in an unsuccessful attempt
to rescue his men. Attempts in Uruguayan
trawler Instituto de Pesca and British schooner
Emma also failed. Crew finally rescued on August
30, 1916 by the Yelcho, loaned by Chile.
The Aurora, under Capt. A. Mackintosh, sailed
from Hobart carrying the Ross Sea party of the
expedition and reached Cape Evans, Ross Island,
where base was set up January 16, 1915. Ship
was beset and drifted out to sea in the pack before
completely unloading. She drifted northward out
of Ross Sea and northeastward between Oates
Coast and Balleny Islands before being freed in
damaged condition in March 1915; ship continued
north to New Zealand. Meanwhile, the winter
party at Ross Island succeeded in laying depots
between the base and Beardmore Glacier in prepa-
ration for Shackleton’s proposed transcontinental
journey. They were rescued by the Aurora under
Capt. J. K. Davis in January 1916.
SuHips: Endurance
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1920. British expedition.
LEADER: H.W. W. Hope. Suip: Dartmouth.
SumMmMary: Sent out by British Admiralty; visited
King Edward Cove, South Georgia. Made sketch
of Cumberland Bay area. Sighted Shag Rocks.
1921-22. British expedition.
LEADER: J. L. Cope. SuHips: Various whaling ves-
sels.
Summary: Financed by private enterprise and
aided by Norwegian whalers who furnished pas-
sage. Party of four assembled at Deception Island.
Ice conditions preventing a landing at Hope Bay,
the whalers landed the party, January 12, 1921,
near Andvord Bay on west coast of Palmer Penin-
sula. Two of party returned home, but T. W. Bag-
shawe and M. C. Lester spent winter there. They
unsuccessfully sought route across Palmer Penin-
sula. Made meteorological, tidal, and natural his-
tory observations. Bagshawe and Lester picked
up by Capt. O. Anderson in the Svend Foyn I,
January 138, 1922.
1921-22. British expedition.
Leaper: Sir Ernest Shackleton. Surp: Quest.
Summary: Financed by John Q. Rowett. Arrived
at South Georgia January 4, 1922, via Lisbon and
Rio de Janeiro. Shackleton died at South Georgia
and Frank Wild assumed command. The Quest
left January 17, 1922, sailing east to Zavodovski
Island in South Sandwich Islands, thence east and
southeastward until stopped by pack in 69°17’S.,
17°09’E., February 12, 1922. Pack then skirted
west-northwestward to Elephant Island where a
running survey was conducted before returning to
South Georgia, April 6. Scientific investigations
made throughout cruise.
1923-24. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. C. A. Larsen. Snips: Sir James
Clark Ross, accompanied by Star I and four other
whale catchers.
SumMary: First whaling expedition to Ross Sea.
Finding the Bay of Whales unsuitable, the factory
ship remained at Discovery Inlet, from December
31, 1923 to March 8, 1924, while the Star I skirted
Ross Ice Shelf and coast of Victoria Land from
McMurdo Sound to Robertson Bay.
1923-24. British whaling expedition.
LEADERS: Soren Beckman and Gustav Mathisen.
Surps: Whale catchers attached to the Sevilla and
Roald Amundsen.
Summary: Sent out by Charles Salveson and Co. of
Leith, Scotland. Beckmann, operating with the
factory ship Sevilla, and Mathisen, with the factory
Roald Amundsen, independently pushed south
along west coast of Palmer Peninsula to Falliéres
Coast in attempt to find safe harbor for their float-
20
ing factories. Both thought they observed a trans-
verse strait connecting with Weddell Sea.
1924-25. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. C. A. Larsen. Suips: Sir James
Clark Ross and whale catchers.
Summary: Whaling carried on in Ross Sea, where
Captain Larsen died.
1925. Discovery Investigations (British).
Leaver: N. A. Mackintosh.
Summary: The Discovery Committee established
a marine station with well-equipped biological
laboratory at Grytviken, South Georgia in Janu-
ary 1925. Laboratory work conducted each whal-
ing season until 1931; staff periodically relieved.
Survey of South Georgia harbors and anchorages
carried out from this laboratory in the period
1926-30 under direction of Lt. Cdr. J. M. Chaplin,
RN.
1925-26. Discovery Investigation (British).
LrapER: Dr. Stanley Kemp. Sup: Discovery.
Summary: Left Cape Town, January 17, 1926, for
South Georgia where two months were spent in
biological and hydrographical surveying of whal-
ing grounds. Ship proceeded to Falkland Islands
April 17, later returning to Cape Town. Scientific
work conducted throughout cruise.
1925-26. German expedition.
LEapDER: Dr. Alfred Merz. Suip: Meteor.
SumMmMmaryY: Sponsored by Emergency Fund for Ger-
man Science, Dr. F. Schmidt-Ott, Chairman. As
part of oceanographic survey of South Atlantic
Ocean, the Meteor, under Capt. F. Spiess who suc-
ceeded to command on death of Dr. Merz, August
16, 1925, carried on investigations in vicinity of
South Sandwich Islands before proceeding east-
ward to Bouvetgya. Ship then penetrated south-
ward to 63°50’S., 5°20’E. before retiring northeast-
ward.
1926-27. Discovery Investigations (British).
LEADER: Dr. Stanley Kemp. Suips: Discovery and
William Scoresby.
Summary: The Discovery left Cape Town October
1926, going southward into the pack; returned to
Bouvetgya before heading westward to South
Georgia, which was reached December 5, 1926.
After investigating whaling grounds in the vicinity,
the Discovery left in February for South Orkney
Islands, South Shetland Islands, and Palmer
Archipelago; made running survey, of part of
Palmer Archipelago. Returning to South Shet-
land Islands, a series of hydrological stations
was run northward to Cape Horn and eastward
to Falkland Islands. Meanwhile, the William
Scoresby left Cape Town, October 21, 1926, for
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
South Georgia where it worked in conjunction with
the Discovery. In February it sailed to Falkland
Islands where investigations were made between
the islands and South America. The ship returned
to Cape Town via South Georgia.
1927. Norwegian expedition.
LEADER: Eyvind Tofte. Sure: Odd I.
Summary: Financed by Lars Christensen. Left
South Georgia January 6, 1927, and sailed west
through Bransfield Strait to Deception Island.
Enroute sighted largest iceberg ever recorded, an
estimated 100 miles long, in 63°30’S., 52°00’W.
Left Deception Island January 12, sailing south-
westward inside of the Palmer Archipelago, thence
westward in clear sea to Peter I Island, which was
circumnavigated on January 17. Attempts to land
unsuccessful, but running survey made. The
Odd I then sailed south encountering the pack,
which it skirted east and northeastward to Anvers
Island before returning to South Georgia via De-
ception Island.
1927-28. Norwegian expedition.
LrEaDER: Capt. Harald Horntvedt. Suir: Norvegia.
Summary: The Norvegia, sent out by Lars Chris-
tensen, left Cape Town on November 19, 1927,
and on November 30 reached Bouvetgya. Landing
made next day. After charting the island, the
ship steamed southward on January 1, 1928 and
vainly sought Pagoda Rock. Damaged condition
of ship caused withdrawal January 7 from pack
ice margin at 60°01’S., 2°24’E. A line of oceano-
graphic stations was run to South Georgia, arriv-
ing there January 22. The Norvegia was laid up
for repairs, but the staff continued work with aid
of whalers operating in the vicinity.
1927-28. Norwegian expedition.
LEADERS: Dr. Ola Olstad and Prof. Olaf Holtedahl.
Suips: Various whaling ships.
Summary: Transported by various whaling ships,
Olstad and Holtedahl conducted individual re-
search in biology and geology, respectively, in
South Georgia, South Shetland Islands, and Pal-
mer Archipelago.
1928-29. German expedition.
LreapDER: Ludwig Kohl-Larsen.
whaling ships.
Summary: Party of three, transported by various
whaling ships, charted extensive coastal areas and
much of the inland glacier system of South Georgia.
Suips: Various
1928-29. French Expedition.
LEapER: E. Aubert de la Rule. Suip: Austral.
Summary: Geological reconnaissance of Kergue-
len Island. Visited Heard Island in whale catcher
Kildalkey for geological observations in January
1929.
21
1928-29. British and United States expedition.
LEADER: Sir Hubert Wilkins. Suip: Hektoria.
Summary: Sponsored by American Geographical
Society, William Randolph Hearst, Detroit Aviation
Society, and private, public, and commercial do-
nors. Two airplanes, supplies, and staff trans-
ported to Deception Island by the floating factory
Hektoria. Two reconnaissance flights made in
vicinity on November 26. At 8:30 a.m., December
20, 1928, Wilkins and pilot Carl B. EHielson took
off from Deception Island, flew south toward
Trinity Island, crossed Palmer Peninsula and flew
south along its east coast to Stefansson Strait and
return, essentially over same route. This pioneer
Antarctic flight lasted ten hours. On January 10,
1929, flight of 250 miles over northern sector of
previous route repeated to confirm earlier obser-
vations. Operations then postponed until next
season.
1928-29. Norwegian expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Nils Larsen. Suip: Norvegia.
Summary: Financed by Lars Christensen. The
Norvegia arrived at Bouvetgya from South Georgia
December 16, 1928. Made unsuccessful search for
Thompson Island and the Chimnies for eight days,
in clear weather. Failed to establish weather sta-
tion on Bouvetgya. The Norvegia then proceeded
west to Peter I Island, making a landing on Feb-
ruary 1, 1929. Second landing made next day,
and house erected. Following six days of obser-
vation, the ship sailed west across Amundsen Sea,
skirting pack ice to 140°W. From there, on Feb-
ruary 20, she sailed north and thence eastward
along the 60° parallel to South Georgia, which
was reached on March 30. Dougherty Island
could not be found in its reported position.
1928-30. Byrd Antarctic Expedition.
LrapEeR: Rear Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.).
Suips: City of New York and Eleanor Bolling.
SumMmMary: Sponsored by John D. Rockefeller, Jr.,
Edsel Ford, many other private donors, as well
as scientific organizations. Expedition left Dune-
din December 2, 1928, with the Eleanor Bolling
towing the City of New York to edge of the pack,
where the latter was taken in tow by the C. A. Lar-
sen to open water in Ross Sea, being released De-
cember 23. Bay of Whales reached December 29,
and base site selected January 1, 1929. After un-
loading, two attempts made by City of New York
to penetrate to Edward VII Peninsula, before leav-
ing for New Zealand February 22. Meanwhile,
the Eleanor Bolling made two trips with supplies;
a third prevented by ice conditions. Several
flights made from base in the three planes. The
first on January 27 to Edward VII Peninsula, dis-
covering Rockefeller Mountains. Two more flights
to this area made on February 18. On March 7
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
a plane was wrecked in the mountains, marooning
party in bad weather until rescued on March 19.
During March and October depot laying for geo-
logical trip to Queen Maud Range accomplished.
This party, which was out from November 4, 1929
to January 19, 1930, served as supporting party
for the South Pole flight, provided weather reports,
and mapped 175 miles of the front of Queen Maud
Range. Flight made to the base of these moun-
tains November 18, 1929 to lay gasoline depot.
Byrd made South Pole flight on November 29 and
30, 1929, by way of Liv Glacier pass. On December
5, a flight eastward resulted in discovery of Edsel
Ford Ranges and Marie Byrd Land. The City of
New York reached Bay of Whales on February 18,
1930 after a stormy passage from New Zealand;
entire expedition departed next day.
1929-30. British and United States expedition.
LEADER: Sir Hubert Wilkins. Suips: Whaling ships
and the William Scoresby.
Summary: Sponsored by American Geographical
Society, William Randolph Hearst, British Colonial
Office, Detroit Aviation Society, and other private,
public and commercial donors. Staff and supplies
transported from Montevideo to Deception Island
by whalers. Conditions being unsatisfactory at
Deception Island, the plane was put aboard the
William Scoresby and taken south along west
coast of Palmer Peninsula December 12, 1929. The
ship moved through Neumayer Channel and Bis-
marck Strait, then southwest along Adelaide
Island. Finding no ice suitable for taking off or
landing, the ship returned to Neumayer Channel
December 18. Next day Wilkins and pilot S. A.
Cheesman took off from the water and flew south
along the coast to Leroux Bay, where they crossed
Palmer Peninsula to Richthofen Valley on the east
coast before returning. The William Scoresby then
cruised southwestward along the pack to about
67°45/S., 75°30'W. From there two flights made
south on December 28 and 29, 1929. The first
ended in fog just short of Charcot Island, but
second encircled it in clear weather. The ship
then worked back to Deception Island for fuel.
The plane took off from Port Lockroy and flew over
De Gerlache Strait to Deception Island. Refueled,
the ship, with the plane, pushed southwestward
to edge of pack, in the neighborhood of 70°S.,
100°W. Short flight from there January 30, 1930,
stopped by snow storm; longer flight made on
February 1 to 73°S., 101°W. without seeing land.
Expedition then returned to Deception Island.
1929-30. Norwegian expedition.
LreapER: Capt. Hjalmar Riiser-Larsen. Suir: Nor-
vegia.
22
Summary: Financed by Lars Christensen. The
Norvegia, after its party erected a hut on Bouve-
téya, met the Thorshammer from which were
transferred the captain, pilot, and two planes, and
work began on November 8, 1929. A second hut
was erected and Bouvetgya photographed from the
air. The Norvegia then followed edge of pack east-
ward to north of Enderby Land in about 60°S.,
55°E., from where on December 1 she began to
work south through the pack. On December 7,
plane flight from the ship made in about 64°21’S.,
53°14’E. On another flight, from about 65°10’S.,
49°30’E. on December 22, the plane landed south-
west of Cape Ann. The ship then retreated north
and west, taking coal from the Thorshammer on
January 4, 1930. Headed again for Enderby Land,
the Norvegia met the Discovery with Sir Douglas
Mawson on January 14. Next day she was stopped
by ice within sight of land, but flight made over
Ice Bay and westward, exploring coastal area be-
tween 40° and 50°E. Ship moved west to 44°E.
from where another flight was made southward.
After riding out gale, the Norvegia sailed westward
to Coats Land making series of oceanographic ob-
servations. On February 1, Gunnerus Bank dis-
covered. The Weddell Sea was entered on Febru-
ary 16. Seal Bay discovered on the 18th, and flight
made over Cape Norvegia and Princess Martha
Coast. Another flight made on February 20. The
ship rode out a gale for three days, then moved
north to about 69°28’S. before being forced east-
ward by the ice. She met the Thorshammer in
66°50’S., 12°00’E., took on coal, transferred planes,
and headed northward for Cape Town March 2,
1930.
1929-31. British-Australian-New Zealand Antarc-
tic Research Expedition.
LEADER: Sir Douglas Mawson. Sup: Discovery.
Summary: Sponsored by Australian, New Zealand,
and British governments, Australian National Re-
search Council, MacPherson Robertson, and other
private, public, and commercial donors. The Dis-
covery left Cape Town October 19, 1929, sailing
southeastward with stops for scientific investiga-
tion at Possession, Kerguelen, and Heard Islands.
Banzare Bank discovered south of Heard Island.
On December 16, ice halted southward progress in
about 65°41’S., 79°30’E., and ship moved north and
west for a more favorable southing. The Discovery
pushed westward through storm and ice. Signs of
land appeared on December 26 in 66°57’S., 71°57’E.,
and on the 31st a flight on which land was sighted
was made from the ship in 66°10’S., 65°10’E. Land
to the south sighted from ship on January 4, 1930,
and confirmed by flight next day from 66°30’S.,
61°07’E. This was named Mac-Robertson Coast.
Storms prevailed until January 12 when Kemp
Coast was sighted. Landing made on Proclama-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
tion Island January 13. Ship then sailed west
beyond Cape Ann, meeting the Norvegia on Janu-
ary 14. Driven westward by a storm to 43°W., the
Discovery returned eastward where, on January 24
to 26, several short flights were made in vicinity of
Proclamation Island. Lack of coal forced retreat
on January 26 to Kerguelen Islands and Australia.
The second season began when ship left Hobart,
November 22, 1930. Mill Bank discovered enroute,
observations made on Macquarie Island, and Hjort
Rise discovered to the south. The Discovery
pushed west to Adélie Coast, and landing made at
Cape Denison January 7, 1931. Ship sailed west-
ward along the pack fringing Wilkes Land, but bad
weather resulted in few observations of land.
Most notable were Cape Goodenough and Banzare
Coast, seen from the air on January 15 and 16.
Bowman Island was seen on January 28, and Leo-
pold and Astrid Coast from the air on February 9.
Westward from there Norwegian whalers and the
Discovery were operating simultaneously, and
many features were seen by both. On February
11 Cape Darnley was sighted, and MacKenzie Bay
entered. A flight enabled drafting of sketch map.
As ship skirted Mac-Robertson Coast, landings
made at Murray and Scullin Monoliths on Febru-
ary 13, and several flights added features to the
map. After being driven north by storm, landing
made at Cape Bruce February 18, and next day,
due to coal shortage, expedition was terminated.
1929-31. Discovery Investigations (British).
LEADER: Dr. Stanley Kemp. Sup: Discovery II.
Summary: The Discovery II left England Decem-
ber 14, 1929, to begin her first commission in
Scotia Sea and adjacent seas. Oceanographic
work begun in vicinity of South Georgia. A line
of observations was run along submarine ridge
connecting South Sandwich and Falkland Islands.
The South Sandwich Islands were charted from
February 26 to March 18, 1930. The ship arrived
at Cape Town May 28, 1930, and during southern
winter carried on oceanographic investigations in
South African waters. In October 1930 the Dis-
covery II left Cape Town for South Georgia, via
Bouvetgya, making unsuccessful search for
Thompson Island enroute. Heavy pack prevented
survey of South Orkney Islands in December.
While working in Bransfield Strait the same
month, conditions were favorable for charting
South Shetland Islands. During January and
February 1931, cruise was made southwestward
along Palmer Peninsula until stopped by pack ice
around Adelaide Island. The ship turned west
along edge of pack, slighting Alexander I Island,
but not Charcot Island. Journey westward contin-
ued to 101°00’W., where ship was forced southward
through the pack until stopped by ice 20 feet thick
in 69°49’S. No land seen; soundings showed 2,000
23
fathoms. Returning from this point over much
the same route, Peter I Island was sighted. Ade-
laide Island was still bordered by pack. After
running lines northwestward to edge of continen-
tal shelf, the cruise continued into Matha Strait,
Marin Darbel Bay, and out of Pendleton Strait.
Bismarck Strait was entered and ship passed
northward inside of Palmer Archipelago. In
February additional surveying carried out in South
Shetland Islands. Except for determining position
of west end of Coronation Island, pack ice again
prevented work in South Orkney Islands. The
first commission was thus concluded.
1930-31. Norwegian expedition.
LEADERS: Maj. Gunnar Isachsen and Capt. Hjalmar
Riiser-Larsen. Suip: Norvegia.
SumMMary: Financed by Lars Christensen. The
Norvegia left Cape Town October 4, 1930, moving
south beyond Bouvetgya before beginning circum-
navigation of Antarctica, between 55° and 65°S.
She coaled from whalers and at Deception Island
enroute. A series of oceanographic observations
were completed, and unsuccessful searches made
for Truls, Dougherty, and Nimrod Islands. Ice pre-
vented close approach to Peter I Island. On Janu-
ary 29, 1931 the circumnavigation of 11,500 miles
was completed, in 102 days, in about 69°44’S.,
1°34’E. While moving toward rendezvous with the
Thorshavn, Maud Bank was discovered on Janu-
ary 30. On February 9, in about 68°00’S., 33°53’E.,
the Thorshavn was met, planes were transferred
to the Norvegia, and Riiser-Larsen took command.
Ship moved westward against the pack until a
flight was possible on February 16 and 17, 1931.
This permitted mapping Princess Ragnhild Coast,
discovered early in 1931 by Capt. H. Halvorsen in
the Sevilla. Other flights farther eastward made
on February 21 and 23. On February 25 the
planes were transferred to the Thorshammer and
Capt. Nils Larsen took the Norvegia north to Nor-
way, making first an unsuccessful search for Pa-
goda Rock.
1930-31. Norwegian whaling expeditions.
LEADERS: Various. SHips: Various whaling ships.
Summary: During the 1930-31 season several
firms conducted commercial whaling off Lars
Christensen and Mac-Robertson Coasts. On Janu-
ary 12, 1931, land was seen by Capt. Arnold Brun-
voll from the whale catcher Seksern, between
64°00’E. and 66°34’E. On January 19 and succeed-
ing days, Capt. Reider Bjerkg, in the whale catcher
Bouvet II, sailed eastward from about 64°E., in
sight of land. He was followed by one day by
Capt. Carl Sjovold, in the Bouvet III, who also
sighted land on January 24, from 68°S., 74°E. He
was in turn followed by Capt. Rolf Walter, in the
Thorgaut.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1930-31. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. O. Borchgrevink. Sure: Antarctic.
Summary: Borchgrevink, in the course of whaling
operations, mapped along Kemp Coast and En-
derby Land from 59°00’E. to 51°30’E. Aker Peaks
discovered. Coast of Queen Maud Land mapped
from 44°H. to 41°E.
1930-31. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Capt. H. Halvorsen. Suip: Sevilla.
SumMMary: Financed by Lars Christensen. While
carrying on whaling operations off coast of Ant-
arctica, from February 9 to March 7, 1931, Prin-
cess Ragnhild Coast was discovered. From March
8 to April 7, Halvorsen charted along Princess
Ragnhild, Princess Astrid, and Princess Martha
Coasts between 24°E. and 0°. His entire range of
operations extended from 42°E. to 9°W.
1931. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Lars Christensen. Suip: Thorshavn.
Summary: The oil tanker Thorshavn left Cape
Town January 6, 1931, with Lars Christensen
aboard to inspect operations of his whaling fleet
as the tanker supplied fuel oil to the various float-
ing factories and collected whale oil from them.
Capt. H. Riiser-Larsen, also aboard, was trans-
ferred with two seaplanes to the ship Norvegia,
and Maj. Gunnar Isachsen and J. K. Eggvin, who
had just completed circum-Antarctic cruise in the
Norvegia, joined the Thorshavn, February 9, in
68°00’S., 33°55’E. Open water permitted far south-
ern penetration between 70°E. and 75°E. Frequent
sounding resulted in discovery of Fram Bank.
Christensen directed Capt. Klarius Mikkelsen, in
the whale catcher Torlyn, to attempt penetration
into the pack ice. He worked far into MacKenzie
Bay, reaching 68°50’S., 70°28’E., on February 13.
On the 14th, the Torlyn worked north around
Bjerkg Peninsula and westward along Mac-Robert-
son Coast. Mikkelsen sighted the same physical
features Mawson saw a day earlier. The
Thorshavn returned to Cape Town later in
February.
1931-33. Discovery Investigations (British).
LEADER: D. Dilwyn John. Sup: Discovery II.
Summary: The Discovery II arrived at Port Stan-
ley from England on November 4, 1931. Beginning
at western entrance to the Strait of Magellan six
north-south lines of oceanographic stations were
run from edge of pack ice on the south to beyond
the line of Antarctic Convergence on the north.
The easternmost line of stations lay along 20°EH.
Additional lines were run between Falkland Is-
lands and South Georgia, and others radiating
from the latter. Following repairs the ship left
South Africa, April 8, 1932, on its first circum-
polar cruise. Echo soundings made each half
24
hour and oceanographic stations carried out
nightly. The course was laid in great zigzags from
edge of pack ice to north of 45°S. From Cape
Town the course was laid southeastward to a point
off Enderby Land, then northeast to Fremantle.
From Fremantle the ship sailed to a point off
Banzare Coast and back to Melbourne, thence
south to a position north of Balleny Islands, then
north to New Zealand. From New Zealand the
course was laid southeastward to 62°S., 159°W.,
north of Ross Sea, then northeast into south Pa-
cific Ocean to 41°S., 126°W., and southeastward
to 63°57’S., 101°16’W., west of Peter I Island.
From here a diminishing fuel supply dictated fairly
direct course to the Strait of Magellan. Port Stan-
ley reached October 9, 1932, where cruise was
interrupted until following March. From October
until Christmas, 1932, oceanographic work carried
on in Bransfield Strait and Scotia Sea. From
January 2 to 30, 1933, the South Orkney Islands
were charted and geological and biological speci-
mens collected. Further oceanographic work in
Scotia Sea, Bransfield Strait, and Drake Passage
followed. Final leg of circumpolar cruise com-
pleted in March by great V-shaped course from
South Georgia south to 69°22’S., 9°37’E., then
north to a point west of Cape Town.
1932-33. Norwegian whaling expedition.
LEADER: Lars Christensen. Suip: Thorshavn.
Summary: The tanker Thorshavn, with Capt. H.
Riiser-Larsen’s sledging party aboard (see below),
left Cape Town January 25, 1933 for Enderby
Land to service floating factories. Series of
meteorological observations made. Ship returned
via Bouvetgya.
1932-33. Norwegian expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Hjalmar_ Riiser-Larsen.
Various whaling ships.
Summary: Party of three with dogs and supplies
accompanied Lars Christensen on the Thorshavn.
Enderby Land sighted February 8, 1933. Two at-
tempts to land on the ice failed and party trans-
ferred first to the Thorshammer, then the Torlyn
on March 5, off Princess Ragnhild Coast, where
party finally landed on the ice for a sledge journey
westward along the coast. By March 8, however,
the ice broke up. Sledge party rescued by the
whaler Globe on March 11
SHIPS:
1933-34. Norwegian expedition.
LEADER: Lars Christensen. Snip: Thorshavn.
Summary: The Thorshavn left Cape Town De-
cember 20, 1933; nearly circumnavigated Antarc-
tica. Meteorological and hydrographical observa-
tions made throughout cruise. Mac-Robertson
Coast was sighted on January 9, 1934, in about
65°H., and flight made from the ship by Lt. Alf
' GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Gunnestad next day. On January 17, in about
86°E., a plane was transferred to a whale catcher
which worked south through the pack to 65°22’S.,
86°10’E., from where Gunnestad and Nils Larsen
made two flights southward, discovering 150 miles
of the Leopold and Astrid Coast behind the border-
ing ice shelf. Beyond Ross Sea, in 134°11’W., the
ship reached 71°44’S., but a flight from there
showed only ice. Skirted pack ice to Peter I Island;
thence to Drake Passage where Sars Bank was
discovered. Reached Montevideo on February 27,
1934.
1933-34. United States expedition.
Leaper: Lincoln Ellsworth. Snip: Wyatt Earp.
Summary: Left New Zealand December 5, 1933;
arrived at Bay of Whales January 6, 1934, for trans-
Antarctic flight to Weddell Sea. Plane was dam-
aged by breaking up of the ice January 13, termi-
nating the expedition.
1933-35. Discovery Investigations (British).
LEADER: Dr. N. A. Mackintosh. Suir: Discovery II.
Summary: The Discovery II left England in Oc-
tober; work begun at Tristan da Cunha enroute to
South Georgia. During two-year period five sets
of oceanographic stations were run northward
from the pack ice along 80°W. to north of Cape
Horn. First of these made in December, by sail-
ing westward along pack ice margin and return-
ing to South Georgia via the Strait of Magellan.
On December 27, 1933, ship left for western cruise
on a zigzag course across 200-mile-wide zone
bordering the pack ice. At 160°W. the ship sailed
north to New Zealand, returning to meet Byrd’s
Bear of Oakland at 72°S., 171°W., on February 23,
1934. From there the zigzag course was repeated
eastward along the pack ice to 80°W., where the
second line of stations was run northward. From
South Georgia the Discovery II next sailed south
to South Sandwich Islands and east along 60°S.
before steering southeastward to 64°38’S., 44°16’E.,
off Enderby Land. From there, on April 8, 1934,
the ship returned to South Africa. After a refit,
the ship left Cape Town August 1, 1934 for work
in Scotia Sea and surrounding seas, running sev-
eral lines across Scotia Sea, and the final three
lines along 80°W. South Shetland Islands were
charted by January 9, 1935. Stores and equip-
ment for the British Graham Land Expedition
were then transported to Port Lockroy in Palmer
Archipelago. Returning to South Georgia, the
ship left February 7 on a southeast course to
68°45’S., 9°20’W., at eastern entrance to Weddell
Sea. From there pack ice was skirted in usual
zigzag course to Enderby Land. Ship then sailed
north to Cape Town.
424589 O -57 -3
25
1933-35. Byrd Antarctic Expedition.
LEADER: Rear Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.).
Suips: Bear of Oakland and Jacob Ruppert.
SumMary: Sponsored by Edsel Ford, William
Horlick, Col. Jacob Ruppert, Thomas J. Watson,
National Geographic Society, and numerous other
public, private, and commercial donors. The
Jacob Ruppert, sailing from New Zealand Decem-
ber 12, 1933, skirted the pack from 65°55’S.,
151°10’W. eastward to 116°35’W. Three flights
made southward from the ship without sight-
ing land. Reached Bay of Whales January 17,
1934, and the Bear of Oakland arrived Janu-
ary 30. On February 6 the Bear of Oakland set
out to push eastward beyond 151°W. Grad-
ually forced northward by the ice, she reached
75°06’S., 148°08’W., with Marie Byrd Land dimly
seen to the south before retreating. During March
depots were laid by plane, dog sled, and tractor
200 miles to the south, and advance weather base
set up at 80°08’S., 163°57’W. Tractor trip to
Mount Grace McKinley made from September 27
to October 18, 1934, to prepare for sledge journey
to Marie Byrd Land. This geological party left
on October 14, reaching Fosdick Mountains and
returning December 29. The southern geological
party left on October 16, reached Queen Maud
Range on November 26, ascended to the plateau
via Robert Scott Glacier, and returned to base
January 11, 1935. On October 25, 1934, two trac-
tors started south in support of the geological
party. Halted by crevasses beyond 81°S., 193 miles
from Little America, they turned eastward, reach-
ing 79°07’S., 149°24’W. From there they moved
northward along edge of continent and followed
the eastern trail to base, arriving January 2, 1935.
Seismic soundings taken on trip showed much of
Ross Ice Shelf to be aground. Soundings by Dr.
Thomas Poulter revealed existence of Roosevelt
Island, buried by the ice shelf. Six major explora-
tory flights were made from Little America from
November 15 to December 15, 1934. The first was
a triangular flight, extending 275 miles southeast-
ward to 81°05’S., 146°30’W., thence north to
77°30’S., 146°30’W., and finally west to base. On
November 16 a southeast flight was made to edge
of continent and return. Another flight on No-
vember 22 in same direction, across Rockefeller
Plateau, reached 83°05’S., 119°00’W., and next day
another southeast flight was made. On November
18 a flight eastward reached 78°S., 135°W., where
the surface elevation exceeded 4,000 feet. On De-
cember 15 a flight northeastward across Sulzberger
Bay returned to base by way of Mount Grace Mc-
Kinley. After wintering in New Zealand both ships
returned in January 1935, the Bear of Oakland
charting the edge of Ross Ice Shelf from Ross Is-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
land to Bay of Whales. Base was evacuated Febru-
ary 6, 1935.
1934-35. Norwegian expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Klarius Mikkelsen. SHIP:
Thorshavn.
SummMary: Financed by Lars Christensen. While
servicing floating factories in the area east of Mac-
Robertson Coast in February 1935, the Thorshavn
pushed southward through thick ice into open
water over the continental shelf, as shown by
soundings. Ship continued south in clear weather.
On February 19 Mikkelsen saw the ice shelf, and
next day, after drifting westward, discovered an
ice-free area in a small bay. Landing made there
in 68°29’S., 78°36’E. by party including Mikkelsen,
his wife, and seven seamen. On February 21 he
followed the newly discovered Ingrid Christensen
Coast southwestward, charting Vestfold Hills,
Larsemann Hills, and Mount Caroline Mikkelsen.
1934-35. United States expedition.
LEADER: Lincoln Ellsworth. Suip: Wyatt Earp.
Summary: Financed by Lincoln Ellsworth, the ex-
pedition left New Zealand September 19, 1934,
arriving at Deception Island October 14, from
where it was proposed to begin a trans-Antarctic
flight to Bay of Whales. Take-off delayed by
broken connecting rod. Snow melting from run-
way required move to new location on November
29. Port Lockroy investigated, but Snow Hill Is-
land selected and landing made there December 4.
Flight begun January 3, 1935, but impending bad
weather caused pilot to turn back over Seal
Nunataks. Project then abandoned but, while sail-
ing north to Montevideo, Dundee Island was se-
lected as site for attempt next season.
1934-37. British Graham Land Expedition.
LEADER: John Rymill. Suip: Penola.
Summary: Sponsored by Colonial Office, British
Admiralty, War Office, Royal Geographical So-
ciety, and other public, private, and commercial
donors. Leaving London September 10, 1934, the
Penola reached Falkland Islands November 28, re-
maining for repairs until December 31. Mean-
while, expedition supplies had been transported
by the Discovery II from Port Stanley to Port
Lockroy, Wiencke Island, where the Penola ar-
rived January 22, 1935. By means of aerial recon-
naissance, base site was selected in Argentine Is-
lands, 40 miles southwestward, where expedition
wintered. Exploratory flight made from base to
Matha Strait February 28, 1935. While awaiting
firm ice, local biological, geological, and carto-
graphical surveys were made by boat and plane.
Open water south of Pendleton Strait confined
survey work to area bordering Grandidier Channel.
The Penola was freed on January 3, 1936, and re-
26
turned from Deception Island with lumber for a
new hut on January 27. On February 16, after
aerial reconnaissance, the ship moved south
through Grandidier Channel and Pendleton Strait,
rounding Adelaide Island on the west and south,
and entering Marguerite Bay. The plane then
flew south, inside of Adelaide Island, on February
26. Next day aerial reconnaissance revealed suit-
able base just north of Neny Fjord, to which the
ship sailed on February 28, 1936. Base established
on one of the Debenham Islands. The Penola
sailed on March 12 to winter in Falkland Islands.
Exploratory flights made over Marguerite Bay on
March 11 and 13, and another, between Adelaide
Island and Palmer Peninsula, on March 31. After
unsuccessful attempt in June to lay depots to
the south, two sledging parties on July 20 com-
menced survey northward finishing early in Au-
gust. On August 15, flight made to north end of
Alexander I Island, and better view of George VI
Sound, seen first on March 13, was had. On Sep-
tember 4, preliminary to a sledge journey, the
sound was explored on a flight which penetrated
it 40 miles, to 70°10’S. Sledge journey began next
day. By October 17 the party, under A. Stephen-
son, reached 72°00’S., 67°18’W., 200 miles from
northern entrance, when they turned around. A
second flight, on October 19, penetrated George
VI Sound for 120 miles.. Supported by a depot
laid by air on Wordie Ice Shelf, Rymill and E. W.
Bingham began eastern sledge journey across
Palmer Peninsula on October 26, 1936. Going
south to Wordie Ice Shelf, they turned eastward
in about 69°50’S. and traveled along south side of
Fleming and Bingham Glaciers to the east coast
of Palmer Peninsula, in vicinity of Cape Rymill,
returning to base on January 5, 1937. On Febru-
ary 1, flight made to Douglas Range on Alexander
I Island. On February 13, final flight made north-
ward to tie together the surveys made from the
two bases. The Penola returned and expedition
departed March 12, 1937, swinging southward
along the pack fringing the northern end of Alex-
ander I Island before sailing north.
1935-36. United States expedition.
Leaver: Lincoln Ellsworth. Sure: Wyatt Earp.
Summary: Financed by Lincoln Ellsworth. Expe-
dition arrived at Deception Island from Montevideo
November 4, 1935, proceeding on November 11 to
Dundee Island, where a trans-Antarctic flight to
the Bay of Whales was begun on November 21.
After flying about 600 miles southwestward to be-
yond Hearst Island, clogged fuel gauge forced re-
turn. On November 23 the Polar Star again took
to the air, with Ellsworth and pilot Herbert Hollick-
Kenyon flying south along east coast of Palmer
Peninsula to Mobiloil Inlet, then southwest across
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the peninsula range, Dyer Plateau, and George VI
Sound to Hllsworth Highland. Landing made
there on snow-covered surface in about 79°15’S.,
102°35’W. After 19 hours in camp, flight was con-
tinued on November 24, but bad weather forced
landing after a half hour in the air. A storm and
clearing away the snow kept party grounded until
late December 4. Four hours later (23:10 Decem-
ber 4) another landing made for astronomical ob-
servations, at about 79°29’S., 153°27’W. Plane
took off at 09:50, December 5, and came down again
at 10:05, 16 miles from the Bay of Whales, with
gasoline exhausted. Ellsworth and Hollick-Ken-
yon hiked to Little America to await arrival of the
Wyatt Earp. On January 15, 1936, the Discovery
II came to their rescue, but before departing waited
for the Wyatt Earp to arrive.
1935-36. Discovery Investigations (British).
LEADER: G. W. Rayner. SuHip: William Scoresby.
Summary: The William Scoresby left London in
October 1935 to mark whales in Indian Ocean. In
February 1936, attempting great circle route from
eastern whaling grounds off Queen Mary Coast to
western grounds off Enderby Land, Rayner found
coast unusually free of ice. In vicinity of 103°E.,
the existence of Bowman Island and Mill Island
was verified. Working westward, MacKenzie Bay
was found ice-free and was entered to 68°45’S.,
70°42’E. on February 24. Skirting Amery Ice
Shelf to its north extremity, the William Scoresby
continued west along the coast, landing at Scullin
Monolith on February 26. Next day Kemp Coast
was reached; William Scoresby Bay discovered and
landing made. Immediate coastal area charted.
On March 6, ship again in sight of land off Cape
Ann. She arrived at Cape Town April 3, 1936.
1935-37. Discovery Investigations (British).
LreapER: Dr. G. E. R. Deacon. Suir: Discovery II.
Summary: Leaving London in October, the Dis-
covery II called at Cape Town before starting work,
November 9, 1935. The course led eastward to
Crozet Islands, then south to 58°29’S., 58°00’E.,
meeting the pack. Pack ice skirted eastward to
about 59°47’S., 98°00’E. when, on December 4,
1935, the Discovery II was called to Melbourne to
begin search for Lincoln Ellsworth, presumed lost
on his trans-Antarctic flight. She left Melbourne
December 23 for Ross Sea, via Dunedin. After dif-
ficult penetration of almost 400 miles of pack ice
from January 6 to 14, with planes assisting to spot
open leads, the ship arrived at Bay of Whales on
January 15, 1936. Ellsworth found to be safe and
the Discovery II left with him aboard on Jan-
uary 22. Oceanographic work was carried out
in Ross Sea, and landing made at Cape Crozier.
Enroute to Australia, a running survey was
made of Balleny Islands, from February 3 to 5.
27
Work resumed by sailing south from Melbourne
along 146°E. Uncertain appearance of land noted
to the south in 65°06’S., 127°02’E. on March 20,
and in 65°05’S., 126°35’E. the next day. The pack
ice was skirted in zigzag course from there to
Shackleton Ice Shelf where, on March 26, a course
was laid for Fremantle. After cruise across Indian
Ocean along 32°S., from Fremantle to Cape Town,
Antarctic work begun again on May 18, 1936, when
ship cruised west and southward to beyond Bouve-
tgya, then followed the pack ice eastward to 17°E.
before returning to Cape Town for routine repairs.
Ship departed again on September 15, 1936, sailing
westward to 0°, then south to 53°S., 0°. From
there she turned westward on September 28, fol-
lowing zigzag course north of 60°S. to South
Georgia, arriving October 15. An indirect traverse
was then made across Scotia Sea, first northwest,
then south to South Orkney Islands, thence west
to Clarence Island, making landing, and north to
Falkland Islands. In November work carried on
between Falkland Islands and Patagonia. Most
of December spent in vicinity of South Georgia.
In January 1937, topographic and biologic survey
made in South Shetland Islands, followed by simi-
lar work in South Orkney Islands in February.
Final cruise began at South Georgia, sailing south-
eastward to the Antarctic Circle, along which zig-
zag course was followed to 0°40’E., then north to
34°00’S., and eastward to Cape Town, which was
reached April 7, 1937.
1936-37. Norwegian expedition.
LrabDER: Lars Christensen.. SuHips: Thorshavn and
Firern.
Summary: Financed by Lars Christensen. Expe-
dition left Cape Town December 28, 1936, with in-
tention of photographing from the air the coast
line of Antarctica from Shackleton Ice Shelf west
to Princess Martha Coast. The floating factory
Ole Wegger was met on January 14, 1936 in about
62°S., 86°E. The plane was transferred next day
from the Thorshavn to the whale catcher Firern,
as were also Captains Nils Larsen and Klarius
Mikkelsen, aviator Viggo Widerge, and photog-
rapher Nils Romnaes. On January 21 Gribb Bank
and on January 25 Four Ladies Bank were dis-
covered by the Thorshavn. Until January 25,
when the Thorshavn joined the Firern, conditions
were not entirely favorable. Aerial survey began
next day, from 68°05’S., 78°55’E., with two flights
in which coast line of Prydz Bay was photographed.
On January 28 flights were made from about
68°26’S., 70°03’E. in MacKenzie Bay, covering Lars
Christensen and Mac-Robertson Coasts to 66°E.
Landing was made by a party from the Thorshavn
at Scullin Monolith on January 30. Next day a
third series of flights were made from 66°13’S.,
57°50’E., off Kemp Coast. Two more flights were
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
made on February 1 from 65°47’S., 55°11’E., cover-
ing a great part of Enderby Land. The Firern was
then released, and the Thorshavn proceeded west
past Cape Ann on February 2. Ice conditions were
unsuitable for a take-off until February 4, at
68°11’S., 35°47’E. Ona flight from there, with Mrs.
Christensen as passenger, Prince Harald Coast was
discovered. Next day two flights were made from
67°50’S., 34°03’E., photographing the coastal area
bordering Havsbotn, from 40°E. to 34°E. On last
flight, February 6, from 69°15’S., 26°00’E., Sgr
Rondane Mountains were photographed. The
Thorshavn left for Cape Town on February 7, 1937.
1937-38. Discovery Investigations (British).
LEADER: G. W. Rayner. Surp: William Scoresby.
Summary: Beginning in September 1937, the Wil-
liam Scoresby marked whales and carried on
supplementary oceanographic work in south At-
lantic Ocean and Bellingshausen Sea. Landing
made on Saunders Island in South Sandwich Is-
lands. Ship returned to London April 12, 1938.
1937-39. Discovery Investigations (British).
LrapeErS: Dr. N. A. Mackintosh, succeeded by H. F.
P.Herdman. Sup: Discovery II.
Summary: The Discovery II, with N. A. Mackin-
tosh in charge of scientific work, left London Oc-
tober 7, 1937 and, after calling at Cape Town in
November, began circumpolar cruise carrying out
program of daily oceanographic observations, par-
ticularly pertaining to the whale. A zigzag course,
based on the edge of the pack ice, was maintained
throughout by tacking first southeast then north-
east. The first part, between about 20°H. and
90°E., was north of 60°S. After a stop at Fre-
mantle, the ship headed due south, on December
29, 1937, to the pack ice off Budd Coast. From
there, on January 11, 1938, the zigzag course east-
ward was resumed, this time south of 60°S. Bal-
leny Islands were sighted on January 21 and two
days were spent in a running survey, in clear
weather. Course then set for New Zealand, arriv-
ing January 31, after a call at Campbell Island.
On February 8, with H. F. P. Herdman in charge of
scientific work, the ship left Dunedin for Antipodes
Islands from which a course was set southward
along 170°00’W. to the edge of the pack at 68°31’S.
From there a zigzag course was followed south of
60°S. to Drake Passage. On March 20 the ship
left Falkland Islands, sailing to the pack edge 90
miles south of South Orkney Islands before turning
northeastward to South Georgia, arriving March
28, 1938. From there a course was laid eastward
to 50°S., 0°, then south to the pack ice. Skirting
the pack to 20°E., the Discovery IJ then sailed north
to Cape Town, arriving May 4. After a refit, the
Discovery II, on July 1, 1938, began a series of seven
cruises over a rectilinear course from Cape Town
28
southwestward to 40°S. at 0°, then south on 0° to
the edge of the pack ice, eastward to 20°E., and
north to Cape Town. Regular observations across
this area were made for period of nine months to
show seasonal changes in pack ice, weather, sea
temperatures, and marine life. On sixth cruise a
landing was made on Bouvetgya, in January. On
seventh cruise, beginning February 15, 1939, edge
of pack ice had retreated sufficiently along Princess
Astrid Coast to enable staff to sight land from the
ship on March 3 and 5. The Discovery II left for
London on March 29, 1939.
1938-39. United States expedition.
LeapER: Lincoln Ellsworth. Sure: Wyatt Earp.
Summary: Financed by Lincoln Ellsworth. Ex-
pedition left Cape Town October 29, 1938 and on
November 20, in 55°27’S., 75°19’E., encountered
pack ice from which the ship did not emerge until
open water was reached off Ingrid Christensen
Coast on January 2, 1939. A short flight was made
in the small seaplane on December 31, and land
sighted from the ship next day. A second flight,
on January 2, revealed the coast line from Vestfold
Hills to Amery Ice Shelf. Between January 3 and
11 the coast line between Vestfold Hills and Rauer
Islands was examined for ice suitable for a take-off
by the large plane. Several boat landings and
short flights were made. On January 11 the plane
took off on the margin of the ice shelf east of Vest-
fold Hills, flying southward over featureless, snow-
covered continental plateau to 72°S., 79°E. The
Wyatt Earp later skirted the ice shelf eastward,
then emerged from the pack in 65°00’S., 80°05’E.
on January 19. Hobart was reached February 4,
1939.
1938-39. German Antarctic Expedition.
LeapDER: Capt. Alfred Ritscher. Suir: Schwaben-
land.
SumMmMary: Sponsored by German government and
Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (German Re-
search Society) of Berlin. The Schwabenland, a
catapult ship carrying two flying boats, left Ham-
burg December 17, 1938 on a quick dash to Ant-
arctica for purpose of mapping, by means of aerial
photography, and laying claim to a portion of the
continent. On April 11, 1939, she returned to
Cuxhaven after mapping Princess Martha Coast
and Princess Astrid Coast between 12°W and 16°E.
Area photographed extended from the shoreline
across the coastal foreland up onto the continental
plateau. Most southerly point claimed to have
been reached was 74°25/S., 0°20’W. Arriving at
edge of the ice shelf on January 19, 1939, the ship
remained in area about three weeks. During this
time there were only three periods when weather
and ice conditions were favorable for flying. The
flights were, accordingly, made from the ship in
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
three series as she slowly worked eastward, be-
ginning from 69°10’S., 4°20’W. and ending near
69°05’S., 14°00’E. Meteorological, hydrographical,
biological, and geophysical observations also made.
1939-41. United States Antarctic Service.
LEaDER: Rear Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.).
Sips: Bear and North Star.
SumMary: Sponsored by United States govern-
ment, and assisted in equipping expedition by pri-
vate and commercial donors. The two expedition
ships left the United States in November 1939, ar-
riving at Bay of Whales January 11, 1940. West
Base established there under Dr. Paul A. Siple.
The North Star then departed for Valparaiso for
equipment and supplies for the East Base, while
the Bear, between January 19 and 30, pushed
northeastward through the pack to 174°43’S.,
143°52’W. Enroute, three flights to the east and
south made from the ship. On February 1 the
Bear left Bay of Whales, sailing westward along
Ross Ice Shelf to Victoria Land, then northeast
from Terra Nova Bay into south Pacific Ocean,
thence eastward toward Palmer Peninsula. Dur-
ing this cruise three flights were made south from
the ship to Walgreen Coast, Thurston Peninsula,
and Seraph Bay. . The first was made on February
24 from 70°43’S., 108°25’W., the second on Febru-
ary 25 from 70°58’S., 105°33’W., and the third on
February 27 from 70°04’S., 95°19’W. The Bear and
North Star met at the entrance to Marguerite Bay
on March 3, 1940. With aid of aerial reconnais-
sance a site was selected on Stonington Island
where East Base was established under Lt. Cdr.
Richard B. Black, USNR. The ships left for the
United States March 21. Winter at East Base
was occupied with depot laying and aerial recon-
naissance, preliminary to more extensive summer
work. Flights were made to the east coast of
Palmer Peninsula and this coast was photographed
between Hearst Island and Cape Northrop on Sep-
tember 21 and 28. From October 26 to December
30 a weather station was maintained on the plateau
east of base to aid flying operations. Three flights
were made over Alexander I Island. The first, on
November 4, followed a triangular course, south-
westward across northern part of the island, south-
eastward to George VI Sound, and north along the
sound to base. On December 22 a flight was made
westward over northern Alexander I Island to
Charcot Island, then south to Ronne Entrance and
westward to 72°55’S., 78°50’W., where the plane
returned to base. On December 28 a flight was
made along the entire length of George VI Sound.
From November 7 to January 28 Finn Ronne and
Carl R. Eklund sledged the entire length of the
sound. A second party, under J. Glenn Dyer, left
base in company with Ronne, separating on the
Dyer Plateau south of Wordie Ice Shelf on No-
29
vember 22. They sledged southeastward to tne
Eternity Mountains, returning to base December
12. These operations were supported by supplies
laid by plane and dog team. The third major
sledge journey began on November 18 and led across
Palmer Peninsula and south along its east coast to
71°51’S., 60°47’W. On December 30 the last major
flight was made south into George VI Sound and
southeast across Palmer Peninsula to Cape Dar-
lington in 72°00’S., 60°43’W., thence south to
Wright Inlet in 74°00’S., 61°15’W. Plane then re-
turned to base following east side of Palmer Pen-
insula to Trail Inlet. Three flights were made
from West Base in February 1940. The first was
to Ruppert Coast on the 8th. On February 12 a
flight was made southwestward over Ross Ice Shelf
to about 81°08’S., 176°15’W. The third flight, on
February 29, followed a course southwestward to
the mouth of Beardmore Glacier, then east along
the front of Queen Maud Range, turning northeast,
east, and northwest along the eastern edge of Ross
Ice Shelf on the return to base. Major discoveries
were Shackleton Glacier and an ice-drowned island
similar to and lying southeast of Roosevelt Island.
Depots were laid by tractor, tank and plane. Gaso-
line dumps laid by plane greatly extended the ex-
ploratory flights. Four long exploratory flights
were made eastward and northeastward over Marie
Byrd Land on December 9, 13, 16, and 18, 1940.
All reached or exceeded 135°W. The flights of De-
cember 9 and 18 revealed open water north of Rup-
pert Coast. Westward flight along edge of Ross
Ice Shelf was made on December 12. Three parties
sledged from West Base into Marie Byrd Land in
mid-October. The Biological Party visited Fos-
dick Mountains on the eastern shore of Ross Sea.
The Pacific Coast Party sledged to Mount Berlin,
in Hal Flood Range, to establish ground control.
The Geological Party sledged to the Edsel Ford
Ranges. Cosmic ray and auroral observations were
also carried out. The two ships returned to Bay
of Whales in January 1941 for evacuation of West
Base, and departed on February 1. They proceeded
north to Scott Island and then eastward toward
Marguerite Bay, arriving off Adelaide Island on
February 24. Ice conditions, however, prevented
entrance into Marguerite Bay. It was finally neces-
sary on March 22, 1941, to evacuate East Base per-
sonnel by plane to Watkins Island (formerly Mik-
kelsen Island), in the Biscoe Islands. Personnel
transferred on same day to the Bear and sailed
northward.
1942. Argentine expedition.
LEADER: Capt. A. J. Oddera.
Mayo.
Sum™Mary: Sponsored by Comisién National del
Antartico and Ministry of Marine. Expedition
called at Deception Island in January and Febru-
SHIP: Primero de
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ary, making territorial claim to this sector. A
beacon was installed and hydrographic survey
made in Melchior Islands.
1943. Argentine expedition.
LeapeR: Capt. S. Harriague.
Mayo.
Summary: Sponsored by Comision National del
Antartico and Ministry of Marine. Ships sailed
south from Ushuaia on February 18, 1943, passing
west of South Shetland Islands enroute to Melchior
Islands. Hydrographic survey of Melchior Islands
completed. Sailed south to Stonington Island in
Marguerite Bay, where materials left by the
United States Antarctic Service were collected.
Flights were made from Port Lockroy. Called at
Deception Island.
Sure: Primero de
1943-45. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey
(Operation Tabarin).
LEADER: Lt. Cdr. J. W. S. Marr, RNVR. SuHIPps:
William Scoresby and Fitzroy.
Summary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office
and Admiralty. The two ships sailed south from
Falkland Islands and on February 3, 1944 reached
Deception Island, where Base B was established for
territorial administration and meteorological ob-
servation. Vessels then sailed to Hope Bay, ar-
riving February 7, but ice conditions prevented un-
loading materials for base there. The ships turned
north into Bransfield Strait, then southwestward
along the west coast of Palmer Peninsula in search
of possible base site. With coal running short on
the Fitzroy, the ships were forced to run for the
sheltered harbor of Port Lockroy where Base A was
set up on Goudier Islet. On February 17, 1944,
the vessels returned to Falkland Islands. Meteor-
ological observations as well as geological, topo-
graphical, and biological surveys were made in the
Port Lockroy area.
1945-46. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey.
LeapER: Capt. A. Taylor, RCE. Suips: William
Scoresby, Fitzroy and Eagle.
Summary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office.
Bases at Deception Island and Port Lockroy were
visited in January and February 1945 and resup-
plied and staffed with four men each as weather
stations. A hut for future occupancy was erected
on Coronation Island in South Orkney Islands.
Base D was established by the Eagle at Hope Bay
in February, but storms prevented complete un-
loading of supplies on a return trip in March.
Twelve men were stationed at Hope Bay, under
Taylor, where a weather station was maintained
and geological and biological investigations were
carried on. James Ross Island and environs were
surveyed in two sledge journeys.
30
1946-47. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey.
LEADER: Cdr. E. W. Bingham, RN. Suips: William
Scoresby, Fitzroy and Trepassey.
Summary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office.
The ships sailed from Falkland Islands January 9,
1946, and by January 17 the bases at Hope Bay, De-
ception Island, and Port Lockroy were re-equipped
and staffed by new personnel. Base C was estab-
lished in the South Orkney Islands on Cape Geddes,
Laurie Island, and additional supplies were landed
at the hut on Coronation Island. Emergency
stores were laid at the former base of the British
Graham Land Expedition in Argentine Islands on
way south to Stonington Island, where Base E was
established on February 24, 1946. Weather sta-
tions with four men each functioned at Deception
Island, Port Lockroy, and Cape Geddes. Eight men
were based at Hope Bay and ten men at Stonington
Island. From November 1946 to January 1947 the
plateau upland of Palmer Peninsula was charted
between 68°00’S. and 66°30’S. by two Stonington
Island sledge parties. Hope Bay sledge parties
mapped Louis Philippe Peninsula from Cape
Roquemaurel northeastward, as well as the coastal
area northwest of Prince Gustav Channel.
1946-47. British whaling expedition.
LEADER: Rupert Trouton (Capt. Reider Pedersen,
John Grierson). Sure: Balaena.
Summary: Sent out by United Whalers, Limited,
the ship engaged in whaling off Queen Mary Coast
and Wilkes Land from January to March 1947.
Land was sighted from ship on five days between
109°E. and 111°E. Two amphibian planes used for
ice reconnaissance and for spotting whales. Peaks
were reported on flight of February 12, 1947 in
about 66°S., 110°E. Scientific program included
study of meteorology, ornithology, ice conditions,
physiology of the whale and the suitability of
whale meat for human consumption.
1946-47. British expedition.
LEADER: Niall Rankin. Suir: Albatross.
Summary: A private expedition to South Georgia
for purpose of photographing wildlife. Operations
carried on by three-man crew in a series of cruises
from the base at Leith Harbor. Supplies were
transported for the group by whalers.
1946-47. United States Navy Operation Highjump
LreapERS: Rear Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.),
and Rear Adm. Richard H. Cruzen, USN. Sures:
Thirteen ships of ‘“Task Force 68.”
Summary: Expedition split into three groups to
photograph from the air a large part of the coast-
line of Antarctica. Main objectives were to test
equipment and train men under polar conditions.
Central group under Admiral Cruzen consisted of
the Mount Olympus, Yancey, Merrick, the ice-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
breaker Northwind, and submarine Sennet. This
group established a base on Ross Ice Shelf at Bay
of Whales, January 16, 1947. Six transport planes
were flown to the base from the carrier Philippine
Sea for 29 photographic flights over Ross Ice Shelf
and lands bordering the shelf to the west and south,
western Marie Byrd Land, and the polar plateau.
A tractor journey to Rockefeller Mountains was
made. A limited program of meteorology, glaci-
ology, and geophysics was carried on. The base
was evacuated on February 23, 1947 by the ice-
breaker Burton Island. Eastern group under Capt.
George J. Dufek consisted of seaplane tender Pine
Island, destroyer Brownson, and tanker Canisto.
This group rendezvoused near Peter I Island in
late December. Bad weather curtailed flights over
coastal area south of Bellingshausen Sea, and in
latter part of January the group moved westward
and in clearer weather photographed the coast
south of Amundsen Sea, roughly between 100°W.
and 125°W. This completed, the group returned
eastward with flights over Charcot and Alexander
I Islands, and by March had cruised east of the
Greenwich meridian with flights over Princess
Martha Coast. Western group under Capt. Charles
A. Bond consisted of seaplane tender Currituck, de-
stroyer Henderson, and tanker Cacapon. They
rendezvoused north of Balleny Islands in Decem-
ber, then cruised westward until March making 25
photographic flights over the continental margin
from Oates Coast, in 164°E., almost half way
around Antarctica to Princess Astrid Coast in 15°E.
Numerous geographic discoveries made, including
an ice free area close south of Queen Mary Coast.
1947. Argentine expedition.
LreapER: Capt. Luis Miguel Garcia. Snips: King,
Murature, Ministro Ezcurra, Don Samuel, Gran-
ville, Patagonia, Chaco, and Fournier.
Sum™Mary: Sponsored by Comision Nacional del
Antartico and Ministry of Marine. The Patagonia
and Don Samuel proceeded from Ushuaia January
24, 1947, calling at Deception Island January 29, to
protest existence of Falkland Islands Dependencies
Survey Base B. On January 31 a base was started
in Melchior Islands. An amphibian flight was
made southward from the Patagonia. Other ships
assisted in base construction while Garcia in the
Don Samuel sailed south to Marguerite Bay, call-
ing at Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey Base
E at Stonington Island. Automatic lighthouses
were erected at Py Point on Doumer Island, and
Cape Anna on Palmer Peninsula. Eight men, un-
der Lieutenant Nadau, remained to staff the Mel-
chior Islands base. A navigational beacon was
erected in May by the Fournier on Anvers Island.
The King and Murature carried on reconnaissance
in South Shetland Islands, South Orkney Islands,
and Weddell Sea. Personnel at the Argentine
31
weather station on Laurie Island in South Orkney
Islands were relieved.
1947. Chilean expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Frederico Guesalago Toro.
Iquique and Angamos.
Summary: Sponsored by Chilean Navy. The ships
sailed from Valparaiso in January 1947. The
Iquique visited the South Shetland Islands, calling
at Deception Island, then sailed southward through
De Gerlache Strait to Marguerite Bay. The An-
gamos established a base at Discovery Bay, Green-
wich Island in the South Shetland Islands before
sailing south to Marguerite Bay in March. Five
men wintered on Greenwich Island under Lt. Boris
Kopaitic O’Neil.
SHIPS:
1947-48. Argentine expedition.
LEapER: Capt. Richardo Hermelo. Suips: Bou-
chard, Granville, King, Pampa, Ministro Ezcurra,
Murature, Chiriguano, Sanaviron, Seaver, Parker,
Esiv Brunt and Charwa.
Summary: Sponsored by Comisién Nacional del
Antartico and Ministry of Marine. An ice recon-
naissance in Bransfield Strait was begun in No-
vember 1947 by the Bouchard, Granville, and King.
Construction of a base at Deception Island was
started in December. A survey flight by a navy
plane was made from Piedrabuena airfield in
Patagonia across Deception Island, Melchior Is-
lands, Adelaide Island and Palmer Peninsula. Ac-
tivities were carried on under escort of naval ves-
sels on maneuvers in Antarctic waters. Naviga-
tional lights were erected in Melchior Islands. A
temporary hut was erected at Admiralty Bay, King
George Island. A winter party under Lt. Roberto
A. Cabrera was left at Deception Island, and
another under Lt. L. Roque de Costillas at Melchior
Islands.
1947-48. United States Navy Operation Windmill.
LEADER: Cdr. Gerald L. Ketchum, USN. Surpes:
Icebreakers Edisto and Burton Island.
Summary: Objective of expedition was to secure
ground control data for the aerial photography of
Operation Highjump by landing at several points
by means of helicopters. From Samoa the ships
forced their way into the ice of Davis Sea in 92°E.
in December 1947. Landing was made on Haswell
Islet. Ships then cruised eastward along the edge
of the pack with landings in about 105°E. and off
Knox Coast. McMurdo Sound, Bay of Whales, and
Peter I Island were visited before calling at Mar-
guerite Bay. The expedition assisted in freeing
the Port of Beaumont, Texas by breaking ice in
Neny Bay before departing for home on February
23, 1948.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1947-48. Norwegian expedition.
LreapDER: Capt. Nils Larsen. Snip: Brategg.
Summary: Sponsored by Norske Hvalfangstsels-
kapers Forbund (Federation of Norwegian Whaling
Companies). Oceanographic research carried on
from Peter I Island westward to 174°31’W., north
of Ross Sea, following a zigzag course between the
edge of the pack and 62°00’S. On returning a
landing was made on Peter I Island for geological
and zoological work. Ship departed February 13,
1948 for Deception Island. The oceanographic
program was mainly planned by the Norske Geo-
grafiske Selskabs Havforsknings Komite (Commit-
tee of Oceanographic Investigation of the Nor-
wegian Geographic Society).
1947-48. Ronne Antarctic Research Expedition.
LreapER: Cdr. Finn Ronne, USNR. Sure: Port of
Beaumont, Texas.
Summary: Sponsored by American Geographical
Society, Office of Naval Research, Air Force, and
private donors, with aid of equipment borrowed
from government agencies. Expedition sailed with
three planes from Beaumont, Texas, on January
23, 1947, through Panama Canal, and arrived in
Marguerite Bay March 12. Former East Base of
the United States Antarctic Service on Stonington
Island was reoccupied and the Port of Beaumont,
Texas frozen in for the winter. Seismological,
meteorological, and geophysical observations car-
ried on continuously at base; cosmic rays and
marine tides were studied. During flying season,
weather stations were maintained on the plateau
east of the base and at Cape Keeler on east coast
of Palmer Peninsula. Two major sledge journeys,
a geological trip to George VI Sound and a joint
trip with the Falkland Islands Dependencies Sur-
vey from Stonington Island to the east coast of
Palmer Peninsula and south to Bowman Peninsula
in 74°47’S., 62°22’W., were carried out with air
support. Nine major exploratory flights were
made, resulting in 14,000 tri-metrogon aerial
photographs. Several landings made in the field
for geographical fixes and refueling. On Novem-
ber 7, 1947 a triangular course was flown over
Weddell Sea in the vicinity of Hearst Island. On
November 21 a flight was made south along the
east coast of Palmer Peninsula, landing on the ice
in Gardner Inlet in 74°48’S., 62°50’W. to refuel,
and then southwestward to Mount Hassage on
Joerg Plateau. The edge of Filchner Ice Shelf at
the head of Weddell Sea was next examined.
Plane was forced down by fog off Cape Knowles on
return to base, which was reached on November
22. On November 27 a flight was made northward
to Marin Darbel Bay, then southwestward over
Alexander I Island. On December 3, George VI
Sound was explored from the air southward to
Batterbee Mountains, after which a flight was made
32
across central Alexander I Island. Second flight
to head of Weddell Sea began December 8, but
heavy overcast forced planes down off Cape Wheeler
until December 12 when the flight was continued
south and eastward along edge of the ice shelf to
78°30’S., 42°00’W. On December 22 and 23 flights
were made northward beyond 66°S. on both sides
of Palmer Peninsula. Last major flight occurred
on December 23, flying southward along east side
of George VI Sound, then west-southwest along its
southern shore and landing at 74°30’S., 79°00’W.
Plane then flew northeastward over Alexander I
Island, then northwest to Charcot Island where
another landing was made before returning to base.
The expedition evacuated its base on February 20,
1948.
1947-48. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey.
LEADER: Maj. K. S. P. Butler. Suips: Fitzroy and
Trepassey.
Summary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office.
Base A, the meteorological station at Port Lockroy,
was evacuated and closed for the winter April 9,
1947. Base B at Deception Island was rebuilt fol-
lowing a fire and maintained as a weather station
with five men; a plane table survey was carried on.
Base C, Laurie Island, was evacuated March 17,
1947. Base D, Hope Bay, was relieved in February
1947. A weather station was maintained at Hope
Bay and a survey of Prince Gustav Channel com-
pleted. Depots were laid as far as Seal Nunataks
in support of a long sledge journey south along the
east coast of Palmer Peninsula which was begun
October 27, 1947. This group was met near Three
Slice Nunatak by a joint (Ronne Antarctic Re-
search Expedition — Falkland Islands Dependencies
Survey) assisting party from Stonington Island,
which guided them across the peninsula to Stoning-
ton Island. Base E, Stonington Island, was re-
lieved February 5, 1947. A staff of 11 maintained
a weather station there and, in cooperation with
the Ronne expedition, a station on the plateau
east of the base. They assisted Ronne’s geological
party on first part of journey into George VI
Sound and from October 9, 1947 to January 16,
1948 participated in a joint British-American
sledge journey, with air support by Ronne, south-
ward along the east coast of Palmer Peninsula
from Joerg Peninsula in 68°12’S., 65°12’W. to Bow-
man Peninsula in 74°47’S., 62°22’W. At Base F,
Argentine Islands, a: new building was erected in
January 1947 to replace the old hut of the British
Graham Land Expedition which had been de-
stroyed along with an emergency depot by a tidal
wave. Four man staff at Base F operated a
weather station, supplied seal meat for the other
bases, and bred sledge dogs. Base G at Admiralty
Bay, King George Island, was established as two
man weather station in January 1947. Erection
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
of Base H on Signy Island was begun March 10,
1947, to replace Base C. Weather station at Base
H staffed by four men. Signy Island was surveyed
and ice conditions were recorded.
1947-48. Chilean expedition.
LEADER: E. G. Navarrete. Surips: Covadonga, Ran-
cagua and Presidente Pinto.
Summary: Sponsored by Chilean government. A
base at Discovery Bay, Greenwich Island, was vis-
ited in December 1947, and a second base erected at
Cape Legoupil on Palmer Peninsula. Party of
government officials, including President Gonzalez
Videla, visited in the Presidente Pinto in February.
Wintering parties were stationed at both bases.
1947-55. Australian National Antarctic Research
Expedition.
LEADERS: Group-Captain Stuart A. Campbell, suc-
ceeded by Phillip G. Law. Surips: Wyatt Earp
(1947-48), Labuan (1949-51), Tottan (1952-53),
Kista Dan (1954-55).
Summary: Sponsored by the Antarctic Division,
Australian Department of External Affairs. A 14
man winter party under A. V. Gottly landed on
Heard Island in December 1947, making observa-
tions in meteorology, cosmic rays, geology, biology
and geophysics. ‘Topographic survey of the island
was undertaken. After return for repairs the
Wyatt Earp left Melbourne for the Antarctic in
February 1948, but was prevented from reaching
Commonwealth Bay on George V Coast by heavy
ice. The ship cruised eastward to the Balleny Is-
lands, landing on Borrodaile Island. A running
survey was made of Young, Buckle, Borrodaile,
Sabrina and Row Islands. Second attempt was
made to reach George V Coast early in March, but
aerial reconnaissance showed unfavorable ice con-
ditions and the ship withdrew on the 14th. Relief
of Heard Island personnel carried out by the La-
buan in January 1949. Scientific program was
continued by 11 man party under R. W. Allison.
This group was in turn relieved by a 14 man party
under J. W. P. McCarthy.in January 1950. Heavy
storm damage forced retirement of the Labuan
from service in 1951 after a 14 man relief party
under F. T. Hannan was established on the island.
Meteorological, geophysical and biological observa-
tions were continued by a 14 man party under L. F.
Gibbney which accompanied the Tottan in Febru-
ary 1952. Routine observations were continued by
a 13 man party under John M. Bechervaise, upon
return of the Tottan in February 1953. This party
was in turn relieved by a 9 man party under Dr.
G. Budd which accompanied the Kista Dan in
January 1954. Collecting supplies at the Ker-
guelen Islands, the Kista Dan continued south-
ward to Mac-Robertson Coast and landed on Feb-
ruary 13 in a protected cove indenting the main-
land in 67°36’S., 62°53’E., as previously selected
33
from United States Navy Operation Highjump
aerial photographs as the base site for ‘Mawson
station.” After the 10 man wintering party under
Robert G. Dovers was established, the Kista Dan
headed eastward, making solar and magnetic ob-
servations close off Scullin Monolith and at “Mag-
netic Islet” in Prydz Bay. The ship retired north-
ward to Heard Island to collect the 1953 wintering
party, and reached Melbourne in late March. Sci-
entific work at the Heard Island station ceased on
October 31 and the base was dismantled in early
1955, except for living quarters and emergency
supplies. Observations in meteorology, geology,
glaciology, cosmic rays, seismology, ionospherical
physics and geophysics were undertaken at “Maw-
son station.” Three major journeys, with empha-
sis on topographic and geologic investigations,
were completed by tractor parties. One extended
about 160 miles westward to the head of Edward
VIII Bay. The second extended about 130 miles
southeastward to a prominent group of interior
mountains sighted by Operation Highjump per-
sonnel in March 1947 which lie south of the eastern
end of Lars Christensen Coast. The third journey
extended about 100 miles eastward to Scullin
Monolith. Combined sea and land operations per-
mitted solar observations to be completed at 13
localities between 57°05’E. and 77°54’E. Relief of
the 1954 mainland wintering party by a 15 man
party under Jéhn M. Bechervaise was completed in
February 1955, and scientific observations were
continued in the general base area.
1948-49. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey.
LeapEeR: V. E. Fuchs. Suips: John Biscoe, Snipe
and Fitzroy.
SummMary: Sponsored by the British Colonial Of-
fice. Base A, Port Lockroy was re-opened in Feb-
ruary 1948 with a five man staff for geophysical
observations. Base B, Deception Island, continued
as a weather station with four men. Base D, Hope
Bay, was relieved in March 1948, and staffed with
seven men. Six sledge journeys made from Hope
Bay to study geology and complete survey of Louis
Philippe Peninsula. Base D was destroyed by fire
which killed two men and was evacuated on Febru-
ary 4,1949. Base E, Stonington Island, was staffed
with 11 men to run weather station and carry out
topographical and geological surveys. A depot was
laid at northeast end of Alexander IIsland. Find-
ing no practical route over or around the north end
of Alexander I Island, a party sledged southward
in George VI Sound to 71°35’S. Square Bay and
southeast side of Adelaide Island were surveyed.
Base F, Argentine Islands, was staffed by four men
who continued a program of weather observation,
dog breeding, and stocking seal meat for other
bases. At Base G, Admiralty Bay, four men op-
erated weather station and began geological sur-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
vey of King George Island. At Base H, Signy Is-
land, three men operated weather station, studied
elephant seals, and made survey of Signy and a
part of Coronation Island.
1948-49. Argentine expedition.
LEADER: Unknown. Surps: Pampa, Sanaviron and
Chaco.
Summary: Sponsored by Comisién Nacional del
Antartico and Ministry of Marine. Wintering par-
ties at Melchior Islands, Deception Island, and
Laurie Island were relieved. Further work pre-
vented by unfavorable ice conditions.
1948-49. Chilean expedition.
LreaDER: Leopoldo Fontaine.
Maipo and Lautaro.
Summary: Sponsored by Chilean government.
Severe ice conditions prevented a proposed estab-
lishment of a base at Marguerite Bay. Bases at
Discovery Bay on Greenwich Island, and Cape
Legoupil on Palmer Peninsula were relieved and
winter parties stationed.
SHIPS: Covandonga,
1948-53. French Antarctic Expedition.
LeapER: André F. Liotard, Michel Barré and Mario
Marret.
SHips: Commandant Charcot and Tottan.
Summary: Sponsored by Expéditions Polaires
Francaises, a government organization. Left Ho-
bart on February 4, 1949, but spent 23 days in
vain attempt to break through 40 miles of pack
ice off Adélie Coast. Commandant Charcot then
retired to Belleny Islands, landing on Sabrina
Islet March 7. Meteorological and hydrographic
studies were made and a survey carried out. Re-
turned to France via Macquarie Island and Aus-
tralia. Left Hobart on second attempt December
21, 1949. Reached Cape Découverte, Adélie Coast,
on January 18, 1950. Base established at Cape
Margerie on January 20. Ship laid depots at Cape
Jules and Cape Denison before returning home.
Studies at “Port Martin” base included meteor-
ology, cosmic rays, seismology, hydrography and
zoology. A sledging program was carried on along
the coastal margin to the borders of Adélie Coast.
Astronomical control was obtained along the east-
tern half of the coast for use in identifying United
States Navy Operation Highjump aerial photo-
graphs which were later used in compiling maps
of this coast. Biological studies made at newly
discovered emperor penguin rookery at southern
end of Géologie Archipelago. Liotard’s party was
relieved by a 14 man party under Michel Barré
in January 1951. Reconnaissance of the coast was
made from Commandant Charcot and a depot laid
in Géologie Archipelago to assist additional bio-
logical and topographic studies in the area. Mag-
netic and astronomical observations were made
at Cape Denison. Journey to South Magnetic Pole
34
thwarted by tractor failure, but glacial and seis-
mic studies were successful on later journey about
200 miles south from the base. Sledge party trav-
ersed to Cape Pépin area. Fire destroyed main
buildings of “Port Martin” base in January 1952
at the time the relief ship Tottan called. A seven
man party under Mario Marret established another
base in the Géologie Archipelago and made an in-
tensive study of the nearby Emperor penquin
rookery. Astronomical control and survey work
completed along the western end of Adélie Coast.
Party evacuated in January 1953 by the Tottan.
1949-52. Norwegian — British - Swedish Antarctic
Expedition.
LEADER: Capt. John Giaever. Sup: Norsel.
Summary: Sponsored by Norsk Polarinstitutt, gov-
ernment grants from Norway, United Kingdom
and Sweden, Norske Geografiske Selskab, Royal
Geographical Society, and Svenska Sallskapet for
Anthropologi och Geografi. The Norsel left Lon-
don on November 23, 1949 for rendezvous with the
floating factory Thorshgvdi near the South Sand-
wich Islands, January 13, 1950; sledge dogs and
three “weasels” transshipped. Air reconnaissance
from February 1 to 3 led to landing in a small
bay about 40 miles northeast of Cape Norvegia.
On February 10, ‘““Maudheim,” the base, was estab-
lished on the ice shelf about two miles south of
the bay in 71°02’S., 10°55’W. During next few
days an air reconnaissance unit of five men and
two planes made numerous flights, sketching and
photographing the coast. The air unit and planes
returned north in the Norsel on February 20, leav-
ing a winter party of 15 men. The scientific pro-
gram was divided with Norwegians chiefly respon-
sible for topography and meteorology, British for
geology and Swedes for glaciology and aerial pho-
tography. Subsidiary base for scientific work was
set up about 185 miles south of the main base at
an elevation of about 5,000 feet, in 172°16’S.,
3°49’W., from which a party under Schytt made a
reconnaissance of the area in October and Novem-
ber 1950. The Norsel returned to Maudheim on
January 6, 1951, left three additional men and took
back one of the 1950-51 group, departing on Janu-
ary 30. The wintering party was reduced to 14 by
the accidental death of three members. Air op-
erations during this visit of the Norsel were held to
a minimum by foul weather and damage to one of
the two airplanes. The expedition was evacuated
on January 15, 1952 by the Norsel, which had ar-
rived on December 22, 1951. During the two field
seasons the extensive scientific program included
studies of ice, ice movement, snow accumulation,
an ice-cap thickness profile to about 74°20’S. on
the Greenwich meridian, geologic examination of
all mountains and larger nunataks north of
73°50’S. between 2°00’E., and 12°00’W., triangula-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
tion covering about 23,000 square miles and aerial
photography that should exteid the inland sur-
vey to about 38,000 square miles, physiological re-
actions of man to polar climates, geomagnetism
and aurora, surface and upper air meteorology.
1949-53. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey.
LEADER: V. E. Fuchs. Suips: John Biscoe, Sparrow,
Snipe and Burghead Bay.
SumMmMary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office.
Base A, Port Lockroy, evacuated and closed Feb-
ruary 1949. Reoccupied January 1950 to February
1951, and continuously since February 1952, prin-
cipally for meteorological and ionospheric obser-
vations, the latter beginning in February 1952 with
equipment transferred from Deception Island.
Four men were stationed at Base B, Deception
Island, to operate weather station and new power-
ful transmitter for improved communications.
Some geological and glaciological investigations as
well as soundings and charting were carried on.
Survivors of the fire at Base D, Hope Bay, were
evacuated in February 1949. The rebuilt base was
occupied in February 1952. In addition to
meteorology, the survey of James Ross Island was
completed and additional work done between Hope
Bay and Stonington Island, with some geological
work in both areas. A limited program of phys-
iological investigation was carried on. Severe
ice conditions prevented relief of personnel at
Base E, Stonington Island. Program at Stoning-
ton Island included study of emperor penguins on
De Dion Islets. A long sledge journey was made
through George VI Sound to open water at
Eklund Islands. Base E was evacuated and closed
by the John Biscoe in February 1950. Base F,
Argentine Islands, was staffed with four men who
operated a weather station and made short sur-
vey journeys in the vicinity under handicap of mild
weather and deteriorating ice. Base G, Admiralty
Bay, was staffed with six men (five in the winters
of 1951-53), who maintained weather observations,
rude geological and topographical surveys, and
carried on glaciological investigations. The Burg-
head Bay in February 1952 triangulated the inner
harbor of Admiralty Bay and made running sur-
veys of the seaward coasts of Deception Island,
Visca Anchorage, Admiralty Bay and Signy Island.
Four men (five from 1951 on) at Base H, Signy
Island, continued study of elephant seals, surveyed
the south side of Coronation Island, operated
weather station, and made investigations of geol-
ogy, tides, ice and fauna. Base M at Grytviken
was occupied in January 1950. Wintering parties
included five men in 1951, three in 1952, two in
1953. The program included meteorological and
sea ice observations, and twice-daily weather anal-
ysis and forecasts, December 1950 to March 1951,
and for a considerable period in 1952-53.
35
1950-51. National Institute of Oceanography Ex-
pedition (British).
LrapER: Dr. H. F. P. Herdman. Sup: Discovery II.
Summary: This sixth two-year commission of the
Discovery II, the first under the newly organized
National Institute of Oceanography, was designed
to complete the pre-war oceanographic work of the
Discovery Committee in the Antarctic. The ship
left England May 10, 1950, via Suez and the Indian
Ocean for Australia with work enroute. In Au-
gust a line of stations had been completed along
90°E. through the central Indian Ocean to the
edge of the pack ice. The remainder of 1950 was
devoted to work in waters east and south of Aus-
tralia and New Zealand with a cruise eastward in
November to 150°W., and thence south to the ice
edge which was skirted westward for 1,000 miles
before returning to Dunedin. A lack of data for
winter conditions was filled in by a winter circum-
polar cruise conducted in 1951.
1951-52. South Georgia Survey.
LEADER: Verner D. Carse. Suips: Various whaling
vessels.
Summary: A private British expedition, consisting
of a party of six, left Glasgow on September 16,
1951 in the whaling tanker Southern Opal and ar-
rived at Leith Harbor, South Georgia, November 1.
The object of the party was to map the south coast
from Cape Disappointment to King Haakon Bay,
and the interior south and west of Allardyce
Range. The next day a base was set up in the jail
at Grytviken. After making reconnaissance jour-
neys north and south of Cumberland Bay, the
party was taken on December 11 by the former
catcher Stina to Royal Bay where they landed with
supplies. Two sledges were man-hauled up Ross
Glacier, hampered by poor weather. Ross Pass
at the head of the glacier was reached on Decem-
ber 15, and the party descended toward the south
coast. Undine South Harbor was found to be
about ten miles southeast of its charted position.
Work was interrupted on January 1, 1952 when a
party member was injured in a fall down a crevasse,
necessitating a return to base. The return began
on January 3, but a food depot was first left about
five miles southeast of Undine South Harbor.
Cumberland Bay was reached three days later via
Ross Glacier, Cook Glacier and Nordenskjéld Gla-
cier, and on January 7 the catcher Skua took the
party to Grytviken. On January 25 the five
remaining members of the party were landed by
catcher at Fortuna Bay on the north coast. Poor
weather again made surveying difficult, but a short
journey was made west and north to the isthmus
between King Haakon Bay and Possession Bay.
The party returned to Stromness Bay at the end of
February. During the third week in March a four
man party was landed at Royal Bay to complete the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
work started in December. They failed to locate
the depot left on January 3 and had to return to
base a few days later. Meanwhile, Carse spent a
week aboard a sealer off the south coast making
compass controlled sketches of the bays, until
exceptionally bad weather brought the sealing
season to a sudden close. The party left South
Georgia for the United Kingdom in the Southern
Opal on April 18, 1952.
1953-54. South Georgia Survey.
LEADER: Verner D. Carse. Surps: Various whaling
vessels.
Summary: A private British expedition consisting
of Verner D. Carse, G. Smillie, A. Trendall and K.
Warburton left Glasgow in the whaling tanker
Polar Maid on August 29, 1953, arriving at Leith
Harbor in South Georgia on October 10. As in
1951, a base was set up in the jail at Grytviken. In
mid-October Carse made a brief preliminary recon-
“naissance around the northwestern end of the is-
land in the sealer Albatros, while Smillie and Tren-
dall did geological work in the Dartmouth Point
area of Cumberland East Bay. The first main
journey began on October 29 without Warburton,
who was ill at Grytviken, when Carse, Smillie and
Trendall were landed at Sunset Fjord in the Bay
of Isles. Next day they started up Brunonia
Glacier with two sledges. On November 5 they
reached its head and began the descent toward the
head of Ice Fjord. From this point on there was
little snow cover and they had to backpack all their
equipment. Turning northward, they travelled
along the rugged north coast of the island, reach-
ing the head of Right Whale Bay on November 14.
After ten days of survey and geological work in this
vicinity, the party returned to Brunonia Glacier.
From there they hoped to link their survey with
the 1951-52 survey to the east, but between De-
cember 3 and 16 continued bad weather prevented
this, and they were forced to withdraw to Ample
Bay in the Bay of Isles. The party returned to
Grytviken by sea on December 19. Later that
month Smillie and Trendall visited the east side of
Cumberland East Bay for four days’ survey and
geological work. Shortly after their return to base
Warburton had to be invalided home. The second
main journey began on January 11, 1954 when the
party landed about two miles west of Cape Vahsel
near the southeast extremity of the island. By
January 25 the party had traveiled southwest to
the vicinity close northeast of Drygalski Fjord.
There ten days were spent studying the geology
and making a local survey. On February 6 and 7
they travelled westward, intending to circle around
the head of Drygalski Fjord and extend the survey
toward Novosilski Bay. They were stopped short
by ridges which extend from Salvesen Range down
to the northern shore of Drygalski Fjord. Forced
36
to turn eastward again, they reached the coast at
Cooper Bay on February 16. The following day
they signalled a passing catcher and on the 18th
arrived back at Grytviken. Smillie returned home,
but Carse and Trendall remained in South Georgia
for two months, continuing the survey and geologi-
cal work. Favorable weather on March 9, 10 and
11 allowed them to land from a sealer on Annenkov
Island. Between March 23 and April 4 they com-
pleted the survey of the Cape Charlotte peninsula
on the southeast side of Royal Bay. They sailed
for home in the whaling tanker Southern Opal on
April 17, 1954. Lack of snow, poor weather and
the illness of one member of the party resulted in
curtailment of the original plans, necessitating
further work to complete the survey of the island.
1954-55. Argentine expedition.
LEADER: Capt. Luis R. A. Capurro.
San Martin.
Summary: The ship sailed south in late December
from Scotia Bay in the South Orkney Islands and
entered the eastern part of Weddell Sea, taking
advantage of ice conditions in that portion of the
sea. The frontal ice cliffs were quickly surveyed
and photographed from the ship and by helicopters
in the area between 33°E. and 45°E. A scientific
base was established in early January near the
head of Filchner Ice Shelf in about 78°00’S.,
38°33’W. Stancomb — Wills Ice Tongue was found
to be non-existent, and no major glaciers were
found by the expedition. A large open channel
was found to parallel the ice front. Following
completion of oceanographic, meteorologic and
astronomic observations, the ship retired north-
ward to the South Sandwich Islands.
Suip: General
1954-55. United States Government expedition.
LreapER: Cdr. Glen Jacobsen. Suir: Atka.
Summary: Sponsored by the United States Navy
and other government agencies. The ship sailed
south from the vicinity of Scott Island in early
January 1955 with a primary purpose of examining
a site for the main United States base to be estab-
lished as part of the International Geophysical
Year operations of 1957-58. A large section of the
Ross Ice Shelf forming the west side of the Bay of
Whales was noted as having cracked away and
drifted out to sea, rendering the former natural
harbor of little use at this time. Little America
IV, the site of United States Navy Operation High-
jump, 1946-47, was also found to have been broken
away. Failing in attempts to enter the ice-filled
Sulzberger Bay, the Atka returned to survey the
Kainan Bay area. Coastal reconnaissance was
also made along the Princess Martha Coast in the
region between 0°30’W. and 20°W., resulting in the
delineation of several bays and ice tongues asso-
ciated with the coastal ice cliffs in this area.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Geographic Names
The following list includes decisions of the
Board on Geographic Names, concurred in by the
Secretary of the Interior, to January 1956. The
names in capitals are official for United States
Government use.
Names following the words “not adopted” in-
clude variant spellings and applications other than
as approved. Such names are listed in italics and
cross referenced when they would not immediately
follow or precede the approved name in alphabeti-
cal order. Names that have been dropped are
listed in italics followed by the word VACATED.
Explanation of abbreviations follows the table of
contents.
AAGAARD GLACIER: glacier about 8 mi. long,
which lies close E. of East Gould Gl. and flows in
a southerly direction into Mill Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°47’S., 64°31’W.
Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE during December 1947. Named
by the FIDS for Bjarne Aagaard, Norwegian
authority on Antarctic whaling and exploration.
AAGAARD ISLANDS: group of islets about 1 mi.
W. of Proclamation I., along the coast of Enderby
Land; in about 65°50’S., 53°37’E. Disc. in Janu-
ary 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson and
named for Bjarne Aagaard. Not adopted: Bjarne
Aagaard Islands, Bjarne-Aagaard Islands.
ABBOTT, MOUNT: mountain about 3,000 ft. in
el., which lies SW. of Mt. Melbourne and surmounts
the southward projecting peninsula terminating
in the Northern Foothills on the W. side of Terra
Nova Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 74°50’S.,
163°45’E. Probably first sighted by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott. Named by the BrAH, 1910-
13, under Scott for Petty Officer George P. Abbott,
RN, member of the latter expedition.
Ablation Bay: see Ablation Valley.
ABLATION POINT: the E. extremity of a hook-
shaped rock ridge, about 1,800 ft. in el., marking
the N. side of the entrance to Ablation Valley on
the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 70°48’S.,
68°22’W. The point was first photographed from
the air on Noy. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and
was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G.
Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949 by
the FIDS. Named by FIDS after nearby Ablation
Valley.
37
ABLATION VALLEY: a mainly ice-free valley on
the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 4 mi. long
and 2 mi. wide, which lies immediately S. of Abla-
tion Pt. and opens on George VI Sound; in 70°48’S.,
68°26’W. This feature was first photographed
from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth,
and was mapped from these photographs by
W.L.G. Joerg. It was first visited and surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and so named
by them because of the relatively small amounts
of snow and ice found there. Not adopted:
Ablation Bay.
ABRAHAMSEN, POINT: point which separates
Lighthouse Bay and Prince Olav Hbr., the two
western arms of Cook Bay, on the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Charted by DI per-
sonnelin 1929. Probably named for Captain Abra-
hamsen, manager of the whaling station at Prince
Olav Hbr. at that time.
ACTIVE SOUND: sound, averaging about 2 mi.
wide, extending in an ENE. direction from Ant-
arctic Sound and joining the Firth of Tay with
which it separates Joinville and Dundee Islands;
in 63°25’S., 56°10’W. Disc. in 1892-93 by Capt.
Thomas Robertson of the Dundee whaling expe-
dition. Robertson named the feature after his
ship, the Active, first vessel to navigate the sound.
ACUNA ISLET: islet which lies 0.2 mi. S. of Point
Rae, off the S. coast of Laurie I. in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°37’W. Charted by the
ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named by him
for H. Acuna, pioneer Argentine meteorologist at
the South Orkney station. Not adopted: Acuna
Island, Delta Island.
ADAM, MOUNT: mountain about 10,000 ft. in
el., which lies SW. of Mt. Wright in the Admiralty
Range in Victoria Land; in about 71°25’S.,
169°00’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross, and named by him for V. Adm. Sir
Charles Adam, Senior Naval Lord of the Admiralty
and Commander-in-Chief in the West Indies. Not
adopted: Mount Adams.
ADAMS, CAPE: abrupt rock scarp marking the
S. tip of Bowman Pen. and forming the N. side of
the entrance to Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 75°04’S., 62°20’W. Disc. by the
RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and named by him
for Lt. Charles J. Adams of the then USAAF, pilot
with the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Charles
J. Adams.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ADAMS, MOUNT: peak about 11,800 ft. in el.,
which marks the summit of the mountain mass
immediately S. of Bingley Gl. on the W. side of
Beardmore Gl.; in about 84°26’S., 166°45’E. The
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, originally gave
the name Adams Mountains to the partially-
defined mountains immediately S. of Bingley Gl.
The BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, restricted the
name Adams to the highest peak in these moun-
tains, the peak serving as an easily identifiable
landmark. Named for Lt. Jameson B. Adams,
RNR, second-in-command of Shackleton’s expedi-
tion. Not adopted: Adams Mountains.
Adams Glacier: see John Quincy Adams Glacier.
ADAMS ISLET: small rocky islet embedded in
thick bay ice most of the year, lying at the W. side
of McDonald Bay, about 9 mi. W. of Mabus Pt.,
off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°31’S., 92°52’E.
Disc. and charted by the Western Base Party of
the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and named by
him for the boatswain on the exp. ship Aurora.
Not adopted: Adams Island.
ADARE, CAPE: cape which marks the NE.
extremity of Victoria Land and the E. side of the
entrance to Robertson Bay; in about 71°17’S.,
170°15’E. Disc. in 1831 by a Br. exp. under Ross,
and named by him for his friend Viscount Adare,
M.P.
ADELAIDE ISLAND: large island, about 70 mi.
long in a NESW. direction and 20 mi. wide, lying
N. of Marguerite Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°15’S., 68°40’W. Disc. on Feb. 14, 1832
by a Br. exp. under Biscoe, and named by him for
Queen Adelaide of England. The island was first
surveyed by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot.
ADELIE COAST: that portion of the coast of
Antarctica lying between the ice-covered cape in
136°12’E., and Point Alden, in 142°02’E. Disc. in
January 1840 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, and
named by him for his wife. Not adopted: Adélie
Land.
Adélie Land: see Adélie Coast.
ADIE INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 10 mi. long
in a NW.-SE. direction, lying E. of the base of
Churchill Pen. along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 66°18’S., 62°35’W. Charted by the FIDS and
photographed from the air by the RARE during
1947. Named by the FIDS for R. J. Adie, South
African geologist with the exp., 1947-49.
A. Ditte, Mount: see Ditte, Mount.
Admiralitats Gebirge: see Admiralty Range.
38
ADMIRALTY BAY: irregular bay, about 4 mi.
wide at its entrance, indenting the S. coast of King
George I. for about 10 mi., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°25’W. The name appears on
an 1822 map of the Br. sealing exp., 1821, under
Powell, and is now established international usage.
Not adopted: Baie de lAmirauté [French].
Admiralty Inlet: see Admiralty Sound.
ADMIRALTY RANGE: extensive mountain
range, with peaks above 10,000 ft. in el., along the
N. and NE. coast of Victoria Land; in about
71°20’S., 168°30’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross, and named by him for the Lords of
the Admiralty under whose orders the exp. sailed.
Not adopted: Admiralitats Gebirge [German].
ADMIRALTY SOUND: a sound which extends
in a NESW. direction and separates Seymour
and Snow Hill Islands from James Ross I., off the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°20’S., 57°10’W.
The broad NE. part of the sound was named Ad-
miralty Inlet by the Br. exp. under Ross, who disc.
it on Jan. 6, 1843. The feature was determined to
be a sound in March 1902 by the SwedAE under
Nordenskj6ld. Not adopted: Admiralty Inlet,
Détroit de ’ Amirauté [French].
Adolph Ochs Glacier: see Ochs Glacier.
ADRIASOLA, CAPE: rock outcrop marking the
SW. end of Adelaide I., off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°37’S., 69°20’W. Disc. by the FrAE,
1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for
an acquaintance in Punta Arenas. Not adopted:
Adriasola Cape.
Adventure Bay; Adventure Harbor: see Undine
Harbor.
Aetna Insel: see Etna Island.
AGASSIZ, CAPE: the E. tip of Hollick-Kenyon
Pen., a narrow ice-drowned spur extending E. from
the main mountain axis of Palmer Pen.; in 68°30’S.,
62°58’W. Disc. in December 1940 by the USAS
who named it for W. L. G. Joerg, geographer and
polar specialist. At his request it was named by
the US-ACAN for Louis Agassiz, internationally
famous American naturalist and geologist of Swiss
origin, who first propounded the theory of conti-
nental glaciation. Not adopted: Cape Joerg.
AHLMANN GLACIER: southernmost of two gla-
ciers flowing E. into Seligman Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 65°45’W. The
glacier was photographed from the air in 1940 by
the USAS. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who
named it for Prof. Hans Wilhelmsson Ahlmann,
Swedish glaciologist and geographer.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Aidwich, Mount: see Aldrich, Mount.
Aiguille de Astrolabe: see Astrolabe Needle.
AILSA CRAIG: precipitous islet about 1 mi. S.
of Point Rae, off the S. coast of Laurie I. in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 44°37’W. Charted
by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named
by him after the island in the Firth of Clyde in
Scotland. Not adopted: Ailsa Craig Islet.
AINSWORTH BAY: open bay lying between
Capes Bage and Webb, along George V Coast; in
about 67°48’S., 146°45’E. Disc. in 1912 by the
Main Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and
named, by him for G. F. Ainsworth, who served as
leader and meteorologist with the AAE party based
on Macquarie Island during 1911-13.
AITCHO ISLANDS: group of small islands lying
between Table and Dee Islands and extending
across the central part of the N. entrance to Eng-
lish Str., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°23’S.,
59°50’W. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II. The name appears to have been first
used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon this
survey.
AITKEN COVE: cove which lies immediately NE.
of Cape Whitson, along the S. coast of Laurie I.
in South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°32’W.
Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and
named by him for A. N. G. Aitken, solicitor to the
expedition.
Akar Peaks; Aker Range: see Aker Peaks.
AKERLUNDH NUNATAK: nunatak which lies 1
mi. NW. of Donald Nunatak and midway between
Bruce and Burn Murdoch Nunataks in the Seal
Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°04’S., 60°11’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS,
who named it for Gustaf Akerlundh, a member of
the SwedAE, 1901-4.
AKER PEAKS: series of mainly snow-covered
peaks, the highest about 5,900 ft. in el. They rise
WNW. of Edward VIII Bay in Enderby Land and
extend about 30 mi. in a NW.-SE. direction; in
about 66°43’S., 55°20’E. Disc. on Jan. 14, 1931 by
a Nor. whaling exp. under O. Borchgrevink, and
named by him for the farm of Dir. Svend Foyn
Bruun of the Antarctic Whaling Co. at Ténsberg.
Not adopted: Akar Peaks, Aker Range.
ALAMODE ISLAND: largest and southeastern-
most of the Terra Firma Is., with steep rocky cliffs
surmounted by a rock and snow cone rising to
about 1,100 ft. in el., lying in Marguerite Bay off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°43’S., 67°32’W.
39
First visited and surveyed by the BGLE under
Rymill in 1936. So named by the FIDS, following
a 1948 resurvey, for its resemblance to some form of
confection served with ice cream on it.
Alan Thomson, Mount: see Allan Thomson,
Mount.
ALBANUS GLACIER: valley glacier about 8 mi.
wide and of undetermined length which flows W.
between the Tapley Mtns., on the N., and Mounts
Danforth and Zanuck, on the S., in the Queen
Maud Range, and enters Robert Scott Gl. about,
20 mi. S. of where it merges with the head of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 85°50’S., 150°00’E. Disc. in De-
cember 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under
Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Albanus
Phillips, Jr., manufacturer of Cambridge, Md.,
and patron of the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of
1928-30 and 1933-35. Not adopted: Phillips
Glacier.
Albatros Insel: see Albatross Island.
ALBATROSS ISLAND: island about 2 mi. SE. of
Cape Buller, lying in the Bay of Isles, South
Georgia; in about 54°02’S., 37°20’W. Charted in
1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American
naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who gave this
name because he observed albatrosses there. Not
adopted: Albatros Insel [German], Albatross Islet.
ALBERT DE MONACO, CAPE: cape which forms
the SW. tip of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°42’S., 64°15’W. Disc. by a Ger. exp., 1873-74,
under Dallmann, but its relationship to Anvers I.
was not known at that time. It was later charted
by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named
by him for Prince Albert de Monaco, a patron of
the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Monaco.
ALBERT MARKHAM, MOUNT: striking, flat-
topped mountain, about 10,000 ft. in el., standing
W. of Beaumont Bay and the Ross Ice Shelf; in
about 81°25’S., 158°00’E. Disc. in December 1902
by the BrNAE under Scott, and named by him for
Adm. Sir Albert Markham, a member of the Ship
Committee for the expedition.
ALBRECHT PENCK GLACIER: short, deeply en-
trenched glacier which is a southern tributary of
Fry Gl., on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about
76°40’S., 162°30’E. First charted by the BrAH,
1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Dr.
Albrecht Penck, internationally known geographer,
who at that time was Dir. of the Inst. for Oceanog-
raphy and of the Geographical Inst. in Berlin.
The US-ACAN added the Christian name to the
surname to differentiate this feature from Penck
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Glacier on the Luitpold Coast.
Penck Glacier.
Not adopted.
ALDEN, POINT: ice-covered point with rock ex-
posures along its seaward side, lying at the W. side
of the entrance to Commonwealth Bay, and mark-
ing the physical division between Adélie Coast
and George V Coast; in about 66°49’S., 142°02’E.
Disc. on Jan. 30, 1840 by the USEE under Wilkes,
and named by him for Lt. James Alden on the
USEE flagship Vincennes.
ALDRICH, MOUNT: mountain about 8,050 ft.
in el., which stands W. of Cape Kerr in the Britan-
nia Range, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in
about 80°06’S., 158°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, and named by him for Adm.
Pelham Aldrich, who gave assistance to Scott in
preparing the expedition. Not adopted: Mount
Aidwich, Mount Aldwich.
Aldwich, Mount: see Aldrich, Mount.
ALECTORIA ISLET: low islet about 0.5 mi. off
the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen. and some 10 mi.
SW. of Pitt Pt., lying in Prince Gustav Chan.; in
63°59’S., 58°37’W. Disc. in 1945 by the FIDS, who
named it after the lichen Alectoria which was pre-
dominant on the islet at the time.
ALENCAR PEAK: peak about 5,100 ft. in el.,
which lies 4.8 mi. E. of Mt. Rio Branco and is the
more easterly of two snow-capped peaks situated
toward the NW. end of the ridge separating Trooz
Gl. from Beascochea Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in about 65°27’S., 63°50’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him
for Adm. Alexandrino de Alencar, at that time Min-
ister of Marine of Brazil. Not adopted: Mount De
Alencar.
ALERT ROCK: submerged rock marked by break-
ers, lying about 1.5 mi. ESE. of Barff Pt., the E. side
of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia;
in 54°14’S., 36°22’W. Charted in 1929 by DI per-
sonnel, who named it after the Alert, a small motor
launch used during the survey.
ALEXANDER, CAPE: cape which forms the S.
end of Churchill Pen. and the E. side of the entrance
to Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
66°44’S., 62°37’/W. Charted by the FIDS and pho-
tographed from the air by the RARE in December
1947. Named by the FIDS for Rt. Hon. Albert V.
Alexander, M.P., First Lord of the Admiralty. Not
adopted: Cape Foyn.
ALEXANDER HUMBOLDT MOUNTAINS: ma-
jor range of the Wohlthat Mtns. in New Schwaben-
land which extends some 30 mi. in a N.-S. direction
40
and rises to about 10,500 ft. in elevation. The range
is separated from Petermann Range to the E. by
the Humboldt Graben; in about 71°45’S., 11°30’E.
Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and
named by them for Alexander von Humboldt, famed
German naturalist and geographer of the first half
of the nineteenth century. Not adopted: Alexan-
der v. Humboldt-Gebirge [German].
ALEXANDER I ISLAND: large island lying W.
of the base of Palmer Pen., from which it is sep-
arated by Marguerite Bay and George VI Sound;
in 71°S., 70°W. Shaped like the letter J, it is about
235 mi. long in a N.S. direction, 50 mi. wide in the
N., and 150 mi. wide in the S. Disc. in 1821 by a
Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who named it
Alexander I Land after the reigning Tsar. Its
insular nature was proven in December 1940 by a
sledge party under Finn Ronne of the USAS. Not
adopted: Alexander Land, Alexander I Land.
Alexander Land: see Alexander I Island.
Alexander Wetmore Glacier: Wetmore
Glacier.
see
Alexander v. Humboldt-Gebirge: see Alexander
Humboldt Mtns.
ALEXANDRA, CAPE: cape which forms the NW.
tip of South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 38°02’W. This
cape was named Cape North in 1775 by a Br. exp.
under Cook, but the name given by Cook has since
become established for the cape about 10 mi. ENE.
which forms the northernmost point of South
Georgia. The name Cape Alexandra dates back to
about 1912 and probable commemorates Queen
Alexandra of England. Not adopted: Cape North
(q.v.).
ALEXANDRA, CAPE: cape which forms the SE.
tip of Adelaide I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 67°45’S., 68°36’W. Disc. on Jan. 14, 1909 by the
FrAE under Charcot, and named by him for Alex-
andra, then Queen of England.
ALEXANDRA MOUNTAINS: series of low, sep-
arated mountains in the NE. portion of Edward VII
Pen.; in about 77°30’S., 152°00’W. Disc. in Jan-
uary—February 1902 by the BrNAE, under Scott,
during an exploratory cruise of the Discovery along
Ross Ice Shelf. Named for: Alexandra, then Queen
of England. Not to be confused with the Queen
Alexandra Range in 84°S., 169°E. Not adopted:
Alexandria Mountains.
Alexandra Mountains; Alexandra Range: see
Queen Alexandra Range.
Alexandria Mountains: see Alexandra Mountains.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Alfa, Isla: see Alpha Island.
ALFRED, MOUNT: ice-capped mountain, about
7,400 ft. in el., standing 5.5 mi. inland from George
VI Sound and 8 mi. SSE. of Mt. Athelstan in the
Douglas Range of Alexander I Island; in 70°18’S.,
69°14’"W. This mountain was first photographed
from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth,
and was mapped from these photographs by
W.L.G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by
the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 and
1949 by the FIDS, who named it after Alfred, Saxon
king of England, 871-899.
ALICE CREEK: cove forming the southernmost
portion of Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the FrAE,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for the
wife of Edouard Lockroy, vice pres. of the French
Chamber of Deputies who assisted Charcot in ob-
taining govt. support for the expedition.
ALICE GADE, MOUNT: mountain about 11,300
ft. in el., which marks the highest peak of an ex-
tensive broken massif forming the SE. flank of
Isaiah Bowman Gl., standing in the Queen Maud
Range near the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
85°50’S., 162°00’W. Disc. in November 1911 by the
Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for
one of the daughters of the Norwegian minister to
Brazil, a strong supporter of Amundsen.
Alice Wedel-Jarlsberg,
Mount.
Wedel-Jarlsberg: see
Allan McDonald Glacier: see McDonald Glacier.
ALLAN THOMSON, MOUNT: conspicuous moun-
tain surmounted by a dark peak about 4,200 ft.
in el.; stands at the N. side of Mackay Gl. and about
4 mi. W. of the mouth of Cleveland Gl., in Vic-
toria Land; in about 76°57’S., 161°47’E. Charted
by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Named by
the exp. for Dr. J. Allan Thomson, British geolo-
gist. Not adopted: Mount Alan Thomson.
Allardyce Harbor: see Rosita Harbor.
ALLARDYCE RANGE: mountain range attain-
ing a maximum elevation of 9,200 ft. in Mt. Paget,
rising S. of Cumberland Bay in the central part
of South Georgia; in about 54°25’S., 36°33’W. Al-
though not shown on the charts of South Georgia
by Cook in 1775 or Bellingshausen in 1819, peaks
of this range were probably sighted by those ex-
plorers. Named in about 1915, for Sir William
L. Allardyce, Gov. of the Falkland Islands, 1904-14.
ALLEGHENY MOUNTAINS: group of moun-
tains, about 4,000 ft. in el., between the upper part
of Boyd Gl. and its northern tributary, in the
424589 O-57-4
41
Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about
77°15’/S., 143°08’W. Disc. on aerial flights made in
1934 by the ByrdAE, and mapped from aerial
flights and ground surveys made by the USAS,
1939-41. Named by the USAS for Allegheny Col-
lege, Meadville, Pa., alma mater of Paul Siple,
leader of the USAS West Base.
ALLEN, CAPE: cape which lies close W of Mt.
Hope and marks the W. side of the mouth of Beard-
more Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
83°33’S., 170°45’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE,
1907-9, under Shackleton, probably for Sir James
Allen, M.P., New Zealand statesman who assisted
in obtaining support for the expedition.
ALLEN BAY: semi-circular bay about 1 mi. wide,
lying NW. of Larsen Pt. at the N. side of the en-
trance to Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia;
in 54°11’S., 36°31’W. Charted in 1926 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery, and named by them prob-
ably for H. T. Allen, member of the Discovery Com-
mittee at that time.
ALLEN POINT: the SE. point of Montagu I., in
the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°29’S., 26°15’W.
Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. Charted
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and
named for H. T. Allen.
ALLEN YOUNG, MOUNT: mountain about 9,450
ft. in el., which rises about 10 mi. WSW. of Cape
Maude and Mt. Asquith in the Queen Alexandra
Range, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
83°23’S., 167°25’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1902-9,
under Shackleton, and named by him for Sir Allen
Young, polar explorer who led the successful
search for Benjamin Leigh Smith in 1882.
ALLIGATOR ISLET: steep, rocky islet, about 0.5
mi. long and about 200 yards wide, rising about
500 ft. above the Shackleton Ice Shelf, and lying
in the Bay of Winds about 4 mi. W. of Jones Rocks,
off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°33’S., 97°33’E.
Disc. by the Western Base Party of the AAE under
Mawson, 1911-14, who so named it because of its
shape. Not adopted: Alligator Island.
All Johannesens Point: see Johannesen Point.
ALLO, MOUNT: conspicuous, conical, snow-
covered peak about 2,000 ft. in el., which rises from
Cape Neyt near the NE. end of Liége I., in the
Palmer Arch; in about 63°59’S., 61°46’W. Disc.
and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache.
Alma McCoy, Mount: see McCoy, Mount.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ALMOND POINT: rocky point forming the E.
side of the entrance to Whitecloud Cove at the
head of Charcot Bay, on the NW. side of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°51’S., 59°24’W. Charted in
1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because
of its distinctive shape.
ALPHA ISLAND: small islet lying between Epsi-
lon I. and Delta I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer
Arch.; in 64’19°S., 63°00’W. The name Alpha, de-
rived from the first letter of the Greek alphabet,
was probably given by DI personnel who roughly
surveyed the islet in 1927. The islet was sur-
veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943, and
1948. Not adopted: Isla Alfa [Spanish], Isla
Huidobro [Spanish].
Alzogaray, Islas: see Theta Islets.
AMELANG PLATFORM: a relatively flat-topped
upland platform, about 11,500 ft. in el., projecting
N. from the polar plateau and overlooking the New
Schwabenland piedmont; in about 73°50’S., 5°15’W.
Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and
named by them for Herbert Amelang, first officer
of the exp. ship Schwabenland.
American Geographical Society Bay: see Gard-
ner Inlet.
AMERICAN HIGHLAND: that portion of Ant-
arctica back of the Ingrid Christensen Coast, con-
sisting of an upland area of undetermined physical
extent with an elevation of about 7,500 feet; in
about 72°S, 79°E. Disc. and named by Lincoln
Ellsworth on Jan. 11, 1939, in an aerial flight from
his ship, the Wyatt Earp.
AMERY ICE SHELF: broad ice shelf along Lars
Christensen Coast between MacKenzie Bay and
Prydz Bay; in about 69°S., 72°H. Cape Amery was
applied to a coastal angle mapped in an aerial
flight on Feb. 11, 1931, by the BANZARE. Since
this now appears to be an ice shelf, the name is
applied to the whole shelf. Probably named for
William B. Amery, Rep. of the United Kingdom
in Australia, 1925-28. Not adopted: Amery Shelf
NCE:
Amery Shelf Ice: see Amery Ice Shelf.
Ames Glacier: see Boyd Glacier.
AMES RANGE: range of isolated, snow-covered,
flat-topped, steep-sided mountains, lying along the
W. shore of Wrigley Gulf in Marie Byrd Land; in
about 75°30’S., 131°00’W. Disc. by the USAS,
1939-41, and named by Byrd for Joseph Ames,
father-in-law of R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, leader
of the expedition. Not adopted: Joseph Ames
Range.
42
AMIOT ISLANDS: group of islets bordered by
southwestward-extending reefs, about 14 mi.
WNW. of Cape Adriasola, Adelaide I.; in 67°32’S.,
69°55’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char-
cot, and named by him for A. Amiot, engineering
director of the French Montevideo Co., Montevideo,
Uruguay, which made repairs on the exp. ship
Pourquoi-Pas?.
Amirauté, Baie de l’: see Admiralty Bay.
Amirauté, Détroit de ’: see Admiralty Sound.
AMPHIBOLITE POINT: conspicuous, pyramidal
point nearly 2 mi. NW. of Saunders Pt. on the S.
coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in
60°41’S., 45°22’W. Named by the FIDS following
their survey of 1948-49. There is a large amount
of amphibolite on this point.
AMPHITHEATRE, THE: large bowl-shaped de-
pression, about 0.75 mi. in diameter, at the S. side
of the head of Northeast Gl. on Palmer Pen.; in
68°06’S., 66°34’°W. The feature lies adjacent to
former bases of the BGLE, 1934-37, and the USAS,
1939-41, and was charted by USAS sledging parties
which crossed Palmer Pen. via Northeast Gl. and
Bills Gulch. Named by the FIDS following its
survey in 1946.
AMPLE BAY: bay about 1.8 mi. wide, marked
by Grace Gl. at its head, situated about 2 mi. E.
of Sunset Fjord in the SW. part of the Bay of
Isles, South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°23’W. A
sketch of this bay was made in 1912-13 by Robert
Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the
brig Daisy. The bay was named by DI personnel
who charted it in 1929-30.
AMUNDSEN, MOUNT: rocky summit about
4,000 ft. in el., protruding above the icecap about
10 mi. NNE. of Mt. Sandow, at the E. side of Den-
man Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°18’S.,
100°20’E. Disc. in December 1912 by Frank Wild
and other members of the Western Base part of
the AAE under Mawson. Named by Mawson for
Roald Amundsen, Norwegian polar explorer and
the first to attain the South Pole.
Amundsen Bay: see Ice Bay.
AMUNDSEN GLACIER: major glacier about 3
to 6 mi. wide and over 60 mi. long, which descends
from the south polar plateau between Mt. Helmer
Hanssen and the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. and flows
N. to the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°35’S.,
159°20’W. Disc. in November 1929 by R. Adm.
Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole.
Named for Roald Amundsen by Laurence Gould,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
leader of the ByrdAE geological party which
sledged across the terminal flow of this glacier
in December 1929.
AMUNDSEN SEA: marginal sea off the coast of
Antarctica between Thurston Pen., which termi-
nates in about 71°50’S., 100°50’W., and Cape Dart,
in about 73°10’S., 123°00’W. Named for Roald
Amundsen by a Nor. exp. under Nils Larsen which
explored this area in February 1929. Not adopted:
Franklin D. Roosevelt Sea, Roald Amundsen Sea.
Amy Guest Island: see Guest Island.
ANCHORAGE BAY: small bay in the W. side of
Fortuna Bay, about 2 mi. S. of Cape Best, along
the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°49’ W.
Charted in 1929-30 by DI personnel and so named
by them because it affords good anchorage.
ANCHORAGE ISLET: islet which lies in the
Léonie Is., about 0.5 mi. SE. of Lagoon Islet, off the
SE. portion of Adelaide I. and the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 67°36’S., 68°13’W. Disc. by the
FrAEK under Charcot, 1908-10. Named by the
BGLE under Rymill, who visited this islet in Febru-
ary 1936.
ANDERSEN HARBOR: small harbor in the Mel-
chior Is., Palmer Arch., formed by the concave W.
side of Eta I. and the N. end of Omega I.; in
64°19’S., 62°56’W. The name appears on a chart
based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel, but
this may reflect an earlier naming by whalers.
The harbor was surveyed by Argentine expeditions
in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Puerto
Andersen [Spanish].
Andersen, Puerto: see Andersen Harbor.
ANDERSON, CAPE: cape which marks the E.
side of the entrance to Mill Cove on the S. coast
of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S.,
44°34’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce,
1902-4, and named by him for his secretary, Nan
Anderson. Not adopted: Cape Nan Anderson.
ANDERSON GLACIER: heavily crevassed gla-
cier, about 12 mi. long, flowing SSE. into the W.
side of Cabinet Inlet between Cape Casey and
Balder Pt., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
66°24’S., 63°55’W. Charted by the FIDS and pho-
tographed from the air by the RARE in December
1947. Named by the FIDS for Sir John Anderson,
M.P., Lord Pres. of the Council and member of
the British War Cabinet.
ANDERSON ICEFALLS: an icefall terminating
in a cliff face about 100 ft. in el. and 5 mi. wide,
lying SE. of Atkinson Cliffs along the N. coast of
43
Victoria Land; in about 71°21’S., 169°00’E.
Charted in 1911 by Cdr. Victor L. A. Campbell’s
Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. Named
by the BrAE, probably for Mr. Anderson of the firm
of John Anderson and Sons, engineers, who owned
Lyttelton Foundry, and who took great interest
in the expedition. Not adopted: Anderson Ice
Falls.
ANDERSSON ISLAND: island about 9 mi. long
and 4 mi. wide which lies 1 mi. S. of Jonassen I.
at the W. side of the S. entrance to Antarctic
Sound, off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°35’S.,
56°35’W. This island was named Uruguay Island
by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, after
the Argentine ship Uruguay which participated in
the rescue of the shipwrecked SwedAE in 1903.
In 1904, the FrAE under Charcot, apparently un-
aware of the Swedish naming, gave the name
Uruguay to an island off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen. Since it is confusing to have two islands in
close proximity identically named, and because
Charcot’s Uruguay Island has appeared more
widely on maps and in reports, the US-ACAN
accepts the decision of the Br-APC that the name
given this island by Nordenskjéld be altered. The
new name commemorates J. Gunnar Andersson,
who was second-in-command of Nordenskjéld’s
expedition. Not adopted: Uruguay Island.
ANDERSSON NUNATAK: nunatak which stands
above the coastal ice cliffs on the NW. shore of
Hope Bay, about 1 mi. W. of Sheppard Pt., at the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°22’S., 57°00’W. -
Disc. by J. Gunnar Andersson’s party of the
SwedAE, which wintered at Hope Bay in 1903.
Named for Andersson by the FIDS following their
survey of the area in 1945.
ANDERSSON PEAK: ice-capped peak, about
4,000 ft. in el., with rocky exposures on its E. side,
lying some 7 mi. N. of Cape Fairweather on the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°53’S., 61°03’W.
Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, and named by them
for Karl Andreas Andersson, zoologist with the
SwedAE, who explored along this coast in 1902.
ANDRESEN ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long
and about 1,300 ft. in el., which lies at the SE. side
of Detaille It. in the N. part of Lallemand Fjord,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°56’S.,
66°36W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char-
cot, and named by him for the manager of the
Magellan Whaling Co. at the company’s Deception
I. base, who provided coal for the expedition.
ANDREW GLACIER: glacier about 1.5 mi. wide,
which lies 8. of Cape Kater and flows in an ENE.
direction to the W. side of Charcot Bay, on the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°50’S.,
59°40’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS, and
named by them for Dr. J. D. Andrew, medical
officer at the expedition’s Hope Bay base in 1946-47.
ANDREW JACKSON, MOUNT: a massive moun-
tain rising to about 13,750 ft. in el. and dominating
the upland in the southern part of Palmer Pen.; in
about 71°30’S., 63°30’W. It rises to a majestic
summit peak on the S. and E., while the N. flank
is occupied by a vast cirque. Disc. by members
of the USAS, 1939-41, in aerial flights, and sighted
by the ground survey party on the plateau.
Named by USAS for Andrew Jackson, Pres. of the
United States, 1829-42, who signed the bill author-
izing the USEE, 1838-42, led by Lt. Charles Wilkes,
USN. Not adopted: Mount Ernest Gruening.
ANDREWS POINT: point:at the E. side of the
entrance to Inverleith Hbr. on the NE. coast of
Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 62°50’W.
Charted and named in 1927 by DI personnel on
the Discovery.
ANDVORD BAY: bay about 5 mi. long and 3 mi.
wide, which lies between Cape Van Beneden and
Cape Lacaze-Duthiers along the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 64°49’S., 62°42’W. Disc. by the BelgAE,
1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for
Rolf Andvord, Belgian consul at Christiania at that
time. Not adopted: Andword Bay.
Andword Bay: see Andvord Bay.
Anglais, Détroit: see English Strait.
ANGOT POINT: point which marks the S. tip
of Hoseason I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 63°49’S.,
61°43’W. Named by the FrAE under Charcot,
1903-5, for Alfred Angot, Asst. Dir. of the French
Meteorological Service and member of the com-
mission which published the scientific results of
the expedition.
ANILINE ISLET: small, flat-topped, rocky islet,
about 15 ft. in el., lying 1 mi. SSW. of Dartmouth
Pt. and about 150 yards off the E. shore of Moraine
Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°28’W. The
islet appears on earlier charts, but the name was
given by FIDS in 1951 following a sketch survey.
The name is one of a group in the vicinity of Dart-
mouth Pt., derived from the chemical stains used
in the preparation of histological examination of
biological material collected by FIDS.
ANN, CAPE: projecting cape on the coast of
Enderby Land, surmounted by Mt. Biscoe which
rises to over 1,500 ft. in el., about 66°13’S., 51°17’E.
Photographed from the air on Dec. 22, 1929 by a
Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen in a flight from the
44
Norvegia, and on Jan. 14, 1930 photographed from
the Discovery by the BANZARE under Mawson.
Both expeditions believed the peak rising above
the cape to be the same as that disc. on March 16,
1831 and named Cape Ann by a Br. exp. under
Biscoe. The name Cape Ann, probably after Bis-
coe’s wife, has been retained for the projecting
cape; the surmounting peak was named Mt. Biscoe
by Mawson. Not adopted: Cape Anne.
ANNA, CAPE: prominent black cliff, about 2,000
ft. in el., forming the N. tip of Arctowski Pen., on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°36’S., 62°26’W.
Disc. and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under
De Gerlache.
Anne, Cape: see Ann, Cape.
ANNE, CAPE: point which marks the SE. ex-
tremity of Coulman I., located in the Ross Sea near
the coast of Victoria Land; in about 73°35’S.,
170°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross,
and named by him for his wife.
ANNE, MOUNT: mountain about 10,270 ft. in
el., which stands on the S. side of Socks Gl. and
W. of Beardmore Gl. in the Queen Alexandra
Range; in about 83°56’S., 169°20’E. Disc. and
named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton.
ANNENKOV ISLAND: irregularly-shaped island
about 4 mi. long and about 2,000 ft. in el., lying
some 8 mi. off the south-central coast of South
Georgia; in about 54°29’S., 37°05’W. Disc. in
January 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named
it Pickersgills Island for Lt. Richard Pickersgill of
the exp. ship Resolution. It was resighted in 1819
by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who, think-
ing he was the discoverer of the island, named it
Annenkov Island for Lt. Mikhail Annenkov, officer
on the exp. ship Mirnyy. The island has since
retained the name Annenkov; the name Pickers-
gill has become established for a group of islands
15 mi. to the southeast. Not adopted: Annenkow
Insel [German], Annenkov Islands, Pickersgills
Island.
Annenkow Insel: see Annenkovy Island.
ANN ISLAND: islet in the Debenham Is., lying
SE. of Barbara I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°08’S., 67°06’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill, and named by him for a daughter
of Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE
Advisory Committee.
Ann Shirley, Mount: see Shirley, Mount.
Anse des Baleiniers: see Whalers Bay.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ANTARCTICA: continent, together with the is-
lands rising from the continental block, centering
roughly on the South Pole and lying almost wholly
within the Antarctic Circle. It is a relatively high
and compact mass, and is snow covered except for
the protruding peaks of mountains and mountain
ranges. Not adopted: Antarctic Continent, Ant-
arktika [German].
Antarctic Archipelago: see Palmer Archipelago.
ANTARCTIC BAY: bay about 2 mi. wide which
recedes SW. about 4 mi., lying midway between
Possession and Fortuna Bays along the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 36°57’W. Probably
first sighted by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. It
was explored in 1902 by members of the SwedAE,
under Nordenskjold, who named it for their ship,
the Antarctic.
Antarctic Continent: see Antarctica.
ANTARCTIC CONVERGENCE: a line encircling
Antarctica where the cold, northward-flowing Ant-
arctic waters sink beneath the relatively warmer
water of the sub-Antarctic. The line is actually
a zone approximately 20 to 30 miles wide, varying
somewhat in latitude in different longitudes, ex-
tending across the Atlantic, Pacific and Indian
Oceans between the 48th and 61st parallels of south
latitude. The precise location at any given place
and time is made evident by the sudden change in
surface temperature which averages five to ten de-
grees Fahrenheit. Although this zone is a mobile
one, it usually does not stray more than half a
degree of latitude from its mean position. This
line, like the tree line of the north, is a natural
boundary rather than one derived from reasoning.
It not only separates two hydrological regions, but
also separates areas of distinctive marine life asso-
ciations and of different climates. The South
Shetland Is., South Orkney Is., South Sandwich
Is., South Georgia, Bouvet I., Heard I. and Mc-
Donald Is. all lie south of the Antarctic Conver-
gence. The Kerguelen Is. lie approximately on the
Convergence; the Falkland Is., Prince Edward Is.,
Crozet Is. and Macquarie I. lie north of the Con-
vergence.
ANTARCTIC POINT: point which marks the W.
side of the entrance to Antarctic Bay, on the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 36°58’W.
Charted in the period 1926-30 by DI personnel, who
named it after nearby Antarctic Bay.
ANTARCTIC SOUND: body of water about 30
mi. long and from 6 to 12 mi. wide, separating the
Joinville I. group from the NE. end of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°20’S., 56°45’W. The sound was named by
45
the SwedAE under Nordenskjold for the exp. ship
Antarctic which in 1902, under the command of
Capt. C. A. Larsen, was the first vessel to navigate it.
Antarctic Tetons: see Lyttelton Ridge.
Antarktika: see Antarctica.
Antarktiske Arkipel: see Palmer Archipelago.
ANTHONY GLACIER: glacier which flows in an
ESE. direction to the E. coast of Palmer Pen. where
it terminates opposite the S. tip of Hearst I.; in
69°48’S., 62°39’W. The upper part of this glacier
was seen by a sledge party of the BGLE under
Rymill in 1936-37. The glacier was seen from the
seaward side in 1940 by a sledging party from East
Base of the USAS, and in 1947 was photographed
from the air by the RARE under Ronne. Named
by Ronne for Alexander Anthony of the J. P.
Stevens Co., New York, which contributed wind-
proof clothing to the RARE.
Antwerpen Insel: Antwerp Island: see Anvers
Island.
ANVERS ISLAND: largest island in the Palmer
Arch., lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen., from
which it is separated by De Gerlache Str.; in
64°30’S., 63°30’W. Named in 1898 by the BelgAE
under De Gerlache after the province of Anvers,
Belgium. Not adopted: Antwerpen Insel [Ger-
man], Antwerp Island.
ANVIL ROCK: rock which lies in the Argentine
Is., between Grotto I. and the SE. end of the Horse-
shoe Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S.,
64°177W. Charted and named in 1935 by the
BGLE under Rymill. The name is descriptive.
ANVIL STACKS: two conspicuous sea stacks
which lie close S. of the entrance to Elephant Bay,
off the S. coast and near the W. end of South
Georgia; in 54°10’S., 37°45°W. The name “Ele-
phant Bay Islands,” derived from the nearby Ele-
phant Bay, has been used locally for this feature by
some South Georgia sealers. The descriptive name
Anvil Stacks, a less cumbersome name, was ap-
plied by the SGS following their survey in 1951-52.
Not adopted: Elephant Bay Islands.
APFEL GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi.
wide and 20 mi. long, flowing NW. along the S.
flank of Bunger Hills and terminating in Edisto
Ice Tongue, near the junction of Queen Mary and
Knox Coasts; in about 66°25’S., 101°00’E. Delin-
eated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
Earl T. Apfel, prof. of geology at Syracuse Univ.,
who served as geologist with the USN Op. Wml.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
parties which established astronomical control sta-
tions along Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts
during the 1947-48 summer.
ARCHER, CAPE: cape which marks the N. side
of the entrance to Granite Hbr., on the E. coast of
Victoria Land; in about 76°50’S., 163°00’E. Named
in 1912 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under
Scott for W. W. Archer, chief steward of the
expedition.
ARCHER POINT: rocky point about 4 mi. W. of
Williamson Head, on Oates Coast; in about 69°06’S.,
158°00’E. Disc. on February 1911 by Lt. H. L. L.
Pennell, of the BrAE under Scott, while exploring
the coast W. of Cape North in the Terra Nova.
Probably named for W. W. Archer, chief steward of
the expedition.
Archipel de Pointe Géologie: see Géologie Archi-
pelago.
ARCTOWSKI NUNATAK: nunatak which lies
1.5 mi. NNW. of Hertha Nunatak in the Seal Nuna-
taks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°06’S., 60°02’W. Charted by the SwedAE under
Nordenskjold during a sledge journey in 1902, and
named by him from Henryk Arctowski, Polish
geologist, oceanographer, and meteorologist of the
BelgAE, 1897-99. Not adopted: Arctowski Nu-
natak.
ARCTOWSKI PEAK: a somewhat isolated ice-
covered peak about 4,600 ft. in el., standing about 8
mi. WSW. of the head of Howkins Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°44’S., 61°28’W. Disc.
and photographed from the air in December 1940
by members of the USAS. During 1947 the peak
was photographed from the air by members of the
RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with the
FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the
FIDS for Henryk Arctowski.
ARCTOWSKI PENINSULA: peninsula, about 15
mi. long in a N.-S. direction, which lies between
Andvord and Wilhelmina Bays and terminates in
Cape Anna, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
64°45’S., 62°25’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99,
under De Gerlache and named for Henryk Arc-
towski. The name was suggested by the US-ACAN
for this hitherto unnamed feature.
ARGENTINE ISLANDS: group of islets about 5
mi. SW. of Petermann I. and 3 mil. WNW. of Cape
Tuxen, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S.,
64°17’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Char-
cot, and named by him for the Argentine Republic
in appreciation of that government’s generosity and
kindness to his exp. The BGLE under Rymill was
based in the Argentine Islands in 1935 and con-
46
ducted a thorough survey of them. Not adopted:
Iles Argentines [French].
Argentines, Iles: see Argentine Islands.
ARMADILLO HILL: ice-covered hill which rises
to about 5,900 ft. in el. and projects 400 ft. above
the surrounding ice sheet, situated on the Palmer
Pen. plateau about 4 mi. ESE. of the head of North-
east Gl. and 10 mi. NE. of the head of Neny Fjord;
in 68°07’S., 66°22’W. It was first roughly surveyed
by the BGLE, 1934-37, and resurveyed in 1940 by
sledging parties of the USAS on whose field charts
the hill is labeled “Sawtooth.” It was named
Armadillo Hill by the FIDS following its 1946-47
survey, because when viewed from the NE. the
tumbled ice blocks on the summit and general
shape of the hill resemble the side view of an
armadillo. Not adopted: Sawtooth.
ARMITAGE, CAPE: southernmost point on Ross
I., lying at the end of a long narrow peninsula pro-
jecting SSE. about 10. mi. from Mt. Erebus; in
77°50’S., 166°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, and named by him for Lt. (later Capt.)
Albert B. Armitage, navigator on the exp. ship
Discovery,
Armitage, Mount: see Armytage, Mount.
Armitage Promontory, Cape: see Hut Point Pen-
insula.
Army Range: see Le May Range.
ARMYTAGE, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain
about 15 mi. W. of Mt. Smith, in the Prince Albert
Mtns. of Victoria Land; in about 76°01’S., 160°50’E.
First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackle-
ton, and named by him for Bertram Armytage, a
member of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount
Armitage.
ARTHUR DAVIS GLACIER: valley glacier about
30 mi. long and from 4 to 8 mi. wide, which flows
W. from the Rockefeller Plateau to Sulzberger
Bay, lying in the Edsel Ford Ranges between Swan-
son Mtns. on the N. and Mounts Cooper and Rea
on the S., in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°03’S.,
145°25’W. Disc. by members of West Base of the
USAS, in aerial flights and from the ground, dur-
ing November—December 1940. Named by the
US-SCAN for R. Adm. Arthur C. Davis, USN, a
leader in aviation in the U.S. Navy. Not adopted:
Warpasgiljo Glacier.
Arthur Owen, Mount: see Owen, Mount.
Arthur Sulzberger Bay: see Sulzberger Bay.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ARRIVAL HEIGHTS: cliff-like heights which
extend in a NE.-SW. direction-along the SW. side of
Hut Point Pen., on Ross I.; in 77°49’S., 166°38’E.
Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott. The name suggests the expedition’s arrival
at its winter headquarters. Not adopted: Har-
bour Heights.
ARRONAX, MOUNT: ice-covered, pointed peak
about 5,200 ft. in el., standing 5.5 mi. WSW. of
Nautilus Head and dominating the N. part of Pour-
quoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
67°40’S., 67°22’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the
FIDS and named after Prof. Pierre Arronax, cen-
tral character in Jules Verne’s Twenty Thousand
Leagues Under the Sea.
ASHLEY SNOW NUNATAKS: three isolated
peaks rising through the icecap S. of Ronne En-
trance and E. of Carroll Inlet, on Robert English
Coast; in about 73°15’S., 76°00’W. Sighted from
the land and from the air in December 1940 by
members of the USAS, and named by them for
Ashley C. Snow, aviation pilot on the expedition.
ASH POINT: point which marks the SE. side of
the entrance to Discovery Bay, on Greenwich I. in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 59°38’W. The
name appears to have been applied by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II in 1935.
ASHTON GLACIER: glacier about 9 mi. long,
which flows ESE. from Mt. Thompson to the NW.
side of Lehrke Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 70°44’S., 61°57’W. The glacier was photo-
graphed from the air in December 1940 by the
USAS, and was probably seen by the USAS ground
survey party which explored this coast. A joint
party consisting of members of the RARE and the
FIDS charted the glacier in 1947. Named by the
FIDS for L. Ashton, carpenter with the FIDS at
the Port Lockroy and Hope Bay bases in 1944-45
and 1945-46, respectively.
ASMAN RIDGE: crescent-shaped, serrate ridge
about 5 mi. long, rising to an elevation of 1,500
ft. or more on the S. side of the middle part of
Arthur Davis Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in
Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°10’S., 144°45’W.
Disc. in 1934 on aerial flights of the ByrdAE.
Named by the USAS, 1939-41, for Adam Asman, a
member of the USAS West Base party.
ASPASIA POINT: steep rocky point forming the
W. extremity of Fanning Ridge, lying 10 mi. ESE.
of Cape Nunez on the S. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°19’S., 37°07’W. The feature was named by
the Br-APC following its mapping by the SGS in
1951-52. The name derives from association with
47
Fanning Ridge. The American armed corvette
Aspasia under Capt. Edmund Fanning took 57,000
fur seals at South Georgia in 1800-1.
ASPLAND ISLAND: small island about 5 mi. W.
of Gibbs I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 61°30’S.,
55°55’'W. The name dates back to at least 1821
and is now established international usage. Not
adopted: Aspland’s Island.
ASQUITH, MOUNT: low, dark mountain in the
Queen Alexandra Range, rising directly S. of Cape
Maude along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in
about 83°18’S., 168°00’E. Disc. by the BrAB,
1907-9, under Shackleton, and named by him for
Lord Asquith, Chancellor of the Exchequer, 1905-8,
and Prime Minister, 1908-16.
ASSES EARS, THE: three islets about 3 mi.
NNW. of the W. tip of Robert I. and 1.75 mi. NE.
of Table I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°19’S.,
59°48’W. These islets, presumably known to early
sealers in the area, were charted and named in 1935
by DI personnel on the Discovery II. The shape of
the northeastern of the three islets suggests the
name.
ASSISTANCE BAY: small bay forming the head
of Possession Bay, along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°08’S.,37°10’W. The bay was named
by DI personnel who charted the area during the
period 1926-30.
ASTOR, MOUNT: high granitic peak in the Will
Hays Mtns., rising to about 8,000 ft. in el., and
standing on the E. side of Amundsen Gl., close N.
of the N. end of Faulkner Escarpment, in the
Queen Maud Range; in about 85°57’S., 156°00’W.
Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the
South Pole in November 1929, and named by him
for Vincent Astor, contributor to the expedition.
Not adopted: Mount Vincent Astor.
ASTROLABE GLACIER: glacier about 4 mi.
wide and 15 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the conti-
nental ice to Adélie Coast and terminating in a
prominent tongue at the E. side of Géologie Arch.;
in about 66°45’S., 139°55’E. Probably first sighted
in 1840 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, although
no glaciers were noted on D’Urville’s chart of this
coast. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp.
in January 1947. It was charted by the FrAE
under Liotard, 1949-51, and named for D’Urville’s
flagship, the Astrolabe. Not adopted: Glacier
Terra Nova [French].
ASTROLABE GLACIER TONGUE: prominent
glacier tongue about 3 mi. wide and 4 mi. long,
extending NE. from Astrolabe Gl. and fringed by
numerous islets and rocks at the E. end of Géologie
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Arch., along Adélie Coast; in 66°42’S., 140°05’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named for the French
corvette Astrolabe.
ASTROLABE ISLAND: island, about 3 mi. long
and 1,500 ft. in el., which lies in Bransfield Str.
about 13 mi. WNW. of Cape Ducorps, Louis Phi-
lippe Pen.; in 63°20’S., 58°40’W. Disc. by a Fr.
exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him
after his chief exp. ship, the Astrolabe.
Astrolabe Island: see Astrolabe Islet (64°38’S.,
62°52’W.).
ASTROLABE ISLET: islet which lies 0.2 mi. off
the E. coast of Anvers I. and about 4 mi. SW. of
Van Ryswyck Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S.,
62°52’W. Charted in 1927 by DI personnel on the
Discovery, who probably gave the name. Not
adopted: Astrolabe Island.
ASTROLABE NEEDLE: conspicuous pointed
monolith about 150 ft. in el., standing near Claude
Pt., off the NW. side of Brabant I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°07’S., 62°41’W. Disc. and named by
the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. The Astrolabe
was one of the ships of the Fr. exp. under D’Urville,
1837-40. Not adopted: Aiguille de 1l’Astrolabe
[French].
ASTRUP, CAPE: bold, dark-colored, bluff mark-
ing the NE. end of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°43’S., 63°08’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 189799,
under De Gerlache, and named by him for Eivind
Astrup, Norwegian Arctic explorer and member of
Robert E. Peary’s expeditions to Greenland in
1891-92 and 1893-95. Not adopted: Cap Edvind
Astrup [French].
ATHELSTAN, MOUNT: prominent, partly ice-
covered mountain, about 5,300 ft. in el., situated at
the N. side of Trench Gl. on a spur which extends
E. from the Douglas Range, on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island; in 70°10’S., 69°16’W. The
coast in this vicinity was first photographed from
the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and
this feature was mapped from the photographs by
W.L. G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948
and 1949 by the FIDS, and named by them after
Athelstan, Saxon king of England, 924-937.
ATHERTON ISLANDS: two conspicuous islets,
about 140 ft. in el., lying about 8 mi. SW. of Stigant
Pt., off the N. coast of King George I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in about 62°03’S., 58°55’W. Charted
and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery II.
48
ATKINSON CLIFFS: steep cliffs, about 2,260 ft.
in el., about 8 mi. NW. of Cape Barrow on the N.
coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°20’S., 168°50’E.
Charted in 1911 by the BrAE under Scott, and
named for Dr. Edward L. Atkinson, surgeon of the
expedition.
ATLAS COVE: cove on the N. coast of Heard I.,
entered between the base of Laurens Pen. and
Rogers Head; in 53°01’S., 73°22’E. Named by
American sealers after the schooner Atlas, a tender
to the Corinthian in Capt. Erasmus Darwin Rogers’
sealing fleet which landed at Heard I.in 1855. The
name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under
Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger
in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the
sealers.
ATRICEPS ISLET: the southernmost and larg-
est of the Robertson Is., lying 2 mi. S. of the SE.
end of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S.,
45°10’W. Named by the FIDS, following their
survey of 1948-49, after the colony of blue-eyed
shags (Phalacrocorax atriceps) nesting on the
islet.
ATTLEE GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. long,
which flows SSE. from the plateau escarpment on
the E. side of Palmer Pen. to the head of Cabinet
Inlet between the mouths of the Bevin and Mor-
rison Glaciers; in 66°13’S., 63°43’W. During De-
cember 1947, the glacier was charted from the
ground by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE. Named by the FIDS for Rt.
Hon. Clement R. Attlee, M.P., British Sec. of State
for Dominion Affairs, member of the War Cabinet,
and later Prime Minister.
ATWOOD, MOUNT: twin-peaked mountain,
about 4,000 ft. in el., at the extreme W. edge of the
Clark Mtns., rising above the icecap of the Rocke-
feller Plateau in Marie Byrd Land; in about
77°15’S., 142°09’W. Disc. by the USAS in 1940 in
aerial flights from the West Base. Named by the
USAS for Pres. Emeritus W. W. Atwood, Sr. of
Clark Univ., noted geologist and geographer, and
his son, W. W. Atwood, Jr., who has collaborated
with his father in glaciological studies.
AUDREY ISLAND: southernmost islet in the
Debenham Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°08’S., 67°07’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill, and named by him for a daughter of
Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE Advisory
Committee.
AUGUSTE ISLAND: flat-topped island about 1
mi. long, lying in De Gerlache Str. about 4 mi.
ENE. of the NW. tip of Two Hummock,1., off the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°04’S., 61°32’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache,
and named by him for his father.
AUREOLE HILLS: two smooth, conical, ice-
covered hills about 2,800 ft. in el., standing close
W. of the N. end of Detroit Plateau and about 6
mi. S. of Bone Cove, on the NW. side of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°46’S., 58°54’W. Named by
the FIDS following their survey in 1948. The
name is descriptive.
AURORA PEAK: peak about 1,750 ft. in el.,
which lies about 4 mi. SSW. of Mt. Murchison on
George V Coast; in about 67°23’S., 144°12’E. Disc.
in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and named by
him for the exp. ship Aurora.
AUSTIN, MOUNT: conspicuous rock mass about
3,100 ft. in el., projecting into the W. side of
Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
74°53’S., 63°10’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48,
under Ronne, and named by him for Stephen F.
Austin, American colonizer in Texas and one of the
founders of the Republic of Texas. Not adopted:
Mount Stephen Austin.
AUSTIN ROCKS: group of rocks which extend
about 3 mi. in an ENE.-WSW. direction, lying in
Bransfield Str. about 16 mi. NW. of the NW. end
of Trinity I., in about 63°26’S., 61°05’W. Charted
by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster, and named
by him for Lt. H. F. Austin, an officer of the
expedition.
AUSTNES POINT: sharp, narrow projection of
the coastline at the E. edge of Enderby Land,
forming the N. side of the entrance to Edward VIII
Bay; in about 66°45’S., 57°17’E. Disc. and mapped
by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photo-
graphs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in
January-February 1937 and named Austnes by
them because of its eastward projection. Not
adopted: Austnes [Norwegian].
Austskotet: see East Stack.
AUVERT BAY: embayment of undetermined
length and a width of about 10 mi., lying between
Cape Evensen and Cape Bellue along the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in about 66°15’S., 65°50’W. Disc.
and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot.
Not adopted: Auvert Fiord, Evensen Bay.
Auvert Fiord: see Auvert Bay.
AVALANCHE BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide at its
entrance, which lies directly E. of Discovery Bluff
in the S. part of Granite Hbr., along the E. coast of
Victoria Land; in about 177°01’S., 162°44’E.
49
Charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. So
named by members of the exp. because they heard
several avalanches while sledging in this locality.
AVALANCHE CORRIE: an ice-filled cirque, or
corrie, close N. of Amphibolite Pt. on the S. coast
of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S.,
45°22’W. So named by the FIDS, following their
survey of 1948-49, because of the continuous ava-
lanches from the hanging glaciers above the corrie.
AVALANCHE ROCKS: vertical rock outcrop,
about 400 yards long and about 600 ft. in el., stand-
ing midway between Delay Pt. and Jones Rocks on
Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°32’S., 97°56’E.
Disc. in September 1912 by the AAE under Mawson,
and so named because of the occurrence of a tre-
mendous avalanche while members of the exp.
were encamped nearby.
AVERS, MOUNT: mountain about 4,500 ft. in
el., which lies at the W. end of the main flat-topped
massif of the Fosdick Mtns. of the Edsel Ford
Ranges, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°28’S.,
145°25’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the ByrdAE
and named for Henry G. Avers, chief mathemati-
cian of the Division of Geodesy, U. S. Coast and
Geodetic Survey, who was a member of the
National Geographic Soc. Commission of Experts
which determined that Cdr. (later R. Adm.)
Richard E. Byrd reached the North Pole by air-
plane, 1926, and the South Pole, 1929.
AVERY PLATEAU: ice-covered plateau, about
17 mi. long and 8 mi. wide, which rises above 6,000
ft. in el. and stands midway between Loubet Coast
and Foyn Coast on Palmer Pen.; in 67°00’S.,
65°35’W. The first sighting of this plateau is not
ascertained, but it was presumably seen in January
and February of 1909 by members of the FrAE
under Charcot from various positions in Matha
Strait. It was surveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS,
who named it for Mr. Avery, skipper of the cutter
Lively, who, with Capt. John Biscoe in the brig
Tula, approached this part of Palmer Pen. in
February 1832.
AVIAN ISLET: largest and easternmost of the
Henkes Its., being 0.75 mi. long and 140 ft. in el.,
lying close off the S. coast of Adelaide I.; in
67°46’S., 68°54’W. Disc. and charted by the FrAE,
1908-10, under Charcot. First visited and sur-
veyed in 1948 by the FIDS who so named it because
of the large number and variety of birds found
there.
Avion, Islotes: see Sigma Islets.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
AXEL HEIBERG GLACIER: valley glacier about
6 mi. wide and 30 mi. long, which descends from
the south polar plateau and flows NE. between
Mounts Fridtjof Nansen and Don Pedro Chris-
tophersen, in the Queen Maud Range, and merges
with the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°25’S.,
164°40’W. Disc. in 1911 by the Nor. exp. under
Amundsen, and named by him for Consul Axel
Heiberg, Norwegian businessman and patron of
science, who contributed to numerous Norweigan
polar expeditions.
AZIMUTH HILL: rocky outcrop, about 700 ft.
in el., lying at the terminus of East Russell Gl., on
the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°45’S.,
58°18’W. So named by the FIDS following their
survey of the area in 1946 because a sun azimuth
was obtained from a cairn built near the E. end
of the hill.
BABE ISLET: islet which lies in the entrance to
Cobblers Cove, along the N. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°16’S., 36°18’W. Charted and named by DI
personnel in 1929.
BACK BAY: bay about 0.5 mi. wide in the W.
coast of Palmer Pen., entered between Boulder Pt.,
Stonington I, and Fitzroy It.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W.
The N. shore of the bay is formed by Northeast Gl.
The bay was first surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41,
and so named by them because of its location at the
rear (northeast) side of Stonington Island. Not
adopted: Back Bay Cove.
BACKDOOR BAY: small bay lying at the E. side
of Cape Royds, along the W. side of Ross I.; in
77°33’S., 166°09’E. The BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, unloaded supplies at Backdoor Bay
for use at their winter headquarters on Cape Royds.
So named by them because it lies at the back (east)
side of Cape Royds, and opposite the small cove on
the W. side of the cape known to the exp. as
“Front Door” bay.
BACKSTAIRS PASSAGE GLACIER: narrow,
steep distributary of Larsen Gl. about 2 mi. long,
flowing NE. between Mt. De Gerlache and Mt.
Crummer to the confluent ice at the head of Terra
Nova Bay, on the coast of Victoria Land; in ahout
75°03’S., 162°40’E. Disc. by a party of the BrABH,
1907-9, under Shackleton, and so named by them
because of their circuitous climb up this glacier
to get to Larsen Gl. on their way to the South
Magnetic Pole.
BAFFLE ROCK: small rock, just visible at the
surface at high tide, lying in the center of the deep
water channel approach to Stonington I., 0.6 mi.
NW. of the W. tip of Neny I. and the same distance
NE. of Runaway It. in Marguerite Bay, in 68°12’S.,
50
67°05’W. The rock was surveyed in 1947 by the
FIDS, and so named by them because it is difficult
to see and hinders approaching ships.
BAGE, CAPE: cape separating Ainsworth and
Murphy Bays on George V Coast; in about 67’43’S.,
146°35’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson,
who named it for Lt. R. Bage, astronomer, asst.
magnetician and recorder of tides with the Main
Base Party.
BAGSHAWE, MOUNT: southernmost and high-
est of the Batterbee Mtns., about 7,300 ft. in el.,
standing about 10 mi. inland from George VI Sound
on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 171°27’S.,
67°06’W. This mountain was first seen and photo-
graphed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln
Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs
by W. L. G. Joerg. It was surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Sir Arthur
W. G. Bagshawe, British authority on tropical medi-
cine, who raised a special fund to defray the ex-
penses of biological equipment for the BGLE,
1934-37.
BAIE: for names beginning thus see under the
specific part of the name. For example, for Baie
de l’Amirauté see Amirauté, Baie del’. (Baie isa
French word for “bay.’’)
Baie E. Fournier: see Fournier Bay.
BAILEY MOUNT: mountain about 4,700 ft. in el.,
which stands S. of Anthony Gl. and about 6 mi.
WSW. of Lewis Pt., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 70°00’S., 63°13’W. Charted in 1936-37 by a
BGLE sledge party under Rymill. It was recharted
in 1947 by a joint sledge party consisting of mem-
bers of the RARE, under Ronne, and the FIDS.
Named by Ronne for Cdr. Clay W. Bailey, USN,
member of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and the West Base
party of the USAS, 1939-41, who assisted in out-
lining the RARE radio requirements.
Bailey Glacier: see Friederichsen Glacier.
BAILEY ISLAND: rocky island about 1.8 mi.
long and 1 mi. wide, lying between Clark and
Mitchell Islands which, collectively, form the group
of three principal islands at the NE. end of the
Windmill Is. that lie close against Budd Coast; in
66°18’S., 110°28’E. Delineated from USN Op. Hip.
aerial photographs taken in February 1947 which
indicate that these three islands are connected by
a steep snow ramp to the continental ice overlying
Budd Coast. Prominent end moraine deposits
overlie and parallel the upper margin of this snow
ramp about 1 mi. from its outer edge of Clark,
Bailey and Mitchell Islands. Named by the
US-ACAN for Cdr. Claude E. Bailey, USN, captain of
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the U.S.S. Henderson, destroyer escort of the
western task group of USN Op. Hjp. Task Force
68, 1946-47.
BAILEY RIDGE: serrate ridge about 4 mi. long,
on the N. side of the lower part of Boyd Gl., in the
Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about
77°12’S., 144°55’W. Disc. on aerial flights of the
ByrdAE in 1934, and named by the USAS, 1939-41,
for Clay W. Bailey, a member of both expeditions.
BAILLIEU PEAK: peak about 5,200 ft. in el.,
which lies about 27 mi. S. of Cape Bruce on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°51’S., 60°50’E. Disc.
and named by the BANZARE under Mawson on
about Feb. 17, 1931.
Bailys Island: see Ohlin Island.
BAKER THREE GLACIER: major glacier, about
12 to 15 mi. wide and of undetermined length,
which flows NNE. from the mountain area behind
the E. end of Lars Christensen Coast to the vicinity
of Gillock I., in about 70°45’S., 70°30’E.; from this
position the glacier then flows NE. between the SE.
side of Amery Ice Shelf and the W. end of Ingrid
Christensen Coast and terminates at the head of
Sandefjord Ice Bay; in about 69°40’S., 73°00’E.
Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947.
The term “Baker Three” is the code designation of
the Navy photographic aircraft which made three
flights in this area, resulting in the discovery that
Ingrid Christensen Coast extends some 50 mi. SW.
from Sandefjord Ice Bay.
BALAENA ISLETS: small group of rocky islets
lying close off Budd Coast about 4 to 6 mi. NE. of
Cape Folger; in about 66°00’S., 110°48’E. De-
lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp. in February 1947 and named by the
US-ACAN for the Wh./F. Balaena, British factory
ship from which sketches of the coastal ranges
along Knox and Budd Coasts were obtained as the
result of reconnaissance flights and shipboard ob-
servations made in February—March 1947.
BALCH, MOUNT: east-west trending mountain
with numerous sharp peaks, the highest about 3,500
ft. in el., between Mt. Peary and Mt. Mill on the W.
coast-of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°16’S., 63°58’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-18, under Charcot, and
named by him for Edwin Swift Balch, American
author and authority on Antarctic exploration.
Not adopted: Mount Swift Balch.
BALCHEN GLACIER: crevassed glacier flowing
W. between the Fosdick and Phillips Mtns. to Paul
Block Bay, in: Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°20’S.,
145°15’W. Disc. on Dec. 5, 1929 by the ByrdAE,
51
and named by Byrd for Bernt Balchen, veteran
Arctic pilot and chief pilot of the expedition. Not
adopted: Bernt Balchen Glacier.
BALDER POINT: point marking the eastern tip
of a narrow, rocky “cockscomb” ridge, which ex-
tends from Frigga Pk. about 6 mi. in an ESE. direc-
tion to the W. side of Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°27’S., 63°45’W. Charted in
1947 by the FIDS, who named it after the Norse god
Balder, the mythological son of Frigga and Odin.
BALD HEAD: bare, ice-free headland, about 500
ft. in.el., about 8 mi. SW. of View Pt. on the SE. side
of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°38’S., 57°36’W. Prob-
ably first seen in 1902-3 by J. Gunnar Andersson’s
party of the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld. The
FIDS charted it and applied the descriptive name
in 1945.
BALDRED ROCK: a rock in Fitchie Bay, Laurie
I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°26’W. It lies
close off the S. side of Ferrier Pen., 0.75 mi. ESE. of
Graptolite I. This rock was mapped by the
ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and was later named
Bass Rock owing to its likeness to the Bass Rock
in Scotland. The name Bass Rock has appeared
on charts as an alternative name for an’islet in
the Firth of Tay in the Joinville Is. group. To
avoid confusion of these names, in 1954 the Br-APC
recommended an entirely new name for the rock
at Fitchie Bay. Baldred Rock is named after Saint
Baldred (died 606), the first hermit known to have
lived on the Scottish Base Rock. Not adopted:
Bass Rock.
BALDWIN POINT: prominent ice-covered point
forming the E. side of the entrance to Henry Bay,
Sabrina Coast; in about 66°40’S., 121°05’E. De-
lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for A. S.
Baldwin, acting master of the brig Porpoise, which
assisted the USEE squadron under Wilkes in chart-
ing a series of coastal landfalls in Wilkes Land
during January-February 1840.
BALDWIN ROCKS: group of rock outcrops lying
about 6 mi. NW. of Watson Bluff on the N. side of
David I., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°25’S.,
98°38’E. Charted in November by the Western
Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named
by him for Joseph M. Baldwin, astronomer with the
Melbourne Observatory.
Baleiniers, Anse des: see Whalers Bay.
BALFOUR, MOUNT: hastion-like rocky moun-
tain, above 2,500 ft. in el., which lies at the S. side
of the mouth of Fleming Gl., close to its junction
with Wordie Ice Shelf, on the W. side of Palmer
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Pen.; in 69°19’S., 67°12’W. First roughly surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed
by the FIDS in 1948 and named for Henry Balfour,
Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1936-38.
BALIN POINT: point which marks the N. side
of the entrance to Borge Bay on the E. side of
Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S.,
45°36’W. The name appears on a 1933 chart of
Borge Bay by DI personnel on the Discovery II, but
may reflect an earlier naming by whalers.
BALIN ROCKS: small group of rocks close S. of
Balin Pt., off the E. side of Signy I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°36’W. Charted in 1933
by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Probably
named after nearby Balin Point.
BALLENY ISLANDS: group of glaciated volcanic
islands lying about 150 mi. N. of Oates Coast
between 66°15’ and 67°40’S., and 162°15’ and
164°45’E. Disc. in February 1839 by a Br. exp.
under John Balleny, and named in his honor by
Captain Beaufort, Hydrographer to the Admiralty.
Ballesteros, Isotes: see Psi Islets.
BALSAM BEACH: narrow boulder beach with
jagged islets close off shore, lying 0.75 mi. E. of
Dartmouth Pt. in Cumberland East Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°26’W. The beach appears
on earlier charts, but the name was given by FIDS
in 1951 following a sketch survey. The name is
one of a group in the vicinity of Dartmouth Pt.,
derived from the chemical stains used in the prepa-
ration for histological examination of biological
material collected there by FIDS.
Banck Island: (in about 64°55’S., 62°59’W.)
the decision of August 1949 has been VACATED.
Recent surveys indicate this feature may be a part
of Palmer Peninsula.
BANDSTONE BLOCK: an almost rectangular
block of sandstone, about 1,000 ft. in el., standing
2 mi. N. of Triton Pt. at the foot of Venus Gl., on
the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 71°40’S.,
68°12’W. The coast in this vicinity was first seen
from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln
Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. This rock was first
surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who so named it
because of its conspicuous sedimentary bands.
BANZARE BANK: submarine bank in the south-
ern part of the Indian Ocean, forming a part of the
Kerguelen-Gaussberg Ridge; in about 58°50’S.,
77°44’E. Disc. by and named for the British-
Australian-New Zealand Antarctic Research Expe-
dition. Not adopted: Banzare Rise.
52
BANZARE COAST: that portion of the coast of
Antarctica lying between Cape Southard, in about
122°05’E., and Cape Mose, in about 130°05’E. Seen
from the air by the BANZARE under Mawson in
1931,andsonamed by him. Not adopted: Banzare
Land.
Banzare Land: see Banzare Coast.
Banzare Rise: see Banzare Bank.
BARBARA ISLAND: largest islet in the Deben-
ham Is., lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°08’S., 67°06’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill, and named by him for a daughter
of Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE Ad-
visory Committee.
BARCHANS, THE: group of snow-capped islets
marking the W. end of the Argentine Is., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S., 64°20’W.
Charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and
so named by him because the snow caps resemble
barchans (also barkhans), migrating, crescent-
shaped sand dunes found in several very dry regions
of the world.
BARCLAY BAY: bay between Cape Shirreff and
Start Pt. on the N. side of Livingston I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°31’S.; 61°00’W. The name ap-
pears on an 1825 chart of the Br. sealing exp. under
Weddell, and is now established international
usage. Not adopted: Barclay’s Bay.
BARE ROCK: rock which lies about 0.1 mi. NE.
of Berntsen Pt. in the entrance to Borge Bay, off
the E. side of Signy I. in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°43’S., 45°36’W. Charted and named by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery in 1927.
BARFF POINT: point which forms the E. side of
the entrance to Cumberland Bay, on the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°24’W. Named for
Lt. A. D. Barff, RN, of the Sappho, who, assisted by
Capt. C. A. Larsen, made a sketch map of Cumber-
land Bay in 1906.
Barilar Bay: see Barilari Bay.
BARILARI BAY: bay about 10 mi. long, in a
NW.-SE. direction, and 6 mi. wide, entered im-
mediately S. of Cape Garcia, along the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°55’S., 64°43’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for R. Adm. Atilio S. Barilari, Argentine Navy.
The bay was charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under
Rymill. Not adopted: Barilar Bay.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BAR ISLET: long, low, rocky islet lying 0.25 mi.
off the W. end of Red Rock Ridge, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 68°17’S.,67°12’W. First roughly
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re-
surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, who so named
the islet because of its shape.
BARKLEY MOUNTAINS: group of mountains
rising to about 9,800 ft. in el. and projecting
through the icecap immediately N. of the edge of
the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; in about
72°45/S., 1°15’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39,
under Ritscher, and named by them for Erich
Barkley, biologist on the expedition.
BARKOW, MOUNT: mountain about 4,600 ft. in
el., which stands about 20 mi. W. of Court Nunatak
and New Bedford Inlet and marks the E. end of the
ridge separating Haines and Meinardus Glaciers,
on the E. side of Palmer Pen.; in 73°22’S., 62°48’W.
Disc. and photographed from the air in December
1940 by the USAS. Photographed from the air by
the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with
the FIDS charted it from the ground in 1947.
Named by the FIDS for Erich Barkow, German
meteorologist and member of the GerAE, 1911-12,
under Filchner.
BARLAS, CAPE: cape which marks the N. end
of Fredriksen I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
45°00’W. Fredriksen I. was charted by a Nor. exp.,
1912-13, under Sgrlle. Cape Barlas appears to be
first named on a chart based on a 1933 survey by DI
personnel on the Discovery II. Probably named for
William Barlas, British representative at Deception
I. and South Shetland Is., for the season 1914-15,
and at South Georgia on various occasions, 1928-41.
Not adopted: Cape Barles.
BARLAS BANK: small submarine bank about
1.5 mi. E. of Cape Buller, at the W. side of the en-
trance to the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in
54°00’S., 37°20’W. The name appears on a chart
based on the DI survey at the Bay of Isles in
1929-30, and was probably given for William Barlas.
BARLAS CHANNEL: channel, about 8 mi. long
and 2 mi. wide, in the N. part of Laubeuf Fjord,
extending SW. from The Gullet and separating
Day I. from Adelaide I.; in 67°13’S., 67°45’W. First
roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who
named it for William Barlas.
Barles, Cape: see Barlas, Cape.
BARLOW ISLET: islet lying about 1.5 mi. WNW.
of Cape Smith, the N. tip of Smith I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°52’S., 62°23’W. ‘The name Cape
Barlow, presumably after Peter Barlow, British
53
physicist and mathematician, was applied to a cape
on the E. side of Smith I. by a Br. exp. under Foster,
1828-31. In 1951-52, the FIDS determined that no
significant cape exists on the E. side of the island,
but for the sake of historical continuity applied the
name Barlow to the islet described above.
BARNARD, MOUNT: mountain about 5,900 ft.
in el., which lies about 5 mi. ENE. of the head of
False Bay, Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°39’S., 60°09’W. The name appears on an
1825 chart of the Br. sealing exp. under Weddell,
and is probably named for Charles H. Barnard, cap-
tain of the ship Charity of New York, who was seal-
ing in the South Shetland Is. in 1820-21 when
Weddell was also there. Weddell states in the
narrative of his exp. that he later met Barnard in
the Falkland Islands. Not adopted: Barnards
Peak, Friesland Peak.
BARNARD POINT: point which marks the SE.
side of the entrance to False Bay on the S. side of
Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°45’S.,
60°20’W. This point was known to sealers as early
as 1822. The name was applied about a century
later, probably after Mt. Barnard which surmounts
it to the northeast. Not adopted: Pointe Bernard
[French].
BARNE, CAPE: steep, rocky bluff about 300 ft. in
el.; lies on the W. side of Ross I. between Cape Royds
and Cape Evans; in about 77°35’S., 166°13’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named
by him for Lt. Michael Barne, RN, a member of
the expedition.
BARNE GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide,
which descends WSW. from the slopes of Mt. Erebus
and terminates on the W. side of Ross I. between
Cape Barne and Cape Evans, where it forms a steep
ice cliff; in about 77°36’S., 166°20’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Named by the BrAE,
1907-9, under Shackleton after nearby Cape Barne.
Not adopted: Cape Barne Glacier.
BARNE INLET: a re-entrant about 12 mi. wide,
between Cape Kerr and Cape Selborne on the W.
side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°15’S., 160°15’E.
It is occupied by a glacier descending from the
bordering highlands to the ice shelf. Disc. in
December 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, and
named by him for Lt. Michael Barne, RN, a member
of the expedition.
BARNES, MOUNT: peak about 3,900 ft. in el.,
surmounting the west-central side of New Harbor
and marking the E. end of the Kukri Hills, in
Victoria Land; in about 77°39’S., 163°33’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named on
the exp. charts as New Harbour Heights. It was
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
renamed Mount Barnes on the charts of Scott’s
second exp., the BrAE, 1910-13. Not adopted:
New Harbour Heights.
BARN ROCK: prominent rock, more than 300
ft. in el., near the N. end of the Terra Firma Is. in
Marguerite Bay; in 68°41’S., 67°32’W. First
visited and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who so
named the rock because of its appearance when
seen from the west.
BARNUM PEAK: peak about 10,000 ft. in el.,
standing at the N. end of a prominent rock divide
near the head of Liv Gl., where two tributary
glaciers join to form the main glacier, in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 85°30’S., 171°00’W. Disc.
by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South
Pole in November 1929, and named by him for
J. D. Barnum, publisher of the Syracuse Post-
Standard and contributor to the expedition.
BARRE, MOUNT: ice-covered, pyramidal peak,
about 7,200 ft. in el., standing 2 mi. NW. of Mt.
Gaudry in SE. Adelaide I.; in 67°30’S., 68°33’W.
Disc. and surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under
Charcot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who
named it for Michel Barré, leader of the French
Antarctic Expedition to Adélie Coast, 1951-52.
BARRE GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi.
wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti-
nental ice to its terminus on Adélie Coast close E.
of Cape Pépin; in about 66°35’S., 138°40’E. Delin-
eated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
Michel Barré, leader of the FrAE wintering party
of 1951-52, whose party extended reconnaissance
of the coastal features as far westward as this
glacier. Lt. de Vaisseau (Lt. Cdr.) Barré previ-
ously served as radio officer on the French polar
ship Commandant Charcot.
BAR ROCKS: group of low rocks which lie near
the head of Husvik Hbr. in Stromness Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°42’W. Charted by DI
personnel in 1928, and so named by them, pre-
sumably because their presence obstructs or im-
pedes vessels approaching the head of the harbor.
BARROS ROCKS: chain of rocks forming a
crescentric arc and extending S. and E. from a
point 2 mi. W. of Cape Tuxen to the Berthelot
Islets, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°18’S.,
64°12’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot.
BARROW, CAPE: steep cliff forming the N. end
of Hoseason I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 63°42’S.,
61°45’W. The cape appears in rough outline on
54
an 1828 chart published by Laurie and was pre-
sumably explored in 1824 by James Hoseason, mate
of the Br. sealing exp. under Hughes. It was
named by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31, prob-
ably for Sir John Barrow, Sec. of the Admiralty,
1804-6 and 1807-45, and founder of the Royal
Geographical Soc. The cape was more accurately
charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot.
BARROW, CAPE: cape which forms the N. end
of Flat I. and marks the W. side of the entrance to
Robertson Bay, along the N. coast of Victoria Land;
in about 71°20’S., 169°10’E. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1841
by the Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for
Sir John Barrow.
Barrows Isle: see Elephant Island.
BARR SMITH, MOUNT: striking rock peak
about 4,300 ft. in el., marking the northernmost
peak of an intermittent line of peaks along the W.
flank of Denman Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in
about 67°10’S., 99°03’E. Disc. in December 1912
by members of the Western Base party of the
AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Robert
Barr Smith of Adelaide, patron of the expedition.
BARRY ISLAND: islet lying in the center of the
Debenham Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°08’S., 67°07’W. Charted by the BGLE under
Rymill, who used this islet for a base in 1936 and
1937. Named by Rymill for the eldest son of
Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE Advisory
Committee.
Bart Bank: see Barth Bank.
BARTH BANK: submarine bank lying SE. of the
South Orkney Is. in the northernmost reaches of
Weddell Sea; in about 62°58’S., 41°15’W. Named
for Einar Barth, Norwegian whale gunner who disc.
the bank in 1937. Not adopted: Bart Bank.
BARTLETT, MOUNT: peak about 7,900 ft. in el.,
which lies close NW. of Mt. Buckley at the head of
Beardmore Gl.; in about 84°58’S., 164°33’E. Disc.
by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named
it for H. H. Bartlett of London, supporter of the
expedition.
BARTLETT GLACIER: tributary glacier, about
30 mi. long and about 5 mi. wide at its terminus,
flowing NNE. from the Rawson Mtns. and joining
Robert Scott Gl. close N. of Mt. Gardiner; in about
86°15’S., 152°00’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the
ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn,
and named by Byrd for Capt. Robert A. Bartlett of
Brigus, Newfoundland, noted Arctic navigator and
explorer who recommended that the exp. acquire
the Bear, an ice-ship which was purchased and
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
rechristened by Byrd as the Bear of Oakland. Not
adopted: Bob Bartlett Glacier:
Basil Halls Island: see Snow Island.
Bass Rock: see Baldred Rock.
BASTION PEAK: ice-capped peak, about 5,300
ft. in el., with rocky exposures on its S. and E. sides,
which forms a buttress to the plateau escarpment
W. of Morrison Gl., or the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 66°10’S., 63°35’W. Charted in 1947 and given
this descriptive name by the FIDS. It was photo-
graphed from the air during 1947 by the RARE
under Ronne.
BATTERBEE, CAPE: ice-covered cape with
prominent rock exposures protruding through the
coastal ice cliffs, marking the most northerly pro-
jection of Enderby Land, just E. of Proclamation I.,
in about 65°50’S., 53°47’E. Disc. on Jan. 13, 1930
by the BANZARE under Mawson, and named by
him probably for Sir Harry Fagg Batterbee, then
Asst. Sec. of the Dominions Office.
BATTERBEE MOUNTAINS: group of prominent
mountains rising to about 7,300 ft. in el., which
form part of the dissected edge of Dyer Plateau
overlooking George VI Sound, on the W. side of
Palmer Pen.; in about 71°23’S., 66°55’W. Disc.
and photographed from the air by Lincoln Ells-
worth on Nov. 23, 1935. Charted from the ground
in October 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and
named by him for Sir Harry Fagg Batterbee.
BAUDIN PEAKS: group of four peaks, the high-
est about 3,900 ft. in el., standing at the SE. corner
of Mikkelsen Bay, immediately SW. of the mouth
of Clarke Gl., and about 9 mi. ENE. of Cape Ber-
teaux, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°49’S.,
67°03’W. This general area was first sighted and
roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under
‘Charcot, who gave the name “Cap Pierre Baudin”
to a cape in this vicinity. The peaks previously
described were roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, but no name was assigned to
them. The peaks were resurveyed in 1948-49 by
the FIDS, who subsequently identified them as the
feature named “Cap Pierre Baudin” by Charcot.
Named by Charcot for Pierre Baudin, then port
engineer at Pernambuco (now Recife), where the
Pourquoi-Pas? put in on her return from the
Antarctic. Not adopted: Cap Pierre Baudin
[French].
BAXTER, MOUNT: truncated cone about 8,600
ft. in el., between Mt. Levick and Mt. Mackintosh in
Victoria Land; in about 74°20’S., 162°30’E. Disc.
and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott.
59
BAY POINT: point which marks the E. side of
the entrance to Borgen Bay on the SE. coast of
Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°46’S., 63°26’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99.
The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 DI
survey, but may reflect an earlier naming.
BEACH POINT: the NE. tip of Thule I., conspic-
uous by a bare rock ridge and a narrow beach of
boulders and pebbles, in the South Sandwich Is.;
in 59°26’S., 27°16’W. Charted and named in 1930
by DI personnel on the Discovery II who made
a landing there.
BEACON HILL: ice-covered, dome-shaped hill,
about 5,900 ft. in el., which rises 400 ft. above the
surrounding ice, standing 2.5 mi. NE. of the head
of Northeast Gl. on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in
68°04’S., 66°24’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed and
named by the USAS, 1939-41. The hill may have
been the site of a beacon at that time.
BEAK ISLAND: arc-shaped island, about 4 mi.
long and about 1,000 ft. in el., lying 0.25 mi. NE.
of Eagle I. in the NE. part of Prince Gustav Chan.;
in 63°37’S., 57°20’W. Probably first seen in
1902-3 by members of the SwedAE under Norden-
skj6ld. The FIDS surveyed Beak Island in 1945
and so named it because of its shape and relative
position to nearby Tail and Eagle Islands.
BEALE, CAPE: cape which marks the E. extrem-
ity of Borradaile I. in the Balleny Is.; in about
66°35’S., 162°50’E. Named for W. Beale, a sup-
porter of the Br. exp. under Balleny which disc.
these islands in 1839.
BEALE PINNACLE: rock pinnacle about 200 ft.
in el., lying close off Cape Beale, the E. extremity
of Borradaile I., in the Balleny Is.; in about
66°35’S., 162°51’E. Named for W. Beale, a sup-
porter of the Br. exp. under Balleny which disc.
these islands in 1839.
BEARDMORE GLACIER: one of the largest
known valley glaciers, having an average width of
12 mi. and a length of 100 mi., descending from
the polar plateau to the Ross Ice Shelf; in about
83°30’S., 173°00’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the
BrAE under Shackleton, and named by him for
Sir William Beardmore (later Lord Invernairn), a
supporter of the expedition.
BEAR ISLAND: glaciated island about 40 mi.
long and 25 mi. wide, with several rocky summits
rising to about 2,900 ft. in el., lying about 40 mi.
E. of Martin Pen. at the head of Amundsen Sea;
in about 74°20’S., 108°40’W. Delineated from
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in De-
cember 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for the
ice-ship U.S.S. Bear, flagship of the USAS, from
which three reconnaissance flights were made in
late February 1940, resulting in the discovery of
the Walgreen Coast and Thurston Pen. areas.
This ship, under the name Bear of Oakland, also
served as flagship of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, which
based at the Bay of Whales area of the Ross Ice
Shelf.
BEAR ISLET: rocky islet lying 1 mi. W. of
Stonington I. in Marguerite Bay; in 68°11’S.,
67°04’W. The islet was presumably known to the
BGLE, 1934-37, and the USAS, 1939-41, both based
in the Stonington I. area. It was surveyed in 1947
by the FIDS, who named it for the U.S.S. Bear,
flagship of the USAS which visited this area in
1940.
BEASCOCHEA BAY: embayment about 4 mi.
wide between Cape Trois Pérez and Nunez Pt., in-
denting the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°30'S.,
64°00’W. Disc. but incompletely defined by the
BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Resighted
by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named
by him for Commander Beascochea, Argentine
Navy. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, accu-
rately charted the bay.
Beaufort, Mount; Beaufurt, Mount: see Foster,
Mount.
BEAUFORT ISLAND: island which lies in the
Ross Sea about 10 mi. NNE. of Cape Bird, the N.
tip of Ross I.; in about 76°55’S., 167°05’E. Disc. in
1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him
for Capt. Francis Beaufort, RN, Hydrographer to
the Admiralty.
BEAUFOY RIDGE: conspicuous black ridge,
rising to about 2,100 ft. in el. at its NW. end, stand-
ing at the W. side of Sunshine Gl., and close N. of
Iceberg Bay on the S. coast of Coronation I., South
Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°33’W. Named by the
FIDS following their survey in 1948-49. On Dec.
12, 1821, the cutter Beaufoy under Michael McLeod
sailed to a position at least 60 mi. W. of the South
Orkney Is., where a chart annotation indicates
that land was sighted, probably Coronation Island.
BEAUMONT BAY: small re-entrant lying E. of
Mt. Albert Markham, along the W. edge of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 81°25’S., 160°30’E. Disc. in
December 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, and
named by him for Adm. Sir Lewis Beaumont, RN,
former Arctic explorer who took special interest in
Scott’s expedition.
56
BEAUMONT GLACIER: broad glacier flowing in
a NE. direction to the SW. part of Hilton Inlet, on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 72°02’S.,
62°00’W. The USAS disc. and photographed it
from the air in 1940. It was resighted in 1947 by
the RARE under Ronne, who named it for the city
of Beaumont, Texas, in recognition of the public
support given his exp. by this city and the Tejas
Chapter of the Daughters of the Republic of Texas,
at Beaumont. Not adopted: Tejas Glacier.
BEAUMONT ISLET: low, rocky islet in Neny
Bay, about 0.4 mi. from the mouth of Centurion
Gl., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S.,
66°57’W. The islet was presumably first sighted
in 1936 by the BGLE, and was roughly charted by
them and by the USAS, 1939-41. It was surveyed
in 1946 by the FIDS, who named it for the Port of
Beaumont, Texas, exp. ship of the RARE under
Ronne, which wintered nearby in Back Bay during
the 1947-48 season.
Beckman Fjord: see Beckmann Fjord.
BECKMANN FJORD: small inlet immediately
E. of Bellingshausen Pt., in the E. side of the Bay
of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°12’W.
Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy,
American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who
named it for Captain Beckmann, master gunner
of the whaler Don Ernesto, who lost his life in a
whaling accident in December 1912. Not adopted:
Beckman Fjord.
BEEHIVE HILL: ice-covered hill which rises to
about 7,000 ft. in el. and projects 2,000 ft. above
the surrounding ice sheet, situated on the plateau
of Palmer Pen. about 10 mi. E. off the head of Neny
Fjord and 13 mi. SE. of the head of Northeast GL.;
in 68°16’S., 66°10’W. First surveyed in 1940 by
the USAS, on whose field charts the hill is labeled
“Sphinx.” It was resurveyed in 1946 by the FIDS
who gave the present name because of the hill’s
resemblance to a wicker beehive. Not adopted:
Sphinx.
Beehive Nunatak: see Teall Nunatak.
BEER ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, which
lies about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head and 0.5 mi. S.
of Jagged I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
66°00’S., 65°45°W. The BGLE under Rymill,
1934-37, charted and named the island. Not
adopted: Mutton Cove Island.
BELEMNITE POINT: the E. extremity of a
mainly ice-free, hook-shaped ridge, about 2,000 ft.
in el., standing midway between Lamina Peak and
Ablation Pt., and 2 mi. inland from George VI
Sound on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
70°40’S., 68°32°W. This point was first photo-
graphed from the air on Noy. 23, 1935 by Lincoln
Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photo-
graphs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly sur-
veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and re-
surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS
because of belemnite fossils found there.
Belgica Sea: see Bellingshausen Sea.
BELINDA, MOUNT: mountain about 4,500 ft. in
el., which marks the summit of Montagu I. in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 58°25’S., 26°23’W. Mount
Belinda was probably first sighted by a Br. exp.
under Cook in 1775, and was accurately sketched
in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen.
Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II follow-
ing their survey in 1930, for Belinda Kemp,
daughter of Stanley W. Kemp, Dir. of Research of
the Discovery Committee, 1924-36.
BELL, MOUNT: mountain about 10,500 ft. in el.,
which lies about 4 mi. WSW. of Mt. Mackellar, at
the W. side of Beardmore Gl. in the Queen Alex-
andra Range; in about 84°06’S., 167°40’E. Disc.
by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and
named by him for William Bell, a supporter of the
expedition.
BELL GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi.
wide and 7 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti-
nental ice at the W. flank of Norths Highland to
the head of Maury Bay, where it terminates in a
prominent tongue between the tongues of Blair
and Power Glaciers, Banzare Coast; in about
66°45’S., 124°50’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named
by the US-ACAN for Thomas G. Bell, boatswain
on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under
Wilkes, 1838-42.
Bellinghausen Sea: see Bellingshausen Sea.
BELLINGSHAUSEN, MOUNT: conspicuous cone
about 3,200 ft. in el., lying on the S. side of Larsen
Gl. on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about
75°10’S., 162°18’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, under
Scott, and named by him for Adm. Thaddeus
Bellingshausen, leader of the Russian expedition
of 1819-21. Not adopted: Mount Bellinghausen.
BELLINGSHAUSEN ISLAND: easternmost is-
land of Southern Thule, in the South Sandwich
Is.; in 59°25’S., 27°03’W. Probably sighted by a
Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. The island was
described by Bellingshausen, whose Russ. exp.
visited the area in 1819-20. Charted in 1930 by
DI personnel on the Discovery II, under Kemp, who
named it for Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen.
424589 O -57-5
o7
BELLINGSHAUSEN POINT: point between
Beckmann and Sea Leopard Fjords, at the E. side
of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°03’S.,
37°14’°W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman
Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig
Daisy, who named it for Adm. Thaddeus Bellings-
hausen.
BELLINGSHAUSEN SEA: marginal sea off the
coast of Antarctica between Alexander I Island
and Thurston Pen.; in about 71°S., 85°W. Named
for Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen. Not adopted:
Belgica Sea, Bellinghausen Sea.
BELLUE, CAPE: cape which forms the N. side of
the entrance to Marin Darbel Bay, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°20’S., 65°59’W. Disc. by
the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by
him for Admiral Bellue, Superintendent of the
Dockyard at Cherbourg, France.
BELSHAM, CAPE: prominent headland about
7 mi. WNW. of Cape Valentine, on the N. side of
Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about
61°01’S., 55°01’W. The name dates back to about
1822 and is well established in international usage.
Bennet, Cape: see Bennett, Cape.
BENNETT, CAPE: bold promontory at the NE.
end of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°37’S., 45°14’W. Disc. in December 1821 on the
occasion of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell,
a British sealer in the sloop Dove, and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer, an American sealer in the sloop
James Monroe. Named for Powell’s employer.
Not adopted: Cape Bennet.
BENNETT ISLETS: chain of about four islets,
lying at the SW. side of Liard I. in Hanusse Bay and
extending in a SW. direction for about 6 mi., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°57’S., 67°35’W.
These islets were sighted and sketched from the air
in February 1937 by the BGLE under Rymi!l. They
were named in 1954 by the Br-APC for Arthur G.
Bennett, British representative on whaling in the
South Shetland Is. and South Orkney Is. for many
years between 1913 and 1927, and acting govern-
ment naturalist in the Falkland Is., 1924-38.
Beresino Island: see Greenwich Island.
BERG BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which lies
between Islands Pt. and the promontory ending
in Birthday Pt. in the W. part of Robertson Bay,
in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°27’S.,
169°23’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the
Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BERGERSEN, MOUNT: mountain mass in the E.
part of the Sgr Rondane Mtns., lying S. of Princess
Ragnhild Coast; in about 72°08’S., 24°35’E. Disc.
and photographed from the air on Feb. 6, 1937 by
members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen. Named
for Ambassador Birger Bergersen, chairman of the
Norwegian Whaling Board.
Bergnes: see Byrd Head.
BERLIN, MOUNT: prominent ridge-shaped
mountain, about 10,400 ft. in el., forming the W.
end of Hal Flood Range in Marie Byrd Land; in
about 76°04’S., 135°50’W. Disc. by members of the
ByrdAE on extended flights to the NE. and E. of
Little America in November—December 1934. It
was first named Mount Hal Flood, but this name
has now been given to the entire range of moun-
tains of which this one is a part. Named for
Leonard M. Berlin, leader of the USAS party which
sledged to this mountain in December 1940. Not
adopted: Mount Hal Flood.
BERNACCHI, CAPE: low rocky promontory lying
between Bernacchi Bay and New Harbor on the E.
coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°30’S., 163°45’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and
named by him for Louis C. Bernacchi, physicist
with the expedition. See also Bernacchi Head on
Franklin Island.
BERNACCHI BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which
lies between Marble Pt. and Cape Bernacchi along
the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°28’S.,
163°47’E. The bay takes its name from Cape
Bernacchi, S. entrance point to the bay, and was
applied by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13.
BERNACCHI HEAD: precipitous, cliff forming
the SE. end of Franklin I., in the Ross Sea; in about
76°09’S., 168°20’E. Named by the BrAE, 1898-
1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, for Louis C. Bernac-
chi, a member of the expedition. The generic has
been changed by the Committee to avoid duplica-
tion with Cape Bernacchi on the coast of Victoria
Land. See also Cape Bernacchi.
Bernard, Pointe: see Barnard Point.
Bernard Horne, Mount: see Horne, Mount.
Bernt Balchen Glacier: see Balchen Glacier.
BERNTSEN POINT: point which forms the S.
side of the entrance to Borge Bay, on the E. side
of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,
45°36’W. Charted in 1927 by DI personnel on the
Discovery. Probably named for Capt. Sgren Bernt-
sen, master of the Orwell, who was of assistance in
transporting DI personnel the following year.
58
BERRY HEAD: point which markes the E. side
of the entrance to Stygian Cove, on the NE. side
of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S.,
45°36’W. Probably named by DI personnel on the
Discovery II following their survey in 1933.
BERTEAUX, CAPE: cape which lies at the N.
side of Wordie Ice Shelf and projects into the SE.
part of Marguerite Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°51’S., 67°28’W. The FrAE under Char-
cot, 1908-10, originally applied the name Berteaux
to an island in essentially this position. The BGLE
under Rymill, 1934-37, identified the feature
sighted by Charcot as the cape described above.
Named by Charcot for a Monsieur Berteaux who
helped obtain funds for his expedition. Not
adopted: Berteaux Island, Cape Pierre Baudin.
Berteaux Island: see Berteaux, Cape.
BERTHA ISLAND: island which lies at the E.
side of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay and is
separated from Mac-Robertson Coast by a narrow
channel; in about 67°23’S., 59°40’E. Disc. and
named in February 1936 by DI personnel on the
William Scoresby. Not adopted: Hamreneset
[Norwegian].
BERTHELOT ISLETS: group of rocky islets, the
largest about 1 mi. long, lying about 1.5 mi. W. of
Point Délivrance, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°20’S., 64°09’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot, and named by him for Mar-
celin Berthelot, prominent French chemist. Not
adopted: Berthelot Islands.
BERTRAB GLACIER: small glacier at the head
of Gold Hbr., at the E. end of South Georgia; in
54°37’S., 35°57’'W. Charted by the GerAH, 1911-12,
under Filchner, and named by him for Dr. von
Bertrab, General and Chief Quartermaster in the
German General Staff and Chief of the Land
Survey, who was chairman of the expedition.
BERTRAB NUNATAK: bare rock about 1,000 ft.
in el. at the S. side of the entrance to Duke Ernst
Bay, on Luitpold Coast; in about 77°55’S., 34°30’W.
Disc. in January-February 1912 by the GerAE
under Filchner, and named by him for Dr. von
Bertrab. Not adopted: Bertrab Nunataks.
BERTRAM GLACIER: glacier, about 15 mi. long
and 18 mi. wide at its mouth, flowing W. from the
Dyer Plateau of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound
between Wade Pt. and Gurney Pt.; in 70°48’S.,
67°28’W. Disc. and first surveyed in 1936 by
Stephenson, Fleming and Bertram of the BGLE
under Rymill. It was later named for George C. L.
Bertram, biologist of the BGLE, 1934-37, and mem-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ber of the discovery party, who in 1949 became
Dir. of the Scott Polar Inst., Cambridge.
BERTRAND ICE PIEDMONT: prominent ice
piedmont which lies on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.
between Rymill Bay and Mikkelsen Bay. It is
bounded on its SE. and E. sides by Pavie Ridge and
on its NE. side by Martin Gl.; in 68°31’S., 67°05’W.
First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill,
and resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. Named
by the British Antarctic Place-names Committee
for Kenneth J. Bertrand, Associate Professor of
Geography at the Catholic University of America,
Washington, D. C., geomorphologist, Antarctic
historian, and member of the U.S. ASONTSORY) Com-
mittee on Antarctic Names.
Bertrand Island: see Stanley Island.
Berwick Glacier: see Swinford Glacier.
BERWICK GLACIER: tributary glacier entering
the W. side of Beardmore Gl. immediately S. of
Marshall Mtns.; in about 84°45’S., 164°15’E. Origi-
nally named Swinford Glacier in 1908 by the BrAE
under Shackleton, a subsequent cartographic error
exchanging the positions of Swinford and Berwick
Glaciers on the charts of the BrAE under Scott,
1910-13, has caused the name Berwick to become
established for this glacier. Named for the Ber-
wick, a vessel on which Lt. Jameson B. Adams,
Shackleton’s second-in-command, had _ served.
Swinford Glacier lies about 10 mi. NE. of Berwick
Glacier. Not adopted: Swinford Glacier (q.v.).
BESNARD POINT: point which lies at the SE.
side of Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., and marks the E.
side of the entrance to Alice Creek, in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the FrAH,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for A.
Besnard, seaman on the exp. ship Francais.
BEST, CAPE: cape which marks the W. side of
the entrance to Fortuna Bay, on the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°05’S., 36°49’W. The name
dates back to at least Tow and is now well
established.
Besvikelsens Kap: see Disappointment, Cape.
BETA ISLAND: small islet which lies immedi-
ately N. of Kappa I. and close SW. of Alpha I. in
the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 63°00’W.
The name Beta, derived from the second letter of
the Greek alphabet, was probably given by DI
personnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927.
The islet was surveyed by Argentine expeditions
in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Isla Rodeada
[Spanish].
59
BETBEDER, CAPE: cape which marks the SW.
end of Andersson I., lying in Antarctic Sound, off
the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°37’S., 56°39’W.
Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordensk-
jold, and named by him for R. Adm. Onofre
Betbeder, Argentine Minister of Marine, upon
whose orders the Argentine Ship Uruguay was dis-
patched to rescue Nordenskj6ld’s expedition.
BETBEDER ISLETS: group of islets and rocks
about 12 mi. NE. of the N. end of the Biscoe Is. and
some 22 mi. W. of Cape Tuxen, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°16’S., 65°02’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for R. Adm. Onofre Betbeder.
BETTY, MOUNT: small ridge about 1,200 ft. in
el., standing about 3 mi. NE. of Mt. Cohen at the
N. end of the foothills between Axel Heiberg and
Strom Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range over-
looking the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
85°13’S., 164°45’W. Disc. in November 1911 by the
Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for
Betty Andersson, nurse and housekeeper in the
Amundsen family for many years.
BEVIN GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long,
which flows E. from the plateau escarpment on the
E. side of Palmer Pen. into the NW. end of Cabinet
Inlet between the mouths of Attlee and Anderson
Glaciers; in 66°17’S., 63°47’W. During December
1947, it was charted by the FIDS and photographed
from the air by the RARE. Named by the FIDS
for Rt. Hon. Ernest Bevin, M.P., British Minister
of Labor and National Service and member of the
War Cabinet.
BICKERTON, CAPE: ice-covered point lying
about 5 mi. ENE. of Gravenoire Rock, which marks
the northernmost extremity of the Adélie Coast
area lying eastward of Victor Bay; in about 66°20’S.,
136°56’E. Disc. by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-
14, and named by him for F. H. Bickerton, engineer
of the exp. and leader of the Western Party which
sighted the cape from its farthest west camp.
BIENVENUE, CAPE: small rocky cape, which is
partially ice covered, rising to about 140 ft. in el.,
marking the E. side of the entrance to Piner Bay,
on Adélie Coast; in 66°43’S., 140°15’E. Photo-
graphed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
Charted and named by the FrAE under Barré,
1951-52, who established an astronomical control
station on the cape. Bienvenue is a French word
meaning welcome.
BIG BEN: massive ice-covered mountain, about
9,000 ft. in el., which is the central and dominating
feature on Heard I., and toward which the relief
of the island rises from all sides; in 53°06’S.,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
73°31’E. The name was applied by American
sealers at Heard I. following their initiation of seal-
ing there in 1855. The name was found to be
already in common use when the Br. exp. under
Nares visited the island in the Challenger in 1874
and made a survey of its salient features. The
mountain was surveyed by the ANARE in 1948.
Not adopted: Big Ben Peak, Emperor William Peak.
BIGELOW ROCK: low, ice-covered rock about
150 ft. long, with numerous rock exposures close
above sea level, lying immediately W. of Shackleton
Ice Shelf about 23 mi. NE. of Junction Corner,
Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°09’S., 95°26’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47. An astronomical control sta-
tion was established on the rock by USN Op. Wml.,
1947-48. Named by the US-ACAN for Tech. Sgt.
George H. Bigelow, USMC, tractor driver-mechanic
with USN Op. Hjp. and USN Op. Wml. Not
adopted: Burton Island Rock.
BIGO, MOUNT: mountain about 5,300 ft. in el.,
which stands at the SW. side of Mt. Perchot at the
head of Bigo Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°47’S., 64°17’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot, and named by him, probably for
Robert Bigo of Calais, France, a member of the
Lique Maritime Francaise.
BIGO BAY: bay about 5 mi. wide, which indents
the W. coast of Palmer Pen. for 7 mi. between
Cape Garcia and the peninsula surmounted by
Magnier Peaks; in 65°43’S., 64°30’W. The FrAE
under Charcot, 1908-10, first sighted this bay but
charted it as the southern part of Leroux Bay.
The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, determined that
the peninsula surmounted by Magnier Peaks sepa-
rates this bay from Leroux Bay. Named by Rymill
after Mt. Bigo, a mountain at the head of the bay.
BIGOURDAN FJORD: a sound about 14 mi. long,
in an ENE.-WSW. direction, and averaging 2 mi.
wide, lying between the N. side of Pourquoi Pas I.
and the coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°33’S., 67°20’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and
named by him for Guillaume Bigourdan, noted
French astronomer. It was roughly surveyed by
the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and resurveyed
by the FIDS, 1948-50.
BIG RAZORBACK ISLAND: southeasternmost
of the Dellbridge Is., lying in Erebus Bay off the
W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°41’S., 166°29’E.
Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott. The name is descriptive. Not adopted:
Large Razorback Island.
Bikjebugten: see Hound Bay.
60
BILLBOARD, THE: a massive granitic monolith,
about 2,400 ft. in el., with vertical faces rising more
than 1,000 ft. above the continental ice, standing
just S. of Mt. Rea and forming a distinctive land-
mark in this part of the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie
Byrd Land; in about 77°03’S., 145°35’W. Disc. in
November 1934 by the ByrdAE sledge party under
Paul Siple, and so named because of its form and
appearance.
BILLIE PEAK: peak about 2,400 ft. in el., which
rises about 1.5 mi. ENE. of Bay Pt. on the SE. coast
of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°45’S.,
63°23’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under
De Gerlache. The name appears on a chart based
on a 1927 DI survey, but may reflect on earlier
naming.
BILLIE ROCKS: group of rocks 0.1 mi. NE. of
Drying Pt., lying in Borge Bay along the E. side
of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,
45°36’W. The name Billie Rock, for the eastern-
most rock of the group, appeared on a chart based
upon a 1927 sketch survey of Borge Bay by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery. The name has since been
extended to include the entire group. Not adopted:
Billie Rock.
Billis Islet: see Bills Islet.
BILL ROCK: rock which lies 0.3 mi. E. of the S.
end of Grass I., in Stromness Bay, South Georgia;
in 54°09’S., 36°40’W. Charted and named in 1928
by DI personnel.
BILLS GULCH: the northern of two glaciers
flowing E. from the plateau upland into the head of
Trail Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°07’S., 65°44’W. This glacier was used by the
sledge party under Paul H. Knowles which trav-
ersed Palmer Pen. from the East Base of the USAS
on its way to Hilton Inlet in 1940. Named by the
USAS for a lead dog that died at this point. The
name has been approved because of its wide use on
maps and in reports. Not adopted: Bill’s Gulch.
BILLS ISLET: islet which lies in the harbor of
Port Lockroy, about 0.1 mi. NE. of Goudier It., in
the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°31’W. Disc. and
charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. The
name appears on a chart based on a 1927 DI sur-
vey, but may reflect an earlier naming. Not
adopted: Billis Islet.
BILLS POINT: point marking the S. extremity
of Delta I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in
64°19’S., 62°59’W. The name was probably given
by DI personnel who roughly charted Delta I. in
1927. The feature was surveyed by Argentine ex-
peditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BILLYCOCK HILL: rounded, ice-covered hill
which rises to about 6,000 ft. in el. and projects
600 ft. above the surrounding ice sheet, situated
4 mi. S. of the head of Northeast Gl. and the same
distance NE. of the head of Neny Fjord on the W.
side of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S., 66°32’W. First
surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41. The hill was re-
surveyed in 1946 by the FIDS and named by them
for its resemblance to a billycock hat.
Bingham Col: see Safety Col.
BINGHAM GLACIER: large glacier flowing
eastward to the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°22’S.,
63°02’W., with Cape Reichelderfer as its southern
portal. Together with Fleming Gl., which flows
W., it fills a major transverse depression across
Palmer Pen. The point at which Bingham Glacier
reaches the coast was photographed by Sir Hubert
Wilkins in 1928 and by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935,
and it was mapped by the BGLE under Rymill, who
with E. W. Bingham sledged across the peninsula
a short distance S. of the transverse depression in
1936. It was also mapped in 1940 by the USAS.
Named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Cdr. E. W. Bing-
ham, RN, of the BGLE.
BINGLEY GLACIER: tributary glacier entering
the W. side of Beardmore Gl. immediately NE. of
Mt. Adams; in about 84°24’S., 167°30’E. Disc. by
the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named
by him after Bingley, England, location of the
Shackleton family ancestral home.
BIRCHALL PEAKS: cluster of peaks about 2,000
ft. in el., lying at the NW. side of Mt. Iphigene and
S. of Paul Block Bay, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of
Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°27’S., 146°20’W.
Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE. Named by Byrd for
Frederick T. Birchall, member of the staff of the
New York Times, which published the expedition’s
press dispatches.
BIRD, CAPE: cape which marks the N. tip of
Ross I.; in 77°08’S., 165°35’E. Disc. in 1841 by a
Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for Lt.
Edward J. Bird of the exp. ship Erebus.
BIRD, MOUNT: mountain which stands about
7 mi. S. of Cape Bird, the N. tip of Ross I.; in
77°15’S., 166°45’E. It was charted by the BrNAE
under Scott, 1901-4, and apparently named by
them after nearby Cape Bird.
BIRD ISLAND: island, about 4 mi. long and 2
mi. wide, which is separated from the W. end of
South Georgia by Bird Sound; in 54°00’S., 38°05’W.
Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who so
named it because he saw numerous birds on the
island. Not adopted: Vogel Insel [German].
61
BIRD SOUND: navigable sound, about 2.5 mi.
long and 0.5 mi. wide, separating Bird I. from the
W. end of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°03’W.
The names La Roche Strait and Bird Sound have
both been used on charts for this feature for many
years. The name Bird Sound is approved on the
basis of local usage at South Georgia. The feature
takes its name from nearby Bird Island. Not
adopted: La Roche Strait.
Birks, Mount: see Napier Birks, Mount.
BIRLEY GLACIER: glacier, at least 6 mi. long,
flowing W. into the NE. corner of Barilari Bay, on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°57’S., 64°30’W.
This glacier was first seen and roughly surveyed in
1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was resur-
veyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill, and
later named for Kenneth P. Birley, who contrib-
uted toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37.
BIRTHDAY POINT: northernmost point of a
bare, precipitous promontory forming the E.
boundary of Pressure Bay, on the N. coast of Vic-
toria Land; in about 71°26’S., 169°20’E. Charted
and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the
BrAE under Scott.
Bisco Bay: see Biscoe Bay.
BISCOE, MOUNT: distinctive sharp black peak
rising to over 1,500 ft. in el., surmounting Cape
Ann on the coast of Enderby Land; in about
63°13’S., 57°177E. Photographed from the air on
Dec. 22, 1929 by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen in
a flight from the Norvegia, and on Jan. 14,
1930 photographed from the Discovery by the
BANZARE under Mawson. The peak is thought
to be the feature disc. on March 16, 1831 and
named Cape Ann by a Br. exp. under Biscoe. The
name Cape Ann has been retained from the
adjoining cape; Mawson named the peak for its
apparent discoverer, John Biscoe, Master, RN, Ret.,
noted British Antarctic explorer.
BISCOE BAY: bay which indents the SW. coast
of Anvers I. immediately E. of Roland Bonaparte
Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°48’S., 63°48’W.
First charted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache, and named by him for John Biscoe, who
may have landed there in February 1832. Not
adopted: Bisco Bay.
Biscoe Bay: see Sulzberger Bay.
BISCOE ISLANDS: chain of islands, of which
the principal ones are Renaud, Rabot, Nansen, and
Watkins, lying parallel to the W. coast of Palmer
Pen. and extending in a NE.-SW. direction about
75 miles; centering in about 66°00’S., 66°30’W.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Named for John Biscoe, leader of a Br. exp. which
explored the islands on Feb. 17 and 18, 1832.
BISMARCK STRAIT: a strait which lies between
the S. end of Anvers and Wiencke Islands and the
Palmer Pen.; in about 64°55’S., 63°45’W. It was
explored in 1874 by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann,
and was named by him for the German statesman,
Prince Otto Bismarck.
BJAALAND, MOUNT: one of a group of low-
lying peaks barely protruding through the ice of
the south polar plateau, rising to about 10,700 ft.
in el. between Mounts Hassel and Prestrud, which
stand about 20 mi. SW. of Thorvald Nilsen Mtns.
in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°33’S.,
162°35’W. Disc. in November 1911 by the Nor.
exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Olaf
Bjaaland, a member of the South Pole Party. Not
adopted: Mount Olaf Bjaaland.
Bjarne Aagaard Islands: see Aagaard Islands.
Bjerko Head; Bjerk6 Headland: see Darnley,
Cape.
BJERK@® PENINSULA: prominent peninsula on
Mac-Robertson Coast, forming the NW. shore of
MacKenzie Bay; in about 67°50’S., 69°30’E. Nor-
wegian whalers explored this area in January and
February 1931, naming the cape at the end of this
peninsula for gunner Reidar Bjerk6 of the whale
catcher Bouvet II, from whose deck the coast was
sketched January 19. Since Sir Douglas Mawson
probably saw this cape from a great distance as
early as Dec. 26, 1929, the British name of Cape
Darnley has been retained for the cape, while the
Norwegian name has been applied to the peninsula.
BLACK, MOUNT: mountain about 9,000 ft. in el.,
forming a distinctive landmark in its region, lying
at the W. side of the upper reaches of Shackleton
Gl. just S. of the high escarpment of the Queen
Maud Range; in about 85°23’S., 179°45’W. Disc.
by R. Adm. Byrd on flights to the Queen Maud
Range in November 1929, and named by him for
Van Lear Black, American financier and contrib-
utor to the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30
and 1933-35.
Black, Mount: see Ruth Black, Mount.
BLACKBURN, MOUNT: massive mountain
standing E. of Robert Scott Gl., about 10 mi. S. of
the W. end of Watson Escarpment, in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 86°12’S., 146°W. Disc. by
and named for Quin A. Blackburn, geologist, leader
of the ByrdAE geological party which sledged the
full length of Robert Scott Gl. in December 1934.
Not adopted: Mount Jessie O’Keefe.
62
BLACK HEAD: dark, rugged promontory about
200 ft. in el., separating Cook and Possession Bays,
on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S.,
37°07’W. Named by DI personnel who charted
this area in 1929-30.
BLACK HEAD: dark headland marking the S.
side of the entrance to Holtedahl Bay, on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°06’S., 65°40’W. Disc.
and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37.
Blackhead Rock: see Blackrock Head.
BLACK ISLAND: islet about 0.25 mi. long,
which lies in the Argentine Is., about 0.25 mi. SW.
of Skua I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°16’S., 64°18’W. | Charted and named in 1935 by
the BGLE under Rymill.
BLACK ISLAND: wedge-shaped island about 13
mi. long and wide; lies S. of Ross I. and projects
through the ice shelf between Brown and White
Islands to about 3,600 ft. in el.; in about 78°15’S.,
166°30’E. Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott,
and so named by him because of the black volcanic
rocks on the island. Not adopted: Schwarze Insel
[German], Svart Oya [Norwegian].
BLACK ISLAND CHANNEL: channel about 200
yards wide, which lies between Black I. and Suka I.
in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°15’S., 64°17’W. Charted and named in 1935
by the BGLE under Rymill.
BLACK PEAK: sharp, dark, double-pointed peak
about 800 ft. in el., near the NW. end of Greenwich
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°02’W.
This peak, presumably known to early sealers in the
area, was charted by DI personnel on the Discovery
II in 1935 and given this descriptive name.
BLACK POINT: point on the W. side of Right.
Whale Bay, about 2 mi. SSW. of Nameless Pt., on
the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°42’W.
Charted and named by DI personnel in 1930.
BLACK POINT: point which lies 2.5 mi. SE. of
Cape Shirreff on the N. coast of Livingston I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 60°44’°W. The
point was known to sealers as early as 1822. It was
charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II.
BLACK REEF: reef which lies about 2 mi. W. of
Betbeder Its. and some 24 mi. W. of Cape Tuxen,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S.,
65°08’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BLACK RIDGE: narrow dividing ridge with
sharp peaks about 3,500 ft. in el., between Corner
Gl. and Priestley Gl., in Victoria Land; in about
74°37’S., 163°28’E. First explored by the Northern
Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and so
named because of its appearance.
BLACK ROCK: isolated rock about 0.7 mi. E.
of Candlemas I., in the*South Sandwich Is.; in
57°02’S., 26°39’'W. Charted and named in 1930
by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
BLACK ROCK: low rock about 10 mi. SE. of
Shag Rocks, and lying some 105 mi. WNW. of South
Georgia; in about 53°39’S., 41°48’W. Black Rock
may have been considered as part of the “Aurora
Islands” reported in this vicinity by the ship
Aurora in 1762. It was charted in 1927 by DI per-
sonnel on the William Scoresby.
BLACKROCK HEAD: conspicuous rock outcrop
on the shoreline of Kemp Coast, reported to lie
about 8 mi. NNW. of the W. side of the entrance to
Stefanson Bay; in about 67°10’S., 58°56’E. Disc.
in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby and so named by them for its appearance.
Not adopted: Blackhead Rock.
BLACK ROCKS: small group of rocks about 0.5
mi. SE. of Framnaes Pt., in the N. part of Stromness
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°08’S., 36°38’W. The
mame Blenheim Rocks has appeared for these rocks,
but since about 1930 the name Black Rocks has
been used more consistently. Not adopted: Blen-
heim Rocks.
BLACK THUMB MOUNTAIN: mountain with
notched and precipitous sides, about 3,900 ft. in el.,
lying about 5 mi. SE. of Red Rock Ridge on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°25’S., 66°53’W.
Charted and named by the BGLE under Rymill,
1934-37.
BLACKWALL MOUNTAINS: group of moun-
tains, the highest about 4,500 ft. in el., extending
in a WNW.-ESE. direction for 5 mi. and lying close
S. of Neny Fjord on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°22’S., 66°48’W. They are bounded to the E.
by Remus Gl., to the S. by Romulus Gl., and are
separated from Red Rock Ridge to the W. by
Safety Col. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by
the FIDS, and so named by them because the black
cliffs of the mountains facing Rymill Bay remain
snow free throughout the year. Not adopted:
Climbing Range.
‘BLACK RIDGE: sharp rock ridge marked by
three peaks, about 1,500 ft. in el., forming the NW.
wall of Depot Gl. at the head of Hope Bay, on the
63
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°25/S.,57°05’W. Disc.
by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold.
Named by the FIDS following their survey of the
area in 1945.
BLAIKLOCK ISLAND: high and rugged, irregu-
lar-shaped island, about 9 mi. long, lying near the
head of Bigourdan Fjord; in 67°33’S., 67°00’W. It
is separated from Pourquoi Pas I., to the SW., by
The Narrows and from the W. coast of Palmer
Pen., to the N., by Jones Channel. The feature was
partially surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Ry-
mill, at which time it was charted as a promontory
of Palmer Pen. It was resurveyed and determined
to be an island in 1949 by Kenneth V. Blaiklock,
FIDS surveyor for whom it is named.
BLAIR GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi.
wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the continental
ice at the W. flank of Norths Highland to the head
of Maury Bay, where it terminates in a prominent
tongue midway between Cape Lewis and Bell Gla-
cier, Banzare Coast; in about 66°45’S., 124°40’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for
James L. Blair, midshipman on the sloop of war
Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
BLAIR ISLETS: small group of islets lying about
4 mi. WNW. of Cape Gray, at the E. side of the en-
trance to Commonwealth Bay, off George V Coast;
in about 66°50’S., 143°12’ E. Disc. in 1912 by the
Main Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and
named by him for J. H. Blair, chief officer of the
exp. ship Aurora.
BLAKE, CAPE: rocky cape about 4 mi. WSW.
of Cape Wild, on George V Coast; in about
68°22’S., 148°58’E. Disc. in 1912 by the Main Base
party of the AAE under Mawson, and named by
him for L. R. Blake, geologist and cartographer
with the AAE party based on Macquarie Island
during 1912-13.
BLAKE ISLET: narrow islet lying in the ap-
proach to Bone Cove and about 4 mi. SSW. of Cape
Roquemaurel, off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe
Pen.; in 63°37’S., 58°58’W. Charted in 1948 by
the FIDS and named by them for Pattrick J. Blake,
midshipman on the brig Williams used in exploring
the South Shetland Is. and Bransfield Str. in 1820.
BLANCHARD RIDGE: rocky ridge about 1,100
ft. in el., which lies between Chaigneau Peak and
Mt. Scott on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about
65°12’S., 64°02’W. Charted by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot, and named by him for a Monsieur
Blanchard, then French Consul at Punta Arenas.
Not adopted: Blanchard Peak.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Blenheim Rocks: see Black Rocks.
BLIND BAY: small bay forming the.NE. ex-
tremity and head of Bourgeois Fjord and marking
the junction of Falliéres Coast and Loubet Coast,
along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; IN Giimoless
66°32’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE un-
der Rymill. So named by the FIDS, following a
1949 survey, because the bay proved a blind alley
to sledging parties.
Block Mount: see Paul Bloc, Mount; William
Block, Mount.
Block Bay: see Paul Block Bay.
BLOCK MOUNTAIN: very prominent block-
shaped mountain, about 4,800 ft. in el., which juts
eastward from the Douglas Range of Alexander I
Island immediately S. of Transition Gl.; in
70°28’S., 68°52’W. Its N., E., and S. sides, which
are demarked by sharply defined corners, are
nearly vertical, and from its NE. corner a low spur
connects this mountain with Tilt Rock. Block
Mountain was first photographed from the air on
Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and it was
mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg.
It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. The
descriptive name was given by FIDS.
BLOW-ME-DOWN BLUFF: prominent rock bluff,
about 6,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. flank of
Northeast Gl. on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in
68°03’S., 66°40’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE, and by the USAS in 1940. Resur-
veyed in 1946 and 1948 by the FIDS who so named
it because the bluff stands in the windiest part of
Northeast Gl., and many members of FIDS sledge
parties have fallen in this area in high winds.
Bludau Mountains:. (in about 73°30’S., 4°10’E.)
the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as it
is not possible to correlate the feature with subse-
quent survey work.
BLUE GLACIER: glacier about 2 to 4 mi. wide
and about 20 mi. long, which flows into Bowers
Piedmont Gl. about 10 mi. S. of New Harbor, in
Victoria Land; in about 77°52’S., 164°10’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who gave it this
name because of its clear blue ice at the time of
discovery.
BLUE WHALE HARBOR: small, sheltered an-
chorage, entered about 1 mi. SW. of Cape Con-
stance, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in
54°04’S., 37°01’W. Charted in 1930 by DI per-
sonnel. The blue whale is a commercially impor-
64
tant species which is widely distributed in polar
and subpolar waters.
BLUNT COVE: small bay at the head of Vin-
cennes Bay, lying immediately W. of the steep ter-
minus of Bond Glacier and indenting the E. end of
Knox Coast; in about 67°00’S., 109°05’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for
Simon F. Blunt, passed midshipman on the sloop
of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
BLYTHE BAY: bay about 17 mi. wide, which in-
dents for 5 mi. the N. side of Livingston I. between
Cape Shirreff and Williams Pt., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 62°29’S., 60°30’W. The name appears
on Powell’s chart of 1822 published by Laurie, as
applying to a small bay on the SE. side of Desola-
tion I. It has since been extended to the area de-
scribed. Probably named after Blythe, England
(now Blyth), home of William Smith who reported
the discovery of the South Shetland Is. in 1819.
Blythe Bay: see Desolation Harbor.
Bob Bartlett Glacier: see Bartlett Glacier.
BODMAN POINT: rocky point which is situated
centrally on the NW. coast of Saymour I. in the
James Ross I. group; in 64°14’S., 56°48’W. First
surveyed by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold,
1901-4, who named it Cape Bodman after Dr.
Gosta Bodman, hydrographer and meteorologist
with the expedition. It was resurveyed by the
FIDS in 1952. Point is considered a more suitable
descriptive term for this feature than cape. Not
adopted: Cape Bodman.
BODYS, MOUNT: easternmost mountain on Ade-
laide I.; in 67°09’S., 67°48’W. It is more than 4,000
ft. in el. and is ice covered except for small rock
exposures on the S. side. First roughly surveyed
in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Resurveyed
in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them for Set.
William. S. Bodys, mechanic for the expedition’s
Norseman airplane in 1950.
BOECKELLA, LAKE: lake, about 400 yards long
and 200 yards wide, which lies on the SE. shore of
Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°24’S., 57°00’W. Disc. and named by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Boeckella
is a species of crustaceans found in this area.
BOGGS, CAPE: bold, ice-covered headland
marking the E. end of Eielson Pen., on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 70°33’S., 61°23’W. Disc. by
members of East Base of the USAS who charted
this coast by land and from the airin 1940. Named
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
for S. W. Boggs, Geographer, Dept. of State, whose
political and geographical studies of Antarctica
were used by the USAS. Not adopted: Cape
Hielson.
Boggs Strait: see Stefansson Strait.
BOHNECKE GLACIER: steep glacier about 3 mi.
wide, which flows SSE. to the NW. side of Violante
Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°25’S.,
61°25’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in
December 1940 by members of the USAS. During
1947 the glacier was photographed from the air by
members of the RARE, under Ronne, who in con-
junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground.
Named by the FIDS for Gunther Bohnecke, Ger-
man oceanographer and member of the Ger. exp.
in the Meteor, 1925-27.
BOLAND, MOUNT: mountain over 3,500 ft. in
el., about 3 mi. S. of Mt. Peary and about 4 mi. E.
of Lumiére Peak, on the E.—-W. trending ridge that
borders the N. side of Trooz Gl., on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in about 65°19’S., 63°52’W. Disc. by
the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by
.uim for Monsieur Boland, seaman, and later lieu-
cenant on the Pourquoi-Pas?, Charcot’s exp. ship.
B@LINGEN ISLANDS: group of small islands,
islets and rocks, about 8 mi. across, bounded on the
S. by Polararboken Glacier Tongue, lying about 5
mi. WSW. of Larsemann Hills, off Ingrid Christen-
sen Coast; in about 69°31’S., 75°10’E. Disc. and
roughly charted in February 1935 by the Nor. exp.
under Mikkelsen. Bglingen is a Norwegian word
meaning the herd. More fully charted by Nor-
wegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars
Christensen. Not adopted: Bolingen [Norwegian].
BOLLE, MONT: rather isolated peak rising
through the icecap in New Schwabenland, about
19 mi. N. of the edge of the polar plateau and a like
distance WNW. of Kubus Mtn.; in about 72°18’S.,
6°15’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938—
39, and named for Herbert Bolle, aviation super-
visor of the expedition.
BONAPARTE, MOUNT: northernmost of three
summits lying about 45 mi. inland from the W. side
of Ross Ice Shelf, in the Queen Alexandra Range,
and about 18 mi. SSE. of Mt. Markham; in about
83°14’S., 161°30’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton, and named by him for Prince
Roland Bonaparte, Pres. of the Geographical Soc.
of Paris.
Bonaparte Point: see Roland Bonaparte Point.
65
BOND GLACIER: steep glacier, about 10 mi.
wide and of undetermined length, flowing NW.
from the continental ice at the junction of Knox
and Budd Coasts and terminating abruptly at the
head of Vincenes Bay between Hatch Its. and
Blunt Cove; in about 67°05’S., 109°20’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—-ACAN for
Capt. Charles A. Bond, USN, commander of the
western task group of USN Op. Hjp., Task Force
68, 1946-47.
BON DOCTEUR NUNATAK: small coastal nuna-
tak, about 85 ft. in el., standing at the W. side
of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, about 0.5 mi. SSE.
of Pétrel I. in the Géologie Arch., on Adélie Coast;
in 65°40’S., 140°01’E. Photographed from the air
by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE
under Marret, 1952-53, and named for Dr. Jean
Cendron, medical officer and biologist with the
FrAE under Barré, 1951-52.
BONE COVE: semi-circular cove about 2 mi.
wide, situated immediately S. of Young Pt. at the
terminus of West Russell Gl., along the NW. side
of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°38’S., 58°53’W. The
FIDS charted the cove in 1948 and named it for
Thomas M. Bone, midshipman on the Brig. Wil-
liams, which made explorations in the South Shet-
land Is. and Bransfield Str. in 1820.
BONGRAIN, CAPE: cape which forms the S.
side of the entrance to Dalgliesh Bay on the SW.
side of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°44’S., 67°47’W. First surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948
by the FIDS, who named the cape for Maurice Bon-
grain, surveyor and First Officer of the Pouwrquoi-
Pas?, ship of the FrAE, 1908-10, who was respon-
sible for the first surveys of this area.
BONGRAIN ICE PIEDMONT: large ice pied-
mont, about 60 mi. long in a NESW. direction,
and at least 17 mi. wide in its widest part, occupy-
ing the NW. coastal area of Alexander I Island;
centering near 69°10’S., 72°05’W. First seen from
a distance and roughly surveyed by the FrAE,
1908-10, under Charcot. It was photographed
from the air by the BGLE during a flight on Aug.
15, 1936, and roughly mapped from these photo-
graphs. Named by the BR-APC in 1954 for Mau-
rice Bongrain, surveyor of the FrAE, 1908-10, who
was responsible for the first map of this coast.
BOOMERANG GLACIER: tributary glacier
which flows S. from the slopes of Mt. Dickason to
join Campbell Gl., in Victoria Land; in about
74°41’S., 163°52’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Scott,
1910-13, who so named it because of its shape.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BOOTHBY, CAPE: rounded cape on a large pro-
jection of the coast at the E. edge of Enderby Land,
just N. of Edward VIII Bay; in about 66°36’S.,
57°15’E. Disc. by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby on about Feb. 28, 1936, and named by
them for the captain of the William Scoresby, Lt.
Cdr. C. R. U. Boothby, RNR.
BOOTH ISLAND: V-shaped island, about 5 mi.
long and 3 mi wide at the N. end, rising to about
3,100 ft. in el., lying in the Dannebrog Is. about
7 mi. WSW. of Cape Renard, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S., 64°00’W. Disc. and
named by a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann,
probably for Oskar Booth, or Stanley Booth, or
both, members of the Hamburg Geographical Soc.
at that time. The US-ACAN has rejected the
name Wandel Island, applied by the BelgAE under
De Gerlache, 1897-99, in favor of the original nam-
ing. Not adopted: Wandel Island.
BOOT ROCK: rock about 105 ft. in el., which
lies 0.1 mi. off the SE. side of Candlemas I., in
the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°03’S., 26°39’W.
Charted and named by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery II in 1930.
BORCHGREVINK NUNATAK: nunatak about
2 mi. long and about 2,100 ft. in el., which stands
at the S. side of the entrance to Richthofen Valley,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°03’S., 62°30’W.
Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold,
who named it for C. E. Borchgrevink, leader of the
BrAE, 1898-1900. The nunatak was charted by
the FIDS and photographed from the air by the
RARE in 1947. Not adopted: Borchgrewingk
Nunatak, Borchgrewink Nunatak.
Borchgrewingk Nunatak; Borchgrewink Nuna-
tak: see Borchgrevink Nunatak.
BOREAS NUNATAK: a nunatak on Princess
Martha Coast, standing close W. of Passat Nunatak
and fronting on the large ice shelf that here
fringes the coast; in about 71°18’S., 4°00’W. Disc.
by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named
for one of the Dornier flying boats of the
expedition.
Bores Dal: see Bore Valley.
BORE VALLEY: valley, almost 2 mi. long in a
N.-S. direction, extending from Maiviken to
Grytviken in Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in
54°16’S., 36°31’W. It was first surveyed and
named “Bores Dal’ by the SwedAE under Nor-
denskjold, 1901-4, but the form Bore Valley has
since become well established for the feature. The
discovery by J. Gunnar Andersson, of the SwedAE,
of numerous traces of a former ice covering, prov-
66
ing that ice had once filled the entire valley, sug-
gested the name. Bore is the Swedish word for
Boreas, the god of the north wind. Not adopted:
Bores Dal [Swedish], Mai Viken Glen.
BORGE BAY: small bay between Balin and
Berntsen Points, on the E. side of Signy I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. Charted
in 1912 by a Nor. exp. under S¢grlle. Named for
Capt. Hans Borge, master of the Polynesia, who
undertook additional mapping of the bay during
the following year. Not adopted: Borge Harbor,
Queens Bay.
Borge Harbor. see Borge Bay.
Borge Havna: see Factory Cove.
BORGEN BAY: circular bay about 3 mi. wide,
indenting the SE. coast of Anvers I. close W. of
Bay Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°44’S., 63°30’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99,
and named by him, probably for Karl Borgen, Ger-
man astronomer. Not adopted: Borgen Bay, Wil-
liam Bay.
BORLEY, CAPE: cape projecting slightly from
the coast of Enderby Land; in about 65°57’S.,
55°13’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson
on about Jan. 12, 1930. John Oliver Borley was
a member of the Discovery Committee.
BORLEY POINT: the NW. tip of Montagu L.,
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°23’S., 26°28’W.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II and named for John Oliver Borley.
Borodino Island: see Smith Island.
BORRADAILE ISLAND: one of the Balleny Is.,
about 2 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, lying about 5 mi.
S. of the SE. end of Young I.; in about 66°35’S.,
162°50’E. Disc. in February 1839 by a Br. exp. -
under Balleny, who named it for W. Borradaile,
one of the merchants who united with Charles
Enderby in sending out the expedition. Not
adopted: Borradaille Island, Borradalie Oya [Nor-
wegian].
Borradaille Island; Borradali Oya: see Borradaile
Island.
BOTANY BAY: small bight between Cape Geol-
ogy and Discovery Bluff, on the S. side of Granite
Hbr., along the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about
77°00’S., 162°37’E. Charted by the Western Ge-
ological Party of the BrAE under Scott, who ex-
plored the Granite Hbr. area in 1911-12. Named
T. Griffith Taylor and Frank Debenham, Austral-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ian members of the party, after Botany Bay, Aus-
tralia.
BOTTRILL HEAD: rugged headland on the E.
side of Bourgeois Fjord which forms the N. side
of the entrance to Dogs Leg Fjord, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 67°42’S., 66°57’W. First sur-
veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The
headland was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who
named it for Harold Bottrill, Chairman of the
Board of Directors, later Gen. Mgr., of Maclean
and Stapledon S.A., shipping agents at Montevideo,
who gave great assistance to the BGLE, 1934-37,
and to FIDS, 1943-48.
BOULDER POINT: the S. extremity of Stoning-
ton I., close off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°11’S., 67°00’W. First surveyed in 1940 by the
USAS. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so
named by them because of a prominent granite
boulder on this point.
BOULDER ROCK: rock lying along the W. coast
of the Cape Adare peninsula just S. of Ridley
Beach, in northern Victoria Land; in about
71°19’S., 170°14’E. Charted and named in 1911
by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott.
Boulier, Islotes: see Rho Islets.
Bouquet Bay: see Bouquet de la Grye Bay.
BOUQUET DE LA GRYE BAY: bay, about 10
mi. long and wide, which indents the N. coast of
Brabant I. immediately E. of Pasteur Pen., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°05’S., 62°10’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for Jean Bouquet de la Grye, French hydrographic
engineer and a member of the commission which
published the scientific results of the expedition.
Not adopted: Bouquet Bay.
BOURGEOIS FJORD: inlet about 30 mi. long,
in.a NE.-SW. direction, and 4 mi. wide, lying be-
tween the E. sides of Pourquoi Pas and Blaiklock
Islands and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
67°40’S., 67°05’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot, and named by him for Col. Joseph
E. Bourgeois, Dir. of the Geographic Service of the
French Army. The outline of thjs inlet was more
accurately delineated in 1936 by ;jthe BGLE under
Rymill, and in 1948-50 by the FIDS.
Bouvet Island: see Bouvetgya.
BOUVET@YA [Norwegian]; BOUVET ISLAND
or BOUVET [conventional]: island, about 5 mi.
long in an E.—W. direction, and 4 mi. wide, which
terminates in steep rock and ice cliffs on all sides
67
and is surmounted by an ice-covered dome about
3,100 ft. in el., in about 54°26’S., 3°24’E. Disc. on
Jan. 1, 1739 by a Fr. exp. under J. B. C. Bouvet de
Lozier. Heavy pack ice and fog prevented Bouvet
from determining the nature of his discovery. Al-
though evidence, recently uncovered, indicates that
Bouvetgya was resighted in 1808 and identified as
an island by the British ships Snow Swan and
Otter, it was not until the German ship Valdivia
visited the island in 1898 that the insular nature
and accurate position of the feature were deter-
mined and made known.
BOUVIER, MOUNT: massive, mainly ice-covered
mountain, about 6,800 ft. in el., standing imme-
diately N. of the head of Stonehouse Bay in the E.
part of Adelaide I.; in 67°14’S., 68°09’W. Disc. and
roughly positioned by the FrAE, 1903-5, under
Charcot, and named by him for Louis E. Bouvier,
prominent French naturalist. The mountain was
surveyed by the FrAE, 1908-10, also under Charcot,
and by the FIDS in 1948-50.
BOWEN, MOUNT: mountain of stratified sand-
stone capped by a sharp black peak about 4,100 ft.
in el., lying on the N. side of Davis Gl. and SSW.
of Mt. Howard, in Victoria Land; in about
75°46’S., 161°02’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4
under Scott, who named this feature for the Hon.
C. C. Bowen, one of the men who gave the exp.
much assistance in New Zealand.
Bower Hill: see Bowers Hills.
BOWERS HILLS: rugged, snow-covered hills of
moderate height between Capes Cheetham and
Williams, on Qates Coast; in about 170°10’S.,
162°45’E. First sighted in February 1911 from the
Terra Nova, under Lt. Harry L. L. Pennell, RN, of
the BrAK. Lt. Henry R. Bowers perished with
Capt. Robert F. Scott, leader of the BrAE, on the
return from the South Pole in 1912. Not adopted:
Bower Hill.
BOWERS PIEDMONT GLACIER: piedmont gla-
cier covering about 25 square mi., lying S. of New
Harbor and merging with Blue Gl. to the south,
along the W. shore of McMudro Sound, in about
77°45’S., 164°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4. The BrAE under Scott, 1910-13,
named this feature for Lt. Henry R. Bowers. Not
adopted: Butter Point Piedmont, Butter Point
Piedmont Glacier.
BOWLES, CAPE: cliff forming the S. tip of Clar-
ence I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about
61°17’S., 54°03°W. Named in 1820 by a Br. exp.
under Bransfield.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BOWLES, MOUNT: mountain about 3,000 ft. in
el., which stands about 4 mi. NW. of Mt. Barnard
on the divide between South Bay and Moon Bay,
on Livingston I. in the South Shetland Is.; in
about 62°35’S., 60°15’W. The name appears on
an 1829 chart based upon a Br. exp. under Foster.
BOWLIN, MOUNT: mountain rising to about
7,000 ft. in el., which stands on the E. side of Robert
Scott Gl., just W. of Mt. Noville, in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 86°27’S., 146°45’W. Disc.
in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party
under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for
William H. Bowlin, airplane pilot with the expe-
dition.
BOWMAN COAST: that portion of the E. coast
of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Northrop, in
67°24’S., 65°16’W., to Cape Agassiz, in 68°30’S.,
62°58’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in an aerial
flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Named by Wilkins for
Isaiah Bowman, then Dir. of the American Geo-
graphical Society.
BOWMAN ISLAND: ice-covered island about 15
mi. long and from 2 to 6 mi. wide, with a coastal
outline resembling the shape of the numeral 8, ly-
ing about 21 mi. NE. of Cape Elliott off Knox Coast;
in about 65°27’S., 103°18’E. Disc. by the BAN-
ZARE under Mawson from the Discovery on Jan.
28, 1931 and named for Isaiah Bowman. Not
adopted: Bowman Islands.
Bowman Peak: see John Bowman Peak.
BOWMAN PENINSULA: peninsula, about 25 mi.
long in a N.-S. direction and 15 mi. wide in its N.
and central portions, lying between Nantucket
and Gardner Inlets on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 74°47’S., 62°22’W. The peninsula is ice covered
and narrows toward the S., terminating in Cape
Adams. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne,
who named it for Isaiah Bowman.
BOYD GLACIER: heavily-crevassed glacier,
from 6 to 15 mi. wide, in the S. part of the Edsel
Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land, rising in the vi-
cinity of the Clark Mtns. and flowing WNW. about
60 mi. to Sulzberger Bay. It is fed by two short,
broad tributaries, one from the N., another from
the S., and the terminus of the glacier lies in about
77°10’S., 145°45’W. Disc. on aerial flights of the
ByrdAE in 1934 and named for Vernon D. Boyd,
machinist on the exp. and member of West Base
of the USAS, 1939-41. Not adopted: Ames Glacier.
BOYD STRAIT: lies between Snow I. and Smith
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°50’S., 62°00’W.
Named in 1823 by a Br. exp. under Weddell for
Capt. David Boyd, RN.
68
BRABANT ISLAND: second largest island of the
Palmer Arch., lying between Anvers and Liége
Islands; in 64°15’S., 62°20’W. It is about 33 mi.
long in a N.-S. direction, 20 mi. wide, and rises to
about 6,300 ft. in el. in Mt. Parry. Named by the
BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, for the prov-
ince of Brabant, Belgium, in recognition of the
support given to the BelgAE by its citizens.
BRADLEY, MOUNT: pyramidal peak about
2,800 ft. in el., which lies about 6 mi. WSW. of Pitt
Pt. on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in
63°53’S., 58°37’W. First charted in 1945 by the
FIDS, who named it for K. G. Bradley, at that time
Colonial Sec. in the Falkland Islands.
BRAIN ISLAND: islet at the N. side of Husvik
Hbr., in Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in
54°10’S., 36°42’W. Charted and named by DI
personnel in 1928.
Branco, Mount: see Rio Branco, Mount.
Brand-Berg: see Brandt, Mount.
BRANDT, MOUNT: mountain projecting
through the icecap at the N. margin of the New
Schwabenland piedmont; in about 172°25’S.,
1°00’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher,
1938-39, and named for Emil Brandt, a sailor on
the expedition. Not adopted: Brand-Berg [Ger-
man].
BRANSFIELD, MOUNT: prominent, conical-
topped, ice-covered mountain, about 2,500 ft. in el.,
about 2 mi. SW. of Cape Dubouzet, the NE. tip of
Palmer Pen.; in 63°17’S., 57°06’W. Disc. by a Fr.
exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, who named it for
Edward Bransfield, Master, RN, who circumnavi-
gated and charted the South Shetland Is. in 1820.
Not adopted: Mount Hope.
Bransfield, Point: see Bransfield Island.
BRANSFIELD ISLAND: circular island about
3.5 mi. in diameter, lying 2 mi. SW. of D’Urville I.,
the northernmost of the Joinville I. group, off the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°12’S., 56°38’°W. The
name Point Bransfield, after Edward Bransfield,
Master, RN, was given in 1842 by a Br. exp. under
Ross to the low western termination of what is
now the Joinville I. group. A 1947 survey by the
FIDS determined that this western termination is
a separate island. Not adopted: Point Bransfield.
BRANSFIELD ROCKS: group of rocks lying
some 23 mi. ENE. of North Foreland, King George
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°45’S.,
56°51’W. These rocks were reported in 1926 to
lie SW. of this position. Named for Edward Brans-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
field, Master, RN, who reported their presence in
1820.
BRANSFIELD STRAIT: body of water about 60
mi. wide extending for 200 mi. in a general
NE.-SW. direction between the South Shetland Is.
and Palmer Pen.; centering in 63°S.,59°W. Named
in about 1825 by James Weddell, Master, RN, for
Edward Bransfield, Master, RN.
BRANSTETTER ROCKS: small group of offshore
rocks, lying about 1 mi. ENE. of Thil It. and about
0.2 mi. W. of a small rocky bluff, which may later
prove to be an island, close off Ingrid Christensen
Coast; in about 70°08’S., 71°53’E. Delineated in
1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named
by him for J. C. Branstetter, air crewman on USN
Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and
other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east
longitude.
BRATEGG BANK: submarine bank lying W. of
Palmer Pen., about 65 mi. NW. of the central part
of the Biscoe Is.; in about 65°16’S., 68°35’W. The
bank was charted by the Norwegian ship Brategg
in 1948. Not adopted: Bratteggen [Norwegian].
Bratholm: see Steepholm.
Bratteggen: see Brategg Bank.
Braun Berg: see Brown Mountain.
BREAKWATER ISLET: islet, marked by a string
of rocks extending in a SW. arc, lying 0.5 mi. off
the E. side of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°47’S., 63°13’W. Disc. and named by the FIDS
in 1944.
BREAKWIND RIDGE: prominent rocky ridge,
about 2 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and 2,000 ft.
in el., standing close SW. of the head of Fortuna
Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°09’S.,
36°50’W. The name Breakwind Range was prob-
ably applied by DI personnel who mapped Fortuna
Bay in 1929-30. Following a resurvey by the SGS,
1951-52, the descriptive term was altered to ridge,
which is more suitable than range for this rela-
tively small feature.
gests a beneficial function of this ridge in protect-
ing anchorages at Fortuna Bay from violent south-
west and westerly winds. Not adopted: Breakwind
Range.
Breckenridge, Mount: see Breckinridge, Mount.
BRECKINRIDGE, MOUNT: peak in the N. group
of the Rockefeller Mtns., standing about 2.1 mi. SW.
of Mt. Nilsen on Edward VII Pen.; in about
The name Breakwind sug- .
69
78°03/S., 155°28’W. Disc. by the BydrAE in 1929
and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Col. and Mrs.
Henry Breckinridge of New York. Not adopted:
Mount Breckenridge.
BREID BAY: bay about 20 mi. wide, which ir-
regularly indents, for as much as 12 mi., the Prin-
cess Ragnhild Coast; in about 70°20’S., 23°00’E.
This bay was charted and named Breidvika by
H. E. Hansen, as a result of aerial photographs
made on Feb. 6, 1937 by members of a Nor. exp.
under Christensen. Not adopted: Breidvika [Nor-
wegian], Broad Bay.
Breidneset: see Breidnes Peninsula.
BREIDNES PENINSULA: rocky peninsula, about
7 mi. long and from 2 to 5 mi. wide, extending W.
from the main section of the Vestfold Hills, on
Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°35'S.,
78°10’E. The name derives from Breidneset (the
broad headland) as applied on the H. E. Hansen
charts compiled from aerial photographs taken
in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars
Christensen. Not adopted: Breidneset [Norwe-
gian].
Breidvika: see Breid Bay.
BREITFUSS GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi.
long, which flows S. from an el. of 5,000 ft. into Mill
Inlet, close W. of Cape Chavanne, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°58’S., 64°52’W. Charted by
the FIDS and photographed from the air by the
RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Leonid
Breitfuss, German polar explorer, historian, and
author of many polar bibliographies. Not adopted:
Wilson Glacier.
BREWSTER, MOUNT: mountain at the S. end
of the Admiralty Range, about 4,000 ft. in el.,
standing on the SW. side of Tucker Inlet, near
the N. end of Victoria Land; in about 72°50’S.,
169°20’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross,
who named it for Sir David Brewster, Scottish
physicist.
BREYER, MOUNT: sentinel-type mountain
about 11,700 ft. in el., standing on the W. side of
the upper reaches of Amundsen Gl. about 15 mi.
ENE. of Mt. Helmer Hanssen, in the Queen Maud
Range; in about 86°00’S., 160°30’W. This moun-
tain was disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE
flight to the South Pole in November 1929. On
a subsequent chart, however, the name Mount
Breyer was applied to the mountain to the W. that
has now been identified as the feature named
Mount Helmer Hanssen by the Nor. exp. under
Amundsen in November 1911. The US—ACAN ap-
plied the name Mount Breyer to this hitherto un-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
named 11,700-foot mountain disc. by Byrd, and
retained the name Mount Helmer Hanssen for the
mountains so named by Amundsen. Mount Breyer
is named for Robert S. Breyer, West Coast rep-
resentative and patron of the ByrdAE, 1928-30.
Not adopted: Mount Helmer Hanssen (q.v.).
Breyer, Mount: see Helmer Hanssen, Mount.
Brialmont Bay: see Brialmont Cove; Hughes Bay.
BRIALMONT COVE: cove in Hughes Bay, lying
between Cape Charles and Spring along the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°14’S., 61°07’W.
Charted in 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
who named it for Lieutenant-Général Brailmont, a
member of the Belgica Commission. Not adopted:
Brailmont Bay.
BRIAN ISLAND: westernmost of the Debenham
Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S.,
67°07’'W. Charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under
Rymill, who named it for a son of Frank Deben-
ham, member of the BGLE Advisory Committee.
BRIDGEMAN ISLAND: circular-shaped, volcanic
island marked by steep sides, about 2 mi. in extent
and about 760 ft. in el., lying about 25 mi. E. of the
SE. end of King George I. in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°04’S., 56°40’W. Bridgeman is an old
established name dating back to about 1820. Not
adopted: Bridgeman’s Island, Bridgman Island,
Helena Island.
Bridgman Island: see Bridgeman Island.
BRIESEMEISTER PEAK: peak about 2,300 ft.
in el., which stands about 7 mi. WNW. of Cape
Rymill on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°28’S.,
62°45’°W. This peak was photographed from the
air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928, and
by the USAS in 1940. It was named by the RARE
under Ronne, 1947-48, for William A. Briesemeis-
ter, chief cartographer with the American Geo-
graphical Soc., who by recognizing this peak on
two photographs taken by Wilkins established
their continuity, an important clue to the identity
and correct position of Stefansson Strait (Geo-
graphical Review, July 1948, pp. 477, 484). Not
adopted: Mount Briesemeister.
BRIGGS POINT: point which forms the W.
side of the entrance to Inverleigh Hbr., on the NE.
coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°31’S.,
63°00’W. Charted in 1927 by DI personnel on the
Discovery, who named it for a member of the
survey party.
BRINDLE CLIFFS: precipitous mass of ice-free
rock, about 2,000 ft. in el., standing about 6 mi.
E. of Cape Jeremy on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
70
in 69°23’S., 68°33’W. First seen from the air and
photographed on Aug. 16, 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who so
named the feature because of its color.
BRISBANE PLATEAU: plateau, about 7 mi. long
and more than 3,000 ft. in el., extending from
Worswick Hill to Beaufoy Ridge in the central
part of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S.,
45°40’W. Named by the FIDS following their sur-
vey of 1948-49. Matthew Brisbane, master of
the cutter Beaufoy, accompanied James Weddell,
master of the brig Jane, to the South Orkney Is.
in January 1823, and roughly charted the S. coast
of the group.
BRISTOL ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long,
which lies about midway between Montagu I..and
Southern Thule, in the South Sandwich Is.; in
59°02’S., 26°31’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook
in 1775, and named by him for the title name
of the noble family of Hervey.
BRITANNIA RANGE: range of mountains ly-
ing between the Cape Murray depression and
Barne Inlet, W. of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°S.,
159°E. Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott.
The name appears on the charts of the BrAE under
Shackleton, 1907-9.
Broad Bay: see Breid Bay.
BROAD VALLEY: glacier-filled valley which de-
scends ESE. about 10 mi. from Misty Pass on NW.
and Windy Gap on the extreme W. to the bay be-
tween View Pt. and Bald Head, on the SE. coast
of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°32’S., 57°55’W. First
charted and named by the FIDS in 1946. The
name is descriptive.
BROCKLEHURST, MOUNT: dome-shaped
mountain about 4,300 ft. in el., lying about 15
mi. WSW. of Mt. Smith in the Prince Albert Mtns.
of Victoria Land; in about 76°08’S., 160°55’E. First
charted by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9,
who named it for Sir Philip Lee Brocklehurst, asst.
geologist with the expedition.
BR@DE ISLAND: small, rounded, tussock-cov-
ered island, about 1 mi. SW. of Green I., off the S.
tip of South Georgia; in 54°54’S., 36°07’W. This
island was first charted in 1775 by a Br. exp.
under Cook. It was roughly surveyed by a Ger.
exp., 1928-29, under Kohl-Larsen, who appears to
have used the name “Hauptinsel’” (head island)
for this feature. Following their survey in 1951-52,
the SGS reported that the name Brgde (Nor-
wegian word meaning loaf) is firmly established
among whalers and sealers for this island. This
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
name is approved on the basis of local usage.
Not adopted: Hauptinsel [German].
BROGGER, MOUNT: mountain about 4,200 ft.
in el., which forms part of the N. wall of Cleveland
Gl. about 4 mi. NW. of the confluence of the Cleve-
land and Mackay Glaciers, in Victoria Land; in
about 76°52’S., 161°55’E. Charted by the BrAE,
1910-138, under Scott, and named for Prof. Walde-
mar C. Brogger, Norwegian geologist and mineralo-
gist.
BROGGER GLACIER: glacier which flows in a
W. direction to the E. side of Undine South Hbr.,
on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°32’S.,
36°27’°W. The name appears on a chart by Prof.
Olaf Holtedahl, Norwegian geologist who con-
ducted investigations in South Georgia in 1928,
and is probably for Prof. Waldemar Brogger.
BROKA ISLAND: rocky island about 4 mi. long
and 3 mi. wide, rising to an el. of about 460 ft.,
lying about 2 mi. off Kemp Coast and about 18
mi. NW. of the entrance to Stefansson Bay; in
about 67°05’S., 58°40’E. This island may have
been seen in February 1936 by DI personnel on the
William Scoresby, but if so it was considered by
them as part of the mainland. It was mapped
as an island by Norwegian cartographers from
aerial photographs taken on a Nor. exp. under
Christensen in January-February 1937, and prob-
ably so named by them because of its nature or
appearance.
BROKEN ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and
1.5 mi. wide, which lies 1 mi. N. of Centre I. in
the N. part of Square Bay, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 67°49’S., 66°57’W. Disc. and
named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37.
BROMS, CAPE: cape which marks the S. side
of the entrance to Réhss Bay on the SW. side of
James Ross I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
64°20’S., 58°18’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjold, who named it for G. E. Broms,
a patron of the expedition.
BROOKLYN ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long
and 2 mi. wide, which lies about 1 mi. N. of Wyck
I. in the E. part of Wilhelmina Bay, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°35’S., 61°51’W. Disc.
by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and
named after the home of Dr. Frederick A. Cook,
American member of the BelgAE who served as
surgeon, anthropologist, and photographer.
BROOKS, CAPE: cape marked by steep, con-
spicuous walls which rise to about 1,500 ft. in el,
forming the S. side of the entrance to New Bed-
ford Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
71
73°36’S., 60°46’W. Disc. and photographed from
the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS.
During 1947 the cape was photographed from the
air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction
with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named
by the FIDS for Charles E. P. Brooks, English
meteorologist on the staff of the Meteorological
Office, 1907-49.
Brothers, The: see Sorn and Bernt.
Brothers Hill: see Three Brothers Hill.
BROTHERS ROCKS: group of rocks surrounded
by foul ground, about 1 mi. E. of the N. part
of Saunders I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in
57°46’S., 26°25’W. Charted and named in 1930
by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Not adopted:
The Brothers Rocks.
BROUARDEL POINT: point on the SW. side of
the Mt. Lacroix peninsula, marking the E. side of
the entrance to Port Charcot, Booth I., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°03’S., 64°00’W.
First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot.
Named for Doctor Brouardel, identified by Charcot
as a member of the Institut de France. Not
adopted: Point Brouardel.
Broune Insel: see Brown Island.
BROWN, CAPE: prominent ice-covered cape
about 5.5 mi. NNE. of the summit of Mt. Nicholas,
marking the E. side of the entrance to Schokalsky
Bay on the NE. coast of Alexander I Island; in
69°16’S., 69°45’W. First seen from a distance
by the FrAE under Charcot in 1909, but charted as
part of a small island. It was photographed from
the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill, and
later roughly mapped from the photographs. Sur-
veyed from the ground in 1948 by Colin C. Brown,
FIDS surveyor at Stonington I., 1948-49, for whom
the cape is named.
BROWN, MOUNT: elongated rock peak protrud-
ing slightly above the continental ice behind Wil-
helm II Coast, rising to about 7,000 ft. in el., about
100 mi. SSW. of Cape Penck; in about 68°15’S.,
86°30’E. This isolated nunatak lies at the E. side
of a series of heavily crevassed domes on the ice
surface, indicating an area of completely buried
mountain peaks. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp, 1946-47, and named
by the US-ACAN for Lt. (jg) Eduardo P. Brown,
USN, photographic officer of the western task
group of USN Op. Hjp., Task Force 68.
BROWN BLUFF: ice-capped, flat-topped moun-
tain, about 2,400 ft. in el., with a prominent cliff
of reddish-brown volcanic rock on the N. face, about
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
9 mi. S. of Hope Bay on the E. side of Tabarin Pen.,
at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°32’S., 56°55’W.
First charted by the FIDS, who named it following
their survey in 1946.
BROWNING, MOUNT: mountain about 2,500 ft.
in el., which stands at the N. end of the mountain
mass dominated by Mt. Abbott, at the W. side of
Terra Nova Bay, in Victoria Land; in about
74°45’S., 164°00’E. Probably first seen by the
BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Named by the BrAE
under Scott, 1910-13, for Petty Officer Frank V.
Browning, RN, a member of the party which ex-
plored this area.
BROWN ISLAND: small, brown, almost snow-
free island about 5.5 mi. SW. of Cape Errera,
Wiencke I., at the SW. end of the Palmer Arch.; in
64°58’S., 63°47’W. Charted by the BGLE under
Rymill, 1934-37, and so named because its brown
color was distinguishable from adjacent snow-
capped islands.
BROWN ISLAND: an island-like promontory,
about 10 mi. long and 4 mi. wide, protruding
through the Ross Ice Shelf N. of Mt. Discovery, to
which it is connected by a low isthmus; in about
78°10’S., 165°25’E. Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE
under Scott, who so named it because of its color.
Not adopted: Broune Insel [German], Brun Oya
[Norwegian].
BROWN MOUNTAIN: rounded hill, about 1,100
ft. in el., standing 1 mi. S. of the whaling station at
Grytviken, near the W. shore of Cumberland East
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°31’W. The.
feature was first surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjéld. The _ descriptive name
“Braun-Berg” or “Braun Berg” (meaning Brown
Mountain) was given by A. Szielasko who mapped
this area in 1906. The English form of the name
was recommended by the Br-APC in 1954. Not
adopted: Braun Berg [German], Braun-Berg
[German].
BROWN PEAK: peak about 5,000 ft. in el., which
rises in the N. part of Sturge I., in the Balleny Is.;
in about 67°17’S., 164°10’E. Disc. in February
1839 by a Br. exp. under Balleny, who named it for
W. Brown, one of the merchants who helped Charles
Enderby in sending out the exp. The peak was
resighted in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who
applied the name Russell Peak. Not adopted: Rus-
sell Peak.
BROWNS BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. wide, which
lies between Capes Mabel and Geddes along the N.
coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°43’S., 44°36’W. The bay was probably seen in
1823 by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell. It was
72
charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who
named it for R. N. Rudmose Brown, naturalist of
the expedition.. Not adopted: Brown’s Bay.
BROWNS GLACIER: channel glacier, about 2
mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing W. from the conti-
nental ice overlying Ingrid Christensen Coast, and
terminating in a small tongue about 3 mi. SE. of
Ranvik I., at the head of Ranvik Bay; in about
68°57’'S., 77°55’E. Charted by Norwegian car-
tographers from aerial photographs taken in Janu-
ary 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen.
Named by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study
of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March
1947, for Lt. (j.g.) Eduardo P. Brown, USN, photo-
graphic officer with the western task group of USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
BROWNSON ISLANDS: small group of islands
lying off the entrance to Pine Island Bay about 15
mi. SW. of the SW. end of Canisteo Pen., off the
Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about
73°59’S., 102°00’W. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946.
Named by the US-ACAN for the U.S.S. Brownson,
destroyer escort of the eastern task group of USN
Op. Hjp., Task Force 68, 1946-47.
BROWNS POINT: point which forms the E. side
of the entrance to Fournier Bay, on the NE. coast
of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S.,
63°02’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on
the Discovery in 1927.
BRUCE CAPE: conspicuous bluff about 500 ft.
in el., lying just W. of the mouth of Taylor Gl. and
forming the E. side of the entrance of Oom Bay, on
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°25’S., 60°50’E.
A landing was made here on Feb. 18, 1931 by the
BANZARE under Mawson, who applied the name.
Bruce Coast: VACATED. See Caird Coast and
Princess Martha Coast.
BRUCE, MOUNT: snow-covered peak, about
2,800 ft. in el., which forms the highest summit in
the Bowers Hills, on Oates Coast; in about 70°08’S.,
162°45’E. Disc. by members of the Terra Nova of
the BrAE under Scott, who explored along Oates
Coast under Lt. Harry L. L. Pennell, RN, in Febru-
ary 1911. Named for Lt. Wilfred M. Bruce, RNR,
officer in charge of zoological work aboard the
Terra Nova. .
Bruce Harkness, Mount: see Harkness, Mount.
BRUCE ISLANDS: group of islands and rocks
about 1.5 mi. NW. of Hillium I. and about 3 mi.
NW. of Route Pt., the NW. tip of Laurie I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 44°54’W. These is-
lands were roughly charted in 1912-13 by a Nor.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
whaling exp. under Sgrlle. They were recharted
in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and
named for Dr. William S. Bruce, leader of the
ScotNAE, 1902-4.
BRUCE NUNATAK: nunatak which lies 2 mi. W.
of Donald Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group,
off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S.,
60°15’W. Bruce Nunatak was first charted in
1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who
named it for Dr. William S. Bruce, leader of the
ScotNAE, 1902-4.
BRUCE PLATEAU: ice-covered plateau, at least
40 mi. long and about 6,000 ft. in el., standing be-
tween Graham Coast and Foyn Coast on Palmer
Pen.; in about 66°15’S., 64°30’W. Its W. escarp-
ment extends NE. from West Gould Gl. at least as
far as 66°S., but its N. and E. limits are still un-
known. The first sighting of this plateau is not
ascertained, but it was presumably seen in January
1909 by members of the FrAE under Charcot from
their position in Pendleton Strait. The S. and W.
parts of this feature were roughly surveyed in
1946-47 by the FIDS. It was named by them for
William S. Bruce, Scottish polar explorer and leader
of the ScotNAE, 1902-4.
BRUGMANN MOUNTAINS: mountains, prob-
ably about 2,000 ft. in el., which are steep and
rugged on the E. slopes, but are icecapped and
descend gently toward the W., extending in a
NNE.-SSW. arc along the E. side of Liége I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in about 64°03’S., 61°49’W. Disc.
by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and
named by him for Georges Brugmann, a patron
of the expedition.
BRUNDAGE, MOUNT: mountain on the Joerg
Plateau, in about 75°40’S., 65°00’W. Disc. by the
RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for
Burr Brundage, U. S. Dept. of State, who assisted
in making arrangements for the expedition. Not
adopted: Mount Burr Brundage.
BRUNONIA GLACIER: glacier which flows E. to
the head of Sunset Fjord in the Bay of Isles, on the
N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°29’W.
Brunonia Glacier was charted in 1912-13 by Rob-
ert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard
the brig Daisy, who named it for his alma mater
Brown University.
Brun Oya: see Brown Island.
BRUNS MOUNTAINS: group of mountains pro-
jecting through the icecap at the N. margin of the
New Schwabenland piedmont; in about 72°05’S.,
0°40’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher,
1938-39, and named for Herbert Bruns, electrical
engineer on the expedition.
424589 O-57-6
73
BRUNVOLL GLACIER: broad glacier flowing N.
to Mac-Robertson Coast, between Murray Mono-
lith and Torlyn Mtn. on the E. and Scullin Mono-
lith and Mikkelsen Peak on the W.; in about
67°48’S., 66°18’E. The name was suggested by
Bjarne Aagaard for the brothers Arnold and
Saebjgrn Brunvoll, Norwegian whaling captains
who explored along this coast in the Seksern in
January 1931.
BRUTUS ISLAND: small island lying near the
center of Prince Olav Hbr. on the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. The descriptive
name Saddle Island was probably given for this
feature by a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1921-22.
This same name is used elsewhere in the Antarctic.
To avoid confusion of these names, the Br—APC
recommended that a new name be approved for
this feature. The name Brutus Island, after the
hulk Brutus, which was towed across with coal
from South Africa by two small catchers, and has
for many years been moored alongside the whaling
station in Prince Olav Hbr., was proposed by Sir
Harold Salvesen. Not adopted: Saddle Island.
BRYANT, CAPE: high, snow-covered, dome-
shaped cliff forming the N. side of the entrance to
Palmer Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
71°12’S., 60°55’W. Disc. by members of East Base
of the USAS in 1940. Named by the USAS for
Herwil M. Bryant of the Smithsonian Inst., biolo-
gist with the East Base.
BRYDE ISLAND: island about 5 mi. long and 2
mi. wide, which lies about 2 mi. S. of Lemaire I.
and 4 mi. SW. of Cape Lacaze-Duthiers, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 64°52’S., 63°02’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99.
Named for the representative of the BelgAE in
Norway.
BUCENTAUR ROCK: the outermost of three
rocks lying close NE. of Busen Pt., at the SE. side
of the entrance to Stromness Bay, South Georgia;
in 54°09’S., 36°33’W. The name Low Rock was
given for this feature, probably by DI personnel
during their survey in 1927. This name is used
elsewhere in the Antarctic. To avoid confusion of
these names, the Br-APC has recommended that a
new name, Bucentaur Rock, be approved for this
feature. Bucentaur Rock is associated with the
nearby Busen Pt., and is named after a floating
factory which was anchored at Husvik in the early
years of the whaling station after 1907, and from
which the Husvik transport Busen and the catchers
Busen I, -II, -III, etc., derive their names. Not
adopted: Low Rock.
Buchanan, Cape: see Valavielle, Cape.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BUCHANAN BAY: bay about 6 mi. wide, which
lies between Mertz Glacier Tongue and Cape De la
Motte along George V Coast; in about 67°05’S.,
144°45’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Maw-
son, who named it for J. Y. Buchanan, who was a
patron of the AAE and who had also been a mem-
ber of the Br. exp. in the Challenger, 1872-76.
BUCHANAN POINT: point about 2.5 mi. NW. of
Cape Dundas and 1 mi. SE. of Mackintosh Cove, on
the NE. coast of Laurie I., South Orkney Is.; in
60°43’S., 44°28’W. In 1903 the ScotNAE under
Bruce applied the name ‘Cape Buchanan,” after
J. Y. Buchanan, a member of the Challenger cruise
of 1872-76, to the prominent cape 3 mi. northeast-
ward, which had been named Cape Valavielle
in 1838 by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville. At the same
time, the French name (in English form but mis-
spelled ‘Cape Vallavielle”) was transferred to the
point now described. The name Cape Valavielle
has been retained for the prominent cape, as ap-
plied by D’Urville, on the basis of priority and wide
usage. For the sake of historical continuity, the
Br—APC in 1954 recommended that the name Bu-
chanan Point be applied to the point now described.
Not adopted: Cape Vallavielle.
BUCHAN BAY: small bay between Cape Hartree
and Cape Burn Murdoch, near the SW. end of
Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S.,
44°43’/W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce,
1902-4, who named it for Alexander Buchan, noted
Scottish meteorologist.
Bucht der Inseln: see Isles, Bay of.
BUCKLE ISLAND: one of the Balleny Is., about
13 mi. long and about 2.5 mi. wide, lying midway
between Sturge and Young Islands; in about
66°48’S., 163°15’E. Disc. in February 1839 by a
Br. exp. under Balleny, who named it for J. W.
Buckle, one of the merchants who united with
Charles Enderby in sending out the expedition.
BUCKLEY, MOUNT: peak about 8,400 ft. in el.,
lying close NE. of Mt. Darwin at the head of Beard-
more Gl.; in about 84°59’S., 164°35’E. Disc. by the
BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and named for
George Buckley of New Zealand, a supporter of the
expedition.
BUCKLEY BAY: open bay lying between Organ
Pipe Cliffs and Ninnis Glacier Tongue, along
George V Coast; in about 68°15’S., 148°20’E. Disc.
in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it
for George Buckley of New Zealand, a patron of
the expedition.
Buddah Rock: see Buddha Rock.
74
BUDD COAST: that portion of the coast of Ant-
arctica lying between the Hatch Its., in about
109°42’S., and Cape Waldron, in about 116°02’E.
Disc. in February 1840 by the USEE under Wilkes,
and named by him for Thomas A. Budd, acting
master on the USEE brig Peacock, who assisted
Wilkes with correction of the exp. survey data.
Not adopted: Budd Land, Budd’s High Land,
Budd’s Land.
BUDDENBROCK RANGE: mountain range
about 8,500 ft. in el., which extends about 15 mi.
in a general E.-W. direction, situated at the NE.
side of the Luz Range in the Muhlig-Hofmann
Mtns., in New Schwabenland; in about 71°45’S.,
5°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher,
1938-39, and named for the dir. of the Atlantic
division of the former German Lufthansa Cor-
poration.
BUDDHA ROCK: rock about 120 ft. in el., which
lies 0.3 mi. W. of Vindication I. in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°47’W. Charted and named
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Not
adopted: Buddah Rock.
Budd Land; Budd’s High Land: see Budd Coast.
BUFF ISLET: islet which lies about 5 mi. SW.
of Joubin Its. and some 12 mi. SW. of Cape Albert
de Monaco, Anvers I., at the SW. end of the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°51’S., 64°34’W. The islet appears to
be first shown and named on a 1936 chart by the
BGLE under Rymill. Not adopted: Buff Island.
BUGGE ISLAND: small group of ice-covered is-
lands lying close off the front of Wordie Ice Shelf
and between 4 and 11 mi. NW. of Mt. Guernsey, off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°12’S., 68°25’W.
First seen from the air and photographed by the
BGLE in 1936, and later roughly mapped from the
photographs. The islands were observed in 1947
from the Port of Beaumont, Texas by the RARE
under Ronne, who named these islands for his
niece, Ruth Bugge, who supplied woolen clothing
from Norway for the RARE. Not adopted: Ruth
Bugge Islands.
BULCKE, MOUNT: bold summit about 3,300 ft.
in el., at the end of an ice-covered spur which ex-
tends S. from the Solvay Mtns., in the S. extremity
of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°29’S.,
62°38’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99, and named by him for a supporter of
the expedition.
Bull, Mount: see Gustav Bull Mountains.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BULLER, CAPE: rugged cape forming the W.
side of the entrance to the Bay of Isles, along the
N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°22’W.
Disc. and named in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook.
Buller Bay: see Sitka Bay.
BULL NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about 3
mi. W. of Bruce Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks
group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S.,
60°26’W. Bull Nunatak was first charted in 1902
by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it
for H. J. Bull, leader with Capt. Leonard Kristensen
of a Nor. exp. to the Antarctic, 1894-95.
BULS BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which indents
the E. side of Brabant I. just N. of Cape D’Ursel, in
the Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°08’W. Disc. by
the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named
by him for a supporter of the expedition.
BUMSTEAD, MOUNT: mountain about 10,500
ft. in el., of the Grosvenor Range, standing SW. of
the head of Shackleton Gl., at the edge of the south
polar plateau in the Queen Maud Range; in about
85°55’S., 177°10’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the
ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929
and named by him for Albert H. Bumstead, chief
cartographer of the National Geographic Soc. at
that time, and inventor of the sun compass, a de-
vice utilizing shadows of the sun to determine di-
rections in areas where magnetic compasses are
unreliable.
Bundemann-Kette: see Bundermann Range.
BUNDERMANN RANGE: range of mountains
projecting through the icecap on the New
Schwabenland piedmont as a northward extension
en echelon of the Mayr Range. From a maximum
summit el. of about 7,500 ft. in about 72°00’S.,
3°30’E., the range extends NNW. in a gentle arc
for approximately 15 mi. to about 71°50’S., 3°10’E.
Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and
named for Max Bundermann, aerial photographer
on the Passat, one of the flying boats used by the
expedition. Not adopted: Bundemann-Kette
[German].
BUNGER HILLS: group of moderately low,
rounded hills, overlain by morginic drift and
notably ice free in the summer months, which ex-
tends W. from the W. end of Knox Coast; in about
66°18’S., 100°45’E. This group is marked by nu-
merous meltwater ponds and is bisected by a nar-
row, sinuous inlet which extends in an E.-W. di-
rection between Edisto Chan. on the W., which in
this latitude is filled by Edisto Ice Tongue, and the
continental ice overlying Knox Coast on the E.
75
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for
Lt. Cdr. David E. Bunger, USN, plane commander
of one of the three USN Op. Hjp. aircraft which
engaged in photographic missions along most of
the coastal area between 14°E. and 164°E. Bunger
and members of his crew landed their airplane on
the unfrozen E.—W. inlet bisecting the area while
on a photographic mission along Knox Coast in
February 1947. Not adopted: Bunger Lakes, Bun-
ger Oasis, Bunger’s Oasis.
Bunger Lakes; Bunger Oasis: see Bunger Hills.
BURD, CAPE: low rock cliff forming the SW. end
of the Tabarin Pen., at the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°39’S., 57°09’W. Charted by the FIDS in
1946 and named for Oliver Burd, FIDS meteorolo-
gist who lost his life when the base hut at Hope
Bay burned in November 1948.
BURDEN PASSAGE: passage which separates
D’Urville I. from Bransfield I., off the NE. end of
Palmer Pen.; in 63°10’S., 56°32’W. Charted in
1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Eugene Bur-
den, who, as master of the Trepassey, first navi-
gated the passage.
Burdick Channel: see Pendleton Strait.
BURNET COVE: cove about 0.5 mi. SW. of Mai
Pt., on the E. side of Maiviken in Cumberland Bay,
South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°30’W. Roughly
surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nord-
enskjold. It was resurveyed in 1929 by DI per-
sonnel, and in 1951 by the FIDS. The name Bur-
net, given by the Br-APC, is the English name of
a plant (genus Acaena) which is common in this
vicinity.
BURNHAM, MOUNT: mountain of the Clark
Mtns. in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges of
Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°16’S., 141°57’w.
Disc. on aerial flights from West Base of the USAS
in 1940. Named by the USAS for Guy Burnham,
Cartographer in the School of Geography of Clark
University.
BURN MURDOCH, CAPE: cape which forms the
SE. tip of Mossman Pen. on the S. coast of Laurie
I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 44°41’W.
Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who
named it for W. G. Burn Murdoch, Scottish artist
on the Balaena, one of the Dundee whaling ships
in the Antarctic in 1892-93, and a supporter of
Bruce’s expedition. Not adopted: Cape Burn
Murdock.
Burn Murdock, Cape: see Burn Murdoch, Cape.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BURN MURDOCH NUNATAK: nunatak which
lies about 2.5 mi. NNE. of Donald Nunatak in the
Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°02’S., 60°05’°W. Burn Murdoch Nuna-
tak was first charted by the FIDS in August 1947,
and named by them for W. G. Burn Murdoch.
BURSEY, MOUNT: linear mountain forming the
E. end of Hal Flood Range in Marie Byrd Land; in
about 76°04’S., 132°30’W. Disc. by members of the
USAS on aerial flights in 1940 and named for
Jacob Bursey, member of the ByrdAE, 1928-30,
and dog driver of the USAS party which sledged to
the W. end of Hal Flood Range in December 1940.
BURTON ISLAND GLACIER: channel glacier
about 9 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing N. from
the continental ice to Wilhelm II Coast, midway
between Krause Pt. and Posadowsky Gl.; in about
66°50’S., 90°25’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named
by the US-ACAN for the U.S.S. Burton Island, one
of the two icebreakers of USN Op. Wml., 1947-48,
which assisted in establishing astronomical con-
trol stations along Wilhelm II, Queen Mary, Knox
and Budd Coasts.
Burton Island Rock: see Bigelow Rock.
BURTON ROCKS: small group of three rocks ly-
ing in Marguerite Bay, about 1 mi. S. of Neny I.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°14’S.,
67°02’W. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS and
named by them for the U.S.S. Burton Island, ice-
breaker with USN Op. Wml., which visited Mar-
guerite Bay in 1948 and assisted in the relief of the
RARE and FIDS parties on Stonington Island.
Burr Brundage, Mount: see Brundage, Mount.
Busen Fjord: see Husvik Harbor.
BUSEN POINT: point which forms the SE. side
of the entrance to Stromness Bay, on the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°33’W. The point
was known at a much earlier date, but the name
may have been first published as an existing name
on the charts based upon the 1927-29 survey by
DI personnel. It is probably named for the Busen,
a Norwegian whaling transport vessel which was
often stationed at the head of Husvik Hbr. in
Stromness Bay.
Bush, Mount: see Wade, Mount.
BUSH MOUNTAINS: group of rugged moun-
tains which flank the W. side of Shackleton Gl.,
standing in the Queen Maud Range near the head
of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°45/S., 179°00’W.
76
Photographed at a distance by the ByrdAE on
several flights to the Queen Maud Range in No-
vember 1929, and believed to form a W. extension
of the Prince Olay Mtns. These mountains were
further defined from aerial photographs taken by
the USAS, 1939-41, and USN-Op. Hjp., 1946-47,
and found to lie separate from the Prince Olav
Mtns. on the E. and the Commonwealth Range on
the W. Named by the US-SCAN for James I.
Bush, American financier and patron of the
ByrdAH, 1928-30. Not adopted: Prince Olay
Mountains (q.v.).
BUTLER, MOUNT: the SW. peak of the Rocke-
feller Mtns., lying about 1 mi. S. of Mt. Tennant on
Edward VII Pen. and almost submerged in the
icecap; in about 78°09’S., 155°44’W. Disc. on Jan.
27, 1929 by members of the ByrdAE on an explora-
tory flight over this area. Named for Raymond
Butler, member of the USAS party which occupied
the Rockefeller Mtns. seismic station during No-
vember and December 1940. Not adopted: Mount
Navy.
BUTLER ISLAND: circular, ice-covered island
about 6 mi. wide and about 600 ft. in el., lying 12
mi. SE. of Cape Darlington, off the E. coast of Pal-
mer Pen.; in 72°13’S., 60°08’W. Disc. and photo-
graphed from the air in December 1940 by the
USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the
air by the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS
charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS
for K. S. P. Butler, FIDS commander in 1947-48.
BUTSON RIDGE: rocky ridge with a number of
ice-covered summits, the highest about 4,300 ft. in
el., forming the N. wall of Northeast Gl. on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°05’S., 66°53’W. First
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re-
surveyed in 1946-1948 by the FIDS and named for
Dr. Arthur R. C. Butson, FIDS medical officer at
Stonington I., who in July 1947 rescued a member
of the RARE from a crevasse in Northeast Glacier.
BUTTER POINT: low point forming the S. side
of the entrance to New Harbor, in Victoria Land;
in about 77°40’S., 164°09’E. Disc. by the BrNAE
under Scott, 1901-4. So named by the exp. be-
cause the Ferrar Gl. party left a tin of butter here,
in anticipation of obtaining fresh seal meat at this
point on the return journey.
Butter Point Piedmont: see Bowers Piedmont
Glacier.
BUTTONS, THE: two islets lying 0.25 mi. NW. of
Galindez I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°17’W. Charted and
named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BUTTRESS HILL: flat-topped hill, about 2,300
ft. in el., with steep rock cliffs on the W. side, over-
looking Duse Bay about 2 mi. E. of the most north-
ern of the Seven Buttresses, in the NE. extremity
of Palmer Pen.; in 63°34’S., 57°03’W. Charted and
given this descriptive name by the FIDS following
their survey in 1946.
BUTTRESS NUNATAKS: group of prominent
rock exposures, the highest about 2,100 ft. in el.,
lying close inland from George VI Sound and about
13 mi. W. of the Seward Mtns., on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 72°22’S., 66°47’W. First seen from
a distance and roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Visited and resurveyed in
1949 by the FIDS, who gave this descriptive name.
BYRD, CAPE: sharp ice-covered cape forming
the NW. extremity of Charcot I.; in about 69°58’S.,
75°55’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins, Dec. 29,
1929, in a flight from the William Scoresby. Named
by Wilkins for R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN
(Ret.), Antarctic explorer.
BYRD HEAD: rocky, conspicuous promontory
on Mac-Robertson Coast, forming the W. side of
the entrance of Howard Bay; in about 67°26’S.,
61°04’E. Toward the head of Howard Bay, Byrd
Head rises to an el. of about 1,100 ft. Disc. on
Feb. 18, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who
named it for R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.).
Not adopted: Bergnes [Norwegian].
Byrd Mountains: see Harold Byrd Mountains.
CABINET INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 36 mi.
long in a NNW.-SSE. direction, and some 27 mi.
wide at its entrance between Capes Alexander and
Robinson, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
66°35’S., 63°10’W. Charted by the FIDS and
photographed from the air by the RARE in De-
cember 1947. Named by the FIDS for the British
War Cabinet which authorized the FIDS in 1943.
CACHALOT ROCK: isolated rock about 6 mi.
SW. of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°49’S., 45°49°W. The name appears on a map
based upon a 1933 survey of the South Orkney
Is. by DI personnel on the Discovery II. The term
cachalot, of French origin, is applied to the sperm
whale. Not adopted: Cachelot Rock.
Cachelot Rock: see Cachalot Rock.
CADBURY, MOUNT: easternmost of the Batter-
bee Mtns., about 5,900 ft. in el., standing ESE. of
Mt. Ness and about 18 mi. inland from George VI
Sound on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°21’S.,
66°38’W. The coast in this vicinity was first seen
and photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935
UU
by Lincoln Ellsworth, but this mountain seems to
have been obscured from Ellsworth’s line of sight
by clouds or intervening summits. Mount Cad-
bury was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill, and later named for Mrs. Henry Tyler
Cadbury, who raised a special fund to defray the
cost of refitting the Penola, the ship of the BGLE,
at South Georgia in 1936.
CADMAN GLACIER: glacier, about 1.5 mi. wide
at its mouth and at least 7 mi. long, flowing W.
and then NW. into the head of the southern arm
of Beascoches Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°37’S., 63°49’W. This glacier was first sighted
and roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under
Charcot. It was surveyed in 1935 by the BGLE
under Rymill, and later named for John Cadman,
1st Baron Cadman of Silverdale, who contributed
toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37.
CAIRD COAST: that portion of the coast of
Coats Land between 20°W. and 29°W. Named in
1915 by a Br. exp. under Shackleton for Sir James
Caird, patron of the expedition. Not adopted:
Caird Land.
Caird Land: see Caird Coast.
CAIRN HILL: hill with two summits, about
1,500 ft. in el., about 2 mi. E. of the NE. shore
of Duse Bay, at the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°30’S., 57°04’W. First charted by the FIDS
in 1946, who so named it because a cairn was
erected on the eastern of the two summits.
CALAIS, MOUNT: massive mountain, about
7,700 ft. in el., standing at the NW. side of Scho-
kalsky Bay in the NE. part of Alexander I Island;
in 69°11’S., 70°15’W. First roughly surveyed in
1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Named by Char-
cot, presumably for the French city Calais. The
mountain was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS.
Not adopted: Massif Calais [French].
Calais, Massif: see Calais, Mount.
CALF HEAD: rocky headland on the N. coast
of South Georgia, about 3 mi. NW. of Cape Har-
court, at the W. end of Sacramento Bight; in
54°28’S., 36°03’W. The name ‘“Kalber-Berg”
(meaning Calf Mountain) was given by a Ger. exp.
under Schrader, 1882-83, but was limited to the
summit of the headland now described. The fea-
ture was surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52, who re-
ported that a name is more essential for its sea-
ward extremity in order to distinguish it from
Cape Harcourt, with which it is easily confused
when viewed from N. and NW. The English form
of the name, Calf Head, was recommended for
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
this headland by the Br-APC in 1954. Not
adopted: Kalber-Berg [German].
CALF POINT: point which lies about 1 mi. W.
of Penelope Pt. on the SW. shore of Robertson Bay,
in northern Victoria Land; in about 171°30’S.,
169°45’'E. Charted and named in 1911 by the
Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott.
CALF ROCK: rock mass on the E. coast of Al-
exander I Island, about 1,500 ft. in el., rising above
the coastal ice 2 mi. NE. of Lamina Peak and 2
mi. inland from George VI Sound; in 70°31’S.,
68°38’W. This rock was first photographed from
the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and
was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G.
Joerg. Surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and so
named by them because of its off-lying position;
it is separated from the Lamina Peak ridge by
faulting.
CALMETTE, CAPE: cape marking the W. ex-
tremity of a rocky peninsula, about 1,500 ft. in
el., which projects from the W. coast of Palmer
Pen. about 3 mi. to form the S. shore of Cal-
mette Bay; in 68°04’S., 67°14’W. Disc. by the
FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who, from a dis-
tance, mistook this cape for an island. The BGLE
under Rymill, 1934-37, determined the true na-
ture of the feature. Named by Charcot for Gaston
Calmette, editor of Le Figaro, who furnished the
FrAE with copies of this newspaper for the two
years preceding the expedition. Not adopted: Ile
Calmette [French].
Calmette, Ile: see Calmette, Cape.
CALMETTE BAY: small bay between Camp Pt.
and Cape Calmette, along the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°03’S., 67°10’W. Charted by the BGLE
under Rymill, 1934-37, who named the bay for its
S. entrance point, Cape Calmette.
CAMELS HUMP: dark bare knob about 7,600
ft. in el., standing at the head of Blue Gl. about
3 mi. S. of Cathedral Rocks, in the N. part of the
Royal Society Range in Victoria Land; in about
77°59'S., 162°34’E. Disc. and given this descriptive
name by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Not
adopted: Camel’s Hump.
CAMP BAY: small bay between Rosita Hbr. and
Sunset Fjord, in the W. side of the Bay of Isles,
South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°27’W. Charted
in 1929 by DI personnel and so named because
a temporary camp was set up on its S. shore.
Campbell, Cape: see Tennyson, Cape.
78
CAMPBELL GLACIER: glacier about 2.5 mi.
wide, which flows SW. from the W. slopes of Mt.
Melbourne and merges with the confluent ice W.
of Mt. Abbott, on the E. coast of Victoria Land;
in about 74°47’S., 163°46’E. Disc. by the BrNAE
under Scott, 1901-4. Named by the BrAE, 1910-13,
for Lt. Victor L. A. Campbell, RN, leader of the
BrAE Northern Party. Not adopted: Melbourne
Glacier.
CAMPBELL HEAD: bold headland marking the
W. side of the entrance to Oom Bay, on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°25’S., 60°42’E. Disc.
on Feb. 18, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson,
and named by him for Lt. S. Campbell, pilot with
the expedition.
CAMP HILL: ice-free hill, about 400 ft. in el.,
which lies 1.5 mi. E. of Church Pt. on the SE. side
of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°41’S., 57°52’W.
Charted in 1946 by the FIDS, who so named it be-
cause a geological camp was established at the
foot of the hill.
CAMP POINT: point which marks the W. ex-
tremity of the pyramid-shaped promontory, about
2,900 ft. in el., between Square Bay and Calmette
Bay on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°58’S.,
67°19’W. First seen by the FrAE under Charcot,
1908-10, but its relationship to adjacent features
was unknown at that time. It was accurately
charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who
camped here during survey work in this area.
CAM ROCK: rock lying 200 yards E. of Water-
pipe Beach and the same distance NNW. of Billie
Rocks in Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.;
in 60°43’S., 45°37’W. The rock is low and ice worn
and is not normally covered at high water.
Roughly surveyed in 1927 by DI personnel, and
so named by them presumably because of its shape.
CANADA GLACIER: small glacier flowing in a
SE. direction to the N. side of Taylor Glacier Dry
Valley immediately W. of Mt. McLennan, in Vic-
toria Land; in about 77°37’S., 162°50’E. Charted
and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott.
Charles S. Wright, Canadian physicist, was a mem-
ber of the party that explored this area.
Canal Principal: see Sound, The.
Candlemis Island: see Candlemas Island.
CANDLEMAS ISLAND: largest and easternmost
of the Candlemas Is., in the South Sandwich Is.;
in 57°03’S., 26°40’W. Charted in 1930 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, who named it after
the Candlemas Is. group. Not adopted: Candle-
mis Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
CANDLEMAS ISLANDS: small group of islands
and rocks about 23 mi. SE. of Visokoi I., in the
South Sandwich Is.; centering in 57°03’S., 26°43’W.
Disc. on Feb. 2, 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook.
So named by Cook to commemorate the day on
which they were discovered.
CANICULA, MOUNT: mountain surmounted by
two peaks, the more easterly about 3,400 ft. in el.,
standing about 3 mi. E. of Sirius Knoll on the
divide separating East Russell Gl. from West
Russell Gl., in the central part of Louis Philippe
Pen.; in 63°43’S., 58°30’W. Charted in 1946 by
the FIDS, and so named by them because of its
association with Sirius Knoll. Canicula is a
synonym of Sirius, the dog star.
CANISTEO PENINSULA: peninsula about 25
mi. long and 18 mi. wide, projecting W. from the
N. end of the Hudson Mtns., along the Walgreen
Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 73°40’S.,
101°00’W. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named
by the: US-ACAN for the U.S.S. Canisteo, tanker of
the eastern task group of the USN Op. Hjp., Task
Force 68, 1946-47.
CANWE, CAPE: high bluff marking the W. end
of Mt. Abbott and the S. side of the terminus of
Campbell Gl., on the E. coast of Victoria Land;
in about 74°50’S., 163°43’E. Charted and named
by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted:
Cape Mossyface.
CAP: for names beginning thus see under the
specific part of the name. For example, for Cap
Decousovte see Decousovte, Cap. (Capisa French
word for “cape.’’)
CAPE-PIGEON ROCKS: twin rocky promon-
tories about 3.5 mi. SSE. of Garnet Pt., on George
V Coast; in about 66°59’S., 143°47’E. Disc. in
1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and so named
by him because a large Cape pigeon rookery is
situated there.
CARDINALL, MOUNT: conical mountain, about
2,200 ft. in el., lying close SW. of Mt. Taylor and
overlooking the NE. head of Duse Bay, at the NE.
end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°27’S., 57°10’W. Prob-
ably first seen by a party under J. Gunnar An-
dersson of the SwedAH, 1901-4. Charted in 1945
by the FIDS, who named it for Sir Allan Cardinall,
then Gov. of the Falkland Islands.
CARDOZO COVE: northern of two coves at the
head of Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King
George I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°08’S.,
58°36’W. Probably named by the FrAE under
79
Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in Decem-
ber 1909.
CAREY POINT: rocky point marking the W.
extremity of Saunders I., South Sandwich Is.; in
97°47’S., 26°32’W. It was named Rocky Point by
DI personnel following their survey in 1930, but
that name has been rejected because it has also
been used for other features in the vicinity. The
name Carey Point was recommended by the Br-—
APC in 1953, and is named after Cdr. W. M. Carey,
RN, captain of the Discovery II at the time of the
survey in 1930. Not adopted: Rocky Point.
CARL PASSAGE: narrow channel, about 0.3 mi.
long, which joins Elephant Lagoon to Cook Bay,
along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S.,
37°08’W. The name appears on a chart based
upon 1929-30 surveys by DI personnel, but may
reflect an earlier naming.
Carlson Bay: see Carlsson Bay.
CARLSON ISLAND: rocky island about 0.75 mi.
long and about 1,000 ft. in el., lying in Prince Gus-
tav Chan. about 4 mi. SE. of Pitt Pt., off the E.
coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°53’S., 58°16’W.
Disc. in 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjoéld,
who named it for Wilhelm Carlson, one of the chief
patrons of the expedition. Not adopted: Wilh.
Carlson Island, Wilh. Carlsons O [Swedish].
CARLSSON BAY: square bay, 2.5 mi. in extent,
entered about 3.5 mi. NW. of Cape Foster on the
SW. coast of James Ross I.; in 64°24’S., 58°04’W.
First seen and surveyed in 1903 by the SwedAE
under Nordenskjold, who named it for J. Carlsson
of Sweden who contributed toward the cost of the
expedition. The bay was surveyed by the FIDS in
1952-53. Not adopted: Carlson Bay, J. Carlson
Bay, John Carlsson Bucht [German].
CAROLINE MIKKELSEN, MOUNT: peak about
800 ft. in el., standing at the head of Sandefjord
Ice Bay between Polar Times and Hargreaves
Glaciers, on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about
69°44’S., 73°50’E. Disc. on Feb. 20, 1935 by a Nor.
whaling exp. under Capt. Klarius Mikkelsen.
Named by Mikkelsen for his wife who accompanied
him on this voyage.
CARR, CAPE: prominent, ice-covered cape mark-
ing the seaward projection of the W. portion of
Clarie Coast; in about 65°55’S., 130°55’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47. The USEE under Wilkes applied
the name Cape Carr to an ice cape in about
65°05’S., 131°30’E., after Lt. Overton Carr on the
USEE flagship Vincennes, who assisted Wilkes with
correction of the exp. survey data. Identification
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
of Cape Carr is based on correlation of Wilkes’
chart of 1840 with the US-ACAN reconnaissance
map of 1955, compiled from aerial photographs,
taking into account the relative southwestward
shift of Porpoise Bay from 1840 to the 1955 map
positions.
CARREL, MOUNT: horseshoe-shaped mountain,
about 2,100 ft. in el., at the E. side of Depot Gl.
about 1.5 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay, at the NE.
end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 57°03’W. Disc. in
1903 by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the
SwedAE. Named by the FIDS in 1945 for Tom
Carrel, boatswain of the Eagle, a ship which par-
ticipated in establishing the FIDS Hope Bay base in
February 1945.
Carrol Kettering, Mount: see Giles, Mount.
CARROLL INLET: long narrow inlet lying SW.
of Cape Smyley and extending SE. for a distance
of 35 mi. into George Bryan Coast; in about
73°15’S., 79°00’W. The upper part of the inlet is
said to be divided into two arms by a long ice
tongue. Disc. from the air on Dec. 22, 1940 by
members of the USAS, who named it for Arthur J.
Carroll, chief photographer on the flights from
East Base.
CARSE POINT: the W. extremity of a rock massif
with four peaks, the highest about 3,800 ft. in el.,
standing at the S. side of the mouth of Riley Gl.,
on Palmer Pen., and fronting on George VI Sound;
in 70°13’S., 68°13’W. It lies separated from Mt.
Dixey to the NE. by a low ice-filled col, and from
Mt. Flower to the E. by asmall glacier. It appears
that the massif, of which this is the W. extremity,
was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23,
1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and mapped from these
photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. The point was
first surveyed in-1936 by the BGLE under Rymill,
and later named for Verner D. Carse, member of
the BGLE, 1934-37.
CASABIANCA ISLET: low, rocky islet lying in
Neumayer Chan. about 0.5 mi. NE. of Damoy Pt.,
Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S.,
63°32’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot,
1903-5, who named it for Monsieur Casabianca,
then French Administrator of Naval Enlistment.
Case, Point: see De la Motte, Cape.
CASEY, CAPE: conspicuous cape, surmounted
by a peak about 2,500 ft. in el, marking the E. end
of the short peninsula projecting into Cabinet
Inlet immediately S. of Bevin Gl., on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°22’S., 63°35’W. Charted by
the FIDS and photographed from the air by the
RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Rt. Hon.
80
Richard G. Casey, Minister of State and Australian
member of the British War Cabinet.
Casey Channel: see Casey Glacier.
CASEY GLACIER: glacier about 6 mi. wide,
which flows E. to the E. coast of Palmer Pen. be-
tween Cape Walcott and Miller Pt.; in 69°00‘S.,
63°35’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on an aerial
flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Wilkins believed the
feature to be a channel cutting completely across
Palmer Pen., naming it Casey Channel after Rt.
Hon. Richard G. Casey. Correlation of aerial
photographs taken by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935
and preliminary reports of the BGLE, 1934—37, led
W. L. G. Joerg to interpret this glacier to be what
Wilkins named Casey Channel. This interpreta-
tion is borne out by the results of subsequent
exploration by members of the East Base of the
USAS in 1940. Not adopted: Casey Channel.
CASEY RANGE: line of ridges rising to 3,100 ft.
in el., extending in a N.-S. direction and parallel-
ing the Masson Range, which lies about 15 mi. to
the E., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S.,
62°12’E. Disc. by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under
Mawson, who named it for Rt. Hon. Richard G.
Casey.
CASTLE PEAK: prominent ice-coverea peak,
about 8,300 ft. in el., standing close off the W. side
of Avery Plateau on Palmer Pen.; in 67°00’S.,
65°53’W. It is shaped like a truncated cone with
a rounded summit and rises more than 2,000 ft.
above the surrounding ice. First surveyed in 1946
by the FIDS, and so named by them because of its
resemblance to a ruined medieval castle.
Castle Rock: see Fort Rock.
CASTLE ROCK: conspicuous rock about 600 ft.
in el., lying about 1 mi. off the west-central side
of Snow I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°47’S.,
61°36’W. This descriptive name dates back to
about 1822 and is now established in international
usage.
CASTLE ROCK: bold rock crag about 1,400 ft. in
el., situated about 3 mi. NE. of Hut Pt. on the cen-
tral ridge of Hut Point Peninsula, Ross I.; in about
77°48’S., 166°44’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4, who so named it because of its shape.
CASTOR AND POLLUX: two large and several
smaller rocks, about 0.2 mi. SE. of Vindication I.
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°05’S., 26°46’W.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, who named them for the two brightest stars in
the constellation Gemini.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Castor Insel: see Castor Nunatak.
CASTOR NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about
3 mi. SW. of Oceana Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks
group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°10’S.,
59°58’W. Disc. in December 1893 by a Nor. seal-
ing exp. under C. A. Larsen, who named it after
the Castor, a ship which combined sealing and
exploring activities along the W. coast of Palmer
Pen. under Capt. Morten Pedersen in 1893-94.
The feature was determined to be a nunatak in
1902 by the SwedAK under Nordenskjéld. Not
adopted: Castor Insel [German], Kastor Nunatak.
CASY ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. long, which
lies about 2 mi. SE. of Lafarge Rocks and 5 mi.
WSW. of Cape Siffrey, the N. tip of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°15’S., 57°29’W. Disc. and named by a Fr.
exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40. Not adopted: Casy
Rock.
Casy Rock: see Casy Islet.
CATHEDRAL ROCKS: series of dark, abrupt
cliffs interspersed by short glaciers and sur-
mounted by sharp peaks about 6,700 ft. in el.,
forming the N. shoulder of the Royal Society
Range, in Victoria Land; in about 177°51’S.,
162°30’E. The cliffs form a right angle which
extends W. and then S. for about 10 mi. along the
S. side of Ferrar Gl. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4. Named for its suggestive appear-
ance by Lt. Albert B. Armitage, RNR, leader of
the BrNAE party that explored this area.
Catherine, Mount: see Kathleen, Mount.
Catherine Sweeney Mountains: see Sweeney
Mountains.
CAT ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. long, which lies
in Grandidier Chan. about 2.5 mi. N. of Larrouy I.
and about 15 mi. WSW. of Cape Garcia, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°47’S., 65°15’W. Disc.
and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37.
Not adopted: Cat Island.
CAUTION POINT: point about 4 mi. NE. of Mt.
Napier Birks, marking the E. end of a rocky range
which forms the N. wall of Crane Gl., on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 62°01’W. Photo-
graphed from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a
flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Named by the FIDS who
charted it in 1947.
Cavelier de Cuverville Island: see Cuverville
Island.
CAVE ROCK: rock marked by a large cavern in
its S. side, lying at the E. end of the Meade Is. in
the N. entrance to McFarlane Str., in the South
81
Shetland Is.; in 62°26’S., 60°06’W. The name
appears to have been applied by DI personnel on
the Discovery II who charted the rock in 1935.
CECIL CAVE: cave indenting the S. side of Cape
Ingrid, on the W. side of Peter I Island; in about
68°49’S., 90°44’W. Disc. and named by a Nor. exp.
under Tofte in January 1927. Members of the
exp. rowed into the cave while attempting to land
on Peter I Island. Not adopted: Cecil’s Cave.
CECILY, MOUNT: peak about 10,000 ft. in el.;
lies about 6 mi. SE. of Mt. Emily, in the Dominion
Range; in about 85°52’S., 173°20’E. Disc. by the
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for
his daughter.
Center Island: see Centre Island.
CENTRE ISLAND: island about 4.5 mi. long and
2 mi. wide, which lies about 1 mi. S. of Broken I.
in the S. part of Square Bay, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 66°58’W. Disc. and
named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Not
adopted: Center Island.
CENTURION GLACIER: small steep glacier
flowing NW. to Neny Bay between Mt. Nemesis
and Roman Four Promontory, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 66°56’W. First roughly
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re-
surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, given
by FIDS, derives from association with Roman
Four Promontory.
CESNEY, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the
W. side of the entrance to Davis Bay, on Clarie
Coast; in about 65°55’S., 133°55’E. Davis Bay was
first sighted from a distance in January 1912 by
AAE personnel on the Aurora, who roughly charted
this coastal area. Cape Cesney was delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for A. M.
Cesney, masters mate on the tender Flying Fish of
the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
CHABRIER ROCK: rock which lies in the E. side
of the entrance to Admiralty Bay, about 0.2 mi.
S. of Cape Vauréal, King George I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°18’W. Charted and
named in December 1909 by the FrAE under
Charcot.
Chaco, Islote: see Lavebrua Islet.
CHAIGNEAU PEAK: sharp peak, about 2,400 ft.
in el., lying immediately S. of Blanchard Ridge and
about 3 mi. SE. of Mt. Scott, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°12’S., 64°02’W. Probably first
sighted by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who
named it for Senor Chaigneau, then Gov. of Pro-
vincia de Magallanes, Chile.
Challenger, Passe du: see Neptunes Bellows.
CHALMERS, MOUNT: mountain about 7,860 ft.
in el., which lies S. of Mt. Keltie and Mulock Inlet
in the Conway Range, on the W. side of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 79°22’S., 159°30’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for
Robert Chalmers (later Baron of Northiam), Asst.
Sec. of the Treasury, 1903-7.
CHAMBERLIN GLACIER: glacier which flows
NE. into Whirlwind Inlet about 4 mi. SE. of Matthes
Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°34’S.,
65°31’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight
of Dec. 20, 1928, and in 1940 was photographed
from the air by the USAS. Charted by the FIDS
in 1947, who named it for American glaciologist and
geomorphologist Thomas C. Chamberlin, educator
and professor of geology at the Universities of Wis-
consin and Chicago.
CHANNEL GLACIER: a through glacier about
1.5 mi. long, which extends in an E.—W. direction
across the N. end of Wiencke I. immediately N. of
Wall Range, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S.,
63°19’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99. The name appears on a chart based on a
1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but
may reflect an earlier naming.
CHANNEL ROCK: larger of two rocks lying about
0.8 mi. S. of the Meade Is., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°08’W. The name appears to
have been applied by DI personnel on the Discovery
II who charted this rock in 1935.
CHANNEL ROCK: rock which lies in the NW.
entrance to Meek Chan. in the Argentine Is., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W.
First surveyed and named in 1935 by the BGLE
under Rymill.
CHAOS GLACIER: channel glacier, about 2 mi.
wide and 4 mi. long, flowing W. from the conti-
nental ice overlying Ingrid Christensen Coast, and
terminating in a small tongue about 3 mi. SE. of
Browns Gl., at the head of Ranvik Bay; in about
69°01’S., 77°55’E. Charted by Norwegian cartog-
raphers from aerial photographs taken in January
1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. So
named by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study
of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March
1947, because of the jumbled appearance of the
terminal glacial flowage.
82
CHAPEL HILL: hill, about 500 ft. in el., forming
the summit of a headland about 2 mi. WSW. of
Church Pt., on the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.;
in 63°41’S., 57°58’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1946,
who so named it because of its proximity to Church
Point.
CHAPMAN GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long
and 10 mi. wide in its central part, narrowing to
about 3 mi. wide at its mouth, flowing W. from the
W. coast of Palmer Pen. to George VI Sound im-
mediately S. of Carse Pt.; in 70°17’S., 67°50’W.
First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill,
and later named for Frederick S. Chapman, British
mountaineer and Arctic explorer, who in 1934
brought 64 dogs from West Greenland to England
for the use of the BGLE, 1934-37.
CHARCOT, CAPE: rocky point at the NE. end of
Melba Pen., on Queen Mary Coast; in about
66°28’S., 98°21’E. Disc. by the AAE under Mawson,
1911-14, who named it for Dr. Jean B. Charcot,
French Antarctic explorer.
CHARCOT BAY: bay, about 7 mi. long and wide,
which lies between Cape Kater and Cape Kjellman
along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°48’S.,
59°30’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under
Nordenskj6ld, who named it for Dr. Jean B. Char-
cot, at that time a noted Arctic explorer preparing
for his first Antarctic exp., on which he planned to
look for Nordenskjold whose return was overdue.
CHARCOT BAY: re-entrant about 1 mi. wide,
lying on the N. side of Nordenskjold Ice Tongue,
along the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about
76°07’S., 162°45’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, who named it for Dr. Jean B. Charcot.
CHARCOT ISLAND: island about 45 mi. long and
wide, lying NW. of Alexander I Island from which
it is separated by Wilkins Str.; in about 70°15’S.,
74°45’W. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1910 by the FrAE under
Charcot who, at the insistence of his crew and the
recommendation of Edwin S. Balch and others,
named it Charcot Land. He did so with the stated
intention of honoring his father, a famous French
physician. The insularity of Charcot Land was
proved by Sir Hubert Wilkins who flew around it
on Dec. 29, 1929. Not adopted: Charcot Land.
Charcot Land: see Charcot Island.
CHARCOT, PORT: bay, about 1.5 mi. wide, in-
denting the N. shore of Booth I., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°00’W. Charted by
the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, who named it for
his father, Dr. Jean Martin Charcot, famous French
neurologist. Charcot established the FrAE winter
base at Port Charcot in 1904.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Charcot Strait: see Gullet, The.
Charles, Cape: see Sterneck, Cape.
CHARLES, CAPE: point forming the N. side of
the entrance to Brialmont Cove, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 64°12’S., 61°08’W. This name,
appearing on early maps in this approximate loca-
tion, has sometimes been confused with Cape Ster-
neck (q.v.) at the N. side of the entrance to Hughes
Bay. Not adopted: Cape von Sterneck.
CHARLES GOULD PEAK: peak standing about
4.2 mi. WSW. of the S. peak of Mt. Helen Washing-
ton, standing in the S. group of the Rockefeller
Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°07’S.,
155°36’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1929, and
named by Byrd for Charles (“Chips’’) Gould, car-
penter on the expedition. Not adopted: Mount
Gould.
Charles J. Adams, Cape: see Adams, Cape.
CHARLES-ROUX ISLAND: circular island about
2 mi. in diameter, situated close offshore at the W.
side of the entrance to Lallemand Fjord, off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°54’S., 66°58’W.
Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who
named it for Jules Charles-Roux, French oceanog-
rapher. Not adopted: Charles Roux Island, Roux
Island.
CHARLOTTE, CAPE: cape which forms the SE.
side of the entrance to Royal Bay, on the N. coast
near the E. end of South Georgia; in 54°32’S.,
35°53’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook,
who named it for Queen Charlotte, wife of King
George III of Great Britain.
CHARLOTTE BAY: bay indenting the W. coast
of Palmer Pen. in a SE. direction for about 5 mi.,
between Capes Murray and Reclus; in 64°23’S.,
61°42’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99. Named in honor of the fiancée of Georges
Lecointe, executive officer, hydrographer, and
second-in-command of the expedition.
CHAVANNE, CAPE: prominent bluff, about 3,800
ft. in el., terminating to the S. in a rocky, T-shaped
ridge, situated at the E. side of the mouth of Breit-
fuss Gl. at the head of Mill Inlet, qn the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 66°59’S., 64°45’W., Charted by the
FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE
in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Josef Chavanne,
Austrian polar bibliographer.
Chaves, Ile: see Chavez Island.
CHAVEZ ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi. long and
about 1,800 ft. in el., which lies immediately W. of
the narrow peninsula between Leroux and Bigo
83
Bays, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°38’S.,
64°33’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot. Probably named for Commandant
Alfonso Chaves of Ponta Delgada, Azores, but the
spelling Chavez has become well established
through long usage. Not adopted: Ile Chaves
[French]
CHEAL POINT: rocky point nearly 1 mi. ESE.
of Return Pt., the SW. extremity of Coronation I.,
South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 46°01’W. First sur-
veyed in 1933 by DI personnel. Named by the
Br-APC for Joseph J. Cheal of the FIDS, general
assistant in 1950 and leader in 1951 at the Signy
I. base. The point marks the W. limit of Cheal’s
survey triangulation made in July-September 1950.
CHEETHAM, CAPE: cape, marked by an isolated
pinnacle, forming the E. side of the entrance to
Rennick Bay, on Oates Coast; in about 70°08’S.,
162°20’K. Disc. by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13,
and named for Alfred B. Cheetham, boatswain of
the exp. ship Terra Nova.
Cheetham Ice Barrier Tongue; Cheetham Glacier
Tongue; Cheetham Tongue: see Cheetham Ice
Tongue.
CHEETHAM ICE TONGUE: glacier tongue about
2 mi. wide, forming the seaward extension of the
Davis Gl. along the coast of Victoria Land; in about
75°46’S., 162°55’E. First charted by the BrAE
under Shackleton, 1907-9, at which time it was
about 3 mi. long. Named by Shackleton for Alfred
B. Cheetham, third officer and boatswain on the
exp. ship Nimrod. This feature had become well
established by the name Cheetham Ice Tongue
prior to initiation of systematic application of com-
mon specific names to a glacier and its glacier
tongue. Although this feature is a glacier tongue,
the generic term ice tongue is retained in the name
to reduce ambiguity. Not adopted: Cheetham
Glacier Tongue, Cheetham Ice Barrier Tongue,
Cheetham Tongue.
Cherry Gerrard, Mount: see Cherry-Garrard,
Mount.
CHERRY-GARRARD, MOUNT: conical peak
about 3,200 ft. in el., rising behind Cape Barrow in
the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land;
in about 71°20’S., 169°10’E. Disc. in January
1841, but left unnamed, by a Br. exp. under Ross.
Charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE,
1910-13, under Scott, who named it for Apsley
Cherry-Garrard, asst. zoologist with the expedition.
Not adopted: Mount Cherry Garrard, Mount Cherry
Gerrard, Conical Hill.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
CHESTER MOUNTAINS: group of mountains of
the Edsel Ford Ranges, lying in a distinctive arc
about 10 mi. SSE. of Mt. Iphigene, in Marie Byrd
Land; in about 76°37’S., 145°35’W. Charted by the
ByrdAE, 1933-35, and named for Colby M. Chester,
then pres. of General Foods Corporation, who gave
generous support to the Byrd expeditions.
CHETWYND, MOUNT: a massif capped by black
rock, about 5,000 ft. in el., lying about 3 mi. SW. of
Mt. Gauss on the S. side of Mawson Gl., in the
Prince Albert Mtns., Victoria Land; in about
76°23’S., 162°13’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE
under Scott, 1901-4.
CHEVREUX, MOUNT: mountain about 5,300 ft.
in el., which lies about 4 mi. E. of Leroux Bay on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°40’S., 64°00’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, who
named it for Edouard Chevreux, French zoologist.
CHICK ISLET: isolated rocky islet about 4 mi.
ENE. of Baldwin Pt., lying immediately off the E.
end of Sabrina Coast; in about 66°35’S., 121°15’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN
for Amos Chick, carpenter on the sloop of war
Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
CHILD, CAPE: northward projection of the front
of Amery Ice Shelf, separating Evans Bay and
Thorshavn Bay along Lars Christensen Coast; in
about 68°40’S., 71°35’E. Disc. by the BANZARE,
under Mawson, during a flight over MacKenzie Bay
on Feb. 10, 1931. Probably named for J. B. Child,
third officer on the Discovery.
CHOCOLATE, CAPE: seaward end of the lateral
moraine bordering the W. wall of the Koettlitz Gl.,
along the coast of southern Victoria Land; in about
77°58’S., 164°37’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, who so named it because of the color
of the morainic material.
CHOLET ISLET: islet which lies about 50 yards
N. of the small peninsula forming the SW. shore
of Port Charcot and the NW. extremity of Booth I.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S.,
64°02’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot,
who named it for Ernest Cholet, skipper of the
exp. ship Francais, and later the Pourquoi-Pas?.
Not adopted: Cholet Island, Cholet Isle.
CHOYCE, CAPE: rocky bluff, about 3,000 ft. in
el., at the N. side of the entrance to Seligman
Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°42’S.,
65°25’W. Photographed from the air by the USAS
in 1940. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named
it for M. A. Choyce, meteorologist at the FIDS Hope
Bay base.
84
CHRISTCHURCH, MOUNT: mountain in the
Queen Alexandria. Range, about 4,700 ft. in el.,
standing at the S. side of Shackleton Inlet on the
W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°34’S.,
163°10’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott, who named it for the city of Christchurch,
New Zealand, which generously supported the ex-
pedition.
Christen Christensen, Mount; Christensen, Cape;
Christensen, Mount: see Christensen Nunatak.
CHRISTENSEN, MOUNT: prominent, ice-cov-
ered dome about 4,000 ft. in el., about 45 mi. SW.
of the head of Ice Bay, in Enderby Land; in about
68°05’S., 48°15’E. Disc. on Jan. 13, 1930 by the
BANZARE under Mawson, who named it for Con-
sul Lars Christensen, Norwegian whaling magnate
and promoter of several Norwegian expeditions.
Christensen Coast: see Ingrid Christensen Coast;
Lars Christensen Coast.
CHRISTENSEN NUNATAK: nunatak about 900
ft. in el., standing 1 mi. N. of Robertson I., off the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°06’S., 59°34’W. Disc.
in 1893 by a Nor. exp. under C. A. Larsen, who
named it for Christen Christensen of Sandefjord,
Norway, pioneer of modern Antarctic whaling. It
was surveyed in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nord-
enskjold, and in 1947 and 1953 by the FIDS. Not
adopted: Cape Christensen, Christensen Peak,
Mount Christen Christensen, Mount Christensen
(q.v.).
Christensen Peak: see Christensen Nunatak;
Lars Christensen Peak.
CHRISTI, MOUNT: mountain, about 4,200 ft. in
el., standing nearly 3 mi. NE. of Mt. Pisgah in the
NE. part of Smith I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°54’S.,
62°25’W. The name “Cape Christi” was given for
the N. cape of Smith I. by a Br. exp. under Foster,
1828-31, but that feature had already been named
Cape Smith. Since the name Cape Smith is ap-
proved for the cape referred to, the Br-APC recom-
mended in 1953 that for the sake of historical con-
tinuity the name Christi be approved for the moun-
tain now described.
CHRISTIANIA ISLANDS: small group of islands
and rocks lying at the NE. end of the Palmer Arch.,
about 10 m. NW. of Cape Sterneck, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 63°55’S., 61°24’W. Charted by
the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who
named the group for Christiania (now Oslo), Nor-
way, where he obtained assistance and equipment
for the expedition.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
CHRISTIE, CAPE: cape which marks the S. side
of the entrance to Moubray Bay, on the coast of
Victoria Land; in about 72°15’S., 170°40’E. Disc.
on Jan. 15, 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who
named it for Prof. Samuel Hunter Christie, of the
Royal Military Acad., Woolwich.
CHRISTMAS, CAPE: abrupt rock cape, about
1,000 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the entrance
to Wust Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
72°20’S., 60°41’W. Disc. and photographed from
the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During
1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE
under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS
charted it from the ground. So named by the
FIDS because the joint party in 1947 spent Christ-
mas Day in this vicinity.
CHRISTMAS, MOUNT: uniform, sharp cone,
about 6,200 ft. in el. standing close W. of Cape
William Henry May, somewhat isolated from the
coastal range that overlooks the W. side of the Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 82°S., 161°E. Disc. in December
1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, and so named be-
cause it was the most salient feature in view when
the polar party was abreast of it on Christmas Day.
Not adopted: Christmas Mountain.
CHRISTOFFERSEN ISLAND: small island im-
mediately W. of the S. end of Powell I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°03’,W. The name ap-
pears on a chart by a Nor. whaling exp., 1912-13,
under S¢rlle, who made a running survey of these
islands. Not adopted: Christophersen Island.
Christophersen, Mount: see Wilhelm Christo-
phersen, Mount.
Christophersen Island: see Christoffersen Island.
CHURCH, CAPE: rocky bluff at the W. side of
Seligman Inlet, marking the N. side of Ahlmann
Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°51’S.,
65°35’W. Photographed from the air in 1940 by
the USAS. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who
named it for Prof. James E. Church of the Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, Univ. of Nevada, who
developed techniques of snow surveying and melt-
water run-off forecasts now widely used.
CHURCHILL PENINSULA: ice-covered pen-
insula between Cabinet and Adie Inlets, extending
some 30 mi. in a SE. direction from the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 66°30’S., 62°45’W. During 1947
it was photographed from the air by the RARE and
charted from the ground by the FIDS. Named
by the FIDS for Rt. Hon. (later Sir) Winston S.
Churchill, M.P., British Prime Minister and leader
of the War Cabinet which authorized the FIDS in
1943. Not adopted: Flint Peninsula.
85
CHURCH POINT: point surmounted by a dark,
distinctive peak, about 1,100 ft. in el., lying about
2 mi. W. of Camp Hill on the SE. coast of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°41’S., 57°55’W. Charted by
the FIDS in 1945 and so named because of the
resemblance of this peak to a low church steeple.
CIRCONCISION, PORT: small inlet indenting
the SE. side of Petermann I., off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°11’S., 64°10’W. Disc. on Jan. 1,
1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, who named it for
the holy day on which it was first sighted. The
inlet served as a base for the exp. ship Porquoi-Pas?
during the 1909 winter season. Not adopted: Port
Circumcision.
Circumcision, Port: see Circoncision, Port.
CLARENCE ISLAND: island about 17 mi. long
and about 12 mi. wide; lies at the E. end of the
South Shetland Is.; in 61°09’S., 54°06’;W. The
name dates back to at least 1821 and is now estab-
lished international usage. Not adopted: Clar-
ences Isle, Shishkoff’s Island.
Clarence Mackay, Mount: see Mackay Moun-
tains.
CLARIE COAST: that portion of the coast of
Antarctica lying between Cape Mose, in about
130°05’E., and the ice-covered cape in 136°10’E.
Named in January 1840 by Capt. Dumont d’Urville,
who recognized the existence of land lying S. of the
ice cliffs to which he applied the name “Coéte
Clarie,” after Madam Jacquinot, wife of the cap-
tain of his second ship, the Zélée. Not adopted:
Clarie Land.
Clarie Land: see Clarie Coast.
CLARKE, MOUNT: peak about 9,500 ft. in el.,
standing E. of the mountain group containing Mt.
Iveagh, at the head of Keltie Gl., in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 84°58’S., 174°10’W. Disc.
and named in December 1908 by the Southern
Journey Party of the BrAE under Shackleton.
Clarke Barrier: see Clarke Glacier.
CLARKE GLACIER: northern distributary of
Davis Gl., about 1 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, which
flows in a NNE. direction between Lamplugh I. and
the mainland to Geikie Inlet, in Victoria Land; in
about 75°35’S., 162°50’E. Disc. and named by the
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. Not adopted:
Clarke Barrier.
CLARKE GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide
and 8 mi. long, flowing NW. to Mikkelsen Bay along
the N. side of Baudin Peaks, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°48’S., 66°56’W. First roughly
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The
glacier was traversed near its head by a USAS
sledge party in January 1941. Its lower reaches
were surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and the
glacier was named by them for Louis C. G. Clarke,
Dir. of the Fitzwilliam Museum, Cambridge,
1937-46, who greatly assisted the BGLE, 1934-37.
CLARK ISLAND: rocky island about 2 mi. long
and 2 mi. wide, lying immediately N. of Bailey and
Mitchell Islands which, collectively, form the group
of three principal islands at the NE. end of the
Windmill Is. that lie close against Budd Coast; in
66°16’S., 110°27’E. Delineated from aerial pho-
tographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in February 1947
which indicate that these three islands are con-
nected by a steep snow ramp to the continental
ice overlying Budd Coast. Prominent and moraine
deposits overlie and parallel the upper margin of
this snow ramp about 1 mi. from its outer edge on
Clark, Bailey and Mitchell Islands. Named by
the US-ACAN for Capt. John E. Clark, USN, cap-
tain of the U.S.S. Currituck, seaplane tender and
flagship of the western task group of USN Op. Hjp.,
Task Force 68, 1946-47.
CLARK MOUNTAINS: group of low mountains
rising from the Rockefeller Plateau in Marie Byrd
Land, NE. of the head of Boyd G1.; in about 77°16.,
141°55’W. Disc. and photographed on aerial flights
in 1940 by the USAS, and named for Clark Uni-
versity, Worcester, Mass.
CLARK POINT: ice-covered point on the head-
land at the E. side of the entrance to Paulding Bay,
on Banzare Coast; in about 66°35’S., 123°55’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
George W. Clark, midshipman on the sloop of war
Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
Clarkson Point: see Pylon Point.
Claude, Cape: see Claude Point.
CLAUDE POINT: point, distinguished by a re-
markable vertical rock close S., forming the W.
tip of the small peninsula at the S. side of Guyou
Bay, northwestern Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°06’S., 62°41’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot, who named it for Monsieur Claude,
an associate member of the Bureau des Longitudes.
Not adopted: Cape Claude.
Claude Swanson Mountains: see Swanson Moun-
tains.
CLAYTON HILL: hill about 420 ft. in el. in the
north-central part of Petermann L., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°10’S., 64°11’W. Charted and
named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot.
86
CLEFT POINT: point on the E. side of Norway
Bight, on the S. coast of Coronation I., South
Orkney Is. It is the W. extremity of an islet,
separated from Coronation I. by a very narrow
channel; in 60°38’S., 45°47’W. It was mapped by
DI personnel in 1933 as a point on Coronation I.
The name, which is descriptive, was given by the
FIDS following their survey of 1950.
Clements Markham Bay: see Markham Bay.
CLEMENTS MARKHAM ISLAND: circular island
about 2 mi. in diameter, lying about 2 mi. S. of
the E. end of Rabot I. in Grandidier Chan., off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°56’S., 66°05’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who
named it for Sir Clements Markham, Pres. of the
Royal Geographical Soc., 1893-1905. Charcot ap-
plied this name to an incompletely-defined island
NE. of Renaud I., in what is now the Pitt Islands.
The recommended application of the name is based
upon the map of the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37,
which charted the island. The fuil name Clements
Markham Island is retained to distinguish this
feature from Markham I. in Terra Nova Bay, Vic-
toria Land. Not adopted: Markham Island (q.v.).
CLERKE ROCKS: group of rocks extending
about 5 mi. in an E—W. direction, lying some 40
mi. ESE. of South Georgia; in 55°01’S., 34°41’W.
Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named
them for Charles Clerke, officer on Cook’s ship
Resolution. Not adopted: Clerkes Rocks.
CLERY PEAK: peak about 2,100 ft. in el. on the
N. side of Mt. Lacroix, a conspicuous massif at the
N. end of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°03’S., 63°59’W. Charted by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot, who named. it for his father-in-
law, L. Cléry, an eminent French lawyer.
CLEVELAND GLACIER: glacier about 2 mi. wide,
which descends from the highlands W. of Granite
Hbr. in a SE. direction to Mackay Gl., close W. of -
Mt. Marston, in Victoria Land; in about 76°56’S.,
162°05’E. Disc. by the Western Geological Party
of the BrAE, 1910-13, and named by Frank Deben-
ham, a member of the party. Cleveland was his
mother’s name.
CLIFF ISLET: narrow cliffed islet at the E.
side of Mutton Cove, lying immediately S. of Upper
Islet about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°42’W. Charted and
named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Not
adopted: Cliff Island. .
CLIFFORD GLACIER: broad glacier, about 40
mi. long, flowing in an ENE. direction to the gap
between Mt. Tenniel and the Eland Mtns. and then
E. to Smith Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in 70°22’S., 60°30’W. The upper part of this gla-
cier was charted in 1936 by BGLE under Rymill;
the seaward side by the USAS survey party which
explored along this coast in 1940. During 1947 it
was photographed from the air by the RARE under
Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted
it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Sir
G. Miles Clifford, Gov. of the Falkland Islands.
CLIFFORD PEAK: peak about 3,800 ft. in el.,
which stands in the Osterreith Mtns. about 4 ini.
WSW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., Anvers I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°36’S., 62°57’W. Probably first seen
by the BelgAK, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The
peak was named by members of H.M.S. Snipe fol-
lowing an Antarctic cruise in January 1948, for Sir
G. Miles Clifford.
Climbing Range: see Blackwall Mountains.
CLOOS, CAPE: cape surmounted by a sharp
cone, about 3,200 ft. in el., fronting on Lemaire
Chan. and marking the N. side of the entrance to
Girard Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°08’S., 64°00’W. Disc. and named by the
BelgAE 1897-99, under De Gerlache.
Cloos, Massif: see Cloos, Mount.
CLOOS, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain prob-
ably over 3,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of
Girard Bay about 2 mi. E. of Cape Cloos on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 63°54’W. Disc.
by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The
FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, named this moun-
tain after the cape lying directly to the west. Not
adopted: Massif Cloos [French].
CLOSE, CAPE: cape about 35 mi. W. of the As-
gaard Is., on the coast of Enderby Land; in about
65°55’S., 52°10’H. Disc. by the BANZARE,
1929-31, under Mawson, who named it for Sir
Charles Close, Pres. of the Royal Geographical
Soc., 1927-30.
CLOSE ISLETS: small group of islets, which are
almost entirely ice capped, about 2 mi. ESE. of
Cape De la Motte, off George V Coast; in about
67°01’S., 144°27’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE un-
der Mawson, who named the group for John H.
Close, member of the expedition.
CLOTHIER HARBOR: small harbor in the N. side
of Robert I., about 4 mi. ENE. of the NW. end of
the island, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S.,
59°40’W. Named by American sealers in about
1820 after the sealing vessel Clothier. The Cloth-
ier, under Capt. Alexander Clark, was one of sev-
eral American sealing vessels headquartered at
this harbor during the 1820-21 season. The Cloth-
87
ier went aground here and sank on Dec. 9, 1820.
Not adopted: Clothier’s Harbour.
Clothier’s Harbour: see Clothier Harbor.
CLOUDMAKER, THE: mountain about 10,000 ft.
in el., lying E. of Mt. Kirkpatrick and forming the
most conspicuous landmark along the W. side of
Beardmore Gl.; in about 84°20’S., 169°15’E. Disc.
by the BrAE, 1907-9 under Shackleton, who so
named the mountain because a cloud usually ap-
peared near the summit, providing a useful land-
mark during the journey up the Beardmore Gla-
cier.
CLOWES BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide, entered be-
tween Confusion Pt. and the Oliphant Its., along
the S. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°44’S., 45°37’W. Charted in 1933 by DI person-
nel on the Discovery II, who named it for Archibald
J. Clowes, English oceanographer on the staff of
the Discovery Committee, 1924-46.
CLOWES GLACIER: glacier about 2 mi. wide,
which flows E. to enter Mason Inlet, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 72°56’S., 60°41’W. Disc. and
photographed from the air in December 1940 by
the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from
the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunc-
tion with the FIDS charted it from the ground.
Named by the FIDS for Archibald J. Clowes.
Club, Mount: see Touring Club, Mount.
COAL HARBOR: small bay about 0.6 mi. E. of
Undine Hbr., along the S. coast and near the W.
end of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°58’W. The
name Coaling Harbor, given in about 1912, sug-
gests a possible early use of the bay by sealers and
whalers. The name was shortened to Coal Har-
bor by DI personnel who charted the area during
the period 1926-30. Not adopted: Coaling Harbor.
Coaling Harbor: see Coal Harbor.
COAL NUNATAK: flat-topped rock mass with
steep cliffs facing S., standing 2 mi. SW. of Corner
Cliffs on the SE. coast of Alexander I Island; in
72°07’S., 68°32’W. This nunatak was first photo-
graphed from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov.
23, 1935. Observing this feature from the NW.
(the direction from which Ellsworth photographed
this nunatak) only the summit protrudes above
the coastal ice, and it was uncertain at that time
whether this was a peak on Alexander I Island or
an island in George VI Sound. Its true nature was
determined by the FIDS who visited and surveyed
this nunatak in 1949. So named by FIDS because
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
thin lenses of coal (about 6 feet by 1 inch in extent)
occur there.
COATES, MOUNT: mountain about 4,200 ft. in
el., which stands in the N. part of the David Range
of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in
about 67°52’S., 62°33’E. Disc. and named by the
BANZARE, under Mawson, on about Feb. 15, 1931.
COATS LAND: that part of Antarctica which lies
W. of Queen Maud Land and forms the E. shore
of Weddell Sea, extending in a general NE.-SW.
direction between 20°W. and 37°W. Named by
the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, for James Coats,
Jr., and Maj. Andrew Coats, supporters of the ex-
pedition.
COBALESCOU ISLET: snow-free islet about 0.5
mi. long, with two rounded summits about 100 ft.
in el., lying 1 mi. SE. of Two Hummock I. in the
NE. part of De Gerlache Str., off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°11’S., 61°36’W. Disc. and
named by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99.
COBBLERS COVE: small cove which provides an
anchorage about 0.5 mi. W. of Godthul, along the
N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°18’W.
This feature was charted and named Pleasant
Cove by DI personnel in 1929, but that name is not
known locally. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that
this feature is known to whalers and sealers as
“Skomaker Hullet” (meaning cobbler’s cove), be-
cause it was first entered in thick fog by a Nor-
wegian gunner who had once been a cobbler. An
English form of this name has been approved. Not
adopted: Pleasant Cove, Skomaker Hullet [Nor-
wegian].
COCKBURN, CAPE: cape which marks the NE.
extremity of Pasteur Pen. on Brabant I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°00’S., 62°22’W. The name
appears on a chart based upon a Br. exp. under
Foster, 1828-31, who perhaps gave the name for
Adm. George Cockburn, British naval officer and
Admiral of the Fleet in 1851. The cape was
charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5.
COCKBURN ISLAND: circular island about 1
mi. in diameter, consisting of a high plateau with
steep slopes surmounted on the NW. side by a
pyramidal peak about 1,500 ft. in el., lying in the
NE. entrance to Admiralty Sound, S. of the NE. end
of Palmer Pen.; in 64°12’S., 56°50’W. Disc. by a
Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, who named it for
Adm. George Cockburn, RN.
COCKS, MOUNT: peak which lies WSW. of Mt.
Morning and surmounts the E. side of the entrance
to Skelton Inlet, along the W. side of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 78°35’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the
88
BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for E. L.
Somers Cocks, then Treasurer of the Royal Geo-
graphical Society.
COCKSCOMB BUTTRESS: prominent, isolated
rock buttress, more than 1,000 ft. in el., standing
1 mi. NW. of Echo Mtn. and overlooking the E.
side of Norway Bight on the S. coast of Corona-
tion I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 45°44’W.
The name, which is descriptive, was given by the
FIDS following their survey of 1950.
COCKSCOMB HILL: conspicuous hill shaped
like a cockscomb, about 465 ft. in el., which rises
through the glacier at the head of Mackellar Inlet
in Admiralty Bay, King George I., South Shetland
Is.; in 62°04’S., 58°29’W. First surveyed by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Named by Lt. Cdr.
F. W. Hunt, RN, following his survey in 1951-52.
CODRINGTON, MOUNT: prominent mountain
about 4,900 ft. in el., lying about 23 mi. inland
from the coast of Enderby Land; in about 66°18’S.,
52°46’E. Charted in 1930 by the BANZARE under
Mawson as being the prominent peak sighted and
so named by John Biscoe in March 1831.
COFFER ISLET: small islet lying in the en-
trance to the bay on the E. side of the peninsula
which forms the SE. tip of Coronation I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°09’W. The
names ‘Koffer” and ‘Kotter’ are used for this
feature on two manuscript charts based on surveys
by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912-15. The recom-
mended spelling, the anglicized form of the first
of the two terms, was used by DI personnel on the
Discovery II who charted these islands in 1933.
Not adopted: Coffer Island.
COFFIN ROCK: rock which lies 1 mi. ESE. of
Finger Pt. and 0.25 mi. off the N. side of Visokoi I.,
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°41’S., 27°11’W.
Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on
the Discovery II.
COFFIN TOP: rocky, flattened summit, about
3,000 ft. in el., standing about 3.5 mi. inland from
the N. coast of South Georgia and an equal dis-
tance WNW. of the head of Moltke Hbr.; in 54°30’S.,
36°10’W. The name “Sarg-Berg” (meaning Coffin
Mountain) was given by a Ger. exp. under Schra-
‘der, 1882-83. An English form of the name, Coffin
Top, was recommended by the Br-APC in 1954.
Not adopted: Sarg-Berg [German].
COHEN, MOUNT: peak in the foothills of the
Queen Maud Range, which rises to about 2,500 ft.
in el., standing just W. of the terminus of Axel
Heiberg Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
85°16’S., 164°50’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on sev-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
eral ByrdAE flights to the Queen Maud Range in
November 1929, and named by him for Emanuel
Cohen of Paramount Pictures, who assisted in
assembling the motion-picture records of the expe-
dition.
COLBECK, CAPE: prominent ice-covered cape
which forms the NW. extremity of Edward VII
Pen.; in about 77°05’S., 158°10’W. Disc. in Janu-
ary 1908 by the BrNAE under Scott, and named by
him for Lt. William Colbeck, RNR, who commanded
Scott’s relief ship, the Morning.
COLBECK ARCHIPELAGO: group of rocky
islands lying N. of the W. portion of Mac-Robert-
son Coast; in about 67°20’S., 61°02’E. Disc. in
January 1930 and charted in February 1931 by the
BANZARE under Mawson. Named for W. R. Col-
beck, second officer on the Discovery. Norwegian
whalers, who explored this same area in January
1931, named the group Thorfin Islands. Not
adopted: Thorfin Islands.
COLBECK BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide, which
lies in the S. part of Robertson Bay, between the
S. end of Duke of York I. and the N. coast of
Victoria Land; in about 71°38’S., 170°07’E. First
charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borch-
grevink, who named it for Lt. William Colbeck,
RNR, magnetic observer of the expedition.
COLBERT RANGE: mountain range lying NW.
of Le May Range in the central part of Alexander I
Island; in about 71°10’S., 70°45’W. Disc. by the
RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for
R. Adm. Leo Otis Colbert, head of the U.S. Coast
and Geodetic Survey, which furnished equipment
for the expedition. Not adopted: Navy Range,
U.S. Navy Range.
COLDBLOW COL: snow-covered col, about 1,000
ft. in el., situated on the W. side and near the head
of Laws Gl., between the S. side of Echo Mtn. and
a 1,600 foot peak 1.5 mi. NNW. of Cape Vik, Coro-
nation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°42’W.
Surveyed in 1950 by the FIDS. The name derives
from the fact that a FIDS party had their tent
blown down in a gale when camped on this col in
September 1948.
COLEMAN, MOUNT: rounded mountain about
2,800 ft. in el., standing immediately E. of Common-
wealth Gl. at the head of New Hbr., in Victoria
Land; in about 77°33’S., 163°22’E. Charted and
named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13.
COLE PENINSULA: peninsula about 12 mi.
long, in an EW. direction, and 8 mi. wide, lying
between Cabinet and Mill Inlets, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°50’S., 64°00’W. It is largely
424589 O -57-7
89
ice covered except for several rocky spurs which
radiate from Mt. Hayes. First sighted and photo-
graphed from the air in 1940 by members of East
Base of the USAS. During 1947 it was charted by
the FIDS and photographed from the air by the
RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for Rep.
W. Sterling Cole of New York, member of the House
Naval Affairs Committee, which assisted in obtain-
ing Congressional support resulting in procure-
ment of a ship for use by the Ronne expedition.
COLLIER, CAPE: broad ice-covered cape on the
E. coast of Palmer Pen., about midway between the
S. end of Hearst I. and Cape Boggs; in 70°10’S.,
61°55’W. Disc. in 1940 by members of the USAS
who explored this coast by land and from the air
from the East Base. Named for Zadick Collier,
machinist at the East Base.
COLLINS HARBOR: bay indenting the W. side
of King George I., about 2.5 mi. NNW. of Marian
Cove, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S.,
58°50’W. The name appears on a chart by the
Scottish geologist David Ferguson, who roughly
charted the bay in 1913-14, but may reflect an
earlier naming.
COLLINS POINT: small but prominent point
about 1 mi. W. of Neptunes Bellows, on the S. side
of Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°35’W. Charted by a Br.
exp. under Foster, 1828-31. Named by Lt. Cdr.
D. N. Penfold, RN, following his survey of the
island in 1948-49, for Capt. K. St. B. Collins, RN,
Superintendent of Charts in the Hydrographic
Dept., Admiralty.
COLOMBO, MOUNT: mountainous projection on
the NE. end of the main massif of the Fosdick
Mtns. in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd
Land, rising to an estimated 3,000 ft. in el.; in
about 76°28’S., 144°44’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE
on the Eastern Flight of Dec. 5, 1929. Named for
Louis P. Colombo, a member of the Edsel Ford
Mountains Biological Party of the USAS which
visited this area in December 1940.
COLVOCORESSES BAY: open bay about 24 mi.
wide and 10 mi. long, indenting the E. end of Budd
Coast between Fox Gl. and Cape Hammersly; in
about 65°55’S., 115°00’E. The bay is believed to
be generally ice filled and is marked by prominent
tongues extending seaward from Williamson and
Whittle Glaciers. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for George W. Colvoco-
resses, midshipman on the sloop of war Vincennes
of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Colvocoresses,
later promoted to Captain, USN, also published in
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1852-55 his own account of the voyage in Four
Years in the Government Exploring Expedition
Commanded by Captain Wilkes.
COMAN, MOUNT: mountain about 12,000 ft. in
el., which lies about 50 mi. W. of Mt. Tricorn,
inland from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about
74°02’S., 65°04’W. Disc. by the RARE under
Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for Dr. F. Dana
Coman, physician with the ByrdAE, 1928-30. Not
adopted: Mount Dana Coman.
COMB RIDGE: ridge about 400 ft. in el., which
forms the E. and major part of the hill at the N.
end of The Naze, a peninsula of northern James
Ross I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°55’S., 57°28’W. Probably first sighted in
1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold. It was
charted and given this descriptive name by the
FIDS in 1946.
COMBS, MOUNT: mountain which lies W. of
Carroll Inlet on George Bryan Coast; in about
73°03’S., 81°25’W. Disc. by the RARE under
Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for Rep. J. M.
Combs, of Beaumont, Texas, who did much to gain
support for the expedition.
COMMANDANT CHARCOT. GLACIER: promi-
nent glacier about 3 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, flow-
ing NNW. from the continental ice to its terminus
at the head of Victor Bay, on Adélie Coast, in
66°25’S., 136°35’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The
FrAE under Marret sledged W. along Adélie Coast
to Victor Bay, close E. of this glacier, in December
1952. Named for the French polar ship Com-
mandant Charcot which transported expeditions
under Liotard in 1948-49 and 1949-51, and Barré
in 1951-52. Not adopted: Commandant Drovcot
Glacier.
Commandant Drovcot Glacier: see Commandant
Charcot Glacier.
COMMITTEE BAY: small, bay-like body of
water, near the center of the Bay of Isles, South
Georgia, whose limits are formed by the semi-
circular arrangement of Crescent It., Invisible It.,
Hogs Mouth Rocks and Albatross I.; in 54°01'S.,
37°20’W. Its entrance, between Crescent It. and
Albatross I., faces west. The arrangement of the
islets was first mapped in 1912-13 by Robert Cush-
man Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig
Daisy. The bay was surveyed. by Discovery In-
vestigations personnel in 1929-30, and presumably
named by them for the Discovery Committee, spon-
sors of Discovery Investigations.
90
Committee Range: see Executive Committee
Range.
COMMONWEALTH BAY: open bay about 30 mi.
wide at its entrance between Point Alden and Cape
Gray, and about 12 mi. long, indenting the W. end
of George V Coast; in about 66°40’S., 142°40’E.
Disc. in January 1912 by the AAE under Mawson
who established the Main Base on Cape Denison
at the head of the bay, and named for the Com-
monwealth of Australia.
COMMONWEALTH GLACIER: glacier which
flows in a SE. direction and enters the N. side of
Taylor Glacier Dry Valley immediately W. of Mt.
Coleman, in Victoria Land; in about 77°35’S.,
163°15’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13. Named for the Commonwealth of
Australia, which made a financial grant to the exp.
and contributed two members to the expedition’s
Western Geological Party which explored this area.
COMMONWEALTH RANGE: range of rugged
mountains bordering the E. side of Beardmore Gl.,
near the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°30’S.,
173°00’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the BrAE
under Shackleton and named for the Common-
wealth of Australia, which so generously aided the
expedition.
COMPASS ISLET: small rocky islet, about 50 ft.
in el., lying in Marguerite Bay about 7 mi. NW. of
Terra Firma Is.; in 68°38’S., 67°48’W. First seen
and photographed from the air on Feb. 1, 1937 by
the BGLE. First visited by the FIDS in 1948, and
surveyed by them in 1949. So named by FIDS
because of difficulties experienced here with com-
pass bearings, eventually proved to be due to sub-
stitution of iron for copper wire in an anorak hood.
COMRIE GLACIER: glacier, about 6 mi. long,
flowing NW. into the SE. corner of Bigo Bay, on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°48’S., 64°20’W. |
This glacier was first sighted and roughly surveyed
in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was re-
surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill,
and later named for Leslie J. Comrie, Founder and
first Dir. of the Scientific Computing Service Ltd.,
London. As Supt. of the Nautical Almanac Office
in 1934, he greatly assisted the BGLE, 1934-37, by
providing advance copies of the Nautical Almanac
up to 1937.
Concepcion, Pointe: see Conception Point.
CONCEPTION POINT: northernmost point on
Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in about
60°31’/S., 45°44’W. Disc., Dec. 8, 1821, in the course
of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell, British
sealer, and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, American
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
sealer. Named by Powell.
Concepcion [French].
Not adopted: Pointe
CONE NUNATAK: nunatak, about 1,100 ft. in
el., which appears conical on its N. side but has
brown rock cliffs on its S. face, about 3 mi. SSE. of
Buttress Hill and 4 mi. NE. of the SW. tip of
Tabarin Pen., at the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.;
_in 63°36’S., 57°01’W. This area was first explored
by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the
SwedAE, 1901-4. Cone Nunatak was named by
the FIDS following their survey of the area in 1946.
CONE ROCK: small rock lying about midway
between Pyramid I. and Meade Is., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°25’S., 60°09’W. The name ap-
pears to have been applied by DI personnel on the
Discovery II, who charted the rock in 1935. Not
adopted: Conical Rock.
CONFUSION POINT: point which forms the S.
tip of the islet at the W. side of the entrance to
Clowes Bay, along the S. side of Signy I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°38’W. Charted
and named in 1933 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II.
CONGER GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi.
wide and 7 mi. long flowing NNW. from the conti-
nental ice to Knox Coast, about 5. mi. E. of Glenzer
G1.; in about 66°05’S., 103°42’E. Delineated from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-
47, and named by the US-ACAN for Richard R.
Conger, chief photographer’s mate with USN Op.
Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in establishing astro-
nomical control stations along the coast from Wil-
helm II Coast to Budd Coast.
Conical Hill: see Cherry-Garrard, Mount.
Conical Rock: see Cone Rock.
CONICAL ROCK: rock lying at the E. side of
Hell Gates, about midway between Snow and
Livingston Islands, in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°40’S., 61°10’W. Named by DI personnel on the
Discovery II, who charted the area in 1930-31.
Not adopted: Rocher Conique [French].
Conique, Rocher: see Conical Rock.
CONRADI PEAK: isolated, almost snow-covered
peak, about 3,300 ft. in el., lying dbout 28 mi. SSE.
of Cape Batterbee, in Enderby Land; in about
66°14’S., 54°22’E. Disc. and named by the BAN-
ZARE under Mawson, in January 1930.
CONRAD MOUNTAINS: mountain range about
20 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 10,800
ft. in el., lying between Mt. Dallmann and the
Kurze Mtns. in New Schwabenland; in about
91
72°00’S., 9°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under
Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for the dir. of
meteorological division of the former Marine-
leitung (German Admiralty).
CONSORT ISLETS: group of two islets, the most
northeasterly of the De Dion Its., lying about 6 mi.
S. of Adelaide I. in Marguerite Bay; in 67°52’S.,
68°42’W. First sighted in 1909 by the FrAE under
Charcot. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. The
name, given by FIDS, derives from association with
Emperor Islet.
Constance, Cape: see Jones, Cape.
CONSTANCE, CAPE: cape which marks the N.
tip of the peninsula between Antarctic and Pos-
session Bays, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in
54°03’S., 36°59’W. Cape Constance is an estab-
lished name dating back to about 1912.
CONTACT PEAK: prominent rock peak, about
3,300 ft. in el., which is the southernmost peak on
Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 67°47’S., 67°28’W. First sighted and roughly
charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It
was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE and in 1948 by
the FIDS. So named by the FIDS because the
peak marks the granite-volcanic contact in the
cliffs which is visible at a considerable distance.
CONTRAST ROCKS: small group of rocks about
0.5 mi. E. of Antarctic Pt. along the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 36°57’W. Charted and
named in the period 1926-30 by DI personnel.
CONWAY, CAPE: cape which forms the S. tip
of Snow I., in the South Shetlands Is.; in 62°49’S.,
61°25’W. Named by a Br. exp. under Foster,
1828-31, for the Conway, a vessel on which Foster
had previously served.
CONWAY RANGE: mountain range between Mu-
lock Inlet and the Cape Murray depression on the
W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°18’S.,
159°20’E. This area was disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4. The name was used in the report
of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9.
Cook Bay: see Joseph Cook Bay.
COOK BAY: irregular bay, about 1.3 mi. wide at
its entrance between Cape Crewe and Black Head,
narrowing into two western arms, Lighthouse Bay
and Prince Olav Hbr., along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Charted by DI
personnel during the period 1926-30, and named by
them for Capt. James Cook, who explored South
Georgia and landed in this general vicinity in 1775.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
COOK GLACIER: glacier which flows in a N.
direction to Saint Andrews Bay, on the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°26’S., 36°12’W. Named by a
Ger. exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, for Capt. James
Cook.
COOK ISLAND: central island of Southern
Thule, in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°27’S.,
27°09’W. Southern Thule was disc. by a Br. exp.
under Capt. James Cook in 1775. The island was
named for Cook by a Russ exp. under Bellings-
hausen, which explored the South Sandwich Is. in
1819-20.
Cook Peninsula: see Riiser-Larsen Peninsula.
COOK ROCK: arched rock about 150 ft. in el.,
lying E. of Trousers Rock, and about 0.3 mi. NE. of
Vindication I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in
57°04’S., 26°45’W. Charted in 1930 by DI person-
nel on the Discovery II and named for Capt. James
Cook.
COOPER, MOUNT: large mountain mass, about
5 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, rising over 3,500 ft. in
el., in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land,
on the N. side of Boyd Gl.; in about 77°07'S.,
145°24’W. Disc. on aerial flights in 1934 by the
ByrdAE and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Merian C.
Cooper, motion picture producer of Hollywood.
COOPER BAY: small bay about 2 mi. SW. of
Cape Vahsel and 1 mi. NW. of Cooper I., at the SE.
end of South Georgia; in 54°47’S., 35°48’W. The
bay derives its name from nearby Cooper Island.
COOPER GLACIER: valley glacier about 3 to 8
mi. wide and about 20 mi. long, which descends
from the south polar plateau and flows NE. between
Mounts Ruth Gade and Don Pedro Christophersen,
in the Queen Maud Range, and merges with the
head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°30’S., 163°50’W.
Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on several ByrdAE flights to
the Queen Maud Range in November 1929, and
named by him for Kent Cooper, an official of the
Associated Press.
COOPER ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long which
lies at the N. side of the entrance to Grygalski
Fjord, off the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°49’S.,
35°46’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775,
and named for Lt. Robert P. Cooper, an officer
aboard the Resolution.
COOPER SOUND: navigable channel, about 1.5
mi. wide, which separates Cooper I. from the SE.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°48’S., 35°48’W. The
existence of this channel was first noted in 1775
by a Br. exp. under Cook. The name Cooper Sound,
92
derived from the nearby Cooper I., is well estab-
lished in use among the sealers in South Georgia.
COPPER GLACIER: glacier which flows in a SE.
direction to the SE. coast of Anvers I. between Cop-
per Peak and Green Spur, on the N., and Billie Peak,
on the S., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°44’S., 63°19’W.
Probably first seen by the BelgAE under De
Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a chart
based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the
Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming.
COPPERMINE COVE: cove immediately SE. of
Cape Morris, the NW. tip of Robert I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°22’S., 59°46’W. The name, de-
rived from the reported existence of copper ore in
the cove, was applied by sealers in about 1821 toa
much larger bight farther SE. along the W. side
of Robert I., but in recent years the name has be-
come established for the cove described. Not
adopted: Copper Mine Cove.
COPPER PEAK: peak which is vivid green in
color, about 3,700 ft. in el., about 2 mi. NNE. of
Billie Peak and 2 mi. E. of the N. side of Borgen
Bay, on Anvers I. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°43’S.,
63°21’W. First seen by the BelgAE under De
Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a chart
based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery, but may reflect an earlier naming.
CORA COVE: small cove in the NW part of Deso-
lation Hbr., along the SE. side of Desolation I. in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°22’W. A
Br. sealing exp. under Powell visited this cove in
1821, reporting that the brig Cora, of Liverpool,
was lost at this location during the preceding year.
Not adopted: Cora’s Cove.
CORDELIA BAY: bight along the E. side of
Saunders I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°47’S.,
26°24’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the —
Discovery II. Named for Cordelia A. Carey, daugh-
ter of Cdr. W. M. Carey, RN (Ret.), then captain of
the Discovery II.
CORDELL HULL BAY: ice-filled bay, about 18
mi. wide, and 15 mi. long, fed by Cordell Hull Gl.,
indenting Hobbs Coast; in about 75°10’S., 136°20’W.
Disc. by the USAS, 1939-41. The bay takes its
name from Cordell Hull Gl., which was named for
Sec. of State Cordell Hull.
CORDELL HULL GLACIER: about 20 mi. wide;
flows to the head of Cordell Hull Bay, on Hobbs
Coast; in about 75°20’S., 136°15’W. Disc. by the
USAS, 1939-41, and named for Sec. of State Cordell
Hull.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
COREY, MOUNT: mountain about 2,000 ft. in
el., which lies about 8 mi. S. of Fosdick Mtns., in
the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in
about 76°38’S., 145°00’W. Disc. by the Marie
Byrd Land Sledging Party of the ByrdAE in No-
vember 1934, and named for Stevenson Corey, exp.
supply officer and member of the sledge party.
CORINTHIAN BAY: bay, which is about 3 mi.
wide and recedes about 1.5 mi., entered between
Rogers Head and Saddle Pt. on the N. coast of
Heard I.; in 53°01’S., 73°27’E. It was probably
named by Capt. Erasmus Darwin Rogers, American
whaler and sealer, after his vessel Corinthian in
which he made the first landing on Heard I. in
March 1855. The name appears on a chart by the
Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in
the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then
in use by the sealers.
CORNER CLIFFS: rocky mass surmounted by
two flat-topped summits about 1.5 mi. apart, stand-
ing immediately S. of Saturn Gl. on the SE. coast
of Alexander I Island; in 72°04’S., 68°25’W. The
rocks of these cliffs were apparently hidden from
the line of sight by intervening ice slopes to the
W., but the two rock ridges forming the NW. shoul-
der of this feature were first seen and photographed
from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935,
and were mapped from these photographs by
W.L. G. Joerg. The cliffs were first surveyed in
1949 by the FIDS, who gave this name to mark the
point where the exposed rock of eastern Alexander
I Island turns from a N.-S. direction toward the
southwest.
CORNER GLACIER: steep, broken glacier about
1 mi. wide, descending from the W. slopes of Mt.
Dickason and merging with the confluent ice on
the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°36’S.,
163°30’E. Charted by the Northern Party of the
BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and so named by them
because of its location.
CORNER ISLANDS: two islets forming a crude
right angle, lying 0.1 mi. NE. of Galindez I. in the
Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°15/S., 64°15’°W. Charted and named in 1935 by
the BGLE under Rymill.
CORNER PEAK: pyramidal peak, about 3,500 ft.
in el., with considerable rock exposed on its N. face,
lying 2.5 mi. SW. of the S. end of Marescot Ridge
and some 8 mi. ESE. of Cape Roquemaurel, mark-
ing the corner of a broad glacier valley which rises
immediately to the SE. and fans out northwestward
to form a piedmont ice sheet on the NW. side of
Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°35’S., 58°39’W. Named
by the FIDS following a survey of the area in 1946.
93
CORNER ROCK: rock lying in the SE. entrance
to Meek Chan. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°15’W. Charted and
named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill.
CORNICE CHANNEL: narrow channel separat-
ing Galindez I. from the E. part of Skua I. in the
Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°15/S., 64°16’W. First surveyed in 1935-36 by
the BGLE under Rymill. Named in 1954 by the
Br-APC. A prominent cornice overhangs the ice
cliff on the Galindez I. side of the channel.
CORNISH, CAPE: cape which forms the N. tip
of Buckle I. in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°42’S.,
163°09’E. Named by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery II in 1938 for A. W. Cornish, meteorologist
with the Australian Central Bureau who was an
observer aboard the Discovery II during 1937-38.
CORNWALL PEAKS: two conspicuous rock
peaks, the highest about 3,400 ft. in el., standing at
the W. side of Kénig Gl., about 3 mi. SW. of For-
tuna Bay, South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°52’W.
The name Cornwall Peak was probably given by
DI personnel during their survey of Fortuna Bay
in 1929. During the SGS, 1951-52, this peak could
not be re-identified. -At the same time it was re-
ported that the features now described, although
lying farther south, together form a conspicuous
landmark requiring a name. The name Cornwall
Peaks was recommended for these peaks by the
Br-APC in 1954; the name Cornwall Peak has been
eliminated. Not adopted: Cornwall Peak.
CORNWALLIS ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long
and 1.5 mi. wide, which lies about midway between
Elephant and Clarence Islands in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 61°03’S., 54°31’W. The name dates
back to about 1821 and is now established interna-
tional usage. Not adopted: Cornwallis’s Island,
Michailoff’s Island.
CORNWALL POINT: conspicuous point about 1.5
mi. NE. of Cape Morris, on the N. side of Robert I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°21’S., 59°45’W.
The name appears to have been applied by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II who charted the point
in 1935.
CORONATION ISLAND: largest of the South
Orkney Is., about 30 mi. long and 3 to 8 mi. wide;
in about 60°37’S., 45°30’W. Disc. in December 1821
in the course of the joint cruise by Capt. George
Powell, British sealer, and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer,
American sealer. Named by Powell in honor of the
coronation of George IV, who had become King of
Great Britain in 1820. Not adopted: Coronation
Isle, Mainland, Pomona Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
CORRAL POINT: rocky point forming the SW.
extremity of Moe I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
45°43’W. Roughly surveyed by DI personnel in
1933. Named by the FIDS following their survey
of 1947. The Corral Whaling Co. of Bergen, a sub-
sidiary of Messrs. Christensen and Co., Corral,
Chile, operated the floating factory Tioga, with its
steam whalers Corral and Fyr, in the South Orkney
Is. in 1912-13.
CORRELL NUNATAK: nunatak on the W. mar-
gin of Mertz Gl., standing about 20 mi. SSW. of the
head of Buchanan Bay, on George V Coast; in about
67°34’S., 144°07’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the
AAK under Mawson, who named it for Percy E.
Correll, mechanic with the Main Base party.
Corry, Cape: see Corry Island.
CORRY ISLAND: circular island about 2 mi. in
diameter and about 1,600 ft. in el., lying off the SE.
coast of Louis Philippe Pen. between Vega and
Eagle Islands; in 63°43’S.,57°32’W. Thisis believed
to be the cape sighted hereabout by a Br. exp. under
Ross, 1839-43, who named it for Thomas L. Corry,
a Lord Commissioner of the Admiralty. In 1945,
the FIDS charted an archipelago in this area. The
present application of the name is in accord with
the FIDS “that the name of Corry should be per-
petuated on the most conspicuous of these islands
as seen from eastward (the direction from which it
was seen by Ross).” Not adopted: Cape Corry.
COTTER, CAPE: bold headland about 10 mi. S.
of Cape Hallett, on the coast of Victoria Land; in
about 72°40’S., 170°45’E. Named in 1841 by a Br.
exp. under Ross, for Pownall P. Cotter, Master of
the Terror, one of the two exp. ships used by Ross.
COTTON GLACIER: an ill-defined stream of
glacial ice lying at the S. side of Mackay Gl. With
Mackay Gl. it occupies the broad basin opening out
upon Granite Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about
77°06’S., 161°47’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE
under Scott, 1910-13.
COULING ISLAND: island in the William
Scoresby Arch., lying off Mac-Robertson Coast
about 5 mi. NE. of the entrance to William Scoresby
Bay; in about 67°20’S., 59°42’E. Disc. and named
by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in Febru-
ary 1936. Not adopted: Couling Island, Froa
[Norwegian].
COULMAN ISLAND: island about 15 mi. long
and 9 mi. wide, which lies about 8 mi. SSE. of Cape
Jones, off the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about
73°25’S., 169°50’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross, who named it for his father-in-law,
Thomas Coulman.
94
COURTAULD, MOUNT: rounded, mainly ice-
covered mountain, about 6,900 ft. in el., standing
9 mi. E. of the rocky ridge marking the N. side
of the mouth of Naess Gl., on the W. side of Palmer
Pen.; in 70°21’S., 67°28’W. First surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for
Augustine Courtauld, British Arctic explorer who
was of assistance during the organization of the
BGLE, 1934-37.
COURTIER ISLETS: group of about 24 small
islets and rocks, the highest about 90 ft. in el., lying
close SW. of Emperor It. in the De Dion Its., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 68°44’W.
First sighted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot.
The islets were visited and surveyed in 1949 by the
FIDS. So named by FIDS because of their close
association with Emperor Islet.
COURT NUNATAK: nunatak about 2,200 ft. in
el., standing close E. of the mouth of Meinardus
Gl. on the W. side of New Bedford Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°22’S., 61°36’W. Disc.
and photographed from the air in December 1940
by members of East Base of the USAS. During
1947 it was photographed from the air by members
of the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS
charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS
for Arnold Court, American meteorologist and
member of the West Base of the USAS, 1939-41.
COURT RIDGE: low, ice-drowned ridge, about
1,000 ft. in el., extending into Sulzberger Bay in a
NNW. direction from the NW. extremity of the
Haines Mtns. of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie
Byrd Land; in about 77°20’S., 147°05’W. Disc. by
members of the ByrdAE on the Northeastern Flight
of December 15-16, 1934. Named for Arnold Court,
meteorologist at the West Base of the USAS,
1939-41.
COVE ROCK: rock about 2.5 mi. W. of North
Foreland, the NE. tip of King George I., in the ~
South Shetland Is.; in 61°53’S., 57°46’W. Charted
and named in 1937 by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery IT.
COVEY ROCKS: group of about six rocks lying
midway between Pinero I. and Cape Saenz Pena in
Laubeuf Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
67°33’S., 67°43’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by
the FIDS who gave the name because of the re-
semblance of these rocks to a covey of partridges
sitting in a field.
CRAGGY ISLET: narrow islet marked by crags,
lying close off the E. side of Desolation I. and form-
ing the NE. side of Desolation Hbr., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°20’W. It was charted
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who
gave this descriptive name.
CRAIGIE POINT: point at the SE. side of the
entrance to Right Whale Bay, on the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°38’W. Craigie Point
is an established name dating back to about 1912.
Not adopted: Graicie Point.
Crane Channel; Crane Inlet: see Crane Glacier.
CRANE GLACIER: narrow glacier which flows
about 17 mi. in an ENE. direction through a deep
trough into Exasperation Inlet, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°20’S., 62°20’W. Sir Hubert
Wilkins photographed this feature from the air in
1928 and gave it the name Crane Channel, after
C. K. Crane of Los Angeles, reporting that it ap-
peared to be a channel cutting in an E.-W. direc-
tion across the peninsula. The name was altered
to Crane Inlet following explorations along the W.
coast of Palmer Pen. in 1936 by the BGLE, which
proved that no through channel from the E. coast
exists. Comparison of Wilkins’ photograph of this
feature with those taken in 1947 by the FIDS show
that Wilkins’ “Crane Channel” is this glacier, al-
though it lies about 75 mi. NE. of the position origi-
nally reported by Wilkins. Not adopted: Crane
Channel, Crane Inlet.
CRATER BAY: small bay at the NE. side of
Leskov I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°40’S.,
28°10’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Filchner,
1911-12, who so named it because of its apparent
formation as a result of volcanic eruption. Not
adopted: Kraterbucht [German].
CRATER HILL: hill, about 1,100 ft. in el., marked
by a volcanic crater at its summit, about 1 mi. N.
of Observation Hill in the S. part of Hut Point
Peninsula on Ross I.; in about 77°50’S., 166°41’E.
Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4.
CREAK, MOUNT: sharp peak about 5,200 ft. in
el., lying N. of Fry Gl. in the Prince Albert Mtns.
of Victoria Land; in about 76°34’S., 162°05’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it
for Capt. E. W. Creak, then Dir. of Compasses at the
Admiralty.
CREPIN, CAPE: cape which marks the W. side
of the entrance to Mackellar Inlet in Admiralty
Bay, on King George I. in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°04’S., 58°29’W. Cape Crépin appears to have
been named by the FrAE under Charcot, who
charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909.
CRESCENT BAY: small bay lying along the E.
shore of Duke of York I. in the S. part of Robertson
Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°36’S.,
170°05’E. First charted in 1899, and so named be-
95
cause of its shape, by the BrAE under C. E.
Borchgrevink.
CRESCENT ISLET: small, roughly crescent-
shaped islet, lying close S. of Mollyhawk It. in the
Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°20’W.
The islet was roughly charted in 1912-13, by Robert
Cushman Murphy. It was surveyed in 1929-30 by
DI personnel who named it Crescent Island. The
name Crescent Islet is approved because of the
small size of the feature. Not adopted: Crescent
Island.
CRESWICK PEAKS: an impressive mountain
massif with several peaks, the highest about 4,800
ft. in el., standing at the NE. side of Moore Pt. be-
tween Naess and Meiklejohn Glaciers, and about
3 mi. inland from George VI Sound on Palmer Pen.;
in 70°28’S., 67°45’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Miss
Frances E. Creswick (now Mrs. James I. Moore—
see Moore Pt.), Asst. to the Dir. of the Scott Polar
Research Inst., Cambridge, 1931-38, who helped
to organize the BGLE, 1934-37.
CREVASSE VALLEY GLACIER: broad glacier
distinguished by many crevasses, about 40 mi. long
and from 8 to 12 mi. wide, flowing W. from the
Rockefeller Plateau of Marie Byrd Land, through
the Edsel Ford Ranges, to Sulzberger Bay. Its
terminus lies in about 76°44’S., 145°55’W. Disc.
by the Marie Byrd Land Sledging Party of the
ByrdAE, in November-December 1934, and so
named because of its extensively crevassed surface.
Not adopted: Crevassed Valley Glacier.
CREWE, CAPE: cape which forms the N. side
of the entrance to Cook Bay, on the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Cape Crewe
is an established name, dating back to about 1912.
CREWE ROCK: rock about 10 ft. in el., which
lies 0.1 mi. E. of Cape Crewe, off the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Named after
nearby Cape Crewe.
CROCKETT, MOUNT: high granitic peak of the
Will Hays Mountains, rising to about 7,200 ft. in
el., standing between Robert Scott and Amundsen
Glaciers in the Queen Maud Range; in about
86°02’S. 155°00’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the
ByrdAE geological party under Laurence Gould,
and named by Byrd for Frederick E. Crockett,
member of that party.
CROFT BAY: bay which indents the north-cen-
tral coast of James Ross I. and forms the S. part
of Sidney Herbert Sound, S. of the NE. end of Palm-
er Pen.; in 64°00’S., 57°45’W. Disc. in 1903 by
the SwedAE under Nordenskjold. Charted in 1945
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
by the FIDS, who named it for W. N. Croft, FIDS
geologist at Hope Bay in 1946-47.
Cross, Cape: see Hinks, Cape.
CROSSCUT POINT: series of jagged rocks form-
ing the N. end of Vindication I., in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°46’W. Charted in 1930 by
DI personnel on the Discovery II, and so named
because numerous crosscutting dikes have with-
stood weathering and produced this irregular for-
mation.
CROSS VALLEY: valley about 1.75 mi. long, in
a NW.-SE. direction, cutting through the NE. part
of Seymour I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Palm-
er Pen.; in 64°16’S., 56°42’W. Disc. by the
SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4, and so named
by him because of the transverse alignment of the
valley. Not adopted: Querthal [German].
CROWN PEAK: ice-covered peak, about 3,700 ft.
in el., topped by a conspicuous crown-shaped ice
formation. It forms the highest summit and the
S. end of Marescot Ridge and lies some 10 mi. ESE.
of Cape Roquemaurel, on the NW. side of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°34’S., 58°33’W. Named by the
FIDS following their survey of the area in 1946.
Crown Prince Gustav Channel: see Prince Gus-
tav Channel.
Crown Prince Olaf .Land; Crown Prince Olav
Coast; Crown Prince Olav Land: see Prince Olav
Coast.
Crown Prince Olaf Mountains; Crown Prince
Olav Mountains: see Prince Olav Mountains.
Crown Princess Martha Land: see Princess Mar-
tha Coast.
CROZIER, CAPE: cape which forms the E. tip
of Ross I.; in about 77°29’S., 169°34’E. Disc. in
1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named for Cdr.
Francis R. M. Crozier of the Terror, one of the two
ships of Ross’ expedition.
Cruchleys Island: see Powell Island.
CRUISER ROCKS: submerged rocks about 4 mi.
SW. of Cape Lindsey, Elephant I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in about 61°12’S., 55°45’W. These
rocks were known to sealers as early as 1822, and
appeared on charts of that period by the name
Cruisers. Not adopted: Cruisers, Cruizer Rocks,
Cruizers Rocks.
Cruisers; Cruizers Rocks: see Cruiser Rocks.
Crulls Islands: see Cruls Islets.
96
CRULS ISLETS: group of islets about 10 mi.
WNW. of the Argentine Is., lying off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°13’S., 54°35’W. Disc. by
the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named
by him for Luis Cruls, Belgian astronomer and
later Dir. of the Observatory at Rio de Janeiro.
Not adopted: Crulls Islands, Crulls Islets.
CRUMMER, MOUNT: brownish granite moun-
tain about 3,000 ft. in el., lying SE. of Mt. De Ger-
lache on the NE. side of Larsen Gl., on the coast
of Victoria Land; in about 75°05’S., 162°40’E. First
charted and named by the BrAE under Shackleton,
1907-9.
CRUTCH, THE: saddle-shaped depression on the
ridge about 1.5 mi. NW. of Larsen Pt., at the W.
side of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°32’W. The name is de-
scriptive.
CRUTCH PEAK: dark, rocky peak about 900 ft.
in el., which lies about 1.5 mi. E. of Black Peak
and 2.5 mi. E. of the NW. tip of Greenwich I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°26’S., 59°59’ W.
Probably named by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, who charted the peak in 1935.
CRUZEN ISLAND: rocky, snow-covered island
about 75 mi. N. of the mouth of Emory Land Bay,
Marie Byrd Land; in about 74°30’S., 141°30’W.
Disc. in 1940 on flights from West Base of the
USAS, and named for Cdr. Richard H. Cruzen, USN,
commanding officer of the Bear and second-in-
command of the expedition.
CRYSTAL HILL: ice-free hill, about 500 ft. in
el., forming the summit of a headland lying mid-
way between Bald Head and Camp Hill, on the
SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°39’S., 57°44’W.
So named by the FIDS because crystals were col-
lected at the foot of the hill in 1945 and 1946.
Cube, The: see Kubus Mountain.
CUFF CAPE: dark rock point which emerges
from the ice at the S. side of the mouth of Mackay
Gl., on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°59’S.,
162°24’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton,
1907-9, and so named because it resembled “a
black hand stretched out from a snowy cuff.” Not
adopted: Cape Cuff.
CUMBERLAND BAY: bay, about 4 mi. wide at
its entrance between Larsen and Barff Points,
which separates into extensive arms that recede
inland about 9 mi., along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°28’W. Disc. and named
in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
CUMBERLAND EAST BAY: bay forming the
eastern arm of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia;
in 54°17’S., 36°27’°W. It is entered between Sap-
pho Pt. and Barff Pt., where it is nearly 3 mi.
wide, and extends 8 mi. in a SE. direction. This
feature was surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, who
named it South Bay. It was remapped during
1926-29 by DI personnel and renamed East Cum-
berland Bay, which is more descriptive of its geo-
graphic position. The shortened form East Bay
was simultaneously used. Following the SGS,
1951-52, the Br-APC proposed that the name be
altered to Cumberland East Bay and that all other
names be rejected. This change brings together
information about the whole of Cumberland Bay
in one place in indexes, and will avoid confusion
with East Bay in Prince Olav Harbor, South
Georgia. Not adopted: East Bay, East Cumber-
land Bay, South Bay.
CUMBERLAND WEST BAY: bay forming the
western arm of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia;
in 54°13’S., 36°32’W. It is entered southward of
Larsen Pt., where it is 2 mi. wide, and extends 7
mi. in a SW. direction. This feature was surveyed
by the SwedAE, 1901-4, who named it West Bay.
It was remapped during 1926-29 by DI personnel
and renamed West Cumberland Bay. The short-
ened form West Bay was simultaneously used. Fol-
lowing the SGS, 1951-52, the Br-APC proposed that
the name be altered to Cumberland West Bay and
that all other names be rejected. This change
brings together information about the whole Cum-
berland Bay in one place in indexes. Not adopted:
West Bay, West Cumberland Bay.
CUMMING, MOUNT: peak in the Executive
Committee Range, lying between Mounts Hamp-
ton and Hartigan, in Marie Byrd Land; in about
76°55’S., 127°15’W. Disc. by members of West
Base of the USAS on a flight, Dec. 15, 1940, and
named for Hugh S. Cumming, Jr., State Dept.,
member of the USAS Executive Committee. Not
adopted: Mount Winifred Cumming.
CUMMINGS COVE: cove entered between Jebsen
Pt. and Porteous Pt. on the W. side of Signy I.,
South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°41’W. Roughly
surveyed by DI personnel in 1933, and resurveyed in
1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC for E. T.
Cummings of the FIDS, radio operator at Cape
Geddes base in 1946 and at Deception I. in 1947.
CURIE ISLET: small rocky islet near the E.
end of Géologie Arch., lying midway between Derby
It. and Lion It., close N. of Astrolabe Glacier
Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°39’S., 140°03’E.
Photographed from the air by USN Operation High-
jump, 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Lio-
tard, 1949-51. Named by the FrAE under Barré,
97
1951-52, for the noted Curie family, French phys-
icists.
CURIE POINT: point which forms the NE. tip
of Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S.,
63°29’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5,
and named by him for Pierre Curie, famous French
chemist. Not adopted: Point Curie, Pointe P.
Curie [French].
CURZON ISLETS: small group of rocky islets
lying off the ice-covered cape which lies midway
between Cape Mousse and the Sentinel Its., off
Adélie Coast; in 66°46’S., 141°35’E. Disc. in Janu-
ary 1912 by Capt. J. K. Davis, captain of the AAE
exp. ship Aurora. Named by Mawson for Lord
Curzon, Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc.,
1911-14.
CUT, THE: shallow, rock-strewn channel, be-
tween Babe Islet and the W. side of the entrance
to Cobblers Cove, along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°18’W. Charted and named
in 1929 by DI personnel.
Cuverville Island: see De Rongé Island.
CUVERVILLE ISLAND: dark, rocky island lying
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen., about 1 mi. E. of
the N. part of De Rongé I.; in about 64°43’S.,
62°36’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99, who named it for J. M. A. Cavelier de
Cuverville, a vice admiral of the French Navy.
Not adopted: Cavelier de Cuverville Island.
Cuyou Bucht: see Guyou Bay.
CYRIL, MOUNT: mountain about 6,100 ft. in
el., which stands in the Commonwealth Range,
about 10 mi. SSE. of Mt. Kyffin, on the E. side of
Beardmore Gl.; in about 83°57’S., 172°55’E. Disc.
and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9.
CZEGKA, MOUNT: mountain about 7,000 ft. in
el., forming part of the E. wall of Robert Scott Gl.,
and standing SW. of Mt. Blackburn in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 86°21’S., 148°20’W. Disc.
in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party
under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for
Victor H. Czegka, USMC, who served as a member
with the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and also as member and
supply manager with the ByrdAE, 1933-35.
DAGGER PEAK: rock peak rising steeply from
sea level to about 300 ft. in el. at the W. end of
Comb Ridge, lying at the N. extremity of The Naze,
a peninsula of northern James Ross I., close S. of
the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°55’S., 57°29’W.
This area was first explored in 1902 by the SwedAE
under Nordenskj6ld. The peak was charted and
given this descriptive name by the FIDS in 1945.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Dailey Archipelago: see Dailey Islands.
DAILEY ISLANDS: group of volcanic islets lying
in the N. part of the ice shelf of McMurdo Sound
about 9 mi. NE. of Cape Chocolate, along the coast
of Victoria Land; in about 77°53’S., 165°15’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who
named this group for Fred E. Dailey, exp. carpen-
ter. Not adopted: Dailey Archipelago.
DAISY POINT: point extending seaward from
the high rocky shore on the E. side of the Bay of
Isles, South Georgia. It lies 0.5 mi. W. of Cape
Wilson, near the entrance to Beckmann Fjord; in
54°03/S., 37°11’W. The name Low Point was given
for this feature, probably by DI personnel who
charted this area in 1929. Following its survey in
1951-52, the SGS reported that this part of the
coast is high and rugged, and the point, though
relatively low by comparison, does not merit the
description “low.” The new name, recommended
by the Br-APC in 1954, is after the sealing brig
Daisy of New Bedford, Mass., which under Capt.
Benjamin D. Cleveland visited the Bay of Isles in
1912-13. Not adopted: Low Point.
DALES ISLAND: the outermost offshore island
N. of the William Scoresby Arch., rising to about
160 ft. in el. and lying about 13 mi. N. of Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°11’S., 59°46’E. Disc.
and named by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby in February 1936.
DALGLIESH BAY: bay, about 1 mi. wide and
indenting 3 mi., lying between Cape Lainez and
Cape Bongrain on the SW. side of Pourquoi Pas L.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°43’S.,
67°43’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the
FIDS and named for David G. Dalgliesh, FIDS
medical officer at Stonington I. in 1948-49, who
accompanied the 1948 sledge survey party to this
area.
DALK GLACIER: channel glacier, about 2 mi.
wide and 8 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the conti-
nental ice to the Ingrid Christensen Coast, close E.
of Larsemann Hills; in about 69°25’S., 75°57’E.
Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor.
exp. under Lars Christensen. So named by John
H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study of USN Op. Hijp.
aerial photographs taken in March 1947, because
of its close association with Dalk Islet lying close
off its terminus.
DALK ISLET: rocky islet about 0.7 mi. long,
marked by a small rock close off its N. end, lying
about 8 mi. E. of the E. end of Larsemann Hills,
close off Dalk Gl. on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in
98
about 69°23’S., 76°00’E. Charted by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken in
January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen-
sen, who applied the name Dalk6y. The generic
islet is approved because of the small size of this fea-
ture. Not adopted: Dalkoy [Norwegian].
DALLMANN, MOUNT: peak about 9,000 ft. in
el., lying about 8 mi. E. of the N. end of the Conrad
Mtns., in New Schwabenland; in about 71°48’S.,
10°10’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under
Ritscher, and named for Eduard Dallmann.
Dallman Bay: see Dallmann Bay.
Dallmann Bay: see Flandres Bay.
DALLMANN BAY: bay which lies between Bra-
bant and Anvers Islands, and is connected to De
Gerlache Str. by Schollaert Chan., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°55’W. Disc. and first roughly
charted in 1874 by the German whaler Capt.
Eduard Dallmann. It was named for Dallmann by
the Society for Polar Navigation, Hamburg, which
sponsored Dallmann’s Antarctic exploration. The
bay was later charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under
Charcot. Not adopted: Dallman Bay.
Dallman Nunatak: See Dallmann Nunatak.
DALLMANN NUNATAK: nunatak about 3 mi.
NNW. of Bruce Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks
group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°01’S.,
60°20’W. Dallmann Nunatak was first charted in
1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who
named it for Capt. Eduard Dallmann. Not
adopted: Dallman Nunatak.
DALMENY, MOUNT: the northwesternmost
peak of the Admiralty Range, standing above the
S. shore of Smith Inlet, in northern Victoria Land;
in about 71°05’S., 167°07’E. Disc. in January 1841
by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Rt. Hon.
Lord Dalmeny, then a junior Lord of the Admiralty.
DALY, CAPE: ice-covered promontory on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°31’S., 63°54’E. Disc.
and named in February 1931 by the BANZARE
under Mawson.
DAMOCLES POINT: point on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island, lying 3 mi. ESE. of the south-
ern summit of Mt. Tyrrell; in 69°39’S., 69°21’W.
A small rock exposure near sea level is surmounted
by an ice cliff 200 ft. high. First photographed
from the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill.
Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS, and
so named by them because the ice cliffs overhang-
ing the spot where geological specimens were col-
lected seemed like the sword of Damocles.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
DAMOY POINT: point which lies 0.5 mi. WNW.
of Flag Pt., the N. entrance point to the harbor of
Port Lockroy, on the W. side of Wiencke I. in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°32’W. Disc. and
named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot.
Dana Coman, Mount: see Coman, Mount.
DANCO COAST: that portion of the NW. coast
of Palmer Pen. between Cape Kater, in 63°45’S.,
59°40’W., and Cape Renard, in 65°01’S., 63°43’W.
This coast was explored in January and February
of 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, who
named it for Lt. Emile Danco, who died on the
expedition. Not adopted: Danco Land.
Danco Land: see Danco Coast.
Danebrog, Iles: see Dannebrog Islands.
DANFORTH, MOUNT: Pyramid-shaped moun-
tain rising to about 5,500 ft. in el., standing just
W. of the W. end of Watson Escarpment, on the
S. side of Albanus GI., in the Queen Maud Range;
in about 85°58’S., 148°20’W. Disc. in December
1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin
Blackburn, and named by Byrd for William H.
Danforth of the Purina Mills, St. Louis, contributor
to the expedition.
DANGER, CAPE: cape which forms the NW. tip
of Desolation I., in the South Shetland Is., in
62°26’S., 60°25’W. Charted in 1935 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II. So named because a
group of sunken rocks extends about 0.4 mi. NW.
from the cape.
DANGER ISLETS: group of islets lying 13 mi.
ESE. of Joinville I., in 63°25’S., 54°37’W. Disc.
Dec. 28, 1842 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who so
named them because, appearing amongst heavy
fragments of ice, they were almost completely con-
cealed until the ship was nearly upon them.
DANIEL, MOUNT: peak in the Prince Olav
Mtns., which rises to about 3,000 ft. in el., stand-
ing W. of Liv Gl. and NE. of Mt. Wade, in the
Queen Maud Range; in about 84°52’S., 171°10’W.
Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on ByrdAE flights to the
Queen Maud Range in November 1929, and named
by him for Robert W. Daniel of Lower Brandon, Va.,
contributor to the expedition.
DANIELL, CAPE: cape which marks the S. side
of the entrance to Tucker Inlet, on the coast of
Victoria Land; in about 72°50’S., 170°00’E. Disc.
in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross who
named it for Professor Daniell, chemist of King’s
College, Cambridge Univ., and Foreign Sec. of the
Royal Society.
99
Daniel Rex, Mount: see Rex, Mount.
DANNEBROG ISLANDS: group of islands, the
largest of which are Booth, Hovgaard and Peter-
mann Islands, which lie separated from the W.
coast of Palmer Pen. by Lemaire Chan.; in 65°06’S.,
64°15’W. Disc. by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann,
1873-74, who named them Kaiser Wilhelm Inseln.
They were later charted by the BelgAE under De
Gerlache, 1897-99, who named them Dannebrog
Islands in appreciation of support he received from
Denmark. Since the Dallmann names have been
retained for some of the individual islands, the
US-ACAN recommends the use of the name Danne-
brog Islands for the group in keeping with the
naming by De Gerlache and because of the greater
acceptance and use of this name on maps and
reports. Not adopted: Iles Danebrog [French],
Kaiser Wilhelm Inseln [German], Kaiser Wilhelm
II Islands.
Darbel Bay: see Marin Darbel Bay.
DARBOUX ISLAND: island, about 1 mi. in
diameter and about 900 ft. in el., lying about 3 mi.
W. of Cape Trois Pérez, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°25’S., 64°14’W. Disc. by the FrAB,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Jean
Gaston Darboux, noted French mathematician.
DARLING, MOUNT: highest peak of the Alle-
gheny Mtns., which lie in the E. part of the Edsel
Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°14’S.,
143°13’W. Disc. on aerial flights from the West
Base of the USAS in 1940, and named for Chester
A. Darling of Allegheny College, Meadville, Penn-
sylvania.
DARLINGTON, CAPE: ice-covered headland,
about 1,000 ft. in el., forming the S. side of the
entrance to Hilton Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 72°00’S., 60°43’W. Disc. in 1940 by the
USAS, but at that time it was thought to be an
island. Its true nature was determined in an
aerial flight by the RARE, under Ronne, in Novem-
ber 1947. Named by the USAS for Harry Darling-
ton III, member of the East Base sledging party
that explored this coast as far S. as Hilton Inlet.
Not adopted: Darlington Island.
Darlington Island: see Darlington, Cape.
DARNLEY, CAPE: cape which lies 6 mi. SE. of
Newark Bay, on the south-central coast of South
Georgia; in 54°26’S., 36°50’W. ‘The name dates
back to about 1920 and was given for E. R. Darnley
of the Colonial Office, Chairman of the Discovery
Committee, 1924-33.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
DARNLEY, CAPE: ice-covered cape forming the
W. side of the entrance to MacKenzie Bay, on
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°42’S., 69°30’E.
On Dec. 26, 1929 Sir Douglas Mawson, from the
masthead of the Discovery while in 66°57’S.,
71°57’E., saw land miraged up on the SW. horizon.
On Feb. 10, 1931 he returned in the Discovery and
was able to approach close enough to see the head-
land, naming it for E. R. Darnley, Chairman of
the Discovery Committee of the British Colonial
Office from 1923 to 1933. Not adopted: Bjerko
Head, Bjerk6 Head, Bjerkg Head, Bjerko Headland.
DARNLEY, MOUNT: mountain about 3,600 ft.
in el. in the south-central portion of Bristol I., in
the South Sandwich Is., in 59°03’S., 26°30’W.
Mount Darnley was charted in 1930 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II who named it for E. R.
Darnley.
Dart, Cape: see Flying Fish, Cape.
DART, CAPE: cape at the foot of Mt. Siple,
forming a prominent angle in the coast line of
Marie Byrd Land, at the E. side of the entrance to
Wrigley Gulf; in about 73°10’S., 123°00’W. Disc.
by the USAS, December 1940, in a flight from West
Base. Named after Justin W. Dart who, as an ex-
ecutive of the Walgreen Drug Co., of Chicago, sup-
ported the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Flying
Fish.
DARTMOUTH POINT: point which marks the
N. end of the rugged promontory separating Mo-
raine Fjord and the E. head of Cumberland East
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°27’W. The
point was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4. Named
after H.M.S. Dartmouth, a vessel used in surveying
Cumberland Bay in 1920.
DARWIN, MOUNT: mountain lying at the head,
and near the W. wall, of Beardmore Gl.; in about
85°00’S., 164°30’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the
BrAE under Shackleton, who named it for Maj.
Leonard Darwin, Pres. of the Royal Geographical
Soc., 1908-11.
DARWIN ISLET: largest of the Danger Islets,
lying 12 mi. ESE. of the E. tip of Joinville I., off the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 54°38’W.
Disc. in 1842 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named
by him for Charles Darwin, noted naturalist. Not
adopted: Darwin Island.
DARWIN MOUNTAINS: mountains about 6,200
ft. in el. in the Britannia Range rising NW. of
Barne Inlet, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in
about 79°50’S., 157°10’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named them for Maj.
Leonard Darwin.
100
DASPIT GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide,
which flows in an ENE. direction along the S. side of
Mt. Shelby to the head of Trail Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S., 65°43’W. Disc.
by members of East Base of the USAS, 1939-41.
It was photographed from the air in 1947 by the
RARE under Ronne, and charted in 1948 by the
FIDS. Named by Ronne for Capt. Lawrence R.
Daspit, USN, who assisted in obtaining Navy sup-
port for the Ronne expedition.
David, Mount: see Kirkwood, Mount.
DAVID GLACIER: glacier about 8 mi. in width
and of undetermined length, flowing E. into the
S. part of the Drygalski Ice Tongue, in Victoria
Land; in about 75°20’S., 162°45’E. Disc. in No-
vember 1908 by the Northern Party of the BrAE,
under the leadership of Prof. Sir T. W. Edgeworth
David, of Sydney Univ., for whom the feature was
named.
DAVID ISLAND: ice-covered island about 10 mi.
long and 6 mi. wide, which is marked by prominent
rock exposures along its N. and E. sides, lying off
the mouth of Reid Gl. about 3 mi. N. of Queen Mary
Coast and standing above the E. portion of Shackle-
ton Ice Shelf; in about 66°27’S., 98°42’E. Disc. in
November 1912 by the Western Base party of the
AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Prof.
Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, member of the AAK
Advisory Committee.
DAVID RANGE: range about 6 mi. W. of Masson
Range, which it parallels, in the Framnes Mtns. on
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°52’S., 62°34’E.
It extends about 10 mi. in a NNE.-SSW. direction,
with peaks rising above 3,600 ft. in el. Disc. on
Feb. 14, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who
named it for Prof. Sir T. W. Edgeworth David.
DAVIDSON, CAPE: cape which forms the S. tip
of Mackenzie Pen. and the W. side of the entrance
of Wilton Bay, on the W. side of Laurie I. in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°46’W. Charted
by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it
for J. Davidson, first mate of the exp. ship. Scotia.
DAVIDSON, MOUNT: highest summit, about
8,100 ft. in el., of the Prince Albert Mtns., lying NW.
of Granite Hbr. in Victoria Land; in about 76°46’S.,
162°08’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott,
who named it for a member of the ship’s company
of the Morning, relief ship to the expedition.
DAVIES BAY: bay about 5 mi. wide, between
Cape Kinsey and Drake Head along Oates Coast; in
about 69°15’S., 158°40’E. Disc. by members of the
Terra Nova of the BrAE, 1910-13, who explored
along Oates Coast under Lt. Harry L. L. Pennell,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
RN, in February 1911. Named for Francis E. C.
Davies, leading shipwright aboard the Terra Nova.
Not adopted: Davis Bay.
DAVIES GILBERT STRAIT: strait which lies
between Tower I. on the N. and Trinity I. and Cape
Kater on the S., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
about 63°37’S., 60°00’W. Named by a Br. exp.,
1828-31, under Foster, for Davies Gilbert, Pres. of
the Royal Soc., 1827-30, and of the committee
which formulated the objectives of the expedition.
The strait was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjéld. Not adopted: Davis Gilbert
Strait.
DAVIS, CAPE: rounded cape lying E. of Magnet
Bay near the E. end of the coast of Enderby Land,
just N. of Edward VIII Bay; in about 66°29'S.,
56°51’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on
about Jan. 12, 1930, and named for Capt. John King
Davis, Dir. of Navigation under the Commonwealth
Govt. and ship’s captain and second-in-command
of the BANZARE.
DAVIS, POINT: point about 1.2 mi. WNW. of
Point Rae on the N. side of Scotia Bay, Laurie I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°39’W.
Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce,
who named it for W. G. Davis, Dir. of the Argentine
Meteorological Service.
Davis Bay: see Davies Bay.
DAVIS BAY: bay about 10 mi. long and about 15
mi. wide at its entrance, lying between Cape Cesney
and the ice-covered coast close NE. of Lewis It.
and indenting the E. end of Clarie Coast; in about
65°55/S., 134°10’E. Disc. by the AAE under Maw-
son from Aurora in January 1912, and named by
him for Capt. John King Davis, master of the
Aurora and second-in-command of the expedition.
Davis Gilbert Strait: see Davies Gilbert Strait.
Davis Glacier: see Arthur Davis Glacier.
DAVIS GLACIER: heavily crevassed glacier,
about 6 mi. wide and of undetermined length, de-
scending from the interior upland of Victoria Land
in a NE. and E. direction to Ross Sea; in about
75°45’S., 162°45’E. First charted by the BrAH,
1907-9 under Shackleton, who named it for Capt.
John King Davis, first officer and later captain of
the exp. ship Nimrod.
DAVIS ISLETS: small group of rocky islets and
rocks, marked by a prominent islet near the sea-
ward end of the group, which lies close inside the
W. side of the entrance to Vincennes Bay, about 6
mi. ESE. of Cape Nutt, off Budd Coast; in about
101
66°45/S., 108°35’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named
by the US-ACAN for Malcolm Davis, bird curator
with the Washington (D.C.) Zoo of the Smithso-
nian Institution, who served as biologist aboard the
USAS ship North Star, 1940-41, and as ornitholo-
gist with the USN Op. Wml. parties which visited
the Highjump Arch. and Windmill Is. in January
1948.
DAVIS PENINSULA: elongated ice-covered pen-
insula, about 3 mi. wide, between Reid Gl. and Rob-
inson Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°37’S.,
98°48’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the AAE under
Mawson, who named it for Capt. John King Davis.
DAVIS SEA: an area of the sea between Shackle-
ton Ice Shelf and the West Ice Shelf, off Queen
Mary Coast and Wilhelm II Coast; in about 66°S.,
92°E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson,
who named it for Capt. John King Davis.
Dausay Island; Daussy Island: see Hope Island.
Dawson and Lambton, Mount: see Dawson-
Lambton, Mount.
DAWSON-LAMBTON, MOUNT: mountain about
8,700 ft. in el., which lies about 6 mi. S. of Mt.
Speyer in the Worcester Range, NW. of Moore Em-
bayment on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
78°52’S., 160°22’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4
under Scott, and named for the Misses Dawson-
Lambton, contributors to the expedition. Not
adopted: Mount Dawson Lambton, Mount Dawson
and Lambton.
DAWSON-LAMBTON GLACIER: heavily-broken
glacier with a seaward face about 200 ft. in el. and
40 mi. wide, flowing NW. from the high interior ice-
covered hills and reaching the sea on the Caird
Coast; in about 76°15’S., 27°30’W. Disc. in Jan-
uary 1915 by a Br. exp. under Shackleton. Named
for Miss Elizabeth Dawson-Lambton, benefactress
of the Shackleton expeditions. Not adopted: Daw-
son Lambton Glacier.
DAY, CAPE: cape forming the S. portal of Maw-
son Gl. where it becomes the Nordenskjold Ice
Tongue, on the coast of Victoria Land; in about
76°16’S., 162°37’E. First charted by the BrAH,
1907-9, under Shackleton, who named this cape
for Bernard C. Day, electrician and motor expert
with the expedition.
DAY ISLAND: island, about 6.5 mi. long and 2.5
mi. wide, lying immediately S. of The Gullet and
2 mi. N. of Wyatt I. in the N. part of Laubeuf Fjord,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°195'S.,
67°42’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
under Rymill, who used the provisional name
Middle Island for this feature. The island was re-
surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and renamed by them
for V. Adm. Sir Archibald Day, Hydrographer to the
Navy. Not adopted: Middle Island.
DAYMAN, CAPE: cape which forms the E. side of
the entrance to Yule Bay, in Victoria Land; in
about 70°40’S., 166°45’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br.
exp. under Ross, who named it for Joseph Dayman,
mate on the Erebus.
DAYNE PEAK: distinctive pyramidal peak about
2,400 ft. in el. rising immediately NE. of Cape
Errera, the SW. tip of Wiencke I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°54’S., 63°35’W. Disc. by the BelgAE,
1897-99, under De Gerlache. Named by the FrAE,
1903-5, under Charcot, for Pierre Dayné, mountain
guide and member of the expedition. Not adopted:
Mount Dayné.
DEACON, CAPE: ice-covered cape forming the
SE. tip of Kemp Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 73°17’S., 59°53’W. Probably first seen by
members of the USAS who photographed a portion
of Kemp Pen. while exploring this coast from the
air in December 1940. During 1947 the cape was
photographed from the air by members of the
RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted
it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for George
E. R. Deacon, English oceanographer and member
of the Discovery Investigations staff, 1927-39, and
now Dir. of the National Inst. of Oceanography.
DEACON HILL: conspicuous, ice-covered peak,
rising abruptly above the icecap in NW. Coronation
I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°34’S., 45°49’W.
Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II follow-
ing their survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1933, for
George E. R. Deacon.
DEACON PEAK: peak about 600 ft. in el. mark-
ing the summit of Penguin I., at the E. side of the
entrance to King George Bay, in the South Shet-
land Is., in 62°05’S., 57°56’W. Charted and named
during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II
for George E. R. Deacon.
Dead Glacier: see Konig Glacier.
DEAKIN, MOUNT: peak, about 9,100 ft. in el., in
the Commonwealth Range, marking the N. side
of Keltie Gl. at its confluence with Beardmore Gl.;
in about 84°42’S., 171°15’E. Disc. and named by
the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton.
DEAKIN BAY: wide-open bay lying W. of Cape
Freshfield along George V Coast; in about 68°25’S.,
150°30’E. The USEE, 1834-42, under Wilkes, ex-
plored this area in December 1840. The Peacock,
102
under Capt. William L. Hudson, entered what the
USEE thought was a bay, in 65°55’S., 151°18’E.,
and the bay thus explored was named for the ship
Peacock. The mainland of George V Coast was
first actually explored by the AAE, 1911-14, under
Mawson, when the Eastern Coastal party reached
as far as 150°12’E. They named the bay for Sir
Alfred Deakin, Australian Prime Minister in 1910.
Not adopted: Peacock Bay, Peacocks Bay.
De Alencar, Mount: see Alencar Peak.
DEBARQUEMENT ROCK: ice-free rock marking
the N. end of the Dumoulin Its. and the NE. end
of Géologie Arch., lying close N. of Astrolabe Glacier
Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°36’S., 140°04’E.
The Fr. exp. under D’Urville landed on a rocky islet
in this vicinity in January 1840 and gave the name
“Rocher du Débarquement.” Positive identifica-
tion of this feature has not been made, but on the
basis of aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and surveys and geological studies made
by the FrAE during the 1950-52 period, the seaward
position of Débarquement Rock is believed to cor-
relate with the feature so named by D’Urville.
DEBENHAM GLACIER: glacier which flows in
an ENE. direction into the N. part of Wilson Pied-
mont GIl., on the coast of Victoria Land; in about
77°07’S., 163°00’E. This feature was indicated on
charts of the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, and the
BrAE, under Shackleton, 1907-9. It was named
by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, for Frank
Debenham, geologist with this exp. and Dir. of the
Scott Polar Research Inst., 1925-48.
DEBENHAM ISLANDS: group of islets and rocks
lying between Millerand I. and the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S., 67°07’W. Disc. and
named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill; the
exp. base was on Barry I., in the center of the
group, during part of this time. Named for Frank
Debenham, who served as member of the BGLE
Advisory Committee.
DeBusk, Mount: see DeBusk Scarp.
DEBUSK SCARP: nearly vertical rock cliff, about
1,000 ft. in el., at the S. side of the mouth of Bing-
ham Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°23’S.,
62°57’W. This feature was photographed from the
air in 1928 by Sir Hubert Wilkins, and again in
1940 by members of the USAS who also sledge sur-
veyed along this coast. It was resighted by the
RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for
Clarence DeBusk, executive secretary of the Cham-
ber of Commerce, Beaumont, Texas, who was of as-
sistance to the RARE in the preparation for the
voyage south. Not adopted: Mount DeBusk.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
DEBUTANTE ISLAND: rocky island, about 1 mi.
long and 0.2 mi. wide, marking the largest and
southernmost of the Sgstrene Is., lying about 5 mi.
W. of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°36’S.,
74°59’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers,
from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by
the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, as a small
rock outcrop protruding above what was thought
to form part of an ice shelf. So named by John
H. Roscoe, following his 1952 compilation from USN
Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947,
because of the recent appearance of this feature
above the consolidated sea ice between Polar Record
and Polararboken Glacier Tongues. Not adopted:
Debutante.
DECAZES, POINT: southernmost point on the
island marking the SW. end of the Biscoe Is., at the
N. side of Matha Str.; in about 66°30’S., 67°29’W.
Charted and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under
Charcot. Not adopted: Decazes Point.
DECEPTION ISLAND: ring-shaped island about
8 or 9 mi. in diameter, with a narrow entrance into
a central landlocked harbor (a drowned breached
crater), lying about 6 mi. S. of Livingston I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°57’S., 60°38’W.
The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now
established international usage. Not adopted:
Teil Island.
Decousovte, Cap; Découverte, Cap de la: see Dé-
couverte, Cape.
DECOUVERTE, CAPE: low rocky cape marking
the NW. end of the large islet at the NW. end of
the Curzon Its., close off Adélie Coast; in 66°46’S.,
141°33’E. Disc. by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, who
landed on the islet on Jan. 21, 1840, and so named
because it marked the first rock outcrop observed
along this coast. The name was applied on
D’Urville’s 1840 chart to the small cape on the ice-
drowned coast immediately behind the Curzon
Islets. Roughly charted by the AAE under Maw-
son, 1911-14, who reassigned the name to the sea-
ward end of the large islet upon which D’Urville’s
group landed. This interpretation was confirmed
by the FrAE under Barré, who surveyed this coastal
area in 1951-52. Not adopted: Cap Decousovte,
Cape Decouverte, Cap de la Découverte [French],
Cape Discovery.
DE DION ISLETS: group of islets surrounded
by reefs, lying in the N. part of Marguerite Bay,
about 8 mi. SW. of Cape Alexandra, Adelaide I.; in
67°52’S., 68°43’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot, and named by him for the Marquis
de Dion, who donated three motor sledges and
103
whose De Dion-Bouton works produced equipment
for the expedition. Not adopted: De Dion Islands,
Dion Islets.
DEE ISLAND: crescent-shaped island, with a
conspicuous, sharp peak about 850 ft. in el. at its
S. end, about 2.5 mi. WNW. of Fort William, close
off the N. side of Greenwich I., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 62°25’S., 59°50’W. Charted and named
in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
DEFANT GLACIER: glacier about 2 mi. wide at
its mouth, which flows ESE. to the W. side of
Violante Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
72°32’S., 61°35’W. Disc. and photographed from
the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During
1947 the glacier was photographed from the air by
members of the RARE, who in conjunction with the
FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the
FIDS for Prof. Albert Defant, German oceanog-
rapher (Austrian born) who was Dir. of the Inst.
fiir Meereskunde (German Hydrographic Office),
1927-46.
DE GERLACHE, CAPE: cape which forms the
NE. tip of Davis Pen., on Queen Mary Coast; in
about 66°33’S., 98°55’E. Disc. in November 1912
by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it
for Lt. Adrien de Gerlache, leader of the Belgium
Antarctic Expedition 1897-99. Not adopted: Cape
Gerlache.
DE GERLACHE, MOUNT: huge tabular massif
about 4,000 ft. in el. lying on the NE. side of Larsen
Gl. about 8 mi. SSE. of Mt. Larsen, in Victoria Land;
in about 74°58’S., 162°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Lt. Adrien
de Gerlache. Not adopted: Mount Gerlache.
De Gerlache, Pointe: see De Gerlache Point.
DE GERLACHE POINT: point on the W. coast
of Anvers I. about 7 mi. NNE. of Cape Albert de
Monaco, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°35’S., 64°09’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and
named by him for Lt. Adrien de Gerlache. Not
adopted: Gerlache Point, Pointe de Gerlache
[French].
DE GERLACHE STRAIT: strait separating the
Palmer Arch. from Palmer Pen.; in about 64°30’S.,
62°20’W. The BelgAE, under Lt. Adrien de Ger-
lache, explored the strait in January and Febru-
ary 1898, naming it for the exp. ship Belgica. The
name was later changed to honor the commander
himself. Not adopted: Gerlache Strait.
De Guebriant Islets: see Guébriant Islets.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
DE HAVEN GLACIER: piedmont glacier about
15 mi. wide, formed by the confluence of small
channel glaciers which flow from the continental
ice on the E. flank of Norths Highland to the W.
side of Porpoise Bay, about 15 mi. SE. of Holmes
Gl., on Banzare Coast; in about 66°45’S., 127°45’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN
for Edmund H. De Haven, acting master on the
sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
DEIMOS RIDGE: prominent narrow rocky spur
of sandstone and shales, standing close SW. of
Phobos Ridge and Mars Glacier along the N. side
of Saturn G1., on the E. coast of Alexander I Island;
in 71°56’S., 68°40’W. The coast in this vicinity was
first seen from the air and partially photographed
by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. This ridge
was first surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who gave
it this name in association with Mars Glacier;
Deimos being the outer of two satellites of Mars.
DELAITE ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long
and 1 mi. wide, which lies midway between Cape
Anna and Cape Reclus in the north-central portion
of Wilhelmina Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in about 64°31’S., 62°03’W. Disc. by the BelgAE,
1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him
for J. Delaite, a supporter of the expedition.
DE LA MOTTE, CAPE: prominent cape lying W.
of Mertz Glacier Tongue, on George V Coast; in
about 67°00’S., 144°20’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-
14, under Mawson, who named it for C. P. de la
Motte, third officer on the Aurora, the exp. ship.
The high land behind this cape is thought to be
“Point Case,” which the USEE, 1838-42, under
Wilkes, saw from what was called “Disappointment
Bay” on Jan. 23, 1840. Not adopted: Cape de la
Motte, Point Case.
DELAY POINT: rocky point about 600 ft. in el.,
lying at the W. side of the N. end of Melba Pen.,
about 7 mi. W. of Cape Charcot, on Queen Mary
Coast; in about 66°28’S., 98°07’E. Disc. by the AAK
under Mawson, 1911-14, and so named by the East-
ern Sledge Party of the Western Base because bad
weather delayed the party near here for several
days in November 1912.
Delbert Little Glacier: see Kelsey Glacier.
Delbridge Islands: see Dellbridge Islands.
Deliverance, Cape: see Délivrance, Point.
DELIVRANCE POINT: rocky point, about 1 mi.
W. of Lumiére Peak, projecting from the SW. side
of the rugged peninsula whose seaward end is Cape
Tuxen, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°19’S.,
104
64°06’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char-
cot. So named because Charcot and two compan-
ions were rescued there, after being separated from
the exp. ship Puurquoi-Pas? for several days, while
on an exploration of this area in a small boat. Not
adopted: Cape Deliverance.
DELLBRIDGE ISLANDS: group of islets of vol-
canic origin, lying in McMurdo Sound S. of Cape
Evans, Ross I.; in about 77°40’S., 166°25’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named
them for James H. Dellbridge, second engineer with
the expedition. Not adopted: Delbridge Islands.
DELONCLE BAY: bay, about 1.5 mi. long, indent-
ing the W. coast of Palmer Pen. between Loubat and
Glandaz Points and opening on Lemaire Chan. op-
posite Booth I.; in 65°06’S., 63°53’W. Disc. by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The bay
was charted by the FrAE 1903-5, under Charcot,
and named by him for Francois Deloncle, French
diplomat.
De Loubat, Cape: see Loubat Point.
DELTA ISLAND: islet, nearly 0.5 mi. long, lying
close SE. of Lambda I. and E. of Alpha I. in the
Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°59’W.
The name Delta, derived from the fourth letter of
the Greek alphabet, was probably given by DI per-
sonnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927. The
islet was surveyed by Argentine expeditions in
1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Isla Hermelo
[Spanish].
Delta Island: see Acuna Islet.
DELUSION POINT: point which marks the E.
end of a rocky range which forms the S. wall of
Crane Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°23’S., 62°00’W. The feature was photographed
from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight of
Dec. 20, 1928. Named by the FIDS, who charted
it in 1947.
DEMARIA, MOUNT: mountain with precipitous
sides, about 1,900 ft. in el., rising immediately SE.
of Cape Tuxen, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.,
in 65°17’S., 64°05’W. Probably first sighted by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Charted by
the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named prob-
ably for the Demaria brothers, French developers
of an anastigmatic lens used by the expedition’s
photographic section. Not adopted: Demaria
Peak. :
DEMAS ICE TONGUE: conspicuous ice tongue,
extending W. from the ice shelf of Peacock Bay
into Amundsen Sea for about 30 mi. at the E. end
of Walgreen Coast; in about 72°10’S, 102°45’W.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Disc. by the USAS in flights from the Bear, Febru-
ary 1940, and named after E. J. Demas, member of
the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions, 1928-30, and
1933-35.
Demas Mountains: see Walker Mountains.
DEMAS ROCKS: group of rocks lying about 3
mi. off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen., about
2 mi. NE. of Cape Ducorps; in 63°21’S., 58°02” W.
Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and
named by him for Lt. Francois Barlatier Demas of
the exp. ship Astrolabe. The rocks were charted
by the FIDS in 1946. Not adopted: Demas Rock.
DEMAY POINT: point which forms the W. side
oi the entrance to Admiralty Bay, King George I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°12’S., 58°25’W.
This point was known to sealers as early as 1822.
It was named almost 100 years later by the FrAE,
1908-10, under Charcot.
DEMIDOV, CAPE: cape which forms the S. side
of the entrance to Wilson Hbr., on the S. coast and
near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°08’S.,
37°47’W. Disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellings-
hausen in 1819, and named for Lt. Dimitri Demi-
dov of the Vostok. Not adopted: Cape Demidow.
Demidow, Cape: see Demidov, Cape.
DEMOREST GLACIER: glacier which flows SE.
into Whirlwind Inlet, between Flint and Matthes
Glaciers, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°23’S.,
65°32’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight
of Dec. 20, 1928, and photographed from the air
by the USAS in 1940. Charted by the FIDS in 1947
and named for Max H. Demorest, American gla-
ciologist.
DENAIS COVE: cove at the N. side of the en-
trance to Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King
George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°07’S.,
58°31’W. Charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under
Charcot, and named by him for a member of the
expedition.
DENIAU ISLET: islet which lies off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen. midway between Darboux I. and
Lippmann It., and about 5 mi. W. of the entrance
to Beascochea Bay; in 65°27’S., 64°21’W. Disc. by
the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by
him for Monsieur Deniau, a donor of numerous
gifts to the’ expedition. Not adopted: Deniau
Island.
DENISON, CAPE: rocky cape in the center of the
S. shore of Commonwealth Bay, on George V
Coast; in about 67°00’S., 142°40’E. Disc. in 1912
by the AAE under Mawson who named it for Sir
424589 O-57-8
- in 63°25/S.,
105
Hugh Denison of Sydney, a patron of the expedi-
tion. This cape was the site of the Main Base,
from which the AAE mapped George V Coast.
DENMAN GLACIER: glacier about 7 to 10 mi.
wide, descending N. some 70 mi. from an el. of
4,500 ft. in a series of vast ice cascades and crevasses
and debouching into Shackleton Ice Shelf E. of
David I., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°50’S.,
99°15’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the AAE un-
der Mawson, who named. it for Lord Thomas Den-
man, Governor-General of the Commonwealth of
Australia in 1911 and a patron of the expedition.
DENNISTOUN GLACIER: glacier descending
from the ice-covered slopes of Mounts Troubridge
and Parker to the coast of northern Victoria Land;
in about 71°10’S., 168°25’E. Charted by the BrAE,
1910-13, under Scott, and named for James R.
Dennistoun who was in charge of the mules aboard
the exp. ship Terra Nova on the way to the Ant-
arctic.
DENUCE, MOUNT: rounded mountain, about
5,000 ft. in el., lying between Mounts Hulth and
Haskell on the SW. side of Cabinet Inlet, on the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°43/S., 64°12’W.
Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE in December 1947. Named by
the FIDS for Jean Denucé, Belgian polar bibliog-
rapher.
Depot Bay: see Farr Bay.
DEPOT GLACIER: well-defined valley glacier,
flanked by lateral moraines, which terminates in a
high vertical ice cliff where it discharges into the
head of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.;
597°03’W. Disc. by the SwedAE,
1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, and so named by him
because, as seen from Antarctic Sound, it appeared
to be a possible site for a depot.
DEPOT ISLAND: small, glaciated, granite island
about 2 mi. NW. of Cape Ross, off the coast of Vic-
toria Land; in about 76°43’S., 163°00’E. First
charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton and
so named by the expedition’s Magnetic Pole Party
because they depoted specimens of rocks on this
island.
DEPOT ISLET: small rocky islet, about 50 ft. in
el. and less than 0.1 mi. long, lying about 0.6 mi.
NW. of Pasteur It. near the center of the Du-
moulin Its., in the Géologie Arch., off Adélie Coast;
in 66°37’S., 140°05’E. Photographed from the air
by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE
under Liotard, 1950-51, and so named because per-
sonnel on the exp. ship Commandant Charcot es-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
tablished a depot there to support the party which
surveyed the Géologie Arch. area.
DERBY ISLET: small rocky islet near the E. end
of Géologie Arch., lying close N. of Astrolabe Gla-
cier Tongue and about 0.5 mi. SE. of Pasteur It., in
the Dumoulin Its., off Adélie Coast; in 66°38’S.,
140°05’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Lio-
tard, 1949-51, and so named because separate field
parties competed against each other for the honor
of being first to reach the islet.
DE RONGE ISLAND: high, rugged island about
5 mi. long in a NESW. direction and about half
as broad; largest island of the group which forms
the W. side of Errera Chan.; off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°43’S., 62°41’W. Disc. by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named
it for Madame de Rongé, a contributor to the ex-
pedition. Not adopted: Cuverville Island (q.v.),
Rougé Island, Rouge Island.
DESOLATION HARBOR: anchorage in the SE.
side of Desolation I., lying N. of Livingston I. in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 60°22’W. Used
as an anchorage by early sealers, this feature was
charted as Blythe Bay by Capt. George Powell on
a map published by Laurie in 1822. The anchor-
age takes its name from Desolation I., and was
charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in
1935. Not adopted: Blythe Bay (q.v.).
DESOLATION ISLAND: V-shaped island lying
in the entrance to Blythe Bay, about 5 mi. W. of
Williams Pt., Livingston I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°23’W. Disc. in January 1820 by
a Br.. exp. under Bransfield, and so named by him
because of the desolate appearance.
DESPAIR ROCKS: group of rocks about 3 mi. S.
of Melsom Rocks and some 8 mi. WSW. of Penguin
Pt., the NW. tip of Coronation I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°33’S., 46°12’W. Disc. and named
by Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, an American sealer,
and Capt. George Powell, a British sealer, during
their joint cruise in December 1821. Not adopted:
Rocks of Despair.
DETAILLE ISLET: islet which lies close off the
NW. side of Andresen I. and about 4 mi. off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen. in the N. part of Lallemand
Fjord; in about 66°55’S., 66°37’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, who named it for
Monsieur Detaille of Punta Arenas, shareholder in
the Magellan Whaling Co., who assisted Charcot
in obtaining supplies at the company’s whaling
base at Deception Island.
106
DETROIT: for names beginning thus see under
the specific part of the word. For example, for
Détroit de MacFerlane see MacFerlane, Détroit de.
(Détroit is a French word for “strait.’’)
DETROIT PLATEAU: a major interior plateau
of Palmer Pen., averaging between 5,000 and 5,500
ft. in el., whose NW. limit is marked by the S. wall
of Russel Gl., in 63°43’S., 58°40’W., and extends
some 120 mi. in a general SW. direction to a S.
limit not precisely defined, but believed to be in
about 64°50’S., 62°30’W. The plateau was seen
from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight over
Palmer Pen., Dec. 20, 1928. Wilkins named it
Detroit Aviation Society Plateau after the society
which aided in the organizing of his exp., but the
US-ACAN recommends that the shortened form of
the original name be used. The N. and E. sides
of the plateau were charted by the FIDS in 1946-47.
Not adopted: Detroit Aviation Society Plateau.
DEVIL ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, with a
low summit on each end, lying in the center of a
small bay about 1 mi. SE. of Cape Well-met, north-
ern Vega Island, S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°48’S., 57°177W. Disc. and named by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Not
adopted: Djafvulson [Swedish], Teufelsinsel [Ger-
man].
Devils Ballroom: see Devils Glacier.
DEVILS CORRIE: large and very spectacular
cirque, or corrie, midway between Olivine Pt. and
Amphibolite Pt. on the S. coast of Coronation I.,
South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°25’W. Named
by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49.
DEVILS GLACIER: a heavily crevassed area in
the S. end of the Mohn Basin, lying to the W. and
SW. of the mountain group consisting of Mounts
Wisting, Hassel, Bjaaland and Prestrud, in the
south polar plateau; its northern and lower end
lies in about 86°30’S., 167°20’W. Disc. in Novem-
ber 1911 on the journey to the South Pole by the
Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him to
describe the extremely rough sledging in that area.
Not adopted: Devils Ballroom.
DEVILS PEAK: conspicuous rocky peak, about
2,400 ft. in el., between Sunshine Gl. and Devils
Corrie on the S. side of Coronation I., South Ork-
ney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°27’W. Surveyed in 1948-49
by the FIDS, who so named it because of its
proximity to Devils Corrie.
DEVILS PUNCHBOWL: bowl-shaped cove (an
empty cirque, the floor of which is below sea level)
in the SW. corner of Granite Hbr., between Devils
Ridge and the S. side of The Flatiron, in Victoria
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Land; in about 77°01’S., 162°26’E. Charted and
named by the BrAE 1910-13, under Scott. Not
adopted: Devil’s Punch Bowl, Punch Bowl.
DEVILS RIDGE: rocky, sickle-shaped ridge,
about 800 ft. in el., extending from the S. end of
The Flatiron and forming the N. wall of New Gl.,
situated close W. of Granite Hbr. in Victoria Land;
in about 77°01’S., 162°25’E. Charted and named
by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Not adopted:
Devil’s Ridge.
DEVILS THUMB: rocky knob, about 800 ft. in
el., marking the central part of Devils Ridge, situ-
ated on the N. side of New Gl. close W. of Granite
Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about 77°01’S., 162°25’E.
Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under
Scott. Not adopted: Devil’s Thumb.
DEWDROP GLACIER: small hanging glacier,
discharging into the head of Devils Punchbowl
between The Flatiron and Devils Ridge, at the SW.
side of Granite Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about
77°01’S., 162°24’E. Charted and named by the
BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott.
DIAZ COVE: cove about 11 mi. NW. of Cape
Disappointment, near the E. end of the S. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°45’S., 36°19’W. This cove
was known to early sealers as shown by the
remains of a sealing vessel found there. It was
rediscovered in 1929 by Captain Johannesen and
named for his ship Diaz. Not adopted: Sealer
Cove.
DIBBLE GLACIER: prominent channel glacier
about 7 mi. wide and 35 mi. long, flowing NNE.
from the continental ice close W. of a broad up-
land rise in 66°20’S., and terminating in a promi-
nent tongue at the E. side of Davis Bay, on Clarie
Coast; in about 66°00’S., 134°50’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Jonas
Dibble, ships carpenter on the sloop of war Pea-
cock, and for the unsung crew members of the
USEE squadron under Wilkes, 1838-42. Dibble is
credited with leaving his sick bed and working 24
hours without relief with the other carpenters to
repair a broken rudder on the Peacock when the
ship was partially crushed in an ice bay in 151°19’E.
and forced to retire northward.
DIBBLE GLACIER TONGUE: prominent glacier
tongue about 4 mi. wide and 6 mi. long, extending
NNW. from Dibble Gl., close E. of Davis Bay, along
Clarie Goast; in about 65°50’S., 134°45’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
Jonas Dibble and the unsung crew members of the
USEE squadron under Wilkes, 1838-42.
107
Dibdins Island: see Powell Island.
DICKASON, MOUNT: mountain about 7,000 ft.
in el., lying WSW. of Mt. Melbourne at the head
of Boomerang Gl., in Victoria Land; in about
74°28’S., 163°40’E. First charted by the BrAE,
1910-13, under Scott, and named for Seaman
Harry Dickason, RN, who was with the expedition.
Dion Islets: see De Dion Islets.
DISAPPOINTMENT, CAPE: cape which forms
the S. extremity of South Georgia; in 54°53’S.,
36°07’'W. First charted and so named in 1775 by
a Br. exp. under Cook, who upon reaching this
position was greatly disappointed in realizing that
South Georgia was an island rather than a conti-
nent.
DISAPPOINTMENT, CAPE: cape about midway
along the W. side of Powell I., in the South Orkney
Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°05’W. The name was originally
applied to the S. end of Powell I. by Capt. George
Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in 1821, prob-
ably reflecting their reluctance to terminate their
eastward cruise, necessitated by exhausted provi-
sions and unfavorable winds. In recent years- the
name has been consistently used for the cape on
the W. side of the island.
DISAPPOINTMENT, CAPE: cape which marks
the tip of an ice-covered peninsula which extends
about 9 mi. from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°33’S., 61°45’W. Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE,
under Nordenskjold, and so named by him because
he encountered many difficult crevasses in ap-
proaching the cape. It was resighted and charted
by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Besvikelsens
Kap [Swedish].
Discovery, Cape: see Découverte, Cape.
DISCOVERY, MOUNT: conspicuous, isolated
voleanic cone about 9,100 ft. in el., lying at the
head of McMurdo Sound and SE. of the Koettlitz
Gl., overlooking the NW. portion of the Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 78°20’S., 165°00’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE, 1901-4 under Scott, and named for the
exp. ship Discovery.
DISCOVERY BAY: bay about 4 mi. long and
wide, indenting the NW. coast of Greenwich I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 59°43’W. This
bay has been known to sealers in the area since
about 1822. It was charted and named during
1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
DISCOVERY BLUFF: conspicuous headland,
about 1,600 ft. in el., forming the W. side of the
entrance to Avalanche Bay in Granite Hbr., Vic-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
toria Land; in about 77°00’S., 162°41’E. Disc. by
the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who referred to
this feature as Rendezvoux Bluff. It was re-
named for the ship Discovery by the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Rendezvoux Bluff.
DISCOVERY INLET: deep re-entrant extending
ESE. into Ross Ice Shelf for about 20 mi.; in about
78°20’S., 171°00’W. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, January 26, 1902, while coasting along the
front of Ross Ice Shelf in the Discovery. This
feature was last confirmed by USN Op. Wml.,
1947-48, though the configuration of such indenta-
tions is continually changing.
Discovery Island: see Guépratte Island.
DISCOVERY POINT: a point formed of glacial
moraine, marking the W. side of the entrance to
Moraine Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°29’W.
The point was first surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjold. It appears that it was named
by Discovery Investigations personnel in the period
following their surveys of 1926-31, presumably for
their organization or their ships, the Discovery or
Discovery II, which were utilized in the surveys of
South Georgia.
DISCOVERY SOUND: an E.-W. trending chan-
nel, about 0.5 mi. wide, separating Guépratte I.
from the NE. side of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°30’S., 63°01’W. The channel was disc. by a
Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, and in 1903-5
was charted by the FrAE under Charcot. During
1927 it was explored by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery who applied the name.
DISMAL ISLET: islet, about 1 mi. long and 200
ft. in el., which is mainly ice covered and is the
largest of the Faure Is., lying in Marguerite Bay
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°06’S.,
68°50’W. The Faure Is. were disc. and first
charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. The
group was visited and surveyed in 1949 by the
FIDS who so named this islet for its appearance
of extreme desolation and lifelessness.
DITTE, MOUNT: mountain, about 4,600 ft. in
el., surmounting Cape Alexandra in the SE. ex-
tremity of Adelaide I.; in 67°43’S., 68°37’W. Disc.
by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named
by him for Alfred Ditte, noted French chemist.
Not adopted: Mount A. Ditte.
DIVIDE, THE: narrow isthmus joining a small
peninsula to the SE. extremity of Coronation I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°10’W.
Charted in 1912-13 by a Nor. whaling exp. under
Sgrlle. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery IT
during their survey in 1933.
108
DIVIDE RIDGE: series of ice-topped peaks, the
highest about 2,100 ft. in el., extending in a NW.
direction for about 3 mi. from The Divide in SE.
Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
45°13’W. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and
so named by them because of its proximity to The
Divide.
DIXEY, MOUNT: mountain, about 3,500 ft. in
el., standing at the S. side of Riley Gl. and about
3.5 mi. NE. of Carse Pt., on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 70°10’S., 68°04’°W. This mountain was
first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935
by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these
photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was first sur-
veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later
named by the members of the expedition for Neville
Dixey, Chairman of Lloyd’s in 1934, who raised a
special fund at Lloyd’s as a contribution towards
the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37.
DIXSON ISLAND: ice-covered island about 10
mi. long and 5 mi. wide, rising to about 1,100 ft.
in el. at the W. side of the mouth of Ninnis Gl.,
along George V Coast; in about 68°08’S., 146°45’E.
Disc. in November 1912 by the AAE under Maw-
son, who named it for Sir Hugh Dixson, a patron
of the expedition.
Djdafvulsén: see Devil Island.
D. M. Little Glacier: see Kelsey Glacier.
Doctor Rusch Glacier: see Reusch Glacier.
DODMAN ISLAND: crescent-shaped island
about 4 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying in Grandi-
dier Chan. about 1.5 mi. W. of Jagged I. and 10 mi.
W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°57’S., 65°50’W. Probably first seen by the
FrAK, 1908-10, under Charcot. Charted and
named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill.
Dodson Island: see Dodson Peninsula.
DODSON PENINSULA: ice-covered peninsula at
the W. end of Filchner Ice Shelf, lying in front of
Orville Escarpment about 35 mi. S. of Gardner
Inlet, at the E. side of the base of Palmer Pen.; in
about 75°46’S., 62°50’W. Disc. from the air by the
RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it Dod-
son Island, in conformity with interpretation from
the air. Re-examination of the RARE photo-
graphs by Ronne revealed its peninsular nature.
Named for Robert H. T. Dodson, asst. geologist and
surveyor with the expedition. Not adopted: Dod-
son Island, Harry Dodson Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
DOGS LEG FJORD: inlet about 8 mi. long in an
E.-W. direction and 2 mi. wide, lying directly E. of
Ridge I. and opening on Bourgeois Fjord, along the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°43’S., 66°50’W. Disc.
by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and so named
because of its shape. Not adopted: Dog’s Leg
Fiord.
DOLLEMAN ISLAND: rounded, ice-covered is-
land, about 13 mi. in diameter lying about 8 mi. E.
of Cape Boggs, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
70°37’S., 60°45’W. Disc. in 1940 by members of
East Base of the USAS. Named for Heinrich Dolle-
man, tractor driver for the East Base.
Dome, The: see McLeod Hill.
DOME NUNATAK: dome-shaped nunatak, about
2,800 ft. in el., protruding above Mackay Gl., about
4 mi. WNW. of Mt. Suess, in Victoria Land; in about
77°O1’S., 162°29’E. Charted and named by the
BrAE, under Scott, 1910-13.
DOMINION RANGE: row of rugged peaks, some
over 10,000 ft. in el., flanking the S. side of Mill Gl.
and forming the polar plateau escarpment; in
about 85°40’S. ,172°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE,
under Shackleton, in December 1908 and named for
the Dominion of New Zealand, which generously
aided the expedition.
DONALD NUNATAK: nunatak about 1.5 mi. N.
of Gray Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S., 60°08’W.
Donald Nunatak was charted in 1902 by the
SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it for
Dr. C. W. Donald, ship’s doctor and naturalist on
the Active, one of the vessels of the Dundee whaling
exp., 1892-93.
Donald Woodward Mountains: see Woodward,
Mount.
Donati, Isla: see Kappa Island.
DON PEDRO CHRISTOPHERSEN, MOUNT:
smoothly-rounded, gabled peak, about 12,800 ft. in
el., standing in the Queen Maud Range and flank-
ing the S. side of Axel Heiberg Gl. at the head of
Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°35’S., 165°00’W. Disc.
in 1911 by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, who named
it for one of the chief supporters of his expedition.
DOOLETTE BAY: bay lying at the W. junction
of Ninnis Glacier Tongue with the land, along
George V. Coast; in about 67°55’S., 147°15’E. Disc.
in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it
for G. P. Doolette of Perth, a patron of the expe-
dition.
109
DOORLY, MOUNT: mountain about 3,500 ft. in
el., which stands at the N. side of the mouth of
Wright Gl. about 11 mi. WSW. of Spike Cape, in
Victoria Land; in about 77°22’S., 162°50’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named for
Lt. Gerald S. Doorly, RN, of the Morning, relief ship
to the expedition.
DORIAN BAY: cove on the NW. side of Wiencke
I., about 0.75 mi. ENE. of Damoy Pt., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°31’W. Disc. by the FrAH,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for
Monsieur Dorian, a member of the French Cham-
ber of Deputies.
DORIS BAY: small bay which is next SE. of Saint
Andrews Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°27’S., 36°09’.W. The name dates back to
about 1929 and is now well established in in-
ternational usage. Not adopted: Little Bucht
[Germany].
DORSEY ISLAND: small, rocky island lying off
the W. coast of Alexander I Island in Wilkins Str.;
in about 69°56’S., 72°00’W. Disc. in flights over
the area in 1940 by members of East Base of the
USAS. Named for Herbert G. Dorsey, Jr., of the
U.S. Weather Bureau, who served as meteorologist
at East Base and who devised a method of predict-
ing with exceptional accuracy the periods in which
weather would be suitable for flying.
DOT ISLET: tiny islet lying 0.5 mi. W. of Tern It.
in the S. part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia;
in 54°03’S., 37°21’W. First charted by Robert
Cushman Murphy in 1912-13. It was surveyed in
1929-30 by DI personnel, who probably named it
Dot Island because of its size and minute appear-
ance when represented on charts. The name Dot
Islet is approved because of the small size of the
feature. Not adopted: Dot Island.
DOUBLEFINGER PEAK: peak, about 3,500 ft. in
el., which appears to be joined to the NE. side of
Mt. Marston, in Victoria Land; in about 76°54’S.,
162°17’E. Charted and named by the BrAE,
1910-13, under Scott. A snow-filled cleft along
the SE. face of the peak separates two dark, rock
exposures, suggesting the origin of the name. Not
adopted: Double Finger Peak.
DOUBLE ISLETS: two small rocky islets, lying
close E. of the tip of Zélée Glacier Tongue, about
0.4 mi. NNW. of Triple Its., off Adélie Coast; in
about 66°45’S., 141°11’E. Photographed from the
air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted and named
by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
DOUBTFUL BAY: small, but deeply indented
bay, which lies 1.5 mi. ENE. of Smaaland Cove and
immediately W. of Rumbolds Pt. on the SE. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°52’S., 36°02’W. This bay was
charted by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12,
who named it for Walter Slossarczyk, third officer
of the exp. ship Deutschland. Later the names
Doubtful Bay and Smaaland Bay (now Smaaland
Cove, q.v.) were erroneously transposed on charts
of this area. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the
name Slossarczyk Bay is not known locally and that
this feature is best known as Doubtful Bay. Despite
the undoubted priority of Filchner’s naming, the
name Doubtful Bay is approved in order to conform
with local usage. Not adopted: Green Bay, Slo-
sarczyk Bay, Slossarczyk Bay, Smaaland Bay,
Smedland Bay.
Doubtful Bay: see Smaaland Cove.
DOUGLAS, CAPE: rocky headland between
Barne Inlet and Beaumont Bay along the W. edge
of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°00’S., 160°30’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott in December 1902,
and named for Adm. Sir Archibald Douglas, Lord
of the Admiralty, who led the Admiralty to assign
naval seamen to the expedition.
DOUGLAS BAY: an indentation in the front of
Amery Ice Shelf westward of Cape Thomas, in the
SW. part of MacKenzie Bay along Lars Christensen
Coast; in about 68°45’S., 70°30’E. Sketched from
the air, Feb. 10, 1931, by the BANZARE under
Mawson. Probably named for Air Pilot E. Douglas,
one of the aviators on the expedition.
Douglas Inlet: see New Bedford Inlet.
DOUGLAS ISLANDS: group of islands about 14
mi. NW. of Cape Daly, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in
about 67°20’S., 63°32’E. Disc. by the BANZARE,
1929-31, under Mawson. Lt. E. Douglas was one
of the air pilots who first sighted these islands,
when he explored the coast from an airplane in
December 1929.
DOUGLAS PEAK: peak about 5,000 ft. in el.,
lying about 12 mi. SSW. of Mt. Codrington, in
Enderby Land; in about 66°32’S., 52°20’E. Disc.
in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson,
and probably named for Air Pilot E. Douglas.
DOUGLAS RANGE: sharp-crested range form-
ing the steep E. escarpment of Alexander I Island,
overlooking George VI Sound from about 69°20’S.,
69°50’W. to about 70°35’S. The narrow, linear
divide of the range rises majestically to about
8,000 ft. in el., surmounted by peaks which rise to
9,800 ft. The S. end of this range was photo-
graphed by Lincoln Ellsworth, Nov. 23, 1935, on his
110
trans-Antarctic flight, and its N. end was seen
dimly by Charcot on the Pourquoi-Pas?, Jan. 21 to
23,1909. Positive discovery, however, was made in
1936 by members of the BGLE, under Rymill, who
mapped the range as a result of aerial flights and
of a sledge journey to beyond 72°S. in George VI
Sound. Named for V. Adm. Sir Percy Douglas,
chairman of the BGLE Advisory Committee, mem-
ber of the Discovery Committee from 1928 until his
death in 1939, formerly Hydrographer of the British
Navy, and Vice Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc.
As Hydrographer, Sir Percy produced the first issue
of the Antarctic Pilot in 1930.
DOUGLASS, MOUNT: ice-covered mountain with
several peaks rising to an estimated 1,500 ft. in el.,
on the SW. side of the lower part of Boyd Gl., in the
Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about
77°19’S., 145°17’W. Disc. in 1934 on aerial flights
of the ByrdAE. Named for Malcolm C. Douglass,
dog driver at West Base of the USAS, 1939-41.
DOUGLAS STRAIT: strait about 2 mi. wide be-
tween Thule and Cook Islands, in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°14’W. The existence of
this strait was first noted by a Russ. exp. under
Bellingshausen in 1820. It was charted by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II and named for V. Adm.
Sir Percy Douglas.
DOUMER ISLAND: island, about 4.5 mi. long
and 2 mi. wide, surmounted by a snow-covered
pyramidal peak about 1,700 ft. in el., lying between
the S. portions of Anvers I. and Wiencke I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°51’S., 63°35’W. First seen by
the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. It was
resighted and charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under
Charcot, who named it for Paul Doumer, Pres. of
the Chamber of Deputies and later Pres. of France.
DOVE CHANNEL: narrow channel bisecting the
Oliphant Its., trending in an EW. direction be-
tween two large islets, on the N., and the main
group of smaller islets and rocks, on the S., lying
about 0.4 mi. S. of Gourlay Pt., the SE. tip of
Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
45°36’W. The name Dove Strait dates back to
about 1930, but the generic term channel is ap-
proved because of the small size of this feature.
Not adopted: Dove Strait.
DOVERS, CAPE: prominent cape about 5 mi.
SSW. of Henderson I., on Queen Mary Coast; in
about 66°32’S.,97°01’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14,
under Mawson, and named for G. Dovers, cartog-
rapher at the expedition’s Western Base.
Dove Strait: see Dove Channel.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
DOWNSHIRE, Cape: cape about 35 mi. SSE. of
Cape Adare, in the NE. part of Victoria Land; in
about 71°45’S., 171°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br.
exp. under Ross, and named at the request of Cdr.
Francis R. M. Crozier, after the latter’s friend, the
Marquis Downshire.
DOYLE POINT: point lying on the coast of En-
derby Land about midway between Cape Batter-
bee and Cape Borley; in about 65°45’S., 54°35’E.
Disc. and named in January 1930 by the BANZARE
under Mawson. Not adopted: Stuart Doyle Point.
DRAKE HEAD: headland about 5 mi. W. of Cape
Kinsey, forming the W. side of the entrance to
Davies Bay, on Oates Coast; in about 69°12’S.,
158°35’E. Disc. by members of the Terra Nova
of the BrAE, who explored along Oates Coast un-
der Lt. Harry L. L. Pennell, RN, in February 1911.
Named for Francis R. H. Drake, meteorologist
aboard the Terra Nova.
DREIKANTER HEAD: dark, triangular head-
land, about 1,700 ft. in el., situated on the W. side
of Granite Hbr. and separated by a small glacier
from the N. side of Kar Plateau, in Victoria Land;
in about 76°54’S., 162°31’E. Charted and named
by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. The trian-
gular appearance of the feature when viewed from
the SE. suggests the name; ‘dreikantig”’ is a Ger-
man word meaning ‘‘three-edged.”” Not adopted:
Dreikanter.
DROMEDARY, MOUNT: hump-shaped moun-
tain, about 9,600 ft. in el., with two slightly ele-
vated summits, standing at the NW. side of Koet-
tlitz Gl., about 4 mi. ENE. of Mt. Kempe, on the
W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°21’S.,
163°06’E. Charted by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott, but was named by Scott’s second expedi-
tion to the area, the BrAE, 1910-13. So named be-
cause the overall appearance of the mountain sug-
gests the hump of a dromedary.
Dronning Mary Land: see Queen Mary Coast.
Dronning Maud Land: see Queen Maud Land.
Dronning Mauds Fjell: see Queen Maud Range.
Drygalski Barrier: see Drygalski Ice Tongue.
Drygalski Bay: see Drygalski Glacier.
DRYGALSKI FJORD: bay about 1 mi. wide
which recedes NW. about 7 mi., entered immedi-
ately N. of Nattriss Head along the SE coast of
South Georgia; in 54°49’S., 36°00’W. Charted by
the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner, and named
for Prof. Erich von Drygalski, leader of the Ger-
man Antarctic Expedition, 1901-3.
111
DRYGALSKI GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi.
long and 8 mi. wide, which flows in an ESE. direc-
tion through a rectangular re-entrant about 15 mi.
N. of Cape Fairweather, on the E. coast of:Palmer
Pen.; in 64°44’S., 61°00’W. Disc. in 1902 by the
SwedAE, under Nordenskjéld, and named Drygalski
Bay after Prof. Erich von Drygalski. The feature
was determined to be a glacier by the FIDS in 1947.
Not adopted: Drygalski Bay.
Drygalski Glacier Tongue; Drygalski Tongue.
see Drygalski Ice Tongue.
DRYGALSKI ICE TONGUE: an ice tongue which
is fed by the David and Larsen Glaciers and is about
25 mi. wide at its base along the coast of Vic-
toria Land, extending E. into Ross Sea for about
38 mi.; in about 75°30’S., 164°30’E. Disc. in Jan-
uary 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, who named
it for Prof. Erich von Drygalski. Not adopted:
Drygalski Barrier, Drygalski Glacier Tongue, Dry-
galski Tongue.
DRYGALSKI ISLAND: ice-capped island, about
9 mi. in diameter, with a flattened dome about 1,200
ft. in el., lying about 45 mi. off Queen Mary Coast,
NNE. of Cape Filchner; in about 65°43’S., 92°42’E.
Viewed from the continental coast in November
1912, by members of the Western Base of the AAE,
and observed more closely from the Auwrora, in
January 1914, on the homeward journey of the
exp. Thought to be “Drygalski’s High Land”
charted by Prof. Erich von Drygalski of the GerAE
in 1902, his name was given to the island.
DRYGALSKI MOUNTAINS: group of mountains
in New Schwabenland, projecting through the ice-
cap immediately N. of the edge of the polar pla-
teau in about 72°50’S., 8°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE,
1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for Prof. Erich
von Drygalski.
DRYING POINT: point on the SW. side of Borge
Bay, about 0.2 mi. NW. of Mooring Pt., on the E.
side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,
45°36’W. The name appears on a chart based
upon a 1927 survey of Borge Bay by DI personnel
on the Discovery.
Dry Valley: see Taylor Glacier Dry Valley.
DUBEAU GLACIER: channel glacier about 3
mi. wide and 9 mi. long, flowing N. from the con-
tinental ice to Knox Coast, about 6 mi. W. of Snede-
ker Gl.; in about 66°25’S., 106°08’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Earl P.
DuBeau, photo interpreter with USN Op. Wml.,
1947-48, who assisted in establishing astronomical
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
control stations along Queen Mary, Knox and Budd
Coasts.
DUBOUZET, CAPE: the NE. extremity of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°16’S., 57°02’W. Named in 1838 by a
Fr. exp. under D’Urville, who first succeeded
in outlining the N. coast of Louis Philippe Penin-
sula. Named by D’Urville for Lieutenant Du
Bouzet of the exp. ship Zélée. The approved spell-
ing form has been established by usage.
Duce Bay: see Duse Bay.
Du Chaylard, Ile: see Duchaylard Island.
DUCHAYLARD ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi.
long and 1.5 mi. wide, which lies in Grandidier
Chan. about 1.5 mi. SE. of Vieugué I. and 11 mi.
WNW. of Cape Garcia, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°43’S., 65°08’W. Disc. by the FrAE,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Mon-
sieur du Chaylard, French Minister Plenipotentiary
at Montevideo, Uruguay. The recommended spell-
ing follows that of Bongrain’s report of 1914. Not
adopted: Ile du Chaylard [French].
DUCLOZ HEAD: headland which forms the NW.
side of the entrance to Undine South Hbr. on the
S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°30’S., 36°39’W.
The headland was first charted in 1819 by a Russ.
exp. under Bellingshausen. Named by the Br—APC,
following a survey by the SGS, 1951-52, after Le
Sieur Ducloz Guyot, a passenger in the Spanish
vessel Leon, which resighted South Georgia in 1756.
DUCORPS, CAPE: prominent bulb-shaped head-
land, about 3 mi. long, joined to the coast by a
narrow isthmus, lying between Capes Roquemaurel
and Legoupil on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe
Pen.; in 63°24’S., 58°08’W. Disc. by a Fr. ‘exp.,
1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for
Louis Ducorps, a member of the exp. The cape
was re-identified and charted by the FIDS in 1946.
DUDLEY, MOUNT: mountain, more than 5,500
ft. in el., standing at the head of Neny Fjord and
bounded on the N. and E. side by Neny Trough,
on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°16’S.,
66°30’W. The W. side of this mountain was first
roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Ry-
mill. It was surveyed in entirety in 1940 by the
USAS. The feature was photographed from the
air and ground by the RARE, 1947-48, under
Ronne, who named it for Harold M. Dudley, Exec.
Sec. of the American Council of Commercial Labo-
ratories, Inc., Washington, D. C., who procured
various types of equipment and arranged finan-
cial aid for RARE.
Duemler, Cape: see Robinson, Cape.
112
DUEMLER, MOUNT: mountain, about 7,300 ft.
in el., rising SW. of the head of Anthony Gl., and
about 11 mi. W. of Mt. Bailey, inland from the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°01’S., 63°45’W. This
feature was first charted by the BGLE under Ry-
mill in 1936-37. It was photographed from the
air by the USAS, in 1940, and the RARE under
Ronne, in 1947, and recharted in 1947 by a joint
sledge party consisting of members of the RARE
and FIDS. Named by Ronne for R. F. Duemler,
vice-pres. of the Delaware, Lackawanna and West-
ern Coal Co., New York, which contributed coal to
the expedition.
Dufaure de Lajarte Islands: see Lajarte Islands.
DUFAYEL ISLAND: island lying near the center
of Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 62°09’S., 58°34’W. Charted and named
in December 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot.
Duffs Straits: see McFarlane Strait.
DU FIEF, SIERRA: mountain range with nu-
merous sharp peaks, the highest about 4,600 ft. in
el., extending in a NE.-SW. direction about 4 mi.,
in the SW. half of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°52’S., 63°28’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99;
under De Gerlache, and named by him for J. Du
Fief, at that time Gen. Sec. of the Belgian Royal
Geographical Society. Not adopted: Sierra du
Fief.
DUGDALE GLACIER: glacier descending from
the high plateau of northern Victoria Land into
Robertson Bay where it merges with Murray Gl.
NW. of Duke of York I.; in about 71°35’S., 169°56’E.
First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E.
Borchgrevink, who named it for Frank Dugdale,
Esq., of Snitterfield, Stratford-on-Avon.
DUKE ERNST BAY: bay, about 7 m. wide at the
entrance and about 10 mi. long, lying between the
shore of Luitpold Coast and the Filchner Ice Shelf;
in about 77°50’S., 35°00’W. Disc. in 1912 by the
GerAE under Filchner. Upon discovery Filchner
named the bay for Capt. Richard Vahsel of the exp.
ship Deutschland. He renamed it Herzog Ernst
Bay after large portions of the ice shelf broke away,
forming a much larger bay. , Not adopted: Hertug
Ernst Bay, Herzog Ernst Bay [German], Vahsel
Bay.
DUKE OF YORK ISLAND: mountainous island
lying in the S. part of Robertson Bay, along the N.
coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°37’S., 170°03’E.
First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E.
Borchgrevink, who named it for the Duke of York.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
DUMBBELL ISLET: low rocky islet lying about
1 mi. W. of Alamode I. in the Terra Firma Is., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°43’S., 67°35’W.
The islet was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who so
named it because of its shape.
Dumoulin, Iles; Dumoulin Islet: see Dumoulin
Rock.
DUMOULIN ISLETS: small group of rocky islets
at the NE. end of the Géologie Arch., lying about
2.5 mi. N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie
Coast; in 66°37’S., 140°04’E. A Fr. exp. under
D’Urville landed on one of these islets in 1840. The
islets were roughly charted by the AAE, 1911-14,
under Mawson, who named them after C. A. Vin-
cendon-Dumoulin of the Fr. exp., who conducted
observations on terrestrial magnetism in that local-
ity. The group was photographed from the air by
USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and recharted by the FrAE
under Liotard, 1940-51.
DUMOULIN ROCK: rock about 1.5 mi. N. of Cape
Leguillou, the N. tip of Tower I., lying in Bransfield
Str. about 22 mi. W. of Cape Roquemaurel, Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°30’S., 59°50’W. The Fr. exp.
under D’Urville, 1837-40, applied the name Iles Du-
moulin to what he charted as a small group of islets
in this area, but in recent years usage has restricted
the name Dumoulin to the single feature described.
The name Dumoulin Rock is recommended because
of its small size and to avoid confusion with the
Dumoulin Islets off Adélie Coast. Named for C. A.
Vincendon-Dumoulin, hydrographer with D’Ur-
ville’s expedition. Not adopted: Dumoulin Islet,
Iles Dumoulin [French].
DUMOUTIER, CAPE: point which forms the S.
tip of Tower I., lying in Bransfield Str. about 23 mi.
WSW. of Cape Roquemaurel, Louis Philippe Pen.;
in 63°35’S., 59°50’W. Named by the Fr. exp.,
1837-40, under D’Urville, for Pierre Dumoutier, a
member of the expedition.
DUNCAN MOUNTAINS: group of ragged foot-
hills rising to peaks about 4,800 ft. in el. and lying
just E. of the mouth of Liv GL. fronting on Ross Ice
Shelf for a distance of about 18 mi.; centering in
about 85°S., 166°W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in No-
vember 1929. Named by Byrd for James Duncan,
Manager of Tapley, Ltd., shipping agents for the
Byrd expedition at Dunedin, New Zealand. Not
adopted: James Duncan Mountains.
DUNDAS, CAPE: easternmost point of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°24’W.
Sighted on Jan. 12, 1823 by a Br. sealing exp. under
Weddell, who named it in honor of the illustrious
Dundas family.
113
DUNDEE ISLAND: ice-covered island lying E. of
the NE. tip of Palmer Pen. and S. of Joinville 1.;
in 63°30’S., 55°55’W. Disc. and named on Jan. 8,
1893, by Capt. Thomas Robertson of the Active for
the home port, Dundee, Scotland, from whence the
ship sailed in company with three other vessels in
search of whales.
DUNLOP, CAPE: rocky headland about 13 mi.
SSE. of Cape Roberts, on the E. coast of Victoria
Land; in about 77°12’S., 163°25’E. First charted by
the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named
this feature Rocky Point. It has since taken its
name from Dunlop Island, situated just off this
point and named for H. J. L. Dunlop, chief engineer
of the exp. ship Nimrod. Not adopted: Dunlop
Point, Rocky Point.
DUNLOP ISLAND: triangular-shaped island,
about 1 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, which lies along
the Wilson Piedmont Gl. of Victoria Land, close
NE. of Cape Dunlop; in about 77°12’S., 163°27’E.
First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackle-
ton, who named it for H. J. L. Dunlop, chief engi-
neer of the exp. ship Nimrod. Not adopted: Ter-
race Island.
DURHAM, MOUNT: small mountain about 1,800
ft. in el., which forms a N. projection of the Tapley
Mtns., in the Queen Maud Range, standing at the
junction of Robert Scott and Leverett Glaciers with
the head of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°32’S.,
151°15’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Blackburn, and named for
Durham, N.H., the seat of the University of New
Hampshire and home of Stuart D. L. Paine, a mem-
ber of that party.
DURHAM POINT: the northernmost exposed
rock outcrop of Mt. Durham, lying at about 1,100
ft. in el. at the NW. end of the Tapley Mtns., at the
junction of Robert Scott and Leverett Glaciers with
the head of the Ross Ice Shelf, in the Queen Maud
Range; in about 85°31’S., 151°15’W. Disc. in De-
cember 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under
Quin Blackburn, and so named because of its close
association with Mt. Durham.
DURNFORD BLUFF: rounded bluff about 7,020
ft. in el., standing behind Cape Douglas on the W.
side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°56’S., 159°30’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who
named it for Adm. Sir John Durnford, a Junior
Naval Lord, 1901-4.
DUROCH ISLETS: group of islets and rocks
which extend over an area of about 3 mi. centering
about 1 mi. NW. of Cape Legoupil, off the NW.
coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°19’S., 57°53’W.
Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, who
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
named features within the group Duroch Rock and
Coupvent Rock. The FIDS, who charted the islets
in 1946, found that the group could not satisfac-
torily be divided into two parts and that individual
islet names were unnecessary. The present de-
scription is in accord with the FIDS that the name
Duroch include the entire group of islets. Named
for Ensign Joseph Duroch of D’Urville’s ship, the
Astrolabe. Not adopted: Duroch Rock, Durock
Rock.
Duroch Rock; Durock Rock: see Duroch Islets.
D’URSEL, CAPE: cape which marks the S. side
of the entrance to Buls Bay, which indents the
center of the E. coast of Brabant I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°21’S., 62°08’W. Disc. by the BelgAE,
1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him
for Count Hippolyte d’Ursel, a supporter of the
expedition. Not adopted: Cape d’Ursel.
D’URVILLE, MOUNT: mountain about 3,500 ft.
in el., which lies about 7 mi. S. of Cape Ducorps and
some 20 mi. ENE. of Cape Roquemaurel, on the
NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°31’S.,
58°11’W. Disc. by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, and named
for the exp. leader, Capt. (later Adm.) Dumont
D’Urville. Not adopted: Mount d’Urville.
D’URVILLE ISLAND: northernmost island of
the Joinville I. group, about 13 mi. long, lying
immediately N. of Joinville I., from which it is
separated by Larsen Chan.; in 63°05’S., 56°20’W.
Charted in 1902 by the SwedAE under Norden-
skjold, who named it after Capt. Dumont D’Urville,
French explorer who disc. land in the Joinville I.
group.
D’URVILLE MONUMENT: conspicuous conical
summit about 1,900 ft. in el., at the SW. end of
Joinville I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°25’S., 56°18’W. Disc. by a Br. exp., 1839-43,
under Ross, and named by him for Capt. Dumont
D’Urville. Not adopted: d’Urville Monument,
D’Urville’s Monument.
D’URVILLE WALL: great glacier-cut wall of
granite several thousand feet high, which forms
the N. wall of David G1., in Victoria Land; in about
75°18’/S., 162°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton, who named it for Capt. Dumont
D’Urville.
DUSE, MOUNT: conspicuous mountain, about
1,700 ft. in el., surmounting King Edward Pt. on
the W. side of Cumberland East Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°29’W. Charted in 1902 by
Lt. Samuel A. Duse, cartographer of the SwedAE,
1901-4, for whom it is named.
114
DUSE BAY: bay indenting the SE. coast of Louis
Philippe Pen. between View Pt. and the SW. end
of Tabarin Pen.; in 63°35’S., 57°15’W. Disc. by a
party under J. Gunnar Andersson, of the SwedAE,
1901-4. Named by Nordenskjold, leader of the
SwedAE, for Lt. Samuel A. Duse. Not adopted:
Duce Bay, Duses Bukt [Swedish].
DUSEBERG, CAPE: cape surmounted by a con-
spicuous rocky cone, about 1,500 ft. in el., lying
at the SW. side of Mt. Scott, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in about 65°11’S., 64°08’W. Disc.
and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Ger-
lache.
Duses Bukt: see Duse Bay.
DUSTIN ISLAND: the larger and more southern
of the two Fletcher Is., lying near the W. end of
Bellingshausen Sea, about 35 mi. ESE. of Cape
Palmer, off Eights Coast; in about 172°05’S.,
95°05’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the
Bear on Feb. 27, 1940. Named by R. Adm. Byrd
for Frederick G. Dustin, member of the ByrdAE,
1933-35, and mechanic with the USAS, 1939-41.
DUTHOIT POINT: point which forms the SE.
tip of Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°18’S., 58°50’W. The name is used on a chart
based upon a 1935 survey of these islands by DI
personnel on the Discovery II.
DYER PLATEAU: broad upland with elevations
ranging between 6,500 and 9,000 ft., bounded on
the W. by George VI Sound, on the E. by Mt.
Wakefield, the Eternity Mtns. and Mt. Andrew
Jackson, on the N. by Fleming Gl., and with a
southern boundary not as yet determined; center-
ing in about 70°45’S., 65°30’W. The plateau was
explored on land and photographed, from the air
by the USAS, 1939-41, and named for J. Glenn
Dyer, surveyor with the then General Land Office,
Dept. of Interior, and leader of the USAS party
which sledged from the mouth of Fleming Gl. SW.
across the plateau to the Eternity Mountains.
DYNAMITE ISLET: small, low, rocky islet in
Back Bay, lying 0.1 mi. E. of Stonington I., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W.
First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41, who referred
to it as Petrel Island, a name not approved because
it duplicates an existing name in the Antarctic.
The name Dynamite Islet was proposed by Finn
Ronne, leader of RARE, 1947-48. In 1947 it was
necessary to dynamite a passage for the Port of
Beaumont, Texas through the ice to the E. of this
islet. Not adopted: Petrel Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
EADIE ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, which
lies between Aspland and O’Brien Islands, in the
South Shetland Is.; in 61°31’S., 55°57’W. The
island was charted in February 1821 by a Russ.
exp. under Bellingshausen. He left it unnamed
but gave the name “Ostrova Tri Brata” (Three
Brothers Islands) for the present Aspland, Eadie
and O’Brien Islands. Eadie Island was named by
Lt. L. C. Hill, RNR, captain of the Discovery II,
which engaged in survey work in the area in 1936-
37, for the dockyard manager of the Melbourne
Harbour Trust of Williamstown, Australia.
EAGLE COVE: small cove immediately W. of
Seal Pt. in the E. portion of Hope Bay, at the NE.
end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 57°00’W. Disc.
by J. Gunnar Andersson’s party of the SwedAE,
1901-4, who wintered at Hope Bay in 1903. Named
by the FIDS after the ship Eagle, which partici-
pated in the establishment of the FIDS base at
Hope Bay in 1945.
EAGLE ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long and 4
mi. wide, with an el. of 1,800 ft. on the NE. side.
It is the largest island in the archipelago which
lies between Louis Philippe Pen. and Vega I., in
63°40’S., 57°29’W. Probably first seen by a party
under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4.
Eagle Island was charted in 1945 by the FIDS and
named after the ship Eagle.
Easson, Cape: see Little, Cape.
EAST BALCH GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi.
long, lying SW. of East Gould Gl. on Palmer Pen.
and flowing SE. into Mill Inlet; in 66°51’S.,
64°45’W. This glacier together with West Balch
Gl., to the W., fills a transverse depression across
Palmer Pen. It was charted by the FIDS and
photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947.
Named by FIDS, like its counterpart, for Edwin
Swift Balch, American Antarctic historian. Not
adopted: Martin Glacier.
EAST BAY: bay, about 0.5 mi. wide and indent-
ing 0.25 mi., lying east of South Bay in Prince Olav
Hbr., South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. The
name, which is descriptive of its position, was
given -by a Br. exp. under Shackleton, which
visited South Georgia in 1921-22.
East Bay; East Cumberland Bay: see Cumber-
land East Bay.
EAST CAPE: cape about 1 mi. E. of Cape Ben-
nett on the NE. coast of Coronation I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°13’W. First explored
by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Pal-
115
mer in December 1821, and roughly charted during
1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling cap-
tain. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II
who charted the South Orkney Is. in 1933. It is
the easternmost cape on the N. coast of Coronation
Island.
East Fork: see Ferrar Glacier.
EAST GOULD GLACIER: glacier, about 13 mi.
long, lying W. of Aagaard Gl. and flowing SE. into
Mill Inlet on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
66°47’S., 64°38’W. This glacier together with West
Gould Gl., to the W., fills a transverse depression
across Palmer Pen. It was charted by the FIDS
and photographed from the air by the RARE in
1947. Named by FIDS, like its counterpart, for
Lt. Cdr. Rupert T. Gould, British polar historian
and cartographer. Not adopted: Shelby Glacier.
EAST MELCHIOR ISLANDS: a group of small
ice-covered islands and rocks which lie E. of The
Sound in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in
64°19’S., 62°55’W. The islands W. of The Sound
are called West Melchior Islands. The name was
probably given by DI personnel who roughiy
charted these islands in 1927. The islands were
surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943
and 1948.
EAST POINT: bluff forming the E. end of Deso-
lation I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S.,
60°21’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on
the Discovery II in 1935.
EAST RUSSELL GLACIER: glacier, about 6 mi.
long and 3 mi. wide, which lies at the N. end of
Detroit Plateau and flows from Mt. Canicula east-
ward into Prince Gustav Channel on the E. side
of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°44’S., 58°17’W. This
glacier together with West Russell Glacier, which
flows westward into Bone Cove on the W. side of
Louis Philippe Pen., form a through glacier across
the N. part of Palmer Pen. It was first surveyed
in 1946 by the FIDS. Named by the Br-APC for
V. I. Russell, surveyor and leader of the FIDS base
at Hope Bay in 1946.
EAST SKERRY: small group of islets and rocks,
forming the E. part of Skrap Skerries, about 2.3
mi. NW. of Cape George, off the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°19’W. The name was
applied in the period 1926-30, by DI personnel who
charted these islets. Not’ adopted: East Skrap-
skjar.
East Skrapskjar: see East Skerry.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
EAST STACK: rock outcrop, about 300 ft. in el.,
on the E. side of an ice-covered promontory on
Kemp Coast that lies about 25 mi. SE. of the
entrance to Edward VIII Bay; in about 67°04’S.,
58°15’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the
William Scoresby, February 1936. Not adopted:
Austskotet [Norwegian].
Ebba Glacier: see Liotard Glacier.
EBONY WALL: dark, nearly vertical rock wall,
about 1,000 ft. in el., standing at the head of a
large glacier which flows northward along the E.
side of the Ivory Pinnacles. The wall is about 2
mi. long and forms a part of the W. escarpment of
Detroit Plateau near the base of Louis Philippe
Pen.; in 63°53’S., 59°04’W. Charted in 1948 by the
FIDS who gave this descriptive name.
ECHO MOUNTAIN: conspicuous mountain,
about 2,600 ft. in el., standing on the W. side of
Laws Gl., about 2.7 mi. NNW. of Cape Vik, Corona-
tion I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 45°42’W.
Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named
by them because of the remarkable echoing noted
in this part of Laws Glacier.
ECHO PASS: pass, about 1,100 ft. in el., lying 1.5
mi. SW. of Grytviken, South Georgia, in the chain
of mountains which extend SW. from Mt. Hodges;
in 54°17’S., 36°33’W. The pass provides a ski
route from the whaling station at Grytviken to
the head of Cumberland West Bay. The name is
used on the chart of a Ger. exp., 1928-29, under
Kohl-Larsen, who states that the name was already
in use by whalers. Not adopted: Echopass, Echo-
Pass.
EDDYSTONE ROCKS: chain of rocks extending
in a NE.-SW. direction for about 3 mi., lying about
5 mi. W. of Start Pt., Livingston I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°33’S., 61°23’W. The name
dates back to about 1822 and is now established
international usage. Not adopted: Eddystone.
EDEN GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long,
which flows in a southerly direction into the head
of Cabinet Inlet, close NW. of Lyttelton Ridge, on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°15’S., 63°14’W.
Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for
Rt. Hon. Robert Anthony Eden, M.P., then British
Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs and member
of the War Cabinet.
EDGELL, MOUNT: mountain about 5,500 ft. in
el., surmounting Cape Jeremy, the E. side of the
N. entrance to George VI Sound, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 69°26’S., 68°16’W. Disc. by
116
the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Seen from a
great distance and thought to be an island, it was
named Ile Gordon Bennett for James Gordon Ben-
nett, 1841-1918, of the New York Herald, who gave
financial aid to the expedition. The BGLE under
Rymill, surveying this area in 1936-37 and finding
no island, applied the name Mount Edgell to the
feature now recognized as Charcot’s Ile Gordon
Bennett. The name Mount Edgell, after Sir John
Augustine Edgell, Hydrographer of the British
Navy, 1932-45, has since become established
through international usage. Not adopted: [le
Gordon Bennett [French].
EDGELL BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. long and wide
indenting the NE. side of Nelson I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°15’S., 58°57’W. This bay ap-
pears in rough outline on Powell’s chart of the
South Shetland Is. published in 1822. It was
charted during 1934-35 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II, who named it for V. Adm. Sir John
Augustine Edgell.
EDISTO CHANNEL: channel, filled in January
1948 by Edisto Ice Tongue at its S. end, which ex-
tends in a NE.-SW. direction between the Taylor
Its. and the NW. islands of the Highjump Arch., on
the W. and the Bunger Hills, Thomas I., and the
remaining islands in the Highjump Arch. on the E.,
lying off the W. end of Knox Coast; in about
66°05’S., 100°48’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named
by the US-ACAN for the U.S.S. Edisto, one of the
two icebreakers of USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, which
assisted in establishing astronomical control sta-
tions along Wilhelm II, Queen Mary, Knox and
Budd Coasts.
EDISTO ICE TONGUE: an ice tongue about 5
mi. wide, forming an extension of Apfel Gl. and
part of the main flow of Scott Gl., lying at the
W. and NW. sides of the Bunger Hills and terminat-
ing in Edisto Chan, against the W. side of Thomas
I., off the W. end of Knox Coast; in about 66°10’S.,
100°40’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the
US-ACAN because of its close association with
Edisto Channel.
EDISTO ROCK: low rock 1.2 mi. SW. of the W.
tip of Neny I., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°13’S., 67°08’W. Sur-
veyed in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for the
U.S.S. Edisto, icebreaker with USN Op. Wml., which
visited Marguerite Bay in February 1948 and as-
sisted in the relief of the RARE and FIDS parties
on Stonington Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
EDITH RONNE LAND: that portion of Ant-
arctica extending from the base of Palmer Pen.
southeastward to Coats Land. Disc. by the RARE,
1947-48, under Cdr. Finn Ronne, USNR, in the
flight to the base of Palmer Pen. and along Filchner
Ice Shelf. Named for Edith Ronne, wife of Cdr.
Ronne, who made important contributions to the
planning, organization, and operation of the exp.,
who was the recorder of the exp., and who served as
observer at the base while the exp. was in the field.
EDRED, MOUNT: prominent ice-covered moun-
tain, about 7,200 ft. in el., standing about 10 mi.
inland from George VI Sound and marking the S.
limit of the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island;
in 70°35’S., 69°00’W. This mountain was first pho-
tographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lin-
coln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photo-
graphs by W.L.G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and was resur-
veyed in 1949 by the FIDS. Named by FIDS after
Edred, Saxon king of England, 946-955.
Edsel Ford Mountains: see Edsel Ford Ranges.
EDSEL FORD RANGES: the mountain groups
and ranges lying E. of Sulzberger Bay and Paul
Block Bay in the NW. part of Marie Byrd Land;
the known mountains in this group center in about
77°00’S., 145°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, Dec. 5,
1929, and named by Byrd for Edsel Ford of the Ford
Motor Co., who helped finance the expedition. Not
adopted: Edsel Ford Mountains, Edsel Ford Range,
Ford Range.
Edvind Astrup, Cap: see Astrup, Cape.
EDWARD, MOUNT: highest summit in the
Sweeney Mtns., lying in the center of the group
which rises above the Joerg Plateau; in about
75°48’S., 67°40’'W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48,
under Ronne, who named it for Cdr. Edward C.
Sweeney, USNR, a contributor to the expedition.
Edward Cove: see King Edward Cove.
EDWARD VIII BAY: bay about 12 mi. wide at
its entrance, lying between Kemp Coast and En-
derby Land; in about 66°50’S., 57°20’E. Disc. in
1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and
named for Edward VIII, King of England. Not
adopted: King Edward VIII Gulf.
EDWARD VII PENINSULA: peninsula extending
NW. from Marie Byrd Land into Ross Sea between
Sulzberger Bay and the NE. corner of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 77°45’S., 156°W. Disc. on Jan 30,
1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, who named it
King Edward VII Land for the King of England.
Its peninsular character was determined by ex-
117
ploration conducted by the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and
the USAS, 1939-41. Not adopted: King Edward
VII Land, King Edward VII Peninsula, Kong Ed-
ward VII Land [Norwegian], Konig Edward VII
Land [German].
Edwards Point: see King Edward Point.
EDWARDS POINT: point which marks the S.
end of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°28’S., 59°30’W. Charted in 1935 by DI person-
nel on the Discovery II, but the name appears to be
first used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon
this survey.
E. Fournier, Baie: see Fournier Bay.
EGBERT, MOUNT: mainly ice-covered moun-
tain, about 9,500 ft. in el., standing 8 mi. SSE. of
Mt. Stephenson in the Douglas Range of Alexander
I Island; in 69°57’S., 69°37’W. Possibly first seen
in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, but not recog-
nized as a part of Alexander IIsland. Surveyed in
1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in
1948 by the FIDS, who named the mountain after
Egbert, Saxon king of England, 802-839.
EGEBERG GLACIER: glacier which lies between
Dugdale and Scott Keltie Glaciers and descends
steeply into the W. part of Robertson Bay; in
northern Victoria Land; in about 71°33’S., 169°52’E.
First charted by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E.
Borchgrevink, who named it for Consul Westye
Egeberg, of Christiania (now Oslo), Norway. Not
adopted: Westye Egeberg Glacier.
EGERTON, MOUNT: peak about 7,660 ft. in el.,
stands about 10 mi. S. of Mt. Hamilton and about
25 mi. WNW. of Cape Douglas, on the W. side of
Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°50’S., 158°25’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named
it for Adm. Sir George le Clerc Egerton, a member
of the Arctic Expedition 1875-76, and one of Scott’s
advisers for the BrNAE.
EGG ISLAND: circular island about 1.5 mi. in
diameter and about 1,500 ft. in el., lying 1 mi. W.
of Tail I. in the NE. part of Prince Gustav Chan.;
in 63°41’S., 57°42’W. Probably first seen by a
party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE,
1901-4. It was charted in 1945 by the FIDS, who
named it because of its relative position to Tail,
Eagle and Beak Islands.
EFielson, Cape: see Boggs, Cape.
EIELSON PENINSULA: rugged, mainly snow-
covered peninsula, about 20 mi. long in an E.-W.
direction and averaging about 10 mi. wide, lying
between Smith Inlet and Lehrke Inlet on the E.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°35’S., 61°45’W. The
rocky N. wall of this peninsula is probably the fea-
ture which, on his flight on Dec. 20, 1928, Sir Hubert
Wilkins sighted and named ‘“‘Cape Eielson” from
a position above Stefansson Str. (Wilkins gave
the name to the farthest S. rock outcrop seen from
this position.) This rock wall is conspicuous in
the aerial photographs of the peninsula taken by
members of the USAS in 1940 from an aerial posi-
tion at the N. side of Stefansson Strait. The pen-
insula is named for Carl B. Hielson, pilot on Wil-
kins’ flight of 1928.
Eigg Rock: see Nigg Rock.
EIGHTS COAST: that portion of the coast of
Antarctica along the S. shore of Bellingshausen
Sea, extending from about 88°00’W., to Cape Fly-
ing Fish, in about 100°50’W. Named by the US-—
SCAN for James Eights of Albany, N. Y., geologist
on the Annawan in 1830, who carried on geologic
investigations in the South Shetland Is., and who
cruised westward on the Annawan, in company
with the Penguin, to 103°W. Eights, the earliest
American scientist in the Antarctic, discovered the
first known fossils in the Antarctic region, a tree
section, in the South Shetland Islands. As a re-
sult of these investigations Eights, in 1833, pub-
lished in the Transactions of the Albany Institute
(Vol. 2), what have proved to be remarkably ac-
curate observations and conclusions on the natural
phenomena of the region. Not adopted: Robert
English Coast (western part), Walgreen Coast
(eastern part).
Eights Peninsula: see Thurston Peninsula.
EILLIUM ISLAND: small island about 1.2 mi.
NW. of Route Pt., off the NW. tip of Laurie I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°51’W. Prob-
ably first seen by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in 1821.
It was charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Dr.
William S. Bruce, who named it for his son Eillium.
Not adopted: Eillum Island.
Eillum Island: see Eillium Island.
Einstodingane: see Stanton Group.
EKBLAW, MOUNT: easternmost mountain of the
Clark Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges
of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°18’S., 141°40’W.
Disc. on aerial flights from the West Base of the
USAS in 1940 and named for Prof. W. E. Ekblaw,
Prof. of Geography at Clark Univ. and a member of
the Crocker Land Expedition in the Arctic,
1913-17.
118
EKELOF POINT: high rocky point which lies 5
mi. SW. of Cape Gage and marks the N. side of
the entrance to Markham Bay on the E. coast of
James Ross I.; in 64°14’S.,57°12’W. First seen and
surveyed by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold,
1901-4, who named it Cape Ekelof after Dr. Eric
Ekelof, medical officer of the expedition. It was
surveyed by the FIDS in 1953. Point is considered
a more suitable descriptive term for this feature
than cape. Not adopted: Cape Ekelof, Cape
Ekel6f.
EKLUND ISLANDS: group of islands which rise
through the ice near the SW. end of George VI
Sound; in 73°16’S., 71°45’W. The largest island,
about 5 mi. in extent and 1,300 ft. in el., was disc.
in December 1940 by Finn Ronne and Carl R.
Eklund of the USAS during their 1,097-mile sledge
journey S. from Stonington I. to the SW. part of
George VI Sound and return. At that time this
large island, named by Ronne for Eklund, ornithol-
ogist and assistant biologist of the exp., was the
only land protruding above an area of hummocky
ice. V. E. Fuchs and R. J. Adie of the FIDS
sledged to the SW. part of George VI Sound in
1949, at which time, because of a recession of the
ice in the sound, they were able to determine that
the island disc. by Ronne and Eklund is the largest
of a group of mainly ice-covered islands. On the
basis of original discovery, the US-ACAN recom-
mends that the name Eklund be applied to the
island group rather than the single island disc.
by Ronne and Eklund.
ELAND MOUNTAINS: range of mountains
which rise to above 8,000 ft. in el. and extend about
20 mi. in a NE._SW. direction along the S. side of
Clifford Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
70°35’S., 63°10’W. These mountains were disc.
in 1936 by the BGLE, and they appear in aerial
photographs taken by the USAS in September 1940.
During 1947 the range was photographed from the
air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction
with the FIDS charted it from the ground. The
name Eland, Lady Clifford’s maiden name, was
given by Sir Miles Clifford, Gov. of the Falkland
Islands, at the request of members of the FIDS
staff.
Elefanten-Bucht: see Elephant Bay.
Elefant Oya: see Elephant Island.
ELEPHANT BAY: small circular bay lying mid-
way between Cape Demidov and.Klutschak Pt.
along the S. coast and near the W. end of South
Georgia; in 54°09’S., 37°44’W. The name, which
was probably applied by early sealers at South
Georgia, was recorded on the chart of the Ger. exp.
under Kohl-Larsen, 1928-29, and the chart by DI
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
personnel who mapped South Georgia in this pe-
riod. Not adopted: Elefanten-Bucht [German].
Elephant Bay Islands: see Anvil Stacks.
ELEPHANT FLATS: a tidal inlet in the inner,
southwestern corner of Borge Bay, Signy I., South
Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°37’W. It is enclosed by
an old moraine whith dries at low water, leaving
a lagoon with gently sloping mud banks. Surveyed
in 1947 by the FIDS. So named by the Br-APC be-
cause elephant seals frequent the mud flats.
ELEPHANT ISLAND: island about 28 mi. long
and about 15 mi. wide, lying in the E. part of the
South Shetland Is.; in about 61°10’S., 55°14’W.
The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now
established international usage. Not adopted:
Barrows Isle, Elefant Oya [Norwegian], Mordrins
Island.
ELEPHANT LAGOON: lagoon, about 0.3 mi.
long, situated close S. of Cook Bay to which it is
connected by Carl Passage, on the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°08’W. Probably named by
DI personnel who charted the area during the pe-
riod 1926-30.
ELEPHANT POINT: point which marks the S.
end of the peninsula separating False and South
Bays, on the S. coast of Livingston I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°43’S., 60°27’W. The name dates
back to at least 1930 and is now established in in-
ternational usage.
Elisabeth, Mount: see Elizabeth, Mount.
ELIZABETH, MOUNT: mountain about 10,760
ft. in el. in the Queen Alexandra Range, rising SW.
of Mt. Anne and Socks Gl. and W. of Beardmore Gl.,
at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°58’S.,
168°10’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton. Not adopted: Mount Elisabeth.
ELIZA CONE: a pierced rock about 220 ft. in el.,
lying about 1 mi. W. of Cape McNab, the S. tip of
Buckle I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°49’S.,
163°10’E. Located adjacent to Scott Cone, the two
features appear to have been named after John
Balleny’s schooner, the Eliza Scott, in which he
disc. the Balleny Is. in February 1839.
ELLEFSEN HARBOR: harbor lying at the S. end
of Powell I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
45°03’W. Disc. in the course of the joint cruise
by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer
in December 1821. The name first appears on
Powell’s chart published in 1822. Not adopted:
Ellessen Harbour.
Ellessen Harbour: see Ellefsen Harbor.
119
ELLIOT, MOUNT: prominent peak lying NW. of
the Admiralty Range and S. of Yule Bay, in north-
ern Victoria Land; in about 70°50’S., 166°35’E.
Disc. in February 1841 by a Br. exp. under, Ross,
who named it for R. Adm. the Hon. George Elliot,
commander-in-chief at the Cape of Good Hope
station. Not adopted: Mount Elliott.
ELLIOTT, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the
seaward extremity of Knox Coast, lying about 5 mi.
E. of the E. flank of Tracy Gl.; in about 65°57’S.,
102°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by
the US-ACAN for J. L. Elliott, chaplain on the sloop
of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
Elliott, Mount: see Elliot, Mount.
ELLIOTT, MOUNT: conspicuous mountain,
about 4,200 ft. in el., with a few small rock expo-
sures and ice-free cliffs on the SE. side, about 16
mi. NW. of Cape Sobral, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 64°25’S., 60°06’W. Charted in 1947 by
the FIDS and named for F. K. Elliott, leader of the
FIDS base at Hope Bay in 1947-48.
ELLIOTT GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi.
wide and 3 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the conti-
nental ice to Budd Coast, midway between Cape
Hammersly and Cape Waldron; in about 66°05’S.,
115°50’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the
US-ACAN for Samuel Elliott, midshipman on the
sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
ELLIS FJORD: narrow inlet about 18 mi. long,
indenting the highest portion of the Vestfold Hills,
between Breidnes Pen. and a small peninsula to
the S., along Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about
68°38’S., 78°05’E. Charted as an elongated rem-
nant lake called ‘“Langevatnet” by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken in
January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen-
sen. This feature was determined to open onto
Prydz Bay by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952
study of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken
in March 1947, and renamed Ellis Fjord, for Edwin
E. Ellis, who served as aerial photographer on USN
Op. Hjp. flights in this area and other areas
visited by the western task group. Not adopted:
Langevatnet [Norwegian].
ELLSWORTH, CAPE: rocky bluff, about 950 ft.
in el., forming the N. end of Young I., in the Bal-
leny Is.; in about 66°14’S., 162°15’E. The Dis-
covery II, in 1936, after rescuing Lincoln Ellsworth,
made a running survey around the N. end of the
Balleny Is. on the way back to Australia.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ELLSWORTH, MOUNT: culminating summit of
an elongated massif between Isaiah Bowman Gl.
and Amundsen GIl., in the Queen Maud Range; in
about 85°45’S., 160°15’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE
on the South Polar Flight of November 1929.
Named by Byrd for Lincoln Ellsworth, American
Antarctic explorer. Not adopted: Mount Lincoln
Ellsworth.
ELLSWORTH HIGHLAND: that part of Ant-
arctica comprising a belt of high land extending
SSW. from the base of Palmer Pen. to the Rocke-
feller Plateau. Traversed by Lincoln Ellsworth on
an airplane flight during November—December
1935, and named by him at that time for his father,
James W. Ellsworth. Pending more definitive
mapping which may make it possible to draw
boundaries along lines of natural demarcation, the
E. boundary is arbitrarily placed at the base of
Palmer Pen. where the configuration of the coast
hints that such a physical boundary might ulti-
mately be found to lie. Not adopted: James W.
Ellsworth Land.
Elsa Bay; Else Cove; Else’s Hole; Elsie Harbour:
see Elsehul.
ELSEHUL: bay about 0.5 mi. wide, entered W. of
Cape Pride, along the N. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°01’S., 37°59’W. The name dates back to the
period 1905-12, and was probably applied by Nor-
wegian sealers and whalers working in the area.
Not adopted: Elsa Bay, Else Cove, Else’s Hole, Elsie
Harbour.
EMBASSY ROCK: small prominent rock, the
southwesternmost of the De Dion Its., situated
about 1 mi. SW. of Courtier Its. in Marguerite Bay,
off the coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°54’S., 68°45’W.
The De Dion Its. were first sighted and roughly
charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Em-
bassy Rock was surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who
so named it because of its detached position in asso-
ciation with Emperor Islet.
EMILY, MOUNT: peak, about 10,000 ft. in el.,
lying about 20 mi. SE of Mt. Ward, in the Dominion
Range; in about 85°48’S., 172°30’E. Disc. by the
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for
his wife, Lady Emily Dorman Shackleton.
Em Island: see Grassholm.
EMM ROCK: conspicuous rock about 130 ft. in
el., marking the E. side of the approach to Collins
Hbr., King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°15’S., 58°41’W. This rock, presumably known
to early sealers in the area, was sketched by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and charted by DI
120
personnel on the Discovery II in 1935. The name
derives from the shape of the rock, which resembles
the letter M.
EMMA ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long with
bare jagged peaks projecting through an icecap,
lying midway between Cape Anna and Delaite I.
in the SW. half of the entrance to Wilhelmina Bay,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 64°32’S.,
62°16’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache, who named it for his mother.
Emmons, Point: see Wild, Cape.
EMORY LAND BAY: ice-filled bay, about 15 mi.
wide and 15 mi. long, fed by Emory Land Gl. which
descends into it on both sides of Mt. McCoy, in
Marie Byrd Land; in about 75°30’S., 141°00’W.
Disc. by the USAS, 1939-41. The bay takes its
name from Emory Land Glacier.
EMORY LAND GLACIER: heavily-crevassed gla-
cier descending into Emory Land Bay on both sides
of Mt. McCoy, in Marie Byrd Land; in about
75°35’S., 141°00’W. Named in honor of R. Adm.
Emory S. Land, Chairman of the United States
Maritime Commission.
EMPEREUR ISLET: low rocky islet about 1 mi.
N. of Cape Margerie, lying immediately N. of
Manchot It. in the entrance to Port Martin, off
Adélie Coast; in 66°48’S., 141°24’E. Photographed
from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted
by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named
because the first emperor penguin captured by the
exp. was taken on this islet.
EMPEROR ISLET: islet close NE. of the Courtier
Its. in the De Dion Its. group, lying in Marguerite
Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S.,
68°43’W. It is largest of the De Dion Its., rising
to 150 ft. in el., and has a N.-S. trending, narrow,
sloping cleft which almost divides the islet in two.
The islets in this group were disc. and roughly
charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. This
islet was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so
named by them because a low rock and shingle
isthmus at the SE. end of the islet is the winter
breeding site of emperor penguins.
Emperor William Peak: see Big Ben.
ENDERBY LAND: projecting land mass of
Antarctica, extending from 45°00’E. to Edward
VIII Bay, the mouth of which lies in about 66°50’S.,
57°20’K. Disc. in 1831 by a Br. exp. under Biscoe,
who was sent out by the firm of Enderby Brothers
of London, organizers of early Antarctic explora-
tion.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ENDRESEN ISLANDS: two small offshore
islands, the highest about 200 ft. in el., lying just
N. of the Kringholm Is., off Mac-Robertson Coast;
in about 67°16’S., 60°05’E. Dis. and named by DI
personnel on the William Scoresby in February
1936.
ENGEL PEAKS: a series of aligned peaks, the
highest about 4,800 ft. in el., extending in a NNW.—
SSE. direction for about 4 mi., standing about 15
mi. W. of Cape Rymill on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 69°31’S., 63°08’W. This feature was pho-
tographed from the air in 1928 by Sir Hubert
Wilkins, and again in 1940 by members of the
USAS who also sledge surveyed along this coast.
It was resighted by the RARE, 1947-48, under
Ronne, who named this feature for Bud Engel,
pres. of the Albert Richard Division of the Oster-
man Co., Milwaukee, who contributed garments
suitable for winter use to the expedition.
ENGELSTAD, MOUNT: rounded summit about
11,000 ft. in el., rising from the edge of the polar
plateau at the head of Axel Heiberg Gl., in the
Queen Maud Range; in about 85°35’S., 167°20’W.
Disc. in November 1911 by a Nor. exp. under
Amundsen, and named by him for Capt. Ole Engel-
stad of the Norwegian Navy who was to be second-
in-command of the exp. ship Fram, but who was
killed prior to departure of the expedition. Ap-
parently an error in the position of Mount Engel-
stad and Mount Wilhelm Christophersen on the
map in Amundsen’s book, Sydpolen, gave rise to
transposition in subsequent cartographic applica-
tion of these names. The US-ACAN application of
these names is based on an analysis of Amundsen’s
narrative. Not adopted: Mount Ole Engelstad,
Mount Englestat, Mount Wilhelm Christophersen
(q.v.), Mount W. Christopherson.
ENGLAND, MOUNT: conical-topped mountain,
about 4,700 ft. in el., situated immediately S. of
New Gl. in the NE. part of Gonville and Caius
Range, in Victoria Land; in about 177°12’S.,
162°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott, who named it for Lt. Rupert England, RN,
of the Morning, relief ship to the expedition.
Englestat, Mount: see Engelstad, Mount; Wil-
helm Christophersen, Mount.
English, Mount: see Mooney, Mount.
ENGLISH STRAIT: strait lying between Green-
wich and Robert Islands, in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°26’S., 59°40’W. The name dates back to
at least 1822 and is now established international
usage. Not adopted: Détroit Anglais [French],
Spencers Straits.
424589 O -57 -9
121
ENTEN BAY: small bay lying SW. of Jason Hbr.
in the W. side of Cumberland West Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°13’S., 36°37’W. The name “Enten-
bucht” (Duck Bay) seems to have been first used
on a 1907 chart of Cumberland Bay by Dr. A.
Szielasko, physician and ornithologist on the Nor-
wegian whaler Fridtjof Nansen, who published an
account of his natural history observations made at
Cumberland Bay during the previous year.
ENTRANCE POINT: point marking the S. side
of Neptunes Bellows, the entrance to Port Foster,
Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S.,
60°33’W. Deception I. was known to sealers in the
area as early as 1821. The point was named by the
Hydrographic Dept. of the British Admiralty fol-
lowing a survey by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, in
1948-49.
EOSIN HILL: hill, about 300 ft. in el., rising 0.5
mi. SE. of Dartmouth Pt. in Cumberland East
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°26’W. Roughly
surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden-
skjold. Named by the FIDS following their sketch
survey in 1951. The name is one of a group in the
vicinity of Dartmouth Pt., derived from the chemi-
cal stains used in the preparation for histological
examination of biological material collected there
by FIDS.
EPHRAIM, MOUNT: high bluff at the S. end of
Greenwich I., overlooking the S. entrance to
McFarlane Str., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°34°S., 59°42’W. The name has been in use
since at least 1930 and is now established in inter-
national usage.
Epsilon, Isla: see Epsilon Island.
EPSILON ISLAND: small islet lying between
Alpha I and the S. extremity of Lambda I. in the
Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 63°00’W.
The islet was roughly surveyed by DI personnel in
1927. The name, derived from the fifth letter of
the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first
used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following sur-
veys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expeditions in 1942
and 1943. Not adopted: Isla Epsilon [Spanish].
EREBUS, MOUNT: an active volcano about
13,200 ft. in el., which forms the summit of Ross I.
at the SW. corner of Ross Sea; in about 77°35’S.,
167°10’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross,
who named it for his ship, the Erebus.
EREBUS AND TERROR GULF: gulf on the SE.
side of the NE. tip of Palmer Pen., bordered on the
NE. by the Joinville I. group and on the SW. by the
James Ross I. group; in about 63°50’S., 56°40’W.
Named by a Br. exp. under Ross for the exp. ships
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Erebus and Terror, used in exploring these waters
in 1842-43.
EREBUS BAY: bay about 12 mi. wide; lies
between Cape Evans and Hut Point Pen., Ross I.;
in about 77°44’S., 166°35’E. First explored by the
BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. The name was ap-
plied by Scott’s second exp., the BrAE, 1910-13,
which built its headquarters on Cape Evans. The
bay was probably so named because it is dominated
by Mt. Erebus.
Erebus Bay: see South Bay.
Ernest Gruening, Mount: see Andrew Jackson,
Mount.
Ernst Bay: see Duke Ernst Bay.
E. Rouz, Cap: see Roux, Cape.
ERRERA, CAPE: cape which forms the SW. end
of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°55’S.,
63°36’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache, and named by him for Léo Errera, Paul
Errera, and Madame M. Errera, contributors to the
expedition.
ERRERA CHANNEL: channel between the W.
coast of Palmer Pen. and De Rongé I.; in about
64°43’S., 62°36’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99,
under De Gerlache, who named this feature for
Léo Errera, prof. at the Univ. of Brussels and a
member of the Belgica Commission.
ESBENSEN BAY: small bay lying 2 mi. WSW. of
Nattriss Head, along the SE. end of South Georgia;
in 54°52’S., 36°00’W. Charted by the GerAE,
1911-12, under Filchner, and named for Capt. V.
Esbensen, manager of the Cia. Argentina de Pesca
whaling station at Grytviken. Not adopted:
Espensen Bucht [German].
Eskers: see Strand Moraines, The.
Espensen Bucht: see Esbensen Bay.
ETA ISLAND: island, about 2 mi. long, which
lies immediately N. of Omega I. in the Melchior Is.,
Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°55’W. This island,
the largest feature in the NE. part of the Melchior
Is., is part of what was called “Ile Melchior” by
the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, but the name
Melchior now applies for the whole island group.
Eta Island was roughly surveyed by DI personnel
in 1927. The name Eta, derived from the seventh
letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been
first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following
surveys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expeditions in
1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Isla Piedrabuena
[Spanish].
122
ETERNITY MOUNTAINS: massif surmounted
by three prominent peaks, the highest about 12,000
ft. in el., extending about 18 mi. in a general N.-S.
direction and standing S. of Elant Mtns. on Palmer
Pen.; in about 70°57’S., 63°35’W. These mountains
were probably seen from the air by Ellsworth in
1935 and their N. extremities were sketched in 1936
by a BGLE sledge party under Rymill. In 1940
they were photographed from the air and charted
from the ground by the USAS, and in the exp. re-
ports and charts were assumed to be Ellsworth’s
“Hternity Range.” The US-ACAN is of the opinion
that Ellsworth’s “Eternity Range,” so named be-
cause of its impressive relief, is synonymous with
the prominent peaks of the Mt. Wakefield group
to the NNW., for which names have already been
established. In order to perpetuate recognition of
Ellsworth’s discovery the US-ACAN therefore ac-
cepts the USAS application of the name Eternity
for the massif S. of Eland Mtns. and merely sub-
stitutes the more appropriate term mountains.
ETHELRED, MOUNT: mainly ice-covered moun-
tain, about 8,100 ft. in el., standing 3 mi. SE. of
Mt. Ethelwulf and 8 mi. inland from George VI
Sound, in the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island;
in 70°04’S., 69°29’W. Its E. face was roughly sur-
veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was
resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named after
Ethelred I, Saxon king of England, 865-871.
ETHELWULF, MOUNT: mainly ice-covered
mountain, over 8,500 ft. in el., standing between
Mounts Egbert and Ethelred at the head of Tumble
Gl., in the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island;
in 70°02’S., 69°34’W. Its E. face was roughly sur-
veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was
resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named after
Ethelwulf, Saxon king of England, 839-858.
ETNA ISLAND: islet with a high summit, lying
about 5 mi. N. of the eastern end of Joinville I., off
the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°05’S., 55°10’W.
Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, who so
named it because of its resemblance to volcanic
Mount Etna. Not adopted: Aetna Insel [German].
EUREKA GLACIER: broad, gently sloping
glacier, about 18 mi. long and 17 mi. wide at its
mouth, which flows westward from the W. side
of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound; in 69°44’S.,
68°15’W. It is bounded on its N. side by the nuna-
taks S. of Mt. Edgell, on its S. side by the Traverse
Mtns. and Terminus Nunatak, and at its head Pros-
pect Pass provides a route to Wordie Ice Shelf.
First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill,
and resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. The name
expresses triumph of discovery, and arose because
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the BGLE sledge party found their way to George
VI Sound via this glacier in 1936.
EVA, CAPE: cape which forms the NW. end of
Peter I Island; in about 68°42’S.,90°39’W. Charted
and named in 1927 by a Nor. exp. in the Odd I
under Tofte. Not adopted: Evas Cape.
EVANS, CAPE: cape on the W. side of Ross I.,
forming the N. side of the entrance to Erebus Bay;
in about 77°38’S., 166°24’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named it the Skuary.
Scott’s second exp., the BrAE, 1910-13, built its
headquarters here, re-naming the cape for Lt.
Edward R. G. R. Evans, RN, who was second-in-
command of the expedition. Not adopted: Skuary.
EVANS, MOUNT: mountain with twin summits,
about 3,900 and 3,700 ft. in el., standing at the S.
side of Debenham Gl. about 6 mi. WSW. of Lizards
Foot, in Victoria Land; in about 77°14’S., 162°38’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who
named it for Lt. Edward R. G. R. Evans, RN, of the
Morning, relief ship to the expedition.
EVANS BAY: bay about 15 mi. wide in the SE.
part of MacKenzie Bay, formed by an indentation
in the Amery Ice Shelf immediately E. of Cape
Child, along Lars Christensen Coast; in about
68°40’S., 71°45’E. Originally charted by the
BANZARE, under Mawson, from an air survey of
the boundaries of McKenzie Bay made on Feb. 10,
1931. Probably named for Sir Edward R. G. R.
Evans, then R. Adm. commanding the Royal Aus-
tralian Navy.
EVANS COVE: cove about 2.5 mi. wide, lying
between Inexpressible I. and Northern Foothills
along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°59’S.,
163°47’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton, and presumably named by him
for Capt. F. P. Evans, master of the Koonya, which
towed the exp. ship Nimrod S. in 1907, and later of
the Nimrod during the last year of the expedition.
EVANS INLET: circular embayment, about 9 mi.
in diameter, lying between Shiver Pt. and White-
side Pt., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°03’S., 61°36’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in
an aerial flight, Dec. 20, 1928, and named by him
for E. S. Evans of Detroit. It was resighted and
charted by the FIDS in 1947.
Evas Cape: see Eva, Cape.
EVENSEN, CAPE: bold promontory lying W. of
Waldeck-Rousseau Peak, on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 66°10’S., 65°49’W. Disc. by the FrAE,
1903-05, under Charcot, and named by him for
123
Capt. C. J. Evensen of the Hertha, who explored
along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in 1893. Not
adopted: Cape Evenson, Cape Waldeck Rousseau.
Evensen Bay: see Auvert Bay.
EVENSEN NUNATAK: nunatak about 1.5 mi.
NW. of Dallmann Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks
group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°59’S.,
60°25’W. Evensen Nunatak was first charted by
the FIDS in August 1947, and nemed by them
for Capt. C. J. Evensen.
Evenson, Cape: see Evensen, Cape.
EWING ISLAND: ice-covered, Gome-shaped is-
land, about 8 mi. in diameter, lying about 15 mi.
NE. of Cape Collier, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen. of
in 69°54’S., 61°13’W. Disc. from the air on Nov.
7, 1947 by RARE, under Ronne, who named it for
Maurice Ewing of Columbia Univ., who assisted
in planning the RARE seismological program.
EXASPERATION INLET: ice-filled inlet, about
18 mi. long in an E.-W. direction and some 16 mi.
wide at its entrance between Foyn Pt. and Cape
Disappointment, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°20’S., 62°00’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS
who so named it because the disturbed nature of
the ice in the vicinity caused considerable diffi-
culty to sledging parties.
EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE RANGE: range of
mountain peaks extending in a NE.-SW. direction
from about 76°30’S., 127°W. to 77°30’S., 130°00’W.;
in Marie Byrd Land. Disc. by the USAS on a flight,
Dec. 15, 1940, and named for the Antarctic Service
Executive Committee. Several peaks were named
in honor of members of the committee, except Mt.
Sidley, the most imposing mountain in the range,
which was disc. by the ByrdAE on a flight in 1934.
EXPEDITION ROCK: submerged rock lying in
the entrance to Jessie Bay, about 2 mi. ENE. of
Route Pt., off the N. coast of Laurie I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 44°46’W. The rock
appears to have been first chartered and named
on a map based upon a survey of these islands in
1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
EXPRESS COVE: small cove on the N. side of
Foca Pt. on the W. coast of Signy I., South Orkney
Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°39’W. It has a very indented
shoreline with numerous offshore islets and rocks.
It was roughly charted in 1933 by DI personnel,
and surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the
Br-APC after the American schooner Express,
Thomas B. Lynch commanding, which visited the
South Orkney Is. in 1880.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
EXTENSION REEF: reef lying in Grandidier
Chan., about 10 mi. SW. of Clements Markham I.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°01’S.,
66°14’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill.
EZCURRA INLET: inlet forming the W. arm of
Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 62°09’S., 58°31’W. Ezcurra Inlet was
probably named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char-
cot, who charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909.
FACTORY COVE: small cove entered between
Knife Pt. and Berntsen Pt. in the S. part of Borge
Bay at Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,
45°37’W. The cove was roughly surveyed by the
Norwegian whaling captain Hans Borge in 1913-14,
and was named “Borge Havna” on a map of the
period by Petter Sgrlle. The name of Borge was
later transferred, and Borge Bay is now the name
of the bay of which this cove forms a small part.
The cove was resurveyed by DI personnel in 1927
and renamed Factory Cove, because the ruins of
the whaling factory built in 1920-21 by the Tgns-
berg Hvalfangeri stand on its SE. shore. Not
adopted: Borge Havna [Norwegian].
Factory Point: see Restitution Point.
FACTORY POINT: small point on the W. side
and close to the head of Leith Hbr., in Stromness
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°08’S., 36°41’W. The
name was probably given by whalers because of its
nearness to Messrs. Salvesen and Company’s whal-
ing station rear the head of Leith Harbor.
FAIRWAY ROCK: submerged rock in the cen-
tral part of Larsen Hbr., at the SE. end of South
Georgia; in 54°50’S., 35°59’W. Charted in 1927
by DI personnel, and so named by them because
it lies in the navigable portion of the harbor.
FAIRWEATHER, CAPE: promontory about 2,200
ft. in el., which is ice covered except for rocky ex-
posures along its SE. and E. sides, lying midway
between Drygalski Gl. and Evans Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°00’S., 61°05’W. Charted
in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Alexander
Fairweather, captain of the Dundee whaler Balaena
which operated along the NE. coast of Palmer Pen.
in 1892-93.
FALKLAND HARBOR: shallow harbor along the
SW. side of Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.;
in 60°44’S., 45°03’W. Charted by a Nor. whaling
exp. under Sgrlle in 1912-13. Named after the
floating whale factory Falkland which was badly
damaged while entering the harbor in the 1912-13
season.
124
FALLA BLUFF: prominent rocky bluff, about
950 ft. in el., lying at the head of Utstikkar Bay on
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°33’S., 61°29’E.
Disc. on about Feb. 17, 1931 by the BANZARE under
Mawson, and named by him for R. A. Falla, a
member of the expedition. Not adopted: Svart-
hovden [Norwegian].
FALLIERES COAST: that portion of the W.
coast of Palmer Pen. lying between the head of
Bourgeois Fjord in 67°31’S., 66°32’W. and Cape
Jeremy in 69°24’S., 68°51’W. This coast was first
explored in January 1909 by the FrAE under Char-
cot, who named it for Clement Armand Falliéres,
then Pres. of France. Not adopted: Fallieres Coast,
Falliéres Coast, Falliéres Land.
FALSE BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which lies
between Barnard Pt. and Elephant Pt. on the S.
side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°42’S., 60°22’W. The name False Bay has
appeared on charts since about 1822 and is well
established in international usage. Not adopted:
Palmer Bay, Palmers Bay.
FALSE BAY: small bight about 2 mi. NW. of
Van Ryswyck Pt., the E. tip of Anvers I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°33’S., 62°51’W. Charted and
named by DI personnel on the Discovery in 1927.
The name is probably suggestive of the limited
indentation of this feature in the coast.
FALSE ISLAND POINT: headland about 1 mi.
long and 0.5 mi. wide, which is connected by a low,
narrow, almost invisible isthmus to the S. side of
Vega I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°55’S., 57°20’W. First sighted in February
1902 and charted as an island by the SwedAE under
Nordenskjold. It was determined to be a part
of Vega I. in 1945 by the FIDS, who applied this
descriptive name.
FALSE ISLET: largest of several islets lying
at the E. side of Hackapike Bay, off the NE. coast
of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°31’S.,
62°52’W. Two islets were charted in this approxi-
mate position by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5.
False Islet was named by DI personnel on the
Discovery in 1927. Not adopted: False Island.
FALSE ROUND POINT: point about 7 mi. W.
of North Foreland and 1.5 mi. S. of Ridley I., on
the N. coast of King George I., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in about 61°52’S., 57°58’W. This point
has appeared on charts since about 1822. It was
probably named after Round Pt., which lies about
10 mi. WSW. by DI personnel on the Discovery II
who charted along the N. coast of this in 1937.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
FANNING, CAPE: cape which forms the N. side
of the entrance to Violante Inlet, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; 72°24’S., 60°39’W. Disc. by the
USAS in a flight from East Base on Dec. 30, 1940.
Named by the Committee for Edmund Fanning,
of Stonington, Conn., and New York City, who in
addition to actual Antarctic exploration in con-
nection with his sealing and whaling business also
vigorously promoted such exploration by others
under both private and public auspices. His book,
Voyages Round the World, published in 1833, has
long been the most authoritative work on early
American Antarctic exploration.
FANNING RIDGE: prominent rock ridge, about
5 mi. long, paralleling the S. coast of South Georgia
between Aspasia Pt. and the W. side of the entrance
to Newark Bay; in 54°20’S., 37°02’W. The ridge
was named by the Br-APC, following its mapping
by the SGS in 1951-52, for Capt. Edmund Fanning
(1770-1841) of Stonington, Conn., who with the
Aspasia took 57,000 fur seal skins at South Georgia
in 1800-1, and published the earliest account of
sealing there.
Fannings Harbor: see Yankee Harbor.
FARADAY, CAPE: cape which forms the N. tip
of Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S.,
45°04’W. Disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer on. the occasion of their joint
cruise in December 1821. The name first appears
on Powell’s chart published in 1822.
FAREWELL POINT: point which forms the NE.
end of Bird I., off the W. end of South Georgia; in
53°59’S., 38°02’W. The name appears to have been
applied by DI personnel who charted South Georgia
in the period 1926-30.
FAREWELL ROCK: islet about 1.5 mi. long,
lying about 1 mi. W. of the SW. end of Trinity L.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°48’S.,
60°58’W. Although the origin of the name is un-
known, it has appeared on maps for over one hun-
dred years and its usage has become established
internationally.
FARLEY, MOUNT: the largest of a group of
peaks, about 7,000 ft. in el., standing between the
heads of Robert Scott and Bartlett Glaciers, in the
Queen Maud Range; in about 86°36’S., 151°45’W.
Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological
party under Quin Blackburn, and named at that
time by R. Adm. Byrd for the Hon. James M. Far-
ley, then Postmaster General of the United States.
FARR BAY: ice-filled bay about 6 mi. wide, lying
E. of Helen Gl. along Queen Mary Coast; in about
66°32’S., 94°35’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the
125
Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson.
In some early reports the feature was referred to
as Depot Bay. It was later named for Dr. C. C.
Farr of New Zealand, a member of the Expedition
Advisory Committee. Not adopted: Depot Bay.
FARRINGTON ISLAND: islet lying about 5 mi.
NNE. of Couling I., the northernmost island in the
William Scoresby Arch., and about 2 mi. W. of Klak-
kane Is., off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°15’S.,
59°44’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the
William Scoresby in February 1936.
FAULKNER ESCARPMENT: an escarpment with
a crest line lying about 10,000 ft. in el., forming the
E. edge of the Thorvald Nilsen Mountains massif,
and trending in a general N.-S. direction, in the
Queen Maud Range; extending from about 86°00S.,
155°30’E. to about 86°30’S., 157°15’W. Disc. in
December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party
under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for
Charles J. Faulkner, Jr., chief counsel of Armour
and Company of Chicago, contributors to the ex-
pedition.
FAURE ISLANDS: group of rocky islands and
reefs, about 3 mi. in extent, lying about 21 mi.
SW. of Cape Alexandra, the SE. end of Adelaide I.,
in 68°06’S., 68°52’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot, who named them for Maurice Faure,
French scholar and statesman. Not adopted:
Faure Islets, Maurice Faure Islands.
FELICIE POINT: point which forms the S. end
of Lion I., lying immediately E. of Anvers I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°40’S., 63°09’W. Charted and
named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache.
Not adopted: Cape Félicie.
FERGUSLIE PENINSULA: peninsula, about 1.5
mi. long, lying between Browns Bay and Macdougal
Bay on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Ork-
ney Is.; in 60°43’S., 44°34’W. Probably first seen
in 1823 by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell.
Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who
named it for the residence of James Coats, chief
patron of the expedition.
FERGUSON BAY: small bay which forms an
excellent anchorage, lying between Hewison and
Herd Points at the SE. end of Thule I., in the South
Sandwich Is.; in 59°28’S., 27°16’W. Charted in
1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who
named it for Messrs. Ferguson Brothers of Port
Glasgow, Scotland, builders of the Discovery II.
Ferin, Ile; Férin Island: see Ferin Head.
FERIN HEAD: headland forming the N. side of
the entrance to Holtedahl Bay, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°59’S., 65°24’W. Disc. by
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who from a
distant position in Pendleton Str. charted this
feature as an island. Charcot named it for A.
Ferin, French Vice-consul at Ponta Delgada, Azores.
The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, charted this
coast and correlated their work with that by Char-
cot. Ferin Head, as here applied, is in accord with
the BGLE interpretation. Not adopted: Férin
Island, Ile Ferin [French].
FERRANTO, MOUNT: mountain which forms
the extreme SW. projection of the main massif of
the Fosdick Mtns. in the Edsel Ford Ranges of
Marie Byrd Land, rising to about 3,000 ft. in el.,
in about 76°31’S., 145°25’W. Disc. by the Marie
Byrd Land Sledging Party of the ByrdAE in No-
vember-December 1934. Named for Felix Ferranto,
radio and tractor operator of the USAS, 1939-41.
FERRAR GLACIER: glacier at least 35 mi. long
and varying from 38 to 6 mi. wide, flowing from
the plateau of Victoria Land west of the Royal
Society Range to New Hbr. in McMurdo Sound;
in about 77°41’S., 163°38’E. This glacier flows
NE. to a point opposite the E. side of Knobhead,
where it is apposed, i.e., joined in Siamese-twin
fashion, to Taylor Glacier. From this point, Fer-
rar Glacier turns right and flows ENE. between
the Kukri Hills and the N. end of the Royal So-
ciety Range to New Hbr. Disc. by the BrNABE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Hartley
T. Ferrar, geologist of the exp. The name Ferrar
Glacier was originally applied both to the part
of this glacier below its right turn and to the
Taylor Glacier as now defined (q.v.), while the
upper part of Ferrar Glacier above Knobhead was
called South Arm. Griffith Taylor, geologist of the
BrAE, 1910-138, under Scott, found evidence that
these are not two parts of a single glacier but are
two glaciers apposed. With this discovery Scott
gave the names Ferrar Glacier and Taylor Glacier
essentially as now applied. Later, on the map of
the Ferrar-Koettlitz District included in the sci-
entific reports of the exp., the names Lower Fer-
rar Glacier and Upper Ferrar Glacier were applied
to these two ice streams, but this naming does not
seem consistent with the evidence as the position
of the medcal moraines on this map shows that
Taylor Glacier does not flow into Ferrar Glacier.
Since it is apparent from the fairly detailed maps
that the main flow of the Ferrar Glacier heads in
the plateau somewhere to the SW. of Knobhead,
the US-ACAN has applied the name Ferrar above
as well as below the turn at Knobhead. Not
adopted: East Fork, Lower Ferrar Glacier, New
Harbor Glacier, South Arm (in part).
FERRIER PENINSULA: narrow peninsula,
about 1.5 mi. long, forming the E. end of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°26’W. The
peninsula was roughly charted in 1823 by a Br.
sealing exp. under Weddell. It was accurately
delineated by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce,
who named it for his secretary J. G. Ferrier, also
manager in Scotland of the expedition.
FIELD, MOUNT: mountain about 9,390 ft. in el.,
which stands about 25 mi. W. of Cape Douglas,
between Mt. Egerton and Mt. Wharton, on the W.
side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°58’S., 158°00’E.
Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott.
Field’s Strait: see Fildes Strait.
FILCHNER, CAPE: ice-covered cape, fronting on
Davis Sea about 14 mi. WNW. of Adams It.,
which separates Wilhelm II Coast from Queen
Mary Coast; in about 66°28’S., 92°18’E. Disc. by
the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it
for Wilhelm Filchner, leader of the German Ant-
arctic Expedition of 1911-12.
Filchner Group: see Filchner Mountains.
FILCHNER ICE SHELF: an extensive ice shelf
which borders Edith Ronne Land at the head of
Weddell Sea and extends from Bowman Pen. east-
ward to Luitpold Coast; centering in about 78°S.,
50°W. The E. extremity of this feature was disc.
in January—February 1912 by the GerAE under
Wilhelm Filchner. Filchner named the feature
for Kaiser Wilhelm, but the Emperor requested it
be named for its discoverer. The vast central and
W. areas of this ice shelf were first seen and photo-
graphed by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, in
two aerial flights undertaken in November and
December 1947. Not adopted: Filchner Shelf Ice,
James Lassiter Barrier, James Lassiter Ice Bar-
rier, Lassiter Ice Barrier, Lassiter Shelf Ice, Wed-
dell Shelf Ice, Wilhelm Barrier, Wilhelm Shelf
Ice.
FILCHNER MOUNTAINS: small group of moun-
tains lying at the SW. side of the Drygalski Mtns.
at the N. edge of the polar plateau, in New
Schwabenland; in about 72°10’S., 7°30’E. Disc. by
the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named
for Wilhelm Filchner. Not adopted: Filchner
Group.
FILCHNER ROCKS: group of rocks, some of
which are submerged, about 4 mi. NE. of Cape
Vahsel, off the E. end of South Georgia; in 54°42’S.,
35°42’W. The existence of these rocks was re-
ported in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. They
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
were charted by the GerAE, 1911-12, and named
for Dr. Wilhelm Filchner, leader of the expedi-
tion.
Filchner Shelf Ice: see Filchner Ice Shelf.
FILDES POINT: point which forms the N. side of
Neptunes Bellows, the entrance to Port Foster,
Deception I., in the’South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S.,
60°34’W. Deception I. was known to sealers in the
area as early as 1821; the point was later named
for Robert Fildes, a British sealer in these waters
at that early time.
FILDES STRAIT: strait which extends in a
general WNW.-ESE. direction between King
George I. and Nelson I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°14’S., 58°59’W. This strait has been
known to sealers in the area since about 1822,
but at that early time it appeared on the charts
as Field’s Strait. Probably named for Robert
Fildes, a British sealer of that period. Not
adopted: Field’s Strait.
FILLA ISLAND: small, rocky island, about 2 mi.
long, which rises to about 300 ft. in el., marking
the largest of the Rauer Is. and lying in the east-
central portion of the group, off Ingrid Christen-
sen Coast; in about 68°50’S.,.77°43’E. Charted
by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photo-
graphs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp.
under Lars Christensen, and named Filla, a Nor-
wegian word meaning “the tatters.” The name
Filla Island was proposed by John H. Roscoe, fol-
lowing his 1952 compilation from USN Op. Hip.
aerial photographs taken in March 1947, because
the original Filla feature has been determined
to comprise a group of small islands, islets and
rocks. Not adopted: Filla [Norwegian].
FINGER POINT: point marking the N. tip of
Visokoi I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°41’S.,
27°13’W. Charted in 1930 and given this de-
scriptive name by DI personnel on the Discovery
II,
FINGER POINT: point which forms the SW.
end of Skua I., in the Argentine Is.; off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15/S., 64°17’W. Finger
Point was charted and named by the BGLE, 1934—
37, under Rymill.
FINLEY, MOUNT: prominent peak on the W.
side of the lower reaches of Shackleton Gl., stand-
ing at the E. end of the Bush Mtns., in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 84°53’S., 176°15’W. Disc.
by R. Adm. Byrd on ByrdAE flights to the Queen
Maud Range in November 1929, and named by
him for John H. Finley, Pres. of the American
Geographical Soc. at that time.
127
Finley Islands; Finley Peninsula: see Finley
Ridge.
FINLEY RIDGE: mountainous ridge terminat-
ing in Cape Hicks and lying between the mouths
of Bingham and Lurabee Glaciers, on the EH. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 69°14’S., 63°20’W. Disc. by Sir
Hubert Wilkins in an aerial flight on Dec. 20, 1928.
He considered the ridge to be islands lying in a
ereat transverse channel across Palmer Pen. and
named them Finley Islands for John H. Finley
of the New York Times, then pres. of the American
Geographical Soc. Correlation of aerial photo-
eraphs taken by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935 and
preliminary reports of the findings of the BGLE,
1934-37, led W. L. G. Joerg to interpret this to
be a peninsula. In published reports, members
of the BGLE have concurred in this interpreta-
tion which is also borne out by the results of sub-
sequent flights and a sledge trip from East Base,
in 1940, by members of the USAS. Not adopted:
Finley Islands, Finley Peninsula.
FINSTERWALDER GLACIER: glacier, about 2
mi. wide and 11 mi. long, flowing SW. from the
central plateau of Palmer Pen. toward the head
of Lallemand Fjord. The exact position of its
mouth is not determined but lies between the
mouths of Haefeli and Klebelsberg Glaciers; in
about 67°19’S., 66°20’W. First surveyed from the
plateau in 1946-47 by the FIDS, and named by
them for Sebastian Finsterwalder and his son,
Richard Finsterwalder, German glaciologists.
Fiord Martel: see Martel Inlet.
FIRST MILESTONE: rock marked by breakers
about 1.75 mi. WNW. of Cape Saunders, off the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°40’W.
Charted and named by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery during the period 1926-30.
FIRST POINT: the W. tip of Annenkov I., off
the south-central coast of South Georgia; in
54°29’S., 37°08’W. Charted and named by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery during the period 1926-30.
FIRST ROCK: rock which lies 0.5 mi. S. of Br¢de
I., and 2 mi. S. of Cape Disappointment, the S.
extremity of South Georgia; in 54°55’S., 36°07’W.
Disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. The rock
was so named because of its position by DI per-
sonnel who charted South Georgia in the period
1926-30.
FISH ISLANDS: group of small islands lying
in the NE. half of the entrance to Holtedahl Bay,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°02’S.,
65°27’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill. Not adopted: Fish Islets.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Fisher, Mount: see Fisher Mountains.
FISHER BAY: bay lying NE. of Cape Hurley
between Penguin Pt. and Mertz Glacier Tongue,
along George V Coast; in about 67°30’S., 145°40’E.
Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who
named it for Andrew Fisher, Prime Minister of
Australia in 1911.
FISHER MOUNTAINS: mountains of the Queen
Maud Range, lying S. of the E. end of the Prince
Olav Mtns. and forming the W. flank of the Liv
Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°20’S.,
172°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in November 1929,
and named for the Fisher brothers, Detroit indus-
trialists. Not adopted: Fisher Mountain, Mount
Fisher.
FISHTRAP COVE: small cove 250 yards NW. of
Boulder Pt. on the SW. side of Stonington I., close
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S.,
67°00’W. First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41.
Resurveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS, who so named
it because FIDS parties used this cove for setting
fish traps.
FISKE, CAPE: cape which forms the E. tip of
Smith Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
74°21’S., 60°27’W. This cape was photographed
from the air by members of the USAS in December
1940, and in 1947 by members of the RARE, under
Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted
it from the ground. Named by Ronne for C. O.
Fiske, climatologist with the Ronne expedition.
FIST, THE: peak about 1,000 ft. in el., sur-
mounting Cape Crépin at the W. side of the en-
trance to Mackellar Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King
George I. in the South Shetland Is.; in about
62°05’S., 58°31’W. This descriptive name was
given by the FrAE under Charcot, who charted
Admiralty Bay in December 1909. Not adopted:
Le Poing [French].
FITCHIE BAY: bay lying W. of Cape Dundas on
the S. side of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°45’S., 44°29’W. Charted by the ScotNAE,
1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for John
Fitchie, second mate of the exp. ship Scotia.
FITZROY ISLET: islet 0.5 mi. E. of the S. tip of
Stonington I., lying in Neny Bay at the foot of
Northeast Gl., by which it is partially covered, off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°1.1’S., 66°58’W.
The islet was presumably first sighted in 1936 by
the BGLE, and was roughly charted by them and
by the USAS, 1939-41. It was surveyed in 1947
by the FIDS who named it for the R.M.S. Fitzroy,
FIDS ship which visited this area in 1947.
FITZSIMMONS, MOUNT: highest peak of the
Rockefeller Mtns., standing between Mounts
Shideler and Jackling in the N. part of the group,
and rising to about 3,500 ft. in el., on Edward VII
Pen.; in about 77°54’S., 155°20’W. Disc. on Jan.
27, 1929 by members of the ByrdAE on an explora-
tory flight to this area. Named for Roy G. Fitz-
simmons, physicist, in charge of the Rockefeller
Mountains seismic station for the USAS during
November—December 1940. Not adopted: Mount
Margaret Wade.
FLAG POINT: point which lies 0.5 mi. ESE. of
Damoy Pt. and forms the N. side of the entrance to
Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°49’S., 63°32’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot. Named by the FIDS in 1944.
When the FIDS base at Port Lockroy was estab-
lished in 1944, a metal Union Jack was erected on
this point.
FLAGON POINT: point, surmounted by two
peaks about 1,000 and 1,300 ft. in el., marking the
S. side of the entrance to Schott Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°14’S., 60°41’W. Disc.
and photographed from the air in December 1940
by members of the USAS. It was charted in 1947
by a joint party consisting of members of the
RARE and FIDS. So named by the FIDS because
the two peaks are suggestive of a flagon tilted on its
side when viewed from north or south.
FLAGPOLE POINT: point, about 0.2 mi. NW. of
Fishtrap Cove, which forms the S. part of the W.
extremity of Stonington I., close off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°01’W. First surveyed
by the USAS, 1939-41, whose East Base was located
on this island. Resurveyed in 1946-47 by the
FIDS, and so named by them because of the flag
pole which was erected by the USAS on a rocky
knoll close NE. of this point.
FLAGSTAFF POINT: point which forms the S.
end of the Cape Royds headland and the NW. side
of the entrance to Backdoor Bay, on the W. side
of Ross I.; in about 77°33’S., 166°08’E. Charted
and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9,
which established its winter headquarters and
erected a flag near the point.
FLANDRES BAY: large bay lying between Capes
Renard and Willems, along the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°02’S., 63°20’W. Explored in 1898 by
the BelgAE under De Gerlache, who named it,
probably after the historical area of that name,
now constituting part of France, Belgium, and
the Netherlands. Not adopted: Dallmann Bay,
Flanders Bay.
128
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Flanders Bay: see Flandres Bay.
FLANNERY, CAPE: cape which forms the W.
end of Thule I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in
59°27’S., 27°21’W. Charted in 1930 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, who named it for Sir
Fortescue Flannery, a member of the Discovery
Committee.
FLAT ISLAND: small island lying at the W.
side of the entrance to Robertson Bay and at the
N. side of Pressure Bay, off the N. coast of Victoria
Land; in about 71°20’S., 169°10’E. First charted
and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13.
Flat Isle: see WatchKeeper, The.
FLATIRON, THE: rocky, triangular-shaped
headland about 1,100 ft. in el., which overlooks the
SW. part of Granite Hbr. about 1.5 mi. S. of the
mouth of Mackay Gl., in Victoria Land; in about
77°00’S., 162°26’E. Charted by the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13, who so named it because of its dis-
tinctive shape.
FLATNES ICE TONGUE: small ice tongue,
about 2 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, projecting NW.
from the continental ice overlying Ingrid Christen-
sen Coast, about 3 mi. SW. of Hovde Ice Tongue;
in about 69°16’S., 76°25’E. Charted by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken in
January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen-
sen, and named Flatnes, a Norwegian word mean-
ing flat headland. The generic ice tongue is
approved as a more appropriate term on the basis
of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from USN
Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947.
Not adopted: Flatness [Norwegian].
FLEMING GLACIER: glacier on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen., terminating in Wordie Ice Shelf; in
69°12’S., 67°10’W. Together with Bingham Gl. it
fills a major depression across Palmer Pen. Disc.
and charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37.
Photographed from the air by the USAS on Sept.
29, 1940. This hitherto unnamed feature was
named by the US-ACAN in 1947 for Rev. W. L. S.
Fleming, Dean of Trinity Hall, Cambridge Univ.;
also chaplain, chief scientist, and geologist of the
BGLE.
Flenserne: see Flensing Islets.
FLENSING ISLETS: group of islets lying about
0.5 mi. N. of Jebsen Rocks and about 1 mi. off the
W. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°42’S., 45°41’W. These islets appear to be first
charted and named by a Nor. whaling exp. under
Sgrlle, 1912-13. It is possible that in former
years these islets were used for flensing, the proc-
129
ess of stripping the skin and blubber from whales.
Not adopted: Flenserne [Norwegian].
FLETCHER, CAPE: minor projection of the
coastline related to a slight eminence which breaks
the relief of an otherwise low coast, about 26 mi.
W. of Scullin Monclith, on Mac-Robertson Coast;
in about 67°42’S.,65°38’E. Disc. by the BANZARE,
1929-31, under Mawson, and named by him for
H. O. Fletcher, asst. biologist with the BANZARE.
FLETCHER ISLANDS: two prominent islands,
McNamara I. and Dustin I., lying near the W. end
of Bellingshausen Sea, about 40 mi. E. of Cape
Palmer, off Eights Coast; in about 171°505’S.,
94°55’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the
Bear on Feb. 27, 1940, and named by R. Adm. Byrd
for Fred C. Fletcher of Boston, Mass., a contributor
to the expedition.
FLETCHER ISLET: the largest and southern-
most of the Fletcher Islets, lying immediately N.
of the small coastal nunatak which lies about 1 mi.
NE. of Whetter Nunatak, in the E. portion of Com-
monwealth Bay off George V Coast; in about
66°55’S., 143°00’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under
Mawson, and named by him for Frank D. Fletcher,
first officer on the exp. ship Aurora.
FLETCHER ISLETS: small group of iselts in the
E. part of Commonwealth Bay, lying close seaward
of a small coastal nunatak which stands about
1 mi. NE. of Whetter Nunatak, off George V Coast;
in about 66°54’S., 143°00’E. Disc. in 1912 by the
AAE under Mawson, who applied the name Fletcher
to the large islet at the S. end of this group. The
name Fletcher is also adopted for this islet group
in Keeping with the interpretation shown on the
US-ACAN reconnaissance map of 1955 compiled
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp.,
1946-47.
FLINT GLACIER: glacier which flows S. into
Whirlwind Inlet between Demorest Gl. and Cape
Northrop, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
67°20’S., 65°25’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins
on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and photographed
from the air by the USAS in 1940. Charted by the
FIDS in 1947, who named it for Richard F. Flint,
glaciologist and prof. of geology at Yale University.
Flint Peninsula: see Churchill Peninsula.
FLORA, MOUNT: mountain, about 1,700 ft. in
el., containing a well-defined cirque which faces NE.
lying about 0.5 mi. ESE. of the head of Hope Bay,
at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°25’S., 57°01’ W.
Disc. by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4,
and named by J. Gunnar Andersson, second-in-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
command of the exp., who disc. flora fossils of the
Jurassic period in certain strata of this mountain.
Not adopted: Florasberg [Swedish].
Florasberg: see Flora, Mount.
FLORENCE ROCK: rock about 0.1 mi. long with
a smaller rock off its NE. end, lying about 0.8 mi.
SE. of Point Rae, off the S. coast of Laurie I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 44°36’W.
Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce.
Named in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
FLOWER, MOUNT: mountain with two summits,
the highest about 4,800 ft. in el., standing 6.5 mi.
inland from Carse Pt. and George VI Sound on the
W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 70°12’S., 67°53’W. This
mountain lies partially within the margin of area
first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by
Lincoln Ellsworth, and its N. extremity was mapped
from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was
first surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill,
and later named for Geoffrey C. Flower, instructor
in survey at the Royal Geographical Soc., 1933-40,
who helped with the organization and working out
of the surveys made by the BGLE, 1934-37.
F. L. SMITH, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen
Alexandra Range, about 8,300 ft. in el., standing
N. of Mt. Fox and about 15 mi. SW. of Mt. Hope
on the W. side of Beardmore GIl.; in about 83°40’S.,
169°40’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under
Shackleton, 1907-9. Not adopted: Mount P. L.
Smith.
FLYING FISH, CAPE: cape which forms the NW.
extremity of Thurston Pen. and marks the physical
division between Walgreen Coast and Eights Coast;
in about 71°50’S., 100°50’W. Disc. by the USAS
on a flight from the Bear in February 1940. Named
by the US-SCAN for the USEE ship Flying Fish,
commanded by Lt. William M. Walker, USN, which
reached a point within 110 mi. of this cape; the
ship’s position on the morning of March 23, 1839
was reported to lie in 70°00’S., 100°16’W. Not
adopted: Cape Dart (q.v.).
Flying Fish, Cape: see Dart, Cape; Palmer, Cape.
FLYSPOT ROCKS: group of rocks, about 100 ft.
in el., lying about 14 mi. NW. of Terra Firma Is.
in Marguerite Bay; in 68°35’S., 68°06’W. The
rocks are ice covered on the S. sides but mainly
ice free on their N. sides. Probably first sighted
in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot who, from a
position slightly northwestward, charted a “doubt-
ful” islet in essentially this position. The group
was roughly sketched from the air by the BGLE
on a flight, Feb. 1, 1987. They were visited and
surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. The name arose
at an earlier date because of their indistinct ap-
pearance as represented on the BGLE map.
Foca, Pointe: see Penguin Point.
FOCA POINT: rocky point forming the S. side
of the entrance to Express Cove on the W. side of
Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°40’W.
Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the
Br-APC after the whale catcher Foca, belonging to
the Compania Argentina de Pesca, which visited
the South Orkney Is. in December 1926.
FOLD ISLAND: large island lying NW. of the en-
trance to William Scoresby Bay, off Kemp Coast;
in about 67°18’S., 59°25’E. This feature was seen
by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in Feb-
ruary 1936, who believed it to be part of the main-
land. It was determined to be an island and named
Foldoya by Norwegian cartographers who charted
this area from aerial photographs taken by a Nor.
exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937.
Not adopted: Folda Island.
Folda Island: see Fold Island.
FOLGER, CAPE: ice-covered cape forming the E.
side of the entrance to Vincennes Bay, on Budd
Coast; in about 66°05’S., 110°40’E. The position
of Cape Folger correlates closely with the W. end
of Wilkes’ “Budd’s High Land,” as charted as a
coastal landfall by the USEE in 1840. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Car.
Edward C. Folger, Jr., USN, commander of the ice-
breaker Edisto which assisted USN Op. Wm.
parties in establishing astronomical control sta-
tions in the Windmill Is., close SW. in Vincennes
Bay.
FORBES GLACIER: glacier which flows SW. and
then W. into the NE. corner of Square Bay, on the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°48’S., 66°44’W. It
is about 15 mi. long and 5 mi. wide in its central
part, but narrows to 2 mi. atits mouth. The lower
reaches of the glacier were first surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. The survey was com-
pleted in 1946-48 by the FIDS who named the
glacier for James D. Forbes (1809-1868), Scottish
physcist who was noted for his pioneer works on
glaciology.
Ford Range: see Edsel Ford Ranges.
FORDE, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain about
3,500 ft. in el., situated at the E. side of Cleveland
Gl. about 1.5 mi. NW. of Mt. Marston, in Victoria
Land; in about 76°53’S., 162°11’E. Charted by the
130
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Petty
Officer Robert Forde, RN, member of the expedi-
tion’s western geological party.
FOREL GLACIER: glacier about 2 mi. wide and
5 mi. long, flowing SW. into Blind Bay, on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°29’S., 66°30’W. First
roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill. Its lower reaches were surveyed in 1949
by the FIDS, and the glacier named by them for
Francois A. Forel, noted Swiss glacier physicist and
author, and first Pres. of the International Com-
mission of Glaciers in 1894.
FORELAND ISLET: islet which lies about 3 mi.
SSE. of North Foreland, and NE. cape of King
George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 61°55’S.,
57°36’W. This islet was known to sealers as early
as 1821. It takes its name from nearby North
Foreland. Not adopted: Foreland Island.
FORSTERS PASSAGE: body of water lying
between Bristol I. and Southern Thule, in the South
Sandwich Is.; in 59°14’S., 26°48’W. In 1775, a
Br. exp. under Cook applied the name Forster, after
John R. Forster, naturalist with the exp., to what
appeared to be a bay in essentially this position.
The bay was determined to be a strait by a Russ.
exp. under Bellingshausen in 1820. Not adopted:
Forster’s Passage.
FORT ROCK: rock, about 285 ft. in el., lying close
off the SE. end of Greenwhich I., South Shetland
Is.; in 62°34’S., 59°34’W. The feature was named
Castle Rock, probably by DI personnel following
their survey in 1935. The name Fort Rock, which
is equally descriptive of the feature, has been ap-
proved to avoid confusion with Castle Rock lying
close westward of Snow I., only 60 mi. away. Not
adopted: Castle Rock.
FORT WILLIAM: cape forming the NW. side of
the entrance to Discovery Bay, on Greenwhich I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°26’S., 59°45’W. The
name has been in use since at least 1930 and is
now established in international usage.
FORTRESS HILL: hill about 400 ft. in el., which
stands about 2 mi. N. of Terrapin Hill on The Naze,
a peninsula of northern James Ross I., which lies
S. of the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°56’S.,
57°31’W. Charted in 1946 by the FIDS, who gave
this descriptive name.
FORTUNA BAY: bay about 3 mi. long and 1 mi.
wide, which lies about midway between Stromness
and Antarctic Bays along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°48’W. Named after the
Fortuna, one of the vessels of the Nor.-Arg. whaling
131
exp. under C, A. Larsen which participated in estab-
lishing the first permanent whaling base at Gryt-
viken, South Georgia in 1904-5.
FORTUNA GLACIER: glacier flowing in a NE.
direction to its terminus about 1 mi. W. of Cape
Best, with an eastern distributary almost reaching
the W. side of Fortuna Bay, on the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°05’S., 36°51’W. Named in about
1912, presumably for the vessel Fortuna.
FORTUNA ROCKS: small group of rocks extend-
ing across the E. side of the entrance to Fortuna
Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in
54°06’S., 36°47’W. These rocks were indicated on
a chart by the GerAE under Filchner, who
examined Fortuna Bay in 1911-12. The name
Fortuna Rocks was in use prior to 1920 and derives
from nearby Fortuna Bay.
FOSDICK MOUNTAINS: an E-W. trending
range of mountains with marked serrated outlines,
lying between Balchen Gl. on the N. and Crevasse
Valley Gl. on the S., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in
Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°30’S., between
144°00’W. and 145°25’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE
in 1929, and named by Byrd for Raymond B. Fos-
dick, Pres. of the Rockefeller Foundation. Not
adopted: Raymond Fosdick Mountains, Raymond
Fosdick Range.
FOSSIL BLUFF: prominent rock bluff on the
E. coast of Alexander I Island, marking the N. side
of the mouth of Uranus GI. where it enters George
VI Sound; in 71°20’S., 68°17’W. This feature was
probably first sighted by Lincoln Ellsworth, who
photographéd segments of the coast in this vicin-
ity on Nov. 23, 1935. The bluff was first roughly
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and so
named by them because fossils were found in the
rock strata there. It was resurveyed in 1948 by
the FIDS.
FOSTER, CAPE: cape lying about 3 mi. SE. of
Carlsson Bay on the S. side of James Ross I., lying
S. of the NE.. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 64°27’S.,
57°59’W. Disc. by a Br. exp., 1839-43, under Ross,
who named it for Capt. Henry Foster, RN, leader
of a Br. exp. in the Chanticleer, 1828-31. The cape
was charted by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld,
1901-4.
FOSTER, MOUNT: peak, about 6,900 ft. in el.,
standing 4 mi. SW. of Mt. Pisgah in the central
part of Smith I., South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S.,
62°34’°W. Capt. Henry Foster, RN, who visited the
island in the Chanticleer in 1829, named this fea-
ture Mount Beaufort, but this name has gradually
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
been superseded by the present name, which honors
Captain Foster. Not adopted: Mount Beaufort,
Mount Beaufurt, Mount Pisgah (q.v.).
Foster, Mount: see Pisgah, Mount.
FOSTER, PORT: basin about 5 mi. long and
3.5 mi. wide, landlocked within Deception I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°58’S., 60°39’W. This
harbor was known to sealers as early as 1820, and
the name Port Foster has been well established
in international usage for over 100 years. Named
for Capt. Henry Foster, RN, who made pendulum
and magnetic observations in this harbor in 1829.
Not adopted: Port Williams, Yankee Harbor.
FOUL POINT: the N. point of the islet, with
off-lying rocks, which forms the E. side of the
entrance to Ommanney Bay,-on the N. coast of
Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°33’S.,
45°31’W. Disc. in December 1821 in the course of
the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer. The name first appears on
Powell’s chart, published in 1822.
FOUR LADIES BANK: submarine bank lying
off Prydz Bay, centering in about 67°30’S., 77°30’E.
Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Christensen, 1936-37,
and named after the four ladies of the exp. party.
FOURNIER BAY: bay about 5 mi. long and 3
mi. wide, indenting the NE. coast of Anvers I. about
7 mi. NW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., in the Palmer Arch.;
in about 64°31’S., 63°06’W. Probably first seen by
a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann. Charted by
the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by
him for V. Adm. Ernest Fournier, French Navy.
Not adopted: Baie E. Fournier [French].
FOX GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi.
wide and 5 mi. long, flowing NE. from the conti-
nental ice to Budd Coast, where it terminates in
a small tongue at the W. side of the entrance to
Colvocoresses Bay; in about 65°50’S., 114°35’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
Dr. J. L. Fox, asst. surgeon on the sloop of war
Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
FOX MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Alexandra
Range, about 8,800 ft. in el., rising directly S. of
Mt. F. L. Smith and about 17 mi. SW. of Mt. Hope,
on the W. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 83°40’S.,
169°35’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton.
Foyn, Cape: see Alexander, Cape.
FOYN COAST: that portion of the E. coast of
Palmer Pen. lying between Cape Alexander, in
66°44’S., 62°37’W. and Cape Northrop, in 67°24’S.,
132
65°16’W. Disc. in 1893 by a Nor. exp. under C. A.
Larsen, who named it for Svend Foyn, Norwegian
whaler of Tgnsberg whose invention of the grenade
harpoon has greatly facilitated modern whaling.
Not adopted: Foyn Land, Foynland, Svend Foyn
Coast.
Foyn Island: see Foyn Point.
FOYN POINT: point, surmounted by a peak
about 1,600 ft. in el. marking the N. side of the
entrance to Exasperation Inlet, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 61°39’W. Sir Hubert
Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928 photographed
an island off the E. coast of Palmer Pen., later
charting it in 66°30’S., 62°30’W. Subsequent com-
parison of Wilkins’ photographs of this feature with
those taken by the FIDS, who charted the coast
in 1947, indicate that this point, although con-
siderably N. of the position reported by Wilkins and
possibly on an island, is the feature named by him
Foyn Island. The name Foyn Point is given to
the SE. extremity of this feature. Named for Svend
Foyn. Not adopted: Foyn Island.
Foyniand: see Foyn Coast.
FRAM BANK: submarine bank lying off Mac-
Kenzie Bay, between about 67°00’S., and 67°30’S.,
and extending from about 68°30’E. to 71°30’E.
Disc. on Feb. 4, 1931 by Christensen, who named
it after Fridtjof Nansen’s famous ship, the Fram,
which was also used by Roald Amundsen in his
exp. to the South Pole.
FRAM ISLETS: small group of rocky islets and
rocks lying in the W. portion of Géologie Arch.,
about 2 mi. NNW. of Cape Géodésie, off Adélie
Coast; in 66°38’S., 1389°50’E. Photographed from
the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the
FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and named for the
Norwegian polar ship Fram, used by Fridtjof Nan-
sen in the Arctic and Roald Amundsen in the
Antarctic.
Framnaes, Cape; Framnas: see Framnes, Cape.
FRAMNAES POINT: point about 1.2 mi. SW. of
Cape Saunders, on the N. side of Stromness Bay,
South Georgia; in 54°08’S., 36°39’W. The name
was given prior to 1920, probably by Norwegian
whalers operating in the area. Not adopted:
Framnaes.
Framnaesodden: see Framnes Head.
FRAMNES, CAPE: cape which forms the NE.
end of Jason I., in the NW. part of Weddell Sea; in
65°57’'S., 60°33’W. Disc. and named in 1893 by a
Nor. exp. under C. A. Larsen. At that time Larsen
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
thought the cape to be a part of the mainland.
Named for Framnesodden, a cape in the Langefjord
Fjord in Norway. The cape was surveyed by the
FIDS in 1953. Not adopted: Cape Framnaes,
Framnas [German].
FRAMNES HEAD: small, rocky point lying close
N. of Tofte Gl. at the SE. side of Sandefjord Bay, on
the W. side of Peter I Island; in about 68°51’S.,
90°44’°W. Charted and named by a Nor. exp. under
Nils Larsen, who made the first landing on Peter I
Island at this point in February 1929. Not
adopted: Framnaesodden [Norwegian].
FRAMNES MOUNTAINS: group of mountains
on Mac-Robertson Coast, between 67°41’S. and
68°10’S. and between 62°12’E. and 63°07’E., con-
sisting of Casey Range, Masson Range, David
Range, and adjacent peaks and mountains. The
three major ranges and other lesser features were
sighted and named in February 1931 by the
BANZARE under Mawson. This coast was also
sighted by Norwegian whalers in the same season.
The whole area was mapped in detail by the Nor-
wegians as a result of aerial photography taken
under the direction of Lars Christensen in January
1937. This overall name for the several ranges was
given by Christensen after Framnesfjellet, a hill
near Sandefjord, Norway.
Fran Inlet: see Nantucket Inlet.
FRANCAIS, MOUNT: snow-covered mountain
about 9,100 ft. in el., standing SE. of the center of
Anvers I. about 5 mi. NNE. of Borgen Bay, in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S., 63°27’W. The Oster-
rieth Mtns., of which this mountain is the domi-
nant feature, have been known at least since the
BelgAE, under De Gerlache, explored the SE. coast
of Anvers I. in 1898. This mountain was later
sighted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who
named it for the exp. ship Francais. Not adopted:
Mount Francais.
Frangais Bight: see Francais Cove.
FRANCAIS COVE: small cove at the SW. side of
Port Charcot, which indents the N. end of Booth I.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°03’S.,
64°01’W. Disc. and charted by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot. Named by Charcot after the exp.
ship Francais, which was moored there during the
expedition’s winter operations at Port Charcot in
1904. Not adopted: Francais Bight.
FRANCAIS GLACIER: glacier about 4 mi. wide
and 14 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the continental
ice to Adélie Coast, about 8 mi. W. of Barré GI.; in
about 66°33’S., 138°15’E. Though no glaciers
133
were noted on D’Urville’s chart of this coast, the
close correlation of his “Baie des Ravins” feature
and narrative description with the indentation of
the coast near the foot of this glacier suggests
first sighting of this feature by the Fr. exp. under
D’Urville, 1837-40. During December 1912 F. H.
Bickerton and other members of the Main Base
Party of the AAK under Mawson camped on the
upland slopes close E. of the glacier, but no refer-
ence was made to the glacier in the AAE narratives
and scientific reports, though a clear view and
unpublished sketch were obtained of the distant
coast to the NW. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The
FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, sledged W. on the sea
ice off Adélie Coast to the ice cliffs close E. of the
glacier. Named for the Francais, exp. ship of the
FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5.
FRANCES, CAPE: cape on the E. side of Sturge
I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 67°30’S., 164°30’E.
In 1841, Capt. James Clark Ross, viewing Sturge I.
from a considerable distance, thought it a group of
three islands and named the center island, Frances.
This error was disc. in 1904 by Capt. Robert F.
Scott, who applied the name to this cape.
FRANCIS ISLAND: island which is irregular in
shape, about 7 mi. long and 5 mi. wide, lying about
12 mi. ENE. of Cape Choyce, off the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 67°37’S., 64°45’W. Disc. and
photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940.
Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for
S. J. Francis, FIDS surveyor. Not adopted:
Robinson Island.
Frank Houlder, Mount: see Houlder, Mount.
FRANK NEWNES GLACIER: glacier descending
steeply from the high plateau of northern Victoria
Land into the S. part of Pressure Bay; in about
71°27'S., 169°17’E. First charted in 1899 by the
BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named this
feature for Frank Newnes, the only son of the exp.
sponsor, Sir George Newnes.
FRANKLIN, MOUNT: peak standing about 2.5
mi. NNW. of Mt. Helen Washington, near the S.
end of the N. group of the Rockefeller Mtns., on
Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°03’S., 155°21’W.
Disc. and named by the ByrdAH, Jan. 27, 1929.
Franklin D. Roosevelt Sea: see Amundsen Sea.
FRANKLIN ISLAND: island about 12 mi. long in
a N.-S. direction and about 6 mi. wide, which lies
in the Ross Sea about 80 mi. E. of Victoria Land
and about 60 mi. N. of Cape Bird, Ross I.; in about
76°07’S., 168°20’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
under Ross, who named it for Sir John Franklin,
English Arctic explorer.
FRASER POINT: the N. tip of the peninsula
between Marr Bay and Mackintosh Cove, on the
N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°41’S., 44°31/W. Charted in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, who named it for F. C.
Fraser, member of the zoological staff of the Dis-
covery Committee. Not adopted: Frazier Point.
FRAZIER, MOUNT: northernmost peak of the
Rockefeller Mtns., standing about 2.5 mi. N. of
Mt. Jackling of Edward VII Pen. and almost sub-
merged in the icecap; in about 77°51’S., 155°23’W.
Disc. on Jan. 27, 1929 by members of the ByrdAE
on an exploratory flight to this area. Named for
Russell G. Frazier, medical officer at West Base of
the USAS, 1939-41, and observer of the Rockefeller
Mountains Geological Party, which visited this
area in December 1940. Not adopted: Mount Irene
Frazier.
Frazier Point: see Fraser Point.
Frederick H. Rawson Mountains: see Rawson
Mountains.
FREDRIKSEN ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi.
long and 0.5 mi. wide which lies 0.5 mi. SE. of
Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
45°00’W. First charted in detail in 1912-13 by a
Nor. whaling exp. under Sgrlle. Not adopted:
Fredriksen’s Island, Fredriksens Island.
FREEMAN, CAPE: cape marking the E. end of
the peninsula separating Seligman and Trail In-
lets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°59’S.,
65°20’W. The cape was photographed from the
air in 1940 by the USAS. Charted in 1947 by the
FIDS, who named it for R. L. Freeman, FIDS sur-
veyor at the Stonington I. base.
FREEMAN, CAPE: cape forming the N. end of
Sturge I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 67°12’S.,
164°10’E. Named for H. Freeman, commander of
the cutter Sabrina, which sailed with the schooner
Eliza Scott, in 1938, on the voyage resulting in the
discovery of the Balleny Is. in 1839.
FREEMAN GLACIER: channel glacier about 2
mi. wide and 6 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti-
nental ice to the W. side of Perry Bay, immediately
EK. of Freeman Pt., on Clarie Coast; in about
66°00’S. 132°35’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for J. D. Freeman, sail-
maker on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE
under Wilkes, 1838-42.
134
FREEMAN POINT: small ice-covered point,
lying immediately W. of Freeman Gl. and marking
the W. side of the entrance to Perry Bay, on Clarie
Coast; in about 65°55’S., 132°35’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for J. D.
Freeman of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
FREEZELAND ROCK: rock, about 900 ft. in el.,
lying about 2.6 mi. W. of Bristol I., in the South
Sandwich Is.; in 59°03’S., 26°41’W. Disc. by a Br.
exp. under Cook in 1775, and named Freezeland
Peak after the crew member who first sighted it.
When the feature was charted as an insular rock
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, the
name was altered accordingly. Not adopted:
Freezeland Peak.
FRENCH PASSAGE: passage extending in a
NW.-SE. direction between the Dannebrog Is., to
the NE., and the Roca Islets and Argentine Is.,
to the SW., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°10’S., 64°20’W. Named by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill. The Pourquoi-Pas?, exp. ship of
the FrAE under Charcot, navigated this passage
in January 1909.
FRESHFIELD, CAPE: long, snow-domed point
of land on George V Coast; in about 68°20'S.,
151°10’E. This is probably the cape viewed from
a great distance, as a result of “looming” or
a superior mirage, by Lt. Charles Wilkes of the
USEE, from the Vincennes on Jan. 19, 1840, and
named by him for Lt. William Hudson of the Pea-
cock, second officer of the USEE, who also saw
land in the same direction on that day. The loca-
tion of the cape was determined in 1912 by the
Far Eastern Party of the AAE under Mawson, who
named it for Douglas Freshfield, one time Pres.
of the Royal Geographical Society. Not adopted:
Cape Hudson.
FRICKER GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long,
which lies close N. of Monnier Pt. and flows in a
NE. direction into the W. side of Mill Inlet, on the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°02’S., 64°56’W.
Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for
Karl Fricker, German Antarctic historian.
FRIDA HOLE: small bay lying 0.5 mi. SE. of
Coal Hbr., along the S. coast and near the W.
end of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°57’W. Prob-
ably named by early whalers or sealers who used
the bay as an anchorage.
FRIDTJOF NANSEN, MOUNT: massive moun-
tain, about 13,100 ft. in el., forming the E. flank
of Liv Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
85°28’S., 167°00’W. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Amundsen in 1911, and named for Dr. Fridtjof
Nansen, polar explorer, who helped support
Amundsen’s expedition. Not adopted: Mount
Nansen.
Fridjof-Nansen Bank: see Fridtjof Nansen Banks,
Fridjof Sound: see Fridtjof Sound.
FRIDTJOF NANSEN BANKS: submerged, rocky
ridge, about 3.5 mi. long. and about 0.5 mi. wide,
with a depth of about 18 ft. over its E. end, situ-
ated about 3.5 mi. ENE. of Cape George, off the
N. coast of South Georgia; in about 54°16’S.,
36°09’W. Named after the S.S. Fridtjof Nansen
which was wrecked on this ridge in 1907. Not
adopted: Fridjof-Nansen Bank, Fridjof-Nansen
Banks, Fridtjof-Nansen Banks, Fritjof Nansen
Bank, Nansen Bank, Nansen Rocks.
Fridtjof Nansen Hafen: see Stromness Harbor.
FRIDTJOF SOUND: sound about 6 mi. long,
in a N.-S. direction, and 2 mi. wide, which sep-
arates Andersson and Jonassen Islands from
Tabarin Pen., at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°35’S., 56°43’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjold, and named after the Fridtjof,
a vessel dispatched from Sweden to search for
the SwedAE when it was feared lest in 1903. Not
adopted: Détroit du Frithjof [French], Fridjof
Sound, Frithjof Sound, Frithiofs Sund [Swedish].
FRIEDERICHSEN GLACIER: glacier about 7
mi. long, which flows in an easterly direction into
Cabinet Inlet, close N. to Mt. Hulth, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°38’S., 64°09’W.
Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for
Ludwig Friederichsen, German cartographer who
in 1895 published a chart based upon all existing
explorations of northern Palmer Peninsula and
the South Shetland Islands. Not adopted: Bailey
Glacier.
Friesland Island: see Livingston Island.
Friesland Peak: see Barnard, Mount.
Friesland Point: see Pin Point.
FRIGGA PEAK: peak about 5,100 ft. in el.,
which stands at the S. side of Anderson Gl. on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°25’S., 64°00’W.
Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE in 1947. The FIDS named it after
the mythological Norse goddess Frigga, the “cloud
spinner,” because cloud was observed to form on
the summit of this peak earlier than on any other
feature in this vicinity.
135
Frithiof Sound; Frithiofs Sund: see Fridtjof
Sound.
Frithjof, Détroit du: see Fridtjof Sound.
Fritjof Nansen Bank: see Fridtjof Nansen Banks.
Froa: see Couling Island.
FROST GLACIER: channel glacier about 8 mi.
wide and 7 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti-
nental ice to the head of Porpoise Bay, on Banzare
Coast; in about 66°55’S., 128°50’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for John
Frost, boaswain on the brig Porpoise of the USEE
under Wilkes, 1838-42.
FRY GLACIER: long, deep outlet glacier, about
2 mi. wide, with vertical, smooth rock walls, which
merges with Albrecht Penck Gl., about 25 mi. S.
of Nordenskj6ld Ice Tongue, on the coast of Vic-
toria Land; in about 76°38’S., 162°32’E. First
charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton,
who named it for A. M. Fry, of Bristol, England,
a contributor to the expedition.
Fry Strait; Fyr Strait: see Fyr Channel.
FRYER POINT: northern point of Bristol I., in
the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°59’S., 26°30’W.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, and named for Lt. Cdr. D. H. Fryer, RN, captain
of H. M. Surveying Ship Fitzroy.
FUCHS ICE PIEDMONT: large ice piedmont,
about 6 to 10 mi. wide and about 80 mi. long, ex-
tending in a NE.-SW. direction along the entire
W. coast of Adelaide I.; centering in 67°10'S.,
68°55’W. First roughly surveyed in 1909 by the
FrAE under Charcot. It was named by the FIDS
for Vivian E. Fuchs, FIDS base leader and geolo-
gist at Stonington I. in 1948-48.
FULMAR BAY: semi-circular bay, about 1 mi.
wide at the entrance, lying between Moreton Pt.
and Return Pt. at the W. end of Coronation I.,
South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 46°02’W. First
sighted and roughly charted by Capt. George
Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer on their joint
cruise in December 1821. It was surveyed in 1933
by DI personnel. So named in 1954 by the Br-APC
because large numbers of Antarctic fulmars (Ful-
marus glacialoides) nest in this area.
FURNESS GLACIER: small glacier flowing
northward to the coast between Cape Belsham and
Mt. Houlder, on the N. coast of Elephant I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°02’S., 55°00’W.
Charted and named by a Br. exp. under Shackleton,
1914-16.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
FYR CHANNEL: channel about 0.2 mi. wide
between the SW. end of Signy I. and Moe I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°41’W. The name
Fyr Strait appears on a manuscript chart drawn
by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912, and corrected by
Hans Borge in 1913, but the generic term channel
is approved because of the small size of this feature.
Not adopted: Fry Strait, Fyr Strait.
GABLENZ RANGE: prominent N.-S. trending
range, about 25 mi. long and about 8,800 ft. in el.,
in the Miihlig-Hofmann Mtns. projecting from the
intermediate icecap level about 15 mi. N. of the
edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; in
about 72°00’S., 4°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-
39, under Ritscher, and named for the dir. of the
German Lufthansa Corporation.
GADARENE LAKE: a meltwater lake, about 1 mi.
long, in the ice shelf of George VI Sound, lying
below Swine Hill with its E. shore bounding the
exposed rocks of the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
71°24’S., 67°35’W. In summer a considerable
volume of water enters the lake from the ravine
immediately N. of Swine Hill. First seen and sur-
veyed in 1948 by the FIDS. The name arose at
that time and results from the mad rush by the
FIDS sledge dogs which attempted to throw them-
selves and their sledge down the steep ice slopes
into the water, like the Gadarene swine.
GAGE, CAPE: rocky promontory forming the E.
end of James Ross I. and the N. side of the E.
entrance to Admiralty Sound, S. of the NE. tip of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°10’S., 57°04’W. Disc. by a Br.
exp., 1839-43, under Ross, who named it for V. Adm.
William Hall Gage, a Lord Commissioner of the
Admiralty.
GALINDEZ ISLAND: islet immediately E. of
Winter I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°15’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for
Cdr. Ismael F. Galindez, Argentine Navy, who was
dispatched in the Uruguay to search for Charcot,
when the exp. was feared lost early in 1905. The
islet was accurately charted by the BGLE under
Rymill, 1934-37.
GALLOWS POINT: the northernmost of two low,
parallel points which mark the NE. extremity of
Gamma I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in
64°20’S., 62°59’W. The name was probably given
by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the point
in 1927. The point was resurveyed by Argentine
expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948.
GAMMA ISLAND: island, about 1 mi. long, which
marks the SW. extremity of the Melchior Is. in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 63°00’W. This island
136
was first roughly charted and named “Ile Gouts”
by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, but that name
has not survived in usage. The name Gamma,
derived from the third letter of the Greek alphabet,
was probably given by DI personnel who roughly
surveyed the island in 1927. The island was sur-
veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and
1948. Not adopted: Ile Gouts [French], Isla Ob-
servatorio [Spanish].
GAND ISLAND: flat, ice-covered island, about 3
mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying at the N. end of
Schollaert Chan. between Anvers and Brabant
Islands, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°24’S., 62°51’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache,
and named by him after Gand, the French form of
Ghent, a city in Belgium where subscription drives
were held to help finance the expedition.
GAP, THE: a col between Crater and Observation
Hills, at the S. end of Hut Point Pen., on Ross I.; in
about 77°51’S., 166°40’E. Charted and named by
the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. BrNAE sledge
parties traversed the S. end of the peninsula via
this low level passage.
GARAN, MOUNT: mountain about 4,500 ft. in el.,
marked by a cluster of small peaks protruding’
above the continental ice, standing about 10 mi.
SSW. of Mt. Strathcona and forming part of the W.
side of the upper reaches of Scott Gl., on Queen
Mary Coast; in about 67°32’S., 98°42’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
E. M. Garan, aerial photographer on USN Op. Hjp.
flights which obtained photographic coverage in
this area and other coastal areas between 14° and
164°, east longitude.
Garcia, Cap: see Loqui Point.
GARCIA, CAPE: cape with vertical cliffs forming
the N. side of the entrance of Barilari Bay and the
S. side of the entrance to Bigo Bay, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°45’S., 64°40’W. This cape
was first seen, roughly surveyed, and named “Cap
Loqui” by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. At
the same time Charcot gave the name ‘“‘Cap Garcia”
to the S. point of Barilari Bay after Rear Admiral
Garcia, Argentine Navy. The maps of the FrAE,
1908-10, under Charcot showed “Cap Garcia” as
the N. cape of Barilari Bay and the name Cape
Garcia has since become established for this fea-
ture. Charcot did not use the name “Cap Loqui”
on the maps of his second expedition but, for the
sake of historical continuity, the name Loqui Point
(q.v.) has been accepted for the point at the S. side
of Barilari Bay. Not adopted: Cap Loqui [French].
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
GARDINER, MOUNT: ridge-like, granitic moun-
tain, about 8 mi. long and about 8,000 ft. in el.,
standing just S. of the junction of Bartlett and
Robert Scott Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range;
its northern extremity lies in about 86°13’S.,
151°15’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named
by Byrd for T. Joseph Gardiner of Wellington, New
Zealand, agent for Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of
1928-30 and 1933-35.
Gardner Bay: see Gardner Inlet.
Gardner Glacier: see Ketchum Glacier.
GARDNER INLET: large, ice-filled inlet lying at
the SW. side of Bowman Pen., on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 74°58’S., 62°52’W. Disc. by the
RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for
Irvine C. Gardner, physicist at the National Bureau
of Standards, and member of the American Antarc-
tic Assn., Inc., the organization set up to make
plans and preparations for the expedition. His
work in the field of optics as applied to aerial
photography has been an important contribution
to this technique in polar exploration. Not
adopted: American Geographical Society Bay,
Gardner Bay.
Garland Hersey Ridge; Garland Hershey Ridge:
see Hershey Ridge.
Garnet, Cape: see Garnet Point.
GARNET HILL: rocky hill, about 750 ft. in el.,
standing on the E. side of McLeod Gl. in the S. part
of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°38’W.
It forms the S. end of a line of rock and ice cliffs
which separate McLeod Gl. from Orwell Gl. So
named by the FIDS, following their survey of 1947,
because of the abundance of garnets found there.
GARNET POINT: rocky point, consisting of
coarse garnet gneiss, connected by a steep ice slope
to the continental ice, about 11 mi. SE. of Cape
Gray, on George V Coast; in about 66°56’S.,
143°46’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Maw-
son, and named by the geological party under
Frank L. Stillwell. Not accepted: Cape Garnet.
GARNET ROCKS: group of three rocks lying
2 mi. W. of the Refuge Its. in the N. part of Rymill
Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°21’S.,
67°04’W. First surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS
and so named by them because of the occurrence
of garnet in the rocks.
GASTON ISLET: islet about 1 mi. N. of Cape
Reclus, lying in De Gerlache Str., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 64°23’S., 61°48’W. Disc. by the
424589 O--57 -10
137
BelgAE, 1897-99, under Lt. Adrien de Gerlache, and
named by him for his brother. Not accepted: Gas-
ton Island.
GAUDRY, MOUNT: mountain about 7,600 ft. in
el., which stands about 8 mi. SSW. of Mt. Mangin
in the S. part of Adelaide Is., in 67°32’S., 68°37’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who
named it for Albert Gaudry, prominent French
paleontologist. Not adopted: Mount Goudry,
Sommet A. Gaudry [French].
Gauss, Mount: see Gaussherg.
GAUSS, MOUNT: a massif with a cap of black
rock, lying about 3 mi. NE. of Mt. Chetwynd on the
S. side of Mawson Gl., in the Prince Albert Mtns.
of Victoria Land; in about 76°19’S., 162°20’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE, 1901-04, under Scott, who named
it for Prof. Karl Friedrich Gauss, German mathe-
matician and astronomer.
GAUSSBERG: extinct volcanic cone about 1,150
ft. in el., fronting on Davis Sea immediately W.
of Posadowsky Gl., and dominating a major portion
of Wilhelm II Coast; in 66°48’S., 89°19’E. Disc.
in February 1902 by the GerAE under Drygalski,
who named it for the exp. ship Gauss which was
frozen in the pack ice about 50 mi. N. until Febu-
ary 1903. Not adopted: Mount Gauss (q.v.),
Mount Gaussberg.
GAUTHIER POINT: point which forms the NW.
extremity of Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°50’S., 63°36’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under
Charcot, who named it for Monsieur Gauthier,
builder of the exp. ships Frangais and Pourquoi-
Pas?.
GBUREK PEAKS: an E.-W. series of peaks in
New Schwabenland, extending about 60 mi., in
about 72°15’S. on the Greenwich Meridian. They
project through the icecap about 30 mi. N. of the
edge of the polar plateau. Disc. by the GerAEK
under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Leo Gbu-
rek, geophysicist on the expedition.
GEDDES, CAPE: cape which forms the N. end
of Ferguslie Pen. on the N. coast of Laurie I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°35’W. First
charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who
named it for Prof. P. (later Sir Patrick) Geddes,
noted Scottish biologist and sociologist.
GEDGES REEF: reef about 3.5 mi. NNW. of Grim
Rock and some 12 mi. WSW. of Cape Tuxen, off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°21’S., 64°33’W.
Disc. by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and
named after The Gedges, a dangerous reef off the
mouth of the Helford River in Cornwall, England.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
GEIKIE GLACIER: glacier which flows in a NE.
direction to Mercer Bay, at the SW. end of Cum-
berland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S.,
36°41’W. First charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjéld, who named it for Sir Archi-
bald Geikie, noted Scottish geologist and Director-
General of the Geological Survey of the United
Kingdom.
GEIKIE INLET: inlet about 7 mi. wide at its
entrance, lying between the cliffs of the Drygal-
ski Ice Tongue on the N. and Clarke Gl. and Lamp-
lugh I. on the §S., in Victoria Land; in about
75°33’S., 163°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, who named it for Sir Archibald Geikie.
Geikie Land; Geikie Point: see Geikie Ridge.
GEIKIE RIDGE: massive ridge terminating as
a divide between Murray and Dugdale Glaciers,
in the Robertson Bay area of northern Victoria
Land; in about 71°36’S., 169°58’E. The landward
extent of the feature remains to be determined.
First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E.
Borchgrevink, who named the highland between
these glaciers Geikie Land, after Sir Archibald
Geikie. The generic “land” has been changed to
“ridge,” since it was not appropriate for so small
a feature, but Borchgrevink’s intent in naming
the whole mass has been respected. Not adopted:
Geikie Land, Geikie Point.
GEMINI NUNATAK: nunatak consisting of two
almost ice-free peaks, about 1.25 mi. apart and
about 1,600 ft. in el., which are connected by a
narrow, rock ridge extending in a NNW.-SSE. di-
rection. The nunatak protrudes through the ice
along the E. coast of Palmer Pen. about 5 mi. S.
of Borchgrevink Nunatak; in 66°08’S., 62°30’W.
Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS after
the constellation Gemini, which contains the twin
stars Castor and Pollux.
GEODESIE, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape, marked
by prominent rock outcrops at its NE. end, lying
about 3 mi. NW. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, on
Adélie Coast; in 66°40’S., 139°51’E. Photographed
from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted
by the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, and so named
because of the extensive geodetic program under-
taken in this region, particularly in the Géologie
Arch. close off shore.
GEOLOGIE, POINT: (in about 66°37’S.,
140°12’E.) the decision of May 1947 has been
VACATED, since it is not now possible to identify
the feature. See descriptions for Débarquement
Rock, Géologie Archipelago and Pétrel Island.
138
GEOLOGIE ARCHIPELAGO: small archipelago
of rocky islets and rocks, lying close N. of Cape
Géodésie and Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, and ex-
tending from Héléne It. on the W. to the Dumou-
lin Its. on the E., off Adélie Coast; centering in
66°39’S., 139°55’E. The Fr. exp. under D’Urville
landed on Débarquement Rock in the Dumoulin
Its. in January 1840, and applied the name ‘Pointe
Géologie” to a coastal feature charted as lying close
behind Débarquement Rock. The archipelago was
delineated. in part, from aerial photographs taken
by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Following surveys and
geological studies by FrAE parties during the 1950-
52 period, the French antarctic sub-committee re-
assigned the name ‘Pointe Géologie”’ to the entire
archipelago, as D’Urville’s coastal feature is be-
lieved to correlate with portions of the cluster of
islets lying close N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue.
Not adopted: Archipel de Pointe Géologie [French],
Geology Archipelago.
Géologie, Archipel de Pointe: Geology Archipel-
ago: see Géologie Archipelago.
GEOLOGY, CAPE: low, gravel-covered cape
marking the W. end of Botany Bay, on the S. side
of Granite Hbr. in Victoria Land; in about 77°00’S.,
162°35’E. Charted and named by the western geo-
logical party of the BrAE 1910-13, who established
their base on this cape.
GEORGE, CAPE: cape about 6 mi. ESE. of Barff
Pt., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S.,
36°16’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook,
who named it for George III, King of Great Britain.
George Bay: see Hound Bay.
GEORGE BRYAN COAST: that portion of the
coast of Antarctica along the S. shore of Bellings-
hausen Sea, extending from the cape at the W.
side of the entrance to Carroll Inlet, in about 79°W..,
to the westernmost point visible on the USAS
flight of Dec. 22, 1940, in about 85°W. Named by
the US-SCAN for R. Adm. George S. Bryan, Hydrog-
rapher of the U. S. Navy, 1938-46, under whose
direction noteworthy contributions to polar geog-
raphy were made.
George Getz Shelf Ice: see Getz Ice Shelf.
George Harbour, Cape: see Godthul.
GEORGE V COAST: that portion of the coast
of Antarctica lying between Point Alden, in
142°02’E., and 153°00’E. Explored in 1912-13 by
members of the Main Base party of the AAE under
Mawson, and named for King George V of England.
The area immediately eastward of this coast has
not been explored by land or ship parties, but has
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
been photographed from the air, in part, by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Not adopted: King George V
Coast, King George V Land, Kong George V-Land
[Norwegian], Konig George V-Land [German].
George IV Sea: see Weddell Sea.
GEORGE MURRAY, MOUNT: flat-topped moun-
tain about 3,600 ft. in el., lying on the S. side of
Davis Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 75°52’S.,
161°55’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott
who named it for George R. M. Murray of the Brit-
ish Museum staff, dir. of the scientific staff for
Scott’s expedition.
GEORGE VI SOUND: major fault depression,
about 300 mi. long in the shape of the letter J,
which skirts the E. and S. shores of Alexander I
Island, separating it from Palmer Pen. and Robert
English Coast; centering in about 71°S., 68°W.
The sound is ice covered and varies from about
15 mi. to more than 40 mi. wide. Disc. by Lincoln
Ellsworth who flew over it in 1935. It was ex-
plored by the BGLE, in 1936-37, and by the USAS
in 1940. Named by Rymill, leader of the BGLE, for
George VI, King of England. Not adopted: King
George VI Sound.
GEORGES, CAPE: the N. tip of De Rongé I.,
lying about 8 mi. SW. of Cape Anna, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°41’S., 62°41’W. Disc.
and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache.
Georges Bay: see King George Bay.
Georgia, Isle of; Georgia Del Sur, Isla: see South
Georgia.
GERD ISLET: islet about 2.5 mi. W. of Cape
Vik, lying at the E. side of the entrance to Nor-
way Bight, off the S. coast of Coronation I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°46’W.
Charted and probably named by a Nor. whaling
exp. under Sgrlle, who made a running survey of
the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Not adopted:
Gerd Island. ;
Gerlache, Cape: see De Gerlache, Cape.
Gerldche Point: see De Gerlache Point.
Gerlache Strait: see De Gerlache Strait.
GESSNER PEAK: peak about 10,800 ft. in el.,
which stands immediately N. of Mt. Habermehl in
the Muhlig-Hofmann Mtns. of New Schwabenland;
in about 71°47’S., 6°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE,
1938-39, under ‘Ritscher, and named for the man-
ager of the German Hansa-Luftbild Corporation.
139
Gestlingen: see Goslings Islets.
Getz Shelf Ice: see Getz Ice Shelf.
GETZ ICE SHELF: ice shelf in Wrigley Gulf,
along the shore of northeastern Marie Byrd Land;
in about 75°S., 129°W. The topographical and
locational definition of this feature must remain
indefinite until clarified by further exploration.
Disc. in December 1940 by the USAS and named
for George F. Getz, of Chicago, Ill., who helped
furnish the seaplane for the expedition. Not
adopted: George Getz Shelf Ice, Getz Shelf Ice.
Gibb Island: see Gibbs Island.
GIBBON BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. long and wide,
which lies between Rayner Pt. and The Turret
along the E. coast of Coronation I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°12’W. Probably first
sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Na-
thaniel Palmer, in the course of their joint cruise
in December 1821. Charted in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, and named for the
ship’s surgeon, Dr. G. M. Gibbon.
GIBBS ISLAND: island which lies about 18 mi.
SSW. of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in about 61°30’S., 55°36’W. James Weddell,
Master, RN, whose chart of the islands appeared in
1825, seems first to have used the present name
which is now established international usage. Not
adopted: Gibb Island, Gibbs Islands, Narrow Isle,
Rainoff’s Island.
Gilbert Grosvenor Range: see Grosvenor Range.
GILCHRIST GLACIER: channel glacier about
4 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing NE. from the
continental ice to Budd Coast, about 10 mi. NW.
of Fox GI1.; in about 65°45’S., 114°15’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Dr. Ed-
ward Gilchrist, acting surgeon on the sloop of
war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
GILES, MOUNT: highest of a group of glaciated
mountains, snow-free only on the heights, marking
the W. side of the entrance to Cordell Hull Bay,
in Marie Byrd Land; in about 75°10’S., 137°00’W.
Disc. on aerial flights made from West Base of the
USAS in 1940 and named for T. Sgt. Walter R.
Giles, USMC, co-pilot and radio operator on sev-
eral of these flights. Not adopted: Mount Carrol
Kettering.
GILLIES ISLETS: three small, rocky islets pro-
truding above Shackleton Ice Shelf, about 6 mi.
N. of Cape Moyes, off Queen Mary Coast; in
66°32’S. 96°24’E. Disc. by the Western Base Party
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
of the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named
the group for F. J. Gillies, chief engineer of the
exp. ship Aurora. Astronomical control was estab-
lished on the central islet by USN Op. Wml. per-
sonnel in January 1948. Not adopted: Gillies Is-
lands, Gillies Nunatak, Gillies Nunataks.
Gillies Nunataks: see Gillies Islets.
GILLOCK ISLAND: ice-covered island about 17
mi. long and 2 to 3 mi. wide, with numerous out-
crops exposed along its flanks, aligned in a NNW.—
SSE. direction across the main flow of Baker Three
Gl. and lying about 14 mi. W. of Jennings Promon-
tory, the W. end of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in
about 70°12’S., 71°00’E. Delineated in 1952 by
John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by
USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him
for Lt. Robert A. Gillock, USN, navigator on USN
Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and
other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east
longitude.
GILMOUR, MOUNT: mountain, above 2,000 ft.
in el., on the central part of the irregular ridge
separating Crevasse Valley Gl. and Arthur Davis
Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land;
in about 76°55’S., 144°38’W. Disc. in 1940 by mem-
bers of West Base of the USAS. Named for Harold
P. Gilmore, recorder, and subsequently historian
and administrative asst. to the exp. commander.
GIRARD BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. long and wide,
indenting the W. coast of Palmer Pen. between
Cape Cloos and Mt. Scott; in 65°09’S., 64°00’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache.
Named by the FrAE 1903-5, under Charcot, for
Jules Girard of the Paris Société de Géographie.
GIRDLER ISLET: narrow islet at the S. side of
Mutton Cove, lying about 0.2 mi. SW. of Cliff It.
and some 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°42’W. Charted
and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill.
GIST, MOUNT: mountain about 4,000 ft. in el.,
marked by a cluster of small peaks protruding
above the continental ice, standing about 6 mi.
WNW. of Mt. Strathcona on Queen Mary Coast;
in about 67°19’S., 98°42’E. Delineated from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. 1946-47,
and named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Francis J.
Gist, USN, co-pilot and navigator on USN Op.
Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other
coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude.
GJERTSEN, MOUNT: mountain about 3 mi. E.
of Mt. Grier, which together form the NW. end
of the La Gorce Mtns. standing at the E. side and
near the head of Robert Scott Gl. in the Queen
140
Maud Range; in about 86°40’S., 147°50’W. Disc.
in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party
under Quin Blackburn, and so named in an attempt
to reconcile Byrd’s discoveries with the names
applied in 1911-12 by the Nor. exp. under Roald
Amundsen. Amundsen had named a peak in this
vicinity for Lt. Hg. F. Gjertsen of the Norwegian
Navy, second mate of the Fram, Amundsen’s exp.
ship, and later ice pilot for the ByrdAE, 1933-35.
Not adopted: Mount F. Gjertsen.
Gjeslingene: see Goslings Islets.
GLACIER BAY: small bay formed by the
grounded, concave seaward front of McDonald Gl.
along Caird Coast; in about 75°20’S., 26°15’W.
Disc. and named in January 1915 by a Br. exp.
under Shackleton.
GLACIER BLUFF: abrupt glacier face marking
the E. end of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich Is.;
in 59°01’S., 26°26’W. Charted and named in 1930
by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
GLACIER BLUFF: ice cliff about 170 ft. in el.
forming the inner N. side of the entrance to Yankee
Hbr., Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°31’S., 59°48’W. Charted and named in 1935 by
DI personnel on the Discovery II.
Glacier Dome: see McLeod Hill.
Glacier Terra Nova: see Astrolabe Glacier.
Glacier Tongue: see Helen Glacier Tongue.
Glandaz, Cape: see Glandaz Point.
GLANDAZ POINT: point forming the S. side of
the entrance to Deloncle Bay, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°06’S., 63°55’W. Disc. by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Charted by
the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by
him for A. Glandaz. Not adopted: Cape Glandaz.
GLENZER GLACIER: channel glacier about 5
mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the
continental ice to Knox Coast, about 5 mi. W. of
Conger Gl.; in about 66°05’S., 103°28’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
Lt. (j.g.) Hubert Glenzer, Jr., USN, pilot with USN
Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in operations re-
sulting in the establishment of astronomical con-
trol stations along the coast from Wilhelm II Coast
to Budd Coast.
Gletcher-Joch: see Ross Pass.
GNEISS HILLS: two prominent hills, about 900
ft. in el., lying on the W. side of McLeod Gl. in the
SW. part of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
45°39’W. So named by the FIDS, following their
survey of 1947, because a band of pink gneiss out-
crops near the summits.
GNEISS POINT: point about 6 mi. N. of Cape
Bernacchi, in front of the Wilson Piedmont Gl.
along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°24’S.,
163°40’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1910-13,
under Scott, and so named because of the gneissic
granite found there.
GNOME ISLET: rocky islet lying between the W.
side of Blaiklock I. and Thomson Head near the
head of Bourgeois Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°33’S., 66°50’W. First surveyed in 1949
by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the
resemblance of the islet to a small gnomelike
creature rising from the sea.
GNOMON ISLET: rocky islet about 280 ft. in el.,
lying close N. of Point Wild, off the N. side of Ele-
phant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about
61°01’S., 54°59’W. Charted and named by a Br.
exp. under Shackleton, 1914-16. So named be-
cause when viewed from Point Wild the shape of
the islet is suggestive of the elevated arm of a
sundial.
Goat Hull Harbour;
Godthul.
Godthull Harbour: see
GOCKEL CREST: mountain crest of New
Schwabenland, in about 72°42’S., 0°10’W., lying
immediately N. of the nameless plateau projection
with which it forms the upper portion of the E.
wall of Penck Trough. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-
39, under Ritscher, and named for Wilhelm Gockel,
meteorological assistant on the expedition.
GODTHUL: bay about 1 mi. wide between Cape
George and Long Pt., along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°18’W. The name Godthul
(Good Hollow) dates back to the period 1905-12,
and was probably applied by Norwegian sealers and
whalers working in the area. Not adopted: Cape
George Harbour, Goat Hull Harbour, Godthul Bay,
Godthull Harbour, Goothul.
GOLD HARBOR: small bay about 5 mi. SSW. of
Cape Charlotte, with Bertrab Gl. at its head, along
the E. end of South Georgia; in 54°37’S., 35°56’W.
The name appears to have taken root through com-
mon usage by sealers and whalers and is now well
established.
GOLDIE, CAPE: snow-covered cape about 13 mi.
SE. of Cape Lyttelton, on the W. side of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 82°46’S., 165°40’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for
141
Sir George Goldie, a member of the committee
which made the final draft of the instructions for
the expedition.
GONDOLA RIDGE: rocky ridge about 1,800 ft.
in el., extending NNE. from Mt. Suess for about
2 mi., in Victoria Land; in about 77°01’S., 161°48’H.
Charted by the western geological party of the
BrAE, 1910-13, who so named it because Mt. Suess,
to which the ridge is joined, resembles a gondola
in shape. Not adopted: Gondola Nunakol.
Gondola Nunakol: see Gondola Ridge.
GONVILLE AND CAIUS RANGE: series of snow-
covered peaks, about 3,000 to 4,000 ft. in el., form-
ing the S. wall of the Mackay Gl. basin for a dis-
tance of about 10 mi., in Victoria Land; in about
77°05/S., 162°10’E. First charted by the BrAE un-
der Scott, 1910-13. Named for Gonville and Caius.
College of Cambridge Univ., the alma mater of
several members of the expedition.
GOODALE, MOUNT: high granitic peak of the
Will Hays Mountains, rising to about 7,000 ft. in
el., standing between Amundsen and Robert Scott
Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range; in about
85°58’S., 155°25’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the
ByrdAE geological party under Laurence Gould,
and named by Byrd for Edward E. Goodale, a mem-
ber of that party.
GOODENOUGH, CAPE: ice-covered cape, with
a small glacier tongue along its E. side, marking
the W. side of the entrance to Porpoise Bay and
forming the northernmost projection of Norths
Highland, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°10’S.,
126°20’E. Disc. by BANZARE under Mawson on
a distant aerial flight in January 1931, and named
by him for Adm. Sir William Goodenough, Pres. of
the Council, Royal Geographical Soc., 1930-33.
GOODENOUGH GLACIER: broad sweeping
glacier flowing from the W. shore of Palmer Pen.
into George VI Sound; in 72°00’S., 66°40’W. Disc.
in 1936 by Stephenson, Fleming, and Bertram of
the BGLE, under Rymill, while exploring George
VI Sound. Named by Rymill for Margaret Good-
enough, wife of Adm. Sir William Goodenough, who
was one of the principal supporters in raising funds
for the expedition. Not accepted: Margaret Good-
enough Glacier.
GOORKHA CRATERS: group of mountains and
hills about 4,000 ft. in el., lying in the Britannia
Range about 12 mi. SE. of Mt. Reeves, on the W.
side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°50’S., 159°10’E.
Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Goothul; see Godthul.
GORDON, CAPE: jagged headland about 1,100 ft.
in el., forming the E. end of Vega I., lying S. of the
NE, tip of Palmer Pen.; in 68°51’S., 57°03’W. Disc.
by a Br, exp., 1839-48, under Ross and named by
him for Capt. William Gordon, RN, a Lord Com-
missioner of the Admiralty.
Gordon Bennet, Ile: see Edgell, Mount.
GOSLINGS ISLETS: scattered group of numer-
ous islets and rocks lying close S. and W. of Cape
Meier, off the S. coast of Coronation I., South Ork-
ney Is.; in 60°39'S., 45°55’W. First charted and
named “Gestlingen” by Petter Sorlle in 1912-18.
This was corrected to “Gjeslingene” (The Goslings)
on a later chart by Sorlle. An English form of the
name was recommended by the Br-APC in 1954.
Not adopted: Gestlingen [Norwegian], Gjeslingene
[Norwegian].
GOSSLER ISLETS: string of N.-S. trending islets
about 1.5 mi. W. of Cape Albert de Monaco, Anvers
I, and extending about 5 mi. southward in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°44’S., 64°17°W. Disc. and
named by a Ger, exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74.
Not adopted: Gossler Islands.
GOUDIER ISLET: islet composed of bare
polished rock, lying about 100 yards N. of Jougla
Pt. in the harbor of Port Lockroy, in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°50'S., 68°31’W. Disc. by the FraAk,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for E.
Goudier, chief engineer of the exp. ship Francais.
Goudry, Mount: see Gaudry, Mount.
Gould, Mount; Gould Peak: see Charles Gould
Peak.
GOULD, MOUNT: a massif rising in the south-
central portion of the Tapley Mtns. and forming
part of the N. wall of Albanus Gl., in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 85°45’S., 149°00’W. Disc.
in December 1929 by the ByrdAE geological party
under Laurence Gould. Named by Byrd for Pres.
Laurence M, Gould of Carleton College, polar ex-
plorer, who served as geologist and second-in-com-
mand with this expedition.
GOULD BAY: bay which indents the Filchner
Ice Shelf in the S, part of Weddell Sea; in about
78°25'S., 44°00°W. Disc. by the RARE under
Ronne, 1947-48, and named by him for Laurence M.
Gould. Not adopted: Larry Gould Bay.
GOULDEN COVE: southern of two coves at the
head of Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King
George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S.,
142
58°385’W. Probably named by the FrAE under
Charcot, who surveyed Admiralty Bay in December
1909.
GOULD NUNATAK: peak rising above the icecap
of Enderby Land about 10 mi. SE. of Mt. Hurley;
in about 66°30’S., 51°20’E. Disc. and named in
January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson.
Goupil, Cape: see Legoupil, Cape.
GOURDIN ISLET: largest islet in a group of
islets and rocks about 1 mi. N. of Cape Siffrey, the
N. tip of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°12’S., 57°18’W.
Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and
named by him for Ens. Jean Gourdin of the exp.
ship Astrolabe. The islet was re-identified and
charted by the FIDS in 1945-47. Not adopted:
Gourdin Rock.
Gourdin Rock: see Gourdin Islet.
GOURDON, MOUNT: the summit of a NS.
trending mountain about 3,100 ft. in el., centrally
located in the S. half of Booth I., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S., 64°00’W. First charted
by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by
him for Ernest Gourdon, geologist of the expe-
dition.
GOURDON GLACIER: glacier, about 4 mi. long
and 1.5 mi. wide, lying 4 mi. SW. of Ekel6f Pt., and
flowing in a SE. direction into the central part of
Markham Bay on the E. coast of James Ross I.; in
64°15’S., 57°22°W. It has a conspicuous rock wall
at its head. First seen and surveyed by the
SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4, who named it
for Ernest Gourdon, geologist and glaciologist of
the French Antarctic Expedition, 1903-5.
GOURLAY PENINSULA: ice-free peninsula,
which is 200 yards wide at its base and widens to
800 yards, forming the SW. extremity of Signy I.,
South Orkney Is.; in 60°44'S., 45°36°W. The E.
end of the peninsula divides into three arms, Panto-
mime, Pageant and Gourlay Points. Surveyed in
1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in 1947 by
the FIDS. The name, applied by the Br—APC, de-
rives from the nearby Gourlay Point.
GOURLAY POINT: southernmost of three fin-
ger-like points which form the SE. end of Signy I,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°35°W.
Charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, and named for R. Gourlay, a third engineer of
the ship.
Gouts, Ile: see Gamma Island.
GOUVERNBEUR ISLET: low rocky islet about 1.4
mi. WSW. of Pétrel I., lying close N. of Astrolabe
Glacier Tongue at the S. end of Géologie Arch., off
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Adélie Coast; in about 66°40’S., 139°57’E. Photo-
graphed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
Charted and named by the FrAE under Liotard,
1949-51. Liotard was the first man to encamp on
the islet, and, as leader of the FrAE, also held the
honorary post of governor.
GOVERNOR ISLANDS: group of islands and
rocks extending for about 1.25 mi. from Penguin
Pt., Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°31’S., 45°57’W. Disc. by Capt. George Powell
and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint
cruise in December 1821. The name appears on a
chart based upon a running survey of the South
Orkney Is., in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian
whaling captain. Not adopted: Guverngrens
Islands.
GRACE, CAPE: ice-covered cape, marked by
prominent rock outcrops at its NW. end and scat-
tered moraine deposits on its W. side, lying at the S.
side of Edisto Ice Tongue and forming the E. portal
of the valley occupied by Scott Gl., on Queen Mary
Coast; in about 66°26’S., 100°35’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Philip
J. Gist, USN, pilot with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48,
who assisted in operations which resulted in the
establishment of astronomical control stations from
Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast.
GRACE GLACIER: glacier which flows N. into
Ample Bay, at the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in
54°04’/S., 37°24’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert
Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the
brig Daisy, who named it for his wife, Mrs. Grace
Barstow Murphy.
GRACE McKINLEY, MOUNT: peak, about 2,500
ft. in el., standing near the head of Sulzberger Bay
and marking the S. end of the Edsel Ford Ranges,
in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°54’S., 148°15’W.
Disc. on the ByrdAE flight of Dec. 5, 1929, and
named by R. Adm. Byrd for the wife of Capt Ashley
C. McKinley, aerial photographer and third-in-
command of the expedition.
Graf Lerchenfeld Gletscher: see Lerchenfeld
Glacier.
GRAHAM COAST: that portion of the W. coast
of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Renard at
the SW. side of the entrance to Flandres Bay, in
65°01/S., 63°43’W., to Cape Bellue, the N. side of
the entrance to Marin Darbel Bay, in 66°20’S.,
65°59’W. Named for Sir James R. G. Graham, First
Lord of the Admiralty at the time John Biscoe
explored along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in 1831.
Not adopted: Graham Land.
143
Graham Land: see Graham Coast; Palmer Pen-
insula.
Graicie Point: see Craigie Point.
GRAN, MOUNT: flat-topped mountain about
6,300 ft. in el., overlooking the upper portion of
Mackay Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 76°59’S.,
160°58’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1910-13, under
Scott, and named for Tryggve Gran, ski expert
with the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Tryggve
Gran.
GRANDIDIER CHANNEL: the body of water
lying between the northern Biscoe Is. and the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; centering in about 65°45’S.,
65°00’W. Charted and named by the FrAE under
Charcot, 1903-5. Alfred Grandidier was Pres. of
the Paris Geographical Soc. at about that time.
GRANITE HARBOR: embayment about 11 mi.
wide and of similar length, marking the seaward
end of a deep valley between Cape Archer and
Cape Roberts, along the coast of Victoria Land; in
about 76°57’S., 162°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE
under Scott in January 1902, while searching for
safe winter quarters for the exp. ship Discovery,
and so named because of the great granite boul-
ders found on its shores.
GRAPTOLITE ISLAND: islet about 0.5 mi. long,
which lies in Fitchie Bay about 1.2 mi. W. of Cape
Dundas, the E. end of Laurie I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°44/S., 44°28’W. Disc. by the
ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who so named it
because graptolitic fossils were found on the island.
GRASSHOLM: islet about 1 mi. S. of Frida Hole,
along the S. coast and near the W. end of South
Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°58’W. The name Em
Island was given for this feature, probably by DI
personnel who surveyed this coast in 1926. The
SGS, 1951-52, reported that this feature is known
locally as ‘“Grassholmen,” and that Em Island is
unknown locally. The indefinite form of the name,
Grassholm, has been approved. Not adopted: Em
Island, Grassholmen [Norwegian].
Grassholmen: see Grassholm.
GRASS ISLAND: conspicuous island lying across
the entrance to Stromness Hbr., in Stromness Bay,
South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°40’W. This island
was known as Mutton Island as early as 1912, but
since 1920 the name Grass Island has been con-
sistently used. Not adopted: Mutton Island.
GRAVENOIRE ROCK: small rock outcrop about
1 mi. SE. of Rock X, protruding above the conti-
nental ice at the E. side of Victor Bay, on Adélie
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Coast; in 66°21’S., 136°43’E. Photographed from
the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the
FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, and so named be-
cause of its resemblance to Gravenoire, the name
of a puy or dome-shaped hill overlooking the city
of Clermont-Ferrand, which lies in the chain of
extinct voleanoes forming the Monts D’Auvergne
of central France.
Gravier, Massif; Gravier, Mount; Gravier, Som-
met: see Gravier Peaks.
GRAVIER PEAKS: series of three prominent,
ice-covered peaks, the central and highest being
7,600 ft. in el., situated about 9 mi. ESE. of The
Gullet and extending for 8 mi. in a WSW.-ENE.
direction between the head of Laubeuf Fjord and
Lallemand Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 67°12’S., 67°15’W. First sighted and roughly
positioned in 1903 by the FrAE under Charcot, who
named the feature for Charles Gravier, French
zoologist. Surveyed in 1909 by. the FrAE under
Charcot, at which time the individual peaks mak-
ing up this group were first identified. The data
for the present description is largely based upon a
resurvey of the peaks in 1948 by the FIDS. Not
adopted: Massif Gravier [French], Mount Gravier,
Sommet Gravier, Sommets Gravier [French].
GRAY, CAPE: cape, marking the E. side of the
entrance to Commonwealth Bay, which lies at the
N. end of a small rocky island joined by an ice
ramp to the continental ice overlying George V
Coast; in about 66°51’S., 143°22’E. Disc. by the
AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for
Percy Gray, second officer on the exp. ship Awrora.
GRAY, MOUNT: rounded, ice-worn mountain
several thousand ft. in el., surmounting the E. side
of the entrance to Cordell Hull Bay, on Hobbs
Coast; in about 75°05’S., 135°30’W. Disc. on
aerial flights in 1940 by the USAS, and named for
Orville Gray, aviation machinist’s mate, plane
captain on these flights. Not adopted: Mount
Jane Wade.
GRAY NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about
1.5 mi. W. of Arctowski Nunatak in the Seal Nuna-
taks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°07’S., 60°08’W. First charted by the SwedAE
under Nordenskjoéld during a sledge journey in
1902, and named by him, probably for Capt. David
Gray, whaling skipper of Peterhead, Scotland.
Gray had planned an exp. to the Weddell Sea in
1891 but the plan was abandoned due to a lack of
funds.
144
Great Hadnakken: see Stor Hanakken Mountain.
Great Mackellar Islet: see Greater Mackellar
Islet.
GREATER MACKELLAR ISLET: largest of the
Mackellar Islets, lying about 1.5 mi. NNW. of Cape
Denison in the center of Commonwealth Bay, along
George V Coast; in about 66°58’S., 142°39’E. Disc.
and named by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14.
Not adopted: Great Mackellar Islet.
Great Piedmont Glacier: see Wilson Piedmont
Glacier.
GREEN, CAPE: low ice cliff forming the S.
extremity of the SE. lobe of Tabarin Pen.; on the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°38’S., 56°54’W.
Charted by the FIDS in 1946 and named for
Michael C. Green, FIDS geologist who lost his life
when the base hut at Hope Bay burned in Novem-
ber 1948.
Green Bay: see Doubtful Bay.
GREEN ICE RISES: two swellings of the ice
where the Shackleton Ice Shelf overrides an under-
lying island or islands, about 5 mi. NE. of the E.
end of Henderson I., off Queen Mary Coast; in about
66°22’S., 97°25’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named
for Duane L. Green, radio operator and recorder
with the USN Op. Wml. parties which established
astronomical control stations Wilhelm II, Knox
and Budd Coasts during January-February 1948.
GREEN ISLAND: small, rounded tussock-cov-
ered island which lies close off the S. tip of South
Georgia, about 1 mi. SE. of Cape Disappointment;
in 54°53’S., 36°06’W. The name “Green Islands,”
derived from their covering of tussock grass, was
given in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook to a group
of three islands lying close off Cape Disappoint-
ment. The name ‘“Griine Insel” or ‘“Grin-Insel,”
meaning Green Island, was used for this island by
Kohl-Larsen in 1930, presumably because of local
usage. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that whalers
and sealers, in practice, use three separate names
for the individual islands, and that the name
Green Island has been limited to this northern-
most island. Brgde Island is the central island
and First Rock is southernmost of the three. The
name “Green Islands” given by Cook for the three
islands is apparently not needed and had dropped
from use. Not adopted: Griine Insel [German],
Grtin-Insel [German].
Greenland, Cape: see Gronland, Cape.
GREEN PEAK: conspicuous peak about 2 mi.
W. of Van Ryswyck Pt., the E. tip of Anvers I.,
in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°35’S., 62°53’W. Disc.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The
name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey
by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect
an earlier naming.
GREEN POINT: rocky point which forms the
SE. end of Fold I., lying about 3 mi. N. of the W.
side of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay, on
Kemp Coast; in about 67°22’S., 59°38’E. Disc. and
named by DI personnel on William Scoresby in
February 1936. Not adopted: Rundneset [Nor-
wegian].
GREEN REEF: group of low rocks lying in
Neumayer Chan. about 0.25 mi. off the E. side of
Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°44’S., 63°17’'W.
Charted by members of H.M.S. Snipe in January
1948 and so named because of its proximity to
Green Spur, about 1 mi. northwestward.
GREEN SPUR: green colored peak, probably
above 3,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of the
mouth of Copper Gl. about 1 mi. E. of Copper
Peak, on the SE. side of Anvers I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°43’S., 63°18’W. Probably first seen
by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The
name appears on a map based upon a 1927 survey
by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect
an earlier naming.
GREENWICH ISLAND: island about 16 mi. long
and from 0.5 to 7 mi. wide, which lies between
Robert and Livingston Islands, in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 62°30’S., 59°47’W. The name dates
back to at least 1821 and is now established inter-
national usage. Not adopted: Beresino Island,
Greenwich Islands, Sartorius Island.
GREGORY, CAPE: cape which lies on the W.
side of Smith I. about 3 mi. SW. of the NW. ex-
tremity of the island, in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°55’/S., 62°34’W. The name appears on a
chart based on work by a Br. exp. under Foster,
1828-31, and is now established international usage.
GREGORY ISLAND: islet lying about 2 mi. NW.
of Cape Archer off Victoria Land; in about 76°50’S.,
162°58’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4.
At that time it was thought to be a cape and was
named Point Gregory for Prof. John Walter Greg-
ory, Dir. of the Civilian Scientific Staff for the
BrNAE in 1901. The feature was determined to
be an island by the BrAE, under Scott, 1910-13.
Not adopted: Gregory Point.
Gregory Point: see Gregory Island.
GREMLIN ISLET: small rocky islet which lies
close off the NW. tip of Red Rock Ridge, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°16’S., 67°12’W. First
145
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The
islet was used as a site for a depot by FIDS in
1948-49, and was so named by them because of the
mysterious disappearance of a ration box left there
by a FIDS sledging party.
GREY ISLET: islet about 0.6 mi. S. of Michelsen
I. and about 1 mi. W. of the S. part of Fredriksen
I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 45°02’W.
This islet appears to be first charted and named
Holmen Graa on a map by the Norwegian whaler
Capt. Petter Sgrlle, who made a running survey
of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Grey Islet is
the English translation of the Norwegian name.
Not adopted: Holmen Graa [Norwegian].
GRIBB BANK: submarine bank lying N. of Wil-
helm II Coast; extending from 61°S. to 63°S., and
from 87° E. to 89°E. Disc. by gunner Krog Ander-
sen of a Nor. exp. under Christensen, 1936-37, and
named for his whale catcher, the Gribb.
GRIER, MOUNT: a gable-shaped mountain
about 10,000 ft. in el., standing at the E. side of
the head of Robert Scott Gl., and forming the most
northwesterly extension of the La Gorce Mtns., in
the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°14’S.,
148°20’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named
by Byrd for Dr. G. Layton Grier, head of the L. D.
Caulk Co. of Milford, Del., who contributed dental
supplies to the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928—
30 and 1933-35.
GRIFFITH, MOUNT: peak about 5,500 ft. in el.,
lying close N. of the Will Hays Mtns., between
Amundsen and Robert Scott Glaciers, in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 85°50’S., 155°30’W. Disc.
in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party
and named by Byrd for Raymond Griffith, of Twen-
tieth Century-Fox Pictures, who assisted in assem-
bling motion-picture records of the expedition.
GRIFFITH NUNATAKS: group of rock expo-
sures rising above the ice on the S. side of the
upper rim of Balchen Gl., in the N. part of the
Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land in about
76°27’S., 143°37’W. Disc. by the USAS in aerial
flights over this area in 1940, and named for Clyde
W. Griffith, machinist and tractor operator of this
expedition.
GRIMMINGER, MOUNT: cone-shaped, mostly
ice-covered mountain about 5,500 ft. in el., standing
on the N. side of Meinardus Gl., close E. of its
juncture with Haines Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 73°18’S., 62°18’W. Disc. and _ photo-
graphed from the air in December 1940 by the
USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction
with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named
by the FIDS for George Grimminger, American
meteorologist and joint author of the meteorologi-
cal reports of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and the Byrd-
AE, 1933-35, and a member of the latter expedition.
GRIM ROCK: rock about 3.5 mi. SSE. of Gedges
Reef and some 11 mi. WNW. of Cape Trois Pérez,
lying in Grandidier Chan. off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°24’S., 64°32’W. Disc. and
named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. The
name is not a personal name.
GRINDLE ROCK: rock about 700 ft. in el., lying
about 0.7 mi. W. of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich
Is.; in 59°03’S., 26°37’W. Charted by DI personnel
on the Discovery II, and named by them for Sir
Gilbert E. A. Grindle, Permanent Under-Secretary
of State for the British Colonies.
GRONLAND, CAPE: cape which forms the west-
ernmost of the northern extremities of Anvers I.,
in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 63°32’W. Disc.
by a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann, who
named it for his exp. ship, the Gronland. It was
later charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5.
Not adopted: Cape Greenland.
Grosse Eisebene: see Ross Shelf Ice.
GROSVENOR RANGE: a group of ridges rising
to about 10,500 ft. in el., which stand close NW. of
the northwest-facing escarpment of the Queen
Maud Range that also marks the head of Shackle-
ton Gl. some 20 mi. to the NE., bordering the south
polar plateau and pierced by several glaciers; ex-
tending from about 85°40’S., 175°00’E. to about
86°25’/S., 179°E. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the
ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929,
and named by him for Gilbert Grosvenor, then
Pres. of the National Geographic Soc., which helped
finance the expedition. Not adopted: Gilbert
Grosvenor Range.
GROTTO GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island, which flows E. to George VI
Sound between Belemnite Pt. and Ablation Pt.; in
70°45’S., 68°40’W. It is about 3 mi. wide where
it emerges from the coastal mountains, and then
widens to about 7 mi. at its mouth. It is about 15
mi.long. This glacier was first photographed from
the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and
was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G.
Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949 by the
FIDS. So named by FIDS because a sledge dog was
rescued from a crystal-lined crevasse in this glacier.
146
GROTTO ISLAND: narrow islet with a serrated
coastline, lying about 0.2 mi. NNW. of Galindez I.,
in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°15°W. Charted and named in
1935 by the BGLE under Rymill.
GROWLER ROCK: rock about 0.75 mi. NNW. of
Cape Lions Rump, the W. side of the entrance to
King George Bay, King George I., in 62°07'S.,
58°07’W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI
personnel on the Discovery II. The term growler
generally is used to denote small pieces of ice barely
showing above water.
GRUBER MOUNTAINS: small mountain group
about 8,500 ft. in el., lying in the Muhlig-Hofmann
Mtns. between the Mayr and Bundermann Ranges
on the W. and the Loesener Platform on the E.,
in New Schwabenland; in about 71°45’S., 3°45’E.
Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and
named for Erich Gruber, radio operator on the
Boreas, one of the flying boats used by the expedi-
tion.
Gruening, Mount: see Andrew Jackson, Mount.
GRUENING GLACIER: broad glacier descending
SE. between steep rock walls to the NW. part of
Hilton Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
71°52’S., 61°55’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight
down this glacier from East Base on Dec. 30, 1940.
Named for Ernest H. Gruening, Dir. of the Div. of
Territories and Island Possessions, U. S. Dept. of
the Interior, during the inception of the USAS and
member of the Executive Committee by which the
USAS was directed.
GRUNDEN ROCK: rock about 40 ft. in el., sur-
rounded by a group of smaller rocks, lying close E.
of Hut Cove along the SE. side of the entrance to
Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°24’S., 56°58’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under
Nordenskjéld, 1901-4. The FIDS, 1945, named the
entire group of rocks for Toralf Grunden, member
of the SwedAE who wintered at Hope Bay in 1903,
but in 1952 the name Grunden was restricted to
the largest rock in this group for easier reference
to the light beacon established by the Argentine
Govt. on the main rock during the previous season.
Not adopted: Grunden Rocks.
Griine Insel; Griin-Insel: see Green Island.
GRYTVIKEN: settlement and port of entry for
shipping, lying at the head of King Edward Cove on
the W. side of Cumberland East Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°31’W. The area adjacent
to this cove was visited by J. Gunnar Andersson of
the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4. Anders-
son named the place Grytviken, meaning Pot Cove,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
because he found numerous boiling pots left there
by early sealers.
Guardian Islands: see ®ygarden Islands.
GUARDIAN ROCK: low ice-free rock lying near
the head of Bigourdan Fjord, 1 mi. N. of Parvenu
Pt., Pourquoi Pas I., close off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°33’S., 67°15’W. First surveyed in 1948—
49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of
the position of this rock which guards the NW. en-
trance to The Narrows.
GUEBRIANT ISLETS: two islets lying 4 mi. S.
of Jenny I. and 5 mi. SE. of Cape Alexandra, Ade-
laide I., in the N. part of Marguerite Bay; in
67°48’S., 68°24’W. Disc. and first charted by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him
for Father Guébriant, French missionary to China.
The islets were surveyed by the FIDS in 1948. Not
adopted: De Guebriant Islets.
GUEGUEN, MOUNT: sharp rocky peak, about
1,200 ft. in el., standing about 0.25 mi. NW. of Mt.
Louise in the N. part of Booth I., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°00’W. Disc. by
the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for
F. Guéguen, stoker of the exp. ship Francais, and
later on the Pourquoi Pas?. Not adopted: Guéguen
Peak, Sommet F. Guéguen [French].
GUEPRATTE ISLAND: ice-covered island about
1.5 mi. long, lying between Anvers and Brabant
Islands at the E. side of the entrance to Fournier
Bay, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 63°00’W.
This island was first shown on the Friederichsen
map of 1895, embodying the 1873-74 explorations
of a Ger. exp. under Dallmann. It was later
charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who
named it for Captain Guépratte, French Navy. In
1927 DI personnel on the Discovery, unaware of the
original naming, applied the name Discovery
Island. Not adopted: Discovery Island.
GUERNSEY, MOUNT: isolated, mainly ice-cov-
ered mountain, about 4,100 ft. in el., lying 6 mi. N.
of the summit of Mt. Edgell, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 69°20’S., 68°14’"W. The name “Ile
Guernesey” was given in 1909 by the FrAE under
Charcot, after the island of Guernsey off the coast
of France. The position of “Ile Guernesey” on
the FrAE maps does not agree with that of the
mountain described above, but from the FrAE
narrative and sketches by Bongrain, FrAE sur-
veyor, it has been determined that this mountain
was the feature seen in 1909 by Charcot from a
position near the center of the entrance to Mar-
guerite Bay. .The mountain was surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE, but no name was assigned. It was
147
further surveyed by FIDS in 1948. Not adopted:
Ile Guernesey [French], White Cross Mountain.
Guernesey, Ile: see Guernsey, Mount.
GUEST ISLAND: snow-covered island, about 40
mi. long in a NE.-SW. direction, lying W. of Balchen
Gl. along the coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about
76°25’S., 148°00’W. Mitchell Peak, located on this
island, was sighted by the ByrdAE in 1929. The
insularity of Guest Island was determined by the
USAS in 1940. Named for Mrs. Amv Guest, con-
tributor to the ByrdAE, 1933-35. Not adopted:
Amy Guest Island.
GUIDES, THE: group of islets and rocks lying
off the KE. side of the entrance to Antarctic Bay,
along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S.
36°52’W. Charted by the GerAE under Filchner,
1911-12. The name appears on a chart based upon
surveys of South Georgia by DI personnel in the
period 1926-30.
GULL CHANNEL: channel, about 0.1 mi. wide,
between Dynamite It. and Stonington I. along the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W.
First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41, and so named
by them because numerous sea gulls frequented
the channel area.
GULLET, THE: narrow channel between the E.
extremity of Adelaide I. and the W. coast of Palmer
Pen., separating Hansen I. and Day I. and con-
necting the heads of Hanusse Bay and Laubeuf
Fjord; in 67°10’S., 67°38’W. This area was first
explored in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot who,
though uncertain of the existence of the channel,
sketched its probable position on the charts of the
expedition. The channel was first visited and
roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill. It was resurveyed and given this descrip-
tive name in 1948 by members of the FIDS. Not
adopted: Charcot Strait, Loubet Strait.
GULLIVER NUNATAK: nunatak with a flat, ice-
free summit, about 1,900 ft. in el., standing at the
N. side of Adie Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 66°12’S., 62°40’W. Charted by the FIDS and
photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947.
Named by the FIDS for the fictional character in
Jonathan Swift’s Gulliver’s Travels, because when
viewed from the SE. its appearance is suggestive of
a man lying on his back with his head toward the
south.
GULL LAKE: lake, about 300 yards in diameter,
lying close to the SW. shore of King Edward Cove,
about 0.5 mi. S. of the whaling station at Grytviken,
South Georgia; in 64°17’S., 36°31’W. The feature
was first roughly surveyed and named ‘“‘Méwensee’”’
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
or “Moven See” (meaning Gull Lake) by A. Szie-
lasko, who visited South Georgia in 1906. The
English form Gull Lake was used by Robert Cush-
man Murphy in 1947, in describing his visit to the
lake in November 1912. This latter form, recom-
mended by the Br-APC in 1954, is approved.
Gunnar, Cape: see Kater, Cape.
GUNNEL CHANNEL: channel, about 0.5 mi. wide
and 5 mi. long, situated in the S. part of Hanusse
Bay and separating Hansen I. from the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 67°07’S., 67°33’W. First ob-
served from the air and roughly charted in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the
ground in 1948 by the FIDS who gave this descrip-
tive name. The channel gives a false impression
of such narrowness that a boat could not navigate
it without scraping her gunnels (gunwales) on
either side.
GUNNERUS BANK: submarine bank of consider-
able extent, with a minimum depth of 230 fathoms,
extending about 50 mi. N. from Riiser-Larsen Pen.
at the E. end of Princess Ragnhild Coast; in about
68°00’S., 33°00’E. Disc. on Feb. 1, 1930 by a Nor.
exp. under Riiser-Larsen, and named by him for
Rev. Johan Ernst Gunnerus, 1718-73, Bishop of
Trondhjem, pioneer naturalist and founder of the
Norwegian Academy of Science.
GURNEY POINT: small rocky mass, about 2,000
ft. in el., marking the W. extremity of the rock ridge
separating Bertram and Ryder Glaciers on Palmer
Pen., overlooking George VI Sound; in 71°00’S.,
67°28’W. This point was first seen and photo-
graphed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln
Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs
by W. L. G. Joerg. It was surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Norman
A. Gurney, a member of the BGLE, 1934-37.
Gustav Bull, Mount: see Gustav Bull Mountains.
GUSTAV BULL MOUNTAINS: group of bare,
rugged mountain peaks about 1,800 to 2,200 ft. in
el., lying SW. of Scullin Monolith and inland from
Mac-Robertson Coast; centering in about 67°50’S.,
66°13’E. In January and February 1931 personnel
on several Norwegian whale catchers made sketches
along this coast, and named these mountains for
Capt. Gustav B. Bull, at that time whaling manager
of the Thorshammer. The BANZARE under Maw-
son explored this area from the air in January 1930
and February 1931, and applied names to the in-
dividual mountains of this group. Not adopted:
Mount Gustav Bull.
GUTENKO MOUNTAINS: group of mountains
lying WSW. of Hilton Inlet and inland from the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 72°15’S., 64°15’W.
148
Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and
named by him for Sigmund Gutenko, USN, chief
commissary steward with the expedition. Not
adopted: Vincent Gutenko Mountains.
GUTENKO NUNATAKS: several small elongated
nunataks at the head of a small tributary descend-
ing SW. into the head of Arthur Davis Gl., in the
Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about
76°52’S., 143°36’W. Disc. on aerial flights made
from the West Base of the USAS in 1940, and named
for Sigmund Gutenko, cook and steward at the
West Base.
Guverngrens Islands: see Governor Islands.
GUYOU BAY: bay about 4 mi. long, which in-
dents the W. coast of Brabant I. between Claude Pt.
and Pasteur Pen., in the Palmer Arch.; in about
64°05’S., 62°38’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot, who named it for Capt. Emile
Guyou, French Navy, distinguished in the field of
naval sciences and member of the commission
which published the scientific results of the expedi-
tion. Not adopted: Cuyou Bucht [German].
HAAG, MOUNT: mountain estimated to be over
10,000 ft. in el., lying about 85 mi. E. of Mt. Ulmer
in Ellsworth Highland, and about 70 mi. WSW. of
Mt. Hassage; in about 77°40’S., 79°00’W. Disc. by
the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for
Joseph Haag, head of the Todd Shipyards, New
York, which worked on the Ronne exp. ship. Not
adopted: Mount Joseph Haag.
Haasen, Cape: see Hansen, Cape.
HABERMEHL PEAK: about 10,800 ft. in el.;
stands immediately S. of Gessner Pk. in the
Miuhlig-Hofman Mtns. in New Schwabenland; in
about 71°55’S., 6°35’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938—
39, under Ritscher, and named for the then dir. of
the German Weather Service.
HACKAPIKE BAY: anchorage about 4 mi. NW.
of Van Ryswyck Pt., entered W. of False Islet along
the NE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°32’S., 62°53’W. Charted and named by the
BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill.
HADDINGTON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,300
ft. in el., surmounting the central part of James
Ross I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
64°14’S., 57°38’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross,
Dec. 31, 1842, and named by him for the Ear! of
Haddington, then First Lord of the Admiralty.
Not adopted: Mount Haddington, Mount Ross.
HADERICH, MOUNT: mountain about 10,000
ft. in el., lying about 10 mi. S. of Luz Range at the
N. edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland;
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in about 72°18’S., 5°05’E. Disc. by the GerAE,
1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for the proc-
urator of the German Lufthansa Corporation.
Not adopted: Haderich Mountains, Hadrich Berg
[German].
Haderich Mountains: see Haderich, Mount.
Hadington, Mount: see Haddington, Mount.
Hadrich Berg: see Haderich, Mount.
HAEFELI GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide
and 6 mi. long, situated at the W. side of Finster-
walder Gl. and flowing SSW. toward the head of
Lallemand Fjord on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in
about 67°17’S., 66°22’W. First surveyed in 1946-
47 by the FIDS, and named by them for Robert
Haefeli, Swiss glaciologist.
HAFFNER GLACIER: steep valley glacier flow-
ing into Berg Bay, in the Robertson Bay area of
northern Victoria Land; in about 171°28’S.,
169°21’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under
C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Colonel
Haffner, Dir. of the Govt. Survey of Norway.
Haggitts Pillar: see Haggits Pillar.
HAGGITS PILLAR: column of rock about 200 ft.
in el., lying about 0.1 mi. W. of Scott I., some 315
mi. NNE. of Cape Adare, the NE. extremity of
Victoria Land; in about 67°24’S., 179°55’W. Disc.
in December 1902 by Capt. William R. Colbeck,
RNR, Commander of the Morning, relief ship to
the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Not adopted:
Haggit’s Pillar, Haggitt’s Pillar, Haggitts Pillar.
HAINES GLACIER: glacier about 4 mi. wide,
flowing in an ESE. direction and joining Meinardus
Gl. immediately E. of Mt. Barkow, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 73°21’S., 62°33’W. Disc. and
photographed from the air in December 1940 by
the USAS. During 1947 the glacier was photo-
graphed from the air by the RARE, who in con-
junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground.
Named by the FIDS for William C. Haines, Ameri-
can meteorologist and member of the Byrd Antarc-
tic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35, and joint
author of the meteorological reports of these two
expeditions.
HAINES MOUNTAINS: extensive range of bro-
ken, ice-capped peaks about 2,500 ft. in el., forming
the SW. wall of Hammond Gl., in the Edsel Ford
Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°30'S.,
146°45’°W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934 and
named for William C. Haines.
149
Hal Flood, Mount: see Berlin, Mount.
Hal Flood Bay: see Okuma Bay.
Hal Flood Range, Mount: see Hal Flood Range.
HAL FLOOD RANGE: snow-covered peaks about
7,000 ft. in el., with an abrupt, partly buried, north-
facing escarpment, lying along the 76th parallel
for a considerable distance, in about 134°W. in
Marie Byrd Land. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934
from a great distance. Reconnaissance flights of
the USAS, 1939-41, explored the range. The name
has subsequently been transferred from the princi-
pal peak disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934 to the entire
range. Not adopted: Mount Hal Flood Range.
HALF MOON ISLAND: crescent-shaped island
about 1.25 mi. long, lying in the entrance to Moon
Bay on the E. side of Livingston I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°36’S., 59°57’W. This island was
known to sealers in the area as early as 1822. The
name appears on a chart based upon a 1935 survey
by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Not adopted:
Johnsons Island.
Hallet, Cape: see Hallett, Cape.
HALLETT, CAPE: rugged headland about 10 mi.
S. of Cape Christie, midway between Cape Adare
and Coulman I., on the coast of Victoria Land;
in about 72°25’S., 170°55’E. Disc. in 1841 by a
Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Thomas R.
Hallett, purser on one of the exp. ships, the Erebus.
Not adopted: Cape Hallet.
Hamarggalten: see Sheehan Islands.
Hamberg Fluss: see Penguin River.
HAMBERG GLACIER: glacier which flows in an
ENE. direction from the NE. side of Mt. Sugartop
to the W. side of the head of Moraine Fjord, South
Georgia; in 54°21’S., 36°31’W. Charted by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, who named
it for Axel Hamberg, Swedish geographer, miner-
alogist and Arctic explorer.
HAMBERG LAKE: lake, about 0.5 mi. in diame-
ter, lying near the northern outlet of Hamberg
Glacier, about 1 mi. W. of Moraine Fjord, Cumber-
land East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°32’W.
First surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under
Nordenskjold. The name derives from the nearby
Hamberg Glacier, and was given by A. Szielasko
who explored this vicinity in 1906.
Hambourg Bay: see Hamburg Bay.
HAMBURG BAY: bay indenting the NW. coast
of Anvers I. about 5 mi. SW. of Perrier Bay and 12
mi. NE. of Cape Albert de Monaco, in the Palmer
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Arch.; in 64°32’S., 63°55’W. Disc. but incom-
pletely defined by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann,
1873-74, who named it for Hamburg, Germany,
home port of the expedition. The bay was more
accurately charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under
Charcot. Not adopted: Hambourg Bay.
HAMILTON, MOUNT: twin-peak mountain
about 7,400 ft. in el., standing on the S. side of
Barne Inlet, about 40 mi. SW. of Cape Selborne, on
the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°40’S.,
158°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott, who named it for Adm. Sir Richard Vesey
Hamilton, who served on Arctic voyages during
1850-54, and who was a member of the BrNAE
Ship Committee.
HAMILTON, MOUNT: mountain rising to about
5,000 ft. in el., which marks the W. end of the
Tapley Mtns., standing at the E. side of the lower
reaches of Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud
Range; in about 85°39’S., 151°48’W. Disc. in De-
cember 1934 by the ByrdAE Geological party under
Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for G. C.
Hamilton, general manager of the McClatchy
Newspapers, of Sacramento, California, who was a
contributor to the expedition.
HAMILTON POINT: flat-topped point marking
the S. side of the entrance to Markham Bay on the
SE. side of James Ross I., lying S. of the NE. end
of Palmer Pen.; in 64°22’S., 57°18’W. Disc. by a
Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, who named it Cape
Hamilton after Capt. W. A. B. Hamilton, RN, at
that time private secretary to the Earl of Hadding-
ton, and later Second Secretary to the Admiralty.
The feature was first surveyed by the SwedAE
under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, and resurveyed by
the FIDS in 1953. Point is considered a more
suitable descriptive term for the feature than
cape. Not adopted: Cape Hamilton.
HAMMERSLY, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking
the E. side of the entrance to Colvocoresses Bay, on
Budd Coast; in about 66°00’S., 115°35’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
George W. Hammersly, midshipman on the sloop of
war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
HAMMOND GLACIER: valley glacier about 11
mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing
from the Rockefeller Plateau in a NW. direction
between the Haines Mtns. and Mt. Woodward to
Sulzberger Bay, in Marie Byrd Land; in about
77°20’S., 146°45’W. Disc. in 1934 by the ByrdAE,
and named by Byrd for John Hays Hammond,
American mining engineer and philanthropist.
Not adopted: Hammond Inlet, John Hayes Ham-
mond Inlet, John Hays Hammond Glacier.
150
Hammond Inlet: see Hammond Glacier.
HAMPTON, MOUNT: the northernmost peak of
the Executive Committee Range, in Marie Byrd
Land; in about 76°30’S., 127°00’W. Disc. by the
USAS on a flight on Dec. 15, 1940, and named for
Mrs. Ruth Hampton, Dept. of the Interior member
of the USAS Executive Committee.
HAMPTON GLACIER: glacier in the NE. part of
Alexander I Island, about 25 mi. long and 5 mi.
wide, which flows in a NNE. direction along the W.
wall of the Douglas Range and enters Schokalsky
Bay; in 69°20’S., 70°05’W. First seen from the air
and photographed during a flight up this glacier
in 1937 by the BGLE. The mouth of the glacier
was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. Named for
Wilfred E. Hampton of the BGLE, 1934-37, who
piloted the airplane that made the above men-
tioned flight in 1937.
Hamrehovden: see Trethewry Point.
Hamreneset: see Bertha Island.
HANNAM ISLETS: small group of rocky islets
lying about 1 mi. N. of Whetter Nunatak in the E.
portion of Commonwealth Bay, off George V Coast;
in about 66°56’S., 143°56’E. Disc. in 1912 by the
AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Walter
N. Hannam, wireless telegrapher with the AAK
Main Base Party.
HANSEN, CAPE: cape which separates Marshall
and Iceberg Bays on the S. coast of Coronation I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°36’W. The
name appears on a chart based upon a running
survey in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian
whaling captain. Not adopted: Cape Haasen.
HANSEN ISLAND: island, about 4 mi. long and
1.5 mi. wide, lying immediately N. of The Gullet at
the head of Hanusse Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°07’S., 67°36’W. First surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill, who used the provi-
sional name North Island for this feature. The
island was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and
renamed for Leganger H. Hansen, Mgr. at Messrs.
Chr. Salvesen’s whaling station at Leith Hbr.,
South Georgia, 1916-37, who gave great assistance
to the BGLE, 1934-37. Not adopted: North Island.
HANSEN MOUNTAINS: large group of nunataks
which rise to an estimated 7,000 ft. in el., and
protrude about 1,000 ft. above the ice level, lying
about 55 mi. S. of Stefansson Bay and extending
25 mi. in a NW.-SW. direction, inland from the
E. end of Kemp Coast; in about 68°16’S., 58°47’E.
Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January—
February 1937 and mapped from aerial photo-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
graphs taken at that time. Named for H. E.
Hansen, Norwegian cartographer who has com-
piled maps for this and other Norwegian Antarctic
expeditions.
HANSEN NUNATAK: beehive-shaped nunatak
about 2,600 ft. in el., lying near the middle of
Reeves GI., a short distance above its terminus, in
Victoria Land; in about 74°46’S., 162°18’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Named by
BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9.
HANUSSE BAY: V-shaped bay, about 20 mi.
long in a general N.-S. direction and some 15 mi.
wide at its broad N. end, lying between Cape
Mascart, Adelaide I., and Cape Shmidt, Palmer
Pen.; in about 66°57’S., 67°30’W. Disc. and first
charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and
named by him for the Dir. of the Hydrographic
Service of the French Navy. Not adopted: Hanusse
Fiord.
Hanusse Fiord: see Hanusse Bay.
HARBORD GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide
descending between Mt. George Murray and Mt.
Smith to the coast of Victoria Land, where it forms
the Harbord Glacier Tongue; in about 75°58’S.,
162°30’E. The glacier takes its name from the
Harbord Glacier Tongue, which was named by the
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton.
HARBORD GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue
about 1 mi. wide, forming the seaward extension of
Harbord Gl. along the coast of Victoria Land; in
about 75°57’S., 163°00’E. First charted by the
BrAE under Shackleton, at which time it extended
about 5 mi. into Ross Sea. Named by Shackleton
for A. E. Harbord, second officer of the exp. ship
Nimrod during the last year of the expedition.
Not adopted: Harbord Ice Tongue, Harbord Ice
Barrier Tongue.
Harbord Ice Barrier Tongue; Harbord Ice
Tongue: see Harbord Glacier Tongue.
HARBOUR GLACIER: a through glacier about
3 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying on the NW.
side of Wiencke I. and extending in a NE.-SW. di-
rection between the cove about 1 mi. E. of Noble
Peak and Peltier Chan., close S. of Port Lockroy,
in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°26’W. Prob-
ably first seen by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache. Charted in 1944 by the FIDS, who so
named it because of its nearness to the harbor of
Port Lockroy.
Harbour Heights: see Arrival Heights.
HARBOUR POINT: point separating Leith and
Stromness Harbors in Stromness Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°41’W. This descriptive
151
name was in use as early as 1920 and was prob-
ably applied by whalers operating from Stromness
Bay.
HARCOURT, CAPE: cape which forms the N.
side of the entrance to Royal Bay, on the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 35°58’W. The name
dates back to at least 1920 and is now well estab-
lished in international usage. Not adopted: Cape
Royal.
HARCOURT, MOUNT: mountain in the Com-
monwealth Range, overlooking the E. side of
Beardmore GI. at its junction with Ross Ice Shelf;
in about 83°46’S., 173°00’E. Disc. and named by
the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton.
HARDY POINT: western point of Bellingshausen
I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°25’S., 27°04’W.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, who named it for Alister C. Hardy, member of
the zoological staff of the Discovery Committee,
1924-28, and prof. of zoology at University College
of Hull.
HARGREAVES GLACIER: distributary glacier
above 2 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, flowing NNW.
from the lower reaches of Polar Times Gl., and
terminating at the S. side of Sandefjord Ice Bay
about 2 mi. W. of Mt. Caroline Mikkelsen, on In-
erid Christensen Coast; in about 69°42’S., 73°46’E.
Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from USN
Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947,
and named by him for R. B. Hargreaves, aerial
photographer on USN Op. Hijp. flights which ob-
tained photographic coverage in this area and
other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east
longitude. Not adopted: Margreaves Glacier.
Hariholm: see Marinholm.
HARKER, MOUNT: mountain of the Gonville
and Caius Range, about 3,000 ft. in el., forming
the N. wall of Debenham Gl. near its head, in
Victoria Land; in about 177°16’S., 161°53’E.
Charted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and
named for Dr. Alfred Harker, noted British
petrologist.
HARKER GLACIER: glacier which flows in a
NE. direction to the SW. end of Moraine Fjord,
in Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in
54°22’S., 36°31’W. This glacier appears to be
first indicated on a 1912 geological map of South
Georgia by David Ferguson. Probably named for
Alfred Harker.
HARKER POINT: point which forms the S. end
of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°04’S.,
26°31’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the Discovery II who named it for A. Harker, naval
architect on the staff of the Discovery Committee.
HARKNESS, MOUNT: mountain about 5,500 ft.
in el., standing close S. of Mt. Zanuck and forming
part of the E. wall of Robert Scott Gl., in the
Queen Maud Range; in about 86°03’S., 150°30’W.
Disc. in December 1934 by ByrdAE geological party
under Quin Blackburn, and named at that time
by R. Adm. Byrd for Bruce Harkness, friend of
Richard S. Russell, Jr., a member of that party.
Not adopted: Mount Bruce Harkness.
HARMER, MOUNT: peak about 3,700 ft. in el.,
standing in the north-central portion of Cook I., in
the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S., 27°09’W.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, who named it for Sir Sidney F. Harmer,
Vice-Chairman of the Discovery Committee.
HARMONY COVE: cove entered between Har-
mony Pt. and The Toe on the W. side of Nelson
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°19’S., 59°12’W.
Named by American sealers in about 1820 after the
sealing vessel Harmony. The Harmony, under
Capt. Thomas Ray, was one of several American
sealing vessels headquartered at Harmony Cove
during the 1820-21 season.
HARMONY POINT: point which forms the N.
side of the entrance to Harmony Cove, on the W.
side of Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°19’S., 59°14’W. Charted in 1935 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II. Named after Harmony
Cove.
Harmony Strait: see Nelson Strait.
HARMSWORTH, MOUNT: peak about 9,600 ft.
in el., standing at N. end of the Worcester Range
NW. of Moore Embayment, on the W. side of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 78°37’S., 160°40’E. Disc. by
the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for
Sir Alfred Harmsworth, later Viscount Northcliffe,
a generous contributor to the expedition.
HAROLD BYRD MOUNTAINS: a group of ex-
posed rocky peaks and nunataks reaching altitudes
of 1,500 to 1,800 ft., extending in a NE.-SW. arc
along the N. side of the terminus of Leverett Gl.,
which separates the group from the Queen Maud
Range, and fronting on the Ross Ice Shelf; center-
ing in about 85°26’S., 146°30’W. Disc. in Decem-
ber 1929 by members of the ByrdAE geological
party under Laurence Gould, who climbed Sup-
porting Party Mtn. near the W. end of this group
and took panoramic photographs from that point.
Named for D. Harold Byrd, a cousin of R. Adm.
Byrd and a contributor (helped to buy furs) to
the expedition.
152
HAROLD JUNE, MOUNT: mountain in the Phil-
lips Mtns., about 3,700 ft. in el., standing on the
N. side of Balchen Gl. in the Edsel Ford Ranges,
in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°10’S., 145°00’W.
Disc. by the ByrdAE in December 1929, and named
for Harold I. June, airplane pilot of the expedition.
HARPER POINT: low glaciated point forming
the N. end of Saunders I., in the South Sandwich
Is.; in 57°45’S., 26°29’W. Charted in 1930 by DI
personnel on the Discovery II, and named for F.
H. Harper, Sec. to the Discovery Committee.
HARP ISLET: islet at the N. side of Mutton
Cove, about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°43’W. Charted
by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and so named
because of its distinctive shape. Not adopted:
Harp Island.
HARPUN ROCKS: submerged rocks lying about
0.1 mi. SE. of Bills Pt., Delta I., in the Melchior
Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°59’W. The name
appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by
DI personnel, but may reflect an earlier naming
by whalers. Harpun is a Norwegian word mean-
ing harpoon. Not adopted: Harpun Rock.
Harrison, Cape: see Harrisson, Cape.
HARRISON GLACIER; channel glacier about 4
mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the con-
tinental ice to the Clarie Coast, about 13 mi. SE.
of Cape Carr; in about 66°00’S., 131°25’E. De-
lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
George W. Harrison, passed midshipman on. the
tender Flying Fish of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
HARRISON POINT: point marked by a string
of off-lying rocks, lying 1.8 mi. W. of Busen Pt. on
the S. side of Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in
54°10’S., 36°36’W. The point was charted in 1927
by DI personnel and named Matthews Point for
L. Harrison Matthews, British zoologist, member of
the staff of the Discovery Investigations, 1924-35,
who worked at South Georgia in 1924-27. In 1954,
the Br-APC recommended this name be altered to
Harrison Point to avoid duplication with Matthews
Point (also named for L. Harrison Matthews), a
better known feature in Undine Harbor, South
Georgia. This change allows Harrison Matthews’
name to be retained for this feature, while the con-
fusing duplication of names is avoided. Not
adopted: Matthews Point (q.v.).
HARRISSON, CAPE: ice-covered cape at the
junction of the channel of Denman Gl. and Robin-
son Bay, on the Queen Mary Coast; in about
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
66°44’S., 99°00’E. Disc. in December 1912 by the
Eastern Party, led by Frank Wild, operating from
the Western Base of the AAE under Mawson.
Named for Charles T. Harrisson, biologist and artist
at the Western Base and a member of the Eastern
Party. Not adopted: Cape Harrison.
HARRISSON ICE RISES: three swellings of the
ice where the Shackleton Ice Shelf overrides an
underlying rocky ridge, about 9 mi. NNE. of Cape
Moyes, along Queen Mary Coast, in about 66°27’S.,
96°28’E. Disc. by the Eastern Sledge Party of the
AAK, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for
Charles T. Harrisson.
Harry Dodson Island: see Dodson Peninsula.
HARRY ISLET: ice-capped islet dominated by a
truncated pyramidal peak, lying at the S. side of
the SE. entrance to the channel between Brabant I.
and Liége I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°08‘S.,
61°56’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99, and named for a supporter of the expedi-
tion. Not adopted: Harry Island.
HARTIGAN, MOUNT: prominent massif lying
immediately N. of Mt. Sidley in the Executive Com-
mittee Range, in Marie Byrd Land; in about
77°15’S., 128°00’W. Disc. by the USAS on a flight
on Dec. 15, 1940, and named for R. Adm. Charles
C. Hartigan, USN, Navy Dept. member of the USAS
Executive Committee.
HART ROCK: rock about 30 ft. in el., lying about
2 mi. NW. of Herdman Rocks and 3 mi. N. of Cape
Dundas, Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°41’S., 44°22’W. First charted by a Fr. exp.
under D’Urville in 1838. Named in 1933 by DI
personnel on the Discovery II, for T. John Hart,
member of the zoological staff of the Discovery
Committee.
Harvey Johnston, Mount; Harvey Johnston Peak:
see Johnston Peak.
HASH ISLET: islet lying in the entrance to
Larsen Hbr., on the SE. coast of South Georgia; in
54°49’S., 35°59’W. Roughly surveyed by the
GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner. It was named
Hash Island, probably by DI personnel who resur-
veyed the feature in 1927. The name Hash Islet
is approved because of the small size of the feature.
Not adopted: Hash Island.
HASKELL, MOUNT: buttress-type mountain
about 4,900 ft. in el., standing at the SW. side of
Cabinet Islet between Mounts Denucé and Holmes,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°45’S., 64°16’W.
Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for
Daniel C. Haskell, American bibliographer of the
New York Public Library and author of the bibliog-
424589 O -57-11
153
raphy, The United States Exploring Expedition,
1838-42, and its Publications, 1844-1874.
HASSAGE, MOUNT: mountain about 5,500 ft. in
el., lying near the SW. end of Orville Escarpment,
in the NW. portion of Edith Ronne Land; in about
77°28'S., 71°30’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48,
under Ronne, who named this mountain for Charles
Hassage, ship’s engineer on the expedition.
HASSEL, MOUNT: one of a group of low-lying
peaks barely protruding through the ice of the
south polar plateau, rising to about 10,700 ft. in el.
at the NE. end of the group containing Mounts
Bjaaland and Prestrud, which stand about 20 mi.
SW. of the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 86°30’S., 162°15’°W. Disc.
by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen in November 1911
on the journey to the South Pole, and named by
him for Sverre Hassel, a member of the South Pole
Party. Not adopted: Mount S. Hassel, Mount
Sverre Hassel.
HASWELL ISLET: diamond-shaped islet about
0.8 mi. long and about 300 ft. in el., marking the
largest and seaward of the Haswell Its., lying at
the E. side of McDonald Bay about 2 mi. N. of
Mabus Pt., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°29’S.,
93°16’E. Disc. and charted by the Western Base
Party of the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and
named by him for Prof. William A. Haswell, zo-
ologist at Sydney Univ. and member of the AAE
Advisory Committee. Not adopted: Haswell
Island. A
HASWELL ISLETS: group of rocky islets and
rocks lying off Mabus Pt. and extending about 2 mi.
seaward, at the E. side of McDonald Bay, off Queen
Mary Coast; in about 66°30’S., 93°15’E. Charted
by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who applied
the name Rookery Islands because of a large em-
peror penguin rookery on Haswell It., the largest
and seaward islet in the group. The Australian
Committee on Antarctic Names proposed in 1955
that the name Haswell be extended to the entire
group of islets because of the greater recognition
gained by the Haswell Islet name. Not adopted:
Rookery Islands.
HATCH ISLETS: small group of rocky islets,
which marks the physical division between Knox
and Budd Coasts, lying at the E. side of the head
of Vincennes Bay between the massive tongues of
John Quincy Adams and Bond Glaciers; in about
67°00’S., 109°42’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
eraphs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named
by the US—ACAN for Ernest B. Hatch, tractor driver
with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in trans-
porting shore parties which established astronomi-
cal control stations from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd
Coast.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
HATREE, CAPE: cape which forms the SW. tip
of Mossman Pen., on the S. coast of Laurie I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 44°44’°W. Disc.
on the joint cruise in December 1821 by Capt.
George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer. The
name appears on Powell’s map published in 1822.
Not adopted: Cape McVitie.
HAUBERG MOUNTAINS: mountains about 6,000
ft. in el. on Joerg Plateau, lying immediately back
of Orville Escarpment; in about 76°48’S., 68°00’W.
Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and
named by him for John Hauberg, of Rock Island,
Tll., a contributor to the expedition.
HAUGE REEF: chain of islets and rocks extend-
ing in an ENE. direction from the E. extremity of
Annenkov I. to a point about 3 mi. WSW. of Cape
Darnley, South Georgia; in 54°28’S., 37°59’W.
First charted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellings-
hausen. Surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52, and
named for Capt. Ole Hauge, of the sealer Albatros,
whose knowledge of the coasts of South Georgia
was of great assistance to the SGS, 1951-52.
HAULAWAY POINT: small rocky point midway
along the NE. side of Stonington I., close off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. First
surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41. Resurveyed in
1946-47 by the FIDS, who so named the point
because it is one of the best places for hauling
stores ashore.
HAUPT NUNATAK: small nunatak projecting
above the continental ice at the N. side of the lower
reaches of Vanderford Gl., which is believed to mark
the approximate coastline in this portion of Budd
Coast where the continental ice extends for some
5 to 10 mi. into the SE. part of Vincennes Bay; in
about 66°32’S., 110°48’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for Ens. Richard W. Haupt,
USN, assistant hydrographic officer with USN Op.
Wml., 1947-48, who assisted the shore parties which
established astronomical control stations from
Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast.
Hauptinsel: see Brgéde Island.
Havre Petter: see Potter Cove.
HAVSBOTN: the narrow innermost portion of
Liitzow-Holm Bay, at its SE. head, between Prince
Olav and Prince Harald Coasts; in about 69°45’S.,
38°45’E. Disc. by members of a Nor. exp. under
Christensen during aerial mapping flights in this
area in January and February, 1937. Literally
this name means “ocean gulf,” and was applied by
154
the old Norse to the polar sea north of Norway.
This feature was first shown and first named on
H. E. Hansen’s Atlas of Parts of the Antarctic
Coastal Lands, 1946.
HAVSTEIN ISLAND: rocky island about 3 mi.
long and 2 mi. wide, rising to about 410 ft. in el.,
lying about 14 mi. NW. of the entrance to Stef-
ansson Bay about 2 mi. off Kemp Coast; in about
67°06’S., 58°51’E. Possibly first seen by DI per-
sonnel on the William Scoresby in February 1936,
but, if so, it was considered by them as part of the
mainland. Mapped as an island by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken on a
Nor. exp. under Christensen in January—February
1937, and probably so named by them because of
its rocky nature and its seaward position.
HAWKINS GLACIER: channel glacier about 2
mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti-
nental ice to the Knox Coast, about 10 mi. WNW.
of Underwood Gl.; in about 66°35’S., 107°35’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
Samuel N. Hawkins, sailmaker on the sloop of war
Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
HAWTHORNE, MOUNT: mountain about 3,400
ft. in el. in the Walker Mtns. on Thurston Pen.; in
about 72°25’S., 97°00’W. Disc. on Feb. 27, 1940,
by the USAS in a flight from the Bear, and named
for Roger Hawthorne, USAS field representative.
Not adopted: Mount Mark.
HAYES, MOUNT: plateau-type mountain about
3,700 ft. in el., situated at the base of Cole Pen.
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°50’S., 64°10’W.
Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for
Rev. James Gordon Hayes, Antarctic historian and
author of Antarctica: A Treatise on the Southern
Continent and The Conquest of the South Pole.
HAYES PEAK: peak about 800 ft. in el., lying
about 2 mi. S. of Cape Bruce on Mac-Robertson
Coast; in about 67°27’S., 60°50’E. Disc. on Feb.
18, 1931 by BANZARE under Mawson, and proba-
bly named by him for Rev. James Gordon Hayes.
Not adopted: Veslekulten [Norwegian].
HAYRICK ISLET: small prominent rock mass,
more than 500 ft. in el., between Lodge Rock and
Twig Rock in the Terra Firma Is., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 68°42’S., 67°32’W. The Terra
Firma Is. were first visited and surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. This islet was sur-
veyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so named by them
because, when seen from the E., its high mass has
an appearance suggesting a hayrick.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Hays Mountains: see Will Hays Mountains.
Haystack, The: see Haystack Mountain.
HAYSTACK MOUNTAIN: mountain about 3,300
ft. in el., with a rounded summit which is sug-
gestive of mound or a haystack, standing about 1.5
mi. E. of Mt. England in the NE. part of the Gon-
ville and Caius Range, in Victoria Land; in about
77°03’S., 162°37’E. Charted and named by the
BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: The
Haystack.
HAZARD ROCK: small isolated rock, 3 ft. high,
which lies in Bismarck Strait, 2.5 mi. NE. of Cape
Renard, Palmer Pen.; in 64°59’S., 63°44’W. Named
by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, following his survey
in 1952. This feature is a hazard to navigation
in the low visibility which is frequent in this vi-
cinity.
Healey, Cape: see Healy, Cape.
HEALY, CAPE: prominent, square-shaped rock
cape forming the N. side of the entrance to Lam-
plugh Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
71°22’S., 60°57’°W. Disc. by members of the USAS
who explored this coast by land and from the
air in 1940. Named for Joseph D. Healy, member
of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and dog driver at the
USAS East Base, 1939-41. Not adopted: Cape
Healey.
HEANEY GLACIER: glacier, about 4 mi. long,
which lies close NW. of Cook Gl. and flows NE.
and then E. toward Saint Andrews Bay on the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°25’S., 36°12’W. Sur-
veyed by the SGS, 1951-52. Named by the Br-APC
for John B. Heaney, surveyor with the SGS,
1951-52.
HEARD ISLAND: island about 23 mi. long, in
a NW.-SE. direction, and about 10 mi. wide, sur-
mounted by an ice-covered volcanic peak, about
9,000 ft. in el., situated SE. of the Kerguelen Is-
lands; in about 53°06’S., 73°30’E. Disc. on Nov.
25, 1853 by Capt. John J. Heard, of the merchant
ship Oriental of New London, Conn. Named for
Captain Heard by American sealers who began
sealing operations at the island soon after word
of its discovery.
Hearst, Cape: see Wilkins, Cape.
HEARST ISLAND: ice-covered, dome-shaped is-
land lying about 4 mi. E. of Cape Rymill, off the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°26’S., 62°10’W. The
island is about’36 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction,
and about 10 mi. wide, and rises to about 1,200 ft.
155
in elevation. First sighted on a flight on Dec. 20,
1928 by Sir Hubert Wilkins. Thinking it was part
of the mainland of Antarctica, he named it Hearst
Land for William Randolph Hearst, who helped
finance the expedition. It was resighted and its
insularity ascertained in 1940 by members of the
USAS who explored this coast by land and from
the air. They named it Wilkins Island. Examina-
tion of aerial photographs have shown, however,
that this large island is what Wilkins considered
Hearst Land. Not adopted: Hearst Land, Wilkins
Island.
Hearst Land: see Hearst Island.
HEDDEN, MOUNT: mountain projecting
through the icecap near the N. margin of the New
Schwabenland piedmont; in about 72°09’S.,
1°10’K. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, and
named for Karl Hedden, one of the sailors on the
expedition.
Heil Peak: see Neill Peak.
HEIM GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide and
at least 5 mi. long, which flows S. to merge with
the ice in Jones Channel, on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°28’S., 66°55’W. It probably forms the
S. part of a transverse depression extending to
the SW. corner of Lallemand Fjord. First sighted
from the air in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill.
Its lower reaches were surveyed in 1949 by the
FIDS, and the glacier named by them for Albert
Heim, Swiss glaciologist and author in 1885 of
Handbuch der Gletscherkunde.
Heksegryta: see Kleinschmidt Peak.
Helena Island: see Bridgeman Island.
Helene Gletscher: see Helen Glacier.
HELENE ISLET: small rocky islet marking the
W. end of Géologie Arch., lying about 0.2 mi. NW.
of Ifo It. close off Adélie Coast, midway between
Liotard Gl. and Cape Géodésie; in 66°37’S.,
139°44’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard,
1949-51, and named for the French polar ship
Héléne. Not adopted: Iles Helene [French].
HELEN GLACIER: glacier marked by a series of
heavy, broken, and crevassed icefalls, lying W. of
Farr Bay on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°40’S.,
94°10’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the Western
Base Party of the AAE under Mawson. Named
for Lady Helen, the wife of a patron of the expedi-
tion, Sir Lucas Tooth of Sydney, Australia. Not
adopted: Helene Gletscher [German].
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
HELEN GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue,
which in February 1947 extended about 7 mi. sea-
ward from Helen Gl., along Queen Mary Coast;
in about 66°33’S., 93°14’E. Disc. in November 1912
by members of the Western Base Party of the AAE
under Mawson. The glacier tongue takes its name
from Helen Glacier.
HELEN WASHINGTON, MOUNT: high, ridge-
like mountain surmounted by three prominent
peaks, standing about 5 mi. SSW. of Mt. Paterson
near the S. end of the N. group of Rockefeller Mtns.
on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°05’S., 155°15’W.
Disc. on the ByrdAE flight of Feb. 18, 1929, and
named by Byrd for Miss Helen A. Washington, niece
of R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, leader of the expe-
dition.
Helen Washington Bay: see Kainan Bay.
HELLAND-HANSEN SHOULDER: a portion of
the steep slopes of the snow-covered western bound-
ary of the Mohn Basin, resembling snow-covered
ridges, when viewed from the E., which extend for
an indefinite extent in a N.-S. direction, on the
south polar plateau; centering in about 86°12’S.,
168°20’W. Disc. in December 1911 on the journey
to the South Pole by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen,
and named by him for Prof. B. Helland-Hansen, of
the University of Oslo.
Hell Gates: see Morton Strait.
HELL GATES: chain of islets and rocks extend-
ing from Livingston I. to Snow I. across the E.
portal of Morton Str., in the South Shetland
Islands; in 62°41’S., 61°10’W. Named by early
sealers in the area because many lives and ships
were lost in navigating the strait. Not adopted:
Morton Strait.
HELLS GATE: a small area on the confluent ice
of the Nansen Sheet, marked by glacial moraines,
lying between Inexpressible I. and the Northern
Foothills and discharging into Evans Cove, along
the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°57’S.,
163°48’E. Disc. and explored by the Northern
Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, who gave the feature
its expressive name.
Helmer Hanssen, Mount: see Breyer, Mount.
HELMER HANSSEN, MOUNT: ice-covered moun-
tain, distinguished by a sharp peak at its S. end,
rising from a high land mass W. of Amundsen Gl.
in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°05’S.,
163°50’W. Disc. in November 1911 by a Nor. exp.
under Amundsen on the journey to the South Pole,
and named by him for Helmer Hanssen, ice pilot
of the exp. and deputy leader of the South Pole
156
Party. It was resighted by the ByrdAE on the
South Polar Flight of November 1929. On subse-
quent charts, however, it was shown as Mount
Breyer, and the name Mount Helmer Hanssen mis-
applied to an unnamed mountain to the E. disc. by
Byrd. The US-ACAN accordingly retains the name
Mount Helmer Hanssen for the mountain so named
by Amundsen, and applies the name Mount Breyer
to the unnamed mountain disc. by Byrd. Not
adopted: Mount Breyer (q.v.).
HENDERSON, MOUNT: massive mountain about
3,400 ft. in el., rising through the icecap near the
continental margin about 8 mi. NE. of the N. end
of the Masson Range, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in
about 67°42’S., 63°05’E. Disc. in February 1931
by the BANZARE under Mawson. Probably named
for Prof. G. C. Henderson of Adelaide, a member of
the advisory committee for this exp. and for the
AAE, 1911-14.
HENDERSON, MOUNT: mountain in the S. part
of the Britannia Range, about 8,100 ft. in el., lying
at the N. side of Barne Inlet, on the W. side of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 80°21’S., 156°15’E. Disc. and
named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4.
HENDERSON ISLAND: ice-covered island about
8 mi. long and about 600 ft. in el., lying SE. of
Masson I., within the Shackleton Ice Shelf, and
about 5 mi. N. of Cape Dovers on Queen Mary
Coast; in about 66°23’S., 97°07’E. Disc. in August
1912 by the Western Base Party of the AAE under
Mawson, and named for Prof. G. C. Henderson of
Adelaide.
HENGIST NUNATAK: isolated flat-topped nuna-
tak, more than 2,000 ft. in el., which rises above
the Roberts Ice Piedmont, about 10 mi. N. of
Mount Calais, in the NE. part of Alexander I Is-
land; in 69°00’S., 70°14’W. First seen and pho-
tographed from the air in 1936 and 1937 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground
in 1948 by the FIDS. The names for this feature
and for the group of nunataks to the north are
after the brother chieftains, Hengist and Horsa,
who led the first Saxon bands which settled Eng-
land in the fifth century.
HENKES ISLETS: group of snow-covered islets
surrounded by reefs, which fringe the SW. coast of
Adelaide I. and extend from Cape Adriasola 15
mi. southeastward to their terminus in Avian Islet;
centering in 67°44’S., 69°10’W. Disc. and first
charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and
named by him for one of the Norwegian directors
of the Magellan Whaling Co. at Punta Arenas.
Not adopted: Henkes Islands.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
HENNEQUIN, POINT: point which forms the
E. side of the entrance to Martel and Mackellar
Inlets, on the E. side of Admiralty Bay, King George
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°07’S., 58°24’W.
Probably named by the FrAE under Charcot, who
surveyed Admiralty Bay in 1909.
HENRY BAY: small bay about 4 mi. wide and 3
mi. long, lying between Baldwin Pt. on the E. and
Henry Its. and the small tongue of Howison Gl.
on the W., and indenting the E. end of Sabrina
Coast; in about 66°40’S., 121°00’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Wilkes
Henry, midshipman on the sloop of war Vincennes
of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
HENRY ISLETS: group of about four small islets,
lying at the W. side of the entrance to Henry Bay
and about 2 mi. E. of Howison Gl., off Sabrina
Coast; in about 66°40’S., 120°55’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Wilkes
Henry, midshipman with the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
HENRY LUCY, MOUNT: peak, probably about
11,000 ft. in el., standing about 5 mi. SSW. of Mt.
White, between the Keltie and Mill Glaciers on the
E. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 85°15’S.,
171°40’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, who named it for Sir Henry Lucy,
M.P. who publicized the exp. and assisted in ob-
taining a financial grant from Parliament.
Henry May, Cape: see William Henry May, Cape.
Herbert Sound: see Sidney Herbert Sound.
HERCULES BAY: bay about 0.5 mi. wide, which
lies about 1 mi. W. of Cape Saunders along the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°40’W.
Named by Norwegian whalers after the Hercules
(or Herkules), a whale catcher which had visited
the bay. Not adopted: Herkules Bucht [German].
HERCULES POINT: point, marked by a small
off-lying islet, forming the W. side of the entrance
to Hercules Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°07’S., 36°40’W. The feature was probably
first surveyed by DI personnel in 1927. The name,
which derives from the nearby Hercules Bay, was
used by a Ger. exp. under Kohl-Larsen, 1928-29,
but is known to have been used earlier by whalers.
Not adopted: Herkules-Odden [Norwegian].
HERDMAN, CAPE: broad, low, ice-covered cape,
situated about 12 mi. ENE. of Mt. Reynolds and
forming the S. side of the entrance to Violante
157
Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°39’S.,
60°37’W. First seen and photographed from the
air in 1940 by USAS, but in subsequent reports the
feature now named Mt. Reynolds was described as
the S. entrance point to Violante Inlet. During
1947 the cape was photographed from the air by the
RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the
FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the
FIDS for Henry F. P. Herdman, English oceanog-
rapher and member of the Discovery Investigations
hydrological staff since 1924.
HERDMAN ROCKS: two rocks about 50 ft. in el.,
lying about 2 mi. SE. of Hard Rock and 3 mi. NE. of
Cape Dundas, Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is. in
60°42’S., 44°20’W. First charted by a Fr. exp.
under D’Urville in 1838. Named by DI personnel
on the Discovery II, who charted the South Orkney
Is. in 1933, for H. F. P. Herdman.
HERD POINT: point which forms the W. side of
Ferguson Bay at the SE. end of Thule I., in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 59°28’S.,27°17’W. Charted
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and
named for R. D. Hard of Messrs. Ferguson Brothers,
Port Glasgow, Scotland, builders of the Discovery II.
Herkules Bucht: see Hercules Bay.
Herkules-Odden: see Hercules Point.
HERLACHER, CAPE: bold, ice-covered headland
forming the N. end of Martin Pen. and the W. side
of the ice-filled inlet at the head of the peninsula,
on the Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in
about 73°40’S., 112°00’W. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December
1946. Named by the US-ACAN for Carl J. Her-
lacher, principal Antarctic cartographer with the
U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office since 1937.
Hermelo, Island: see Delta Island.
HERRMANN MOUNTAINS: group of mountains
in New Schwabenland, projecting through the ice-
cap and extending about 25 mi. in a NE.—SW. di-
rection; in about 72°25’S., 0°30’E. It lies between
Gockel Crest and Barkley Mtns. with which it forms
a rectilinear group constituting the northwest-
facing foot of the polar plateau. Disc. by the
GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for
Ernst Herrmann, geographer of the expedition.
HERSCHEL, MOUNT: conspicuous peak of the
Admiralty Range, standing above Cape Roget in
Victoria Land; in about 72°10’S., 169°25’E. Disc.
in 1840 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for
Sir John F. W. Herschel, noted English astronomer.
Not adopted: Mount Herschell.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Herschell, Mount: see Herschel, Mount.
HERSHEY RIDGE: mountain ridge lying be-
tween Mt. Grace McKinley and the Haines Mtns.,
in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in
about 77°35’S., 147°15’W. Charted in 1934 by the
ByrdAE, and named for Garland Hershey, Asst.
State Geologist of the Iowa Geological Survey,
since 1939. Not adopted: Garland Hersey Ridge,
Garland Hershey Ridge.
Hertha Insel: see Hertha Nunatak.
HERTHA NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about
1.75 mi. NW. of Castor Nunatak in the Seal Nuna-
taks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°10’S., 60°02°W. Disc. in December 1893 by
Capt. C. A. Larsen, who named it after the Hertha,
a ship which combined sealing and exploring ac-
tivities along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. under
Capt. C. J. Evensen in 1893-94. It was determined
to be a nunatak by the SwedAE under Nord-
enskjold during a sledge journey in 1902. Not
adopted: Hertha Insel [German].
Hertug Ernst Bay; Herzog Ernst Bay: see Duke
Ernst Bay.
HERVE COVE: small cove about 2 mi. SW. of
Point Thomas, along the S. side of Ezcurra Inlet,
Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°32’W. Charted by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him
for a member of the expedition. Not adopted:
Herve Cove.
HERVEOU POINT: point which forms the W.
tip of the rocky peninsula between Port Charcot
and Salpétriére Bay, on the W. side of Booth I.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S.,
64°03’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under
Charcot, and named by him for F. Hervéou, a sea-
man on the exp. ship Francais. Not adopted: Point
Hervéou.
HESS GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. long, flow-
ing in an ENE. direction between steep rock walls
to its mouth about 10 mi. SW. of Monnier Pt., on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°13’S., 65°01’W.
Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for
Hans Hess, German glaciologist.
Hestes Hode: see Horse Head.
HEWISON POINT: point which forms the E. side
of Ferguson Bay and the SE. end of Thule I., in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 59°28’S., 27°15’W. Charted
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who
named it for Lt. Col. Hewison of Messrs. Ferguson
Brothers, Port Glasgow, Scotland, builders of the
Discovery II.
158
HEYWOOD ISLANDS: group of small islands
about 2.5 mi. off the N. side of Robert I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°18’S., 59°36’W. The
name appears on Powell’s map of 1822 and com-
memorates Capt. Peter Heywood, RN, in command
of H.M.S. Nereus stationed off the E. coast of South
America in that period. Not adopted: Heywood’s
Isles.
Heywood’s Isles: see Heywood Islands.
HIDDEN LAKE: lake about 1.5 mi. long on the
W. side of James Ross I., which drains by a small
stream into the deep bay 4 mi. S. of Lagrelius Pt.,
lying midway between Lagrelius Pt. and Cape
Obelisk; in 64°02’S., 58°18’W. Disc. in 1945 by the
FIDS, who so named it because it is obscured by
surrounding highlands.
HIGHJUMP ARCHIPELAGO: a group of rocky
islands, rocks and ice rises about 50 mi. long and
from 5 to 15 mi. wide, lying generally N. of the
Bunger Hills and extending from the Taylor Its.,
close NW. of Cape Hordern, to a prominent group
of ice rises which terminate close W. of Cape Elliott,
off the W. end of Knox Coast; centering in about
66°05’S., 101°10’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and so
named by the US-ACAN. The codeword ‘“High-
jump” was used for identifying the U.S. Navy Task
Force 68, 1946-47. This task force was divided into
three groups which completed photographic flights
covering approximately 70 per cent of the coastal
areas of Antarctica, excluding Palmer Peninsula, as
well as significant portions of the interior.
HIGH PEAK: peak with red colored cliffs, prob-
ably over 3,000 ft. in el., about 4 mi. NE. of Copper
Peak and 2.5 mi. W. of the S. end of Lion I., on the
SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch., in
64°40’S., 63°14’W. Probably first seen by the
BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The name
appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI
personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an
earlier naming.
HIGH POINT: conspicuous point, about 400 ft.
in el., forming the N. side of the entrance to Moon
Bay, eastern Livingston I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°33’S., 60°03’W. Charted in 1935 by DI
personnel on the Discovery II, who probably gave
this descriptive name.
HIGH ROCK: rock about 40 ft. in el., situated
at the N. end of the Welcome Its., about 4 mi.
WNW. of Cape Buller, off the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 53°58’S., 37°29’W. Named by DI per-
sonnel who made surveys at South Georgia during
1926-30.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
HIGH STILE: pass at the head of Sunshine Gl.,
about 1,200 ft. in el., situated at the junction of the
SW. ridge of Mt. Nivea and the E. end of Brisbane
Plateau in the central part of Coronation I., South
Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 45°32’W. The name arises
from the general appearance and situation of the
feature and was applied by the FIDS following their
survey of 1948-49.
Hill, Cape: see Hill, Mount.
HILL, MOUNT: mountain about 3,100 ft. in el.,
standing about 8 mi. SW. of Cape Sharbonneau at
the E. side of the head of Lehrke Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°56’S., 61°42’W. Disc.
by members of the East Base of the USAS who ex-
plored this coast by land and from the air in 1940.
They named it Cape Hill for Archie C. Hill, cook at
East Base. In 1947 it was determined to be a
mountain distinct from Cape Sharbonneau to the
NE. by a joint sledge party consisting of members
of the RARE and the FIDS. Not adopted: Cape
Hill.
Hill Island: see Snow Hill Island.
Hilton Bay: see Hilton Inlet.
HILTON INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 12 mi.
wide, which recedes about 20 mi. W. from its en-
trance between Capes Darlington and Knowles,
along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°57’S.,
61°20’W. Disc. by the USAS in 1940, and named
for Donald C. Hilton, member of the East Base
sledge party that charted this coast as far S. as
this inlet. Not adopted: Hilton Bay.
HINKS, CAPE: bold headland surmounted by an
ice-covered dome about 1,600 ft. in el., forming the
NE. extremity of Finley Ridge, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 69°10’S., 63°10’W. Disc. and
photographed by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight
of Dec. 20, 1928. Later photographed from the air
by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, and by the USAS in
1940. Named by the US-SCAN for Arthur R.
Hinks, Sec. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1915-45,
who undertook in his published studies to reconcile
the explorations of Wilkins, Ellsworth, Rymill and
the USAS in this general area. Not adopted: Cape
Cross.
HINKS, MOUNT: peak about 2,100 ft. in ei., lying
about 2 mi. S. of Mt. Marsden in the Gustav Bull
Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°53’S.,
66°04’E. The BANZARE under Mawson sighted
land and made an aerial observation flight in this
area in early January 1930. The exp. landed on
nearby Scullin Monolith on Feb. 13, 1931, and
named this peak for Arthur R. Hinks.
159
HINKS CHANNEL: irregular-shaped channel in
the N. part of Laubeuf Fjord, about 2 mi. wide and
11 mi. long, which extends from The Gullet and
separates Day I. from the W. coast of Palmer Pen.
and from Wyatt I.; in 67°16’S., 67°37’W. First
roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Ry-
mill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who named
it for Arthur R. Hinks.
HIPPO ISLET: steep, rocky islet, about 0.5 mi.
long and 22 yards wide, which rises about 400 ft.
above the Shackleton Ice Shelf, about 1.5 mi. N. of
Delay Pt., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°26’S.,
98°06’E. Disc. by the Western Base Party of the
AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who so named it be-
cause of its shape. Not adopted: Hippo Island,
Hippo Nunatak, Hippo Nunataks.
HIPPOLYTE POINT: point which marks the N.
end of Lion I., which lies immediately E. of Anvers
IT. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°39’S., 63°07’W.
Charted and named by the BelgAE under De
Gerlache, 1897-99. Not adopted: Cape Hippolyte.
Hippo Nunatak: see Hippo Islet.
HITCHCOCK, MOUNT: a mostly ice-covered
mountain, about 5,200 ft. in el., standing at the S.
side of Mobiloil Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in about 68°53’S., 64°51’W. Disc. and photo-
graphed by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec.
20, 1928, and rephotographed by Lincoln Ellsworth
in 1935. Named by the US-ACAN in 1952 for
Charles B. Hitchcock of the American Geograph-
ical Soc., who by utilizing these photographs as-
sisted in constructing the first reconnaissance map
of this area.
HJALMAR JOHANSEN, MOUNT: mountain
which stands at the S. side of Mt. Gjertsen in the
N. part of the La Gorce Mtns., in the Queen Maud
Range; in about 86°43’S., 147°30’W. Disc. on the
Polar Flight by the ByrdAE on Nov. 28-29, 1929.
Charted by the Southern Sledge Party of the
ByrdAE in 1934. So named in an attempt to rec-
oncile the 1934 discoveries with the names applied
by Roald Amundsen, who named a peak in this vi-
cinity for Hjalmar Johansen, member of the East-
ern Sledge Party of a Nor. exp. under Amundsen,
1910-12. Not adopted: Mount Thurston.
HJORTH HILL: rounded mountain about 2,900
ft. in el., standing on the N. side of New Hbr. about
7m. SW. of Cape Bernacchi, in Victoria Land; in
about 77°32’S., 163°33’E. Charted by the BrAE
under Scott, 1910-13, and named for the maker of
the primus lamps used by the exp. This name is
spelled Hjort’s Hill in the popular narrative of
Scott’s exp., but the spelling Hjorth’s Hill is used
on the map accompanying the narrative. The
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
recommended spelling is based upon the form con-
sistently used on the maps accompanying the BrAE
scientific reports. Not adopted: Hjorth’s Hill,
Hjort’s Hill.
Hjort’s Hill: see Hjorth Hill.
H. J. Sjégren Fiord: see Sjogren Glacier.
Hoadky, Cape: see Hoadley, Cape.
HOADLEY, CAPE: prominent rock outcrop
forming the W. portal of the valley occupied by
Scott Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°33’S.,
100°04’E. Disc. by the Western Base Party of the
AAE under Mawson in November 1912, and named
for C. A. Hoadley, geologist with the Western Base
Party. Not adopted: Cape Hoadky.
HOBART ROCK: low rock lying in the S. side
of the entrance to King Edward Cove, Cumberland
East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W.
The name appears on a chart based upon a survey
of King Edward Cove by personnel on H.MS.
Sappho in 1906.
HOBBS COAST: that portion of the coast of
Marie Byrd Land extending from Emory Land Bay,
in about 75°45’S., 140°30’W., northeastward to the
W. edge of Getz Ice Shelf. Named by the USAS
in 1940 for Prof. William H. Hobbs of the Univ. of
Michigan, glaciologist specializing in polar geog-
raphy and history.
HOBBS GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. long and
1:5 mi. wide, which flows into McMurdo Sound
about 7 mi. S. of Blue Gl., in Victoria Land; in
about 77°57’S., 164°37’E. Disc. by the BrNAE
under Scott, 1901-4. Members of the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13, explored the area more thoroughly
and named this glacier for Prof. William H. Hobbs.
HODGEMAN ISLETS: small group of ice-covered
islets, situated about 7 mi. WSW. of Cape De la
Motte, off George V Coast, in about 67°01’S.,
144°15’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE, under Maw-
son, and named for Alfred J. Hodgeman, cartog-
rapher and asst. meteorologist with the Main Base
party.
HODGES, MOUNT: mountain, about 2,000 ft. in
el., standing 1 mi. W. of Mt. Duse, close NW. of the
head of King Edward Cove, Cumberland West Bay,
in South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°32’W. The peak
was first roughly surveyed by the SwedAH, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjéld. The name ‘Moldaenke Berg”
was used for this peak on a 1907 map by A. Szie-
lasko, but the name has not survived on later
general charts of this area. The name Mount
Hodges appears to have been applied some years
160
later and is now well established in use for this
peak. The name may be for Capt. M. H. Hodges,
RN, of the Sappho, who visited and mapped por-
tions of Cumberland Bay in 1906. Not adopted:
Moldaenke Berg [German].
HODSON, MOUNT: volcanic peak about 3,000 ft.
in el., marking the summit of Visokoi I., in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 56°42’S., 27°13’W. Disc.
by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, 1819-21.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discov-
ery II, who named it for Arnold Hodson, then Gov.
of the Falkland Islands.
Hogback, The: see Hogback Hill.
HOGBACK HILL: rounded mountain about
2,300 ft. in el., situated immediately N. of Hjorth
Hill and about 3 mi. W. of Cape Bernacchi, in
Victoria Land; in about 177°30’S., 163°34’E.
Charted and given this descriptive name by the
BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: The
Hogback.
HOGS MOUTH ROCKS: chain of about three
rocks which extend from Invisible It. to Albatross
I. and form the E. limit of Committee Bay in the
Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°19’W.
First roughly charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cush-
man Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig
Daisy. Probably named by DI personnel who sur-
veyed the Bay of Isles in 1929-30. Not adopted:
The Hogs Mouth Rocks.
Holder, Mount: see Houlder, Mount.
HOLE ROCK: southernmost of three aligned
rocks lying close NW. of North Foreland, the NE.
cape of King George I., in the south Shetland Is.;
in 61°52’S., 57°41’W. Charted in 1937 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, who so named it be-
cause a conspicuous hole extends through it.
HOLLICK-KENYON PENINSULA: narrow, ice-
covered spur from the main mountain mass of
Palmer Pen., which projects about 30 mi. in a NE.
arc from its base at the E. side of Mobiloil Inlet;
centering in 68°30’S., 63°30’W. Disc. and par-
tially photographed from the air by Lincoln Ells-
worth on his trans-Antarctic flight in November-—
December 1935 from Dundee I. to the Ross Sea.
Photographed from the air and charted from the
ground in 1940 by the USAS. Named for Herbert
Hollick-Kenyon, pilot on Ellsworth’s flight in 1935,
whose demonstration of the practicability of land-
ing and taking off an airplane in isolated areas
constitutes a distinct contribution to the technique
of Antarctic exploration.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
HOLLICK-KENYON PLATEAU: plateau area of
Ellsworth Highland, over 6,000 ft. in el., centering
in about 79°S., 108°W. Disc. by Lincoln Ellsworth
on his trans-Antarctic flight of 1935, and named
by Ellsworth for his pilot, Herbert Hollick-Kenyon.
Not adopted: Hollick Kenyon Plateau.
HOLL ISLAND: rocky, triangular-shaped island,
about 1.7 mi. long and rising to about 310 ft. in
el., marking the SW. end of the Windmill Is., off
Budd Coast; in 66°25’S., 110°27’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and USN Op. Wml., 1947-48. Named by
the US-ACAN for Lt. Richard C. Holl, USNR,
photogrammetrist with the Navy Hydrographic
Office, who served as surveyor with the USN Op.
Wmil. parties which established astronomical con-
trol stations on Holl I. and along Queen Mary and
Knox Coasts.
HOLMAN DOME: dome-shaped nunatak about
2 mi. SW. of Watson Bluff, on the E. side of David I.,
off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°28’S., 98°48’E.
Charted by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who
named it for the Hon. William Arthur Holman,
Premier of New South Wales in 1911, and later
member of the Commonwealth House of Repre-
sentatives.
HOLME BAY: bay about 20 mi. wide, contain-
ing many islands and islets, lying just N. of the
Framnes Mtns. along Mac-Robertson Coast; in
about 67°35’S., 62°42’E. Mapped by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken by
a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January—Febru-
ary 1937, and so named because of its island-
studded character.
Holmen Graa: see Grey Islet.
HOLMES, MOUNT: buttress-type mountain
about 4,800 ft. in el., lying about 4 mi. NW. of Mt.
Hayes on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°47’S.,
64°16’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, and photo-
graphed from the air by the RARE under Ronne.
Named by the FIDS for Maurice Holmes, author
of An Introduction to the Bibliography of Captain
James Cook, R.N. (London, 1936).
HOLMES GLACIER: piedmont glacier about 10
mi. wide, formed by the confluence of small chan-
nel glaciers which flow from the continental ice
on the NE. flank of Norths Highland to the W.
side of Porpoise Bay, about 10 mi. SSE. of Cape
Spieden, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°30’S.,
127°15’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by
161
the US-ACAN for Dr. Silas Holmes, assistant sur-
geon on the brig Porpoise of the USEE under
Wilkes, 1838-42.
HOLTEDAHL BAY: bay, about 7 mi. long in a
NW.-SE. direction and averaging about 6 mi. wide,
lying between Ferin Head and Black Head, along
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°05’S., 65°25’W.
Disc. by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Named
by Rymill for Prof. Olaf Holtedahl, Norwegian
geologist who conducted geologic research during
1927-28, in the South Shetland Is. and the Palmer
Arch., to which he was transported by various
whaling vessels.
HOMBRON ROCKS: two rocks about 1.5 mi.
apart, lying about 8 mi. NE. of Cape Roquemaurel
and 4 mi. off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.;
in 63°28’S., 58°42’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40,
under D’Urville, and named by him for Jacques
Hombron, a member of the expedition. The rocks
were charted by the FIDS in 1946. Not adopted:
Honabron Rock.
Homresund: see Macfie Sound.
Honabron Rock: see Hombron Rocks.
HOOD GLACIER: tributary glacier entering the
E. side of Beardmore Gl. immediately N. of Mt.
Cyril, at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
83°50’S., 172°30’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE
under Shackleton in December 1908.
HOOKER, CAPE: cape which forms the NE. end
of Low I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°16S.,
62°00’W. Though the origin of the name Cape
Hooker is unknown, it has appeared on charts for
over a hundred years and its usage has been estab-
lished internationally. The name may be asso-
ciated with the voyage of a Br. exp. under Foster
in the Chanticleer, 1828-31.
HOOKER, CAPE: cape which forms the W. side
of the entrance to Yule Bay, on the N. coast of
Victoria Land; in about 70°35’S., 166°25’E. Disc.
in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it
for Joseph Dalton Hooker (later Sir Joseph),
naturalist and asst. surgeon on the exp. ship
Erebus who became internationally famous as a
botanist.
HOOKER, MOUNT: rounded summit about
12,400 ft. in el., standing in the Royal Society
Range, SW. of McMurdo Sound, on the W. side of
Ross Sea; in about 78°07’S., 162°50’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir
Joseph Dalton Hooker.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
HOPE, MOUNT: mountain about 2,700 ft. in
el., marked by a well-defined terrace strewn with
erratics, projecting through Ross Ice Shelf at the
W. side of the mouth of Beardmore Gl.; in about
83°35’/S., 171°30’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the
BrAE under Shackleton, and so named because
the Polar Party, after ascending it in the hope of
finding a route to the Pole, saw the great Beard-
more Gl. stretching to the SW. as far as they could
see.
Hope, Mount: see Bransfield, Mount.
HOPE BAY: bay about 3 mi. long and 2 mi.
wide, indenting the tip of Palmer Pen. and open-
ing on Antarctic Sound; in 63°24’S., 57°00’W.
Disc. on Jan. 15, 1902 by the SwedAE under
Nordenskjold, who named it in commemoration of
the winter spent there by J. Gunnar Andersson,
Samuel A. Duse, and Toralf Grunden of his expe-
dition.
HOPE ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long with
an islet off its S. end, lying about 7 mi. WNW. of
D’Urville I., off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in
63°02’S., 56°52’W. The name appears on Powell’s
map published by Laurie in 1822. A Fr. exp. under
D’Urville, 1837-40, charted an island in essentially
the same position which he named Daussy Island.
Not adopted: Dausay Island, Daussy Island.
HOPE POINT: rocky bluff about 70 ft. in el.,
forming the N. side of the entrance to King EKd-
ward Cove, on the W. side of Cumberland East
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°29’W. Charted
and photographed by the SwedAE under Norden-
skjold, 1901-4. The point is named for H. W. W.
Hope, who directed a 1920 survey of King Edward
Cove by personnel on H.M.S. Dartmouth. It is the
site of a monument in commemoration of Sir
Ernest Shackleton.
HOPE POINT: bluff forming the W. end of
Bertha I. and the E. side of the entrance to Wil-
liam Scoresby Bay, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in
about 67°23’S., 59°38’E. The name appears to
have been applied by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby who landed on Bertha I. in February 1936.
HOP ISLAND: small, rocky islet, about 1.7 mi.
long, which rises to about 170 ft. in el., marking
the third largest of the Rauer Is. and lying about
3 mi. WSW. of Filla I. in the west-central por-
tion of the group, off Ingrid Christensen Coast;
in about 68°51’S., 77°35’E. Charted by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken in
January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen-
sen, and named Hopoy, a Norwegian word mean-
ing “cove island,” as this feature was believed to
162
form part of a horseshoe-shaped island which en-
closed a prominent cove. The name Hop Island
was proposed by John H. Roscoe, following his
1952 compilation from aerial photographs taken by
USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, as he determined
that the original Hopoy feature now comprises a
chain of small islands, islets and rocks. Not
adopted: Hopoy [Norwegian].
Hopoy: see Hop Island.
HORDERN, CAPE: ice-free cape, overlain by
morainic drift, separating Queen Mary and Knox
Coasts, and marking the NW. end of the small
peninsula identified as the Bunger Hills; in about
66°16’S., 100°27’E. The cape lies at the S. side of
the entrance to a narrow, sinuous inlet, which
roughly bisects the Bunger Hills in an E.—W. direc-
tion, and is enclosed on the W. by the Edisto Ice
Tongue. Probably sighted from Watson Bluff, in
98°52’E., by A. L. Kennedy and other members of
the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson,
1911-14, who charted the W. wall of what ap-
peared to be two small islands lying N. of Cape
Hoadley in about 100°35’E. Named by Mawson
for Sir Samuel Hordern of Sydney, Australia, a
patron of the AAEK. Renamed Cape Hordern by
the US-ACAN following correlation of Kennedy’s
map with the US-ACAN map of 1955 compiled from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-
47. Not adopted: Hordern Island, Hordern
Islands, Mount Hordern.
Hordern, Mount; Hordern Islands: see Hordern,
Cape.
HORDERN, MOUNT: peak about 4,900 ft. in el.,
rising through the icecap about 5 mi. S. of Mt.
Coates, in the David Range on Mac-Robertson
Coast; in about 67°56’S., 62°32’E. Disc. in Febru-
ary 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and
probably named for Sir Samuel Hordern, a patron
of this exp. and the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14.
HORLICK MOUNTAINS: mountain range lying
SE. of the head of Ross Ice Shelf, tentatively inter-
preted as a continuation of the Watson Escarp-
ment. Tentatively located in about 86°00’S.,
115°00’W. on the basis of two observations, one by
Kennett L. Rawson from a position in about
83°00’S., 105°19’W., at the end of his SE. flight of
Nov. 22, 1934, and another by Quin A. Blackburn
in December 1934, from position looking up two
eastern tributaries of Robert Scott Gl. on either
side of a point in about 85°40’S., 152°00’W. Disc.
in 1934 by the ByrdAEK and named for William
Horlick, of Horlick’s Milk Corp., who helped sup-
port the expedition.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
HORN, THE: peak about 800 ft. in el. with a
sheer cliff of reddish rock on its W. side, sur-
mounting the NW. cape of Eagle I., which lies in
Prince Gustav Chan. between Louis Philippe Pen.
and Vega I., in 63°39’S., 57°34’W. Disc. and
named by the FIDS in 1945. The name is descrip-
tive of the shape of the peak.
HORN BLUFF: rocky promontory about 1,100
ft. in el., marked by a prominent columnar struc-
ture in its upper rock strata, projecting through
the continental ice as a coastal cliff at the W. side
of the entrance to Deakin Bay, on George V Coast;
in about 68°24’S., 149°48’E. Disc. in December
1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for
W. A. Horn of Adelaide, patron of the expedition.
HORNE, MOUNT: mountain which lies W. of
the Hauberg Mtns. and back of Orville Escarpment,
on Joerg Plateau; in about 76°47’S., 70°00’W.
Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who
named it for Bernard Horne, manager of the Horne
Department Store, Pittsburgh, Pa., who furnished
windproofs and other clothing for the expedition.
Not adopted: Mount Bernard Horne.
Hornet: see Horn Peak.
HORN PEAK: an outstanding rocky peak about
1,100 ft. in el., lying about 3 mi. W. of the head of
William Scoresby Bay, on Kemp Coast; in about
67°26’S., 59°25’E. Charted by Norwegian cartog-
raphers from photographs taken by a Nor. exp.
under Christensen in January-February 1937 and
probably so named by them because of its promi-
nence. Not adopted: Hornet [Norwegian].
HORSA NUNATAKS: isolated group of about
five partly snow-covered nunataks, more than 2,000
ft. in el., which rise above the Roberts Ice Pied-
mont, about 14 mi. N. of Mt. Calais, in the NE.
part of Alexander I Island; in 68°56’S., 70°18’W.
First seen and photographed from the air in 1936
and 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed
from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS. The names
for these nunataks and for the isolated nunatak
to the south are after the brother chieftains,
Hengist and Horsa, who led the first Saxon bands
which settled England in the fifth century.
HORSBURG POINT: point about 3.4 mi. NW. of
Scarlett Pt., on the SW. side of Montagu I., in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 58°26’S., 26°26’W. Charted
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who
named it for H. Horsburgh, technical officer on
the DI staff.
HORSE HEAD: jagged, rocky point with con-
spicuous cliffs about 40 ft. in el., situated 600 yards
N. of the mouth of Penguin River, in Cumberland
163
East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W.
The profile of the cliff is said to resemble a horse’s
head. First surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjold. The name Horse Head,
recommended by the Br-APC in 1954, is an English
form of “Hestes Hode,” applied by sealers and
whalers. Not adopted: Hestes Hode [Norwegian].
Horseshoe Bay; Horseshoe Island Cove:
Lystad Bay.
see
HORSESHOE BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide at the
S. side of Cape George, along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°16’W. The name appears
on a chart based upon a 1929 sketch survey by
DI personnel.
HORSESHOE BAY: cover situated at the N.
of the Cape Royds headland, along the W.
of Ross I.; in about 77°32’S., 166°09’E. Disc.
named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4.
name is suggestive of the shape of the cove.
side
side
and
The
HORSESHOE ISLAND: island about 7 mi. long
and 3 mi. wide occupying most of the entrance to
Square Bay, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 67°51’/S., 67°12’W. Disc. and named by the
BGLE under Rymill who mapped this area by land
and from the air in 1936-37. Its name is indic-
ative of the crescentic alignment of the 2,000 to
3,000 foot mountains on the island.
HORSESHOE ISLANDS: group of islets whose
arrangement is suggestive of a horseshoe, about
0.5 mi. WNW. of Grotto I., in the Argentine Is., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S., 64°18’W.
Charted and named by the BGLE under Rymill,
1934-37.
HORSESHOE MOUNTAIN: _horseshoe-shaped
mountain about 8,200 ft. in el., lying near the edge
of the plateau and N. of the head of the Taylor Gl.,
in Victoria Land; in about 77°35’S., 160°25’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who so
named this feature because of its shape.
Hoseason Harbor: see Mikkelsen Harbor.
HOSEASON ISLAND: island about 7 mi. long
and 3 mi. wide, which rises to about 1,900 ft. in
el., lying about 20 mi. W. of Trinity I. at the NE.
end of the Palmer Arch.; in 63°45’S., 61°45’W.
This name has appeared on charts for over 100
years, and commemorates James Hoseason, first
mate on the Sprightly, an Enderby Brothers seal-
ing ship which operated in these waters in 1824-25.
HOSKINS, MOUNT: mountain about 25 mi. W.
of Cape William Henry May and about 8 mi. SSE.
of Mt. Lindley, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf;
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in about 81°52’S., 159°28’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir Anthony
Hoskins, former Lord of the Admiralty and a
member of the BrNAE Ship Committee.
Hospital Cove: see Yankee Harbor.
HOULDER, MOUNT: dark, precipitous peak,
about 1,100 ft. in el., bordering the E. side of
Furness Gl. on the N. side of Elephant I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in about 61°02’S., 55°00’W.
Charted by a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-16,
and named for Frank Houlder of the Houlder
steamship line, who was of assistance to the expe-
dition. Not adopted: Mount Frank MHoulder,
Mount Holder.
HOULE ISLET: low rocky islet, lying about 0.9
mi. W. of Ressac It. and about 3.5 mi. NNE. of
Zélée Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in about
66°42’S., 141°12’E. Photographed from the air by
USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE
under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because the
surf breaks over this low-lying islet. Houle is the
French word for surge or swell.
HOUND BAY: bay, which is 2.5 mi. wide at its
mouth and recedes 3 mi., entered between Tijuca
Pt. and Cape Vakop along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°13’W. The names George
Bay and Hundebugten have appeared on charts
for this feature. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that
this bay is better known to whalers and sealers as
“Bikjebugten” (the word Bikje implying any low
type canine). The name Hound Bay, proposed by
the Br-APC, is an English form of this name. Not
adopted: Bikjebugten [Norwegian], George Bay,
Hundebugten [Norwegian], St. Georges Bay.
Houzeau de Lehaie, Cap; Houzeau de Lehaye,
Cape: see Lehaie, Cape.
HOVDE ICE TONGUE: small ice tongue, about
2 mi. wide and 2 mi. long, projecting NW. from the
continental ice overlying Ingrid Christensen Coast,
about 3 mi. NE. of Flatnes Ice Tongue; in about
69°14’S., 76°35’E. Charted by Norwegian cartog-
raphers from aerial photographs taken in January
1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. So
named by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study
of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March
1947, because of its close association with Hovde
Islet.
HOVDE ISLET: round, rocky islet, about 0.6 mi.
across, which rises to about 250 ft. in el., lying near
the NW. end of Hovde Ice Tongue, close off Ingrid
Christensen Coast; in about 69°14’S., 76°33’E.
Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
164
photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp.
under Lars Christensen, and named Hovde, a Nor-
wegian word meaning rounded hill. The generic
islet is approved as a more appropriate term be-
cause of the offshore nature of this feature. Not
adopted: Hovden [Norwegian].
Hovden: see Hovde Islet.
HOVGAARD ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long,
lying about 0.5 mi. SW. of Booth L., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 64°08’W. Disc. and
named Krogmann Island by a Ger. exp. under Dall-
mann, 1873-74, but the name Hovgaard Island,
applied by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99,
has overtaken the original name in usage. Not
adopted: Ile Howgaard [French], Krogmann Is-
land.
HOWARD, CAPE: high, flat-topped, snow-cov-
ered promontory separating Lamplugh and Odom
Inlets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°25’S.,
61°08’W. Disc. by the USAS who explored along
this coast by land and from the air in 1940. Named
by the US-ACAN for August Howard, founder of
the American Polar Soc. and editor of the Polar
Times. Not adopted: Cape Rusty.
HOWARD, MOUNT: dark-appearing, rounded
mountain lying NNE. of Mt. Bowen on the N. side
of Davis Gl., in Victoria Land; .in about 75°40’S.,
161°10’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4.
HOWARD BAY: bay about 4 mi. wide, lying be-
tween Cape Simpson and Byrd Head along Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°27’S., 61°06’E. Disc.
on about Feb. 18, 1931 by the BANZARE under
Mawson, and named by him for A. Howard, a mem-
ber of the expedition. Not adopted: Ufsdyvagen
[Norwegian ].
Howard Island: (in about 72°40’S., 59°00’W.) the
decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since
subsequent survey has shown that no island exists
in the position indicated. Instead, the name How-
ard has been applied to a cape in 71°25’S., 61°10’W.
HOWE, MOUNT: a group of low connecting
ridges and gable-shaped nunataks standing about
15 mi. SE. of Mt. Weaver and S. of the head of
Robert Scott Gl., rising above the ice of the south
polar plateau to about 10,000 ft. in el., at the S.
fringe of the Queen Maud Range; in about 87°10’S.,
149°20’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named
by Byrd for Louis McHenry Howe, secretary to the
President of the United States at that time. Not
adopted: Mount Louis McHenry Howe.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Howgaard, Ile: see Hovgaard Island.
HOWISON GLACIER: channel glacier about 3
mi. wide and 9 mi. long, flowing N. from the low,
ice-covered ridge at the N. side of Reynolds Trough,
and terminating in a small tongue close W. of
Henry Bay, on Sabrina Coast; in about 66°40’S.,
120°45’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the
US-ACAN for James R. Howison, captains clerk on
the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under
Wilkes, 1838-42.
HOWKINS INLET: ice-filled inlet which recedes
SW. about 6 mi. between Cape Brooks and Lamb
Pt., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°40’S.,
60°54’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in
December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was
photographed from the air by the RARE under
Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted
it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for
G. Howkins, meteorologist with the FIDS base at
Deception I. in 1944-45.
HUB NUNATAK: beehive-shaped nunatak rising
above the main flow of Lammers Gl. and protrud-
ing near the center of The Traffic Circle, an ice-
filled upland depression on Palmer Pen. which is
marked by a series of prominent glaciers flowing in
a radial pattern; in about 68°37’S., 66°25’W. Disc.
in 1940 by members of the USAS, and so named
because of its unique location near the center of
The Traffic Circle. Not adopted: The Hub.
HUCKLE, MOUNT: mainly ice-covered moun-
tain, about 8,200 ft. in el., standing near the N.
end of the Douglas Range in eastern Alexander I
Island. It rises 7 mi. SSE. of Mt. Spivey on the
W. side of Toynbee Gl. and is 9 mi. inland from
George VI Sound; in 69°38’S., 69°48’W. Possibly
first seen in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, but
not recognized as part of Alexander I Island. It
was photographed from the air in 1936-37 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground
in 1948 by FIDS, and named for Sydney R. Huckle,
general assistant at Stonington I., who aided in
the FIDS survey of the W. side of George VI Sound
in 1949.
Hudson, Cape: see Freshfield, Cape.
HUDSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi.
wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the continental
ice at the W. flank of Norths Highland to the E.
side of Maury Bay, midway between Power Gl. and
Stuart Pt., on Banzare Coast; in about 66°35’S.,
125°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the
US-ACAN for William H. Hudson, midshipman on
165
the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
HUDSON MOUNTAINS: group of low moun-
tains, rising over 2,000 ft. in el., bordering the
S. margin of Peacock Bay, at the E. end of Wal-
green Coast; in about 74°00’S., 99°00’W. Disc. in
flights from the Bear by the USAS in February
1940. Named by the US-SCAN for Capt. William
L. Hudson, commander of the sloop of war Peacock
of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. The Peacock,
accompanied by the Flying Fish under Lt. Walker,
cruised along the edge of the pack N. of this coast
for several days during the latter part of March
1839. Not adopted: Noville Mountains.
HUGGINS, MOUNT: peak about 12,800 ft. in
el., rising SSW. of Mt. Rucker in the Royal So-
ciety Range, on the W. side of the Ross Sea; in
about 78°18’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAH,
1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir William
Huggins, Pres. of the Royal Soc., 1900-5.
HUGHES, MOUNT: mountain about 7,700 ft. in
el., lying S. of Mt. Longhurst in the Britannia
Range, along the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in
about 79°26’S., 157°12’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named it for J. F. Hughes,
Honorary Sec. of the Royal Geographical Soc., who
helped in the preparation for the expedition.
HUGHES BAY: bay lying between Capes
Sterneck and Murray, along the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 64°13’S., 61°20’W. This name has ap-
peared on maps for over 100 years, and com-
memorates Edward Hughes, master of the
Sprightly, an Enderby Brothers sealing vessel
which explored in this area in 1824-25. Not
adopted: Brialmont Bay, Hughes Gulf.
Hughes Gulf: see Hughes Bay.
Hugh Mitchell Peak: see Mitchell Peak.
Huidobro, Isla: see Alpha Island.
Huisvik Hafen: see Husvik Harbor.
Hull Bay: see Cordell Hull Bay.
Hull Glacier: see Cordell Hull Glacier.
HULTH, MOUNT: peak about 4,800 ft. in el.,
with precipitous black cliffs on its SE. side, lying
at the W. side of Cabinet Inlet, S. of the mouth
of Friederichsen Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 66°41’S., 64°11’W. During 1947 it was
charted by the FIDS and photographed from the
air by the RARE under Ronne. Named by the
FIDS for J. M. Hulth, Swedish polar bibliographer.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
HUMBOLDT GRABEN: a fault depression in
the Wohlthat Mtns., separating Petermann Range
from the Alexander Humboldt Mtns., in New
Schwabenland; centering in about 71°40’S.,
12°00’E. The trough, about 30 mi. long and
averaging about 4 mi. wide, descends northward
from a maximum elevation of 6,800 ft. at the edge
of the polar platform to 4,900 ft. in about 71°25’S.
Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and
named after the nearby Alexander Humboldt
Mountains.
Humboldt Mountains: see Alexander Humboldt
Mountains.
HUM ISLET: islet lying NE. of the entrance to
William Scoresby Bay, between the W. extremities
of Bertha I. and Islay, off Mac-Robertson Coast;
in about 67°22’S., 59°41’E. Disc. and named by
DI personnel on the William Scoresby in February
1936. Not adopted: Sundholmen [Norwegian].
HUMMOCK ISLAND: rocky crescent-shaped is-
land about 1 mi. long, lying about 2.5 mi. NNE. of
the W. tip of Robert I. and 3 mi. ENE. of Table I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°19’S., 59°45’W.
Charted and given this descriptive name by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II in 1935.
HUMMOCK ISLAND: island about 1 mi. in
diameter, lying about 4 mi. W. of Larrouy I. and 6
mi. NNW. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°53’S., 65°31’W. Disc. and named by
the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37.
Hummocks, Ile des deux: see Two Hummock
Island.
HUMP, THE: conspicuous dome-shaped summit
on the N. shore of Lapeyrére Bay, northern Anvers
I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 63°16’W. The
name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey
by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect
an earlier naming.
HUMPBACK ROCKS: group of about three rocks
lying 0.25 mi. N. of Cape Saunders, off the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°38’W. The SGS,
1951-52, reported that the descriptive name
“Knglrokset” (meaning Humpback Whale Rocks)
has been used for this feature by the whalers and
sealers at South Georgia. The English form of the
name, Humpback Rocks, was recommended by the
Br—APC in 1954. Not adopted: Knglrokset [Nor-
wegian].
HUMPHREY LLOYD, MOUNT: conspicuous peak
lying between Mt. Vernon Harcourt and Mt. Pea-
cock in the Admiralty Range, in the NE. part of
166
Victoria Land; in about 72°18’S., 169°10’E. Disc.
in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who
named it for Dr. Humphrey Lloyd of Trinity Col-
lege, Dublin, an active member of the British Assn.
which promoted interest in magnetic and meteor-
ological research in the Antarctic.
HUMPS ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. long with
two summits near the W. end, situated 4.5 mi. SSE.
of the tip of The Naze, a peninsula of northern
James Ross I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Pal-
mer Pen:; in’ 63°59/S:, 57°25°W. Discly byaathe
SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4. This de-
scriptive name was recommended by the Br—APC
in 1948 following a survey of the area by the FIDS
in 1945.
Hundebugten: see Hound Bay.
HUNT, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain about
1,700 ft. in el., surmounting the promontory which
terminates in Cape De la Motte, on George V
Coast; in about 67°07’S., 144°19’E. Disc. in 1912
by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for H. A.
Hunt, Dir. of the Commonwealth Meteorological
Bureau.
HUNTER, CAPE: rocky promontory about 6 mi.
W. of Cape Denison in Commonwealth Bay, on
George V Coast; in about 67°00’S., 142°23’E. Disc.
in 1912 and explored the following year by the AAE
under Mawson, who named it for Dr. John G. Hun-
ter of Sydney Univ., chief biologist at the AAE
Main Base.
HUNT GLACIER: small glacier descending E.
from the highlands W. of Granite Hbr., and enter-
ing the harbor immediately N. of Dreikanter Head,
in Victoria Land; in about 76°53’S., 162°33’E.
Charted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Prob-
ably named for H. A. Hunt, Australian meteorolo-
gist who assisted in writing the scientific reports of
the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9.
HUNT POINT: point, surmounted by a rocky
peak about 2,000 ft. in el., marking the N. side of
the entrance to Stonehouse Bay on the E. side of
Adelaide I.; in 67°18’S., 68°00’W. Disc. and first
roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char-
cot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who named
the point for Sgt. Kenneth D. Hunt, mechanic for
the expedition’s Norseman airplane in 1950.
HUON BAY: shallow bay, about 8 mi. wide be-
tween Cape Ducorps and Cape Legoupil, along the
NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°23’S.,
58°00’'W. A Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40,
originally gave the name Huon to a cape in this
area after Félix Huon de Kermadec, a member of
the expedition. Following a survey by the FIDS
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in 1946, it was found that no cape exists. The
name Huon, however, is retained for the shallow
bay which lies in the same area.
HURLEY, CAPE: cape marking the E. side of the
mouth of the depression occupied by Mertz Gl., on
George V Coast; in about 67°37’S., 145°20’E. Disc.
in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it
for James Francis Hurley, official photographer at
the AAE Main Base.
HURLEY, MOUNT: snow-covered massif with
steep bare slopes on the W. side, lying SW. of Cape
Ann immediately behind the coast, in Enderby
Land; in about 66°18’S., 51°10’E. Disc. in Janu-
ary 1930 by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson,
who probably named it for Capt. Frank (James
Francis) Hurley, photographer with the exp. Hur-
ley also served with the AAE under Mawson, 1911-—
14, and a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-17.
HUSVIK: whaling station at the head of Husvik
Hbr., which is entered on the S. side of Stromness
Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S.,
36°43’W. Named in about 1912, probably by mem-
bers of the Tgénsberg Hvalfangeri, a Norwegian
whaling company based there.
HUSVIK HARBOR: southernmost of three har-
bors at the head of Stromness Bay, along the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°40’W. The
name dates back to about 1912, and was probably
given by Norwegian whalers who frequented the
harbor and established a whaling station at its
head. Not adopted: Busen Fjord, Huisvik Hafen
[German].
HUT COVE: small cove in the E. side of Hope
Bay, entered from the N. between Seal Pt. and
Grunden Rocks, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°24’S., 56°59’W. Disc. by a party under Dr.
J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4, who
wintered at Hope Bay in 1903. So named in 1945
by the FIDS, because they, like the SwedAH,
established a base hut on the S. shore of this
cove.
HUT POINT: small point lying about 1.2 mi.
NW. of Cape Armitage, at the S. end of Hut Point
Pen., Ross I.; in about 77°51’S., 166°37’E. Disc.
and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4,
which established headquarters on this point.
HUT POINT PENINSULA: long narrow penin-
sula from 2 to 3 mi. wide and about 12 mi. long,
projecting SSW. from the slopes of Mt. Erebus on
Ross I., and forming the SE. shore of Erebus Bay,
in about 77°47’S., 166°48’E. The BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4, built its hut on Hut Pt. at the S.
167
end of the peninsula. Members of the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13, wintering on Cape Evans and often
using the hut during their journeys, came to refer
to this feature as Hut Point Peninsula. Not
adopted: Cape Armitage Promontory, Winter
Quarters Peninsula.
Hvalbugten: see Whale Bay.
Hval Bukta: see Whales, Bay of.
Hvalskjaer; Hvalskjaerene: see Whale Skerries.
Hvit Oen: see White Island.
HYPERION NUNATAKS: group of about eight
nunataks lying S. of Saturn Glacier and about 9
mi. W. of Corner Cliffs, in the SE. part of Alexander
I Island; in 72°04’S., 68°54’W. These nunataks
were first seen and photographed from the air by
Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and were
mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg.
They were surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and so
named by them because of their association with
Saturn Glacier; Hyperion being one of the satel-
lites of Saturn.
ICE BAY: long embayment about 30 mi. wide
in the coast of Enderby Land; in about 67°45’S.,
50°00’E. Disc. and named by a Nor. exp. under
Riiser-Larsen, on Jan. 15, 1930. Not adopted:
Amundsen Bay, Isfjorden [Norwegian].
Ice Bay: see Ice Fjord.
ICEBERG BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which
indents the S. coast of Coronation I. between Cape
Hansen and Olivine Pt., in the South Orkney Is.;
in 60°40°S., 45°33’W. Named by Matthew Bris-
bane, who roughly charted the S. coast of Coro-
nation I. under the direction of James Weddell
in 1823.
ICEBERG POINT: prominent cliff about 8 mi.
WSW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., on the SE. coast of
Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S., 63°04’W.
This portion of Anvers I. was first explored by the
BelgAE 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name
appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by
DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an
earlier naming.
ICE FJORD: inlet about 1 mi. wide which
recedes NE. about 2.5 mi., lying 2 mi. N. of Wilson
Hbr., along the S. coast and near the W. end of
South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°46’W. The name
dates back to at least 1920 and is now well estab-
lished in international usage. Not adopted: Ice
Bay.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
IDA, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Alexandra
Range, about 5,300 ft. in el. standing ENE. of Mt.
Fox and about 13 mi. SW. of Mt. Hope, on the
W. side of Beardmore GIl.; in about 83°39’S.,
169°40’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton.
IFO ISLET: low rocky islet lying about 0.2 mi.
SE. of Héléne It., at the W. end of Géologie Arch.,
close off Adélie Coast; in about 66°38’S., 139°44’E.
Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946—
47. Charted and named by the FrAE under Lio-
tard, 1949-51. Ifo is the phonetic spelling of “il
faut,” a much-used expression by the FrAE mean-
ing “one (you) must.”
ILE (plural, ILES): for names beginning with
Tle or Iles see under the specific part of the name.
For example for Ile Argentines see Argentines, Ile.
(Ile is a French word for “Island.”’)
IL POLO GLACIER: channel glacier about 2 mi.
wide and over 8 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the
continental ice and terminating at the SE. side
of Sandefjord Ice Bay, midway between Polar
Times and Polarforschung Glaciers on Ingrid
Christensen Coast; in about 69°50’S., 74°15’E.
Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March
1947. Named by Roscoe after II Polo, a polar
journal published since 1946, by the Instituto
Geografico at Forli, Italy.
INACCESSIBLE ISLAND: island about 0.75 mi.
long, which is the northernmost of the Dellbridge
Is.; lying 1.5 mi. SSW. of Cape Evans, Ross I.; in
about 77°40’S., 166°22’E. Disc. and named by the
BrNABE, 1901-4, under Scott.
INACCESSIBLE ISLANDS: group of small
islands ranging from 400 to 700 ft. in el., the
westernmost of the South Orkney Is., lying about
23 mi. W. of Coronation I.; in 60°34’S., 46°44’W.
Disc. in December 1821 by Capt. George Powell
and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, though it is possible
they are the Seal Islands seen by Palmer a year
earlier. So named by Powell because of their
inaccessibility.
INDICATOR ISLAND: islet about 200 yards
long, lying about 250 yards W. of NW. end of
Galindez I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°17’W. Indicator
Island was charted and named in 1935 by the
BGLE under Rymill. A wind sock was erected on
this island by the BGLE to indicate wind direction
for the expedition’s airplane.
168
Inexpressible Island: see Oscar Island.
INEXPRESSIBLE ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi.
long and 0.5 mi. wide, forming the W. shore of
Evans Cove and lying in the outer edge of the
Nansen Sheet along the coast of Victoria Land;
in about 74°59’S., 163°42’E. First explored by the
Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13.
Originally called Southern Foothills, in contra-
distinction to the Northern Foothills to the NE.,
the name “Inexpressible’ was applied by the
Northern Party after spending a very unpleasant
winter on half rations on the island. Not adopted:
Oscar Island (q.v.), Southern Foothills.
INGRAM BAY: shallow indentation in the north-
ernmost portion of the Amery Ice Shelf where it
separates MacKenzie Bay from Prydz Bay, along
Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°30’S., 72°45’E.
The BANZARE under Mawson made an air sur-
vey on Feb. 10, 1931, sketching the boundaries of
MacKenzie Bay. Probably named for Dr. W. W.
Ingram, medical officer and biologist on the expe-
dition.
INGRID, CAPE: conspicuous, dark, rocky prom-
ontory separating Sandefjord and Norvegia Bays
on the W. coast of Peter I Island; in about 68°49’S.,
90°44’°W. Disc. and named in 1927 by a Nor. exp.
under Tofte in the Odd I, a vessel of Lars Christen-
sen’s whaling fleet. Named for the wife of Lars
Christensen, Mrs. Ingrid Christensen.
INGRID CHRISTENSEN COAST: that portion
of the coast of Antarctica extending from Jennings
Promontory in about 70°12’S., 71°46’E., to about
81°00’E. Disc. by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen,
who landed in the Vestvold Hills sector of this
coast in February 1935. Named for Ingrid
Christensen, wife of Lars Christensen, who sailed
in Antarctic waters with her husband. A south-
west extension of this coast, between Sandefjord
Ice Bay and Jennings Promontory, was disc. and
photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp. in
March 1947. Not adopted: Ingrid Christensen
Land.
Ingrid Christensen Land: see Ingrid Christensen
Coast.
INNER HARBOR: small harbor in the Melchior
Is., Palmer Arch., formed by the semi-circular
arrangement of Lambda, Epsilon, Alpha and Delta
Islands; in 64°19’S., 63°00’W. The descriptive
name was probably given by DI personnel who
roughly surveyed the harbor in 1927. It was sur-
veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and
1948. Not adopted: Puerto Interior [Spanish].
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
INNER LEE ISLET: islet about 0.8 mi. NNE. of
Luck Pt., lying in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia;
in 94°02’S., 37°16’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Rob-
ert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard
the brig Daisy, who included it as one of two
islets which he called the Lee Islands. These
islets were recharted in 1929-30 by DI personnel,
who renamed the southwestern of these two islets
Inner Lee Islet. The northeastern islet is now
known as Outer Lee Islet. Not adopted: Inner Lee
Island, Lee Islands.
INNES-TAYLOR, MOUNT: tabular mountain,
about 8,500 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of
Poulter Gl., where it joins the W. side of Robert
Scott Gl., near the S. edge of the Queen Maud
Range; in about 86°51’S., 153°35’W. Disc. in De-
cember 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under
Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Capt.
Alan Innes-Taylor, who served with the exp. as
chief of trail operations.
Innes-Taylor Inlet: see Nantucket Inlet.
Innfjorden: see William Scoresby Bay.
Inseln, Bucht der: see Isles, Bay of.
INTERCURRENCE ISLAND: island about 4.5
mi. long, being the largest of the Christiania Is.,
lying about 9 mi. ENE. of Liége I. at the NE. end
of the Palmer Arch.; in 63°55’S., 61°24’W. Though
the origin of this name is unknown, it has appeared
on maps for over a hundred years and its usage
has been established internationally.
Interior, Puerto: see Inner Harbor.
INVERLEITH HARBOR: small bay between An-
drews Pt. and Briggs Pt. along the NE. coast of
Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°32’S., 63°00’W.
Presumably disc. by whalers working in this area
and named Inverleith or Leith Harbor. The name
Inverleith Harbor, “inver” meaning the place of
meeting of rivers or where a river falls into the
sea or lake, is recommended because the name
Leith Harbor is used elsewhere in the Antarctic.
Leith, Scotland is the home of Salvesen and Co.,
a whaling firm which has operated extensively in
Antarctic waters. Not adopted: Leith Harbor
(q.v.).
INVISIBLE ISLET: small, tussock grass covered
islet, lying close SE. of Crescent It. and Mollyhawk
It. in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S.,
37°19°W. Charted in 1912-13, by Robert Cushman
Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig
Daisy. Named Invisible Island, probably by DI
personnel who surveyed the Bay of Isles in 1929-30.
The name Invisible Islet is approved because of the
424589 O -57 -12
169
small size of the feature.
Island.
Not adopted: Invisible
Iota, Isla: see Peace Islet.
IPHIGENE, MOUNT: mountain lying W. of Ochs
Gl. between Mt. Marujupu and the Birchall Peaks,
at the S. side of Paul Block Bay, in the Edsel Ford
Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°28’S.,
145°51’W. Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE and
named by him for Mrs. Iphigene Ochs Sulzberger,
daughter of Adolph Ochs and wife of Arthur Sulz-
berger, patrons of the expedition.
Irene Frazier, Mount: see Frazier, Mount.
IRIS BAY: small bay along the E. side of South
Georgia, lying 6 mi. NW. of Cape Vahsel, along
the embayment between Cape Vahsel and Cape
Charlotte; in 54°42’S., 35°56’W. The name Sand-
wich Bay, after John Montagu, 4th Earl of Sand-
wich, was given to the whole embayment between
Cape Vahsel and Cape Charlotte in 1775 by a Br.
exp. under Cook. The name was later restricted
on maps to the small bay described, since a name
for the large embayment was not considered use-
ful. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the name
Iris Bay for the same feature is well established
in use among the whalers and sealers in South
Georgia, and that the name Sandwich Bay is un-
known locally. The name Iris Bay is approved in
order to conform with local usage. Not adopted:
Sandwich Bay.
IRIZAR, CAPE: bold rocky headland forming
the N. end of Lamplugh I., along the coast of Vic-
toria Land; in about 75°36’S., 163°02’E. Disc. by
the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it
for Capt. Julian Irizar, of the Argentine naval
vessel Uruguay, who rescued the shipwrecked
SwedAE, 1901-3, under Nordenskjéld.
Irizar Island: see Jonassen Island.
IRIZAR ISLAND: islet about 0.5 mi. long, lying
0.5 mi. NE. of Uruguay I. at the NE. end of the
Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°13’S., 64°13’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot, and named by him for Capt. Julian
Irizar, Argentine Navy. The islet was roughly
charted in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill.
Irvine Gardner Glacier: see Ketchum Glacier.
IRVINE GLACIER: large glacier flowing in a
southerly direction to a point just N. of Gardner
Inlet, where it skirts a low ridge along the NE.
side of Wetmore Glacier. From this point Irvine
Glacier flows in a parallel but slightly lower course
to Wetmore Glacier, the two merging at the head
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
of Gardner Inlet N. of Mt. Austin, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in about 74°42’S., 63°15’W. Disc.
by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named
it for George J. Irvine, of the Engineer Depot at
Fort Belvoir, Va., who outlined the RARE photo-
graphic program.
IRVING POINT: easternmost point of Visoloi I.,
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°43’S., 27°07’W.
Disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in 1819.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, and named for Lt. Cdr. J. C. C. Irving, RN
(Ret.), who made sketches of the South Sandwich
Is. from the ship. Not adopted: Penguin Point.
ISAACSON POINT: the SE. point of Bellings-
hausen I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26S.,
27°03’W. Charted by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery II in 1930 and named for Miss S. M. Isaac-
son, an assistant to the staff of the Discovery Com-
mittee.
ISAIAH BOWMAN GLACIER: glacier about 5
mi. wide and 40 mi. long, which lies SE. of Mt.
Ruth Gade, in the Queen Maud Range, and flows
NE. to the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°30’S.,
160°00’W. Disc. by the Geological Party of the
ByrdAE in 1929, and named for Isaiah Bowman,
eminent geographer and Pres. of The Johns Hop-
kins Univ. who was dir. of the American Geo-
graphical Soc., 1915-35.
ISELIN BANK: submarine bank lying N. of
Pennell Bank and Ross Sea; centering in about
71°45/S., 177°30’W. Disc. by personnel on the
Bear of Oakland during her cruises for the ByrdAE,
1933-35, and named for C. O’D. Iselin, II, of the
Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution.
Isfjorden: see Ice Bay.
ISLA (plural, ISLAS) : for names beginning with
Isla or Islas see under the specific part of the name.
For example, for Isla Alfa see Alfa, Isla. (Isla is
a Spanish word for “‘island.”’)
ISLANDS POINT: point separating Berg Bay
and Relay Bay, lying along the W. shore of Robert-
son Bay in northern Victoria Land; in about
71°28’S., 169°27’E. Charted in 1911 by the North-
ern Party of the BrAE under Scott. Probably so
named because several small islands lie off the
coast in front of this feature.
ISLAY: island in the William Scoresby Arch. off
Mac-Robertson Coast, lying about 4 mi. ENE. of
the entrance to William Scoresby Bay and forming
the NW. shore of Macfie Sound; in about 67°22’S.,
170
59°45’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby, who probably named it
for an island of that name in the Hebrides.
ISLES, BAY OF: bay, about 9 mi. wide and
receding about 3 mi., lying between Capes Buller
and Wilson along the N. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°02’S., 37°20’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under
Cook in 1775, and so named by him because several
islands lie in the bay. Not adopted: Bucht der
Inseln [German].
ISLOTE (plural, ISLOTES): for names begin-
ning with Islote or Islotes see under the specific
part of the name. For example, for Islotes Avion
see Avion, Islotes. (Islote is a Spanish word for
“Tslet.’’)
IVEAGH, MOUNT: mountain about 11,000 ft. in
el., which stands between Keltie and Mill Glaciers
on the E. side of Beardmore Gl. in about 85°10’S.,
171°20’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton.
IVORY PINNACLES: two ice-covered peaks,
about 3,400 ft. in el., projecting from the S. part
of a spur which extends N. from the W. side of
Detroit Plateau in the direction of Poynter Hill,
on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°50’S.,
59°06’W. Charted in 1948 by members of the
FIDS who applied this descriptive name.
JABET PEAK: peak about 1,800 ft. in el., which
marks the SW. end of a serrated ridge about 1 mi.
NE. of Port Lockroy, on the NW. side of Wiencke I.,
in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°28’W. Prob-
ably first sighted in 1898 by the BelgAE under De
Gerlache. The peak was first charted by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for
Jacques Jabet, boatswain of the exp. ship Frangais.
JACKLING, MOUNT: peak standing about 0.7 .
mi. W. of Mt. Fitzsimmons, in the N. group of the
Rockefeller Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about
77°54’S., 155°24’W. Disc. on Jan. 27, 1929 by mem-
bers of the ByrdAE on an exploratory flight over
this area.
Jackson, Mount: see Andrew Jackson, Mount.
Jacob Ruppert Coast: see Ruppert Coast.
JACQUINOT, MOUNT: pyramidal peak about
1,600 ft. in el. with exposed rock on its N. side,
lying 2 mi. S. of Cape Legoupil and 0.5 mi. E. of
Huon Bay, on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.;
in 63°21’S., 57°53’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40,
under D’Urville, who named it for Charles Jac-
quinot, captain of the exp. ship Zélée.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
JACQUINOT ROCKS: group of rocks about mid-
way between Hombron Rocks and Cape Ducorps,
lying about 3 mi. off the NW. coast of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°25’S., 58°24’W. Charted in
1946 by the FIDS who named the rocks for
Honoré Jacquinot, surgeon with the Fr. exp. under
D’Urville, which explored this coast in 1838.
JAGGED ISLAND: rocky island less than 1 mi.
long, about 2.5 mi. NNE. of Round Pt., King George
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°53’S.,
58°14’W. This island, presumably known to early
sealers in the area, was charted by DI personnel
on the Discovery II in 1935 and given this descrip-
tive name.
JAGGED ISLAND: island in Grandidier Chan.,
about 2 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, lying about 1.5
mi. E. of Dodman I. and 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°58’S.,
65°44’W. Probably first sighted in January 1909
by the FrAE under Charcot. It was charted and
named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill.
JAGGED ROCKS: group of jagged rocks lying
near the center of Hut Cove in the E. part of Hope
Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S.,
56°59’W. First charted in 1903 by a party under
J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE. Named by
the FIDS in 1945.
Jallour Islands; Jalour Islets: see Yalour Islets.
JAMES, CAPE: cape which forms the S. tip of
Smith I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about
63°06’S., 62°44’°W. The name appears on a chart
based upon a Br. exp. 1828-31, under Foster, and
is now well established in international usage.
James Island: see Smith Island.
James Lassiter Barrier; James Lassiter Ice Bar-
rier: see Filchner Ice Shelf.
JAMES NUNATAK: conical nunatak about 1,400
ft. in el., standing about 6 mi. S. of Lewis Pt. on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°59’S., 62°26’W.
This feature was photographed from the air by
members of the USAS in September 1940 and was
probably seen by the USAS groung party that ex-
plored this coast. During 1947 it was charted by
a joint party consisting of memVers of the RARE
and FIDS. Named by the FIDS for David P. James,
FIDS surveyor at the Hope Bay base in 1945-46.
Jameson Island; Jamesons Island: see Low Is-
land.
James Robertson, Mount: see Robertson, Mount.
171
JAMES ROSS ISLAND: large island on the SE.
side and near the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.,
from which it is separated by Prince Gustav Chan.;
in 64°10’S., 57°40’W. It is irregularly shaped and
extends about 40 mi. in a N.-S. direction. Charted
in October 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld,
who named it for Sir James Clark Ross, leader of a
Br. exp. to this area in 1842. Not adopted: Ross
Island (q.v.).
James W. Ellsworth Land: see Ellsworth High-
land.
JANE PEAK: conspicuous nunatak, about 700
ft. in el., standing 0.5 mi. W. of the N. part of Borge
Bay on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,
45°38’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI person-
nel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named
in 1954 by the Br-APC after the brig Jane, James
Weddell commanding, which visited the South
Orkney Is. in 1822-23.
JANET ROCK: small rock about 7.5 mi. WNW.
of Marret Gl., lying immediately seaward of the ice
cliffs overlying Adélie Coast; in about 66°33’S.,
139°10’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Marret,
1952-53, and named for Paul Janet, French spir-
itualist-philosopher of the 19th century.
Jane Wade, Mount: see Gray, Mount.
Jane Wyatt, Mount: see Wyatt, Mount.
JANSSEN PEAK: conspicuous peak about 3,600
ft. in el., forming the SW. end of Sierra Du Fief
in the SW. part of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°53’S., 63°31’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99,
under De Gerlache. It was charted by the FrAE,
1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Jules
Janssen, noted French astronomer.
Jason, Mount; Jason Land: see Jason Island.
JASON HARBOR: bay about 1 mi. wide, lying W.
of Allen Bay in the N. side of Cumberland West Bay,
South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°35’W. Charted and
named by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld.
The bay was previously visited by the Jason, Capt.
C. A. Larsen, in 1894.
JASON ISLAND: irregular-shaped, mountainous
island, about 40 mi. long in an E.-W. direction and
varying from 2 to 10 mi. wide, lying off the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°10’S., 61°20’W. The island
rises steeply above the Larsen Ice Shelf to about
1,500 ft. in el. and is deeply indented by conspicuous
bays, and on the W. side is separated from Philippi
Rise on Palmer Pen. by an ice-filled strait only 2 mi.
wide. Disc. on Dec. 1, 1893 by a Nor. exp. under
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
C. A. Larsen, who named it Mount Jason after his
ship. Larsen was too far away to determine the
true nature of his newly discovered “mountain”
which Dr. Otto Nordenskjéld, when viewing it in
1902, considered to be a nunatak in the ice shelf.
The island was surveyed by the FIDS in 1947 and
1953. The southernmost promontory on this is-
land is probably what Larsen considered to be a
separate island and which he named Veier Island.
Not adopted: Jason Land, Mount Jason.
JASON ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. N. of Larsen
Pt., at the W. side of the entrance to Cumberland
Bay, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S.,
36°30’W. Named after the Jason, the vessel used
by Capt. C. A. Larsen in 1893-94 in exploring Cum-
berland Bay and the E. coast of Palmer Peninsula.
J. Carlson Bay: see Carlsson Bay.
JEANNE, MOUNT: snowy peak, about 600 ft. in
el., standing 0.25 mi. NW. of Mt. Guéguen and over-
looking Port Charcot on Booth I., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°01’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Dr. Jean B. Charcot, and
named by him for his sister. Not adopted: Jeanne
Hill.
Jeanne Hill: see Jeanne, Mount.
JEBSEN, PORT: small harbor immediately N.
of Jebsen Point, along the W. side of Signy I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°40’W. Port Jeb-
sen was roughly charted in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle,
a Norwegian whaling captain. The harbor is
named after nearby Jebsen Point.
JEBSEN POINT: point at the S. side of Port Jeb-
sen, along the W. side of Signy I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°40’W. Jebsen Point was
charted and named on a map based upon a running
survey of these islands by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in
1912-13. Not adopted: Point Jebsen.
JEBSEN ROCKS: chain of rocks extending in an
E.-W. direction about 0.5 mi. N. of Jebsen Point,
off the W. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.;
in 60°43’S., 45°41’W. These rocks were first
charted by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, a Norwegian whaler
who made a running survey of the South Orkney
Is. in 1912-13. They are named after nearby Jeb-
sen Point.
JEFFRIES POINT: point along the south-central
side of Cook I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in
59°28’S., 27°09’W. Charted in 1930 by DI person-
nel on the Discovery II and named for Miss M. E.
Jeffries, an assistant to the staff of the Discovery
Committee.
172
JENNINGS LAKE: narrow meltwater lake about
10 mi. long, lying on the E. flank of Baker Three Gl.
at the foot of Jennings Promontory, and retained
by moraine deposits which have formed along the
S. and W. sides of Thil It., off the W. end of Ingrid
Christensen Coast; in about 70°12’S., 71°45’E.
Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op Hjp. in March 1947,
and so named because of its close association with
Jennings Promontory.
JENNINGS PROMONTORY: prominent rock
promontory, which marks the W. end of Ingrid
Christensen Coast, standing at the N. side of the
confluence of Kreitzer and Baker Three Glaciers, at
the head of Amery Ice Shelf; in about 70°12’S.,
71°46’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp. in
March 1947, and named by him for Lt. James C.
Jennings, USN, co-pilot and navigator on USN Op.
Hjp. photographic flights made in January-March
1947 in this area and other coastal areas between
14° and 164°, east longitude.
JENNY ISLAND: rocky island about 2 mi. in
diameter and about 1,600 ft. in el., lying about 3
mi. ENE. of Cape Alexandra, the SE. extremity of
Adelaide I., in northern Marguerite Bay; in
67°44’S., 68°25’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot, and named by him for the wife of
Sub-Lieutenant Maurice Bongrain, French Navy,
second officer of the expedition.
JEREMY, CAPE: cape at the W. side of Mt.
Edgell, forming the E. side of the N. entrance to
George VI Sound, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 69°24’S., 68°51’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill, who named it for Jeremy Scott, son
of J. M. Scott, who served as home agent for the
expedition.
JESSIE BAY: bay about 4 mi. wide, lying between
Mackenzie and Pirie Peninsulas along the N. side
of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
44°43’/W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under
Dr. William S. Bruce, who named this bay for his
wife, Mrs. Jessie Mackenzie Bruce.
Jessie O’Keefe, Mount: see Blackburn, Mount.
JESTER ROCK: isolated rock midway between
Emperor It. and Noble Rocks in the De Dion Its.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S.,
68°42’W. The De Dion Its. were first sighted and
roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Char-
cot. Jester Rock was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS,
who so named it because of its association with
Emperor Islet. Not adopted: Page Rock.
Joerg, Cape: see Agassiz, Cape.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
JOERG PENINSULA: rugged, mountainous pen-
insula, about 20 mi. long in an E.—W. direction
and averaging about 8 mi. wide, lying between
Trail and Solberg Inlets on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°12’S., 65°12’W. The peninsula lies
in the area explored from the air by Sir Hubert
Wilkins in 1928 and Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, but
was first charted by members of the USAS in 1940.
It was named in 1952 by the British Antarctic
Place-names Committee, following a 1947 survey of
this coast by the FIDS, for W. L. G. Joerg, who,
until his death on Jan. 7, 1952, was a member of
the Advisory Committee on Antarctic Names of the
United States Board on Geographic Names, and
over a long period made notable contributions to
the solution of problems of Antarctic cartography,
nomenclature and history.
JOERG PLATEAU: an upland area which is
mainly ice covered, but through which protrude
the tops of numerous peaks and mountains, sit-
uated to the SW. of Gardner Inlet and W. of Orville
Escarpment at the base of Palmer Pen.; centering
in about 76°00’S., 67°30’W. Disc. and photo-
graphed from the air by the RARE 1946-48, under
Ronne, who named the plateau for W. L. G. Joerg.
JOHANNESEN POINT: the SW. point of Main I.
in the Willis Is., off the W. end of South Georgia;
in 54°02’S., 38°17’W. This feature was named All
Johannesens Point, presumably by DI personnel
who charted South Georgia in the period 1926-30.
Following a survey of the island in 1951-52, the
SGS reported that this cumbersome name is seldom
used locally. On this basis, the Br-APC recom-
mended the present shortened form of the name.
Not adopted: All Johannesens Point.
JOHANNES MULLER CRESTS: group of peaks
about 9,800 ft. in el., lying immediately S. of the
Filchner Mtns. at the N. edge of the polar plateau,
in New Schwabenland; in about 72°40’S., 8°10’E.
Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher and
named for Johannes Miller, navigation officer of
the Deutschland, exp. ship of the GerAE, 1911-12,
under Filchner. Not adopted: Johann Miller
Crest.
JOHANNSEN LOCH: cove about 0.5 mi. long,
lying 1 mi. N. of Ocean Hbr. along the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°15°W. The name
appears on a chart based upon surveys by DI per-
sonnel during the period 1926-30, but may reflect
an earlier naming.
Johann Miiller Crest: see Johannes Miiller Crests.
JOHANSEN ISLANDS: group of small, low,
partly snow-free islands lying off the NW. coast of
Alexander I Island; in about 69°05’S., 72°07’W.
173
Disc. from the U.S.S. Bear, on its initial approach
to establish the East Base of the USAS in 1940.
Named for Bendik Johansen, ice pilot for the USAS,
who served in a similar capacity on the Byrd Ant-
arctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35.
JOHN BOWMAN PEAK: peak about 1,900 ft. in
el., lying approximately in the center of the Alex-
andra Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°30’S.,
153°28’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1929, and
named for John McEntee Bowman, then Pres. of
the Bowman Biltmore Hotels Corporation, who
donated headquarters for the preparation of the
expedition. Not adopted: John Bowman Moun-
tain.
John Carlsson Bucht: see Carlsson Bay.
John Hayes Hammond Inlet; John Hays Ham-
mond Glacier: see Hammond Glacier.
John Murray Gletscher: see Purvis Glacier.
John Oliver LaGorce Mountains: see La Gorce
Mountains.
JOHN PEAKS: prominent snow-covered peaks,
about 1,400 ft. in el., at the S. end of Powell I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°03’W. Prob-
ably first sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer, who disc. these islands in De-
cember 1821. The peaks were charted in 1933 by
DI personnel on the Discovery II who named them
for D. D. John, member of the zoological staff of
the Discovery Committee.
JOHN QUINCY ADAMS GLACIER: channel gla-
cier about 9 mi. wide and over 20 mi. long, flowing
WNW. from the continental ice overlying Budd
Coast to the E. side of the head of Vincennes Bay;
in about 66°50’S., 109°50’E. This area was en-
shrouded by heavy clouds in the USN Op. Hip.
aerial photographs of February 1947, but it is be-
lieved that this glacier extends for a considerable
distance to the SE. and that it lies close N. of a
prominent, ice-covered E-W. mountain range
which overlooks the head of Vincennes Bay. De-
lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—-ACAN for
John Quincy Adams, the sixth president of the
United States, who initiated interest in a govern-
mental scientific exp. and the establishment of a
national observatory. Adams was later instru-
mental, while serving as Representative from Mas-
sachusetts, in gaining congressional authorization
of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838—42, and perpetuat-
ing the compilation and publication of the large
number of scientific reports based on the work of
the expedition.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
John Shepard Island: see Shepard Island.
JOHNSON, CAPE: cape along the E. coast of
Victoria Land forming the N. side of the entrance
to Wood Bay; in about 74°15’S., 166°00’E. Disc.
in 1941 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for
Capt. Edward John Johnson, RN. Not adopted:
Cape Sibbald (q.v.).
JOHNSONS DOCK: anchorage at the NE. side
of South Bay, along the S. coast of Livingston I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°37’S., 60°26’W.
The name dates back to about 1822 and was applied
by sealers who frequented the anchorage. Not
adopted: Johnson’s Dock.
Johnsons Island: see Half Moon Island.
JOHNSTON GLACIER: glacier flowing in a SSE.
direction along the N. side of Mt. Owen to the head
of Nantucket Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 74°28’S., 62°13’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48,
under Ronne, who named it for Freeborn Johnston,
of the Dept. of Terrestrial Magnetism at Carnegie
Inst., Washington, D.C. in recognition of his con-
tributions to the planning of the geophysical pro-
gram and the working up of the results for the
expedition.
JOHNSTON PEAK: sharp dark peak about 3,500
ft. in el., about 12 mi. SW. of Simmers Peaks, in
Enderby Land; in about 66°11’S., 52°28’E. Disc.
in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson,
who named it for Prof. T. Harvey Johnston, chief
biologist to the expedition. Not adopted: Harvey
Johnston Peak, Mount Harvey Johnston.
John Wheeler, Cape: see Wheeler, Cape.
JOINVILLE ISLAND: largest island of the Join-
ville Island group, about 40 mi. long in an E.-W. di-
rection and 12 mi. wide, lying off the NE. tip of
Palmer Pen., from which it is separated by Ant-
arctic Sound; in 63°15’S., 55°45’W. Disc. in 1838
by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, who named it for
Prince de Joinville.
JOMFRUENE ISLAND: island with several small
but well-defined peaks, lying 1 mi. NW. of Cape
Paryadin, off the W. end of South Georgia; in
54°03’S., 38°04’W. The name Three Point Island
has appeared on maps for this island for many
years. Following a survey of the island in 1951-52,
the SGS reported that this island is known to
whalers and sealers as Jomfruene, and that the
name Three Point Island is unknown locally. The
name Jomfruene Island is approved in order to
conform with local usage. This name should not
be confused with a probably corruption of the ap-
proved spelling, Jungfrauen (The Maidens), which
174
has erroneously appeared on some maps for three
low rocks lying close off the NE. tip of Jomfruene
Island. Not adopted: Three Point Island.
JONASSEN ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi. long,
lying 1 mi. N. of Andersson I. in the S. entrance
to Antarctic Sound, off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°33’S., 56°40’W. This island was named Irizar
Island by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld,
for Capt. Julian Irizar of the Argentine ship
Uruguay, who rescued the shipwrecked SwedAE in
1903. In 1904 Dr. Jean B. Charcot, apparently un-
aware of the Swedish naming, gave the name Irizar
to an island off the W. coast of Palmer Peninsula.
Since it is confusing to have two islands in close
proximity identically named, and because Charcot’s
Irizar Island has appeared more widely on maps
and in reports, the US-ACAN accepts the decision
of the Br-APC that the name given this island by
Nordenskjéld be altered. The new name commem-
orates Ole Jonassen, who accompanied Norden-
skjold on his two principal sledge journeys in
1902-3. Not adopted: Irizar Island.
Jones, Cape: see Jones Ridge.
JONES, CAPE: bluff on the E. coast of Victoria
Land, lying NNW. of Coulman I.; in about 73°08’S.,
169°40’K. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross,
who named it for Capt. William Jones, RN. Not
adopted: Cape Constance.
JONES, MOUNT: northernmost mountain of the
Clark Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford
Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°14’S.,
142°06’W. Disc. on aerial flights from West Base
of the USAS in 1940 and named for Clarence F.
Jones, then Prof. of Geography at Clark University.
JONES CHANNEL: narrow ice-filled channel,
about 10 mi. long and from 1 to 3 mi. wide, which
separates Blaiklock I. from the W. coast of Palmer
Pen. and joins Bourgeois Fjord with the head of
Bigourdan Fjord; in 67°30’S., 66°57’W. Named
for Harold D. Jones, FIDS airplane mechanic at
Stonington I., 1947-49, who was a member of the
FIDS party which disc., surveyed, and sledged
through this channel in 1949.
JONES GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi.
wide and 6 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti-
nental ice to Wilhelm II Coast, close E. of Krause
Pt.; in about 66°35’S., 91°30’E. Delineated from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-
47, and named by the US—ACAN for Ens. Teddy E.
Jones, USNR, photo interpreter with the Naval
Photographic Interpretation Center, who served as
recorder and assistant with the USN Op. Wml.
parties which established astronomical control
stations along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
JONES RIDGE: small rock ridge, marked by a
sharp peak at its seaward end, protruding above
the lower reaches of Denman Gl. near the point
where the glacier enters Robinson Bay, on Queen
Mary Coast; in about 66°42’S., 99°19’E. Disc. by
the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson,
1911-14, who applied the name Cape Jones, be-
lieving the feature marked the W. end of the promi-
nent rock cliffs at the E. side of Denman Gl. Dr.
S. E. Jones served as medical officer at the Western
Base and as leader of the party which extended
exploration W. to Gaussberg. The name Jones
Ridge was reassigned on the US-ACAN map of
1955, compiled from aerial photographs taken by
USN Op. Hjp. in February 1947, because a substan-
tial portion of the Denman Gl. flowage separates
this feature from the rock cliffs to the east. Not
adopted: Cape Jones.
JONES ROCKS: group of rock outcrops protrud-
ing above the ice-covered cape at the E. side of the
entrance to the Bay of Winds, on Queen Mary
Coast; in about 66°34’S., 97°45’E. Charted by the
AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and named by him
for Dr. S. Evan Jones, medical officer with the
Western Base party.
Jon Islet: see Lavebrua Islet.
Joseph Ames Range: see Ames Range.
JOSEPH COOK BAY: bay lying SE. of Cape
Freshfield along George V Coast; in about 68°30’S.,
151°45’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Maw-
son, who named it for Joseph Cook, Prime Minister
of the Commonwealth of Australia in 1914. Not
adopted: Cook Bay.
Joseph Haag, Mount: see Haag, Mount.
JOSEPHINE, MOUNT: low-lying peak, about
1,600 ft. in el., marked by prominent rock out-
crops, standing about 6 mi. ESE. of John Bowman
Peak in the Alexandra Mtns., on Edward VII Pen.;
in about 77°32’S., 153°12’W. Disc. by R. Adm.
Byrd on the ByrdAE Eastern Flight of Dec. 5, 1929,
and named by him during the ByrdAE operations
of 1933-35 for Miss Josephine Clay Ford, daughter
of Edsel Ford, contributor to both expeditions.
Josephine Petras, Mount: see Petras, Mount.
JOUBIN ISLETS: group of N.-S. trending islets
lying about 5 mi. SW. of Cape Albert de Monaco,
Anvers I., and 3 mi. W. of Gossler Islets, in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°46’S., 64°25’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for Louis Joubin, French naturalist.
175
JOUGLA POINT: point forming the W. side of
the entrance to Alice Creek in Port Lockroy, lying
on the W. side of Wiencke I. in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°50’S., 63°31’W. Disc. and named by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who considered it
to be a peninsula. Because of its small size the
term point is considered more appropriate. Not
adopted: Presqu’ile Jougla [French].
JOYCE, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain lying
NW. of Mounts Howard and Bowen on the divide
between David Gl. and Davis Gl. in Victoria Land;
in about 75°36’S., 160°38’E. First charted by the
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for
Ernest Joyce, in charge of general stores, dogs,
sledges, and zoological collections with this exp.
and a member with Shackleton of the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott.
JULES, CAPE: rocky cape with a small cove
along its N. end, lying about 9 mi. ESE. of Cape
Bienvenue on Adélie Coast; in 66°44’S., 140°55’E.
Disc. in 1840 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, who
applied his own given name to this feature. The
area was charted by the AAE in 1912-13, and again
by the BANZARE in 1931, both under Mawson.
The FrAE under Barré obtained astronomical con-
trol at this locality in 1951.
JUMBO COVE: cove about 0.75 mi. SSE. of
Busen Pt., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in
54°10’S., 36°33’W. Charted and named by DI per-
sonnel during the period 1926-30.
JUNCTION CORNER: the junction point of the
mainland with the W. side of Shackleton Ice Shelf
on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°29’S., 94°50’E.
Disc. and named by the AAE, 1911-14, under
Mawson.
June, Mount: see Harold June, Mount.
JUNE ISLAND: islet in the Debenham Is. lying
SW. of Audrey I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°08’S., 67°07’W. Disc. and charted by the
BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, who named it for a
daughter of Frank Debenham, member of the
BGLE Advisory Committee.
JUPITER GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island, about 10 mi. long and 5 mi.
wide at its mouth, which flows SE. into George VI
Sound to the south of Ablation Valley; in 70°57’S.,
68°30’W. This glacier was first photographed
from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth,
and was mapped from these photographs by
W.L.G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. The name, after the
planet Jupiter, was given by FIDS following their
surveys in 1948 and 1949.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
KADE POINT: point which forms the N. side
of the entrance to Wilson Hbr., on the S. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 37°47’W. Kade Point
. is an old established name dating back to about
1912. Not adopted: Rade Point.
KAINAN BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide and 8 mi.
long, indenting the Ross Ice Shelf about 30 mi. NE.
of the Bay of Whales; in about 78°14’S., 161°55’W.
Disc. in January 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott,
but it was not named until the Japanese exp. under
Shirase, in the exp. ship Kainan Maru, landed
there in January 1912. Little America V, the
main base of USN Operation Deepfreeze, 1955-56,
was established at this site in late December 1955.
Not adopted: Helen Washington Bay.
KAISER, CAPE: northern extremity of a group
of small islands lying close off the E. side of Bra-
bant I., about 6 mi. WSW. of the S. end of Two
Hummock I., in Palmer Arch.; in 64°12’S., 61°52’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache,
and named by him for a supporter of the expe-
dition.
Kaiser Wilhelm II Coast; Kaiser Wilhelm II
Land: see Wilhelm II Coast.
Kaiser Wilhelm II Islands; Kaiser Wilhelm
Inseln: see Dannebrog Islands.
Kalber-Berg: see Calf Head.
KANIN POINT: rocky point, lying 2 mi. WSW.
of Kelp Pt. on the S. side of Husvik Hbr., in Strom-
ness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°42’W.
The descriptive name Rocky Point was given for
this feature, probably by DI personnel who surveyed
Husvik Hbr. in 1928. This name is used elsewhere
in the Antarctic. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that
this feature is known at the Husvik whaling station
as Kanin Point (the word Kanin meaning rabbit).
This name presumably arose from one of several
attempts made since 1872 to introduce rabbits into
the island. The name Kanin Point is approved on
the basis of local usage. Not adopted: Rocky
Point.
KAPPA ISLAND: islet, nearly 0.5 mi. long, lying
immediately S. of Beta I. and close E. of Theta Its.
in ‘the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S.,
63°00’W. The name Kappa, derived from the
tenth letter of the Greek alphabet, probably was
given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the
islet in 1927. The islet was surveyed by Argentine
expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted:
Isla Donati [Spanish].
176
Kap Parjadine: see Paryadin, Cape.
KARLSEN ROCK: submerged rock about 10.5
mi. NNW. of Penguin Pt., the NW. point of Coro-
nation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°21’S.,
46°00’W. The rock appears charted and named
on a map by Petter Sgrile, a Norwegian whaler
who made a running survey of the South Orkney
Is. in 1912-13. Not adopted: Karlsens Rocks, Kar-
sten Rock.
Karlsens Rocks; Karsten Rock: see Karlsen Rock.
KARPF POINT: turret-shaped headland sur-
mounting the plateau escarpment along the E.
coast of Palmer Pen., standing at the head of Mill
Inlet; in 66°54’S., 64°30’W. Charted by the FIDS
and photographed from the air by the RARE in
1947. Named by the FIDS for Alois Karpf, librar-
ian of the Kaiserliche and Ko6nigliche Geo-
graphische Gesellschaft in Vienna and joint author
of a polar bibliography.
KAR PLATEAU: small plateau which is snow
covered except for an almost vertical rock scarp
marking its S. side. The plateau rises gently
toward the NW. to the heights of Mt. Marston, sit-
uated at the W. side of Granite Hbr. in Victoria
Land; in about 76°56’S., 162°25’E. Charted and
named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. ‘“Kar”
is a Turkish word meaning snow.
Kasco Glacier: see Waverly Glacier.
Kastor Nunatak: see Castor Nunatak.
KATER, CAPE: cape fringed by rocks, marking
the W. side of the entrance to Charcot Bay, on the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°45’S., 59°40’W.
This coast was sketched by a Br. exp., 1828-31,
under Foster, who named a cape in this region
after Capt. Henry Kater, a member of the com-
mittee which planned the exp. This region was
more fully mapped by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under
Nordenskjold, who gave the name Cape Gunnar
to this cape. The name Kater perpetuates the
earlier naming. Not adopted: Cape Gunnar.
Katherine Paine, Mount: see Paine, Mount.
KATHLEEN, MOUNT: mountain in the Com-
monwealth Range, standing NE. of Mt. Robert
Scott and overlooking the E. side of Beardmore Gl.
at its junction with Ross Ice Shelf; in about
83°40’S., 174°40’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton, who probably named it for his
sister. Not adopted: Mount Catherine.
Kats Pillar: see Petes Pillar.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
KAYE CREST: mountain crest about 10,000 ft.
in el., lying between Mt. Preuschoff and Mt. Hade-
rich at the N. edge of the polar plateau, in New
Schwabenland, in about 72°18’S., 4°40’E. Disc.
and named by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39.
KAY ISLETS: group of islets in Ross Sea, lying
off Victoria Land, about 19 mi. E. of Cape Sibbald,
in about 74°00’S., 167°45’E. Disc. in 1841 by a
Br. exp. under Ross, and named for Lt. Joseph W.
Kay, Dir. of the Rossbank Observatory.
KAY NUNATAK: dark rocky nunatak about
2,000 ft. in el., situated at the S. side of Mobiloil
Inlet and forming the northernmost outlier of the
ice-covered mountain mass surmounted by Mt.
Hitchcock, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about
68°43’S., 64°40’W. The nunatak was photo-
graphed from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on
Dec. 20, 1928, and by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935.
Named in 1952 by the US-ACAN for John D. Kay
of the American Geographical Soc., who by utiliz-
ing these photographs assisted in constructing the
first reconnaissance map of this area.
KEELER, CAPE: ice-covered cape which rises
gently northwestward to about 1,700 ft. in el.,
forming the S. side of the entrance to Revelle
Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°51’S.,
63°13’W. Disc. on Dec. 20, 1928 by Sir Hubert
Wilkins, who named it for Fred E. Keeler of the
Lockheed Co. An advance base and meteorologi-
cal station was established at Cape Keeler by the
RARE under Ronne in 1947-48.
KEEP ROCK: small rock lying close W. of Castle
Rock, off the W. extremity of Snow I., South Shet-
land Is.; in 62°47’S., 61°37’W. The name, which
derives from association with Castle Rock, was
given by the Br—APC following survey by Lt. Cdr.
F. W. Hunt, RN, in 1951-52.
Kegel-Berg: see Skittle, Mount.
KELLER INLET: ice-filled inlet about 10 mi.
long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and 6 mi. wide, be-
tween Cape Little and Cape Light, along the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°15’S., 61°05’W. This
inlet was photographed from the air by members
of the USAS in December 1940, and in 1947 by
members of the RARE under Ronne, who in con-
junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground.
Named by Ronne for Louis Keller of Beaumont,
Texas, who contributed supplies to Ronne’s expe-
dition.
KELLER RANGE: mountain mass about 1,900
ft. in el., forming the promontory between Mac-
kellar and Martel Inlets in Admiralty Bay, on King
177
George I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S.,
58°26’W. Probably named by the FrAE under
Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in Decem-
ber 1909.
KELP BAY: small open bay, close ESE. of Doris
Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; 54°27’S.,
36°07’W. It is filled with kelp and there is no
anchorage. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the
name is well established in use among the South
Georgia sealers.
KELP POINT: point fringed by kelp, marking
the SE. side of the entrance to Husvik Hbr., the
southern arm of Stromness Bay, on the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°38’W. Charted
and named by DI personnel in the period 1926-30.
KELSEY GLACIER: glacier flowing E. along the
S. side of Mt. Owen to the head of Nantucket Inlet,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°27’S., 62°25’/W.
Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who
named it for Lawrence D. Kelsey, radio operator
with the expedition. Not adopted: Delbert Little
Glacier, D. M. Little Glacier, Little Glacier.
KELTIE, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the
N. point of land on Clarie Coast, lying about 9 mi.
WNW. of Cape Cesney; in about 65°55’S., 133°30’E.
Disc. in January 1912 from the Aurora by AAE per-
sonnel under Mawson, and roughly charted at a
distance of about 10 mi. as lying in 66°05’S.,
133°00’E. Named by Mawson for Sir John Scott
Keltie, Sec. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1892-
1915. Identification of Cape Keltie is based upon
the correlation of the northernmost coastal ex-
tremity on the AAE map with the US-ACAN
reconnaissance map of 1955 compiled from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. As
no landings or coastal surveys have been made
along this coast, the 1955 interpretation of Cape
Keltie is adopted because of photographic conti-
nuity with established features at the W. end of
Adélie Coast.
KELTIE, MOUNT: mountain in the Conway
Range, about 8,900 ft. in el., lying SW of Mulock
Inlet, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
79°16’S., 159°20’K. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, who named it for Sir John Scott
Keltie.
Keltie Glacier: see Scott Keltie Glacier.
KELTIE GLACIER: tributary glacier entering
the E. side of Beardmore Gl. about 10 mi. N. of Mill
Gl.; in about 84°50’S., 171°00’E. Disc. by the
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for
Sir John Scott Keltie.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
KEMP, CAPE: cape forming the SW. tip of
Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°52’S.,
63°39’W. Disc. and first charted by the FrAE,
1903-5, under Charcot. Various islands of the
Palmer Arch. were charted in 1927 by DI personnel
on the Discovery, and this cape was subsequently
named for Stanley W. Kemp, British marine biol-
ogist and oceanographer, and scientific leader on
the Discovery.
Kemp, Mount: see Kempe, Mount.
KEMP COAST: that portion of the coast of Ant-
arctica that lies between the head of Edward VIII
Bay, location not precisely determined but in about
67°10’S., 56°00’E., and William Scoresby Bay, in
about 67°25’S., 59°40’E. Named for a British seal-
ing captain, Peter Kemp, who disc. land in this
vicinity in 1833. Not adopted: Kemp Land.
KEMPE, MOUNT: peak about 9,800 ft. in el.,
lying SE. of Mt. Huggins, in the Royal Society
Range, on the W. side of the Ross Sea; in about
78°21’S., 162°47’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, who named it for Sir Alfred Bray
Kempe, at that time Treasurer of the Royal Society.
Not adopted: Mount Kemp.
Kemp Land: see Kemp Coast.
Kemp Peak: see Stanley Kemp Peak.
KEMP PENINSULA: irregular ice-covered pen-
insula about 25 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and
12 mi. wide. The peninsula rises gently to about
1,000 ft. in el. and projects E. between the heads
of Mason and Mossman Inlets, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 73°08’S., 60°15’W. First seen
from the air in December 1940 by members of the
USAS, who at that time photographed all but its
N. extremity. During 1947 it was photographed
from the air by the RARE, who in conjunction with
the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by
the FIDS for Stanley W. Kemp, British marine
biologist and oceanographer, first Dir. of Research
of the Discovery Investigations, 1924-36, and Dir.
of the Plymouth Marine Laboratory, 1936-45.
KENDALL ROCKS: group of pillar-shaped rocks
about 3 mi. NNE. of Tower I., lying in Bransfield
Str.; in 63°28’S., 59°49°W. The name Kendall
Group appears NW. of this position on a chart
based upon work by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under
Foster, but it was later found that no islets exist
there. The name Kendall Rocks has subsequently
been applied to these pillar-shaped rocks disc. in
1838 by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, Named for Lt.
E. N. Kendall of Foster’s exp. ship, the Chanticleer.
178
KENNEDY, CAPE: point forming the E. extrem-
ity of Melba Pen.; on Queen Mary Coast; in about
66°32’S., 98°25’E. Disc. by the Eastern Party,
under Frank Wild, operating from the Western
Base of the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson. Named
for A. L. Kennedy, magnetician at the Western
Base and cartographer for the Eastern Party.
Kennedy, Mount: see Kennedy Peak.
KENNEDY, MOUNT: small bare peak about
1,800 ft. in el, standing about 2 mi. S. of Mt.
Rivett in the Gustav Bull Mtns., on Mac-Robertson
Coast; in about 67°51’S., 66°13’E. The BANZARE,
under Mawson, sighted land in this area in early
January 1930 and an airplane flight was made
from the ship for observation. The exp. returned
to the area on Feb. 13, 1931, making a landing at
Scullin Monolith. They named this peak pre-
sumably for A. L. Kennedy who did special physi-
cal research with the exp. during 1930-31.
KENNEDY PEAK: small peak protruding above
the continental ice about 3 mi. SSW. of Mt. Barr
Smith, standing at the W. side of Scott Gl. on
Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°14’S., 99°00’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN
for A. L. Kennedy, cartographer with the AAEK
Western Base party, in recognition of the close
correlation of his 1912-13 running survey of the
E. half of the Queen Mary Coast with the US-ACAN
map of 1955 compiled from aerial photographs.
Not adopted: Mount Kennedy (q.v.).
KENNETT RAWSON, MOUNT: prominent pro-
jecting corner point on the massif surmounted by
Mt. Alice Gade, standing between Isaiah Bowman
Gl. and Moffett Gl. in the Queen Maud Range; in
about 85°55’S., 162°10’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE,
1928-30, on the South Polar Flight of November
1929.
contributor to this exp. and a member of the
ByrdAE, 1933-35.
KERR, CAPE: snow-covered bluff with steep
sides, marking the N. side of the entrance to Barne
Inlet, along the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
80°10’S., 160°20’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott. Admiral of the Fleet Lord Walter
Kerr was one of the Sea Lords who lent his assist-
ance to the expedition.
Ketchum, Cape: see Light, Cape.
KETCHUM GLACIER: large glacier descending
in a NE. direction from the Joerg Plateau and
entering the SW. side of Gardner Inlet southward
of Mt. Austin, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
about 75°00’S., 63°45’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947—
Named by Byrd for Kennett L. Rawson, |
—_—
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
48, under Ronne, who named it for Cdr. Gerald
Ketchum, USN, commander of the icebreaker Bur-
ton Island which broke the ice to free the RARE
from Marguerite Bay for the return home. Not
adopted: Gardner Glacier, Irvine Gardner Glacier.
KEYHOLE ISLET: small rocky islet lying 5 mi.
SE. of the Terra Firma Is. and 0.75 mi. N. of the ice
cliffs of Cape Berteaux, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°47’S., 67°20’W. First surveyed in 1948
by the FIDS, who applied this name because of the
presence of an ice arch formed by the ice cap on
this islet.
KEYSTONE CLIFFS: cliffs, about 2,000 ft. in el.,
marking the E. face of the sedimentary ridge be-
tween Mercury and Venus Glaciers, on the E.
coast of Alexander I Island; in 71°35’S., 68°13’W.
The coast in this vicinity was first seen from the
air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ells-
worth on Nov. 23, 1935. The cliffs were roughly
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and
resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. So named by
FIDS because the geologic structures revealed in
these cliffs provided the Key to the general tectonic
structure of the area.
KIDSON, CAPE: abrupt rock scarp about 1,000
ft. in el., forming the N. side of the entrance to
New Bedford Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 73°24’S., 60°45’W. First sighted and photo-
graphed from the air by members of the USAS in
1940. During 1947 the cape was photographed
from the air by the RARE, who in conjunction
with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named
by the FIDS for Edward Kidson, New Zealand
meteorologist and author of the meteorological
reports of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and
the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14.
KIDSON ISLAND: island about 300 ft. in el.,
lying NNE. of the Colbeck Arch., off Mac-Robertson
Coast; in about 67°10’S., 61°09’E. Disc. in Febru-
ary 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and
named by him for Edward Kidson. Not adopted:
Kidston Island.
Kidston Island: see Kidson Island.
Kiffin, Mount: see Kyffin, Mount.
KILLER RIDGE: dark ridge about 4,000 ft. in
el., standing at the N. side of Miller Gl. in the W.
part of the Gonville and Caius Range, in Victoria
Land; in about 77°08’S., 161°57’E. Charted by the
BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and named after the
killer whale whose outline the ridge is said to
resemble.
Kilpatrick; Mount: see Kirkpatrick, Mount.
179
KING, MOUNT: flat-topped, mainly ice-covered
mountain, about 6,200 ft. in el., standing between
Sedgwick and Tumble Glaciers and connected by
an ice-covered spur to the Douglas Range to the
W., on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in
69°53’/S., 69°26’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948
by the FIDS, and named by them for William
B. R. King, prof. of geology at Cambridge Uni-
versity.
KING EDWARD COVE: sheltered cove imme-
diately S. of Mt. Duse, in the W. side of Cumber-
land East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W.
This cove, frequented by early sealers at South
Georgia, was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjold. It was named in about 1906
for King Edward VII of England. Not adopted:
King Edward’s Cove.
KING EDWARD POINT: low point projecting
from the N. side of King Edward Cove toward the
central part of the cove, on the W. side of Cumber-
land Kast Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W.
Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden-
skjdld. It was named in about 1906 for King Ed-
ward VII of England. Not adopted: Edwards
Point, King Edwards Point, King Edward’s Point.
King Edward VIII Gulf: see Edward VIII Bay.
King Edward VII Land; King Edward VII Pen-
insula: see Edward VII Peninsula.
KING GEORGE BAY: bay indenting the S.
coast of King George I. for about 4 mi., in the
South Shetland Is.; in about 62°05’S., 58°05’W.
Named on Jan. 24, 1820 for the then reigning
sovereign of England by a Br. exp. under Brans-
field. Not adopted: Baie St. Georges [French],
Georges Bay, St. George’s Bay.
KING GEORGE ISLAND: island about 43 mi.
long and about 16 mi. wide at its broadest part,
lying in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°00’S.,
98°15’°W. Named about 1820 for the then reigning
sovereign of England. Not adopted: Ile du Roi
Georges [French], King George’s Island, Konig
Georg Insel [German], Waterloo Island.
King George V Coast: see George V Coast.
King George V Land: see George V Coast.
King George’s Strait: see Nelson Strait.
King George VI Sound: see George VI Sound.
KING HAAKON BAY: bay, about 3 mi. wide
and receding NE. about 5 mi., lying 1 mi. N. of
Queen Maud Bay, along the S. coast of South
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Georgia; in 54°11’S., 37°18’W. Named in about
1912 by Norwegian whalers for King Haakon VII
of Norway. Not adopted: King Haakons Bay,
King Haakons Harbor.
King Haakons Harbor: see King Haakon Bay.
King Leopold and Queen Astrid Coast; King
Leopold and Queen Astrid Land: see Leopold and
Astrid Coast.
King Oscar II Coast; King Oscar II Land: see
Oscar II Coast.
KINNEAR MOUNTAINS: group of mountains,
more than 4,000 ft. in el., standing at the S. margin
of Wordie Ice Shelf about 11 mi. E. of Mt. Edgell,
on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°29’S.,
67°42°W. Disc. and roughly surveyed in 1936 by
the BGLE under Rymill. The name was proposed
by members of BGLE for Sir Norman B. Kinnear,
British ornithologist who, as member of the staff
of the British Museum (Natural History), was of
great assistance to BGLE.
KINNES, CAPE: cape which forms the W. ex-
tremity of Joinville I., off the NE. end of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°21’S., 56°33’W. It was sighted, prob-
ably for the first time, by members of the Dundee
whaling exp., 1892-93, and named by them for
R. Kinnes, sponsor of the expedition. Not
adopted: Cape Kinness.
Kinness, Cape: see Kinnes, Cape.
KINSEY, CAPE: prominent cape at the E. side
of the entrance to Davies Bay, on Oates Coast, in
about 69°12’S., 158°50’E. Disc. in February 1911
by personnel on the Terra Nova of the BrAE under
Scott. J. J. Kinsey was official representative of
the BrAE at Christchurch, New Zealand.
KINSEY, MOUNT: peak about 11,000 ft. in el.,
lying between Keltie Gl. and Mill Gl. near their
confiuence with Beardmore Gl.; in about 85°00’S.,
170°45’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, and named for J. J. Kinsey of Christ-
church, who conducted the affairs of the exp. in
New Zealand.
KIRKPATRICK, MOUNT: loftiest peak of the
Queen Alexandra Range, about 14,600 ft. in el.,
lying midway on the W. flank of Beardmore Gl.,
near the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°20’S.,
167°00’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under
Shackleton in December 1908. Not adopted:
Mount Kilpatrick.
180
KIRKWOOD, MOUNT: mountain about 1,500 ft.
in el., about 3 mi. W. of Entrance Pt. in the S. part
of Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
63°00’S., 60°39’W. First charted by a Br. exp.,
1828-31, under Foster. Named in 1950 by the
Br-APC for Cdr. H. R. Kirkwood, RN, master of
the John Biscoe in Antarctic waters, 1948-50. Not
adopted: Mount David.
KIRKWOOD ISLETS: scattered group of reefs
and rocks, with one larger islet, lying in the central
part of Marguerite Bay, about 23 mi. NE. of Fly-
spot Rocks and 16 mi. SSW. of the Faure Is.; in
68°22’S., 69°00’W. ‘The islets were sighted in 1949
from the FIDS vessel John Biscoe, and a running
survey of the islets was made from the ship in 1950.
Named for Cdr. Henry Kirkwood, RN, in command
of the John Biscoe at that time.
KIRWAN INLET: inlet in the SE. corner of Alex-
ander I Island, about 12 mi. wide at its mouth and
indenting 7 mi., opening on George VI Sound; in
72°21’S., 68°50’W. The inlet is filled with ice shelf
which merges almost imperceptibly with the rising
ice slopes of Alexander I Island to the west. First
surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and named by them
for Laurence P. Kirwan, Dir. and Sec. of the Royal
Geographical Society.
KJELLMAN, CAPE: cape marking the E. side of
the entrance to Charcot Bay, on the W. coast of
Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°44’S., 59°21’W. First
charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden-
skj6ld, and named by him probably for Prof. Frans
Reinhold Kjellman, Swedish botanist.
KJERKA, MOUNT: peak about 3,300 ft. in el., in
the S. part of the Gustav Bull Mtns. about 10 mi. S.
of Mt. Hinks, inland from Mac-Robertson Coast;
in about 68°03’S., 66°08’E. Charted and named
Kjerka, meaning ‘the church,” by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a
Nor. exp. under Christensen on Jan. 28, 1937. Not
adopted: Kjerka [Norwegian].
Kjuringen: see Rayner Peak.
KLAKKANE ISLANDS: group of small islands
lying about 2 mi. E. of Farrington I. and about 5 mi.
N. of the William Scoresby Arch., off Mac-Robert-
son Coast; in about 67°15’S., 59°47’E. They were
mapped and named by Norwegian cartographers
from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under
the direction of Christensen in January 1937. Not
adopted: Klakkan [Norwegian].
Klarius Mikkelsen, Mount: see Mikkelsen Peak;
Scullin Monolith.
Klarius Mikkelsen Fjell: see Mikkelsen Peak.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
KLEBELSBERG GLACIER: glacier, about 3 mi.
wide and 10 mi. long, situated at the S. side of
Finsterwalder Gl. and flowing NW. from the central
plateau of Palmer Pen. towards Lallemand Fjord;
in about 67°23’S., 66°19’W. First surveyed from
the plateau in 1946-47 by the FIDS, and named by
them for Raimund von Klebelsberg, Austrian
glaciologist.
Kleine Pic: see Nachtigal Peak.
KLEINSCHMIDT PEAK: peak about 10,500 ft.
in el., on the SW. flank of Penck Trough, imme-
diately N. of the edge of the polar plateau, in New
Schwabenland; in about 73°55’S., 3°45’W. Disc.
by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named
for Dr. Ernst Kleinschmidt, dir. of the division of
meteorology of the Deutsche Seewarte (German
Hydrographic Office) in Hamburg. Not adopted:
Heksegryta [Norwegian].
KLOVSTAD, CAPE: bold cape lying between the
Murray and Newnes Glaciers at the S. extremity
of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in
about 71°39’S., 170°08’E. First charted in 1899
by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named
it for Dr. Herlof Klovstad, medical officer on the
exp. staff.
KLUTSCHAK POINT: rocky headland about 3
mi. SE. of Cape Demidov on the S. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°10’S., 37°43’W. The coast in this
vicinity was roughly charted in 1775 by a Br. exp.
under Cook, and in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under
Bellingshausen. The point itself appears on charts
dating back to about 1900. The point was named
by the Br—APC, following a survey by the SGS,
1951-52, for Heinrich W. Klutschak, Austrian
artist who accompanied the American sealing
schooner Flying Fish to South Georgia in 1877-78
and published a narrative of his activities with a
sketch map in 1881.
KNIFE POINT: point on the S. side of Borge Bay,
about 0.1 mi. SE. of Mooring Pt., on the E. side of
Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,
45°36’W. ‘The name appears on a chart based on
a 1927 survey of Borge Bay by DI personnel on the
Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming.
KNIGHT ROCKS: two small rocks, about 1 mi.
apart, which lie nearly 3 mi. off the SW. coast of
Snow I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°49’S., 61°35’W.
So named by the Br—APC, following survey by Lt.
Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, in 1951-52, because of their
proximity to nearby Castle Rock.
KNOB, THE: conspicuous dome-shaped rock
about 130 ft. in el., at the W. side of Elsehul, on the
N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°59’W.
181
The feature was charted and given this descriptive
name by DI personnel in 1930.
KNOBHEAD: mountain about 8,300 ft. in el.,
lying S. of the W. end of Kukri Hills and overlook-
ing Ferrar Gl. and Taylor Gl. at their point of
apposition, in Victoria Land; in about 77°55‘S.,
161°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott,
who so named it because of its appearance. Not
adopted: Knob Head Mountain, Knobhead Moun-
tain.
Knobhead Mountain: see Knobhead.
KNOB POINT: the SW. tip of Vindication I., in
the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°47’W.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, and probably so named because a conspicuous
height of land overlooks the point.
KNOLL, THE: snow-free knoll about 1,200 ft. in
el., surmounting Cape Crozier at the E. extremity of
Ross I.; in about 77°29’S., 169°33’E. Disc. and
named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott.
Knglrokset: see Humpback Rocks.
KNOWLES, CAPE: cape about 1,000 ft. in el.,
marking the N. side of the entrance to Hilton Inlet,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°47’S., 60°50’W.
Disc. by members of East Base of the USAS in
1940. Named for Paul H. Knowles, geologist and
leader of the East Base sledging party that surveyed
this coast as far S. as Hilton Inlet.
KNOX COAST: that portion of the coast of Ant-
arctica lying between Cape Hordern, in about
100°26’E., and the Hatch Islets, in about 109°42’E.
Disc. in February 1840 by the USEE under Wilkes,
and named by him for Lt. Samuel R. Knox, USN,
captain of the USEE tender Flying Fish.
KOETTLITZ GLACIER: glacier about 12 mi.
wide at its mouth, lying N. of Mounts Discovery
and Morning and flowing between Brown I. and the
mainland to the Ross Ice Shelf at the head of
McMurdo Sound; in about 78°20’S., 164°00’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it
for Dr. Reginald Koettlitz, physician and botanist
of the expedition.
KOHLER RANGE: extensive mountain range
rising to about 15,000 ft. in el., standing S. of the
base of Martin Pen. and estimated as extending for
some 80 mi. in E.-W. direction on Walgreen Coast;
in about 75°45’S., 111°30’E. Disc. from a distance
on Feb. 24, 1940 by R. Adm. Byrd and other mem-
bers of the USAS in a flight from the Bear. Named
by Byrd for Walter J. Kohler, manufacturer and
former governor of Wisconsin, who was one of the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
supporters of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and who helped
furnish the seaplane from which the discovery was
made. Not adopted: Mount X-ray, Walter Kohler
Range, X-ray Range.
KOHL-LARSEN PLATEAU: ice-covered plateau,
over 2,500 ft. in el., lying W. of the head of Neu-
mayer Gl. and N. of the W. end of Allardyce Range,
in the central part of South Georgia; in 54°14’S.,
36°59’W. The plateau was disc. and first roughly
indicated on a map by Ludwig Kohl-Larsen during
his 1929-30 expedition. It was surveyed and
named for its discoverer by the SGS, 1951-52.
Kong Edward VII Land; Konig Edward VII Land:
see Edward VII Peninsula.
Kong George V—Land: see George V. Coast.
Kong Leopold og Dronning Astrid Land: see Leo-
pold and Astrid Coast.
Kong Oskar II Ktiste: see Oscar II Coast.
Konig George V-Land: see George V Coast.
Konig Georg Insel: see King George Island.
KONIG GLACIER: glacier, about 5 mi. long and
2 mi. wide, flowing in a northerly direction from
the N. side of Neumayer Gl. to the head of Fortuna
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°48’W. First
surveyed in 1928-29 by a Ger. exp. under Kohl-
Larsen, who named it for Felix Konig, Austrian
mountaineer with the German Antarctic Expedi-
tion, 1911-12, under Filchner. Not adopted: Dead
Glacier.
Konigin Alexandra Gebirge: see Queen Alexan-
dra Range.
Konigin Maud Bucht: see Queen Maud Bay.
Konigin Maud Gebirge: see Queen Maud Range.
Konigin Mary Land: see Queen Mary Coast.
Konig Oskar II Land: see Oscar II Coast.
KOPPEN POINT: point marking the NE. side of
the entrance to Moltke Hbr. in Royal Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°30’S., 36°02’W. The name “K6p-
penberg” was originally given by a Ger. exp. under
Schrader, 1882-83, to a small hill lying close inland
from the point now described, and about 0.5 mi. E.
of the German base. It was named for Prof. W.
Koppen (1846-1940), noted meteorologist and cli-
matologist, who had recommended the establish-
ment of a high level observatory near the base.
The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the hill is too
small and unimportant to require a name, but that
182
one is needed for the nearby point. For the sake
of historical continuity, the name of K6ppen is
transferred to this previously unnamed point; the
name “K6ppenberg” is rejected.
Koppenberg: see Koppen Point.
Koppervick: see Koppervik.
KOPPERVIK: bay about 0.8 mi. wide, lying 1
mi. SW. of Cape Buller, in the NW. side of the
Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 37°25’W.
The name was applied prior to 1930, probably by
Norwegian whalers operating at South Georgia.
Not adopted: Koppervick.
KOTTAS MOUNTAINS: mountains about 11,000
ft. in el., rising through the icecap at the N. edge
of the polar plateau and about at the head of
Penck Trough, in the W. part of New Schwaben-
land; in about 174°05’S., 8°30’W. Disc. by the
GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for
Alfred Kottas, captain of the exp. vessel Schwaben-
land.
K. Prestrud, Mount: see Prestrud, Mount.
Kraterbucht: see Crater Bay.
KRAUL MOUNTAINS: major mountain range,
about 8,000 ft. in el., projecting northward from
the polar plateau some 60 mi. toward Cape Nor-
vegia, in the W. part of New Schwabenland; center-
ing in about 73°00’S., 13°00’W. It bounds on the
W. a large broad depression in the icecap that ex-
tends E. to the range forming the W. wall of Penck
Trough. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under
Ritscher, and named for Otto Kraul, ice pilot of
the expedition. sl
KRAUSE POINT: low, ice-covered point fronting
on Davis Sea close W. of Jones Gl., lying about
26 mi. W. of Cape Filchner, on Wilhelm II Coast;
in about 66°32’S., 91°15’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for Glenn R. Krause, pho-
togrammetrist with the Navy Hydrographic Office,
who served as surveyor with the USN Op. Wml.
parties which established astronomical control sta-
tions along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts.
Kreitzer Bay: see Vincennes Bay.
KREITZER GLACIER: channel glacier about 7
mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing NW.
from the continental ice and entering the E. side
of Baker Three Gl. between Jennings Promontory
and Reinbolt Hills, near the W. end of Ingrid
Christensen Coast; in about 70°17’S., 72°45’E. De-
lineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947,
and named by him for Lt. William R. Kreitzer, USN,
plane commander of one of the three USN Op. Hjp.
aerial crews which obtained photographic coverage
of this area and other coastal areas between 14°
and 164°, east longitude.
Kringholmane: see Kringholm Islands.
KRINGHOLM ISLANDS: a roughly circular
group of islands about 5 mi. in diameter, lying
off Mac-Robertson Coast about 15 mi. NE. of Wil-
liam Scoresby Bay; in about 67°19’S., 60°03’E.
Disc. and mapped by Norwegian cartographers
from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under
Christensen in January-February 1937. They
named them Kringholmane, presumably for their
ring-like distribution. Not adopted: Kringholm-
ane [Norwegian].
Krogmann Island: see Hovgaard Island.
Krokfjorden: see Krok Inlet.
KROK INLET: narrow inlet about 12 mi. long,
lying between Sgrsdal Glacier Tongue and the
small peninsula at the S. end of the Vestfold Hills,
with a small arm about 2 mi. long which swings
N. and nearly bisects the peninsula, along Ingrid
Christensen Coast; in about 68°41’S., 77°55’E.
Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor.
exp. under Lars Christensen, and named Krok-
fjorden because of the hook (krok) formed by
this small N. arm. The generic inlet is approved
aS a more appropriate term on the basis of John
H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947
which shows this feature as extending about 7 mi.
E. of the original Krokfjorden interpretation.
Not adopted: Krokfjorden [Norwegian].
KROKISIUS, MOUNT: conspicuous rocky moun-
tain, about 2,400 ft. in el., standing 1.5 mi. NW. of
the head of Moltke Hbr., Royal Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°29’S., 36°06’W. Named by a Ger.
exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, for Corvette Captain
Krokisius, commander of the Marie, one of the
two ships of the expedition.
KRONER LAKE: circular lake about 0.2 mi. in
diameter lying immediately W. of Whalers Bay, on
Deception I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S.,
60°35’°W. The name Tokroningen, meaning the
two kroner piece, was given this lake by whalers
during the period 1905-31. The original name was
altered to Kroner Lake in 1950 by the Br—APC fol-
lowing a survey of Deception I. by Lt. Cdr. D. N.
Penfold, RN, in 1948-49. Not adopted: Lake Pen-
nilea, Tokroningen [Norwegian].
183
Kronprins Gustav Channel; Kronprinz Gustaf
Kanal: see Prince Gustav Channel.
Kronprins Olav Land: see Prince Olav Coast.
Kronprinsesse Martha Land: see Princess Martha
Coast.
Kronprinz Olaf Berge: see Prince Olav Moun-
tains.
KRUGER, MOUNT: summit peak projecting
through the icecap at the edge of the polar pla-
teau in New Schwabenland; in about 172°40’S.,
0°15’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under
Ritscher, and named for Walter Kruger, meteoro-
logical assistant on the expedition.
KUBUS MOUNTAIN: distinctive and somewhat
isolated mountain, lying just W. of the Filchner
Mtns. at the N. edge of the polar plateau, in New
Schwabenland; in about 72°25’S., 6°30’E. Disc.
by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and given
the descriptive name Kubus (the cube). Not
adopted: Kubus [German], The Cube.
Kurki Hills: see Kukri Hills.
KUKRI HILLS: range surmounted by peaks
about 3,000 to 6,000 ft. in el., extending about 26
mi. in a WSW.-ENE. direction and forming the
divide between Ferrar Gl. on the S. and Taylor Gl.
and Taylor Glacier Dry Valley on the N., in Vic-
toria Land; centered in about 77°44’S., 162°50’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and prob-
ably so named because its shape resembles that of
a kukri, a Gurikha sword. Not adopted: Kurki
Hills.
KURZE MOUNTAINS: mountain range about 20
mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 9,000 ft.
in el., lying immediately W. of the Conrad Mtns.,
which it parallels, in New Schwabenland; in about
72°05’S., 8°50’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39,
under Ritscher, and named for the director of the
naval division of the former Marineleitung (Ger-
man Admiralty).
KVARSNES FORELAND: prominent, rocky fore-
land on the S. shore of Edward VIII Bay, on Kemp
Coast; in about 67°02’S., 57°00’E.. Mapped by
Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in Janu-
ary—February 1937, who named it Kvarsnes. Not
adopted: Kvarsnes [Norwegian].
KYFFIN, MOUNT: mountain about 5,800 ft. in
el. in the Commonwealth Range, projecting into
the E. side of Beardmore Gl. and rising precipi-
tously above it, about 22 mi. up the glacier from
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Mt. Kathleen; in about 83°47’S., 172°10’E. Disc.
and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton.
Not adopted: Mount Kiffin, Mount Kyftin.
Kyftin, Mount: see Kyffin, Mount.
Laavebrua: see Ramp Rock.
LACAZE-DUTHIERS, CAPE: cape lying between
Andvord Bay and Paradise Hbr., on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 64°48’S., 62°49’W. Disc. by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named
it for Félix Henri de Lacaze-Duthiers, French
naturalist and authority on the anatomy of mol-
lusks.
LACHMAN, CAPE: cape marking the N. tip of
James Ross I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Palm-
er Pen.; in 63°47’S., 57°47’W. Disc. by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskj6old, who named
it for J. Lachman, a patron of the expedition.
Not adopted: Kap Lachmann [German].
LACHMAN CRAGS: escarpment which extends
in a N.S. direction for about 5 mi. at about 1,000
ft. in el., standing 3 mi. SSW. of Cape Lachman
on James Ross I., close S. of the NE. end of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°51’S., 57°50’W. First charted by the
FIDS in 1945, who named it after nearby Cape
Lachman.
Lacroix, Mount: see Lacroix Nunatak.
LACROIX, MOUNT: prominent mountain with
red vertical cliffs and a rounded summit, about
2,100 ft. in el., surmounting the NE. end of Booth
I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S.,
63°59’'W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot, and named by him for Alfred
Lacroix, prominent French mineralogist and geol-
ogist. Not adopted: Mount Lecroix.
LACROIX NUNATAK: ridge of terminal mo-
raine, about 1.5 mi. long and 270 ft. in el., stand-
ing immediately behind a small zone of low rocky
ridges which protrude above the ice covered point
situated about 2 mi. SW. of Cape Margerie, on
Adélie Coast; in 66°51’S., 141°18’E. Disc. in 1931
by BANZARE personnel on the Discovery, who
sighted this feature from a distance, believing it to
be a 1,000-ft. rock peak. Named by Mawson for
Prof. Alfred Lacroix, prominent French mineralo-
gist with the Museum National D’Histoire Natu-
relle, Paris. Photographed from the air by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under
Liotard, 1949-51, who established an astronomical
station near its center. Not adopted: Mount
Lacroix (q.v.).
Lady Newnes Bay; Lady Newnes Shelf Ice:
see Lady Newnes Ice Shelf.
184
LADY NEWNES ICE SHELF: an extensive ice
shelf about 50 mi. long and 45 mi. wide, lying to
the W. of Coulman I. in the western Ross Sea,
along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 73°30’S.,
168°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under
C. E. Borchgrevink, and named by him for Lady
Newnes, whose husband, Sir George Newnes,
financed the expedition. Not adopted: Lady
Newnes Bay, Lady Newnes Shelf Ice.
LAFARGE ROCKS: two rocks which are 0.5 mi.
apart, lying about 2 mi. NW. of Casy Islet and
about 6 mi. W. of Cape Siffrey, the N. tip of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°13’S., 57°32’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp.,
1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for
Ens. Antoine Pavin de la Farge of the exp. ship
Zélée. They were charted by the FIDS in 1946.
Not adopted: Lafarge Rock.
LAGOON ISLET: islet about 2 mi. E. of Léonie
Islet in the Léonie Islands, lying off the SE. coast
of Adelaide I.; in 67°36’S., 68°16’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Named by the
BGLE under Rymill during its visit to the Léonie
Islands in February 1936.
LA GORCE MOUNTAINS: a group of mountains
standing at the E. side of the upper reaches of
Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in
about 86°45’S., 146°00’W. This group extends
about 20 mi. in a general E.—W. direction and
includes, from E. to W., such features as Mounts
Paine, Hjalmar Johansen, Gjertsen and Grier.
Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological
party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd
for John Oliver La Gorce, V. Pres. of the National
Geographic Society. Not adopted: John Oliver
LaGorce Mountains, LaGorce Mountains.
LA GORCE PEAK: beehive-shaped summit
about 2,700 ft. in el., standing at the S. end and
marking the highest peak in the Alexandra Mtns.,
on Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°37’S., 153°35’W.
Disc. in February 1929 by the ByrdAE, and named
by Byrd for John Oliver La Gorce. Not adopted:
LaGorce Mountain, LaGorce Peak, Mount LaGorce.
LAGOTELLERIE ISLAND: island about 1 mi.
long, lying at the entrance to Bourgeois Fjord
midway between Pourquoi Pas I. and Camp Pt.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°53’S.,
67°24’"W. Disc. and named by the FrAE under
Charcot, 1908-10.
LAGRANGE CAPE: flat-topped rocky headland
extending E. from the Solvay Mtns., about 6 mi.
SSW. of Buls Bay, on the SE. coast of Brabant I.,
in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°25’S., 62°15’W. Disc.
by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
named it for Charles and Eugéne Lagrange,
staunch supporters of the expedition.
LAGRELIUS POINT: low, ice-free point on the
NW. coast of James Ross I., 2 mi. S. of Carlson I.;
in 63°55’S., 58°17’W. Disc. and first surveyed in
1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who
named it Cape Lagrelius after Axel Lagrelius of
Stockholm, who contributed toward the cost of
the expedition. It was resurveyed by the FIDS
in 1952. Point is considered a more suitable de-
scriptive term for this feature than cape. Not
adopted: Cape Lagrelius.
Lahille, Pointe: see Lahille Island.
LAHILLE ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and
1 mi. wide, lying about 2 mi. W. of Nunez Pt., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°33’S., 64°23’W.
Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and
charted as a point on the coast in honor of Fer-
nando Lahille, noted Argentine naturalist. The
FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, determined the
feature’s insularity. Not adopted: Pointe Lahille
[French].
LAINEZ, CAPE: steep, rocky promontory about
3,000 ft. in el., forming the W. end of Pourquoi
Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°42’S.,
67°48’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot,
1908-10, and named for Manuel Lainez, Senator
of the Argentine Republic and founder of the
newspaper, El Diario.
LAJARTE ISLANDS: group of islands fringing
the N. coast of Anvers I., close E. of Cape Gr6on-
land, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°16’S., 63°24’W.
Disc. by a German exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74.
Charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and
named by him for Capt. Dufaure de Lajarte, French
Navy. Not adopted: Dufaure de Lajarte Islands,
Lajarte Islets.
LALLEMAND FJORD: bay about 30 mi. long,
in a N.-S. direction, and about 12 mi. wide at its
entrance between Cape Rey and Charles-Roux I.,
lying close SW. of Marin Darbel Bay along the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°05’S., 66°45’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, who
named it for Charles Lallemand, French scientist
and member of the Bureau des Longitudes. Not
adopted: Lallemand Bay, Lattemand Bay.
LAMB, CAPE: cape forming the SW. end of
Vega I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.;
in 63°54’S., 57°37’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjdld. Recharted in 1945 by the
FIDS, who named it for I. M. Lamb, botanist on
the FIDS staff at Hope Bay in 1945.
424589 O -57 -13
185
LAMBDA ISLAND: island, about 1 mi. long,
which lies immediately NW. of Delta I. in the
Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 63°00’W.
This island, the largest feature in the NW. part
of the island group, was first roughly charted and
named “Tle Sourrieu” by the FrAE under Charcot,
1903-5, but that name has not survived in usage.
The name Lambda, derived from the 11th letter
of the Greek alphabet, was probably given by DI
personnel who roughly surveyed the island in
1927. The island was surveyed by Argentine ex-
peditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted:
Ile Sourrieu [French], Isla Primero de Mayo
[Spanish].
LAMB POINT: low, ice-covered point forming
the S. side of the entrance to Howkins Inlet, on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°41’S., 60°48’W.
Disc. and photographed from the air in Decem-
ber 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was pho-
tographed from the air by the RARE Ronne, who
in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from
the ground. Named by the FIDS for H. H. Lamb,
meteorologist on the British whale factory ship
Balaena in Antarctic waters in 1946-47, who pre-
pared daily forecasts for the whaling fleet on the
basis of FIDS and other meteorological reports.
LAMINA PEAK: prominent pyramid-shaped
peak, about 4,200 ft. in el., surmounting a strati-
fied ridge which curves down from Mt. Edred north-
eastward toward George VI Sound. The peak
stands 4.5 mi. inland from the E. coast of Alex-
ander I Island at the S. limit of the Douglas
Range; in 70°32’S., 68°45’W. This peak was first
photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by
Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these
photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and
resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. So named by
FIDS because of the marked horizontal stratifica-
tion of the rocks of this peak.
LAMMERS GLACIER: large glacier flowing in
an E. direction and merging with several other
large glaciers close W. of Mobiloil Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 68°38’S., 66°25’W.
This glacier appears indistinctly in an aerial pho-
tograph taken by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20,
1928, but shows more clearly in aerial photo-
graphs taken by a U.S. exp. under Ellsworth in
1935 and the USAS in 1940. It was resighted in
1947 by the RARE under Ronne, who named it
for Lester Lammers, contributor of nine grown
husky dogs and four puppies to the expedition.
Lamplugh Bay: see Lamplugh Inlet.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
LAMPLUGH INLET: inlet about 7 mi. long, lying
between Capes Healy and Howard, along the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°23’S., 61°10’W. Disc.
by members of the USAS who explored this coast
from East Base by land and from the air in 1940.
Named for Elmer L. Lamplugh, chief radio opera-
tor at East Base. Not adopted: Lamplugh Bay.
LAMPLUGH ISLAND: ice-capped island about
10 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, separated from the
mainland by Davis and Clarke Glaciers, along the
coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°39’S., 162°52’E.
This feature was first sighted by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, but it was first charted as
an island by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton.
Named by Shackleton for G. W. Lamplugh, who
gave assistance to the expedition.
LANCASTER, CAPE: cape forming the S. tip
of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°51’S.,
63°44°'W. Disc. by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann,
1873-74. Later sighted by the BelgAE, 1897-99,
under De Gerlache, who named it for Albert Lan-
caster, Scientific Dir. of the Meteorological Serv-
ice of the Royal Observatory of Belgium and a
supporter of the expedition. Not adopted: Cap
Albert Lancaster [French].
Land Bay: see Emory Land Bay.
LANDEN RIDGE: narrow rocky ridge 4 mi. E.
of Mt. Hayes, standing at the E. end of Cole Pen.
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°51’S., 63°51’W.
During December 1947 it was charted by FIDS and
photographed from the air by the RARE under
Ronne. Named by Ronne for David Landen of the
Trimetrogon Section, U.S. Geological Survey, who
assisted in planning the RARE photographic pro-
gram and correlating photographs after the exp.
returned. Not adopted: Mount Landen.
Land Glacier: see Emory Land Glacier.
LANGE PLATFORM: flat-topped upland about
30 mi. long and about 8,500 ft. in el., lying N. of
the edge of the polar plateau in New Schwaben-
land; in about 72°00’S., 1°00’W. Disc. by the
GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for
Heinz Lange, second meteorologist on the expedi-
tion.
Langevatnet: see Ellis Fjord.
Langnes Channel: see Langnes Inlet.
Langnes Fjord: see Langnes Inlet.
LANGNES INLET: narrow, sinuous inlet about
14 mi. long, indenting the Vestfold Hills area be-
tween Langnes Pen. and Breidnes Pen., and marked
186
by a group of elongated islands and rocks lying
inside its wide entrance, along Ingrid Christensen
Coast; in about 68°31’S., 78°08’E. Charted by
Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars
Christensen, and named Langnes Fjord because
of close association with Langnes Pen. The generic
inlet is approved as a more appropriate term on
the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation
from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in
March 1947 which shows this feature as extend-
ing some 2 mi. further E. to include the isolated
lake previously named “Breidvatnet” and then
swinging SSW. for nearly 5 miles. Not adopted:
Langnes Channel, Langnes Fjord [Norwegian].
LANGNES PENINSULA: narrow, sinuous, rocky
peninsula about 10 mi. long, marking the north-
ern of three small peninsulas comprising the Vest-
fold Hills, and projecting W. from Ingrid Christen-
sen Coast; in about 68°29’S., 78°19’E. The Nor.
exp. under Mikkelsen landed in February 1935
in about 68°29’S., 78°11’E.; this reported position ©
appears to correlate with the N. tip of Langnes
Pen., close W. of Tryne I. The name derives from
Langneset (the long headland) as applied on the
H. E. Hansen charts compiled from aerial pho-
tographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp.
under Lars Christensen. Not adopted: Langneset
[Norwegian].
Langneset: see Langnes Peninsula.
Langnestrynet: see Tryne Island.
LANG SOUND: sound about 1.5 mi. wide at its
narrowest point and about 10 mi. long, in an E.-W.
direction, lying between the group of islands that
include Broka and Havstein Islands and the main-
land of Kemp Coast; in about 67°08’S., 58°40’E.
Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen-
sen in January-February 1937 and named “Lang-
sundet” [Norwegian], Long Sound. Not adopted:
Langsundet [Norwegian], Long Sound.
Ldngstans Udde: see Longing, Cape.
Langsundet: see Lang Sound.
LANKESTER, CAPE: low, snow-covered head-
land at the S. side of the entrance to Mulock Inlet,
along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
79°15’S., 160°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, who probably named it for Sir Edwin
Ray Lankester, Dir. of the Natural History Depart-
ments of the British Museum, 1898-1907, and
founder of the Marine Biological Assn. in 1884.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
LAPEYRERE BAY: bay about 4 mi. long and
2 mi. wide, indenting the NE. coast of Anvers I.
westward of the Melchior Is., in the Palmer Arch.;
64°22’S., 63°13’W. The bay was probably first
sighted by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, as
an incompletely-defined bay is shown on the chart
resulting from the expedition. It was recharted
by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named
by him for R. Adm. Boue de Lapeyrére, French
Navy. Not adopted: Baie de Lepeyrére [French].
LA PLAZA POINT: point which forms the S. tip
of the rocky peninsula which separates Mackellar
and Martel Inlets in the N. part of Admiralty Bay,
on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°04’S., 58°25’W. Charted and named by the
FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10.
Large Razorback Island: see Big Razorback
Island.
La Roche Strait: see Bird Sound.
LARROUY ISLAND: island about 5 mi. long and
3 mi. wide, which rises to about 2,500 ft. in el. and
lies about 5 mi. NNE. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°52’S., 65°17’W. Disc. by
the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it
for Monsieur Larrouy, at that time a French
Minister Plenipotentiary.
Larry Gould Bay: see Gould Bay.
LARS ANDERSEN ISLAND: islet lying about 7
mi. NW. of Cape Daly, in the central part of the
Thorgaut Is., off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about
67°26’S., 63°42’E. Charted in January—February
1931 from the Thorgaut, Norwegian whale catcher
sent out by Lars Christensen. Presumably named
for Lars Andersen, manager-harpooner of the
whale catchers Falk and Ole Wegger which operated
further to the N. during this season. Not adopted:
Lars Andersen Islands, Lars Anderson Islands.
Lars Anderson Islands: see Lars Andersen Island.
LARS CHRISTENSEN COAST: that portion of
the coast of Antarctica extending from Cape Darn-
ley on Bjerkg Pen. in about 67°42’S., 69°30’E., to
Jennings Promontory in about 70°12’S., 71°46’E.
Disc. in January 1931 by Norwegian whalers em-
ployed by Lars Christensen of Sandefjord, Norway,
for whom it isnamed. Mr. Christensen personally
participated in some of the exploration conducted
in Antarctica by his firm, 1926-37. Not adopted:
Lars Christensen Land.
Lars Christensen Land: see Lars Christensen
Coast.
187
LARS CHRISTENSEN PEAK: lofty, rounded
dome of an extinct crater about 3,900 ft. in el., sur-
mounting Peter I Island, which lies NE. of Thurston
Pen.; in about 68°49’S., 90°31’W. Peter I Island
was disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in
January 1821 and viewed from a distance of 15
miles. The island was circumnavigated in January
1927 by a Nor. exp. under Tofte in the Odd I, who
named the peak for Lars Christensen, Norwegian
whaling magnate who financed the expedi:ion.
Larsemann Fijellene: see Larsemann Hills.
LARSEMANN HILLS: barren, rounded hills,
from 250 to 600 ft. in el., which mark the coast line
for a distance of about 9 mi., along Ingrid Christen-
sen Coast; in about 69°25’S., 75°40’E. Disc. in
February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen,
and reportedly named “Larsen Mountains” at
that time. The first map name appears to have
taken the form Larsemann Fjellene. The generic
hills was adopted as a more appropriate term
following examination of the Norwegian compila-
tion based on the aerial photographs taken in
January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen-
sen. Not adopted: Larsemann Fjellene [Nor-
wegian], Larsen Mountains.
LARSEN, MOUNT: mountain about 2,200 ft. in
el., situated in the east-central portion of Thule I.,
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°18’W.
Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, who named it for Capt. C. A. Larsen.
LARSEN, MOUNT: mountain about 5,000 ft. in
el., presenting sheer granite cliffs on the N. side,
standing at the S. side of the mouth of Reeves Gl.,
in Victoria Land; in about 74°50’S., 162°10’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who
named it for Capt. C. A. Larsen, noted Norwegian
Antarctic explorer whose explorations along the
E. coast of Palmer Pen. in the Jason, 1892-93,
marked the beginning of commercial whaling op-
erations in the Antarctic. Larsen led numerous
whaling expeditions until his death in December
1925 while directing operations in the Ross Sea.
Larsen Barrier: see Larsen Ice Shelf.
LARSEN CHANNEL: strait about 3 mi. wide
separating D’Urville and Joinville Islands, which
lie NE. of the tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°10’S.,
56°12’W. Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nor-
denskjold, and named for Capt. C. A. Larsen of the
exp. ship Antarctic.
Larsen Glacier: see Nils Larsen Glacier.
LARSEN GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide and
about 25 mi. long, flowing in a SE. direction along
the S. slopes of Mounts Larsen, De Gerlache, and
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Crummer, to the Nansen Sheet on the E. coast of
Victoria Land; in about 75°10’S., 162°35’E. Disc.
by the South Magnetic Polar Party of the BrAE
under Shackleton, 1907-9. They named it Larsen
Glacier because it flowed SE. from Mt. Larsen,
which was constantly in view as they ascended the
glacier.
LARSEN HARBOR: narrow inlet in the S. side of
Drygalski Fjord, about 3 mi. W. of Nattriss Head,
at the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°50’S.,
36°01’W. Charted by the GerAE, 1911-12, under
Filchner, who named it for Capt. C. A. Larsen, who
was at that time in charge of the Grytviken whaling
station.
Larsen Ice Barrier: see Larsen Ice Shelf.
LARSEN ICE SHELF: an extensive ice shelf in
the NW. part of Weddell Sea, extending along the
E. coast of Palmer Pen. from about 64°30’S. to
at least 69°30’S. Named for Capt. C. A. Larsen,
who sailed along the ice front in the Jason as far
as 68°10’S. during December 1893. Not adopted:
Larsen Barrier, Larsen Ice Barrier, Larsen Shelf
ees
LARSEN INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 14 mi. long
in a N.-S. direction and about 8 mi. wide, lying
between Capes Longing and Sobral, along the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°30’S., 59°30’W. C. A.
Larsen, Norwegian whaling captain, reported a
large bay in this area in 1893. Larsen’s name was
suggested for the feature by Edwin Swift Balch
in 1902. The inlet was re-identified and charted
by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Larsen Bay.
Larsen Island: see Monroe Island.
LARSEN ISLANDS: group of islands lying about
2 mi. NW. of Return Pt., off the W. end of Corona-
tion I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S.,
46°05’W. Disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. They were
named on Capt. Petter Sgrlle’s chart, based upon
his survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13, in
honor of Capt. C. A. Larsen.
Larsen Mountains: see Larsemann Hills.
LARSEN NUNATAK: nunatak about 2 mi. N. of
Burn Murdoch Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks
group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°58’S.,
60°06’W. The Seal Nunataks were disc. by a Nor.
whaling exp. under C. A. Larsen in December 1893.
Commemoration of Larsen was proposed by Ludwig
Friederichsen in 1895. The application of this
name is based upon a 1947 survey by the FIDS.
188
LARSEN POINT: point which forms the W. side
of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, on the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°12’S., 36°30’W. Named for
Capt. C. A. Larsen, who examined Cumberland Bay
in the Jason in 1893-94.
Larsen Shelf Ice: see Larsen Ice Shelf.
LASERON ISLETS: small group of rocky islets
lying about 2.5 mi. ENE. of Cape Denison in the
SE. side of Commonwealth Bay, off George V Coast;
in about 66°59’S., 142°46’E. Disc. in January 1912
by the AAE Main Base party under Mawson, and
named by him for Charles F. Laseron, taxidermist
with the expedition.
Lashley Mountains: see Lashly Mountains.
LASHLY MOUNTAINS: mountains about 8,600
ft. in el., standing near the edge of the plateau and
S. of the head of Taylor Gl., in Victoria Land; in
about 77°53’S., 160°10’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named these mountains
for William Lashly, a member of the party which
explored this area. Not adopted: Lashley Moun-
tains.
LASSITER COAST: that portion of the E. coast
of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Mackintosh,
in 72°53’S., 60°03’W., to Cape Adams, in 75°04’S.,
62°20’W. The N. portion of this coast was disc.
and photographed from the air by the USAS in
1940. During 1947 the entire extent of the coast
was photographed from the air by the RARE under
Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted
it from the ground. The name Lassiter Shelf Ice
was applied by Ronne to the ice shelf in the western
part of the head of Weddell Sea, which has now
been shown to be a feature continuous with what
was previously named Filchner Ice Shelf. The
name Lassiter has therefore been applied by the
US-ACAN to this coast, after Capt. James W.
Lassiter of the then USAAF, who as chief pilot .
was instrumental in the overall success of the
RARE aerial exploratory program. Lassiter was
pilot on the flight SW. from Cape Adams on which
geographic discovery was extended to 177°30’S.,
71°30’W., including exploration of the Joerg
Plateau and Orville Escarpment, and the flight SE.
to about 79°00’S., 43°45’W. on which the western
and central parts of the Filchner Ice Shelf fringing
Edith Ronne Land were sighted and photographed
for the first time.
Lassiter Ice Barrier; Lassiter Shelf Ice: see
Filchner Ice Shelf.
LAST HILL: small hill, about 1,100 ft. in el., with
a rock ridge at its crest and a cliff at its N. side,
lying about 4 mi. SSW. of Hope Bay and 2 mi. E.of
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the NE. shore of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°28’S., 57°05’W. Probably seen by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. First
charted in 1946 by the FIDS, who so named it
because it marks the last climb on the sledge route
between Hope Bay and Duse Bay.
LATADY MOUNTAINS: mountains lying SW. of
Gardner Inlet and NE. of Sweeney Mtns., rising
above Joerg Plateau; in about 75°30’S., 65°50’W.
Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who
named them for William Latady, aerial photog-
rapher with the expedition.
LATHAM PEAK: peak projecting through the
icecap about 20 mi. ENE. of Mt. Biscoe, in Enderby
Land; in about 66°13’S., 52°12’E. Disc. in January
1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and probably
named for Rt. Hon. Sir John Creig Latham, who
became Chief Justice of Australia in 1935.
La Tour: see Tower, The.
LAUBEUF FJORD: a sound about 25 mi. long, in
a general N.-S. direction, and averaging 10 mi.
wide, lying between the east-central portion of
Adelaide I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
about 67°20’S., 67°50’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908—
10, under Charcot, and named by him for Maxime
Laubeuf, French marine engineer who supervised
building the engine of the exp. ship Powrquoi-Pas?.
LAURENS, CAPE: cape which marks the NW.
extremity of Laurens Pen. and Heard I.; in 52°59’S.,
73°15’E. The name was probably applied by Capt.
Franklin F. Smith of the American bark Laurens
who visited Heard I. in 1855-56 and, who with Capt.
Erasmus Darwin Rogers, initiated sealing opera-
tions and long-time American sealer occupation of
Heard Island. The name appears on a chart by the
Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in
the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then
in use by the sealers.
LAURENS PENINSULA: rugged peninsula sur-
mounted by several ice-covered peaks which forms
the NW. part of Heard I. The peninsula is about
5 mi. long and, at its SE. extremity, is joined to
the central mass of Heard I. by the low and narrow
isthmus between Atlas Cove and West Bay; in
53°00’S., 73°18’E. The name was applied by the
ANARE following their survey in 1948. It derives
from the existing name Cape Laurens, applied for
the NW. extremity of this peninsula after the
American bark Laurens which, under Capt. Frank-
lin F. Smith, visited Heard I. in 1855-56 and
assisted in initiating sealing operations there.
189
LAURIE ISLAND: an irregularly-shaped island,
about 12.5 mi. long in an E.—W. direction, forming
the easternmost of the South Orkney Is.; in
60°45’S., 44°35’W. Disc. in December 1821 during
the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer. R. H. Laurie, Chartseller to
the Admiralty, published a chart of the South
Shetland Is., South Orkney Is., and the NE. end
of Palmer Pen. on Nov. 1, 1822, based on the ex-
plorations of Powell, Palmer, and other sealers then
in this area. The island was surveyed by the
ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce. Not adopted:
Laurie’s Island, Melville’s Island.
LAVEBRUA ISLET: flat-topped islet about 300 ft.
in el., lying close off South Pt., Deception I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 63°02’S., 60°35’W. Charted
by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31. The name
was given by Norwegian whalers operating from
Deception I., and has been in use since 1927. The
name is descriptive, meaning literally “threshing
floor bridge” or “barn bridge’. Not adopted: Islote
Chaco [Spanish], Jon Islet.
LAWS GLACIER: a confluent glacier system
which flows into Marshall Bay on the S. coast of
Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S.,
45°39’W. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS.
named by the Br—APC for Richard M. Laws of the
FIDS, leader and biologist at Signy I. base in 1948
and 1949, and at South Georgia in 1951.
LAY-BROTHER ROCK: rock about 1.5 mi. SW.
of Despair Rocks and some 7 mi. NW. of Return
Pt., off the W. end of Coronation I., in the South
Orkney Is., in 60°34’S., 46°14’W. Charted and
named by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1933.
LEALAND BLUFF: high rounded headland at
the SW. corner of William Scoresby Bay, on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°27’S., 59°35’E.
Named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby
who charted this area in February 1936.
Le Bland, Cape: see Leblond, Cape.
LEBLOND, CAPE: cape forming the N. end of
Nansen I., in the Biscoe Is.; in about 66°03’S.,
66°40’W. Charted by the FrAE under Charcot,
1908-10, and named by him for the Pres. of
the Norman Geographical Soc. at Rouen. Not
adopted: Cape Le Bland, Cape Le Blond.
LECOINTE, MOUNT: central of three mountains
lying about 27 mi. SSE. of Mt. Markham, in the
Queen Alexandra Range, and about 45 mi. inland
from the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°20’S.,
161°45’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, and named by him for Lt. Georges
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Lecointe, who was second-in-command of the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache.
Lecroiz, Mount: see Lacroix, Mount.
LECUYER POINT: point which forms the S. side
of the entrance to the harbor of Port Lockroy,
Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S.,
63°31’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE under
Charcot, 1903-5. Not adopted: Lecuyer Point.
LEE, MOUNT: mountain situated at the NW.
end of the W. extremity of Alexander I Island;
in about 71°15’S., 75°40’W. Disc. by the RARE,
1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for R. Adm.
Paul F. Lee, USN, Chief of the Office of Naval
Research, who, appreciating the significance of
the scientific program, authorized Naval support
for the expedition.
Lee Islands: see Inner Lee Islet; Outer Lee Islet.
LEFEVRE-UTILE POINT: point about 1 mi. W.
of Curie Pt., on the N. side of Doumer I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°32’W. Disc. and
named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot.
LEGOUPIL, CAPE: cape at the NE. side of the
entrance to Huon Bay, on the NW. coast of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°20’S., 57°53’W. Disc. by a
Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40. D’Urville named
it for Ernest Goupil, a member of the exp., but the
incorrect form Legoupil has been used so exten-
Sively that in this special case it is accepted. Not
adopted: Cape Goupil.
LEGRU, CAPE: point about 1 mi. E. of Cape
Syrezol, the E. side of the entrance to Admiralty
Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°10’S., 58°16’W. Probably named by the FrAE
under Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in
December 1909.
LEGUILLOU, CAPE: point which forms the N.
tip of Tower I., lying in Bransfield Str.; in 63°31’S.,
59°50’W. Charted by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville,
1837-40, and named by him for Elie Le Guillou,
a surgeon on the exp. ship Zélée. The name form
approved is in agreement with the charts of the
D’Urville exp. and has been consistently used
since that time.
LEHAIE, CAPE: cape forming the SW. extremity
of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S.,
62°47’W. Disc. by the BelgAK, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache, who named it for Monsieur Houzeau de
Lehaie, a supporter of the expedition. The FrAE
under Charcot, 1903-5, charted the cape, substan-
tially modifying its earlier cartographic represen-
190
tation. Not adopted: Cap Houzeau de Lehaie
[French], Cape Houzeau de Lehaye.
Lehrke Bay: see Lehrke Inlet.
LEHRKE INLET: ice-filled inlet about 10 mi.
wide which recedes SW. 20 mi. between Cape Boggs
and Cape Sharbonneau, along the E. coast of Pal-
mer Pen.; in 70°45’S., 61°45’W. Disc. by members
of the USAS who explored this coast on land and
from the air in 1940. Named for Lester Lehrke,
boatswain’s mate of the Bear, one of the exp. ships,
and sailmaker of the East Base, Not adopted:
Lehrke Bay.
LEININGER PEAK: peak about 3,700 ft. in el.,
standing at the N. side of the base of Hielson Pen.,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°34’S., 62°15/W.
This peak was photographed from the air by the
RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, and charted in 1947
by a joint sledge party consisting of members of
the RARE and the FIDS. Named by Ronne for
Cdr. Joseph A. Leininger, USNR, who devised the
plans for the loading of cargo and the alterations
on the exp. ship.
Leipzig Island: see Nelson Island.
Leith Harbor: see Inverleith Harbor.
LEITH HARBOR: northern of three harbors in
the W. side of Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in
54°08’S., 36°41’W. Named in about 1912 by Sal-
vesen and Co., whalers of Leith, Scotland, opera-
tors of the whaling station at the head of the
harbor.
LEITH HARBOR: small bay in the NE. part of
Paradise Hbr., along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 64°52’S., 62°50’W. Probably named by whalers
operating in this vicinity. Leith, Scotland, is the
home of Salvesen and Co., whalers.
LEMAIRE CHANNEL: channel about 8 mi. long
and averaging about 1 mi. wide, extending in a
NE.-SW. direction from the N. end of Booth I.
to Cape Duseberg, and separating the Dannebrog
Is. from the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S.,
64°00’W. Disc. by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann,
1873-74. Traversed in December 1898 by the
BelgAE under De Gerlache, and named by him for
C. Lemaire, Belgian explorer of the Congo. Not
adopted: Lemaire Strait.
LEMAIRE ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long and
1.5 mi. wide, lying about 1 mi. W. of Cape Lacaze-
Duthiers, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
64°49’S., 62°57’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99,
under De Gerlache, who named it for C. Lemaire.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Lemaire Strait: see Lemaire Channel.
LE MAY RANGE: mountain range in the SE.
part of Alexander I Island; in about 71°50’S.,
70°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under
Ronne, and named by him for Gen. Curtis Le
May, head of the Office of Research and Develop-
ment of the then USAAF ,-which furnished equip-
ment for the expedition. Not adopted: Army
Range, U.S. Army Range.
LENTON POINT: the SW. extremity of a small,
rocky peninsula in Clowes Bay on the S. side of
Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°37’W.
Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and
resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named in 1954
by the Br—APC for Ralph A. Lenton of the FIDS,
radio operator at Signy I. base in 1948, who helped
with the survey and biological work; subsequently
at Admiralty Bay in 1949, and then leader at
Deception I. in 1951, at Port Lockroy in 1952 and
at the Argentine Is. in 1954.
LEON HEAD: prominent rocky headland, about
2,900 ft. in el., forming the S. side of the mouth
of Brogger Gl. and the SE. side of the entrance
to Undine South Hbr., on the S. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°33’S., 36°28’W. The headland was
roughly charted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under
Bellingshausen. Named by the Br—APC, following
a survey by the SGS, 1951-52, after the Spanish
vessel Leon, which resighted South Georgia in
1756.
LEONIE ISLANDS: group of small islands about
6 mi. N. of Jenny I., lying in the entrance to Ryder
Bay along the SE. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°36’S.,
68°17W. The FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, disc.
these islands and gave the name Léonie to the
largest island in the group. The BGLE under
Rymill, 1934-37, extended the coverage of the name
to the entire group. Not adopted: Leonie Islands,
Léonie Islets.
LEONIE ISLET: largest and westernmost of the
Léonie Islands, about 1 mi. in diameter and about
1,500 ft. in el., lying in the entrance to Ryder Bay
off the SE. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°36’S., 68°22’W.
Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under
Charcot.
LEOPARD ISLAND: islet about 0.25 mi. W. of
the SW. end of Skua I., in the Argentine Is., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°18’W.
Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under
Rymill.
LEOPOLD AND ASTRID COAST: that portion
of the coast of Antarctica lying between about
81°00’E. and Cape Penck, in about 87°35’E. Disc.
191
in January 1934 by a Nor. Exp. under Christensen,
and named for King Leopold and Queen Astrid
of Belgium. Not adopted: King Leopold and Queen
Astrid Coast, King Leopold and Queen Astrid Land,
Kong Leopold og Dronning Astrid Land [Nor-
wegian].
Leopold Coast: see Luitpold Coast.
Le Poing: see Fist, The.
LERCHENFELD GLACIER: the southerly of two
glaciers descending W. from the interior heights
of Luitpold Coast to Duke Ernst Bay; in about
77°50’S., 34°50’W. Disc. in January-February 1912
by the GerAE under Filchner, who named it for
Count Hugo von und zu Lerchenfeld-K6fering, sup-
porter of the expedition. Not adopted: Graf Lerch-
enfeld Gletscher [German].
LEROUX BAY: boot-shaped bay, about 7 mi.
long in a NW.-SE. direction, and averaging about
5 mi. wide, between Nunez Pt. and the narrow pen-
insula surmounted by Magnier Peaks, along the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°36’S., 64°21’W. Disc.
by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by
him for Commander Leroux, Argentine Navy. This
bay was more accurately delineated by the BGLE
under Rymill in 1935.
LESKOV ISLAND: island less than 1 mi. in ex-
tent, lying about 30 mi. W. of Visokoi I., in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 56°40’S., 28°10’W. Disc.
in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who
named it for the third lieutenant on the exp. ship
Vostok.
LESSER MACKELLAR ISLET: islet immediately
NE. of Greater Mackellar Islet in the Mackellar
Islets group, lying in the center of Commonwealth
Bay, along George V Coast; in about 66°58’S.,
142°39’E. Disc. and named by the AAE under
Mawson, 1911-14. The name is indicative of the
size of the feature in relation to Greater Mackellar
Islet.
LEVERETT GLACIER: slow-moving glacier
about 10 mi. wide and over 20 mi. long, flowing in
a WNW. direction between the Harold Byrd and
Tapley Mountains and terminating at the head
of Ross Ice Shelf close E. of Robert Scott Gl.;
in about 85°30’S., 150°00’W. Disc. in December
1929 by the ByrdAE geological party under Laur-
ence Gould, and named by him for Frank Leverett,
eminent geologist at the Univ. of Michigan and
authority on glacial geology of the central United
States.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
LEVER GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide at
its mouth and at least 5 mi. long, flowing SW. into
the head of the northern arm of Beascochea Bay,
on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°31’S.,
63°33’W. This glacier was first sighted and
roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char-
cot. It was resurveyed in 1935 by the BGLE under
Rymill, and later named for William H. Lever, 2d
Viscount Leverhulme of the Western Isles, who
contributed toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37.
LEVICK, MOUNT: peak about 9,100 ft. in el.,
standing W. of Mt. Melbourne and E. of Mt. Baxter,
in Victoria Land; in about 74°16’S., 163°33’E.
First charted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13,
and named for G. Murray Levick, surgeon with the
expedition.
LEWIS, CAPE: ice-covered cape at the W. side
of Maury Bay, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°30’S.,
124°25’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by
the US-ACAN for Thomas Lewis, gunner on the
sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
LEWIS GLACIER: the northerly of two glaciers
flowing E. into Seligman Inlet, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 67°45’S., 65°38’W. The glacier
was photographed from the air by the USAS in
1940. It was charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who
named it for William Vaughan Lewis, British
glaciologist and lecturer at the Dept. of Geography,
Cambridge University.
Lewis Island: see Tonkin Island.
LEWIS ISLET: small rocky islet, lying close in-
side the E. side of the entrance to Davis Bay, and
marking one of the few rock outcrops along Clarie
Coast; in about 66°00’S., 134°30’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Thomas
Lewis, gunner on the sloop of war Peacock of the
USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
LEWIS PEAKS: two prominent peaks, about
3,500 ft. in el., standing on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen. close E. of Day I.; in 67°15/S., 67°30’W. First
roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char-
cot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who named
it for Flight Lt. John Lewis, pilot of the Auster
airplane which was used from the John Biscoe
for reconnaissance of ice conditions in Marguerite
Bay in February 1950.
LEWIS POINT: point marked by rocky exposures
on its N. side and surmounted by an ice-covered
dome about 1,700 ft. in el., at the S. side of the
mouth of Anthony Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer
192
Pen., in 69°54’S., 62°25°W. Photographed from
the air by the USAS in 1940. During 1947 it was
photographed from the air by the RARE under
Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted
it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Col.
Richard L. Lewis of the Army Quartermaster Corps,
which furnished field equipment and clothing to
the exp. for testing purposes. ;
LEWTHWAITE STRAIT: strait about 2.5 mi.
wide, lying between Coronation I. and Powell I.
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°08’W.
Disc. in December 1821 during the joint cruise of
Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer.
Mr. Lewthwaite was a teacher of navigation in
Prince’s Street, Rotherhithe (London). Powell left
the chart and journal of his Antarctic exploration
with Lewthwaite before sailing on his last exp.,
on which he met his death. Not adopted: Lewth-
waite’s Strait, Spencers Straits.
LIARD ISLAND: triangular island about 6 mi.
long, rising to about 2,000 ft. in el., situated in
the north-central portion of Hanusse Bay, off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°51’S., 67°25’W.
Disc. and named by the FrAE under Charcot,
1908-10.
LIBOIS BAY: small bay on the W. side of
Cholet Islet which is entered between Rozo Pt.,
the NW. end of Cholet Islet, and Paumelle Pt.,
the NW. end of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°02’;W. First charted by the
FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him
for F. Libois, second mechanic and carpenter of
the exp. ship Francais.
Lichen Island: see Vegetation Island.
LICHEN PEAK: peak, about 1,000 ft. in el.,
standing about 20 mi. E. of Mt. Saunders, in the
Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about
76°53’S., 145°12’W. Disc. in December 1934 by
the ByrdAE sledge party under Paul Siple, and
so named because of the lichens and other botani-
cal specimens obtained there.
LIEGE ISLAND: roughly triangular-shaped
island, about 8 mi. long in a NE.-SW. direction and
about 6 mi. wide, lying immediately NE. of Bra-
bant I. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°03’S., 61°53’W.
Charted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Ger-
lache, who named it for the province of Liége,
Belgium. Not adopted: Liege Island, Liége Island,
Luttich Island.
LIGHT, CAPE: cape forming the S. side of the
entrance to Keller Inlet and the N. end of Smith
Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°15’S.,
60°48’W. Disc. and photographed from the air
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
by the USAS in 1940. During 1947 it was photo-
graphed from the air by the RARE under Ronne,
who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it
from the ground. Named by Ronne for Richard
Upjohn Light, Pres. of the American Geographical
Society. Not adopted: Cape Ketchum.
LIGHTHOUSE BAY: small bay between Cape
Crewe and Point Abrahamsen, forming the N.
arm of Cook Bay, along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Charted by DI
personnel in 1929. Probably so named at that time
because a lighthouse (now disused) was located
on nearby Sheep Point.
Lille Jason: see Little Jason Lagoon.
LILLIE GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue,
about 125 ft. in el., extending N. from Oates Coast
for about 20 mi. between Cape Cheetham and Cape
Williams; in about 69°50’S., 163°00’E. Disc. in
February 1911 by the BrAE under Scott, when the
Terra Nova explored W. of Cape North. Dennis
G. Lillie was biologist on the Terra Nova. Not
adopted: Lillie Ice Tongue.
Lillie Ice Tongue: see Lillie Glacier Tongue.
LIMIT ROCK: rock about 2 mi. E. of North
Foreland, the NE. cape of King George I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 61°53’S., 57°36’W. Charted
in 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and
probably so named because it marks the E. limit
of foul ground surrounding North Foreland.
LIMPET ISLET: southernmost islet of the
Léonie Is., which lie in the entrance to Ryder Bay,
close off the SE. coast of Adelaide I.; in 67°38’S.,
68°19’'W. The Léonie Is. were disc. and first
roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char-
cot. Limpet Islet was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS
and so named by them because of the large num-
ber of limpet shells found there.
Lincoln Ellsworth, Mount: see Ellsworth, Mount.
LINDBERGH INLET: small inlet about 3 mi.
wide and 4 mi. long, which marks a more-or-less
permanent indentation in the front, the N. sea-
ward edge, of the Ross Ice Shelf, lying approxi-
mately midway between Discovery Inlet and the
Bay of Whales; in about 78°25’S., 167°00’W. Disc.
in January 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, but
it was not named at that time. Recharted and
photographed from the air in 1929 by the ByrdAE,
and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Col. Charles A.
Lindbergh, renowned aviator. This feature was
last confirmed by USN Op. Hjp. in January 1947,
though the configuration of such indentations is
continually changing.
193
LINDENBERG ISLAND: circular island about
0.75 mi. in diameter, about 11 mi. N. of Robertson
I. and some 35 mi. ENE. of Cape Fairweather, off
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°55/S., 59°42’w.
Disc. by a Nor. whaling exp. under C. A. Larsen
in December 1893. Named by Larsen for a mem-
ber of the firm of Woltereck and Robertson of
Hamburg which sent him to the Antarctic.
LINDLEY, MOUNT: mountain about 7,300 ft.
in el., standing about 22 mi. SSW. of Beaumont
Bay and about 25 mi. SE. of Mt. Albert Markham,
on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°45’S.,
159°15’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4,
who named it for Lord Nathaniel Lindley, a member
of the committee which made the final draft of the
instructions for the expedition.
Lindsay, Cape: see Lindsey, Cape.
LINDSEY, CAPE: cape which forms the W. end
of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about
61°08’S., 55°42’W. The name appears on Powell’s
map published by Laurie in 1882. Not adopted:
Cape Lindsay.
LION GLACIER: glacier descending in a SE. di-
rection to Lion Sound, about 11 mi. SW. of Van
Ryswyck Pt., on the SE. coast of Anvers I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S., 63°11’W. Disc. by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name
appears on a map based on a 1927 survey by DI
personnel on the Discovery. Named after nearby
Lion Island and Lion Sound.
LION ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and 1 mi.
wide, lying off the E. side of Anvers I. and about
2 mi. N. of Cape Astrup, Wiencke I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°40’S., 63°08’W. Disc. by the BelgAE,
1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name appears
on a map based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel
on the Discovery. The profile of the island sug-
gests a reclining lion when viewed from the south-
west.
LION ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about 0.2
mi. NNE. of Pétrel I., in the main cluster of islets
near the SE. end of Géologie Arch., close N. of
Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in
66°39’S., 140°01’E. Photographed from the air by
USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE
under Liotard, 1949-51, who established an astro-
nomical control station on the islet, and so named
because the rocky summit at the SE. end resembles
a lion’s head.
LION SOUND: small passage on the W. side of
Lion Island, in the shape of an embayment in the
SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°39’S., 63°09’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
under De Gerlache. The name appears on a map
based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the
Discovery. Named after adjacent Lion Island.
LIONS RUMP, CAPE: conspicuous headland
forming the W. side of the entrance to King George
Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°08’S., 58°06’W. Charted and named during
1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Not
adopted: Cape Lion’s Rump.
LIOTARD, MOUNT: conspicuous ice-covered
peak, about 7,300 ft. in el., standing 5 mi. SSE. of
Mt. Gaudry and 6 mi. NNE. of Mt. Ditte in the SE.
part of Adelaide I.; in 67°37’S., 68°34’W. Disc. and
first surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot.
Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named by
them for André F. Liotard, French observer with
FIDS in 1947-48 and leader of the French Antarctic
Expedition to Adélie Coast, 1949-51.
LIOTARD GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi.
wide and 6 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the con-
tinental ice and terminating in a small tongue
about 4 mi. W. of Héléne It., the W. extremity of
Géologie Arch., on Adélie Coast; in about 66°37’S.,
139°32’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the
US-ACAN for André-Frank Liotard, leader of the
FrAE, 1949-51, whose group completed the initial
survey of the coastal features as far westward as
this glacier. Liotard previously served as observer
on the John Biscoe during the 1947-48 relief and
establishment of FIDS meteorological bases, and
as leader of the FrAE, 1948-49, which was unable
to penetrate the pack ice off Adélie Coast. Not
adopted: Ebba Glacier.
LIPPMANN ISLET: conical snow-capped islet,
about 2 mi. N. of the W. end of Lahille I. and 5 mi.
NW. of Nunez Pt., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°30’S., 64°26’W. Disc. by the FrAE under
Charcot, 1903-5, who named it for Gabriel Lipp-
mann, French physicist and Nobel Prize winner
in 1908.
LISTER, MOUNT: massive mountain terminat-
ing in a sharp peak about 13,350 ft. in el., in the
Royal Society Range, W. of McMurdo Sound, along
the W. shore of Ross Sea; in about 78°05’S.,
163°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott in
January 1902, and named for Lord Joseph Lister,
Pres. of the Royal Soc., 1895-1900.
LITTLE, CAPE: cape forming the S. side of the
entrance to Wright Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 74°05’S., 61°03’W. Probably seen from
the air by members of the USAS who photographed
Wright Inlet in December 1940. Photographed
from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne,
194
who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from
the ground. Named by Ronne for Delbert M. Little,
Asst. Chief for Operations, U. S. Weather Bureau,
who arranged the program for sending weather re-
ports from the RARE. Not adopted: Cape Kasson.
LITTLE AMERICA: the base used by the five
U. S. expeditions led by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd,
USN (Ret.). Little America I. the base used by the
ByrdAE, 1929-30, and Little America II, the new
base built by the Byrd AE, 1933-35, were established
about 1 mi. inside Ver-sur-Mer Inlet, Bay of Whales,
about 80 ft. above sea level on the Ross Ice Shelf;
in about 78°40’S., 164°03’W. Little America III,
also known as West Base of the USAS, 1939-41,
was established about 5 mi. NE. on the E. side of
the Bay of Whales; in about 78°35’S., 163°52’W.
Little America IV, the base used by the central
task force of USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, was estab-
lished about 2 mi. NNW. of the USAS base; in about
78°33’S., 163°56’W. The latter base was destroyed
by calving of the front of Ross Ice Shelf during the
1948-55 period and was reported non-existent in
January 1955. Little America V, the main base of
USN Operation Deepfreeze, 1955-56, was estab-
lished about 30 mi. NE. at Kainan Bay; in about
78°14’S., 161°50’W.
Little Bucht: see Doris Bay; Saint Andrews Bay.
Little Glacier: see Kelsey Glacier.
LITTLE JASON LAGOON: an almost circular
lagoon, about 0.4 mi. in diameter, lying at the head
of Jason Hbr. to which it is connected by a narrow
cut, in Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in
54°11’S., 36°36’W. The name Little Jason was in
use at South Georgia prior to 1920. The feature
was surveyed in 1929 by DI personnel, who named
it Nogood Lagoon because a motor boat could not
get through the entrance. The SGS, 1951-52, re-
ported that the feature is still known locally as
Little Jason or (in Norwegian) “Lille Jason.” In
order to indicate the nature of the feature, and
at the same time to conform with local usage, the
name Little Jason Lagoon is approved. Not
adopted: Lille Jason [Norwegian)], Little Jason,
Nogood Lagoon.
LITTLE MOLTKE HARBOR: small bay, entered
between Pirner Pt. and the ice cliffs of Ross GL.,
lying 1 mi. S. of Moltke Harbor in the W. side of
Royal Bay, South Georgia; in 54°32’S., 36°05’W.
First surveyed by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schra-
der. The name Little Moltke, derived from the
nearby Moltke Harbor, is used for this feature by
the sealers in South Georgia. The full name,
Little Moltke Harbor, is approved in order to indi-
cate the nature of the feature. Not adopted: Little
Moltke.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
LITTLE RAZORBACK ISLAND: smallest and
easternmost of the Dellbridge Is., lying in Erebus
Bay off the W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°40’S.,
166°31’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4,
and so named because of its size and similarity to
Big Razorback I., which lies about 0.5 mi. south-
southwest. Not adopted: Small Razorback Island.
LITTLE THUMB: small isolated rock tower,
about 2,700 ft. in el., standing close S. of The Spire
at the NW. end of the Blackwall Mtns., on the S.
side of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°19’S.,
66°53’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill. It was climbed on Jan. 22, 1948 by
members of RARE and FIDS, who used variations
of this name in referring to the feature. It was
resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. Not adopted:
Neny Fjord Thumb, The Thumb, Thumb.
LIVELY, CAPE: cape forming the SW. extremity
of Renaud I. in the Biscoe Is.; in 65°49’S., 66°11’W.
The Biscoe Is. were disc. in February 1832 by a Br.
exp. under John Biscoe, and were first roughly sur-
veyed by the FrAE, 1903-5, and FrAE, 1908-10,
both under Charcot. Renaud I. was again roughly
surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill.
The cape was named in 1954 by the Br—APC after
the cutter Lively, one of the two vessels of Biscoe’s
1830-32 expedition.
LIV GLACIER: steep glacier about 45 mi. long,
flowing N. from the polar plateau along the W. side
of the Duncan Mtns. to the Ross Ice Shelf; in
about 84°55’S., 167°30’W. Disc. in November 1911
by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, who named it for
the daughter of Dr. Fridtjof Nansen. Not adopted:
Liv’s Glacier.
LIVINGSTON ISLAND: island about 37 mi. long
and from 5 to 19 mi. wide, lying between Green-
wich and Snow Islands in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°35’S., 60°30’W. This island was known
to sealers as early as 1820, and the name Livingston
has been well established in international usage for
over 100 years. Not adopted: Friesland Island,
Livingston’s Island, Smiths Island, Smolensk
Island.
LIZARD HILL: narrow, curving rock ridge, about
1,300 ft. in el. about 6 mi. SSE. of the head of Hope
Bay and 1 mi. E. of Ridge Peak, at the NE. end of
Palmer Pen.; in 63°31’S., 57°01’W. * Probably first
seen by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold.
First charted in 1946 by the FIDS, who applied
the name.
LIZARD ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long, in a
NW.-SE. direction, and 0.5 mi. wide, paralleling
the NE. shore of Bigo Bay, from which it is sepa-
rated by a channel about 0.5 mi. wide, along the
195
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°41’S., 64°26’W.
Disc. by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who so
named it because of its shape.
LIZARDS FOOT: rocky spur about 2,400 ft. in el.,
forming the E. end of the snow-covered ridge de-
scending from Mt. Evans along the S. side of Deben-
ham Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 177°11’S.,
163°00’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Lizard’s Foot.
LLOYD, CAPE: cape which forms the N. tip of
Clarence I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about
60°59’S., 54°01’W. The name Lloyd’s Promontory
appears on early charts of the 1821-25 period, but
in more recent years the feature has become inter-
nationally known as Cape Lloyd. Not adopted:
Cape Lloyds, Lloyd’s Land, Lloyds Promontory,
Lloyd’s Promontory.
LLOYD, MOUNT: mountain about 9,900 ft. in el.,
in the Queen Alexandra Range, rising about 12 mi.
W. of Mt. Tripp approximately midway between
Shackleton Inlet and Beardmore Gl., on the W.
side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°09’S., 165°12’E.
Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton,
1907-9.
Lloyds Island: see Rugged Island.
Lloyd’s Land; Lloyds Promontory: see Lloyd,
Cape. F
LOCKHART, MOUNT: prominent northerly pro-
jection from the main massif of the Fosdick Mtns.,
in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in
about 76°28’S., 145°06’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on
a flight on Dec. 5, 1929. Named for Ernest E.
Lockhart, physiologist at the West Base of the
USAS and member of the, Edsel Ford Mountains
Biological Party which visited this area in 1940.
LOCKLEY POINT: low, ice-covered point on the
NW. side of Wiencke I., about 1 mi. NE. of Noble
Peak, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°23’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache in 1898.
It was resighted and charted by the FIDS in 1944,
and named for Lt. J. G. Lockley, RNVR, base
leader, biologist, and meteorologist at Port Lock-
roy in 1945.
LOCKROY, PORT: harbor about 0.5 mi. long
and wide, entered between Flag Pt. and Lécuyer
Pt. on the W. side of Wiencke I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the FrAE
under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for
Edouard Lockroy, French politician and V. Pres.
of the Chamber of Deputies, who assisted Charcot
in obtaining government support for the expe-
dition.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
LOCKYER ISLAND: island about 5 mi. long and
3 mi. wide, lying off the S. shore of James Ross I.
in the SW. entrance to Admiralty Sound; in
64°27’'S., 57°36’W. It was named Cape Lockyer
by Capt. James Clark Ross on Jan. 7, 1843 at the
request of Capt. Francis R. M. Crozier, in honor
of the latter’s friend Capt. Nicholas Lockyer, RN.
The cape was proven to be an: island by the
SwedAE under Nordenskjéld in 1902.
LODGE ROCK: low, snow-capped rock, less than
100 ft. in el., between Barn Rock and Hayrick It.
in the Terra Firma Is., off the W. coast of Palmer
Penn.; in 68°42’S., 67°32’W. The Terra Firma Is.
were first visited and surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. This rock was surveyed in
1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because
a low ledge onto which sledges could be driven
provided lodgment clear of the sea ice pressure
area.
LOESENER PLATFORM: fiat-topped mountain
platform lying N. of the Preuschoff Range and W.
of the Gablenz Range, in New Schwabenland; in
about 71°50’S., 4°00’E. Disc. by the GerAE under
Filchner, 1938-39, and named for Kurt Loesener,
airplane mechanic on the Boreas, one of the flying
boats used by the expedition.
LOLA, MOUNT: peak about 560 ft. in el., which
surmounts Point Lola at the E. side of the entrance
to Uruguay Cove, on the N. coast of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°43’W. The
name appears on an Argentine Govt. chart of 1930,
based upon surveys by two Argentine naval officers,
I. Espindola in the Uruguay in 1915 and A. Rod-
riguez in the Primero de Mayo in 1930.
LOLA, POINT: point forming the E. side of
the entrance to Uruguay Cove, on the N. coast of
Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
44°43’W. The name appears on an Argentine
Govt. chart of 1930, based upon surveys by two
Argentine naval officers, I. Espindola in the Uru-
guay in 1915 and A. Rodriguez in the Primero
de Mayo in 1930.
LONELY ISLAND: islet lying 1 mi. ENE. of
Cape Paryadin, along the S. coast and near the
W. end of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 38°01’W.
Charted and named by DI personnel during sur-
veys of South Georgia in 1926-30.
LONE ROCK: isolated rock about 1.25 mi. S.
of the E. end of Nelson I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°20’S., 58°51’W. Charted by DI personnel
on the Discovery II in 1935, and given this descrip-
tive name.
196
LONE ROCK: low, isolated rock about 50 yards
long, lying about 4 mi. N. of Cape Gage, James
Ross I., on the W. margin of Erebus and Terror
Gulf; in 64°06’S., 57°03’W. Charted by the FIDS
in 1945, and so named by the Br—APC because of
its small size and complete isolation.
LONG, MOUNT: rocky peak protruding above
what appears to be an ice-covered mountain sys-
tem extending in an E.—W. direction close SE.
of the head of Vincennes Bay, on Budd Coast; in
about 67°12’S., 110°30’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. This
peak is estimated to rise to about 6,500 ft. in el.,
though compilation of this immediate area was
greatly handicapped by dense cloud conditions dur-
ing the February 1947 flights in this area. Named
by the US-ACAN for Lt. Richard J. Long, USN,
pilot with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted
in operations resulting in the establishment of
astronomical control stations along the coast from
Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast.
LONGHURST, MOUNT: mountain about 7,700
ft. in el. in the Britannia Range, highest summit
of a long ridge of mountains on the SW. side of
the Cape Murray depression, on the W. side of
Ross Ice Shelf, in about 79°20’S., 157°15’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named
it for Cyril Longhurst, secretary of the expedition.
LONGING, CAPE: rocky cape forming the S.
end of a large ice-covered promontory which marks
the W. side of the S. entrance to Prince Gustav
Chan., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°33’S.,
58°50’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Norden-
skjold in 1902, and so named by him because from
the position of his winter hut on Snow Hill I. the
cape lay in the direction of his “land of longing”
which he was anxious to explore. Not adopted:
Langstans Udde [Swedish].
LONG ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long, in a
NE.-SW. direction, and 0.5 mi. wide, lying in
Prince Gustav Chan. about 2 mi. off the SE. coast
of Louis Philippe Pen. and opposite the mouth of
East Russell Gl.; in 63°46’S., 58°12’W. Disc. and
named by the FIDS in 1945. The name is descrip-
tive.
LONGLOW ROCK: rock about 1.5 mi. SSW. of
Borley Pt., about 0.5 mi. off the W. shore of Mon-
tagu I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°24’S.,
26°29’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery ITI.
LONG POINT: point forming the W. side of
the entrance to Godthul, a bay along the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°18’W. Charted
in 1928 by a Nor. exp. under Horntvedt. The name
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
appears to have been applied by DI personnel who
recharted this area in 1929.
LONGRIDGE HEAD: headland, about 1,500 ft.
in el., marking the S. end of a small coastal ridge
which extends 3 mi. northward, standing 5 mi. N.
of Cape Saens Pena on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°28’S., 67°38’W. First sighted by mem-
bers of the FrAE under Charcot who roughly
charted this area in 1909. The name is descrip-
tive and was applied by the FIDS who surveyed
the headland in 1948.
LONG ROCK: rock lying in Morton Str., about
3 mi. N. of the E. end of Snow I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°39’S., 61°15°W. Named by DI
personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the
intricate passage between Snow and Livingston
Islands in 1930-31.
Long Sound: see Lang Sound.
LONGSTAFF, MOUNT: mountain with twin
peaks, about 10,300 ft. in el., in the Queen Alex-
andra Range, standing about 30 mi. SSE. of the
mouth of Shackleton Inlet, and about 12 mi. N.
of Mt. Lloyd, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf;
in about 82°58’S., 165°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE
under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Llewellyn
Wood Longstafi, principal contributor to the exp.
This was the most southerly high peak seen by
Scott on his trip toward the South Pole and for
this reason was chosen to commemorate the man
whose generous donations made the exp. possible.
LOOKOUT, CAPE: steep bluff about 800 ft. in
el., marking the SE. extremity of Elephant I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°18’S., 55°16’W.
The name appears on a map of 1822 by Capt.
George Powell, a British sealer, and is now estab-
lished international usage.
Loqui, Cap: see Garcia, Cape.
LOQUI POINT: point which marks the S. side
of the entrance to Barilari Bay, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°55’S., 64°55’W. This fea-
ture was first seen, roughly surveyed and named
“Cap Garcia” by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot.
At the same time Charcot gave the name “Cap
Loqui” to the N. cape of Barilari Bay, after Cap-
tain Loqui of the Argentine Navy. The maps of
Charcot’s second expedition to this area, the FrAE
of 1908-10, showed “Cap Garcia” as the N. cape
of Barilari Bay, and the name Cape Garcia (q.v.)
has since become established in that position and
accepted by the US-ACAN. Charcot did not use
the name “Cap Loqui” on the maps of the FrAE,
1908-10, and with his shifting of the name Cape
Garcia, this south entrance point to Barilari Bay
197
has remained unnamed. For the sake of historical
continuity, Charcot’s “Cap Loqui” has been altered
and accepted for this feature. Not adopted: Cap
Garcia [French].
LOUBAT POINT: point forming the N. side of
the entrance to Deloncle Bay, fronting on Lemaire
Chan. opposite Booth I., on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°06’S., 63°53’W. Probably first seen by
the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. It was
resighted and charted by the FrAE under Charcot,
1903-5, and named by him for a Monsieur De
Loubat. Not adopted: Cape De Loubat, Cape
Loubat.
LOUBET COAST: that portion of the W. coast of
Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Bellue, in
66°20’S., 65°59’W., to the head of Bourgeois Fjord,
in 67°31’S., 66°32’W. This coast was explored, in
January 1905 by the FrAE under Charcot, who
named it for Emile Loubet, then Pres. of France.
Not adopted: Loubet Land.
Loubet Land: see Loubet Coast.
Loubet Strait: see Gullet, The.
LOUISE, MOUNT: peak about 2,100 ft. in el.,
standing about 1 mi. N. of Mt. Gourdon on Booth L.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°00’W.
First charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5,
and named by him for the sister of Ernest Gourdon,
geologist of the expedition. Not adopted: Louise
Peak.
LOUISE ISLET: ice-capped islet about 0.25 mi. in
diameter, lying about 1 mi. E. of Cape Anna in the
SW. side of the entrance to Wilhelmina Bay, along
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°36’S., 62°23’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under Lt. Adrien de
Gerlache, and named by him for his sister. Not
adopted: Louise Island.
Louis McHenry Howe, Mount: see Howe, Mount.
Louis Philippe Coast; Louis Philippe Land: see
Louis Philippe Peninsula.
LOUIS PHILIPPE PENINSULA: the extreme
NE. portion of Palmer Pen., extending NE. for
about 80 mi. from a line connecting Cape Kater
and Cape Longing; centering in about 63°40’S.,
58°30’W. The name Louis Philippe was given by
Capt. Dumont D’Urville in 1838 for King Louis
Philippe of France. Not adopted: Louis Philippe
Coast, Louis Philippe Land, Trinity Peninsula.
LOWELL THOMAS MOUNTAINS: mountains
estimated to be about 9,500 ft. in el., standing SW.
of Sweeney Mtns. and rising above Joerg Plateau,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in about 76°30’S., 70°45’W. Disc. by the RARE
under Ronne, 1947-48, who named these moun-
tains for Lowell Thomas, a supporter of the ex-
pedition.
Lower Ferrar Glacier: see Ferrar Glacier.
LOW HEAD, CAPE: cape about 1.75 mi. SSW.
of Cape Lions Rump, the W. side of the entrance
to King George Bay, on King George I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°08’W. Charted
and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II.
LOW ISLAND: low island about 9 mi. long and
about 5 mi. wide, lying about 17 mi. SSE. of Smith
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°17’S., 62°09’W.
So named because of its low elevation. This island
was known to sealers as early as 1820, and the
name Low has been well established in interna-
tional usage for over 100 years. Not adopted:
Jameson Island, Jamesons Island.
LOW POINT: low point marking the NW. ex-
tremity of Vindication I., South Sandwich Is.; in
57°04/S., 26°45’°W. The point was named by DI
personnel following their survey in 1930.
Low Point: see Daisy Point; Kikhaylov Point;
Pacific Point.
LOW ROCK: low rock surrounded by foul
ground, lying at the E. side of the S. entrance
to Fildes Str., about 1 mi. off the S. end of King
George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°16’S.,
58°377W. An unnamed rock in essentially this
position appears on a chart by David Ferguson,
Scottish geologist aboard the whaler Hanka in
these waters in 1913-14. Low Rock was accurately
charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in
1935 and 1937.
Low Rock: see Bucentaur Rock.
LOW ROCK POINT: point about 4 mi. SW. of
Cape North, near the W. end of the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°50’W. Charted by
DI personnel in 1926-30, and so named because a
low rock lies off the point.
LUBBOCK, MOUNT: high peak standing E. of
Mt. Phillips in northern Victoria Land; in about
73°08’S., 167°30’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a
Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Sir John
Lubbock, treasurer of the Royal Society.
LUCAS GLACIER: glacier flowing in a N. direc-
tion to the S. side of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia,
close W. of Luck Pt.; in 54°04’S., 37°19’W. Charted
in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, Amer-
198
ican naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who named
it for Frederic A. Lucas, Dir. of the American
Museum of Natural History at that time.
LUCK POINT: point at the W. side of the en-
trance to Sea Leopard Fjord, in the Bay of Isles,
South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°17’W. The name
appears to have been first used by DI personnel
who charted this point during 1929-30.
Lucy, Mount: see Henry Lucy, Mount.
Luigi de Savoie, Pic: see Luigi di Savoia Peak.
LUIGI DI SAVOIA PEAK: peak about 4,600 ft.
in el., at the NE. end of Sierra Du Fief, a mountain
range in the SW. part of Wiencke I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°51’S., 63°26’W. Disc. by the BelgAE
under De Gerlache in 1898, and scaled by mem-
bers of the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Named
by Charcot for Luigi di Savoia, Duke of the
Abruzzi. Not adopted: Pic Luigi de Savoie
[French].
LUISA BAY: small bay lying between Cape
Vakop and Mt. Skittle on the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°23’S., 36°11’W. Surveyed by the
SGS, 1951-52, and named by the Br—APC after
the Luisa, one of the vessels of the Compania Ar-
gentina de Pesca which participated in establish-
ing the first permanent whaling station at
Grytviken, South Georgia, in 1904; now a hulk in
King Edward Cove.
LUITPOLD COAST: that portion of the coast of
Coats Land extending from about 29°W. to 37°W.,
marked by an unbroken ice cliff from 30 to 100
ft. in el. Disc. by the GerAE under Filchner,
1911-12, and named for Prince Regent Luitpold
of Bavaria. Not adopted: Leopold Coast, Luitpold
Land, Prince-Regent Luitpold Land, Prinzregent
Luitpold Land [German].
Luitpold Land: see Luitpold Coast.
LUKE GLACIER: glacier, more than 7 mi. long,
flowing NW. into the SE. corner of Leroux Bay,
on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°41’S.,
64°08’W. ‘This glacier was first sighted and
roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char-
cot. It was resurveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE
under Rymill, and later named for George Lawson
Johnston, 1st Baron Luke of Pavenham, Chairman
of Messrs. Bovril Ltd., who contributed toward
the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37.
LUMIERE PEAK: peak about 3,400 ft. in el., at
the SE. end of the peninsula terminating in Cape
Tuxen, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°19’S.,
64°02’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
and named by him, probably for Louis Lumiere,
leader in photographic research and development
in France at that time. Not adopted: Lumiere
Peak.
LUMUS REEF: reef about 7 mi. WNW. of
Betbeder Islets and some 29 mi. W. of Cape Tuxen,
lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S.,
65°18’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under
Rymill, 1934-37.
LUPA, MOUNT: flat-topped, ice-covered moun-
tain, more than 5,500 ft. in el., standing between
Romulus Gl. and Martin Gl. close ESE. of Black
Thumb Mtn. and 5 mi. E. of the Head of Rymill
Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°27’S.,
66°43’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by
the FIDS who applied the name. This mountain
lies near the heads of Romulus and Remus Gla-
ciers, and the name derives from the mythological
story of the she-wolf which fed these twins after
they had been thrown into the Tiber.
Lurabee Channel: see Lurabee Glacier.
LURABEE GLACIER: glacier flowing NE. be-
tween Scripps Ridge and Finley Ridge with Cape
Walcott at its N. portal, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 69°12’S., 63°35’W. This glacier, which is
a distributary of Bingham Gl., was disc. by Sir
Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928 on his pioneer
Antarctic flight. He named it Lurabee Channel
for Lurabee Shreck of San Francisco, in recog-
nition of her aid in procuring equipment for this
and his earlier Arctic flight, and for her editorial
assistance on his book Flying the Arctic. Not
adopted: Lurabee Channel.
LUSSICH COVE: cove at the SE. side of Martel
Inlet, in Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°05’S., 58°21’W. Charted
by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named
by him for Antonio Lussich of Montevideo, who
was of assistance to the expedition.
Liittich Island: see Liége Island.
LUTZOW-HOLM BAY: large bay, about 130 mi.
wide, lying between Riiser-Larsen Pen. and the
W. end of Prince Olav Coast; centering near
68°50’S., 37°30’E. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under
Isachsen and Riiser-Larsen, 1930-31, in two aerial
flights on Feb. 21 and 23, 1931. Named by Bjarne
Aagaard in 1934 for Cdr. Finn Lutzow-Holm, pilot
with the Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen in 1929-30.
LUZ RANGE: prominent N.-S. trending range
about 25 mi. long and 9,200 ft. in el., in the Muhlig-
Hofmann Mtns., projecting from the intermediate
199
icecap level about 15 mi. N. of the edge of the
polar plateau in New Schwabenland; in about
72°00’S., 5°50’E. Disc. by the GerAE under
Filchner, 1938-39, and named for the commercial
director of the German Lufthansa Corporation.
LYALL ISLANDS: group of small islands lying
NW. of Cape Moore, off the N. coast of Victoria
Land; in about 70°45’S., 167°20’E. Disc. in
1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named for David
Lyall, asst. surgeon on the exp. ship Terror.
LYELL GLACIER: glacier flowing in a N. di-
rection to a small bay close E. of Mercer Bay, at
the SW. end of Cumberland West Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°38’W. Disc. by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, who named
it for Sir Charles Lyell (1797-1875), eminent
British geologist.
LYNCH ISLET: islet lying 1.5 mi. E. of Cape
Vik in the E. part of Marshall Bay, off the S. coast
of Coronation I. in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°40’S., 45°38’W. It was roughly charted in
1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, a Norwegian whaling
captain, and was surveyed in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS and
named by them for Thomas B. Lynch, an American
sealer who visited the South Orkney Is. in the
schooner Express in 1880.
LYSTAD BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide which in-
dents the W. side of Horseshoe I., in the NE. part
of Marguerite Bay; in 67°51’S., 67°17W. First
surveyed in 1936-37 by the BGLE under Rymill.
The bay was visited by the U.S.M.S. North Star
and U.S.S. Bear of the USAS in 1940. The name
was proposed by the US-ACAN for Capt. Isak
Lystad of the North Star. Not adopted: Horseshoe
Bay, Horseshoe Island Cove.
LYTTELTON, CAPE: bold cape which forms the
S. side of the entrance to Shackleton Inlet, along
the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°35’S.,
164°30’E. Disc. in December 1902 by the BrNAE
under Scott. The exp. ship Discovery started on
the last lap of its journey S. from Lyttelton, New
Zealand, where very generous assistance was given
the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Lyttleton.
LYTTELTON RIDGE: dark, jagged ridge about
1,400 ft. in el., extending for about 5 mi. in a SSE.
direction along the W. side of Churchill Pen., on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°22’S., 63°08’W.
Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for
Rt. Hon. Oliver Lyttelton, M. P., British Minister
of Production and member of the War Cabinet.
Photographed from the air during 1947 by the
RARE under Ronne. Not adopted: Antarctic
Tetons.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Lyttleton, Cape: see Lyttelton, Cape.
MABEL, CAPE: cape forming the N. tip of Pirie
Pen. on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 44°40’W. Probably first
sighted by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell, who
examined the N. coast of Laurie I. in 1823. It was
charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who
named it for Mrs. J. H. Harvey Pirie, wife of the
surgeon-geologist to the expedition.
MABEL ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. NW. of Cape
Mabel, off the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 44°42’W. Charted in 1933
by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it
after nearby Cape Mabel.
Mabelle Sidley, Mount: see Sidley, Mount.
MABUS POINT: ice-covered point marked by
four prominent rock outcrops along its W. side,
forming the E. side of the entrance to McDonald
Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°29’S.,
93°18’E. Charted by the AAE under Mawson,
1911-14. Named by the US—-ACAN for Lt. Cdr.
Howard W. Mabus, USN, executive officer of the
icebreaker U.S.S. Edisto, who was instrumental in
the close support, in view of heavy pack ice condi-
tions, that the Edisto was able to render the USN
Op. Wml. parties in establishing astronomical con-
trol stations along Queen Mary Coast during the
1947-48 summer season.
MacDONALD, CAPE: headland about 1,400 ft.
in el., forming the S. side of the entrance to Odom
Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°32’S.,
61°11’W. Disc. by members of the USAS who ex-
plored this area by land and from the air in 1940.
Named for J. E. MacDonald, field representative
and secretary of the USAS.
MACDOUGAL BAY: small bay lying between
Capes Geddes and Valavielle along the N. coast of
Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is., in 60°42’S.,
44°33’W. Probably first sighted by a Br. sealing
exp. under Weddell, who explored the N. coast of
Laurie I. in 1823. Charted by the ScotNAE,
1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for J. Mac-
dougal, third mate of the exp. ship Scotia.
MacFerlane, Détroit de: see McFarlane Strait.
MACFIE SOUND: passage about 1 mi. wide at
its narrowest point, extending in a NW.-SE. direc-
tion between Islay and the Sheehan Is. on the N.
and Bertha I. on the S., off Mac-Robertson Coast
just E. of William Scoresby Bay; in about 67°22’S.,
59°47’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby, and named by them for
Lt. A. F. Macfie, RNR, who prepared the maps of
200
the expedition.
wegian].
Not adopted: Homresund [Nor-
MACKAY, CAPE: cape forming the SE. tip of
Ross I.; in about 77°43’S., 168°30’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for
Capt. Harry MacKay, commander of the Terra
Nova, one of the relief ships for the expedition.
Not adopted: Cape Mackay.
MACKAY GLACIER: large glacier along the E.
coast of Victoria Land, descending from the inland
plateau to Granite Hbr.; in about 76°57’S., 162°30’E.
Disc. by the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton, who named it for Dr. Alistair
Forbes Mackay, a member of the party.
MACKAY GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue
about 6 mi. long and 2 mi. wide extending into
Granite Hbr. from the Mackay Glacier, along the
coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°58’S., 162°33’E.
First charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott.
The feature takes its name from Mackay Glacier
which was named by BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackle-
ton. Not adopted: Mackay Tongue.
MACKAY MOUNTAINS: prominent group of
peaks lying SE. of Boyd Gl., in the Edsel Ford
Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°30’S.,
143°05’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934, and named
for Clarence Mackay of the Postal Telegraph and
Mackay Radio Companies, who was a benefactor
of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Clarence
Mackay, Mount Clarence MacKay.
Mackay Tongue: see Mackay Glacier Tongue.
Mac Kellar, Fiord: see Mackellar Inlet.
MACKELLAR, MOUNT: peak about 9,900 ft. in
el., standing about 18 mi. N. of The Cloudmaker
at the W. side of Beardmore Gl., in the Queen Alex-
andra Range; in about 84°06’S., 168°15’E. Disc.
by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named
it for Campbell Mackellar of London, a supporter
of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Mac-
kethar.
MACKELLAR INLET: inlet forming the NW.
head of Admiralty Bay, at King George I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 58°28’W. Prob-
ably named by the FrAE under Charcot, who
charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909. Not
adopted: Fiord-Mac Kellar [French].
MACKELLAR ISLETS: group of about 30 rocks
and islets about 2 mi. in extent, lying N. and NW.
of Cape Denison in the center of Commonwealth
Bay, along George V Coast; in about 66°58’S.,
142°39’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Maw-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
son, who named the islets for C. D. Mackellar of
London, a patron of the expedition.
MACKENZIE BAY: large embayment between
Cape Darnley and the W. side of Amery Ice Shelf,
along Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°35’S.,
71°15’E. On Dec. 26, 1929 the BANZARE, under
Mawson, reached 66°57’S., 71°51’E. and saw land
ice miraged on the SW. horizon. In this same area
on Feb. 10, 1931, the BANZARE disc. a large ice-
free bay and made an airplane flight to sketch it.
They named it for K. N. MacKenzie, captain of the
exp. ship Discovery. On Feb. 5, 1931 the Norwegian
whaling ships Thorshavn and Thorshammer, un-
der Lars Christensen, were on the outskirts of this
area. The whale catcher Seksern reached this
area on Jan. 13, 1931 und on Feb. 13, 1931 the
Torlyn entered Thorshavn Bay in the S. part of
MacKenzie Bay. Not adopted: Mackenzie Bay,
Mackenzie Sea, Olav Prydz Bukt [Norwegian].
MACKENZIE PENINSULA: rocky peninsula
forming the W. end of Laurie I., in the South Ork-
ney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°48’W. First sighted and
roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer in 1821. It was accurately
charted by the ScotNAE under Dr. William S.
Bruce, 1902-4, who gave this peninsula the maiden
name of his wife.
Mackenzie Sea: see MacKenzie Bay; Prydz Bay.
Mackethar, Mount: see Mackellar, Mount.
MACKINTOSH, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape
forming the N. tip of Kemp Pen. and the E. side
of the entrance to Mason Inlet, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 72°53’S., 60°03’W. Probably first
seen by members of the USAS who photographed
a portion of Kemp Pen. while exploring this coast
from the air in December 1940. During 1947 the
cape was photographed by the RARE, who in con-
junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground.
Named by the FIDS for Neil A. Mackintosh, British
marine biologist and oceanographer, who since
1924 has been a member of the staff, and since
1936 Dir. of Research of the Discovery Investiga-
tions (now part of the National Inst. of Oceanog-
raphy).
MACKINTOSH, MOUNT: dark-appearing moun-
tain peak lying W. of Mt. Baxter and on the E. side
of Reeves Gl., in Victoria Land;.in about 74°20’S.,
162°15’E. Charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, who named it for a A. L. A. Mackin-
tosh, Second Officer on the exp. ship Nimrod.
MACKINTOSH COVE: small cove immediately
E. of Fraser Pt., along the N. coast of Laurie I., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°30’W.
424589 O -57 -14
201
Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce.
Named for Neil A. Mackintosh, then a member of
the Discovery Committee zoological staff, by DI
personnel on the Discovery II following their sur-
vey of the South Orkney Is. in 1933. Not adopted:
McIntosh Cove.
Macnab, Cape: see McNab, Cape.
MAC-ROBERTSON COAST: that portion of the
coast of Antarctica extending from William Scores-
by Bay, in about 59°35’S., to Cape Darnley on
Bjerkg Pen., in about 69°30’E. Named by the
BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, for MacPher-
son Robertson of Melbourne, patron of the expedi-
tion. Not adopted: MacRobertson Land, Mac-
Robertson Land.
MacRobertson Land: see Mac-Robertson Coast.
MADIGAN, NUNATAK: nunatak about 2,400 ft.
in el., about 10 mi. WSW. of the head of Watt Bay,
on George V Coast; in about 67°08’S., 143°22’E.
Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who
named it for Cecil T. Madigan, meteorologist with
the AAE Main Base.
MAGNET BAY: bay about 8 mi. wide which in-
dents the coast for about 3 mi., situated about 9
mi. WNW. of Cape Davis, along the coast of Enderby
Land; in about 66°25’S., 56°20’E. The BANZARE,
1929-31, under Mawson, originally gave the name
Magnet Bay to what appeared to be a larger bay
extending from Cape Davis to Cape Borley, after
the vessel Magnet, in which Peter Kemp first
sighted land in this vicinity in 1833. The recom-
mended application of this name is based on
subsequent exploration of this area by a Nor. exp.,
1936-37, under Christensen.
MAGNIER PEAKS: peaks about 3,600 ft. in el.
surmounting the narrow peninsula between Leroux
Bay and Bigo Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.,
in 65°40’S., 64°18’W. Disc. and named by the
FrAE, 1909-10, under Charcot. Not adopted:
Magnier Peak.
MAHONY, MOUNT: massive mountain, about
5,300 ft. in el., forming a buttress between the Cot-
ton and Miller Glaciers, in Victoria Land; in about
77°1V/S., 161°43’E. Charted and named by the
BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott.
MAIGNAN POINT: point marking the NE. end
of Cholet Islet and the W. side of the entrance to
Port Charcot, lying immediately N. of the NW. part
of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
about 65°03’S., 64°02’W. First charted by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Named by Charcot
for F. Maignan, a seaman of the exp. ship Francais
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
who lost his life in a ship accident shortly after
the expedition’s departure from Le Havre. Not
adopted: Cape Maignan.
MAIN ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and 1.5
mi. wide, which is the largest of the Willis Is., off
the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°16’W.
Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. It was
charted by DI personnel in the period 1926-30, and
so named because it is the principal island in the
group.
Mainland: see Coronation Island.
MAINSAIL ROCK: rock lying about 0.6 mi. SW.
of Spine It. in Sandefjord Bay, South Orkney Is.;
in 60°37’S., 46°03’W. It is easternmost of a chain
of three rocks trending in a NW.-SE. direction off
the SE. side of Monroe I. The rock was named by
DI personnel following their survey in 1933.
MAI POINT: point marking the E. side of the
entrance to Maiviken, a small bay in Cumberland
West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°30’W.
The point was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, un-
der Nordenskjéld. The name derives from associ-
ation with Maiviken, named by the SwedAE for
May Day, May 1, 1902, the day they entered the
bay.
MAITLAND GLACIER: glacier flowing along the
NW. flank of Mt. Hitchcock into the S. side of
Mobiloil Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
about 68°48’S., 65°15’W. This glacier may appear
indistinctly in an aerial photograph taken by Sir
Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, but
it was more clearly shown in aerial photographs
taken by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935 and the USAS
in 1940. Named by the Committee in 1952 for O.
Maitland Miller of the American Geographical Soc.,
who by utilizing Wilkins’ and Ellsworth’s photo-
graphs assisted in constructing the first recon-
naissance map of this area.
MAIVIKEN: cove indenting the N. end of the
promontory separating the E. and W. arms of
Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S.,
36°30’W. Charted by the SwedAH, 1901-4, under
Nordenskjold, and named after May Day, May 1,
1902, the day on which they entered the cove. Not
adopted: May Cove.
Mai Viken Glen: see Bore Valley.
MALING PEAK: peak, about 1,400 ft. in el.,
which is southernmost of two conspicuous peaks
situated about 0.5 mi. NW. of Cape Vik on the S.
coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in
60°40’S.,.45°42’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by
DI personnel. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS.
202
Named by the Br—APC for Derek H. Maling, FIDS
meteorologist at Signy I. in 1948 and 1949, who
made a survey triangulation of Signy I. and the S.
coast of Coronation Island.
MALLORY POINT: steep rocky point projecting
seaward from the coastal ice cliffs, midway along
the W. side of Vincennes Bay, on Knox Coast; in
about 66°55’S., 108°48’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for Ens. Charles W. Mal-
lory, USN, construction officer with USN Op. Wml.,
1947-48, who gave close support to the shore parties
which established astronomical control from Wil-
helm II Coast to Budd Coast.
MAMELON ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. long, ly-
ing about 11 mi. ENE. of Cape Northrop, off the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°19’S., 64°49’W.
Charted in 1947 by the FIDS and so named be-
cause of its resemblance to a small, rounded hill or
fort.
MANCHOT ISLET: low rocky islet lying in the
entrance to Port Martin, about 0.3 mi. N. of Cape
Margerie, off Adélie Coast; in 66°49’S., 141°24’E.
Photographed from the air by USN Op: Hip.,
1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard,
1949-51, and so named because a large Adélie pen-
guin rookery was located on the islet. Manchot is
the French word for penguin. Not adopted: Ile
des Manchots [French].
Manchots, Ile des: see Manchot Islet.
MANGIN, MOUNT: mountain about 6,700 ft. in
el., standing about 14 mi. SSW. of Mt. Bouvier, on
the E. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°25’S., 68°29’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and
named by him for Louis A. Mangin, noted French
botanist.
MANOURY ISLET: islet lying about 1.5 mi. S.
of Gand I. at the N. end of Schollaert Chan., in the ©
Palmer Arch., in 64°26’S., 62°50’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named for G.
Manoury, secretary of the expedition.
MANSFIELD POINT: point marking the E. side
of the entrance to Norway Bight, on the S. coast of
Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S.,
45°46’W. First surveyed by DI personnel in 1933.
Resurveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49. Named by
the Br—APC for Arthur W. Mansfield of the FIDS,
meteorologist at Grytviken, South Georgia, in 1951;
leader, meteorologist and biologist at Signy I. in
1952.
MARBLE POINT: rocky promontory of marble
lying about 4 mi. N. of Cape Bernacchi, in front of
the S. end of Wilson Piedmont Gl., in Victoria Land;
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in about 77°26’S., 163°48’E. First charted by the
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and so named be-
cause of the marble found there. Not adopted:
Marble Cape.
Marescot, Cape: see Marescot Ridge.
MARESCOT RIDGE: ridge comprised of numer-
ous ice-covered hills, the highest about 3,700 ft. in
el., extending in a NNE.-SSW. direction for about
4.5 mi., standing 11 mi. E. of Cape Roquemarel, on
the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°32’S.,
58°32’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under
D’Urville. D’Urville charted this feature as a cape,
which he named for Jacques Marescot Duthilleul,
an ensign on the exp. ship Astrolabe. The ridge
was charted by the FIDS in 1946. Not adopted:
Cape Marescot.
Margaret Bay: see Marguerite Bay.
Margaret Goodenough Glacier: see Goodenough
Glacier.
Margaret Wade, Mount: see Fitzsimmons, Mount.
MARGERIE, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape,
marked by prominent rock outcrops at its NW. ands
NE. ends, lying midway between Cape Mousse and
Lacroix Nunatak and bounded on the N. by nu-
merous rocky islets, on Adélie Coast; in 66°49’S.,
141°24’E. Charted by the AAE under Mawson,
1911-14, who named this feature for Emanuel de
Margerie, French geographer and geologist. Cape
Margerie served as the main base site for FrAE
parties under Liotard, in 1950-51, and Barré, in
1951-52, until fire destroyed the main buildings of
their base, known as Port Martin, in January 1952.
Not adopted: Cape de Margerie.
Margreaves Glacier: see Hargreaves Glacier.
MARGUERITE BAY: an extensive bay on the W.
side of Palmer Pen., which is bounded on the N.
by Adelaide I., and on the S. by Wordie Ice Shelf,
George VI Sound, and Alexander I Island; centered
in about 68°30’S., 68°30’W. Disc. in 1909 by the
FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Charcot, who named the
bay for his wife. Not adopted: Margaret Bay.
MARIAN COVE: cove indenting the W. side of
King George I. about midway between Collins
Hbr. and Potter Cove, in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°12’S., 58°46’W. The name seems to have been
first used by the Scottish geologist David Ferguson
in a 1921 report based upon his investigations of
King George I. in 1913-14,.but may reflect an
earlier naming by whalers. Not adopted: Marion
Cove.
203
Marie, Pointe: see Marie Island.
MARIE BYRD LAND: that portion of Antarctica
lying E. of Ross Ice Shelf and Ross Sea and S. of
the Pacific Ocean, extending eastward approxi-
mately to a line between the head of Ross Ice Shelf
and Eights Coast. The inclusion of the area hbe-
tween the Rockefeller Plateau and Hights Coast is
based upon the leading role of R. Adm. Richard E.
Byrd, USN, in all explorations of this area. Pend-
ing more definite mapping which may tmake it pos-
sible to draw boundaries along lines of natural de-
marcation, the E. limit of this land has been arbi-
trarily adopted. The name was originally applied
by Byrd in 1929, in honor of his wife, to the NW.
part of the area, the part that was explored in that
year.
MARIE ISLAND: irregular-shaped island, about
2 mi. long, lying immediately N. of Cape Evensen,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°07’S.,
65°46’°W. The name “Pointe Marie,” after the
elder sister of Dr. Jean B. Charcot, was given by
Charcot’s FrAE, 1903-5. It was used for a point
on the coast close N. of Cape Evensen, in about
66°07’S. After the FrAE, 1908-10, Charcot applied
the name “Pointe Marie” for the most southerly
tip of an island, ‘Ile Waldeck-Rousseou,” lying off
the coast in approximately the same latitude. In
correlating their surveys with those of Charcot,
the BGLE, 1934-37, identified ‘Ile Waldeck-
Rousseau” as Waldeck-Rousseau Peak on the main-
land of Palmer Pen. The most prominent feature
near this peak requiring a name is the island now
described. The name Marie Island for this feature
preserves Charcot’s naming in this locality. Not
adopted: Pointe Marie [French].
MARIHOLM: the highest and easternmost islet
in a small group which lies about 0.3 mi. S. of
Moe I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
45°42’W. The islet was named on a chart based
upon a running survey of the South Orkney Is. by
Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13. Not adopted:
Hariholm [Norwegian].
MARINA POINT: low rocky promontory which
forms the extreme NW. point of Galindez I. in the
Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°15’S., 64°16’W. First surveyed in 1935-36 by
the BGLE under Rymill. Named by members of
the BGLE for Princess Marina, now Duchess of
Kent, who was married in November 1934, while
the expedition ship Penofa was enroute to the
Argentine Is. The name did not appear on pub-
lished BGLE maps but since has become estab-
lished in usage.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
MARIN DARBEL BAY: large bay indenting the
W. coast of Palmer Pen. between Capes Bellue and
Rey; in 66°35’S., 65°55’W. It was disc. and roughly
charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who
gave it this name. The bay was further charted
in 1931 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and
by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not
adopted: Darbel Bay, Marin-Darbel Fiord.
Marin-Darbel Fiord: see Marin Darbel Bay.
MARION, MOUNT: mountain probably over
1,500 ft. in el., standing about 15 mi. WNW. of Mt.
Martine, on the N. coast of Charcot I., in about
69°49’S., 74°37’°W. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1910 by the
FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Charcot, and named by
him for his daughter, Marion. Not adopted:
Marion Mountain, Marion Peak.
Marion Cove: see Marian Cove.
MARIS NUNATAK: small coastal nunatak pro-
truding above the terminus of Rogers Gl., about
2.5 mi. ENE. of Whisnant Nunatak on Ingrid
Christensen Coast; in about 69°58’S., 72°33’E. De-
lineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March
1947, and named by him for R. L. Maris, air crew-
man on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this
area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°,
east longitude.
Mark, Mount: see Hawthorne, Mount.
MARKHAM, MOUNT: triple-peaked massif
about 15,100 ft. in el., standing prominently above
the surrounding lesser peaks and lying S. of
Shackleton Inlet, along the W. edge of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 82°59’S., 160°30’E. Disc. in De-
cember 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott. Named
for Sir Clements Markham who, as Pres. of the
Royal Geographical Soc., 1893-1905, planned the
exp. and chose Scott as its leader. Not adopted:
Markham Mountains.
MARKHAM BAY: bay about 16 mi. wide and
indenting 5 mi., lying between Ekelof Pt. and
Hamilton Pt. on the E. side of James Ross I.;
in 64°17’S., 57°18’W. Possibly first seen by a Br.
exp. under Ross, who explored this area in 1842-43.
First charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under
Nordenskjold, who named it for Sir Clements
Markham. Not adopted: Clements Markham Bay.
Markham Island: see Clements Markham Island.
MARKHAM ISLAND: high island with vertical
sides, about 1 mi. in diameter, lying S. of Oscar
I. and about 20 mi. W. of Cape Washington, along
the coast of Victoria Land; in about 174°46’S.,
204
164°21’E. Disc. in February 1900 by the BrAE
under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Sir
Clements Markham.
MARR, MOUNT: sharp dark peak about 5 mi.
SW. of Johnston Pk. in Enderby Land; in about
66°15’S., 52°21’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the
BANZARE under Mawson, and named for James
W.S. Marr, zoologist to the exp. who had also been
a member of a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1921-22.
MARR BAY: bay lying between Cape Valavielle
and Fraser Pt. along the N. coast of Laurie I., in
the South Orkney Is., in 60°42’S., 44°31’W. First
charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce.
Named for James W. S. Marr, member of the Dis-
covery Committee zoological staff, by personnel on
the Discovery II following their survey of the South
Orkney Is. in 1933.
MARR BLUFF: rock bluff, about 3,500 ft. in el.,
standing immediately N. of Wager GI. on the E.
coast of Alexander I Island; in 69°47’S., 69°20’W.
Surveyed by the FIDS in 1948 and named by them
for John E. Marr, English geologist and prof. of
geology at Cambridge Univ., 1917-30.
MARRET GLACIER: channel glacier about 4
mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing NE. from the con-
tinental ice to Adélie Coast, close E. of Cape
Robert; in about 66°26’S., 137°44’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Mario
Marret, leader of the FrAE, 1952-53, whose party
extended reconnaissance of the coastal features to
the W. side of Victor Bay. Marret previously
served with the 1948 French exp. to Greenland,
the unsuccessful FrAE venture to Antarctica in
1948-49, and as radio-operator and cine-photog-
rapher with the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51.
MARR ICE PIEDMONT: large ice piedmont
which covers western half of Anvers I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°33’S., 63°40’W. This feature
was presumably first seen by a Ger. exp. under
Dallmann, 1873-74, and was first roughly sur-
veyed by the FrAE, 1903-5, and FrAE 1908-10,
both under Charcot. It was named by the Br—APC
for James W. S. Marr, British marine biologist,
who was first commander of the FIDS, 1943-45,
and leader of the base at nearby Port Lockroy.
Marr was also a member of the BANZARE under
Mawson, 1929-31, and Shackleton’s expedition of
1921-22.
MARSDEN, MOUNT: peak about 2,100 ft. in el.,
standing about 4 mi. SSW. of Mt. Rivett, in the
Gustav Bull Mtns. on the Mac-Robertson Coast;
in about 67°52’S., 66°06’E. Early in January 1930,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the BANZARE under Mawson sighted land in this
area and made an aerial observation fight. The
exp. landed on nearby Scullin Monolith on Feb.
13, 1931 and named this peak, probably for Ernest
Marsden, Sec. of the Dept. of Scientific and Indus-
trial Research of New Zealand.
MARS GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island, about 4 mi. long and 2 mi.
wide, flowing S. into the ice shelf of George VI
Sound between Two-Step Cliffs and Phobos Ridge;
in 71°53’8., 68°24’°W. The coast in this vicinity
was first explored from the air and partially pho-
tographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935,
and was roughly surveyed from the ground in
1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This glacier
was first surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and was
named by them after the planet Mars.
MARSHALL BAY: semi-circular bay about 2 mi.
wide, lying between Capes Vik and Hansen along
the S. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney
Ts.; in 60°39’S., 45°39’W. The bay was roughly
charted in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian
whaling captain. Recharted in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, and named for Dr. E.
H. Marshall, surgeon and member of the Marine
Executive Staff of the Discovery Committee.
MARSHALL MOUNTAINS: group of mountains
about 10,000 ft. in el., standing on the W. side
of Beardmore Gl. between Berwick and Swinford
Glaciers, in the Queen Alexandra Range; in about
84°40’S., 165°20’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton, and named for Dr. Eric Mar-
shall, surgeon and cartographer to the expedition.
MARSHALL PEAK: peak about 4,000 ft. in el.
which is ice covered except for its rocky NE. side,
standing about 6 mi. NW. of the head of Palmer
Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°09’S.,
61°32’W. This coast was first explored in 1940
- by members of the USAS but the peak was first
charted by a joint party consisting of members of
the RARE and FIDS in 1947. Named by the FIDS
for Norman B. Marshall, zoologist at the FIDS
Hope Bay base in 1945-46.
MARSTON, MOUNT: whaleback-shaped moun-
tain about 3,900 ft. in el., standing along the N.
side of Mackay Gl. and overlooking Granite Hbr.
on the E., and Cleveland GI. on the W., in Victoria
Land; in about 76°55’/S., 162°16’E. First charted
by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who
named it for George E. Marston, artist with the
expedition. Not adopted: Whaleback.
Martel, Fiord: see Martel Inlet.
205
MARTEL INLET: inlet forming the NE. head
of Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 58°22’W. Probably
named by the FrAE under Charcot, who charted
Admiralty Bay in December 1909. Not adopted:
Fiord Martel [French].
Martello Rock: see Martello Tower.
MARTELLO TOWER: rock about 30 ft. in el.
lying in King George Bay about 2 mi. NNW. of
Cape Lions Rump, in the South Shetland Is.; in
about 62°05’S., 58°08’W. Charted during 1937
by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named
it after the fortified towers by that name. Not
adopted: Martello Rock.
MARTIN, MOUNT: mountain about 4,500 ft.
in el. with conspicuous rock exposures on its SE.
side, standing immediately N. of the head of
Anthony Gl. on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
69°40’S., 62°59’W. The mountain lies on the fringe
of the area explored by the BGLE in 1936, and
was photographed from the air by the USAS in
1940. During 1947 the mountain was photo-
graphed from the air by members of the RARE,
under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS
charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for
Orville Martin, electronics engineer who was of
assistance in planning and obtaining radio equip-
ment necessary for Ronne’s expedition.
MARTIN, POINT: point about 0.8 mi. NNW. of
Cape Burn Murdoch, on the SW. side of Scotia Bay,
southern Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°47’S., 44°41’W. Charted by the ScotNAE,
1902-4, under Bruce, and named for J. Martin,
able-bodied seaman on the exp. ship Scotia.
MARTIN, PORT: anchorage lying immediately
off Cape Margerie, at the end of Adélie Coast; in
66°49’S., 141°24’E. Disc. in 1950 by the FrAK
under Liotard, and named in conjuction with the
exp. base established on Cape Margerie. Named
for André-Paul (J. A.) Martin, second-in-command
of the exp., who died enroute to the Antarctic.
MARTINE, MOUNT: rugged massif with black
jagged peaks and steep slopes, about 2,000 ft. in
el., standing at the NE. corner of Charcot I.; in
about 69°55’S., 73°57’W. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1910
by the FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Carcot, and named
by him for his daughter, Martine. Not adopted:
Martin Mountain, Martine Mountain.
Martin Glacier: see East Balch Glacier.
MARTIN GLACIER: glacier, about 3 mi. wide
and 9 mi. long, which flows W. and then NW. from
the S. side of Mt. Lupa to the SE. corner of Ry-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
mill Bay where it joins the Bertrand Ice Piedmont,
on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°28’S.
66°55’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS
and named for James H. Martin, member of the
BANZARE under Mawson, 1929-31, and first mate
of the Penola during the BGLE, 1934-37.
MARTIN ISLANDS: group of small islands lying
close NE. of the Pitt Is., marking the NE. extrem-
ity of the Biscoe Is.; in 65°28’S., 65°18’W. Disc.
by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named
by him for Captain Martin, Argentine Navy.
Martin Mountain: see Martine, Mount.
MARTIN PENINSULA: ice-covered peninsula
about 20 mi. wide, projecting about 70 mi. N. into
Amundsen Sea from its mountainous base on the
Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about
74°20’S., 112°00’W. Photographed from the air
in February 1940 by the USAS, and later deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the US-ACAN
for Col. Lawrence Martin, USA (Ret.) American
geographer and authority on the history of Ant-
arctic exploration.
MARTIN REEF: isolated rock, lying awash,
about 9 mi. N. and slightly to the W. of Cape
Fletcher, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about
67°34’S., 65°33’E. This reef was apparently en-
countered by Capt. Carl Sj6vold in the Norwegian
whale catcher Bouvet III in January 1931, and by
the BANZARE under Mawson in February 1931.
MARTINS HEAD: prominent headland about
900 ft. in el. between King George Bay and Ad-
miralty Bay, on the S. coast of King George I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 52°13’W. The
name dates back to at least 1820, when it was de-
scribed by Edward Bransfield, Master, RN, dur-
ing his exploration of these islands. Not adopted:
Martin’s Head.
MARUJUPU PEAK: conspicuous nunatak stand-
ing above the main flow of Ochs Gl., about 2 mi. W.
of Mt. Ferranto which marks the SW. end of the
Fosdick Mtns., in Marie Byrd Land; in about
76°29/S., 145°35’W. Disc. and so named by R.
Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight of Dec. 5, 1929.
Marujupu combines the letters from the names
of three daughters and a son of Mr. and Mrs.
Arthur Sulzberger. The daughters are Marian,
Ruth, and Judy; Punch is the nickname of son
Arthur. The Sulzbergers were patrons of the ex-
pedition.
Mary Louise Ulmer, Mount; Mary Ulmer, Mount:
see Ulmer, Mount.
206
MASCART, CAPE: cape forming the NE. tip of
Adelaide I., in 66°43’S., 67°42’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for Eleuthére Mascart, French physicist and Dir.
of the Bureau Central Météorologique.
MASON INLET: ice-filled inlet which recedes
about 15 mi. SW. between Cape Mackintosh and
the coastline south of Cape Herdman, along the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°57’S., 60°25’W. First
seen and photographed from the air in December
1940 by members of the USAS. During 1947 the
inlet was photographed from the air by the RARE,
who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from
the ground. Named by the FIDS for D. P. Mason,
their surveyor on the joint British-American seldge
journey during the charting of this coast in 1947.
Massif: for names beginning thus see under the
specific part of the name. For example, for Massif
Calais see Calais, Massif. (Massif is a French
word for ‘‘“mountain mass.”’)
MASSON ISLAND: ice-covered island about 15
mi. long and about 1,500 ft. in el., lying NW. of
Henderson I. within the area covered by Shackle-
ton Ice Shelf, off Queen Mary Coast; in about
66°11’S., 96°21’E. Disc. in February 1912 by the
AAE under Mawson, who named it for Prof. Sir
David Orme Masson of Melbourne, Australia, a
member of the AAE Advisory Committee. Not
adopted: Mission Island.
MASSON RANGE: high broken chain of moun-
tains, consisting of Nordkammen Crest, Mekam-
men Crest, and S¢rkammen Crest, forming a part
of the Framnes Mtns. on Mac-Robertson Coast.
Having several peaks over 3,000 ft. in el., the range
extends in a N.-S. direction about 12 mi.; centering
in about 67°50’S., 62°52’E. Disc. and charted by
the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, and named
for Prof. Sir David Orme Masson, a member of the
advisory committee for this exp. as well as the AAE,
1911-14, under Mawson.
Matha Bay: see Matha Strait.
MATHA STRAIT: strait lying between Adelaide
I. and the S. end of the Biscoe Is.; in 66°34’S.,
67°35’W. The strait takes its name from Matha
Bay, the name originally applied by Charcot, leader
of the FrAE, 1908-10, to the water feature as he
conceived it. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37,
recognizing that it is really a strait rather than a
bay, changed the name to Matha Strait. Named
for Lt. A. Matha, second-in-command of the FrAE,
1903-5, under Charcot. Not adopted: Matha Bay.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
MATHESON GLACIER: glacier about 11 mi.
long, situated about 3 mi. S. of Ashton Gl. and
flowing in an E. direction to the W. side of Lehrke
Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°47’S.,
62°00’W. First sighted by members of the USAS
who explored this coast by land and from the air
in December 1940. First charted by a joint party
consisting of members of the RARE and FIDS in
1947. Named by the FIDS for J. Matheson, a mem-
ber of the FIDS at the Port Lockroy and Hope Bay
bases, 1944-46.
MATHIEU ROCK: ice-free rock, lying midway
between Cape Bickerton and Rock X, at the E. side
of the entrance to Victor Bay, close off Adélie
Coast; in 66°20’S., 136°49’E. Photographed from
the air by USN Operation Highjump, 1946-47.
Charted by the FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, and
named for Claude Mathieu, French astronomer of
the 19th century.
Matin, Mount: see Peary, Mount.
MATTHES GLACIER: glacier about 9 mi. long,
flowing E. into Whirlwind Inlet between Demorest
and Chamberlin Glaciers, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°30’S., 65°38’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert
Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and photo-
graphed from the air by the USAS in 1940. Charted
by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Francois E.
Matthes, glaciologist and then chief geologist with
the U. S. Geological Survey.
Matthews Point: see Harrison Point.
MATTHEWS POINT: point forming the W. side
of the entrance to Undine Harbor, along the S.
coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in
54°02’S., 37°59’W. This point was charted in the
period 1926-30 by DI personnel and named for L.
Harrison Matthews, British zoologist, member of
the staff of the Discovery Investigations, 1924-35,
who worked at South Georgia in 1924-27.
MAUD BANK: submarine bank, 650 fathoms be-
low the surface, in the Atlantic Ocean about 300 mi.
N. of Princess Martha Coast; in about 65°00’S.,
2°35’E. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Isachsen in the
Norvegia, Jan. 20, 1931, and named by him for
Roald Amundsen’s ship, the Maud.
MAUDE, CAPE: conspicuous dark bluff stand-
ing NW. of the mouth of Beardmore Gl., at the
head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°18’S., 168°15’E.
Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton
in December 1908.
MAURICE CHANNEL: strait about 1.5 mi. wide
between Bellingshausen and Cook Islands, in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S., 27°05’W. The
207
existence of this strait was first noted by a Russ.
exp. under Bellingshausen in 1820. Charted in
1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and
named for H. G. Maurice, a member of the Dis-
covery Committee.
Maurice Faure Islands: see Faure Islands.
MAURY BAY: open bay, about 25 mi. wide and
12 mi. long, indenting Banzare Coast between Cape
Lewis and Stuart Pt.; in about 66°30’S., 125°00’E.
The bay is believed to be generally ice filled and is
marked by prominent tongues extending seaward
from Blair, Bell and Power Glaciers. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp.,
1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for William
L. Maury, lieutenant on the brig Porpoise of the
USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
MAURY GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide,
flowing in an ENE. direction to the SW. corner of
Violante Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
72°40’S., 61°32’W. Disc. and photographed from
the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS.
During 1947 the glacier was photographed from the
air by the RARE, who in conjunction with the
FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the
FIDS after Matthew F. Maury, 1806-73, American
naval officer and hydrographer, and distinguished
promoter of maritime research and Antarctic ex-
ploration.
MAWSON, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape forming
the E. extremity of Charcot I.; in about 70°03’S.,
73°30’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins, Dec. 29,
1929, in a flight made around the island from the
William Scoresby, and named by him for Sir Doug-
las Mawson, Australian Antarctic explorer and
leader of the AAE, 1911-14, and the BANZARE,
1929-31.
MAWSON GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide,
descending to the Ross Sea, in about 76°12’S.,
162°30’E., where it forms the Nordenskjold Ice
Tongue. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, who named it for Douglas Mawson,
physicist with the exp., who was later to become
the leader of two other Antarctic expeditions, 1911-
14 and 1929-31.
May, Cape: see William Henry May, Cape.
Maybelle Horlick Sibley, Mount; Maybelle Hor-
lick Sidley, Mount; Maybelle Sidley, Mount: see
Sidley, Mount.
May Cove: see Maiviken.
MAY GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi.
wide and 6 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the conti-
nental ice, and terminating in a prominent tongue
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
about 7 mi. WSW. of Cape Carr, on Clarie Coast;
in about 66°00’S., 130°40’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for William May, passed
midshipman on the tender Flying Fish of the USEE
under Wilkes, 1838-42.
MAY GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue about
5 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, extending NW. from May
Gl., near the W. end of Clarie Coast; in about
65°55’S., 130°40’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named
by the US—ACAN for William May of the USEE
under Wilkes, 1838-42.
MAYO, CAPE: bare rock cliff forming the E. end
of a flat, ice-covered platform about 1,400 ft. in el.,
situated about 3 mi. N. of Miller Pt. on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 68°53’S., 63°25’W. Disc. by Sir
Hubert Wilkins on a flight, Dec. 20, 1928, and
named by him for William B. Mayo of the Ford
Motor Co. It has been more fully defined on the
basis of information resulting from flights by Lin-
coln Ellsworth in 1935, and from flights and sledge
journey along this coast by members of the East
Base of the USAS in 1940.
MAYR RANGE: range of mountains projecting
through the icecap immediately N. of the Sauter
Range on the piedmont of New Schwabenland.
From a maximum summit level of about 9,800 ft.
in about 72°10’S., 3°30’E., one limb of the range
projects roughly W. for about 12 mi. while a sec-
ond extends roughly N. for about 25 mi. Disc. by
the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for
Rudolf Mayr, pilot of the Passat, one of the flying
boats used by the expedition.
McCARROLL, CAPE: cape forming the S. side
of the entrance to Richthofen Valley, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 62°33’W. This
feature was probably first seen by the SwedAE,
1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. It was sighted by
Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928,
and named by him for H. G. McCarroll of Detroit,
Michigan.
McCLARY RIDGE: small, crescent-shaped ridge,
standing about 5 mi. SSE. of Mt. Hayes at the S.
side of Cole Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 66°55’S., 64°03’W. In December 1947 it was
charted by FIDS and was photographed from the
air by RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for
George B. McClary of Winnetka, Ill., contributor to
the expedition.
McCLINTOCK, MOUNT: mountain in the Bri-
tannia Range, about 10,500 ft. in el., forming part of
the N. wall of Barne Inlet, along the W. side of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 80°12’S., 157°35’E. Disc. by
208
the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named by him
for Adm. Sir Leopold McClintock, RN, a member of
the Ship Committee for the expedition.
McCORMICK, CAPE: conspicuous cliff near the
NE. extremity of Victoria Land, overlooking Ross
Sea about 12 mi. S. of Cape Downshire; in about
71°55’S., 171°05’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross, who named it for Robert McCormick,
the surgeon on one of the exp. ships, the Erebus.
McCOY, MOUNT: high table-topped massif with
dark, snow-free, vertical walls, at the head of
Emory Land Gl., on Ruppert Coast; in about
75°50’S., 140°45’W. Disc. by members of West
Base of the USAS, 1939-40, and named for James
C. McCoy, chief pilot at the West Base. Not
adopted: Mount Alma McCoy.
McDONALD BAY: open bay about 7 mi. wide
at its entrance between Adams It. and the Haswell
Its., lying immediately W. of Mabus Pt., along
Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°35’S., 93°05’E.
Charted by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14.
Named by the US-ACAN for Cdr. Edwin A. Mc-
Donald, USN, commander of the U.S.S. Burton
Island, flagship of the two icebreakers which sup-
ported the USN Op. Wm. parties which established
astronomical stations along Wilhelm II, Queen
Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts during the 1947-48
summer season.
McDONALD GLACIER: glacier about 17 mi.
wide, descending from ice-covered hills 1,000 to
2,000 ft. in el. and terminating at the sea in per-
pendicular ice walls, 100 to 150 ft. in el., on Caird
Coast; in about 75°20’S., 26°00’W. Disc. by a Br.
exp., 1914-16, under Shackleton, and named by
him for Allan McDonald, who was instrumental in
raising a fund and chartering the schooner Emma
in an attempted rescue of the party marooned on
Elephant I. by the loss of Shackleton’s ship, the
Endurance. Not adopted: Allan McDonald Glacier.
McDONALD ISLANDS: small island group con-
sisting of an island and several islets and rocks,
situated about 23 mi. W. of Heard I.; in about
53°02’S., 72°36’E. Named for Captain McDonald
of the British ship Samarang who disc. the islands
in January 1854.
McDONALD POINT: point marking the W. end
of Islay, an island in the William Scoresby Arch. off
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°22’S., 59°43’E.
The name appears to have been applied: by mem-
bers of the William Scoresby who charted this area
in February 1936.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
McELROY, MOUNT: mountain about 6,000 ft.
in el. standing NW. of Nantucket Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen., in about 74°12’S., 63°04’W.
Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne who
named it for T. P. McElroy, of Boston, who con-
tributed the radio and communication instruments
for the expedition.
McFARLANE STRAIT: strait lying between
Greenwich and Livingston Islands, in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°31’S., 59°58’W. The name ap-
pears on an 1822 chart by Capt. George Powell, a
British sealer, and is now well established in inter-
national usage. Not adopted: Détroit de Mac-
Ferlane [French], Duffs Straits, McFarlane’s
Strait, Yankee Sound.
McIntosh Cove: see Mackintosh Cove.
McINTYRE, MOUNT: a group of low connecting
ridges extending in an E.-W. direction, with rock
walls facing generally N., protruding above the
ice of the south polar plateau to about 9,700 ft. in
el., standing about 9 mi. S. of Mt. Weaver and S.
of the head of Robert Scott Gl.; in about 87°08’S.,
152°05’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named
by Byrd for Marvin H. McIntyre, secretary to the
President of the United States at that time.
McKASKLE HILLS: group of moderately low,
rocky hills, about 1.5 mi. long and 1 mi. wide,
standing between Mistichelli Hills and Rogers Gl.
on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°01’S.,
72°15’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in
March 1947, and named by him for H. A. McKaskle,
air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights
in this area and other coastal areas between 14°
and 164°, east longitude.
McKERCHER, MOUNT: mountain rising to
about 7,000 ft. in el., which is marked by promi-
nent outliers on its NW. and NE. sides, standing
at the E. side of Robert Scott Gl. opposite the
junction of Bartlett Gl., in the Queen Maud Range;
in about 86°07’S., 149°45’W. Disc. in December
1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin
Blackburn, and named for Miss Hazel McKercher,
secretary to R. Adm. Byrd during the period of this
expedition.
McKinley, Mount: see Grace McKinley, Mount.
McLEAN NUNATAKS: group of three nunataks
at the W. side of the head of Mertz GI., on the
George V Coast; in about 67°49’S., 143°56’E. Disc.
in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and named for
Archie L. McLean, medical officer and bacteriologist
with the expedition.
209
McLENNAN MOUNT: mountain about 5,800 ft.
in el., standing at the N. side of Taylor Glacier Dry
Valley and forming the NE. wall of Canada Gl., in
Victoria Land; in about 77°35’/S., 162°49’R.
Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under
Scott.
McLEOD GLACIER: glacier, about 1 mi. long,
flowing in a SSE. direction into Clowes Bay on the
S. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
45°38’W. Named by the Br-APC in 1954 for Mi-
chael McLeod, following a survey by the FIDS in
1947. On Dec. 12, 1821, the cutter Beaufoy under
Michael McLeod sailed to a position at least 60 mi.
W. of the South Orkney Is., where a chart annota-
tion indicates that land was sighted, probably
Coronation Island.
McLEOD HILL: rounded, ice-covered hill, about
5,900 ft. in el., which forms a prominent landmark
1 mi. E. of the head of Northeast Gl., on the W.
side of Palmer Pen.; in 68°05’S., 66°30’W. First
roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE, and re-
surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41. It was resurveyed
in 1946 by the FIDS and named for Kenneth A.
McLeod, FIDS meteorological observer who, during
July-December 1947, occupied with a member of
the RARE the plateau meteorological station 1 mi.
E. of this hill. Not adopted: Glacier Dome, The
Dome.
McMURDO SOUND: a sound at the junction of
the Ross Sea and Ross Ice Shelf, lying between
Ross I. and Victoria Land; in about 177°30’S.,
165°00’E. Disc. in February 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross, who named it for Lt. Archibald Mc-
Murdo of the Terror, one of the exp. ships. Not
adopted: McMurdo Strait.
McMurdo Strait: see McMurdo Sound.
McNAB, CAPE: cape, about 1,160 ft. in el., form-
ing the S. end of Buckle I., in the Balleny Is.; in
about 66°49’S., 163°10’E. Named for John McNab,
2d mate of the schooner Eliza Scott, who made a
sketch of the Balleny Is. when they were disc., in
1839. Not adopted: Cape Macnab.
McNAMARA ISLAND: the more northern of the
two Fletcher Is., lying near the W. end of Bellings-
hausen Sea, about 40 mi. E. of Cape Palmer, off
Eights Coast; in about 71°45’S., 94°45’W. Disc.
by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on Feb. 27,
1940. Named by R. Adm. Byrd for John McNa-
mara, boatswain on the Jacob Ruppert of the
ByrdAE, 1933-35.
McNEILE GLACIER: narrow glacier flowing
northward to the SE. side of Almond Pt. where it
enters Charcot Bay, on the NW. coast of Palmer
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Pen.; in 63°52’S., 59°22’W. Charted in 1948 by
the FIDS and named for S. St. C. McNeile, surveyor
at the FIDS Hope Bay base in 1948-49.
M’Cormik, Cape: see McCormick, Cape.
McVitie, Cape: see Hatree, Cape.
MEADE ISLANDS: small group of islets lying
in the N. entrance to McFarlane Str., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°26’S., 60°07’W. Charted and
named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
MEARES CLIFF: steep cliff, about 880 ft. in el.,
lying about 2 mi. E. of Ponting Cliff, on the N.
coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°13’S., 168°33’E.
First charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the
BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Cecil
H. Meares who had charge of the dogs on this ex-
pedition.
MECHANICS BAY: bay, which is about 1 mi.
wide and recedes 0.5 mi., lying immediately E. of
Saddle Pt. on the N. coast of Heard I.; in 53°01’S.,
73°31’E. Named by American sealers after the
schooner Mechanic, a tender to the Corinthian in
Capt. Erasmus Darwin Rogers’ sealing fleet which
landed at Heard I. in 1855. The name appears on
a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited
the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized
the names then in use by the sealers.
MEEK CHANNEL: channel about 0.75 mi. long
and 0.1 mi. wide, separating Galindez I. from
Grotto I. and the Corner Is., in the Argentine Is.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S.,
64°15’W. Charted in 1935 by the BGLE under Ry-
mill, and named for William McC. Meek, marine
architect and surveyor, who was of assistance in
preparing the exp. ship Penola for the voyage.
MEFJELL MOUNTAIN: mountain standing be-
tween Mt. Walnum and Mt. Bergersen in the cen-
tral part of the Sér Rondane Mtns., inland from
Princess Ragnhild Coast; in about 172°10’S.,
24°00’E. Disc. and photographed from the air by
a Nor. exp. under Christensen on February 6, 1937
and named Mefjell (middle mountain) because of
its central location in the mountain group. Not
adopted: Mefjell [Norwegian], Middle Mountain.
MEGALESTRIS HILL: rock hill, about 110 ft. in
el., in the S. part of Petermann I., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 65°11’S., 64°11’W. Charted and
named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10.
Megalestris is an obsolete name for the South
Polar skua.
210
MEIER, CAPE: cape forming the W. side of the
entrance to Norway Bight, on the S. side of Coro-
nation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S.,
45°54’W. The cape appears named on a chart by
Capt. Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaler who made a
running survey of the South Orkney Islands in
1912-13.
MEIKLEJOHN GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi.
long and 4 mi. wide, flowing SW. from the Dyer
Plateau of Palmer Pen. to George VI Sound, imme-
diately S. of Moore Pt.; in 70°32’S., 67°44’W. In
its lower reaches the S. side of this glacier merges
with Millett Gl. First surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Ian F.
Meiklejohn, radio operator of the BGLE, 1934-37.
MEINARDUS GLACIER: extensive glacier flow-
ing in an ENE. direction to a point immediately E.
of Mt. Barkow where it is joined from the NW. by
Haines GI., and then E. to enter New Bedford Inlet
close W. of Court Nunatak, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 73°22’S., 61°52’W. Disc. and pho-
tographed from the air in December 1940 by the
USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the
air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction
with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named
by the FIDS for Wilhelm Meinardus, German
meteorologist and climatologist and author of
many publications including the meteorological
results of the GerAE under Grygalski, 1901-3.
MEKAMMEN CREST: mountain about 3,900 ft.
in el., lying close SE. of Nordkammen Crest and ex-
tending 5 mi. in a N.-S. direction, in the Masson
Range of the Framnes Mtns. on Mac-Robertson
Coast; in about 67°50’S., 62°55’E. It was mapped
and named by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen-
sen in January 1937. The name is descriptive,
meaning ‘‘middle comb.” Not adopted: Mekam-
men [Norwegian], Middle Crest.
MELBA PENINSULA: ice-covered peninsula be-
tween Reid Gl. and the Bay of Winds, fronting on
Shackleton Ice Shelf, on Queen Mary Coast; in
about 66°35’S., 98°10’E. Disc. by the AAE under
Mawson, 1911-14, who named it for Dame Nellie
Melba, of Melbourne, a patron of the expedition.
MELBOURNE, MOUNT: conspicuous volcanic
cone, about 8,500 ft. in el., back of Cape Washing-
ton, and between Terra Nova Bay and Wood Bay, in
Victoria Land; in about 74°25/S., 164°50’E. Disc.
in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who
named it for Lord Viscount Melbourne, British
Prime Minister when the exp. was being planned.
Melbourne Glacier: see Campbell Glacier.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Melchior, Ile: see Melchior Islands.
Melchior, Puerto: see Melchior Harbor.
Melchior Archipelago; Melchoir Archipelago: see
Melchior Islands.
MELCHIOR HARBOR: small harbor in the Mel-
chior Is., Palmer Arch., formed by the semi-circular
arrangement of Delta, Alpha, Beta, Kappa and
Gamma Islands; in 64°19’S., 62°59’W. The name,
derived from the name of the island group, was
probably given by DI personnel who roughly sur-
veyed the harbor in 1927. The harbor was sur-
veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and
1948. Not adopted: Puerto Melchior [Spanish].
MELCHIOR ISLANDS: group of many low, ice-
covered islands lying near the center of Dallmann
Bay in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°57’W.
First seen but left unnamed by a Ger. exp. under
Dallmann, 1873-74. They were resighted and
roughly charted by the FrAE under Charcot,
1903-5. Charcot named what he believed to be
the large easternmost island in the group “Ile
Melchior” after Vice Admiral Melchior of the
French Navy, but later surveys proved Charcot’s
“Tle Melchior” to be two islands, now called Eta
Island and Omega Island. The name Melchior Is-
lands has since become established for the whole
island group now described, and of which Eta
Island and Omega Island form the eastern part.
The island group was roughly surveyed in 1927 by
DI personnel in the Discovery, and was resur-
veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942 and 1943,
and again in 1948. Not adopted: Ile Melchior
[French], Melchior Archipelago, Melchoir Archi-
pelago.
MELSOM ROCKS: group of isolated rocks about
3 mi N. of Despair Rocks, and some 8 mi. W. of
Penguin Pt., the NW. end of Coronation I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°31’S., 46°11’W. Prob-
ably sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in De-
cember 1821. Named for Capt. H. G. Melsom,
manager of the Thule Whaling Co., by Capt. Petter
Sgrlle, who conducted a running survey of the
South Orkney Is. in 1912-13.
MELVILLE, CAPE: cape forming the SE. end
of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°01’S., 57°33’W. This name was applied to the
NE. cape of King George I. on some early charts,
but in recent years has consistently been used for
the SE. cape. The name dates back to at least
1820 when it was described by Edward Bransfield,
Master, RN, during his explorations of South Shet-
land Islands. Not adopted: South Foreland.
211
Melville’s Island: see Laurie Island.
MELVILLE PEAK: prominent peak surmounting
Cape Melville, the SE. end of King George I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°00’S., 57°39’W. This
peak, which was probably known to early sealers in
the area, was charted by the FrAE under Charcot,
1908-10. It probably takes its name from nearby
Cape Melville.
MENIER ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long and
wide, which is largest in a small island group
lying near the mouth of Flandres Bay and about
4 mi. NE. of Cape Renard, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°59’S., 63°37’W. The island
group was disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5,
who gave them the name “Iles Ménier.” The
name Ménier is here applied to the largest of these
islands. Not adopted: Guyou Island.
MENTZEL, MOUNT: mountain about 8,700 ft.
in el., situated about 7 mi. ENE. of Ritscher Peak
in the NE. portion of the Wohlthat Mtns., in New
Schwabenland; in about 72°19’S., 13°45’E. Disc.
by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, who named
it for the pres. of the Deutschen Forschungsge-
meinschaft (German Research Society).
MERCER BAY: small bay marked by Geikie Gl.
at its head, at the SW. end of Cumberland West
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°40’W. The
bay appears on a sketch map of Cumberland Bay
by Lt. Samuel A. Duse of the SwedAE, 1901-4. The
name is first used on a chart based upon survey
work by DI personnel in 1926-30. Probably named
for Lt. Cdr. G. M. Mercer, RNR, captain of the DI
research ship William Scoresby, which engaged in
whale marking and oceanographic work off South
Georgia in 1926-27.
MERCURY GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast
of Alexander I Island, about 6 mi. long and 2 mi.
wide, flowing W. into George VI Sound between
Waitabit Cliffs and Keystone Cliffs; in 71°34’S.,
68°14’°W. The coast in this vicinity was first ex-
plored from the air and partially photographed
by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and was
roughly charted from the ground in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. This glacier was first sur-
veyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and was named
by them after the planet Mercury.
MERRITT ISLET: rocky islet about 0.7 mi.
long and about 120 ft. in el., lying close off Knox
Coast about 4 mi. NW. of Robinson Gl.; in 66°28’S.,
107°11’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named for
Everett L. Merritt, photogrammetrist with the
Navy Hydrographic Office, who served as surveyor
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
with the USN Op. Wml. parties which established
astronomical control along Wilhelm II, Knox and
Budd Coasts during January-February 1948.
MERSEY SPIT: a spit on the S. coast of King
George I., about 0.5 mi. N. of Penguin I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 57°55’W. Charted
and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II.
MERTON PASSAGE: narrow passage between
Right Whale Rocks and a small rock about 0.1
mi. N. of Bariff Pt., at the E. side of the entrance
to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S.,
36°24’W. The name Merton, the former name for
Right Whale Rocks, was applied to this passage
by D™ personnel as a result of surveys during the
period 1926-30.
Merton Rocks: see Right Whale Rocks.
MERTZ GLACIER: valley glacier averaging over
20 mi. in width and flowing about 40 mi. from the
inland plateau to the sea, lying W. of Ninnis Gl.
on George V Coast; in about 67°30’S., 144°45’E.
Disc. by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who
named it for Xavier Mertz, who perished on Jan.
7, 1913, while on a sledging journey about 100 mi.
SE. of Main Base.
MERTZ GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue
about 45 mi. long and 20 mi. wide, forming the
seaward extension of Mertz Glacier along George
V Coast; in about 67°10’S., 145°30’E. Disc. and
named by the AAEH, 1911-14, under Mawson.
Named after Mertz Glacier. Not adopted: Mertz
Glacier Ice Tongue.
MERZ PENINSULA: irregular, ice-covered pen-
insula, about 15 mi. long in an E.—W. direction
and averaging 25 mi. wide, projecting from the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°15’S., 61°05’W. Disc.
and photographed from the air in December 1940
by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed
from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in
conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the
ground. Named by the FIDS for Alfred Merz,
1880-1925, noted German oceanographer and orig-
inal leader of the Ger. exp. in the Meteor, 1925-26.
METHUEN COVE: cove between Cape Anderson
and Cape Whitson, along the S. coast of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°33’W.
Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4,
who named it for H. Methuen, accountant of the
expedition.
MICA ISLETS: group of about four mainly ice-
covered islets lying 7 mi. W. of Mt. Guernsey and
6 mi. NE. of Cape Jeremy, off the W. coast of Palmer
212
Pen.; in 69°20’S., 68°36’W. First seen from
the air and photographed by the BGLE in 1936,
and later roughly mapped from the photographs.
The islets were visited and surveyed from the
ground in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by
them because there is mica in the schists which
form them.
MICHAEL, MOUNT: active volcanic mountain
about 2,600 ft. in el., surmounting Saunders I., in
the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°48’S., 26°28’W.
The island was disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in
1775, but the mountain was presumably first
charted in 1820 by a Russ. exp. under Bellings-
hausen. Recharted in 1930 by DI personnel on
the Discovery II and named for Michael J. de C.
Carey, son of Cdr. W. M. Carey, RN (Ret.), cap-
tain of the Discovery II at the time of the survey.
Michailoff’s Istand: see Cornwallis Island.
MICHELSEN ISLAND: small island in the
South Orkney Is., joined to the S. end of Powell I.
by a narrow isthmus of occasionally submerged
boulders; in 60°45’S., 45°02’W. The island appears
to be first charted and named on a map by Capt.
Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaler who made a run-
ning survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13.
Not adopted: Michelsens Island.
MICKLE ISLET: islet about 1 mi. SE. of Flag-
staff Pt., close off the W. side of Ross I.; in about
77°34’S., 166°11’E. Charted and named by the
BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Not adopted:
Mickle Island.
Middle Crest: see Mekammen Crest.
Middle Island: see Day Island.
MIDDLE ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. S. of Fore-
land Islet and about midway along the E. coast
of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
61°57’S., 57°36’W. Charted in 1937 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, and so named because
of its position.
Middle Mountain: see Mefjell Mountain.
MIKHAYLOV POINT: small promontory mark-
ing the S. extremity of Visokoi I., South Sand-
wich Is.; in 54°44’S., 27°12’W. The descriptive
name Low Point was given for this feature by DI
personnel following their survey of 1930, but this
name has been rejected because there is a Low
Point at nearby Vindication Island. The name
Mikhaylov Point was recommended by the Br-APC
in 1953 and is for Pavel N. Mikhaylov, artist
aboard the Vostok during the Russ. exp. under
Bellingshausen, 1819-21. Milhaylov made an ex-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
cellent series of sketches of the South Sandwich
Islands. Not adopted: Low Point.
Mikkelsen, Mount: see Caroline Mikkelsen,
Mount.
MIKKELSEN BAY: bay, about 15 mi. wide at
its mouth and indenting 9 mi., entered between
the Bertrand Ice Piedmont and Cape Berteaux
along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°42’S.,
67°10’W. First seen from a distance in 1909 by
the FrAE under Charcot, but not recognized as
a large bay. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill, and resurveyed by the FIDS in
1948-49. The name was proposed by members of
BGLE for Ejnar Mikkelsen, Danish Arctic explorer
and Inspector for East Greenland, 1934-50.
MIKKELSEN HARBOR: small bay lying imme-
diately E. of Cape Skottsberg, along the S. side
of Trinity I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
63°52’S., 60°44’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under
Nordenskjold, 1901-4. It was not named at the
time but probably some 15 years later, perhaps
after Klarius Mikkelsen, Norwegian whaling cap-
tain. Not adopted: Hoseason Harbor, Mikkelson
Harbor.
Mikkelsen Island: see Watkins Island.
MIKKELSEN ISLETS: small group of islets
lying off the SE. coast of Adelaide I., about 2 mi.
SE. of the Léonie Is.; in 67°38’S., 68°11’W. Disc.
by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named
by him for Otto Mikkelsen, Norwegian diver who
inspected the damaged hull of the exp. ship
Pourquoi Pas? at Deception Island.
MIKKELSEN PEAK: the highest peak, about
1,550 ft. in el., of the Scullin Monolith, on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S., 66°37’E. In
January and February 1931 several Norwegian
whale catchers, exploring along this coast, made
sketches of the shore from their vessels and named
this mountain for Capt. Klarius Mikkelsen, master
of the Torlyn. Not adopted: Klarius Mikkelsen
Fjell [Norwegian], Mount. Klarius Mikkelsen,
Scullin Monolith.
Mikkelson Harbor: see Mikkelsen Harbor.
MILL, MOUNT: mountain about 2,000 ft. in el.,
standing about 2 mi. W. of Mt. Balch on the NE.
shore of Waddington Bay, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°15/S., 64°04’W. First charted
by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99.
Named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, for
Hugh Robert Mill, British geographer, Antarctic
historian, and author in 1905 of The Seige of the
South Pole. Not adopted: Mill Peak.
213
MILL COVE: cove entered between Cape Ander-
son and Valette I., along the S. coast of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°35’W.
Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who
named it for Hugh Robert Mill.
MILLER, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Alex-
andra Range about 11,600 ft. in el., standing about
11 mi. SW. of Mt. Tripp, which lies midway be-
tween Shackleton Inlet and Beardmore Gl., on the
W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°15’S.,
165°40’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton.
MILLERAND ISLAND: island about 3 mi. in
diameter, lying about 4 mi. S. of Cape Calmette,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S.,
67°13’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot,
1908-10, who probably named it for Alexandre
Millerand, French statesman.
MILLER GLACIER: glacier about 1 mi. wide,
described by Griffith Taylor as a transection
glacier, lying in a transverse trough and connect-
ing Cotton Gl. and Debenham Gl., in Victoria Land;
in about 77°08’S., 161°53’E. Disc. in January 1912
by the BrAE Western Geological Party under
Griffith Taylor, and named by him, probably for
M. J. Miller, Mayor of Lyttleton, shipwright who
repaired the exp. ship Terra Nova prior to its voy-
age S. from New Zealand.
MILLER POINT: black rock cape about 670 ft.
in el., overlooking the N. side of the terminus of
Casey Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°56’S., 63°23’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins
in a flight on Dec. 20, 1928, and named by him
for George E. Miller, of Detroit, Michigan. It has
been more fully defined as a result of flights by
Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, and by the flights and
sledge journey along this coast from East Base by
members of the USAS in 1940.
MILLETT GLACIER: heavily crevassed glacier,
about 13 mi. long and 7 mi. wide, flowing W. from
the Dyer Plateau of Palmer Pen. to George VI
Sound, immediately N. of Wade Pt.; in 70°37’S.,
67°40’W. In its lower reaches the N. side of this
glacier merges with Meiklejohn Gl. It was first
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and
later named for Hugh M. Millett, chief engineer
of the Penola during the BGLE, 1934-37.
MILL GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. wide, flow-
ing in a NW. direction along the N. side of the Do-
minion Range and entering the E. side of Beard-
more Gl.; 85°10’S., 168°00’E. Disc. in December
1908 by the BrAE under Shackleton, who named it
for Hugh Robert Mill. ;
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
MILL INLET: ice-filled inlet which recedes about
8 mi. in a NW.-SE. direction, and is some 20 mi.
wide at its entrance between Cape Robinson and
Monnier Pt., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
66°56’S., 64°20’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1947
and named for Hugh Robert Mill. Photographed
from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne.
Not adopted: Sullivan Inlet.
MILL ISLAND: ice-domed island about 1 mi.
long and 15 mi. wide, lying about 22 mi. N. of
Thomas I., off the W. end of Knox Coast; in about
65°37'S., 100°48’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI
personnel on the William Scoresby, and named for
Hugh Robert Mill.
MILL PEAK: prominent, detached peak about
5,750 ft. in el., lying about 32 mi. S. of Cape Simp-
son and about 11 mi. S. of Pearce Peak, inland from
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°59’S., 61°12’E.
Disc. in Feb. 17, 1931 by the BANZARE under Maw-
son, who named it for Hugh Robert Mill.
MILLS, MOUNT: peak about 7,400 ft. in el., at
the N. end of the Dominion Range; in about
85°13’S., 166°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE under
Shackleton, 1907-9, and named for Sir James Mills,
chairman of the Union Steamship Co., who jointly
with the Govt. of New Zealand paid the cost of
towing the exp. ship Nimrod to the Antarctic in
1908.
MILWARD PATCH: large patch of kelp about 2
mi. N. of the E. part of Bird I., off the W. tip of
South Georgia; in about 53°58’S., 38°03’W. Mil-
ward Patch was charted in 1930, along with other
nearby navigational hazards, by DI personnel on
the William Scoresby, and named for C. A. Mil-
ward, Chief Officer of the William Scoresby at the
time of the survey.
MIMAS PEAK: sharp conspicuous peak which
appears from George VI Sound to be the most dis-
tant nunatak at the head of Saturn Glacier, situ-
ated about 12 mi. W. of Deimos Ridge in the SE.
part of Alexander I Island; in about 71°56’S.,
69°23’W. This peak was first seen and photo-
graphed from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov.
23, 1935, and was mapped from these photographs
by W.L. G. Joerg. It is probably the highest peak
in the range discovered there by Ellsworth. The
peak was seen from a distance in 1949 by the FIDS
and roughly positioned. Named by FIDS for its
association with Saturn Glacier; Mimas being one
of the satellites of Saturn.
MINERAL HILL: round-topped hill, about 1,400
ft. in el., with ice-free, talus-covered slopes, stand-
ing about 4 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay and 3
mi. E. of the NE. end of Duse Bay, at the NE. end
214
of Palmer Pen.; in 63°29’S., 57°03’W. Probably
first seen by the SwedAE under Nordenskjédld,
1901-4. First charted by the FIDS in 1946, who
so named it because small quantities of reddish
mineral in the rock gave the surfaces a conspicu-
ous color.
MINNA BLUFF: long, narrow, bold peninsula,
about 25 mi. long and 5 mi. wide, projecting SE.
from Mt. Discovery into the NW. portion of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 78°40’S., 167°05’E. Disc. and
named by the BrNAE under Scott in September
1902.
MINNEHAHA ICEFALLS: small, heavily cre-
vassed ice fall descending the steep W. slopes of Mt.
England, and forming a S. tributary to New Gl.
close W. of its terminus at Granite Hbr., in Vic-
toria Land; in about 77°02’S., 162°26’E. Charted
and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13.
MINTO, MOUNT: peak about 10,000 ft. in el.,
standing at the SW. side of Robertson Bay in the
Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in
about 71°35’S., 169°20’E. Disc. in January 1841
by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Rt. Hon.
Ear] Minto, then First Lord of the Admiralty.
MIROUNGA FLATS: small, partially enclosed
tidal area in the inner, northwestern corner of
Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S.,
45°37’W. Its E. limit is formed by the Thule Its.;
its N. and W. limits by Signy I. The tidal area
dries at low water. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by
DI personnel. Resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS,
and so named by them because elephant seals
(Mirounga leonina) are found there in large num-
bers during the moulting period.
Mission Island: see Masson Island.
MISTICHELLI HILLS: group of moderately low,
rocky hills, about 2 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, which .
lie midway between McKaskle Hills and Peterson
Ice Falls and front on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in
about 70°02’S., 72°07’E. Delineated in 1952 by
John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by
USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for
G. Mistichelli, air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photo-
graphic flights in this area and other coastal areas
between 14° and 164°, east longitude.
MISTY PASS: pass about 2,300 ft. in el., lying
between the head of Broad Valley and a valley
descending N. to Bransfield Str., situated about 7
mi. SE. of Cape Ducorps on Louis Philippe Pen.; in
63°29’S., 57°59’W. Disc. by the FIDS in 1946, and
so named because clouds pouring E. through the
pass had been noted by the survey party to herald
bad weather.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
MITCHELL ISLAND: rocky island about 2.5 mi.
long and 2 mi. wide, lying immediately S. of Bailey
and Clark Islands which, collectively, form the
group of three principal islands at the NE. end of
the Windmill Is. that lie close against Budd Coast;
in 66°20’S., 110°30’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in February
1947 which indicate that these three islands are
connected by a steep snow ramp to the continental
ice overlying Budd Coast. Prominent and moraine
deposits overlie and parallel the upper margin of
this snow ramp about 1 mi. from its outer edge on
Clark, Bailey and Mitchell Islands. Named by the
US-ACAN for Capt. Ray A. Mitchell, USN, captain
of the U.S.S. Cacapon, tanker of the western task
group of USN Op. Hjp., Task Force 68, 1946-47.
MITCHELL PEAK: solitary pyramidal peak,
about 1,200 ft. in el., standing at the E. end of
Guest I., which lies W. of Paul Block Bay along
the coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°25’S.,
147°25’W. Sighted by the ByrdAE during a flight
on Dec. 5, 1929 over the NW. coast of Marie Byrd
Land. Named by Byrd for Hugh C. Mitchell,
mathematician of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic
Survey, and member of the National Geographic
Soc. committee of experts which determined that
Byrd reached both the North and South Poles by
airplane in 1926 and 1929, respectively. Not
adopted: Hugh Mitchell Peak.
Mitchells Island: see Robert Island.
Mobiloil Bay: see Mobiloil Inlet.
MOBILOIL INLET: ice-filled inlet, nurtured by
several NE. and E. flowing glaciers, lying between
Rock Pile Peaks on the W. and Hollick-Kenyon
Pen. on the E., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°35’S., 64°30’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins
in a flight on Dec. 20, 1928, and named by him after
a product of the Vacuum Oil Co. of Australia. Not
adopted: Mobiloil Bay.
MOE ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, sepa-
rated from the SW. end of Signy I. by Fyr Chan.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°41’W. The
name appears on a chart by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in
1912-13. Probably named for Thoralf Moe of
Sandefjord, Norway, a whaling captain working in
Antarctic waters in that period.
MOFFETT GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide
and 20 mi. long, flowing in a NE. direction into
Amundsen Gl. between Mt. Ellsworth and Mt.
Breyer, in the Queen Maud Range; in about
85°54’S., 160°30’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on the
South Polar Flight in November 1929. Named by
Byrd for R. Adm. William A. Moffett, USN, first
215
Chief of the Bureau of Aeronautics of the Navy
Department.
MOHN BASIN: a major depression in the surface
of the south polar plateau, extending from the N.
slopes of Mounts Fridtjof Nansen and Don Pedro
Christophersen for about 120 mi. to the S., and in-
cluding the region of Devils Gl., with a width of
about 20 mi.; its deepest portion lies in about
86°30’S., 167°00’W. Disc. in December 1911 on
the journey to the South Pole by the Nor. exp. un-
der Amundsen. Named by the US-ACAN for Prof.
Henrik Mohn, Norwegian meteorologist and author
of the meteorological report of the Nor. exp. under
Amundsen.
MOHN PEAKS: two ice-covered peaks, the north-
ern and southern about 4,200 and 4,000 ft. in el.,
respectively, standing about 9 mi. WSW. of the
head of Mason Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 73°07’S., 61°16’W. First seen and photographed
from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. Dur-
ing 1947 the peaks were photographed from the
air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction
with the FIDS charted them from the ground.
Named by the FIDS for Henrik Mohn.
Moldaenke Berg: see Hodges, Mount.
MOLLYHAWK ISLET: small, tussock grass
covered islet, lying between Seaward Rock and
Crescent It., about 2 mi. SE. of Cape Buller, in the
N. part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in
54°01’S., 37°19’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert
Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard
the brig Daisy. It was surveyed in 1929-30 by DI
personnel, who named it Mollyhawk Island in as-
sociation with Albatross I., Prion I. and other nat-
ural history names in the Bay of Isles given by
Murphy in 1912-13. The name Mollyhawk Islet is
approved because of the small size of the feature.
Not adopted: Mollyhawk Island.
MOLTKE HARBOR: bay about 1 mi. wide in the
NW. side of Royal Bay, along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°31’S., 36°04’W. Charted by a Ger.
exp. under Schrader, based at Royal Bay in 1882-83,
and named after the exp. ship Moltke.
MOLTKE NUNATAK: nunatak standing at the
S. side of Wiedenmann GIl., about 25 mi. S. of Duke
Ernst Bay, on Luitpold Coast; in about 78°20’S.,
35°00’W. Disc. in January—February 1912 by the
GerAE under Filchner, and named for Gen. Hel-
muth von Moltke, Chief of the German General
Staff and Sec. of State for Home Affairs. Not
adopted: Moltke Nunataks.
Monaco, Cape: see Albert de Monaco, Cape.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
MONFLIER, CAPE: cape at the N. side of the en-
trance to Pendleton Str., forming the SW. end of
Rabot I., in the Biscoe Is., off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°55’S., 66°22’W. Charted and named by
the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Not adopted:
Cape Montflier.
MONIQUE, MOUNT: mountain with a ridge-like
summit, about 2,000 ft. in el., standing about 14
mi. W. of Mt. Marion on the NW. coast of Charcot
I.; in about 69°55’S., 75°15’W. Disc. on Jan. 11,
1910 by the FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Charcot, and
named by him for his daughter Monique. Not
adopted: Monigue Mountain, Monique Mountain,
Monique Peak.
Monigue Mountain: see Monique, Mount.
MONK ISLETS: group of islets and rocks ex-
tending in a N.-S. chain for about 0.5 mi., lying
about 3 mi. S. of Cape Meier off the S. coast of
Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S.,
45°54’W. First charted and named on a map by
Capt. Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaler who made a
running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13.
Not adopted: Munken [Norwegian].
MONNIER POINT: low, mainly ice-covered point
forming the SW. side of the entrance to Mill Inlet,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°06’S., 64°45’W.
During 1947 it was photographed from the air by
the RARE under Ronne, and charted from the
ground by the FIDS. Named by the FIDS for
Franz R. v. Le Monnier, Austrian polar bibliog-
rapher.
MONOLITH, THE: pinnacle rock, broad at the
base and tapering to a point, about 255 ft. in el.,
lying about 1.5 mi. SE. of Cape McNab, Buckle I.,
in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°50’S., 163°11’E. So
named because of its shape.
Monroe Island: see Snow Island.
MONROE ISLAND: largest of the Larsen Islands,
lying off the W. end of Coronation I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 46°03’W. The Larsen Is-
lands were disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821, and appar-
ently first named on a chart by the Norwegian
whaler Capt. Petter Sgrile in 1912-13. The Larsen
Islands were recharted in 1933 by DI personnel on
the Discovery II, who named the largest island in
the group Larsen Island. Because of confusion of
these names, the island was renamed by the Br-
APC for the sloop James Monroe, which was com-
manded by Captain Palmer at the time of its dis-
covery and anchored in this vicinity in December
1821. Not adopted: Larsen Island.
216
MONSIMET COVE: cove about 0.5 mi. W. of
Hervé Cove, lying along the S. side of Ezcurra Inlet,
in Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°34’W. First charted
by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named
by him for a member of the expedition.
Montague Island: see Montagu Island.
MONTAGU ISLAND: island about 9 mi. long and
averaging 5 mi. wide, lying midway between
Saunders and Bristol Islands, in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 58°25’S., 26°20’W. Disc. in 1775 by a
Br. exp. under Cook, who named it for John Mon-
tagu, the fourth Earl of Sandwich and First Lord
of the Admiralty. Not adopted: Montague Island.
MONTEAGLE, MOUNT: high, sharp peak stand-
ing NW. of Cape Sibbald and W. of Lady Newnes
Ice Shelf, in Victoria Land; in 73°50’S., 166°00’E.
Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who
named it for Baron Monteagle, Chancellor of the
Exchequer, 1835-39.
Montflier, Cape: see Monflier, Cape.
MONTRAVEL ROCK: rock about 8 mi. NE. of
Cape Legoupil and about 5 mi. off the NW. coast:
of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°13’S., 57°42’W. Disc.
by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40, and named
by him for Ens. Louis Tardy de Montravel of the
exp. ship Zélée.
Monts Solway: see Solvay Mountains.
Montura, Ile: see Saddle Island.
MONUMENT, THE: isolated rock pillar on the
NW. side of Red I., about 1,600 ft. in el., which is
level with the main summit of the island and has
the appearance of a monument. It lies in Prince
Gustav Chan. about 3 mi. off the SE. coast of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°44’S., 57°53’W. The island
was disc. by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold,
1901-4. The Monument was charted and named
by the FIDS in 1945.
MOODY POINT: point which forms the E. end
of Joinville I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°18’S., 54°59’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross,
1839-43, and named by him for Lieutenant Gover-
nor Moody of the Falkland Islands. Not adopted:
Cape Moody, Point Moody.
MOON BAY: bay about 8 mi. wide which recedes
4 mi. between High Pt. and Pin Pt., on the E. side
of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
about 62°35’S., 60°00’W. This bay was known to
sealers in the area as early as 1822. Charted in
1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and prob-
ably named by them for nearby Half Moon Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
MOONEY, MOUNT: ridge-shaped mountain on
the E. side of Robert Scott Gl., about 4 mi. S. of Mt.
Bowlin, in the Queen Maud Range; in about
86°31/S., 146°55’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the
ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn,
and named by Byrd for James E. Mooney, who as-
sisted this and other Byrd expeditions. Not
adopted: Mount English.
MOORE, CAPE: dark headland forming the W.
side of the entrance to Smith Inlet, on the N. coast
of Victoria Land; in about 70°50’S., 167°15’E. Disc.
in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for
Thomas E. L. Moore, mate on the exp. ship Terror.
Moore Bay: see Moore Embayment.
MOORE EMBAYMENT: an embayment in the
coast S. of Minna Bluff, along the NW. side of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 79°S., 163°E. Disc. by the
BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Adm. Sir Arthur
Moore, Naval Commander-in-Chief at Cape Town,
placed the resources of the naval dockyard at Cape
Town at the disposal of the Discovery for much-
needed repairs before the ship proceeded to New
Zealand. Not adopted: Moore Bay.
MOORE POINT: rocky point surmounted by a
small peak, marking the N. side of the mouth of
Meiklejohn Gl. on Palmer Pen. and fronting on
George VI Sound; in 70°30’S., 67°53’W. First sur-
veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later
named for James I. Moore, second engineer of the
Penola during the BGLE, 1934-37.
MOORING POINT: point on the S. side of Borge
Bay, about 0.3 mi. W. of Berntsen Pt., on Signy I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. The
name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey
of Borge Bay by DI personnel on the Discovery, but
may reflect an earlier naming by whalers.
Moraenefjord; Mordnen Fjord: see Moraine
Fjord.
MORAINE COVE: small cove at the N. end of
Mikkelsen Bay along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°35’S., 67°07’W. A moraine descends to the
cove from the SW. end of Pavie Ridge. The name
derives from the provisional name ‘“‘Moraine Point,”
used by Prof. Robert L. Nichols of the RARE, who
examined the geology of this area in 1947. The
name Moraine Cove retains the spirit of the naming
by Nichols, and is considered more essential for
reference purposes than a name for the moraine
itself.
MORAINE FJORD: inlet about 3 mi. long with
a reef (a terminal moraine) extending across its
entrance, forming the W. head of Cumberland East
424589 O-57-15
217
Bay, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°29’W. Charted
by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, who
so named it because of the large glacial moraine
at its entrance. Not adopted: Moreenefjord [Nor-
wegian], Moranen Fjord [German], Moranen
Fjord.
MORAINE VALLEY: a north-south trending
valley filled with morainic debris, about 0.75 mi.
long, which drains into Elephant Flats on the E.
side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,
45°37’°W. Insummer a stream, fed by the ice slopes
at its S. end, runs in this valley. Named by the
FIDS following their survey of 1947.
Mordrins Island: see Elephant Island.
MORENCY ISLET: islet about 1 mi. in diameter,
lying close W. of Steele I. and about 12 mi. SSE.
of Cape Sharbonneau, off the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 71°02’S., 61°10’W. Disc. by members of
the East Base of the USAS who explored this coast
by land and from the air in 1940. Named for
Anthony J. L. Morency, tractor driver for the East
Base. Not adopted: Morency Island.
MORENO, POINT: point at the E. side of the en-
trance to the small cove at the head of Scotia Bay,
on the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney
Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°42’W. Charted by the ScotNAE
under Bruce, 1902-4, and named for Francisco P.
Moreno, noted Argentine scientist and director of
the Museo de la Plata.
MORENO ISLAND: narrow island about 1 mi.
long, lying about 1.5 mi. NW. of Cape Sterneck,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°03’S.,
61°15’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99, and named by him for Francisco P.
Moreno.
MORETON POINT: point about 1 mi. N. of Re-
turn Pt., at the W. end of Coronation I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°02’W. The point
was roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and
Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer in 1821. Named by DI
personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the is-
lands in 1933.
MORNING, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain,
about 5,800 ft. in el., with three slightly elevated
sharp peaks, lying on the E. side of Koettlitz GL.,
along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
78°30’S., 163°35’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4, who named it for the Morning, relief
ship to the expedition.
Morrel Island; Morrell Island: see Thule Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Morrell Coast: (in about 69°20’S., 62°00’W.) the
decision of May 1947 has been VACATED. The ap-
plication of coast names to parts of islands is now
considered inappropriate.
MORRIS, CAPE: flat-topped promontory about
330 ft. in el., forming the NW. end of Robert I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°22’S., 59°47°W. The
name appears to have been applied by DI personnel
on the Discovery II, who charted the cape in 1935.
MORRIS GLACIER: glacier flowing in a N. di-
rection to the head of Sea Leopard Fjord, in the
Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°05’S., 37°16’W.
Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy,
American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who
named it for Edward Lyman Morris, a botanist who
was then head of the Dept. of Natural Science at
the Brooklyn Museum.
MORRISON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,900 ft.
in el., standing about 4 mi. N. of Mackay Gl. on the
W. side of Cleveland Gl., in Victoria Land; in about
76°54’S., 161°38’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4, who named it for J. D. Morrison of
the Morning, relief ship to the expedition.
MORRISON GLACIER: glacier about 7 mi. long,
flowing in a S. direction along the E. side of Bastion
Peak to the head of Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°10’S., 63°32’W. Charted in
1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Rt. Hon. Her-
bert Morrison, M.P., British Sec. of State for Home
Affairs and Home Security and member of the War
Cabinet. Photographed from the air during 1947
by the RARE under Ronne.
MORSE POINT: point marking the E. side of the
entrance to Antarctic Bay on the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°05’S., 36°54’W. The point appears
roughly charted on maps dating back to about
1900. It was roughly surveyed by DI personnel in
the period 1925-31, and resurveyed by the SGS,
1951-52. Named by the Br—APC after the British
sealing vessel Morse, which was working in South
Georgia in 1799-1800, probably the first British
sealer to do so. She was based at Antarctic Bay
when encountered by Edmund Fanning, who pub-
lished an account of the meeting.
Morton Strait: see Hell Gates.
MORTON STRAIT: strait between Snow I. on the
SW., and Rugged and Livingston Islands on the
NE., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°39’S., 61°20’W.
The strait was named on a chart by James Weddell,
published in 1825, and is now established interna-
tional usage. Not adopted: Hell Gates, Mortons
Strait.
218
MOSBY GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide at
its mouth, flowing in a SE. direction to the NW.
corner of New Bedford Inlet, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 73°09’S., 61°36’W. Disc. and
photographed from the air in December 1940 by
the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from
the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in con-
junction with the FIDS approximately charted its
terminus from the ground. Named by the FIDS
for Hakon Mosby, Norwegian meteorologist and
oceanographer. ;
MOSE, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape which marks
the E. side of the entrance to Porpoise Bay and
forms the division between Banzare and Claire
Coasts, Wilkes Land; in about 66°00’S., 130°05’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN
for William H. Mose, pursers steward on the brig
Porpoise of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
MOSE GLACIER: channel glacier about 2 mi.
wide and 5 mi. long, flowing NW. from the conti-
nental ice to the E. side of the entrance to Porpoise
Bay, about 3 mi. SSW. of Cape Mose, on Banzare
Coast; in about 66°05’S., 130°05’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for William
H. Mose of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
MOSSMAN INLET: narrow ice-filled inlet which
recedes about 10 mi. between Cape Kidson and the
SW. end of Kemp Pen., along the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 73°17’S., 60°32’W. This inlet was first seen
and photographed from the air in December 1940
by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed
from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in
conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the
ground. Named by the FIDS for Robert C. Moss-
man, 1870-1940, British meteorologist and clima-
tologist and member of the ScotNAE under Bruce,
1902-4.
MOSSMAN PENINSULA: narrow peninsula
about 3 mi. long, extending S. from the W. part
of Laurie I. and separating Scotia and Wilton Bays,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°43’W. The
peninsula was disc. in 1821 by Capt. George Powell
and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, and roughly charted
on Powell’s map of 1822. Recharted by the
ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and named by him
for Robert C. Mossman.
Mossyface, Cape: see Canwe, Cape.
Motesudden: see Well-met, Cape.
MOUBRAY BAY: bay lying between Cape Roget
on the N. and Cape Christie on the S., along the N.
part of E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 72°11’S.,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
170°30’H. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross,
and named by him for George H. Moubray, the
clerk-in-charge of the exp. ship Terror.
MOULTON, MOUNT: linear mountain in the cen-
tral portion of the Hal Flood Range, in Marie Byrd
Land; in aout 76°04’S., 134°30’W. Disc. by the
USAS on aerial flights in 1940 and named for
Richard S. Moulton, chief dog driver of the USAS
West Base, and member of the Pacific Coast Survey
Party which sledged to the W. end of the Hal Flood
Range in December 1940.
Mount Pisgah Island: see Smith Island.
MOUREAUX POINT: point which forms the N.
tip of the small peninsula marking the N. extremity
of Liége I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 63°58’S.,
61°46’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot,
1903-5, who named it for T. Moureaux, director of
the Parc Saint-Maur Observatory, near Paris.
MOUSSE, CAPE: small rocky cape, fringed by
many small islets and rocks, and backed by moraine
close to the S., protruding through the icecap about
2.2 mi. NE. of Cape Margerie, on Adélie Coast; in
66°48’S., 141°28’E. Photographed from the air by
USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE
under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because
several patches of lichens were found on the ex-
posed rocky surfaces. Not adopted: Cap des
Mousses [French].
Mousses, Cap des: see Mousse, Cape.
MOYES, CAPE: ice-covered point with prominent
rock exposures on its seaward flank, lying midway
between Cape Dovers and Roscoe Gl. on Queen
Mary Coast; in about 66°39’S., 96°24’E. Disc. by
the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, and named by
him for Morton H. Moyes, meteorologist with the
AAE Western Base party.
MOYES ISLETS: small group of islets about 2.5
mi. SE. of Cape-Pigeon Rocks, in the W. part of
Watt Bay, off George V Coast; in about 67°02’S.,
143°51’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson,
and named by him for Morton H. Moyes.
MOYES PEAK: small rock peak about 2,700 ft.
in el., projecting slightly above the icecap close N.
of Pearce Peak, some 18 mi. S’ of Cape Simpson, on
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°45’S., 61°14’E.
Disc. in February 1931 by the BANZARE under
Mawson, and named by him for Cdr. Morton H.
Moyes, RAN, in charge of echo sounding and car-
tographer of the exp. The approximate position of
this peak was verified in aerial photographs taken
by the USN Op. Hjp. on Feb. 26, 1947.
219
Muhlig-Hofman Mountains:
mann Mountains.
see Muhlig-Hof-
MUHLIG-HOFMANN MOUNTAINS: major group
of associated mountain features lying in the central
part of the New Schwabenland piedmont in front of
the edge of the polar plateau; centering in about
72°00’S., 5°00’E. The group has a longitudinal ex-
tent of approximately 50 to 90 mi. and includes
such major features as the Luz, Gablenz, Mayr,
and Bundermann Ranges. Disc. by the GerAE
under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for the di-
vision director of the German Air Ministry. Not
adopted: Muhlig-Hofman Mountains, Muhlig-Hof-
mann Mountains.
MULOCK INLET: re-entrant about 10 mi. wide,
in the W. part of Moore Embayment between Cape
Teall and Cape Lankester, along the W. edge of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 79°08’S., 160°40’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Lt.
George F. A. Mulock, RN, surveyor with the ex-
pedition.
Munken: see Monk Islets.
MURCHISON, MOUNT: mountain about 1,860
ft. in el., lying on the W. side of Mertz Gl. about 8
mi. SW. of Buchanan Bay, on George V Coast; in
about 67°18’S., 144°15’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE
under Mawson, who named it for Roderick Mur-
chison of Melbourne, a patron of the expedition.
MURCHISON, MOUNT: high peak lying W. of
the N. end of Lady Newnes Ice Shelf, in Victoria
Land; in about 73°28’S., 166°20’E. Disc. in Janu-
ary 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it
for Sir Roderick Impey Murchison, then general
secretary of the British Association.
Murdoch Nunatak: see Burn Murdoch Nunatak.
MURPHY, MOUNT: massive, snow-covered
mountain with steep, rocky slopes, rising to about
7,300 ft. in el. at the head of Amundsen Sea, on
the Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about
75°00’S., 108°15’W. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946.
Named by the US-ACAN for Robert Cushman
Murphy of the American Museum of Natural His-
tory, noted authority on Antarctic and Sub-Antarc-
tic bird life. While serving on the whaler Daisy
during the 1912-13 summer, he investigated wild
life and charted the Bay of Isles region of South
Georgia.
MURPHY BAY: bay aboyt 7 mi. wide lying im-
mediately NW. of Cape Bage, along George V Coast;
in about 67°42’S., 146°20’E. Disc. in 1912 by the
AAE under Mawson, who named it for Herbert D
Murphy, a member of the expedition.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
MURRAY, CAPE: the W. extremity of a group
of islands which lie about 0.5 mi. W. of the penin-
sula separating Hughes Bay and Charlotte Bay, off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°18’S., 61°41’W.
First charted by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99, who thought it to be part of Palmer Pen.
Named by De Gerlache for Sir John Murray, Brit-
ish marine zoologist and oceanographer, and an
ardent advocate of Antarctic research.
MURRAY, CAPE: low bluff lying approximately
midway between Barne and Mulock Inlets, along
the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°35’S.,
159°55’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4.
George R. M. Murray was temporary director of the
scientific staff and accompanied the exp. ship Dis-
covery as far as Cape Town.
MURRAY, MOUNT: sharp granite peak showing
evidence of glaciation, standing about 5 mi. SE.
of Mt. Smith on the N. side of Mawson Gl., in the
Prince Albert Mtns. in Victoria Land; in about
76°08’S., 162°00’E. First charted by the BrAE
under Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for James
Murray, biologist with the expedition.
MURRAY GLACIER: glacier about 2.5 mi. wide,
with a face on Colbeck Bay but flowing mainly W.
of Duke of York I. to merge with Dugdale Gl. at
the S. end of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria
Land; in about 71°36’S., 170°00’E. First charted
by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, 1898-1900,
who named it for Sir John Murray. Not adopted:
Sir John Murray Glacier.
Murray Gletscher: see Purvis Glacier.
MURRAY ISLETS: group of islets about 1.2 mi.
SSE. of Cape Whitson, off the S. coast of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 44°31’W. Disc.
in 1823 by Matthew Brisbane, who explored the S.
coast of Laurie I. under the direction of James
Weddell. Probably named for James Murray of
London, maker of the chronometer used on Wed-
dell’s voyage. Not adopted: Murrys Isles.
Murray Monolith: see Torlyn Mountain.
MURRAY MONOLITH: the detached front, about
1,250 ft. in el., of Torlyn Mtn., lying about 2.5 mi.
E. of Scullin Monolith on Mac-Robertson Coast; in
about 67°47’S., 66°55’E. Early in January 1930 the
BANZARE under Mawson sighted land in this area,
and an airplane flight was made from the exp.
ship Discovery for observation. On Feb. 13, 1931
Mawson landed on nearby Scullin Monolith.
Named for Sir Hubert Murray, Pres. of the Aus-
tralian and New Zealand Assn. for the Advance-
ment of Science, 1930-32. Not adopted: Mount
Torlyn.
220
Murry Peak: see Nemesis, Mount.
Murrys Isles: see Murray Islets.
MUSHROOM ISLAND: ice-covered islet lying
about 10 mi. WSW. of Cape Berteaux, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°53’S., 67°53’W. First
charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and so
named because of its resemblance to a mushroom
cap.
MUSSELMAN, CAPE: black rock promontory
forming the S. side of the entrance to Palmer Inlet,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°17’S., 61°00’ W.
Disc. by the USAS who explored this coast by land
and from the air from East Base in 1940. Named
for Lytton C. Musselman, member of the East Base
party which sledged across Dyer Plateau to the
Eternity Mountains.
MUTTON COVE: anchorage about 0.5 mi. E.
of Beer I., situated near the center of a small group
of islets about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°43’W.
Charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and
at the suggestion of Lt. R. E. D. Ryder, RN, captain
of the exp. ship Penola, named Mutton Cove, a
name which recalled his early days in a training
ship at Devonport.
Mutton Cove Island: see Beer Island.
Mutton Island: see Grass Island.
Nabbodden: see Tilley Nunatak.
NACHTIGAL PEAK: rocky peak on a spur pro-
jecting northwards from the SE. extremity of the
Allardyce Range, South Georgia. It rises to 3,800
ft. in el. and stands at the W. side of the head of
Cook Gl., about 4.5 mi. E. of Nordenskjéld Peak;
in’ 54°29/S., 36°14°W. The) name “Kleineric”
(meaning Little Peak) was given to this feature
by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schrader. At the
same time the name “Dr. Nachtigal Gletscher” or
“Nachtigal-Gletscher” was given to the southern
arm of Cook Gl., for Dr. Gustav Nachtigal (1834—
85), German physician and explorer of Africa.
The SGS, 1951-52, identified both of these features,
but reported that a separate name is not needed
for the southern arm of Cook Gl. Since the name
“Kleine Pic” (Little Peak) is not particularly
descriptive or distinctive for the peak now
described, the name has been rejected by the
Br—APC. The Br—APC recommended in 1954 that,
for the sake of historical continuity, the name
Nachtigal Peak be applied to this feature. Not
adopted: Kleine Pic.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
NAESS GLACIER: small glacier, which is
separated from Chapman Gl. to the N. by a rocky
ridge, flowing from the W. coast of Palmer Pen.
into George VI Sound; in 70°22’S., 67°55’W. First
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and
later named for Erling D. Naess, Mgr. of the Vest-
fold Whaling Co., who was of great assistance to
the BGLE, 1934-37.
NAMELESS GLACIER: glacier immediately N.
of Newnes Gl., descending steeply from the Cape
Adare peninsula into the E. part of Robertson
Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°36’S.,
170°17’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the
Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. This
was the only one of the Robertson Bay glaciers
left unnamed by C. E. Borchgrevink, who headed
the BrAE, 1898-1900.
NAMELESS POINT: point at the NW. side of
the entrance to Right Whale Bay, near the W.
end of the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°00’S.,
37°41’W. The point was charted and probably
named by DI personnel in the period 1926-30.
Nan Anderson, Cape: see Anderson, Cape.
NANSEN, MOUNT: tabular mountain, about
7,800 ft. in el., with precipitous walls, lying N. of
Reeves Gl. in Victoria Land; in about 74°35’S.,
162°45’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott. Named for Dr. Fridtjof Nansen,
noted Norwegian Arctic explorer, from whom Scott
obtained much practical information for his expe-
dition.
Nansen Bank: see Fridtjof Nansen Banks.
Nansen Harbour: see Stromness Harbor.
NANSEN ISLAND: island about 15 mi. long, in
a NE.-SW. direction, and 5 mi. wide, lying about
12 mi. SW. of Rabot I. in the Biscoe Is.; in about
66°09’S., 66°54’W. First charted by the FrAE,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for
Fridtjof Nansen.
Nansen Rocks: see Fridtjof Nansen Banks.
NANSEN SHEET: extensive sheet of ice about
30 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and 10 mi. wide,
fed by the Larsen, Reeves, Priestley, and Campbell
Glaciers and abutting against the N. side of Dry-
galski Ice Tongue along the coast of Victoria Land;
in about 74°30’S., 163°10’E. This feature was
explored in December 1908 by the South Magnetic
Polar Party of the BrAE under Shackleton, and
further explored in January and February 1912
by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott.
Frank Debenham, geologist with Scott’s exp.,
221
applied the name Nansen Sheet to this feature in
the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Soc., Vol.
75, April 1920.
NANTUCKET INLET: inlet about 6 mi. wide
which recedes about 13 mi. in a NW. direction
between the Smith and Bowman Peninsulas, along
the E. coast of Palmer Pen., in 74°35’S., 61°45’W.
Disc. by members of the USAS in a flight from
East Base on Dec. 30, 1940, and named for Nan-
tucket Island, Mass., home of early New England
whalers of the first half of the 19th century. Not
adopted: Fran Inlet, Inner-Taylor Inlet.
NAPIER BIRKS, MOUNT: conspicuous, pyra-
mid-shaped mountain about 3,800 ft. in el., at the
N. side of the mouth of Crane Glacier, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°18’S., 62°11’W. In
1928 Sir Hubert Wilkins gave the name Mount
Napier Birks, after Napier Birks of Adelaide,
Australia, to two conspicuous, black peaks which
he observed and photographed from the air as
lying close N. of his Crane Channel. This coast
was charted by the FIDS in 1947, but it has not
been possible to identify Wilkins’ Mount Napier
Birks. Since Crane Channel has now been defi-
nitely identified as Crane Glacier, it is recom-
mended that the name Mount Napier Birks be
given to this conspicuous mountain lying close N.
of the mouth of the glacier.
NAPIER MOUNTAINS: group of more-or-less
separated peaks, the highest about 6,000 ft. in el.,
extending about 40 mi. in a NW.-SE. direction and
centering about 45 mi. S. of Cape Batterbee, in
Enderby Land; in about 66°35’S., 53°30’E. Disc.
in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson.
The Hon. John Mellis Napier was a judge of the
Supreme Court of South Australia, 1924-42. Not
adopted: Napier Range.
Napier Range: see Napier Mountains.
NARES, MOUNT: rounded mountain about 7
mi. SW. of Mt. Albert Markham, on the W. side
of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°32’S., 157°25’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who
named it for Sir George S. Nares, captain of the
Challenger, 1872-74, during part of its cruise,
leader of the Arctic exp., 1875-76, and member
of the Ship Committee for Scott’s expedition.
Narrow Isle: see Gibbs Island.
NARROWS, THE: narrow channel between
Pourquoi Pas I. and Blaiklock I., connecting
Bigourdan and Bourgeois Fjords, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 67°36’S., 67°12’W. Disc. and
given this descriptive name by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
NASH, MOUNT: mountain about 4,200 ft. in
el., standing about 13 mi. WNW. of the head of
Keller Inlet and 12 mi. NNE. of Mt. Owen, on the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°14’S., 62°20’W.
Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who
named it for H. H. Nash, of Pittsburgh, Pa., a
contributor to the expedition.
Ndsudden: see Naze, The.
NATTRISS HEAD: small but prominent rock
headland marking the S. side of the entrance to
Drygalski Fjord on the SE. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°50’S., 35°55’W. Charted by the GerAE, 1911-
12, under Filchner. It was named Nattriss Point
after E. A. Nattriss, of the Crown Agents for the
Colonies, following survey by DI personnel in 1927.
The name Nattriss Head is approved for this fea-
ture because the term head is a more suitable
descriptive term than point, and because accept-
ance of this form will avoid confusion with Nattriss
Point (also named for E. A. Nattriss) on Saunders
I. in the South Sandwich Islands. Not adopted:
Nattriss Point (q.v.).
NATTRISS POINT: point which marks the E.
tip of Saunders I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in
57°48’S., 26°22’W. Charted in 1930 by DI person-
nel and named by them for E. A. Nattriss.
Nattriss Point: see Nattriss Head.
NAUTILUS HEAD: prominent headland, about
3,200 ft. in el., near the NE. extremity of Pourquoi
Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°39’S.,
67°07’ W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS
who named it after the submarine Nautilus in
Jules Verne’s Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the
Sea. Other features on Pourquoi Pas I. are named
for characters in this book.
Navy, Mount: see Butler, Mount.
Navy Range: see Colbert Range.
NAZE, THE: peninsula on the N. coast of James
Ross I. which marks the S. side of the E. entrance
to Sidney Herbert Sound and extends about 5 mi.
NE. toward the south-central shore of Vega I.,
situated S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°57’S., 57°32’W. Disc. and named ‘“Nasudden”
by the SwedAE ,1901-4, under Nordenskjold. The
recommended form is the English version used by
Nordenskjold. Not adopted: Nasudden [Swedish].
NECK OR NOTHING PASSAGE: narrow pas-
sage leading from Desolation Hbr. between the S.
end of Desolation I. and a small group of islets
about 0.2 mi. southward, in the South Shetland
222
Is.; in 62°28’S., 60°23’W. The name was applied
prior to 1930, probably by whalers who frequented
Desolation Hbr. and who at times ran their vessels
to sea via this passage to escape severe easterly
gales. Not adopted: Neck-or-Nothing Passage.
Needle, The: see Spire, The.
NEEDLE PEAK: sharply pointed black peak
about 1,200 ft. in el., standing about 5 mi. ENE. of
Barnard Pt. on the S. coast of Livingston I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°43’S., 60°12’W.
The peak was named on a chart based upon a
survey of DI personnel in 1935.
Neil Peak: see Neill Peak.
NEILL PEAK: mountain about 1,575 ft. in el.,
standing about 4 mi. SW. of Scullin Monolith, on
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°50’S., 66°36’E.
Disc. on Feb. 13, 1931 by the BANZARE under
Mawson, who presumably applied the name. Not
adopted: Heil Peak, Neil Peak.
Neilsen Glacier: see Nielsen Glacier.
NEKO HARBOR: small bay in the inner NE.
corner of Andvord Bay, along the W. coast of Pal-
mer Pen.; in about 64°49’S., 62°37’W. First seen
and roughly charted by the BelgAE under De Ger-
lache, 1897-99. Named after Messrs. Chr. Salve-
sen’s floating factory Neko, which operated in the
South Shetland Is. and Palmer Pen. area for many
seasons between 1911-12 and 1923-24, and often
used this bay. The name was published by the
Scottish geologist David Ferguson in 1921, follow-
ing his visit to this area in 1913.
NELSON CHANNEL: channel between Candle-
mas and Vindication Islands, in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 57°03’S., 26°43’W. Probably first
sighted by Capt. James Cook, discoverer of these
islands in 1775. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel
on the Discovery II, and named for Lt. A. L. Nelson,
RNR, who was chief officer and navigator of the
ship. Not adopted: Nelson Strait.
NELSON CLIFFS: cliffs about 1,770 ft. in el.,
standing on the N. shore of Victoria Land, about
7.5 mi. NW. of Atkinson Cliffs; in about 71°14’S.,
168°45’E. First charted in 1911 by the Northern
Party of the BrAE under Scott, and named for
Edward W. Nelson, biologist of the expedition.
Not adopted: Nelson Cliff.
NELSON ISLAND: island about 10 mi. long and
about 7 mi. wide, lying W. of King George I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°17’S., 59°02’W.
The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now
established international usage. Not adopted:
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Leipzig Island, Nelson’s Island, Nelson’s Isles,
O’Cain Island, Strachans Island.
Nelson Strait: see Nelson Channel.
NELSON STRAIT: strait lying between Nelson
and Robert Islands, in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°22’S., 59°15’W. Probably first charted in 1821
by Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, American sealer,
who named it Harmony Strait. Capt. George
Powell named it King George’s Strait in 1822, while
James Weddell, Master, RN, named it Parrys
Straits on his chart of 1825. It has since become
known as Nelson Strait, probably taking its name
from Nelson Island, which it adjoins on the east.
Not adopted: Harmony Strait, King George’s
Strait, Parrys Straits.
NEMESIS, MOUNT: mountain, about 2,600 ft.
in el., which lies 2 mi. NE. of the seaward extrem-
ity of Roman Four Promontory and close N. of
Neny Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°12’S., 66°54’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. The name Mount Nemesis
is believed to have been first given by members
of the USAS, 1939-41. Not adopted: Murry Peak,
Nemesis Peak, Nemisis Mountain.
Nemisis Mountain: see Nemesis, Mount.
NEMO COVE: small cove 6 mi. SW. of Nautilus
Head on the SE. side of Pourquoi Pas I., off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°43’S., 67°17’W.
First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill.
Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named after
Captain Nemo, designer and captain of the Nauti-
lus in Jules Verne’s Twenty Thousand Leagues
Under the Sea.
NEMO PEAK: conspicuous peak about 2,800 ft.
in el., standing about 1 mi. NE. of Nipple Peak
in the N. part of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.,
in 64°46’S., 63°16’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-
99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a
chart based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel in
the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming.
NENY BAY: small indentation in the W. coast
of Palmer Pen. which is bounded on the W. by
Neny Island, and on the NW. and SE. respectively
by Stonington I. and Roman Four Promontory;
in 68°12’S., 66°58’W. The bay was first charted
by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-47. The name,
derived from Neny Island, was suggested by mem-
bers of East Base of the USAS, 1939-41, who
referred to it as Neny Island Bay. Not adopted:
Neny Island Bay.
Neny Fjord: see Little Thumb.
223
NENY FJORD: bay about 10 mi. long in an
E.-W. direction and 5 mi. wide, between Red Rock
Ridge and Roman Four Promontory along the
W. coast of Palmer Pen., in 68°16/S., 66°50’W.
This coast was first explored in 1909 by Dr. Jean
B. Charcot who, it appears, gave this name to the
channel between Horseshoe I. and Camp Pt., in
67°55’S., 67°15’'W. The BGLE made a detailed
survey of this area in 1936-37, and in correlating
their work with that of Charcot applied the name
Neny Fjord to the bay between Red Rock Ridge
and Roman Four Promontory, which is probably
about 20 mi. S. of the position originally implied
by Charcot. The name has become established in
this latter position through international accept-
ance and use.
Neny Glacier: see Neny Trough.
Neny Glacier Island: see Pyrox Islet.
NENY ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long and
about 2,200 ft. in el., lying about 1 mi. WNW. of
Roman Four Promontory and directly N. of the
mouth of Neny Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°03’W. Disc. by the BGLE
under Rymill, 1934-37, and named after nearby
Neny Fjord. Not adopted: Neny Islands.
Neny Island Bay: see Neny Bay.
NENY MATTERHORN: sharp, pyramid-shaped
peak, more than 4,000 ft. in el., standing near
the NW. end of the Blackwall Mtns. on the S. side
of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°20’S., 66°51’W.
First roughly surveyed in 1936-37 by the BGLE
under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1948-49 by the
FIDS. The name was apparently first used by
members of the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and
the FIDS, and derives from its location near Neny
Fjord, and its resemblance to the Swiss Matter-
horn.
NENY TROUGH: glacier-filled valley which
extends from the head of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.,
eastward for about 4 mi., and then SE. for at least
25 mi.; centering near 68°22’S., 66°15’W. It is
probably more than 3,000 ft. in el. at its highest
point about 9 mi. S. of Beehive Hill, from which
divide one glacier flows NW. to Neny Fjord; the
other flows SE. for an undetermined distance.
The NW. mouth of the feature was first surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, but its great
extent was not then known. The trough itself
was first seen from the air in May 1940, and was
sledged through in January 1941 by members of
the USAS. The trough was named by USAS for
its association with Neny Fjord, its NW. terminus.
Not adopted: Neny Glacier, Neny Valley.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Neny Valley: see Neny Trough.
NEPTUNE GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast
of Alexander I Island, about 11 mi. long and 4
mi. wide, flowing E. into George VI Sound to the
S. of Triton Pt.; in 71°44’S., 68°177W. The coast
in this vicinity was first explored from the air
and partially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth
on Noy. 23, 1935. The glacier was roughly sur-
veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The
name, after the planet Neptune, was given by
FIDS following their survey in 1949.
NEPTUNES BELLOWS: channel on the SE. side
of Deception I. forming the entrance to Port Foster,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°34’W.
The name was appended by early American sealers
because of the strong gusts experienced in this
narrow channel. Not adopted: Passe du Chal-
lenger [French].
NEPTUNES WINDOW: narrow gap between
two rock pillars, situated close E. of Whalers Bay
on the SE. side of Deception I., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°33’W. So named by Lt.
Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, following his survey of
Deception I., in 1948-49, because weather and ice
conditions in the approach to Neptunes Bellows
could conveniently be observed from this gap.
NESS, MOUNT: northernmost of the Batterbee
Mtns., about 6,200 ft. in el., standing about 9 mi.
NNE. of the summit of Mt. Bagshawe and 14 mi.
inland from George VI Sound on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 71°20’S., 66°52’W. This moun-
tain was first seen and photographed from the air
on Noy. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was
mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg.
It was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill,
and later named for Mrs. Patrick Ness, who con-
tributed towards the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37.
Neufortuna Bay: see Ocean Harbor.
NEUMAYER, MOUNT: most southern of the
peaks lying between David and Larsen Glaciers,
in Victoria Land; in about 75°16’S., 162°13’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who
named it for Dr. Georg von Neumayer, German
geophysicist, who was active in organizing South
Polar exploration.
NEUMAYER CHANNEL: channel about 16 mi.
long, in a NESW. direction, and about 1.5 mi.
wide, separating Anvers I. from Wiencke I. and
Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S.,
63°30’W. The SW. entrance to this channel was
seen by Dallmann, leader of the Ger. exp., 1873-74,
who named it Roosen Channel. The BelgAE,
1897-99, under De Gerlache, sailed through the
224
channel and named it for George von Neumayer.
The second name has been accepted by the
US-ACAN because of more general usage. Not
adopted: Roosen Channel.
NEUMAYER ESCARPMENT: northeast-facing
escarpment, rising to about 11,800 ft. in el., on the
E. side of a projection of the polar plateau in New
Schwabenland. The N. side of this projection
overlooks Penck Trough. Disc. by the GerAE
under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Georg von
Neumayer.
NEUMAYER GLACIER: large glacier flowing to
the W. side of Cumberland West Bay, on the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°41’W.
Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden-
skjold, and named for Georg von Neumayer.
Neu-Schwabenland: see New Schwabenland.
NEWALL, MOUNT: peak over 6,000 ft. in el.,
rising about 10 mi. NNW. of Taylor Glacier Dry
Valley, on the coast of Victoria Land; in about
77°32’S., 162°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, who named it for one of the men
who helped raise funds to send a relief ship for
the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Newell.
NEWARK BAY: bay about 2 mi. long, entered
at the SE. end of Fanning Ridge, along the S.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°21’S., 36°56’W. The
presence of this bay seems to have been first noted
in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who
roughly charted a small inlet in this approximate
position. The name appears to have been given
in about 1927, and is now well established in
international usage.
NEW BEDFORD INLET: ice-filled inlet about
20 mi. long, in an E.-W. direction, and averaging
15 mi. wide, lying between Cape Kidson and Cape
Brooks along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in .
73°22’S., 61°15’W. Disc. and photographed from
the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS,
and named after New Bedford, Mass., the center
of the New England whaling industry in the mid-
dle of the 19th century. Not adopted: Douglas
Inlet.
Newell, Mount: see Newall, Mount.
NEWELL POINT: point marking the easternmost
of the N. extremities of Robert I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S., 59°34’°W. The point was
charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II.
New Fortuna Bay; New Fortune Bay: see Ocean
Harbor.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
NEW GLACIER: small glacier flowing ENE. from
the ice-covered plateau at the S. side of Mackay
Gl., terminating at the SW side of Granite Hbr.
immediately N. of Mt. England, in Victoria Land;
in about 77°01’S., 162°28’E. Charted and named
by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott.
NEW HARBOR: bay about 10 mi. wide and
indenting the coast for a distance of about 8 mi.,
lying between Cape Bernacchi and Butter Pt.
along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°35’S.,
164°50’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott, and so named because this new harbor was
found while the Discovery was seeking the farthest
possible southern anchorage along the coast of
Victoria Land.
New Harbor Glacier: see Ferrar Glacier.
New Harbour Dry Valley: see Taylor Glacier Dry
Valley.
New Harbour Heights: see Barnes, Mount.
Newnes, Cape: see Nunez, Cape.
Newnes Glacier: see Frank Newnes Glacier.
NEWNES GLACIER: valley glacier flowing into
the S. part of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria
Land; in about 71°39’S., 170°16’E. First charted
in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who
named it for Sir George Newnes, sponsor of the
expedition. Not adopted: Sir George Newnes Gla-
cier.
NEW PLYMOUTH: small embayment bordered
with an extensive line of beaches, lying S. of Start
Pt. at the W. end of Livingston I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°35’S., 61°08’W. The name
dates back to at least 1822 and is now established
international usage. Not adopted: President’s
Harbor, Rugged Harbor.
NEW ROCK: rock about 300 ft. in el. lying
about 0.75 mi. off the SW. coast of Deception I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°01’S., 60°44’W.
The name of the rock derives from its relatively
recent charting in about 1929. Not adopted: Roca
Nueva [Spanish], Rocher Nouveau [French].
NEW SCHWABENLAND: that portion of Queen
Maud Land that lies between 12°00’W. and
16°00’E., and consists of the upland area marking
the edge of the continental plateau back of Prin-
cess Astrid Coast and Princess Martha Coast. This
area was surveyed from the air and mapped photo-
grammetricaily by the GerAE, 1938-39, under
Ritscher. The name has a dual significance
honoring both the exp. ship, the Schwabenland,
225
and the province of that name in Germany. Not
adopted: Neu-Schwabenland [German].
New South Shetland: see South Shetland Islands.
NEW ZEALAND, MOUNT: prominent peak
about 30 mi. WNW. of Mt. Melbourne, standing to
the W. of Mt. Queensland, in Victoria Land; in
about 74°05’S., 163°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE
under Scott, 1901-4, who named this peak because
of the generous assistance given the exp. by both
govt. and people of New Zealand.
NEYT, CAPE: promontory on the NE. shore of
Liége I., about 2 mi. S. of Moureaux Pt., in the
Palmer Arch.; in 64°00’S., 61°45’W. Disc. by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named
by him for General Neyt, a supporter of the expe-
dition.
NIBLETS, THE: group of rocks between Harp
Islet and Beer I., lying about 8 mi. W. of Ferin
Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S.,
65°44’W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934—
37, under Rymill.
Nicholas, Cape: see Nicholas, Mount.
Nicholas, Cape; Nicolas, Cape: see Nicolas Rocks.
NICHOLAS, MOUNT: mountain, about 4,800 ft.
in el., standing about 5.5 mi. SSW. of Cape Brown
and forming the N. limit of the Douglas Range on
the E. side of Alexander I Island; in 69°22’S.,
69°50’W. This feature was first seen and roughly
charted from a distance in 1909 by the FrAE under
Charcot, who named it “Ile Nicolas II’ after
Nicholas II, then reigning tsar of Russia. The
FrAE maps showed it as an island, or possible
headland, separated by a channel from Alexander I
Island. The coast in this vicinity was photo-
graphed from the air in 1937 by the BGLE, but
Charcot’s name, which was altered to “Cape
Nicholas,’ was applied in error to the seaward
bulge of Mt. Calais about 13 mi. to the NNW.
Further surveys in 1948 by the FIDS have defi-
nitely identified the feature originally named “Ile
Nicolas II” by Charcot as the mountain described.
Not adopted: Cape Nicholas, Ile Nicolas II
[French].
NICHOLL HEAD: bold W. extremity of the ridge,
about 3,000 ft. in el., separating Dogs Leg Fjord
and Square Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 67°47’S., 67°06’°W. First surveyed in 1936 by
the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by
the FIDS and named for Timothy M. Nicholl,
FIDS base leader at the Argentine Is. in 1948 and
1949.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Nicolas II, Ile: see Nicholas, Mount.
NICOLAS ROCKS: group of rocks marking the
NW. extremity of the Larsen Is., about 4 mi. NW. ©
of Return Pt., Coronation I., in the South Orkney
Is.; in 60°35’S., 46°06’W. Disc. by Capt. George
Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December
1821. Named Cape Nicolas by Powell after the
feast day of Saint Nicholas, December 6, the ap-
proximate day of discovery. Powell’s spelling
“Nicolas” has been retained because of long usage,
but the term rocks is considered more descriptive
of the feature. Not adopted: Cape Nicholas, Cape
Nicolas.
NIELSEN BAY: a recession about 5 mi. wide in
the coast line of Mac-Robertson Coast, lying be-
tween Cape Daly and Strahan Gl.; in about
67°33’/S., 64°19’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under
Mawson in February 1931. Not adopted: Nielson
Bay.
NIELSON GLACIER: glacier flowing into the
SE. part of Relay Bay, in the Robertson Bay area
of northern Victoria Land; in about 71°31’S.,
169°40’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1898-1900,
under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Prof.
Yngvar Nielsen, of Christiania University. Not
adopted: Neilsen Glacier, Ungvar Neilsen Glacier,
Ynegvar Nielsen Glacier, Yugvar Nielson Glacier.
Nielson Bay: see Nielsen Bay.
NIGG ROCK: rock about 500 ft. in el., lying 0.5
mi. NW. of Route Pt., off the NW. tip of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is., in 60°43’S., 44°51’W. The
rock was probably first sighted by Capt. George
Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their
joint cruise in 1821. Charted by the ScotNAE,
1902-4, under Dr. William S. Bruce, who named it
after the birthplace of his wife in Scotland. Not
adopted: Eigg Rock.
NILSEN, MOUNT: peak standing NW. of Mt.
Helen Washington in the Rockefeller Mtns., on
Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°03’S., 155°25’W.
Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE, and named by Byrd
for Captain Nilsen, of the Norwegian whaler, C. A.
Larsen, which towed the City of New York through
the pack ice.
Nilsen Mountains: see Thorvald Nilsen Moun-
tains.
NILS LARSEN GLACIER: glacier descending
in a westerly direction to the N. side of Norvegia
Bay where it forms a short glacier tongue project-
ing into the sea, on the W. coast of Peter I Island;
in about: 68°47’S., 90°42’W. In February 1929 a
Nor. exp. under Nils Larsen carried out a series of
226
investigations of this island. Named for Nils
Larsen.
NIMROD, MOUNT: peak about 10,500 ft. in el.,
standing about 8 mi. SE. of Mt. Saunders, in the
N. part of the Dominion Range; in about 85°24’S.,
168°40’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, and named after the exp. ship Nimrod.
NIMROD GLACIER: major glacier, about 10 mi.
wide in its lower reaches and of undetermined
length, which descends from the interior high-
lands to the head of Shackleton Inlet, at the W.
side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°25’S., 161°00’E.
Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-
47. The name Nimrod Glacier, given by the
US-ACAN, is in association with Shackleton Inlet
and is for the Nimrod, exp. ship of the BrAE,
1907-9, under Shackleton.
NINNIS GLACIER: heavily hummocked and
crevassed glacier descending steeply from the high
interior to the sea in a broad valley, on George V
Coast; in about 68°25’S., 147°05’E. Disc. by the
AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson. Named for Lt. B. E.
S. Ninnis, who lost his life on the far east sledge
journey of the exp. on Dec. 14, 1912.
Ninnis Glacier Ice Tongue: see Ninnis Glacier
Tongue.
NINNIS GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue
which is the seaward extension of Ninnis Glacier,
averaging about 20 mi. wide and projecting sea-
ward at least 75 mi. in December 1912 at the time
of discovery, off George V Coast; in about 67°40’S.,
148°00’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Maw-
son, and named after Ninnis Glacier. Not
adopted: Ninnis Glacier Ice Tongue.
NIPPLE PEAK: peak about 2,200 ft. in el., stand-
ing about 1 mi. NE. of Channel Gl., in the N. part
of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S.,
63°17’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache. Charted and named in 1944 by the
FIDS.
NIVEA, MOUNT: conspicuous, snow-topped
mountain, about 4,200 ft. in el., standing at the
head of Sunshine Gl., Coronation I., South Orkney
Is.; in 60°35’S., 45°20’W. A number of rock towers
lie on the NW. side. First surveyed by the FIDS in
1948-49, and named by them after the snow petrel
(Pagodroma nivea) which breeds in this area.
NIZNIK ISLET: islet in the N. part of George VI
Sound, lying near the coast of Palmer Pen.; in
69°47’S., 68°30’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48,
under Ronne, who named it for the Theodore T.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Niznik family of Baltimore, Md., contributors to
the expedition. Not adopted: Niznik Island.
NOBBY: rock at the SE. end of the Clerke Rocks,
lying some 45 mi. ESE. of the SE. end of South
Georgia; in 55°02’S., 34°38’W. The Clerke Rocks
were disc. by Capt. James Cook in 1775. Nobby
was probably given this descriptive name by DI
personnel, who made surveys of the South Georgia
area in the period 1926-30.
NOBBY NUNATAK: nunatak about 1,000 ft. in
el. on the SE. shore of Hope Bay, standing 1 mi.
S. of Lake Boeckella and 1 mi. E. of Mt. Flora, at
the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°25’S., 56°59’W.
This area was first explored by a party under
J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4.
Nobby Nunatak was first charted and named by
the FIDS in 1945. The name is descriptive.
NOBLE, MOUNT: peak about 4,000 ft. in el.,
standing about 2 mi. W. of Gibbon Bay in the E.
portion of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.;
in about 60°40’S., 45°18’W. Although presumably
first sighted by Capt. Nathaniel Palmer and Capt.
George Powell in 1821, the peak was named by
James Weddell in 1823 for his friend James Noble
of Edinburgh, orientalist.
NOBLE PEAK: peak about 1,800 ft. in el., stand-
ing 1 mi. SW. of Lockley Pt. and marking the NE.
end of a prominent ridge on the NW. side of
Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°48’S.,
63°25’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De
Gerlache. The name appears on a chart based
on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery,
but may reflect an earlier naming.
NOBLE ROCKS: group of about 19 rocks that
form the easternmost group in the De Dion Its.,
lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°52’S., 68°41’W. The De Dion Its.
were first sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by
the FrAE under Charcot. Noble Rocks were sur-
veyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who so named them
because of their association with Emperor Islet.
NOEL HILL: conspicuous slate knob at the S.
side of. Marian Cove, King George I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in about 62°13’S., 58°44’W. The
name is used by the Scettish geologist David Fergu-
son in a 1921 report based upon his investigations
of King George I. in 1913-14, but may reflect an
earlier naming by whalers.
Nogood Lagoon: see Little Jason Lagoon.
Nordenskiéld Barrier:
Tongue.
see Nordenskjold Ice
227
Nordenskiold Glacier: see Nordenskjéld Glacier.
Nordenskidld Glacier Tongue; Nordenskidld Ice
Barrier; Nordenskidld Ice Tongue; Nordenskiold
Tongue: see Nordenskjold Ice Tongue.
NORDENSKJOLD COAST: that portion of the
E. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Long-
ing, in 64°33’S., 58°50’W., to Cape Fairweather, in
65°00’S., 61°05’°W. The name was proposed in
1909 by Edwin Swift Balch, for Dr. Otto Norden-
skjold, Swedish geographer and leader of the
SwedAE, 1901-4, along this coast in 1902. Not
adopted: Terre Otto Nordenskjold [French].
NORDENSKJOLD GLACIER: large glacier flow-
ing northward to the head of Cumberland East
Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°22’S.,
36°23’W. Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, and
named for Dr. Otto Nordenskjéld, leader of the
expedition. Not adopted: Nordenskiold Glacier,
Nordenskjold Glacier.
NORDENSKJOLD ICE TONGUE: glacier tongue
about 5 mi. wide, forming an extension of Mawson
Gl. along the coast of Victoria Land; in about
76°12’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott, at which time it extended about 20
mi. into Ross Sea. Scott named it for Dr. Otto
Nordenskjold. This feature had become well estab-
lished by the name Nordenskjéld Ice Tongue prior
to initiation of systematic application of common
specific names to a glacier and its glacier tongue.
Although this feature is a glacier tongue, the
generic term ice tongue is retained in the name
to reduce ambiguity. Not adopted: Nordenskidld
Barrier, Nordenskidld Glacier Tongue, Norden-
skidld Ice Barrier, Nordenskidld Ice Tongue, Nor-
denskidld Tongue.
NORDENSKJOLD PEAK: conspicuous, partly
snow-covered mountain, about 7,100 ft. in el.,
standing near the head of Nordenskj6éld Glacier,
in the Allardyce Range of South Georgia; in
54°29’S., 36°22’W. The name derives from nearby
Nordenskjold Glacier, and was given by David
Ferguson, Scottish geologist who visited South
Georgia in 1911-12.
NORDKAMMEN CREST: massive mountain
about 3,400 ft. in el., which extends 4 mi. in a N.-S.
direction and forms the N. portion of the Masson
Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-Robertson
Coast; in about 67°47’S., 62°52’E. It was mapped
and named by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken on a Nor. exp. under Christen-
sen in January 1937. The name is descriptive,
meaning “north comb.” Not adopted: Nordkam-
men [Norwegian], North Crest.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
NORMANNA REEF: reef lying near the center of
the S. entrance to The Sound in the Melchior Is.,
Palmer Arch.; in 64°21’S., 62°59’W. The name ap-
pears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI
personnel, but this may reflect an earlier naming
by whalers. The name presumably derives from
the Normanna Whaling Co. of Sandefjord, Norway,
or one of its ships.
NORMANNA STRAIT: strait about 1 mi. wide
betwen Signy I. and Coronation I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°38’W. Disc. by Matthew
Brisbane, who roughly charted the S. coast of
Coronation I. under the direction of James Weddell
in 1823. The name appears on a chart of these
islands by Capt. Peter Sgrile in 1912-13, and is prob-
ably named after the Normanna Whaling Co. of
Sandefjord, Norway, operators of the floating fac-
tory ship Normanna.
NORSEMAN POINT: easternmost point of Neny
I., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°00’W. First surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Named by the
FIDS after the Norseman airplane which landed
near the point to relieve the FIDS party on Stoning-
ton I. in February 1950.
North, Cape: see Alexandra, Cape.
NORTH, CAPE: cape marking the northernmost
point of South Georgia, near the W. end of the is-
land; in 53°58’S., 37°44’W. This name was first
applied to the NW. tip of South Georgia on a map
by Capt. James Cook in 1775. Since 1912 the name
has become well established for the northernmost
point of the island, which is in keeping with the
geographical position inferred by the name. Not
adopted: North Cape.
NORTH, CAPE: vertical, snow-covered cliff over
200 ft. in el., about 19 mi. WNW. of Yule Bay, in
Victoria Land; in about 70°35’S., 165°30’E. Disc.
in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and so named be-
cause this was the northernmost land which his
exp. saw along this coast.
NORTHAMPTON, MOUNT: high peak standing
between Mt. Vernon Harcourt and Mt. Brewster,
in the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land;
in about 72°38’S., 169°15’E. Disc. in January 1841
by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for the
Marquis of Northampton, then pres. of the Royal
Society.
North Anchorage: see Visca Anchorage.
228
NORTH BAY: cove forming the N. head of Prince
Olav Hbr., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in
54°04’S., 37°09’W. Probably named by DI person-
nel who charted Prince Olav Hbr. in 1929.
NORTHCLIFFE GLACIER: glacier descending
into Robinson Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about
66°45’S., 98°48’E. Disc. by the AAH, 1911-14, under
Mawson, and named for Lord Northcliffe, of Lon-
don, a patron of the expedition.
North Crest: see Nordkammen Crest.
NORTHEAST GLACIER: steep, heavily-crevassed
glacier, about 13 mi. long and 5 mi. wide at its
mouth, which flows from McLeod Hill westward
and then SW. into Marguerite Bay between the
Debenham Is. and Roman Four Promontory; in
68°09’S., 66°58’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1940 by mem-
bers of the USAS, who first used this glacier as a
sledging route, and so named by them because it
lies at the NE. side of their base at Stonington
Island. Not adopted: North East Glacier.
NORTHERN FOOTHILLS: low hills at the S.
end of the peninsula surmounted by Mt. Abbott, in
Victoria Land; in about 74°57’S., 163°55’E. So
named by the Northern Party of the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13, because during field operations In-
expressible Island, on the opposite side of Evans
Cove, was originally referred to as the Southern
Foothills.
NORTH FORELAND: cape forming the NE. ex-
tremity of King George I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in about 61°53’S., 57°40’W. Named on Oct.
16, 1819 by Capt. William Smith in the brig
Williams. Since this was the easternmost point
which he saw on this trip, he named it after the
headland in England which forms its most easterly
land. Not adopted: Cape North Foreland.
North Foreland, Cape: see North Foreland.
North Fork: see Taylor Glacier.
North Island: see Hansen Island.
NORTH POINT: the N. tip of Signy I., in the
South Orkney Is., in 60°41’S., 45°38’W. The name
appears on a chart based upon a survey of the
South Orkney Is. by DI personnel on the Discovery
IT in 1933.
NORTHROP, CAPE: conspicuous, rocky bluff
about 3,800 ft. in el., forming the N. side of the en-
trance to Whirlwind Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°24’S., 65°16’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert
Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and named for
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Jack Northrop, designer of the Lockheed airplane
used on the expedition. The cape was photo-
graphed by the USAS in 1940 and charted by the
FIDS in 1947.
Norths Coast: (in vicinity of 127°45’E.) the de-
cision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since the
configuration of the coast does not permit delimita-
tion of a segment of adequate length, and: the name
Norths Highland has been reapplied to the highland
terminating in Cape Goodenough, in approximately
the position given by Wilkes. See: Norths High-
land.
NORTHS HIGHLAND: ice-covered upland, ris-
ing to several thousand ft. in el., close S. of Cape
Goodenough, surmounting the central portion of
Banzare Coast between Maury and Porpoise Bays;
centering in about 66°45’S., 126°15’E. The name
North’s High Land, after James H. North, acting
master on the brig Porpoise, was applied to an ele-
vated coastal area by the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42. Subsequently, because of inadequate data
regarding the nature of this feature, the name
Norths Coast was applied to a restricted coastal
area in the vicinity of 127°45’E. Identification of
Norths Highland is based upon correlation of
Wilkes’ chart with the US-ACAN reconnaissance
map of 1955 compiled from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The name Norths
Highland is adopted for this recently verified up-
land region in 126°15’E. in keeping with Wilkes’
original naming. Not adopted: North’s High Land,
North’s Land.
North’s Land: see Norths Highland.
NORTHSTAR ISLET: low rocky islet 1 mi. NW.
of the W. tip of Neny I., lying in Marguerite Bay
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S.,
67°07’ W. First roughly charted in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed by the FIDS in
1947, and named by them for the U.S.M.S. North
Star, one of the ships of the USAS, 1939-41, which
visited Marguerite Bay in 1940.
North Undine Harbour: see Undine Harbor.
NORVEGIA, CAPE: prominent cape at the NE.
side of the entrance to Seal Bay, on Princess Martha
Coast; in about 71°20’S., 12°20’W. Disc. by a Nor.
exp. under Riiser-Larsen in February 1930 while on
an airplane flight from the Norvegia, the ship in
which the exp. was made. The cape was named
by Riiser-Larsen for the ship.
NORVEGIA BAY: small bay between Cape Ingrid
and the projecting glacier tongue of Nils Larsen
Gl., along the W. coast of Peter I Island; in about
68°48’S., 90°44’W. Named after the Norvegia, the
229
Norwegian research vessel which visited Peter I
Island in February 1929.
NORWAY BIGHT: bay about 4 mi. wide, indent-
ing the S. coast of Coronation I. between Cape Meier
and Mansfield Pt., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°37'S., 45°49’W. The name appears on a chart
by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain who
made a running survey of the South Orkney Is.
in 1912-13. Not adopted: Norway Fjord.
Norway Fjord: see Norway Bight.
NORWAY ROCKS: reef of rocks about 4 mi. S.
of Bernacchi Head, the SE. extremity of Franklin
I., in Ross Sea; in about 76°17’S., 168°22’E. Disc.
in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross. Named by C. E.
Borchgrevink, native of Norway, leader of the BrAE,
1898-1900.
NOVILLE, MOUNT: mountain standing about 8
mi. S. of Mt. Blackburn on the E. side of Scott Gl.,
in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°26’S.,
145°30’W. Disc. by the Geological Party of the
ByrdAE in 1934, and named for George O. Noville,
executive officer of the expedition.
Noville Mountains: see Hudson Mountains.
NOVILLE PENINSULA: peninsula projecting N.
from Thurston Pen. and terminating in Cape
Palmer; in about 71°45’S., 96°50’W. This penin-
sula was delineated from aerial photographs made
by the USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named for
George O. Noville.
Novoliskigletscher: see Novosilski Glacier.
NOVOSILSKI BAY: bay, about 1 mi. wide, lying
8 mi. SE. of Leon Head, along the S. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°39’S., 36°19’W. Disc. by a Russ.
exp. under Bellingshausen in 1819 and named for
Lt. Paul Novosilski of the Mirnyy, which accom-
panied Bellingshausen’s flagship the Vostok. Not
adopted: Nowoselskji Bai [German].
NOVOSILSKI GLACIER: glacier, about 6.5 mi.
long and 3 mi. wide, flowing in a westerly direction
from the SW. slopes of the Salvesen Range to No-
vosilski Bay on the S. coast of South Georgia; in
54°40’S., 36°18’W. First surveyed and named by
a Ger. exp., 1928-29, under Kohl-Larsen. The
name derives from the nearby Novosilski Bay. Not
adopted: Novoliskigletscher [German].
Nowoselskji Bai: see Novosilski Bay.
NOZAL PEAK: ice-covered peak probably over
2,000 ft. in el., standing 1 mi. N. of Shackleton Peak
and about midway between Regnard Peaks and the
SE. flank of Mt. Scott, on the W. coast of Palmer
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Pen.; in 65°11’S., 63°56’W. Disc. by the FrAE,
1908-10, under Charcot, who named it for Monsieur
Nozal, seaman, later lieutenant on the exp. ship
Pourquoi Pas?.
N. Persson Island: see Persson Island.
N. Perssons O: see Persson Island.
Nunés, Cape: see Nunez, Cape.
NUNEZ, CAPE: cape about 2 mi. S. of Queen
Maud Bay, on the S. coast of South Georgia; in
54°16’S., 37°24’W. The name dates back to at
least 1912, and was probably given by whalers who
frequented this coast. Not adopted: Cape Newnes,
Cape Nunés, Cape Nunez.
NUNEZ POINT: the W. tip of the peninsula lying
between Beascochea Bay and Leroux Bay, on the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°33’S., 64°15’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and
named by him for Captain Nunez, Argentine Navy.
Not adopted: Nunez Point, Ninez Point.
NUTT, CAPE: ice-covered cape, marked by sev-
eral rocky ridges at its NE. end and by a small
group of rocky islets close off its NW. end, which
forms the W. side of the entrance to Vincennes
Bay, on Knox Coast; in about 66°42’S., 108°20’E.
The position of Cape Nutt correlates closely with
the eastern end of Wilkes’ ““Knox’s High Land,” as
charted as a coastal landfall by the USEE in 1840.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN
for Cdr. David C. Nutt, USNR, research assistant
in geography at Dartmouth College, who served
as marine biologist with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48.
Nutt has recently served as leader of oceanographic
expeditions to Labrador in 1949 and summers fol-
lowing.
NYGREN POINT: rocky point, about 4 mi. SE.
of Cape Broms, on the SW. coast of James Ross I.,
in 64°23’S., 58°13’W. First seen and surveyed in
1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who
named it Cape Nygren after G. Nygren, Swedish
chemist who contributed toward the cost of the
expedition. It was resurveyed by the FIDS in
1952. Point is considered a more suitable descrip-
tive term for this feature than cape. Not adopted:
Cape Nygren.
OAKELEY, CAPE: dark bold headland forming
the E. side of the entrance to Smith Inlet, in north-
ern Victoria Land; in about 71°00’S., 167°40’E.
Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named
it for Henry Oakeley, mate on the exp. ship Erebus.
Not adopted: Cape Oakley.
230
Oakley, Cape: see Oakeley, Cape.
OATES COAST: that portion of the coast of Ant-
arctica lying W. of Victoria Land, approximately
between 157°E. and 164°E. Disc. in February 1911
by Lt. Harry Pennell, RN, captain of the BrAE exp.
ship Terra Nova, and named by him for Capt.
Lawrence E. G. Oates who, with Capt. Robert F.
Scott and three BrAE companions, perished on the
return from the South Pole in 1912. The area im-
mediately westward of this coast and major por-
tions of Oates Coast have not been explored by
land or sea parties, but have been photographed
from the air, in part, by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
Not adopted: Oates Land.
Oates Land: see Oates Coast.
OBELISK, CAPE: cape marking the N. side of
the entrance to Rohss Bay, on the W. side of James
Ross I., situated S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.;
in 64°08’S., 58°27’W. Disc. and named by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. The name
is descriptive of a conspicuous rock pinnacle about
2 mi. within the headland, which is visible from
northwestward and southward. Not adopted:
Obelisk Point, Pointe Obélisque [French].
Obélisque, Pointe: see Obelisk, Cape.
O’BRIEN ISLAND: small rocky island about
1,700 ft. in el., lying about 2 mi. SW. of Aspland I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°33’S.,
55°59’W. The name dates back to at least 1822
and is now established international usage. Not
adopted: O’Brien’s Island.
O’BRIEN PEAK: peak about 2,800 ft. in el.,
marking the N. end of the ridge at the E. side of
the terminus of Amundsen Gl., at the head of the
Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°27’S., 157°05’W. Disc.
by the Geological Sledging Party of the ByrdAE,
1928-30, and named for John S. O’Brien, surveyor
with the geological party.
OBSERVATION BLUFF: the eastern summit,
about 360 ft. in el., of the ice-free ridge which
forms the N. side of Paal Hbr. in Signy I., South
Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. The area was
roughly surveyed by DI personnel in 1933. The
bluff was surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, and so
named by them because it marks the position from
which daily sea ice observations were made.
OBSERVATION HILL: conical hill about 750
ft. in el., surmounting Cape Armitage at the S. end
of Hut Point Pen., on Ross I.; in about 77°51’S.,
166°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott, and so named because it forms an excellent
lookout station.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Observatorio, Isla: see Gamma Island.
O’Cain Island: see Nelson Island.
Oceana Insel: see Oceana Nunatak.
OCEANA NUNATAK: one of the Seal Nunataks,
lying at the NW. corner of Robertson I., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 59°50’W. Disc.
by a Nor. whaling exp. under C. A. Larsen in
December 1893, and named after the Oceana Co. of
Hamburg, a sponsor of the expedition. Not
adopted: Oceana Insel [German].
OCEAN HARBOR: deeply indented bay on the
N. coast of South Georgia which is entered 1.5 mi.
W. of Tijuca Pt.; in 54°20’W., 36°16’W. The
names New Fortune Bay and Neufortuna Bay,
probably for the Fortuna, Norwegian-Argentine
whaling vessel which participated in establishing
the first permanent whaling station at Grytviken,
South Georgia in 1904-5, were used for this feature
in 1922 by Filchner, following the GerAE, 1911-12.
Following a survey of the island in 1951-52, the
SGS reported that the feature is known to whalers
and sealers as Ocean Harbor, a name derived from
the Ocean Whaling Co. which at one time had a
station there. The name Ocean Harbor is ap-
proved for this feature on the basis of local usage,
and also to avoid confusion of the name New
Fortuna Bay with Fortuna Bay, only 26 mi. to the
northwest. Not adopted: Neufortuna Bay, New
Fortuna Bay, New Fortune Bay.
OCHS GLACIER: glacier flowing to Paul Block
Bay between Mt. Iphigene and Mt. Avers, in Marie
Byrd Land; in about 76°30’S., 145°35°W. Disc. by
the ByrdAE in 1929, and named for Adolph S. Ochs,
publisher of the New York Times, patron of the
Expedition. Not adopted: Adolph Ochs Glacier.
O’CONNOR NUNATAKS: group of rock expo-
sures rising above the ice at the upper rim of
Balchen Gl., in the N. part of the Edsel Ford
Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°24’S.,
143°21’W. Disc. by members of the USAS in aerial
flights over this area in 1940 and named for Ray-
mond O’Connor, a member of the West Base of the
USAS, 1939-41.
O’CONNORS ROCK: rock about 0.1 mi. SW. of
Stenhouse Bluff, King George I., lying in Visca An-
chorage in the N. part of Admiralty Bay, in the
South Shetland Is.; 62°02’S., 58°22’W. First
charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot.
Named for Midshipman W. P. O’Connor, RNR, who
assisted in a sketch survey of Visca Anchorage in
the Discovery in 1927.
231
ODIN, MOUNT: saddle-top mountain, consisting
of two ice-covered peaks about 4,800 ft. in el., situ-
ated close SW. of Frigga Peak on the divide be-
tween Anderson and Sleipnir Glaciers, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°26’S., 64°03’W. Dur-
ing 1947 the peak was photographed from the air
by the RARE and charted from the ground by the
FIDS. Named by the FIDS after the Norse god
Odin, the mythological husband of Frigga.
Odom Bay: see Odom Inlet.
ODOM INLET: inlet about 9 mi. long, between
Cape Howard and Cape MacDonald along the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°30’S., 61°20’W. Disc.
by members of the USAS who explored this coast
from East Base both by land and from the air in
1940. Named for Howard Odom, radio operator at
the East Base. Not adopted: Odom Bay.
OFFICE BOYS, THE: group of rocks at the NE.
end of the Clerke Rocks, lying some 45 mi. ESE. of
the SE. end of South Georgia; in 55°01’S., 34°39’W.
Clerke Rocks were disc. by Capt. James Cook in
1775. The Office Boys were charted and probably
named by DI personnel who made surveys in the
South Georgia area in the period 1926-30.
OHLIN ISLAND: small island, about 500 ft. in
el., lying 6 mi. WNW. of Tower I., off the NW. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 63°31’S., 60°06’W. Disc. by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, and named
by him for Axel Ohlin, zoologist with the expedi-
tion. Not adopted: Bailys Island.
OKUMA BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which in-
dents Ross Ice Shelf for about 4 mi., lying about
80 mi. NE. of the Bay of Whales; in about 77°52’S.,
158°40’W. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott in
1902. Named by the Japanese exp. under Shirase,
1911-12, for Count Okuma, Premier of Japan. Not
adopted: Hal Flood Bay.
Olaf Bjaaland, Mount: see Bjaaland, Mount.
Olav Prydz Bukt: see MacKenzie Bay; Prydz Bay.
OLAV ROCKS: small group of rocks, lying about
0.6 mi. ESE. of Cape Crewe, off the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°07’W. Charted by
DI personnel during the period 1927-30, and so
named because the rocks serve as a guide to vessels
entering Prince Olav Harbor. The incorrect spell-
ing, ‘Prince Olaf Rocks,” appearing on the charts
by DI personnel has been corrected. A shortened
form of the original name is approved. Not
adopted: Prince Olaf Rock, Prince Olaf Rocks,
Prince Olav Rocks.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
OLD MANS HEAD: dark headland marking the
S. side of the entrance to Wust Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°22’S., 60°45’W. Disc.
and photographed from the air in December 1940
by members of the USAS. During 1947 the head-
land was photographed from the air by the RARE,
who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from
the ground. This descriptive name was given by
the FIDS.
Ole Engelstad, Mount: see Engelstad, Mount;
Wilhelm Christophersen, Mount.
OLIPHANT ISLETS: group of small ice-free
islets and rocks lying S. of Gourlay Pen., the SE.
extremity of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
45°36’W. Dove Channel extends through this
group in a general EW. direction. The group
was roughly charted in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle,
Norwegian whaling captain, and again in 1933 by
DI personnel. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS and
named by them for Prof. Marcus L. E. Oliphant,
then prof. of physics, Birmingham Univ.; later Dir.
of the Research School of Physical Sciences,
Australian National Univ., who gave assistance to
the FIDS in obtaining equipment.
OLIVINE POINT: the southern end of the low-
lying peninsula which forms the E. limit of Iceberg
Bay on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney
Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°29’W. Surveyed by the FIDS
in 1948-49, and so named by them because the
mineral olivine occurs in the igneous dikes inter-
secting the peninsula just N. of the point.
OLSTAD GLACIER: heavily crevassed glacier
decending to the W. side of Peter I Island, about
2.5 mi. S. of Tofte Gl.; in about 68°53’S., 90°43’W.
Peter I Island was circumnavigated by the Norwe-
gian whale catcher Odd I in January 1927, and
charted by the Norvegia in February 1929. They
named the glacier for Ola Olstad, Norwegian biolo-
gist who, transported by various whaling ships,
conducted research in South Georgia, South Shet-
land Is., and the Palmer Archipelago. Not
adopted: Olstads Glacier.
OMEGA ISLAND: island, about 2 mi. long, which
lies immediately S. of Eta I. in the Melchior Is.,
Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°56’W. This island,
the largest feature in the SE. part of the Melchior
Is., is part of what was called “Ile Melchior” by the
FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, but the name Mel-
chior now applies for the whole island group.
Omega Island was roughly surveyed by DI person-
nel in 1927. The name Omega, derived from the
last letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have
been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart fol-
lowing surveys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expedi-
232
tions in 1942 and 1943.
[Spanish].
Not adopted: Isla Sobral
Omicron, Islas: see Omicron Islets.
OMICRON ISLETS: group of small islets and
rocks which lie close SE. of the SE. extremity of
Omega I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in
64°21’S., 62°55’W. The name, derived from the
15th letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have
been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart
following surveys of these islets by Arg. expeditions
in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islas Omicron
[Spanish], Islas Silveyra [Spanish].
OMMANNEY BAY: semi-circular bay about 2.5
mi. wide, lying immediately W. of Foul Pt. along
the N. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney
Is.; in 60°33’S., 45°34’W. Probably first sighted by
Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer
in 1821. The bay was charted in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, and named for Francis
Downes Ommanney, zoologist on the staff of the
Discovery Committee.
OMMANNEY GLACIER: glacier descending to
Relay Bay, in the Robertson Bay area of northern
Victoria Land; in about 71°32’S., 169°29’E. First
charted by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borch-
grevink, who named it for Adm. Sir Erasmus Om-
manney, who had served in the Arctic Expedition
of 1850. Not adopted: Ommaney Glacier.
ONGLEY ISLAND: small island lying about 3
mi. W. of Dee I., close off the N. side of Greenwich
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°25’S.,
59°55’W. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II, but the name appears to have been
first used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon
this survey.
OOM BAY: small bay about 2 mi. wide, lying
between Cape Bruce and Campbell Head along
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°26’S., 60°47’E.
Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on Feb. 18,
1931, and named by him for Lt. K. Oom, one of the
airplane pilots of the expedition. Not adopted:
Uksvika [Norwegian].
ORGAN PIPE CLIFFS: high palisades of colum-
nar rock overlooking Buckley Bay for a distance of
10 mi. southwestward of Cape Blake, on George V
Coast; in about 68°25’S., 148°45’E. Disc. by the
AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson and so named be-
cause of their appearance.
ORLEANS CHANNEL: channel about 4 mi. wide
extending in a NE—SW. direction between Trinity
I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°53’S.,
60°35°W. This channel was possibly first seen by
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Nathaniel B. Palmer, Captain of the Hero, during
his explorations of the NW. portion of the coast of
the Palmer Pen. on Nov. 18, 1820. It was named
and outlined in part by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under
D’Urville. Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under
Nordenskjold. Not adopted: Orleans Channel,
Orleans Inlet.
Orleans Inlet: see Orléans Channel.
ORNEN ROCKS: group of rocks, some of which
are above water, about 1 mi. NNE. of Cape Melville,
King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°00’S., 57°32’W. Named after the Norwegian
whaler Ornen which went aground there about
1908 or 1909. Not adopted: Rochers de l’Orn
[French].
ORVILLE ESCARPMENT: a southeast-facing es-
carpment along the NW. edge of Edith Ronne Land,
extending from the junction of Filchner Ice Shelf
and Palmer Pen.; in about 75°10’S., 63°00’W., south-
westward for about 200 mi. to about 177°30’S.,
71°30’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under
Ronne, who named this feature for Capt. Howard
T. Orville, USN, Head of the Naval Aerological Serv-
ice, who was largely responsible for the formulation
of the meteorological program of the expedition.
ORWELL BIGHT: body of water lying S. of the
eastern half of Coronation I., bounded on the west
by Signy I. and on the east by the Robertson Is., in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°23’W. The
general nature of this bight was first delineated by
Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain who
mapped this area in 1912-13. It was surveyed by
DI personnel in 1933 and by the FIDS in 1948-49.
Named by the Br—APC after the Norwegian trans-
port Orwell, the second ship of that name belong-
ing to the Tgénsberg Hvalfangeri, which anchored
in Borge Bay, Signy I., on the W. side of this bight
in the seasons 1925-26 to 1929-30.
ORWELL GLACIER: small glacier, less than 0.5
mi. long, which descends steeply from the S. slopes
of Snow Hill and terminates in 60 foot ice cliffs
along the S. margin of Elephant Flats in the E.
part of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,
45°38’W. Surveyed by DI personnel in 1927, and
named by them after the Norwegian transport
Orwell, which anchored in Borge Bay, Signy I.,
throughout the seasons 1925-26 to 1929-30. The
glacier was resurveyed by the FIDS in 1947.
OSCAR II COAST: that portion of the E. coast
of Palmer Pen., extending from Cape Fairweather,
in 65°00’S., 61°05’W., to Cape Alexander, in
66°44’S., 62°37’W. Named in 1893 by Capt. C. A.
Larsen for King Oscar II of Sweden. Not adopted:
424589 O -57-16
233
King Oscar II Coast, King Oscar II Land, Konig
Oskar II Land [German], Kong Oscar II Kiiste,
Terre du Roi Oscar [French].
Oscar Island: see Inexpressible Island.
OSCAR ISLAND: the more northerly of two
small islands lying close to the ice cliffs about 20
mi. W. of Cape Washington, along the coast of
Victoria Land; in about 74°43’S., 164°20’E. Disc.
by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink,
who named it for King Oscar of Norway and Swe-
den. Not adopted: Inexpressible Island (q.v.).
Oscar Wisting, Mount: see Wisting, Mount.
OSMIC HILL: conspicuous rounded hill which
rises abruptly from the surrounding plain to about
1,000 ft. in el., marking the N. limit of an undulat-
ing ridge of hills on the W. side of Moraine Fjord,
South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°30’W. Roughly
surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden-
skjold. Named by the FIDS following their sketch
survey in 1951. The name is one in a group in the
vicinity of Discovery Pt., derived from the chemical
fixatives used there in biological work by the FIDS.
OSTERRIETH MOUNTAINS: mountain range
culminating in Mt. Francais, about 9,100 ft. in el.,
and extending in a NE.-SW. direction along the
SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; center-
ing in about 64°37’S., 63°25’W. Disc. by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named
by him for Mme. Ernest Osterrieth, a patron of
the expedition. Not adopted: Osterrleth Moun-
tains.
Osterrleth Mountains: see Osterrieth Mountains.
O’SULLIVAN PEAK: ice-covered peak about
5,800 ft. in el. which forms the highest point and is
near the S. end of a N.-S. trending ice-covered
ridge, standing about 11 mi. W. of the head of the
N. arm of Odom Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 71°26’S., 62°06’W. This peak was photo-
graphed from the air by USAS in December 1940,
and was probably seen by the expedition’s ground
party that explored this coast. First charted by a
joint party consisting of members of the RARE
and the FIDS in 1947. Named by the FIDS for
T. P. O'Sullivan, a member of the FIDS at the Hope
Bay base in 1946-47.
OUTER ISLET: islet fringed by submerged
rocks, about 0.3 mi. E. of Berntsen Pt., the S. en-
trance point to Borge Bay, off the E. side of Signy
I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°35’W.
Charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, and so named because of its position close out-
side the entrance to Borge Bay.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
OUTER LEE ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. NNW. of
Bellingshausen Pt., lying in the outer part of the
Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°15’W.
This islet was charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cush-
man Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig
Daisy, who included it as one of two islets which he
called the Lee Islands. The islets were recharted
in 1929-30 by DI personnel, who renamed the
northeastern of these two islets Outer Lee Islet.
The southwestern islet is now known as Inner Lee
Islet. Not adopted: Lee Islands, Outer Lee, Outer
Lee Island.
Outpost, The: see Vorposten Peak.
Owen, Mount: see Russell Owen, Mount.
OWEN, MOUNT: mountain about 3,800 ft. in el.,
standing between Johnston and Kelsey Glaciers
at the head of Nantucket Inlet, on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 74°25’S., 62°30’W. This mountain
was photographed from the air in December 1940
by the USAS, and in 1947 by the RARE, under
Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted
it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Arthur
Owen, trail man with the RARE. Not adopted:
Mount Arthur Owen.
OWEN ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, lying
about 5 mi. WNW. of Round Pt., close off the N.
coast of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in about 61°55’/S., 58°21’W. Charted and named
in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
O. Wisting, Mount: see Wisting, Mount.
@YDEHOLMEN, MOUNT: snow-covered moun-
tain near the junction of Enderby Land and Kemp
Coast, with two summits about 6,500 ft. in el.,
standing about 8 mi. WSW. of Rayner Peak; in
about 67°32’S., 55°33’E. Disc. in February 1936 by
DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and mapped
by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photo-
graphs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in
January-February 1937. The Norwegian “@yde-
holmen” means literally “desolate islet.’ Not
adopted: Gydeholmen.
@YGARDEN ISLANDS: group of rocky, irregu-
lar islands which extend about 17 mi. in an E.—-W.
direction, lying in the S. part of the entrance to
Edward VIII Bay at the extreme W. end of Kemp
Coast; in about 66°57’S., 57°30’E. First sighted in
February 1936 by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby, and considered by them to be part of the
mainland. They were charted as islands by Nor-
wegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January—
February 1937, and named ®ygarden, a descriptive
term for a chain of islands lying along and off the
234
coast. Not adopted: Guardian Islands, Oygarden
[Norwegian].
PAAL HARBOR: small harbor about 0.5 mi. S. of
Borge Bay, along the E. side of Signy I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°35’W. The name
appears on a map based upon a running survey of
the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13 by the Norwegian
whaling captain Petter Sgrlle.
PABELLON ISLET: the southernmost of two
islets which lie close off the N. tip of Omega I. and
mark the S. side of the western entrance to Ander-
sen Harbor in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in
64°19’S., 62°57’W. The islet was roughly surveyed
by DI personnel in 1927. The name Pabellén ap-
pears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine
govt. chart following surveys of the Melchior Is. by
Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted:
Pabellon Islet.
PACIFIC POINT: small rounded point on the
NW. coast of Zavodovski I., South Sandwich Is.; in
56°19’S., 27°36’W. It was named Low Point by DI
personnel following their survey in 1930, but that
name has been rejected because it has also been
used for several other features in the vicinity. The
name Pacific Point was recommended in 1953 by
the Br-APC, and is after the American schooner
Pacific which, under Capt. James Brown, visited
Zavodovski I. in 1830, making a landing there.
Not adopted: Low Point.
PAGEANT POINT: the middle and highest of
three ice-free points at the E. end of Gourlay Pen.
on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°36’W.
Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed
in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, given by the
FIDS, derives from the penguin rookery there, with
its associated pageantry.
Page Rock: see Jester Rock.
PAGET, MOUNT: saddle-shaped mountain peak
about 9,200 ft. in el., marking the summit of the
Allardyce Range, in the central part of South
Georgia; in 54°26’S., 36°33’W. Mount Paget was
known to early sealers and whalers at South
Georgia. The name has long been established
through general usage.
PAGET GLACIER: glacier in South Georgia,
about 5 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, which flows NE.
from the N. slopes of Mt. Paget into the W. side of
Nordenskjéld Gl.; in 54°24’S., 36°28’W. The gla-
cier was roughly surveyed in 1928-29 by a Ger. exp.
under Kohl-Larsen, and resurveyed in 1951-52 by
the SGS. The name, which is derived from nearby
Mt. Paget, was given by the SGS, 1951-52.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
PAINE, MOUNT: flat-topped mountain forming
part of the La Gorce Mtns., at the brink of the polar
icecap in the Queen Maud Range; in about
86°45’S., 146°00’W. Disc. by members of the
Southern Sledge Party of the ByrdAE, 1933-35,
and named for Stuart D. L. Paine, navigator and
radio operator of that party. Not adopted: Mount
Katharine Paine.
PALMER, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the
N. end of Noville Pen. and the E. side of the en-
trance to Peale Inlet, at the NE. side of Thurston
Pen.; in about 71°48’S., 96°50’W. Delineated from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in De-
cember 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for James
Troxall Palmer, acting surgeon on the ship Relief
and later on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE
under Wilkes, 1838-42, and later Surgeon-General
of the Navy. Not adopted: Cape Flying Fish
(q.v.).
PALMER ARCHIPELAGO: group of islands, of
which the principal ones are Hoseason, Liége,
Brabant, Anvers, and Wiencke, lying NW. of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°15’S., 62°50’W. ‘They are sepa-
rated from the mainland by De Gerlache Strait and
Bismarck Strait. Named by De Gerlache, leader
of the BelgAE, 1897-99, for Capt. Nathaniel B.
Palmer, first man to navigate in these waters. Not
adopted: Antarctic Archipelago, Antarktiske Arki-
pel [Norwegian], Palmer Inseln [German].
Palmer Bay: see False Bay.
PALMER BAY: open bay about 2 mi. wide, lying
3.5 mi. W. of Cape Bennett, on the N. coast of Coro-
nation I., in thé South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S.,
45°21’W. Disc. in December 1821 on a joint
cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Na-
thaniel Palmer. Named for Captain Palmer. Not
adopted: Palmer’s Bay.
PALMER INLET: ice-filled inlet about 8 mi.
long, lying between Cape Bryant and Cape Mussel-
man, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°15’S.,
61°10’W. Essentially rectangular in shape, it is
bordered by almost vertical cliffs. Disc. by mem-
bers of East Base of the USAS who explored this
coast by land and from the air in 1940. Named for
Robert -Palmer, assistant .to -the meteorologist at
the East Base. Not adopted:sRobert Palmer Bay.
Palmer Inseln: see Palmer Archipelago.
Palmer Land: see Palmer Peninsula.
PALMER PENINSULA: the iargest peninsula in
Antarctica, lying S. of Cape Horn and extending in
a N. and NE. direction from its broad base, in about
75°00’S:, 65°00’W., to its narrow extremity, in
235
about 63°15’S., 57°00’W. Named for Capt. Na-
thaniel B. Palmer, American sealer who explored the
Antarctic mainland S. of Deception I. in the Hero
in 1820. Not adopted: Graham Land, Palmer
Land, Trinity Peninsula.
PANDEMONIUM POINT: point marking the S.
end of a sharp ice-free ridge which forms the S.
extremity of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
45°40’W. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, and so
named by them because of the ceaseless noise from
the penguin rookeries on the W. side of the ridge
close N. of the point.
PANTOMIME POINT: the northernmost of three
ice-free points at the E. end of Gourlay Pen. on
Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°36’W.
Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed
in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, given by the
FIDS, arose from the behavior observed in the
penguin rookeries on Gourlay Peninsula.
PAPUA BEACH: beach, about 1.5 mi. long, on
the SE. shore of Cumberland West Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°34’W. The name derives
from “Papua Cove,” now an obsolete name, applied
for a minor recession of the shore of this beach by
the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4, because
a colony of gentoo penguins (Pygoscelis papua)
was found there. The cove was called “Pinguin-
bucht” on a 1907 chart by A. Szielasko, and the
form Penguin Bay appears on some later charts.
Following its survey in 1951-52, the SGS reported
that the beach now described, rather than the cove
or bay, is the significant feature for which a name
is required. The Br-APC recommended in 1954
that the name Papua be approved for the beach.
The various names applied for the cove or bay are
unnecessary and are rejected.
Papua Cove: see Papua Beach.
Paradise Bay: see Paradise Harbor.
PARADISE HARBOR: wide embayment behind
Lemaire and Bryde Islands, indenting the W. coast
of Palmer Pen. from Cape Lacaze-Duthiers on the
NE. to an unnamed cape about 9 mi. to the SW.;
in 64°52’S., 62°54°W. The name was applied by
whalers operating in this vicinity. Not adopted:
Paradise Bay.
Parjadine, Kap; Pariadin, Cape: see Paryadin,
Cape.
PARKER, MOUNT: prominent mountain peak
lying between Mt. Adam and Mt. Troubridge in the
Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in
about 71°18’S., 168°10’E. Disc. in January 1841
by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
V. Adm. Sir William Parker, a Senior Naval Lord of
the Admiralty.
PARPEN CRAGS: precipitous, isolated rock face,
near the head of Norway Bight on the S. side of
Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°35/S.,
45°50’W. Surveyed and named by the FIDS fol-
lowing their survey of 1948-50. Parpen is a term
used in masonry to denote a stone extending
through the thickness of a wall.
PARR, CAPE: low, rocky peninsula lying S. of
Cape Douglas about midway between Barne and
Shackleton Inlets, along the W. edge of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 81°17’S., 160°35’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for
Adm. Alfred Arthur Chase Parr, one of Scott’s ad-
visers who had served in Arctic exploration.
PARRY, MOUNT: mountain about 6,300 ft. in el.,
dominating the W. coast of Brabant I., in the
Palmer Arch.; in about 64°17’S., 62°32’W. The
name appears on a chart of the Br. exp. under
Foster, 1829-31, and has since gained interna-
tional usage.
Parrys Straits: see Nelson Strait.
PARVENU POINT: low but prominent point
forming the N. extremity of Pourquoi Pas I., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°34’S., 67°16’W.
First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill.
The point was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and
found to be more conspicuous from the W. than
had previously been supposed, its new stature thus
suggesting the name.
PARYADIN, CAPE: cape which forms the south-
ernmost point of the W. tip of South Georgia; in
54°03’S., 38°02’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. un-
der Cook. Resighted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under
Bellingshausen, and named for Jacob Paryadin,
navigating officer of the exp. ship Vestok. Not
adopted: Cape Pariadin, Kap Parjadine [German].
PASSAGE ROCK: rock in the N. entrance to
English Str., about 1 mi. W. of Cape Morris, Robert
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°22’S., 59°48’W.
Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, and so named because it serves as a guide to
vessels passing through the entrance.
PASSAT NUNATAK: a nunatak on Princess
Martha Coast, standing close E. of Boreas Nunatak
and fronting on the large ice shelf that here
fringes the coast; in about 71°18’S., 3°58’W. Disc.
by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named
for one of the Dornier flying boats of the expedi-
tion.
236
Passe du Challenger: see Neptunes Bellows.
PASSEL, MOUNT: a serrated ridge about 4 mi.
long, rising to an estimated 2,500 ft. in el.; standing
on the S. side of Crevasse Valley Glacier in the
central part of the Edsel Ford Ranges, in Marie
Byrd Land; in about 76°52’S., 144°52’W. Disc. in
December 1940 by members of the Edsel Ford
Mountains Geological Survey Party of the USAS,
and named for Charles F. Passel, geologist and
radio operator of that party.
PASSES PEAK: pyramidal peak about 1,500 ft.
in el., standing about 2 mi. S. of the head of Hope
Bay and 3.5 mi. NE. of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of
Palmer Pen.; in 63°27’S., 57°03’W. First charted
in 1945 by the FIDS and so named because it lies
between two passes used by Hope Bay sledging
parties in traveling to Duse Bay and to the head of
Depot Glacier.
PASTEUR ISLET: small rocky islet at the SE.
end of the Dumoulin Its., which lie at the NE. end
of Géologie Arch., close N. of Astrolabe Glacier
Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°37’S., 140°06’E.
Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946—
47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51.
Named by the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, for
Louis Pasteur, famous French chemist who made
notable contributions to medical science.
PASTEUR PENINSULA: peninsula about 7 mi.
long, in a N.-S. direction, and ranging from 5 to 8
mi. wide, lying between Guyou Bay and Bouquet de
la Grye Bay and forming the N. end of Brabant I.,
in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°04’S., 62°27’W. Disc.
by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by
him in honor of Louis Pasteur, famous French
chemist. Not adopted: Pasteur Peninsular.
PATERSON, MOUNT: pyramidal-shaped moun-
tain about 3.5 mi. E. of Mt. Nilsen, standing at the .
NE. end of the S. group of the Rockefeller Mtns. on
Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°01’S., 155°04’W.
Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE, and later named by
Byrd for Seward M. Paterson, manufacturer who
furnished shoes and ski boots for the ByrdAE,
1933-35. Not adopted: Mount Patterson.
PATRICIA ISLANDS: two small islands about
15 mi. back of the entrance to Edward VIII Bay,
off Enderby Land; in about 66°55’S., 56°47’E.
Disc. and named in February 1936 by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby. Not adopted: Patricia
Island.
PATRICK, MOUNT: mountain about 7,600 ft. in
el., standing about 12 mi. S. of Mt. Cyril in the
Commonwealth Range, on the E. side of Beardmore
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Gl.; in about 84°09’S., 172°45’E. Disc. and named
by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9.
Patterson, Mount: see Paterson, Mount.
PAUL BLOCK, MOUNT: peak rising to about
10,000 ft. in el., standing about 25 mi. SSE. of Mt.
Pratt in the southernmost ridge of the Grosvenor
Range; in about 86°16’S., 179°15’W. Disc. by R.
Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flights to the South Pole
in November 1929, and named by him at that time
for Paul Block, Jr., son of Paul Block, patron of the
expedition.
PAUL BLOCK BAY: embayment about 15 mi.
wide, bounded on the E. by Balchen and Ochs Gla-
ciers, and lying between the W. end of the Phillips
Mtns. and the W. end of Fosdick Mtns., along the
W. coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°15’S.,
146°30’W. Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE and
named by Byrd for Paul Block, newspaper pub-
lisher and patron of the expedition. Not adopted:
Block Bay.
PAULDING BAY: ice-filled embayment, about
40 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, indenting the W. end
of Banzare Coast between Cape Southard and
Clark Pt.; in about 66°40’S., 123°00’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for James
K. Paulding, Sec. of the Navy under Pres. Van
Buren. Paulding had previously served as U.S.
Navy agent for New York and was instrumental in
the outfitting of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
PAULET ISLAND: circular island about 1 mi.
in diameter, lying about 1 mi. off the SE. side of
Dundee I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°35’S., 55°47’W. + Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross,
1839-43, and named by him for Capt. Lord George
Paulet, RN.
PAUL ISLETS: group of islets about 3 mi. W. of
Cape Gronland, Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°18’S., 63°40’W. Disc. and named by the Ger.
exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. Not adopted: Paul
Islands.
PAULSEN MOUNTAINS: a closely-spaced group
of mountain peaks, about 9,200 ft. in el., in the W.
part of the Muhlig-Hofmann Mtns., standing in
front of the polar piateau in New Schwabenland;
in about 72°10’E., 2°00’E. Disc. by the GerAE un-
der Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Karl-Heinz
Paulsen, oceanographer on the expedition.
PAULSEN PEAK: rock peak, about 6,300 ft. in
el., standing near the head of Lyell Gl., 2 mi. NW.
of Mount Sugartop, in the Allardyce Range of
South Georgia; in 54°20’S., 36°40’W. Named by
237
the Br—APC, following mapping by the SGS, 1951-
52, for Harold B. Paulsen (1898-1951), a leading
figure in the Norwegian whaling industry.
PAUMELLE POINT: point which forms the S.
side of the entrance to Libois Bay and the NW. end
of the peninsula which separates Port Charcot
from Saltpétriére Bay, on the W. side of Booth I.,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S.,
64°03’W. First charted by the FrAE under Char-
cot, 1903-5, and named by him for R. Paumelle,
steward of the exp. ship Francais. Not adopted:
Point Paumelle.
Pavie, Cap; Pavie, Ile: see Pavie Ridge.
PAVIE RIDGE: isolated rocky ridge, about 2,500
ft. in el., which extends S. and W. from Martin Gl.
to Moraine Cove, and forms the SE. limit of Bert-
rand Ice Piedmont, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;:
in 68°34’S., 66°59’W. The name “Ile Pavie” was
given in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot to an
island, or possible cape, shown on the FrAE maps in
68°27’S., 66°40’W. From a position 15 mi. SE. of
Jenny Island, Maurice Bongrain, FrAE surveyor,
made sketches of this feature which were labeled
“Tle Pavie” and “Cap Pavie.” This general area
was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill,
but the feature named by Charcot was not identi-
fied. Following further surveys by the FIDS in
1948, Charcot’s “Ile Pavie’ was identified from
Bongrain’s sketches as the feature now named Red
Rock Ridge. The name Red Rock Ridge is now too
firmly established to alter. The name Pavie Ridge
has therefore been approved for the isolated rocky
ridge described above as forming the S. limit of
Bertrand Ice Piedmont, and whose position in
68°34’S., 66°59’W. is not far removed from the
original position indicated by Charcot. Named by
Charcot, presumably for Auguste J. M. Pavie
(1847-1925), French diplomat and explorer. Not
adopted: Cap Pavie, Ile Pavie [French].
Payer Group: see Payer Mountains.
PAYER MOUNTAINS: small mountain group
about 9,300 ft. in el., rising immediately E. of the
Weyprecht Mtns. at the N. edge of the polar pla-
teau, in New Schwabenland; in about 71°50’S.,
14°45’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher,
1938-39, and named for Julius Payer, Austrian ex-
plorer, who in company with Karl Weyprecht dis-
covered Franz Josef Land in 1873. Not adopted:
Payer Group.
P. Curie, Pointe: see Curie Point.
PEACE ISLET: small islet, which is northern-
most of several islets which extend northward
about 0.5 mi. from the W. extremity of Eta I., in the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 62°57’W.
The name was probably given by DI personnel who
roughly surveyed the islet in 1927. The islet was
surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943
and 1948. Not adopted: Isla Iota [Spanish].
PEACOCK, MOUNT: high peak lying between
Mt. Humphrey Lloyd and Mt. Herschel in the Ad-
miralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about
72°14’S., 169°15’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a
Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for the Very
Reverend Dr. George Peacock, Dean of Ely.
Peacock Bay: see Deakin Bay.
PEACOCK BAY: ice-filled bay, deeply indenting
the E. end of Walgreen Coast, immediately W. of
Thurston Pen. and N. of the Hudson Mtns.; in
about 72°30’S., 100°30’W. Disc. on Feb. 25, 1940
by the USAS in a flight from the Bear, and further
delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named after the
USEE sloop of war Peacock which sailed, in com-
pany with the tender Flying Fish, along the edge
of the pack ice NE. of this bay for several days in
March 1839.
PEALE INLET: ice-filled inlet about 25 mi. long,
lying immediately W. of Noville Pen. and indenting
the NE. side of Thurston Pen.; in about 71°55’S.,
97°40’W. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named
by the US-ACAN for Titian Ramsay Peale, noted
artist, naturalist who served on the sloop of war
Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. The
Peacock, accompanied by the Flying Fish, reached
a point within 100 mi. of Thurston Pen. during
March 1839.
PEARCE PEAK: peak about 4,000 ft. in el.,
standing close S. of Moyes Peak about 21 mi. S. of
Cape Simpson, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about
67°48’S., 61°14’E. Disc. and named by the
BANZARE under Mawson on about Feb. 17, 1931.
PEARSON POINT: forms the SW. point of Bird I.,
off the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°01’S.,
38°08’W. The name appears on a chart by DI per-
sonnel who charted South Georgia during the
period 1926-30.
Peary, Massif: see Peary, Mount.
PEARY, MOUNT: conspicuous massif about 6,200
ft. in el., with a flat, snow-covered summit several
miles in extent, surmounted by a marginal peak on
the W., standing about 7 mi. ENE. of Cape Tuxen,
on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S.,
63°52’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-
10, and named by him for R. Adm. Robert E. Peary,
238
USN, famous American Arctic explorer and dis-
coverer of the North Pole in 1909. Not adopted:
Massif Peary [French], Mount Matin.
PECHELL, MOUNT: prominent peak lying
between Mt. Troubridge and Mt. Dalmeny in the
Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in
about 71°05’S., 167°27’E. Disc. in January 1841
by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Capt.
Sir Samuel J. Brooke Pechell, a Junior Naval Lord
of the Admiralty at that time.
PEDERSEN NUNATAK: the westernmost of the
Seal Nunataks, lying about 8 mi. NE. of Cape Fair-
weather, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°56’S.,
60°46’W. Pedersen Nunatak was first charted in
1947 by the FIDS, and named for Capt. Morten
Pedersen of the Norwegian sealer Castor, which
operated in Antarctic waters during the 1893-94
season.
PEGTOP MOUNTAIN: mountain about 4,000 ft.
in el., marked by several conspicuous Knobs, the
highest and westernmost knob protruding about
1,800 ft. above Mackay Gl. about 5 mi. W. of Mt.
Suess, in Victoria Land; in about 77°03’S., 161°20’E.
Charted and given this descriptive name by the
BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Pegtop
Nunatak.
Pegtop Nunatak: see Pegtop Mountain.
PELSENEER ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long
and 2 mi. wide, with three prominent rocky peaks
projecting through its icecap, lying about 3 mi. S.
of Delaite I. in the south-central portion of Wil-
helmina Bay, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 64°37’S., 62°03’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under
De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named by him for P.
Pelseneer, member of the Belgica Commission and
the Royal Academy of Belgium.
PELTIER CHANNEL: channel about 6 mi. long
and 1 mi. wide, in the shape of the numeral 7,
with its main stem oriented in a N.-S. direction,
separating Doumer and Wiencke Islands S. of Port
Lockroy, in the Palmer Arch., in 64°52’S., 63°33’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and
named by him for Jean Peltier, noted French
physicist.
PENCK, CAPE: ice-covered cape, fronting on
West Ice Shelf about 45 mi. WNW. of Gaussberg,
which separates Leopold and Astrid Coast from
Wilhelm II Coast; in about 66°40’S., 87°35’E.
Roughly charted in December 1912 by the Western
Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named
by him for Albrecht Penck, internationally known
German geographer.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Penck Glacier: see Albrecht Penck Glacier.
PENCK GLACIER: glacier which flows in a NW.
direction to the S. side of Duke Ernst Bay, W. of
Bertrab Nunatak, on Luitpold Coast; in about
717°59/S., 34°55’W. Disc. in January—February
1912 by the GerAE under Filchner, and named by
him for Albrecht Penck. Not adopted: Perick
Glacier.
PENCK TROUGH: a broad SW.-NE. depression
in the Ritscher Upland, centering in about 72°30’S.,
2°00’W., and extending from the edge of the polar
plateau in New Schwabenland to the ice shelf in
about 0°30’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher,
1938-39, and named for Albrecht Penck. The
name Penck Mulde was applied on the maps of
that exp. to a broad depression between Neumayer
Escarpment and Kleinschmidt Peak, represented
with the axis nearly N.S. The NBSAE under
Giaever, 1949-52, corrected the orientation, placing
both Neumayer Escarpment and Kleinschmidt
Peak on its SE. flank, and established its extension
to the coast.
Pendleton Baie: see Pendleton Strait.
Pendleton Island: see Tower Island.
PENDLETON STRAIT: strait lying between
Rabot and Nansen Islands, in the Biscoe Is., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen., in 66°00’S., 66°30’W.
The FrAE under Charcot, in accordance with Char-
cot’s conception of this water feature, applied the
name Pendleton Bay in January 1909. The BGLE
under Rymill, 1934-37, recognizing that it is really
a strait, renamed it Pendleton Strait. Named by
Charcot for Capt. Benjamin Pendleton, commodore
of the Stonington, Conn. sealing fleet which in-
cluded the sloop Hero under Capt. Nathaniel B.
Palmer who, at Pendleton’s direction, explored this
area in January 1821. Not adopted: Burdick
Channel, Pendleton Baie [French].
PENDULUM COVE: cove at the NE. side of Port
Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°65/S., 60°36’W. The name of the cove derives
from the pendulum and magnetic observations
made there by the Br. exp. under Foster in 1829.
PENELOP POINT: bold headland lying between
Nielsen Gl. and Scott Keltie Gl. on the S. shore of
Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about
71°31’S., 169°47’E. Charted in 1911 by the North-
ern Party of the BrAE under Scott.
PENFOLD POINT: point which forms the NW.
side of the entrance to Whalers Bay, Deception I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°35’W.
239
Named for Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, who con-
ducted a survey of the island during 1948-49.
Penguin Bay: see Papua Beach.
PENGUIN ISLAND: island about 1 mi. in diam-
eter, which lies about 1 mi. off the S. side of King
George I. and marks the E. side of the entrance to
King George Bay, in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°05’S., 57°55’W. Sighted in January 1820
by a Br. exp. under Bransfield, and so named by him
because penguins occupied the shores of the island.
Not adopted: Penguin Isle.
Penguin Point: see Irving Point; Tijuca Point.
PENGUIN POINT: point which forms the NW.
end of Coronation I.; in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°32’S., 45°56’W. Disc. on Dec. 7, 1821 on the
joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer. Named by Powell because of
the number of penguins which were on this point.
Not adopted: Pointe Foca [French].
PENGUIN POINT: point located centrally along
the S. shore of Seymour I., lying SE. of James
Ross I. at the S. margin of Erebus and Terror Gulf;
in 64°19’S., 56°43’W. The point was possibly seen
in 1843 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and was roughly
charted by Capt. C. A. Larsen who landed on the
island in 1892 and 1893. Recharted by the SwedAE
under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, who named it because
a large penguin colony was found there. Not
adopted: Penguinenkap [German].
PENGUIN POINT: point about 320 ft. in el.,
marking the termination of a granite wall about
5 mi. long at the E. side of the entrance to Fisher
Bay, on George V Coast; in about 67°36’S., 146°02’E.
Disc. and named in 1912 by the Eastern Coastal
Party led by Cecil T. Madigan of the AAE, 1911-14,
under Mawson.
PENGUIN RIVER: small meandering stream,
which flows in a general NE. direction from Ham-
berg Lake to the coast close S. of Horse Head, in
Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°18’S.,
36°30’W. First roughly surveyed by the SwedAE
under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4, and named by Carl
Skottsberg, botanist with the expedition. Not
adopted: Hamberg Fluss [German].
PENNELL BANK: large submarine bank, about
500 mi. long and 140 mi. wide, extending across
Ross Sea from Cape Adare to Edward VII Pen.;
centering near 74°S., 175°W. Named by Griffith
Taylor for Harry L. L. Pennell, RN, commander of
the exp. ship Terra Nova of the BrAE, 1910-13,
which engaged in extensive oceanographic work in
the Ross Sea area during this period.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Pennilea, Lake: see Kroner Lake.
PENOLA ISLET: islet lying close off the S. coast
of King George I. about 2 mi. NE. of Three Sisters
Point, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S.,
57°52’W. Charted in 1937 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II, and named for the Penola, the BGLE
ship which assisted the Discovery II in the search
for a survey party stranded on King George I. in
January 1937.
PENOLA STRAIT: strait about 7 mi. long and
averaging 2 mi. wide, separating the Argentine Is.
from the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S.,
64°14’W. This strait was traversed by the BelgAE
under De Gerlache on Feb. 12, 1898. Named by the
BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, after the exp. ship
Penola.
PEPIN CAPE: ice-covered cape at the W. side
of the Barré Gl. on Adélie Coast; in about 66°32’S.,
138°34’E. Disc. and named by the Fr. exp. under
D’Urville in 1840. The area was charted by the
AAE in 1912-13, and again by the BANZARE in
1931, both under Mawson. The cape was more
recently delineated from aerial photographs taken
by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
PERCE, CAPE: cape at the S. side of the W. end
of Alexander I Island, which marks the NE. side
of the entrance to Ronne Entrance; in about
71°39’S., 76°00’W. Disc. by Snow, Perce and Car-
roll of the USAS in a flight from East Base on
Dec. 22, 1940, and named for Earl B. Perce, co-pilot
and radio operator of the expedition.
PERCHOT, MOUNT: mountain about 6,700 ft.
in el.; surmounted by a prominent ridge trending
in a general N.-S. direction, standing about 5 mi.
SE. of Magnier Peaks between Mt. Chevreux and
Mt. Bigo, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°44’S., 64°12’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Char-
cot, 1908-10 and named by him for Monsieur
Perchot, an acquaintance who donated seventy
pairs of boots to the expedition.
Pérez, Cape: see Trois Pérez, Cape.
Perick Glacier: see Penck Glacier.
PERKINS, MOUNT: mountain about 2,500 ft.
in el., standing at the E. end of the Fosdick Mtns.
in the Edsel Ford Ranges, Marie Byrd Land; in
about 76°30’S., 144°05’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE
on the Northeastern Flight on Dec. 15-16, 1934.
Named for Jack E. Perkins, biologist at the USAS
West Base, 1939-41, and leader of the Edsel Ford
Mountains Biological Party which visited this area
in December 1940.
240
PERPLEX RIDGE: ridge, more than 3,000 ft. in
el., composed of four rocky masses separated by
small glaciers, extending 6 mi. northeastwards
from Cape Lainez along the NW. side of Pourquoi
Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°40’S.,
67°43’W. First sighted and roughly charted in
1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE and in 1948 by the FIDS. So
named by FIDS because of confusion in attempting
to identify this ridge from earlier maps.
PERRIER BAY: bay about 3 mi. long and 3 mi.
wide, indenting the NW. coast of Anvers I. about
8 mi. SW of Cape Gronland, in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°27’S., 63°41’W. Disc. by the FrAE under
Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for Edmond
Perrier, French naturalist.
PERRY BAY: open, ice-filled bay about 13 mi.
wide and 4 mi. long, indenting Clarie Coast be-
tween Freeman Pt. and Freeman Gl. on the W.
and the stubby peninsula terminating in Cape
Keltie on the E.; in about 65°55’S., 132°55’E. De-
lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
Lt. O. H. Perry on the sloop of war Peacock of the
USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
PERSSON ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long
and 0.5 mi. wide, lying in the entrance to Réhss
Bay along the SW. side of James Ross I., which
lies S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°12’S.,
58°24’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Norden-
skjold, 1901-4, and named by him for Nils Persson,
patron of the expedition. Not adopted: N. Persson
Island, N. Personns O [Swedish].
PERUTZ GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi. long
and 2 mi. wide, which flows WNW. into Bourgeois
Fjord, close E. of Thomson Head, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 67°36’S., 66°33’W. The mouth
of the glacier was first surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. The entire glacier was sur-
veyed in 1946-47 and 1948-49 by the FIDS, and
named by them for Max F. Perutz of the Caven-
dish Laboratory, Cambridge, who has made im-
portant studies on the mechanism of glacier flow.
PETER I ISLAND: ice-covered island about 14
mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 5 mi.
wide, lying NE. of Thurston Pen.; in about 68°50’S.,
90°35’W. Disc. in January 1821 by a Russ. exp.
under Bellingshausen, who named it for Peter
the Great of Russia.
PETERMANN ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long
and 0.5 mi. wide, lying in the Dannebrog Is. about
1 mi. W. of Cape Duseberg, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°11’S., 64°11’W. Disc. by the
Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, and named
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
by him for August Petermann, noted German
geographer and founder of Petermanns Mitteilun-
gen. The US-ACAN has rejected the name Lund
Island, applied by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99, in favor of the original naming.
PETERMANN RANGE: a major range in the
Wohlthat Mtns., in New Schwabenland, which
extends about 50 mi. in a N.-S. direction, and rises
to about 8,300 ft. in elevation. The range is
separated from the Alexander Humboldt Mtns. to
the W. by Humboldt Graben, and centers in about
71°20’S., 12°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under
Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for August Peter-
mann.
PETERSON, MOUNT: mountain about 9,000 ft.
in el., standing W. of Mt. Rex in the Ellsworth
Highland; in about 74°57’S., 81°20’W. Disc. by
the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it
for Harries-Clichy Peterson, physicist with the
expedition.
PETERSON GLACIER: channel glacier about
1 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, flowing from the conti-
nental ice overlying Budd Coast to the E. side of
Vincennes Bay, about 5 mi. SE. of Mitchell I. in
the Windmill Is.; in 66°22’S., 110°47’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named for Louie N. Peterson, radio
operator and recorder with the USN Op. Wml.
parties which established astronomical control sta-
tions along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts
during January-February 1948.
PETERSON ICE FALLS: group of ice falls about
1 mi. wide, lying between Stevenson Gl. and Mis-
tichelli Hills on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about
70°07’S., 72°01’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H.
Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for J. C.
Peterson, Jr., air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photo-
graphic flights in this area and other coastal areas
between 14° and 164°, east longitude.
PETES PILLAR: pillar rock or stack lying im-
mediately E. of Fildes Pt. at the N. side of the
entrance to Port Foster, Deception I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°33’W. The pillar was
presumably a well-known landmark to early seal-
ers at Deception I. and appears on the chart drawn
by Lt. E. N. Kendall of the Chanticleer in 1829.
Named in 1951 by the Br—-APC for Pilot Officer
Pete St. Louis, RCAF, pilot with the FIDS in
1949-50. Not adopted: Kats Pillar.
PETRAS, MOUNT: high, prominent, ridge-
shaped mountain rising to about 12,000 ft. in el.,
lying on the axis of the Hal Flood Range, but
separated from it to the eastward, in the N. part
241
of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°10’S., 129°30’W.
Disc. by the USAS on a flight from West Base on
Dec. 14-15, 1940, and named for Theodore A.
Petras, master technical sergeant, USMC, pilot
on this flight. Not adopted: Mount Josephine
Petras.
Petrel Island: see Dynamite Islet.
PETREL ISLAND: rocky islet about 0.7 mi. long
and about 50 ft. in el., lying near the center and
marking the largest islet in the cluster of islets
at the SE. end of Géologie Arch., close N. of Astro-
labe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°40’S.,
140°01’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Lio-
tard, 1949-51, and named by the FrAE under
Barré, 1951-52, because numerous snow petrel
nests were found there. The generic term island
is retained to avoid duplication with the existing
Petrel Islet name in South Georgia. In January
1952, following destruction of the Port Martin
base by fire, the FrAE under Marret, 1952-53,
enlarged the hut on Pétrel Island to serve as the
new base site. Not adopted: Ile des Pétrels
[French].
PETREL ISLET: islet about 1 mi. SW. of Prion I.,
lying in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°02’S.,
37°17'W. First charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cush-
man Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig
Daisy. Recharted in 1929-30 by DI personnel, who
So named it because of its association with Prion I.
Petrels of the genus Prion were observed in these
islets.
Pétrels, Ile des: see Pétrel Island.
PETTER BAY: bight about 0.5 mi. S. of Spence
Hbr. along the E. coast of Coronation I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°11’W. This coast
was roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and
Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. The
name Petters Bay appears on a chart drawn by
Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912, and corrected by Hans
Borge in 1913. It seems likely that this name
was first used by Borge and commemorates Capt.
Sgrlle. Not adopted: Petters Bay.
PETTY ROCK: small rock lying 3 mi. SE. of
Cape Saenz Pefia in the center of the W. part
of Bigourdan Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°395’S., 67°28’W. First roughly surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed
in 1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of
its small size.
PHILIPPI, CAPE: cape marked by a dark cliff
with vertical sides at the E. end of D’Urville Wall,
which forms the N. wall of David GI., in Victoria
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Land; in about 75°19’S., 162°43’E. Disc. by the
BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it
for Dr. Philippi, distinguished geologist, who was
a member of the GerAE under Drygalski, 1901-3.
Philippieis; Philippigletscher; Philippi Ice Pla-
teau: see Philippi Rise.
PHILIPPI GLACIER: glacier which flows in an
E. direction to the SW. side of Drygalski Fjord, at
the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°49’S., 36°03’W.
Charted by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12,
who named it for Emil Philippi, glaciologist with
the GerAE under Drygalski, 1901-3, and professor
of geology at the Univ. of Jena.
PHILIPPI GLACIER: channel glacier about 6
mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing N. from the con-
tinental ice overlying Wilhelm II Coast to the E.
end of the West Ice Shelf, about 25 mi. W. of Gauss-
berg; in about 66°45’S., 88°20’E. Delineated from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
Named by the Australian Committee on Antarctic
Names for Emil Philippi, geologist with the GerAE
under Drygalski, 1901-3, who made scientific ob-
servations in the immediate vicinity of Gaussberg.
PHILIPPI RISE: low, snow-covered promontory,
about 7 mi. wide and extending some 10 mi. E. from
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°05’S., 62°20’W.
The ice surface is highest in the W., where it rises
to about 1,300 ft. in el., and is broken by Borch-
grevink and Gemini Nunataks. The SwedAE un-
der Nordenskjold, 1901-4, reported an ice wall or
glacial terrace in the vicinity of Borchgrevink
Nunatak. Although unable to determine its na-
ture, Nordenskj6ld named the feature Philippi-
gletscher, after Emil Philippi. It was determined
to be a snow-covered promontory by the FIDS
during their 1947 survey of this coast. Not
adopted: Philippigletscher [German], Philippieis
[German], Philippi Ice Plateau.
Philip Wrigley Gulf: see Wrigley Gulf.
PHILLIPS, CAPE: cape about 7 mi. SW. of Cape
Daniell, lying at the foot of Mt. Brewster at the
N. end of the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about
72°58’S., 170°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross, who named it for Lt. Charles G.
Phillips of the exp. ship Terror.
PHILLIPS, MOUNT: high mountain standing W.
of Mt. Lubbock, in northern Victoria Land; in
about 73°10’S., 167°05’E. Disc. in January 1841
by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Prof.
John Phillips, Asst. Sec. of the British Association.
Phillips Glacier: see Albanus Glacier.
242
PHILLIPS MOUNTAINS: a range of isolated
peaks about 4,000 ft. in el., standing at the N.
side of Balchen Gl. at the S. end of Ruppert Coast;
in about 76°10’S., 145°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE,
1928-30, and named by Byrd for Albanus Phillips,
Sr., a manufacturer of Cambridge, Md., and patron
of the Byrd expeditions.
PHILS ISLET: islet lying immediately S. of
Guépratte I. in Discovery Sound, in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°30’S., 63°00’W. Charted and named
in 1927 by DI personnel on the Discovery.
PHOBOS RIDGE: rocky ridge of sandstones and
shales forming the W. side of Mars Glacier, on
the E. side of Alexander I Island; in 71°54’S.,
68°30’W. The coast in this vicinity was first seen
from the air and partially photographed by Lin-
coln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. This ridge was
first surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. Named by
the FIDS for its association with Mars Glacier;
Phobos being the inner of the two satellites of
Mars.
Phoques, Iles des: see Seal Islands.
PHYLLIS BAY: small bight between Allen and
Scarlett Points at the S. end of Montagu I., in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 58°28’S., 26°18’W. Charted
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and
named for Phyllis V. Horton, daughter of Lt. Cdr.
W. A. Horton, RN (Ret.), chief engineer of. the
Discovery II at the time of the survey.
PICKERSGILL ISLANDS: group of islands about
15 mi. SE. of Annenkov I. and 8 mi. SW. of Ducloz
Head, South Georgia; in 54°37’S., 36°45’°W. These
islands were disc. in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under
Bellingshausen, who charted the largest of the
group as Pickersgill Island, erroneously thinking
it to be the island named in 1775 by a Br. exp.
under Cook for Lt. Richard Pickersgill of the exp.
ship Resolution. The name Pickersgill Islands
has been established by usage for the group of
islands disc. by Bellingshausen. The island origi-
nally named by Cook has been known as Annenkov
Island since 1819. Not adopted: Pickersgill Island.
Pickersgills Island: see Annenkov Island.
Pic Luigi de Savoie: see Luigi di Savoia Peak.
Piedrabuena, Isla: see Eta Island.
PIERRE, MOUNT: sharp conical peak, probably
1,500 ft. in el., standing immediately S. of Moureaux
Pt., the N. tip of the snow-covered peninsula form-
ing the N. end of Liége I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
63°59’S., 61°46’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE
under De Gerlache, 1897-99.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Pierre Baudin, Cape: see Berteaux, Cape.
Pierre Willems, Cape: see Willems, Cape.
PIGMY ROCK: rock lying close off the SW. side
of Alamode I. at the S. extremity of the Terra Firma
Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°43’S.,
67°33’W. The Terra Firma Is. were first visited
and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill.
This rock was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who
so named it because of its size.
PIG POINT: point which forms the S. side of
the entrance to North Bay, Prince Olav Hbr., on
the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W.
Probably named by DI personnel who charted
Prince Olav Hbr. during the period 1927-30.
PIG ROCK: rock about 215 ft. in el., lying in the
S. entrance to Fildes Str. about 1.25 mi. E. of
Duthoint Pt., Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°18’S., 58°48’W. This rock, known to sealers
in the area as early as 1821, was charted and named
by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935.
PI ISLETS: two islets and several rocks which
lie 1 mi. E. of the NE. end of Omega I. in the Mel-
chior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°53’W. The
name Pi, derived from the 16th letter of the Greek
alphabet, appears to have been first used on a
1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of
these islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943.
Not adopted: Islotes Sidders [Spanish].
Pile Peaks: see Rock Pile Peaks.
Pillar Peak: see Waldeck-Rousseau Peak.
PIMPLE, THE: cone-shaped peak about 10,300 ft.
in el., standing approximately midway between Mt.
Lister and Camels Hump in the Royal Society
Range, in Victoria Land; in about 77°58’S., 162’43’E.
Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4.
PINE ISLAND BAY: ice-filled bay about 40 mi.
long and 20 mi. wide, indenting the Walgreen Coast
close SW. of the Hudson Mtns.; in about 74°30’S.,
101°30’W. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named
by the. US-ACAN for the U.§:S. Pine Island, sea-
plane tender and flagship of the eastern task group
of the USN Op. Hjp:, Task Ferce 68, 1946-47.
PINER BAY: open bay about 8 mi. wide and 2 mi.
long, lying between Bienvenue and the E. side of
Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, along Adélie Coast; in
about 66°43’S., 140°17’E. Disc. on Jan. 30, 1840 by
the USEE under. Wilkes, who ‘named it for Thomas
Piner, signal quartermaster on the USEE flagship
Vincennes. This feature correlates closely with
243
portions of the sketch of “‘Piners Bay” as shown on
Wilkes’ chart of 1840.
PINERO ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and
0.5 mi. wide, lying about 5 mi. NW. of Pourquoi
Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°34’S.,
67°49’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-
10, and named by him for Antonio F. Pifero, mem-
ber of the Chamber of Deputies of the Argentine
Republic, on whose motion the Govt. voted un-
limited credit to meet the needs of the expedition.
Not adopted: Ile Piniero [French].
Pinguin-Bay: see Sacramento Bight.
Pinguinbucht: see Papua Beach.
Pinguinenkap: see Penguin Point.
Piniero, Ile: see Pinero Island.
Pinnacle: see Spire, The.
Pinnacle Island: see Pinnacle Rock.
PINNACLE ROCK: rock about 400 ft. in el., lying
midway between Capes Belsham and Valentine and
about 1.5 mi. off the N. coast of Elephant I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in about 61°02’S., 54°53’W.
The name was probably suggested by members of
the Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-16, who sighted
and described this feature as a pillar of rock during
their refuge at Elephant I. following the loss of
the exp. ship Endurance. Not adopted: Pinnacle
Island.
PIN POINT: narrow point forming the E. end of
Livingston I. and the W. side of the S. entrance
to McFarlane Str., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°37’S., 59°49’W. This feature was known to
early sealers as Point Renier, but in recent years
the name Pin Point has overtaken the early name
in usage. Not adopted: Cap Renier [French],
Friesland Point, Point Renier.
PIN ROCK: small rock lying at the S. side of
Pin Pt., the E. tip of Livingston I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°38’S., 59°49’W. The present
application of the name is based upon a 1935 sur-
vey by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Prior to
this survey the name Pin Rocks had been used for
a group of rocks erroneously charted in essen-
tially this position. Not adopted: Pin Rocks.
PIPKIN ROCK: ice-free islet, about 260 yards
long, lying close NE. of the N. end of Dismal It.
in the Faure Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°05’S., 68°50’W. The Faure Is. were disc. and
first charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot.
The group was surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS who
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
named this islet. The name, which suggests the
insignificant nature of the feature, is required for
reference to a FIDS geodetic control point estab-
lished there.
PIRIE PENINSULA: narrow peninsula extending
about 3 mi. N. from the center of Laurie I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 44°39’W. Charted
by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who named it
for Dr. J. H. Pirie, surgeon an geologist of the
expedition.
PIRNER, MOUNT: rocky mountain, over 2,000 ft.
in el., standing 2 mi. W. of Moltke Hbr., Royal Bay,
South Georgia; in 54°31’S., 36°07’W. First sur-
veyed by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schrader, and
named by them for Captain Pirner, commander of
the expedition ship Moltke.
PIRNER POINT: point marking the N. side of
the entrance to Little Moltke Hbr., in Royal Bay,
South Georgia; in 54°31’S., 36°04’W. First sur-
veyed by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schrader,
and named by them for Captain Pirner, commander
of the expedition ship Moltke.
Pisco, Mount: see Pisgah, Mount.
Pisgah, Mount: see Foster, Mount.
PISGAH, MOUNT: peak about 6,100 ft. in el.,
standing nearly 3 mi. SW. of Mt. Christi and 4 mi.
NE. of Mt. Foster in the north-central part of Smith
I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°56’S., 62°29’W. Be-
cause the peaks of Smith I. gave it a forked appear-
ance when seen from a distance, American sealers
in the 1820’s called it Mount Pisgah Island after
the double-topped Mount Pisgah in the town of
Durham, Conn. The name has since been re-
stricted to the peak described. Not adopted:
Mount Foster (q.v.), Mount Pisco, Mount Piso.
Piso, Mount: see Pisgah, Mount.
PITMAN, MOUNT: mountain with two mainly
ice-covered, dome-shaped summits, the highest and
northern being 6,000 ft. in el., standing about 14
mi. dnland from George VI Sound, between Riley
and Chapman Glaciers on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 70°09’S., 67°42’W. First surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for
E. L. Pitman, an airplane carpenter of Byfleet,
Surrey, who made the sledges used by the BGLE,
1934-37, introducing important new elements into
the design of the Nansen-type sledge.
PITT ISLANDS: group of small islands lying
about 3 mi. N. of Renaud I., in the northern Biscoe
Is.; in 65°29’S., 65°35’W. The name Pitt, after
William Pitt, British statesman, was applied by the
244
Br. ex. under Biscoe in 1832 to an island which
Biscoe erroneously charted as lying about 25 mi.
WNW. of these islands. The present application of
Pitt Islands is based on the interpretation of the
BGLE under Rymill who charted this island group
in 1935-36. Not adopted: Pitt Island. j
PITT POINT: promontory about 300 ft. in el.,
with rock exposure at its E. end, lying at the S.
side of the mouth of Victory Gl. on the SE. coast of
Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°51’S., 58°22’W. Charted
by the FIDS in 1945, and named for K. A. J. Pitt,
master of the Fitzroy, who assisted in establishing
FIDS bases in 1944-45.
Pleasant Cove: see Cobblers Cove.
P.L. Smith, Mount: see F. L. Smith, Mount.
PLUNKET POINT: long, narrow, rock ridge at
the N. end of the Dominion Range, at the conflu-
ence of Mill and Beardmore Glaciers; in about
85°05’S., 167°30’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE
under Shackleton, 1907-9.
PLUTO GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island, about 8 mi. long and 4 mi.
wide, which flows eastward into George VI Sound
to the north of Succession Cliffs; in 71°07’S.,
68°20’W. This glacier was first photographed from
the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and
was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G.
Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. The name, after the planet
Pluto, was given by FIDS after their surveys in
1948 and 1949.
PLYMOUTH, MOUNT: mountain about 2,100
ft. in el., standing about 3.5 mi. SW. of Fort
William near the center of the N. portion of Green-
wich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S.,
59°51’W. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II, but the name appears to have been
first used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon
this survey.
POA COVE: small cove 1 mi. SW. of Mai Pt. in
the SE. corner of Maiviken, Cumberland Bay,
South Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°30’W. Roughly
surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nor-
denskjéld. Resurveyed in 1929 by DI personnel,
and in 1951 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC
after the genus Poa, which includes the tussock
grass which grows near this cove in profusion.
POD ROCKS: small compact group of about
seven rocks, lying about 5 mi. W. of Millerand I.
in Marguerite Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°09’S., 67°30’W. First roughly surveyed in
1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The rocks were
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
visited and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who
established a sealing camp there. The name, pro-
posed by FIDS, derives from the old sealers’ term
pod, meaning a group of seals hauled ashore.
Poindexter, Cape: see Reynolds, Mount.
POINSETT, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking
the northernmost point of land on Budd Coast,
from which the coast recedes abruptly to the SW.
and SE.; in about 63°30’S., 113°00’E. The posi-
tion of Cape Poinsett correlates closely with the
high seaward extremity of “Budd’s High Land”
as charted by Wilkes in 1840. Delineated from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. MGip.,
1946-47, and named by the US—-ACAN for Joel R.
Poinsett, Sec. of War under Pres. Van Buren, who
was instrumental in the compilation and publica-
tion of the large number of scientific reports based
on the work of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
Poinsett was also instrumental in the preservation
of the USEE specimens and the subsequent foun-
dation of the Smithsonian Institution.
Pointe: for names beginning thus see under
the specific part of the name. For example, for
Pointe Concepcion see Concepcion, Pointe. (Pointe
is a French word for “point.’’)
Pointing Cliff: see Ponting Cliff.
POLARARBOKEN GLACIER: channel glacier
about 5 mi. wide and over 5 mi. long, flowing W.
from the continental ice and terminating at the
E. side of Sandefjord Ice Tongue, midway between
Polar Record Gl. and the Larsemann Hills on In-
grid Christensen Coast; in about 69°35’S., 75°28’E.
This glacier is marked by a prominent glacier
tongue about 3 mi. wide which in March 1947
extended W. for about 12 mi. Delineated in 1952
by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken
by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Named by Roscoe after
Polardrboken, a polar journal published by the
Norsk Polarklubb at Oslo, Norway.
POLARFORSCHUNG GLACIER: channel glacier
about 5 mi. wide and over 8 mi. long, flowing NNW.
from the continental ice and terminating at the
SE. side of Sandefjord Ice Bay, midway between
Il Polo and Polar Record Glaciers on Ingrid
Christensen Coast; in about 69°50’S., 74°30’E.
This glacier is marked by a prominent glacier
tongue about 6 mi. wide, which in March 1947 ex-
tended NNW. for about 5 mi. Delineated in 1952
by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken
by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Named by Roscoe after
Polarforschung, a polar journal published since
1930, by the Archiv fiir Polarforschung at Kiel,
Germany.
245
POLAR RECORD GLACIER: channel glacier
about 15 mi. wide and of undetermined length,
flowing NW. from the continental ice and termi-
nating at the SE. side of Sandefjord Ice Bay, mid-
way between Polarforschung and Polararboken
Glaciers on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about
70°00’S., 75°10’E. This glacier is marked by a
massive glacier tongue about 10 mi. wide, which
in March 1947 extended NNW. for about 40 mi.
Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
Named by Roscoe after The Polar Record, a polar
journal published, since 1931, by the Scott Polar
Research Institute at Cambridge, England.
POLAR TIMES GLACIER: channel glacier about
6 mi. wide and over 15 mi. long, flowing NE. from
the continental ice and terminating at the SE.
side of Sandefjord Ice Bay, midway between Mt.
Caroline Mikkelsen and Il Polo Gl. on Ingrid
Christensen Coast; in about 69°48’S., 74°02’E.
This glacier is marked by a prominent glacier
tongue about 7 mi. wide, which in March 1947
extended N. for about 10 miles. Delineated in
1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Named by Roscoe
after Polar Times, a polar journal published, since
1938, by the American Polar Society at New York
City.
POLLOCK, CAPE: cape which forms the N. end
of Dixson I., at the W. side of the mouth of Ninnis
Gl., along George V Coast; in about 68°03’S.,
146°46’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE Main Base
party under Mawson, and named for Prof. J. A.
Pollock of the Expedition Advisory Committee.
Polotsk Island: see Robert Island.
POLYNESIA POINT: ice-free point forming the
N. side of the entrance to Paal Hbr. on the E. side
of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W.
Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed
in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC in
1954 after the floating factory Polynesia, of the
Rethval Whaling Co. of Oslo, which worked in
the South Orkney Is. in 1913-14.
Pomona Island: see Coronation Island.
POMONA PLATEAU: ice-covered plateau, over
1,000 ft. in el., extending between Sandefjord
Peaks and Deacon Hill in the western part of Cor-
onation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 45°56’W.
Named by the Br—APC following a survey by the
FIDS in 1948-50. This naming revives in an
altered form a name given by James Weddell in
1822. Being unaware of the prior discovery of
Coronation I. by Capt. Nathaniel Palmer and Capt.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
George Powell, and its naming at that time, Wed-
dell renamed the island ‘Pomona’ or “Mainland”
after the island in the northern Orkney Islands.
That name was published by Weddell in 1825 but
did not survive.
POND, MOUNT: peak about 1,700 ft. in el.,
standing about 1 mi. E. of Pendulum Cove, on
Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°57’S.,
60°34’W. The name appears on a 1829 chart based
upon survey work by the Br. exp. under Foster,
1828-31. Probably named for John Pond, noted
English astronomer and director of the Royal Ob-
servatory at Greenwich at that time.
PONTING CLIFF: steep cliff about 1,500 ft. in
el., lying E. of Dennistoun Gl. on the N. coast of
Victoria Land; in about 71°12’S., 168°30’E. First
charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE
under Scott, and named for Herbert G. Ponting,
photographer of the expedition. Not adopted:
Pointing Cliff.
PORPOISE BAY: ice-filled embayment about 80
mi. wide and 50 mi. long, indenting the E. end of
Banzare Coast between Cape Mose and Cape Good-
enough; in about 66°25’S., 128°30’E. The USEE
under Wilkes applied the name Porpoise Bay, after
the USHE brig Porpoise, to a large bay in about
66°S., 130°E. Identification of Porpoise Bay is
based on correlation of Wilkes’ chart of 1840 with
the US-ACAN reconnaissance map of 1955, com-
piled from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47. The name Porpoise Bay is adopted
for the large embayment lying close SW. in
66°25’S., 128°30’E. in keeping with Wilkes’ original
naming.
PORTEOUS POINT: point which forms the SW.
end of Signy I. and the N. side of the NW. en-
trance to Fyr Chan., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°44’S., 45°41’W. Charted in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, and named for A. N.
Porteous, second engineer of the ship.
Posadowsky Bay: (in about 66°35’S., 89°50’E.)
the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED as
no substantial bay exists in this immediate area.
See: Posadowsky Glacier.
POSADOWSKY GLACIER: channel glacier
about 7 mi. wide and 9 mi. long, flowing N. from the
continental ice to Wilhelm II Coast, immediately
E. of Gaussberg; in about 66°50’S., 89°30’E.
Charted and photographed from the summit of
Gaussberg by the GerAE under Drygalski, 1901-3.
The name Posadowsky was applied to.an open bay
immediately E. of Gaussberg by the AAE under
Mawson, 1911-14. However, recent US-ACAN
246
studies of the aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, show no substantial bay ex-
isting in this immediate area. The committee
recommends that the name Posadowsky be re-
assigned to this hitherto unnamed glacier. Count
Arthur von Posadowsky-Wehner, Imperial Home
Secretary, secured a government grant to cover
the cost of the GerAE under Drygalski.
Possesion, Cape: see Possession, Cape.
POSSESSION, CAPE: cape which forms the NW.
end of Hoseason I., at the N. end of the Palmer
Arch.; in 63°44’S., 61°48’W. This cape appears
in rough outline on a chart published by Laurie
in 1828, and was presumably explored by James
Hoseason in the Br. sealer Sprightly in 1824. Cape
Possession was sighted and named by a Br. exp.
under Foster, 1823-31. It was more accurately
charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Not
adopted: Cape Possesion.
POSSESSION BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide which
recedes SW. about 7 mi., lying between Antarctic
Bay and the Bay of Isles along the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 37°06’W. Disc. and
named by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. Cook
made the first known landing on South Georgia
in this vicinity.
POSSESSION ISLANDS: group of about nine
islands and islets, lying S. of Cape McCormick
about 4 mi. off the NE. end of Victoria Land in
the W. part of the Ross Sea; in about 72°00’S.,
I -107445)) )Dise: by, the! Br exp) jundermeoss:
1839-43, and so named by him in commemoration
of the planting of the British flag on January 12,
1841.
Possession Nunataks: see Possession Rocks.
POSSESSION ROCKS: two small rock outcrops _
lying about 4 mi. SW. of Cape Harrisson, and
rising about 200 ft. above the ice-covered slopes
lying about 0.5 mi. inland from the S. shore of
Robinson Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about
66°47’S., 98°50’E. Disc. by the Eastern Sledge
Party under Frank Wild of the AAE, 1911-14, and
so named following a ceremony in December 1912
of claiming this area for the British Crown. Not
adopted: Possession Nunataks.
POSTE POINT: point about 1 mi. SE. of Hervéou
Pt., forming the S. side of the entrance to Sal-
pétriére Bay, on the W. side of Booth I., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°02’W. First
charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and
named by him for L. Poste, stoker on the exp. ship
Frangais. Not adopted: Point Poste.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
POSTILLION ROCK: small ice-free rock lying 2
mi. S. of the summit of Mt. Nemesis and close S.
of Roman Four Promontory, near the N. shore of
Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°14’S., 66°53’W.
First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill.
Resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS and so named by
them because of its outlying position.
POTTER COVE: cove indenting the SW. side of
King George I. about 2 mi. ESE. of Marian Cove,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°13’S., 58°42’W.
Potter Cove was known to sealers as early as 1821,
and the name is now well established in interna-
tional usage. Not adopted: Havre Petter [French],
Potters Cove, Potter’s Cove.
POULTER GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. long
and 2 to 3 mi. wide at its terminus, flowing from
the polar plateau eastward along the S. flank of
the Rawson Mtns. of the Queen Maud Range, and
joining Robert Scott Gl. near its head; in about
86°50’S., 153°30’W. Disc. in December 1934 by
the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Black-
burn, and named by Byrd for Thomas C. Poulter,
second-in-command of the expedition.
POURQUOI PAS GLACIER: glacier about 4 mi.
wide and 15 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the con-
tinental ice and terminating in a prominent
tongue near the E. end of Clarie Coast; in about
66°10’S., 1385°45’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Name
proposed by the French antarctic sub-committee
for the Pourquoi-Pas?, polar ship of the FrAE
under Charcot, 1908-10, and later used by Charcot
in expeditions to Greenland.
POURQUOI PAS GLACIER TONGUE: promi-
nent glacier tongue about 4 mi. wide and 7 mi.
long, extending seaward from Pourquoi Pas Gl.,
near the E. end of Clarie Coast; in about 66°05’S.,
135°45’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named for
the French polar ship Pourquoi-Pas?.
POURQUOI PAS ISLAND: island about 16 mi.
long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and decreasing in
width from about 11 mi. in the W. portion to about
11 mi. wide, lying close W. of Ridge I. off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°41’S., 67°28’W. Disc.
by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. The island
was charted more accurately by the BGLE under
Rymill, 1934-37, who named it for Charcot’s exp.
ship Pourquoi Pas?.
POWDER ISLET: islet lying 8 mi. SSE. of Cape
Jeremy and 2 mi. off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.,
in George VI Sound; in 69°32’S., 68°47’W. First
surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by
247
them because of the friable nature of the rock
found on the islet.
Powellboen: see Powell Rock.
Powell Group; Powell Islands: see South Orkney
Islands.
POWELL ISLAND: narrow island about 7 mi.
long and about 2 mi. wide, lying between Corona-
tion and Laurie Islands in the central part of the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°03’W. Disc. on
the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. Charted but
left unnamed on Powell’s map published by Laurie
in 1822. Powell’s name was first applied in 1821
as a group name for the South Orkney Is.; it was
reassigned in 1839 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville
and has since become well established for the cen-
tral island in the group. Not adopted: Cruchleys
Island, Dibdins Island, Powell Islands.
POWELL ROCK: small submerged rock on the
E. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S.,
45°36’W. It lies off the mouth of Starfish Cove,
about 600 yards NE. of Balin Pt. First charted
by Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13 and named ‘Powell-
boen,” after his whale catcher Powell. The FIDS
fixed the position of breakers here during rough
weather in 1947. Not adopted: Powellboen
[Norwegian].
POWER GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi.
wide and 4 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti-
nental ice at the W. flank of Norths Highland to
the head of Maury Bay, where it terminates in a
prominent tongue between Bell and Hudson
Glaciers, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°45’S.,
125°10’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the
US-ACAN for James S. Power, pursers steward on
the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
POYNTER COL: snow-filled col about 1,900 ft.
in el., situated about 6 mi. ESE. of Cape Kjellman
and joining Poynter Hill with the spur extending
N. from Ivory Pinnacles, on the NW. side of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°45’S., 59°06’W. Charted in
1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its
association with nearby Poynter Hill.
POYNTER HILL: conspicuous hill about 2,700
ft. in el., standing about 6 mi. E. of Cape Kjellman
at the N. side of Poynter Col, on the NW. side of
Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°44’S., 59°06’W. Charted
in 1948 by the FIDS, who named it for the mate on
the brig Williams, exp. ship of the Br. exp. under
Bransfield which made explorations in the South
Shetland Is. and Bransfield Str. in 1820.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
PRAM POINT: low, rounded point projecting
from the SE. side of Hut Point Peninsula about 1.5
mi. NE. of Cape Armitage, on Ross I.; in about
77°50’S., 166°44’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4, who so named it because it is neces-
sary during the summer months to use a pram
in the open water adjacent to the point when
traveling between the S. end of Hut Point Pen-
insula and Ross Ice Shelf.
PRATT, MOUNT: peak at the N. end of one of
the exposed ridges of the Grosvenor Range, rising
at the edge of the south polar plateau ice to about
10,500 ft. in el., in the Queen Maud Range; in
about 85°55’S., 179°00’E. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd
on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in Novem-
ber 1929, and named by him for Thomas B. Pratt,
American financier and contributor to the expe-
dition.
President’s Harbor: see New Plymouth.
Presqwile Jougla: see Jougla Point.
PRESSURE BAY: small arm in the W. side of
Robertson Bay, lying between Cape Wood and
Birthday Pt. along the N. coast of Victoria Land;
in about 71°25’S., 169°15’E. Charted and named
in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under
Scott. The Northern Party under Cdr. Victor L.
A. Campbell, RN, experienced great difficulty in
sledging across the pressure ice fringing the shore
of Robertson Bay.
PRESTON POINT: ice-covered point with mar-
ginal rock exposures, which marks the N. end of
Gillock I., near the junction of Lars Christensen
and Ingrid Christensen Coasts; in about 70°03’S.,
70°52’H. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.
in March 1947, and named by him for J. C. Preston,
Jr., air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic
flights in this area and other coastal areas between
14° and 164°, east longitude.
PRESTRUD, MOUNT: one of a group of low-
lying peaks barely protruding through the ice of
the south polar plateau, rising to about 10,700 ft.
in el., at the SW. end of the group containing
Mounts Hassel and Bjaaland, which stand about
20 mi. SW. of the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. in the
Queen Maud Range; in about 86°35’S., 163°15’W.
Disc. in November 1911 by the Nor. exp. under
Amundsen, and named by him for Lt. K. Prestrud,
first officer on the exp. ship Fram and leader of
the Eastern Sledge Party. Not adopted: Mount K.
Prestrud.
248
PRESTRUD INLET: a re-entrant in the S. side
of Edward VII Pen., at the NE. corner of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 78°25’S., 156°00’W. Named by the
USAS, 1939-41, in honor of Lt. K. Prestrud, leader
of the Eastern Sledge Party of the Nor. exp. under
Amundsen, who first traversed this region in 1911.
PREUSCHOFF RANGE: a N.-S. range of moun-
tains about 20 mi. long projecting through the
icecap at the edge of the polar plateau in New
Schwabenland; in about 72°10’S., 4°20’E. Disc.
by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named
for Franz Preuschoff, airplane engineer on the
Passat, one of the flying boats used by the expe-
dition.
PRIDE, CAPE: cape which forms the E. side of
the entrance to Elsehul, small bay along the N.
coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in
54°00’S., 37°59’°W. The name appears to have
been applied by DI personnel who surveyed Elsehul
in 1930.
PRIESTLEY, MOUNT: mountain peak lying
WNW. of Mt. Neumayer in the massif at the N.
side of David Gl., in Victoria Land; in about
75°12’S., 161°25’E. First charted by the BrAE un-
der Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for Raymond
E. Priestley, geologist with the expedition.
PRIESTLEY GLACIER: large valley glacier
about 2.5 mi. wide, flowing from the interior high-
land SE. of Mt. Baxter in a SE. direction to the N.
end of the Nansen Sheet, on the E. Coast of Vic-
toria Land; in about 74°25’S., 163°22’E. First ex-
plored by the Northern Party of the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13, and named for Raymond E. Priest-
ley, geologist with the Northern Party. Not
adopted: Priestly Glacier.
Priestly Glacier: see Priestley Glacier.
Primero de Mayo, Isla: see Lambda Island.
PRINCE ALBERT MOUNTAINS: coastal range
extending some 200 mi. northward of McMurdo
Sound along the coast of Victoria Land; centering
near 75°45’S., 161°30’E. Disc. by a Br. exp. under
Ross on Feb. 17, 1841, and named by him for Prince
Albert, consort of Queen Victoria of England. Not
adopted: Prinz Albert Gebirge.
PRINCE CHARLES STRAIT: strait about 5 mi.
wide, between Cornwallis and Elephant Islands,
in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°04’S.,
54°40’W. This strait was known to sealers as early
as 1821, but first record of its navigation was in
1839 by the brig Porpoise of the USEE squadron
under Wilkes. Soundings of the strait were made
by the vessel John Biscoe and the frigate H.M.S.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Sparrow in December 1948. Named for Prince
Charles, son of Queen Elizabeth II of Great Britain.
PRINCE GUSTAV CHANNEL: strait about 80
mi. long and from 4 to 15 mi. wide, separating
James Ross and Vega Islands from that portion of
the E. coast of Palmer Pen. lying between Cape
Longing and the Tabarin Pen.; centering in
63°50’S., 58°15’W. Disc. in October 1903 by the
SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it for
Crown Prince (later King) Gustav of Sweden.
Not adopted: Crown Prince Gustav Channel, Kron-
prins Gustav Channel, Kronprinz Gustaf Kanal
[German], Kronprinz Gustav Kanal [German].
PRINCE HARALD COAST: that portion of the
coast of Queen Maud Land lying between 34°E.
and 40°E. Disc. during a flight on Feb. 4, 1937
by Viggo Widerge, Nils Romnaes, and Mrs. Ingrid
Christensen of the Nor. exp. under Christensen,
1936-37, and named after the infant son of the
Crown Prince of Norway. Not adopted: Prince
Harald Land, Prins Harald Land [Norwegian].
Prince Harald Land: see Prince Harald Coast.
Prince Olaf Harbor: see Prince Olav Harbor.
Prince Olaf Mountains: see Prince Olav Moun-
tains.
Prince Olaf Rock; Prince Olav Rocks: see Olav
Rocks.
PRINCE OLAV COAST: that portion of the coast
of Queen Maud Land lying between 40°E. and
45°E. Disc. by the Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen
on a flight from the Norvegia in January 1930.
Named for Crown Prince Olav of Norway. Not
adopted: Crown Prince Olaf Land, Crown Prince
Olav Coast, Crown Prince Olav Land, Kronprins
Olav Land [Norwegian].
PRINCE OLAV HARBOR: small harbor in the
SW. portion of Cook Bay, entered between Point
Abrahamsen and Sheep Pt., along the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. The name
was in use as early as 1912 and was given, prob-
ably by Norwegian whalers, for Crown Prince Olav
of Norway. Not adopted: Prince Olaf Harbor,
Prins Olavs Havn [Norwegian].
Prince Olav Mountains: see Bush Mountains.
PRINCE OLAV MOUNTAINS: mountain group
of the Queen Maud Range stretching from
Shackleton Gl. to Liv Gl. at the head of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 85°05’S., 172°30’W. Disc. in 1911
by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named for
the then Crown Prince of Norway. Not adopted:
424589 O -57 -17
249
Crown Prince Olaf Mountains, Crown Prince Olav
Mountains, Crown Prince Olav’s Mountains,
Kronprinz Olaf Berge [German], Prince Olaf
Mountains.
Prince Olavs Havn: see Prince Olav Harbor.
Prince-Regent Luitpold Land: see Luitpold Coast.
PRINCESS ASTRID COAST: that portion of the
coast of Queen Maud Land lying between 5°00’E.
and 20°30’E. Disc. in March 1931 by a Nor. whal-
ing exp. under Halvorsen, and named for Princess
Astrid of Norway. Not adopted: Princess Astrid
Land, Prinsesse Astrid Land.
Princess Astrid Land; Prinsesse Astrid Land: see
Princess Astrid Coast.
PRINCESS MARTHA COAST: that portion of
the coast of Queen Maud Land lying between 5°E.
and 20°W. The name Crown Princess Martha
Land was originally applied by Capt. Hjalmar
Riiser-Larsen to that section of the coast in the
vicinity of Cape Norvegia which he disc. in Febru-
ary 1930. Not adopted: Crown Princess Martha
Land, Kronprinsesse Martha Land [Norwegian].
PRINCESS RAGNHILD COAST: that portion of
the coast of Queen Maud Land lying between
20°30’E. and 34°00’E. Disc. in February 1931 by
a Nor. exp. under Isachsen and Riiser-Larsen, and
named by Riiser-Larsen for Princess Ragnhild of
Norway. Not adopted: Princess Ragnhild Land,
Prinsesse Ragnhild Land [Norwegian].
Principal, Canal: see Sound, The.
Prinsesse Ragnhild Land; Princess Ragnhild
Land: see Princess Ragnhild Coast.
Prins Harald Land: see Prince Harald Coast.
Prinz Albert Gebirge: see Prince Albert Moun-
tains.
Prinzregent Luitpold Land: see Luitpold Coast.
PRION ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. N. of Luck
Pt., lying in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in
54°02’S., 37°16’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert
Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the
brig Daisy, and so named because he observed
petrels of the genus Prion on the island. Not
adopted: Prion Islet.
PRIOR ISLAND: ice-covered island about 1 mi.
long and 0.5 mi. wide, lying close E. of Lamplugh
I. and the mouth of Davis Gl., off the E. coast of
Victoria Land; in about 75°40’S., 162°58’E. First
charted and named by the BrAE under Shackleton,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1907-9. Probably named for Dr. George Thurland
Prior, Keeper of the Department of Minerals, Brit-
ish Museum, 1909-27.
PROCLAMATION ISLAND: small rocky island
lying about 3 mi. W. of Cape Batterbee and about
1 mi. off the coast of Enderby Land; in about
65°50’S., 53°39’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under
Mawson, 1929-31, and so named following the
reading of a proclamation on its summit on Jan.
13, 1930 claiming the area for the British Crown.
PROSPECT PASS: gently inclined, snow-covered
pass at the SE. side of the Kinnear Mtns., on the
W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 69°34’S., 67°35’W. Disc.
and first roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill. The name arose because, from the
summit of the pass, there is a fine prospect across
George VI Sound to the Douglas Range.
PROTECTION COVE: small bay lying between
Cape Klovstad and Newnes Gl. at the head of Rob-
ertson Bay, along the N. coast of Victoria Land;
in about 71°38’S., 170°13’E. First charted in 1899
by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, and so
named because the exp. ship Southern Cross found
protection here during a gale.
PROVIDENCE COVE: small bay, bounded by ice
cliffs, which lies at the foot of Remus Gl. in the
SE. corner of Neny Fjord, along the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°19’S., 66°45’W. First roughly
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It
was resurveyed in 1940-41 by members of the USAS,
and so named by them because on first arrival it
seemed providential that a site for the East Base
was found so quickly and easily. It was soon de-
termined, however, that the cove did not provide
a suitable site for the base.
PRYDZ BAY: deep embayment about 150 mi.
wide, lying E. of Amery Ice Shelf off Lars Christen-
sen and Ingrid Christensen Coasts; in about
69°00’S., and extending from about 73°00’E. to
79°00’E. Disc. and explored in February 1935 by
a Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen in the Thorshaven.
Named for Olaf Prydz, general manager of the
Hvalfangernes Assuranceforening, Sandefjord,
Norway. Not adopted: Mackenzie Sea, Olaf Prydz
Bukt [Norwegian].
PSI ISLETS: group of small islets which lie close
to the W. coast of Lambda I. in the Melchior Is.,
Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 63°01’W. The name
Psi, derived from the 23rd letter of the Greek al-
phabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946
Argentine govt. chart following surveys of these
islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not
adopted: Islotes Ballesteros [Spanish].
250
PUBLICATION ICE TONGUES: a group of large
glacier tongues extending generally NW. from In-
grid Christensen Coast which merge and fill the E.
half of Sandefjord Ice Bay; centering in about
69°40’S., 74°30’E. The following glaciers, reading
from NE. to SW., have prominent tongues which
form this group: Polararboken, Polar Record,
Polarforschung, I] Polo, and Polar Times Glaciers.
Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March
1947, and so named by him because the associated
glacier names commemorate polar publications.
Puerto: for names beginning thus see under
the specific part of the name. For example, for
Puerto Anderson see Anderson, Puerto. (Puerto
is a Spanish word for “harbor,” “port.’’)
PUFFBALL ISLETS: scattered group of small,
low, mainly ice-covered islets and rocks which ex-
tend about 10 mi. in a NESW. direction, lying in
southern Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palm-
er Pen. The center of the group lies about 23
mi. NNE. of Cape Jeremy; in 69°02’S., 68°30’W.
First visited and surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS.
The named, applied by FIDS, derives from asso-
ciation with Mushroom I. which lies 14 mi. NE. of
this group.
PULITZER, MOUNT: mountain rising to about
4,500 ft. in el., distinguished by sharp, serrated
ridges, standing about 15 mi. W. of Robert Scott
Gl., about 25 mi. S. of its terminus at the Ross Ice
Shelf, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°45’S.,
154°30’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named
by R. Adm. Byrd for Joseph Pulitzer, publisher of
the St. Louis Post-Dispatch, and a patron of the
Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35.
PULLEN ISLAND: snow-covered island about 5
mi. long, which rises to about 1,600 ft. in el. at its
N. end, lying near the center of Violante Inlet, —
along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°35’S.,
60°57’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from East
Base on Dec. 30, 1940, and named for William A.
Pullen, Aviation Machinist’s Mate at the East Base.
PULPIT MOUNTAIN: conspicuous, red-colored
mountain, about 2,900 ft. in el., standing 2 mi. W.
of Spence Hbr. at the E. end of Coronation I., South
Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°14’W. Named by the
FIDS following their survey of 1948-49. The
feature resembles a pulpit when seen from the east.
Punch Bowl: see Devils Punchbowl.
PURVIS GLACIER: glacier flowing generally E.
into the W. side of Possession Bay, on the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 37°10’W. Charted
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, and named
for John Murray. It was renamed Purvis Glacier,
possibly to avoid confusion with Murray Glacier
in northern Victoria Land, for a seaman on the
Alert, a motor boat used for survey work in South
Georgia by DI personnel in 1928-30. Not adopted:
John Murray Gletscher.[German].
PYLON POINT: rocky promontory about 2,800
ft. in el., standing about 4 mi. SW. of Three Slice
Nunatak and marking the N. end of the main
mountainous mass of Joerg Pen., on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°06’S., 65°05’W. Pylon Point
lies in the area first seen by Sir Hubert Wilkins on
his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and crossed by Lincoln
Ellsworth on his flight of Nov. 21, 1935. So named
by the US-SCAN because the various flights and
sledge trips of the USAS, 1939-41, rounded it on
their way S. along the E. coast of Palmer Peninsula.
Not adopted: Clarkson Point.
PY POINT: point about 1 mi. long and 0.25 mi.
wide, forming the S. end of Doumer I., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°52’S., 63°36’W. Disc.
by the FrAEK under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by
him for Monsieur Py, Pres. of the French Chamber
of Commerce in Buenos Aires at that time.
Pyramid, The: see Pyramid Island.
PYRAMID, THE: pyramidal-shaped nunatak
about 1,900 ft. in el., standing about 1 mi. E. of
Mt. Carrel and 1.5 mi. SE. of the head of Hope Bay,
at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 57°01’W.
Disc. and named by a party under J. Gunnar An-
dersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Not adopted:
Pyramiden [Swedish].
Pyramiden: see Pyramid, The.
PYRAMID ISLAND: conspicuous, pillar-shaped
island, about 675 ft. in el. and 0.5 mi. in diameter,
lying about 2 mi. NNE. of Williams Pt., Livingston
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°24’S., 60°09’W.
‘This island, presumably known to sealers in the
area since about 1820, was charted and given this
descriptive name by DI personnel on the Discovery
II in 1935. Not adopted: The Pyramid.
Pyramid Mountain; Pyramid Peak: see Rhamnus,
Mount.
PYRAMID MOUNTAIN:-conspicuous, pyramidal
peak about 9,000 ft. in el., standing about 6 mi. N.
of Mt. Albert Markham, on the W. side of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 81°26’S., 157°15’E. Disc. and
named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4.
PYRAMID PEAK: peak, about 1,300 ft. in el.,
surmounting Cape Buller at the W. side of the en-
trance to the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in
251
54°00’S., 37°23’W. Charted and named by DI
personnel in the 1929-30 season.
Pyramid Point: see Tilt Rock.
PYRAMID ROCK: rock lying in the S. part of
the entrance to Lapeyrére Bay, along the NE. coast
of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°22’S.,
63°09’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on
the Discovery in 1927.
PYROX ISLET: horseshoe-shaped islet lying 5
mi. E. of the summit of Mt. Nemesis at the head of
Neny Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°12’S., 66°41’W. First surveyed by the USAS,
1939-41. Resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who so
named it because of pyroxenic rocks found there.
Not adopted: Neny Glacier Island.
Quarters Bay: see Winter Quarters Bay.
QUEEN ALEXANDRA RANGE: range of dome-
shaped mountains, intermingled with a few sharp
conical peaks, lying W. of Beardmore Gl. at the
head of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°S., 169°E.
Disc. in December 1908 by the BrAE under Shackle-
ton, and named for Alexandra, Queen of England,
1901-10. Not to be confused with Alexandra
Mountains in 77°30’S., 152°00’W. Not adopted:
Alexandra Mountains, Alexandra Range, Konigin
Alexandra Gebirge [German].
QUEEN MARY COAST: that portion of the coast
of Antarctica lying between Cape Filchner, in about
92°18’E., and Cape Hordern, in about 100°26’E.
Disc. in February 1912 by the AAE under Mawson,
who named it for Queen Mary of England. Not
adopted: Dronning Mary Land [Norwegian],
Konigin Mary Land [German], Queen Mary Land.
Queen Mary Land: see Queen Mary Coast.
QUEEN MAUD BAY: small bay about 1 mi. S.
of King Haakon Bay, along the S. coast of South
Georgia;. in about 54°14’S., 37°21’W. Roughly
charted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellings-
hausen. It was named prior to 1922 for Queen
Maud, wife of King Haakon VII of Norway, prob-
ably by Norwegian whalers who frequented this
coast. Not adopted: Kénigin Maud Bucht [Ger-
man], Queen Maud Harbor.
Queen Maud Harbor: see Queen Maud Bay.
QUEEN MAUD LAND: that part of Antarctica
lying between Coats Land and Enderby Land, from
20°00’W. to 45°00’E. This name, given for Queen
Maud of Norway, represents an expansion of the
original core area, between 37°00’E. and 50°00’E.
Disc. in 1930 by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen.
Not adopted: Dronning Maud Land [Norwegian].
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Queen Maud Mountains: see Queen Maud Range.
QUEEN MAUD RANGE: major range of moun-
tains standing at the head of Ross Ice Shelf in the
general vicinity of Beardmore Gl., in about 84°S.,
174°E. and extending in a SE. direction for an
indeterminate distance beyond 87°S., 145°W.
Disc. in 1911 by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and
named by him for the Queen of Norway. Not
adopted: Dronning Mauds Fjell [Norwegian],
Konigin Maud Gebirge [German], Queen Maud’s
Range, Queen Maud Mountains.
Queen Mountain: see Queer Mountain.
Queens Bay: see Borge Bay.
QUEENSLAND, MOUNT: high peak about 25 mi.
WNW. of Mt. Melbourne, standing to the E. of Mt.
New Zealand, in Victoria Land; in about 74°00’S.,
163°35’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4,
who named this peak because of the generous as-
sistance given the exp. by both the govt. and people
of Queensland.
QUEER MOUNTAIN: mountain about 3,400 ft.
in el., standing at the head of Miller Gl. about 1
mi. W. of Killer Ridge, in Victoria Land; in about
77°08’S., 161°48’E. Charted and named by the
BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Queen
Mountain.
Querthal: see Cross Valley.
QUERY ISLET: prominent rocky islet lying be-
tween the foot of Clarke Gl. and Keyhole It. on the
S. side of Mikkelsen Bay, along the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°47’S., 67°12’W. Surveyed in
1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of the
difficulty in deciding from a distance whether the
feature was an islet or part of the mainland.
QUILP ROCK: small, isolated rock in Laubeuf
Fjord, lying 3.5 mi. SSE. of the S. tip of Pinero I.
and 1.5 mi. off the NW. side of Pourquoi Pas I., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°38’S., 67°46’W.
First surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by
them after the dwarf, Daniel Quilp, a vicious, ill-
tempered character in The Old Curiosity Shop, by
Charles Dickens.
QUINTANA ISLETS: group of islets and rocks
about 5 mi. N. of the Betbeder Islets and some 17
mi. WNW. of the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°11’S., 65°00’W. Disc. by the
FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him
for Manuel Quintana, Pres. of the Argentine Re-
public, 1904-6. Charted by the BGLE under Ry-
mill, 1934-37. Not adopted: Quintana Islands.
252
RABOT ISLAND: island about 12 mi. long and
4 mi. wide, lying about 1 mi. SW. of Renaud I., in
the Biscoe Is.; in 65°52’S., 66°09’W. Rabot Island
was first charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Char-
cot, who named it for Charles Rabot.
RABOT, MOUNT: southernmost of three moun-
tains lying about 45 mi. inland from the W. side
of Ross Ice Shelf, in the Queen Alexandra Range,
and about 30 mi. SSE. of Mt. Markham; in about
83°25’S., 162°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE under
Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for Charles
Rabot, editor of La Géographie, of the Geo-
graphical Soc. of Paris, an outstanding glaciologist
of that period.
Rade Point: see Kade Point.
RADFORD MOUNTAINS: mountains about
3,000 ft. in el., standing W. of Mt. Saunders in
the Edsel Ford Ranges, and occupying a relatively
isolated frontal position on Sulzberger Bay, in
Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°52’S., 146°40’W.
Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the Eastern Flight of
Dec. 5, 1929, and named for V. Adm. Arthur W.
Radford, USN, Deputy Chief of Naval Operations
(Air) during the exploration by USN Op. Hjp.,
1946-47, and later Adm. and Chairman of the
Joint Chiefs of Staff.
RAE, POINT: point marking the N. side of the
entrance to Scotia Bay on the S. coast of Laurie
I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°37’W.
First charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4,
who named it for John Rae, Scottish Arctic ex-
plorer and member of the Sir John Richardson
exp., 1854, who learned the fate of the Sir John
Franklin Arctic exp., 1847.
Ragged Island: see Rugged Island.
Ragnhild Coast: see Princess Ragnhild Coast.
Rainoff’s Island: see Gibbs Island.
RALLIER DU BATY ISLET: islet about 0.25 mi.
in extent, with a smaller islet off its N. side, lying
0.25 mi. W. of the NW. extremity of Booth I., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°04’W.
Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and
named by him for R. Rallier du Baty, merchant
marine cadet who signed on as seaman on the
exp. ship Frangais. Not adopted: Rallier du Baty
Islets.
RAMP ROCK: the westernmost of a number of
rocks which extend 2.5 mi. N. and NW. of Johan-
nesen Pt., Main I., at the W. extremity of South
Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°21’W. The name
“Laavebrua” has been used for this feature by
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
whalers and sealers at South Georgia. It is a
descriptive Norwegian term, meaning literally
“threshing floor bridge” or “barn bridge.” In
Norwegian barns used for storing hay, there is
a ramp up which the wagons are driven before
tipping. ‘“Laavebrua,” which is not strictly trans-
latable is this ramp. The Br-APC recommended
in 1954 that the name Ramp Rock be approved
for this feature. The name Lavebrua Islet is al-
ready approved for an islet near Deception Island.
Not adopted: Laavebrua [Norwegian].
RAMSAY, MOUNT: peak about 1,600 ft. in el.,
about 0.5 mi. W. of Uruguay Cove, on the N. coast
of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
44°45’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce,
1902-4, and named after Allan Ramsay, chief en-
gineer of the exp. ship Scotia, who died on Aug.
6, 1903 and was buried at the foot of the peak.
RANDALL ROCKS: group of rocky islets and
small rocks situated 0.5 mi. off the SW. corner of
Millerand I. and trending in a WNW.-ESE. di-
rection for 1 mi., lying in Marguerite Bay off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°17’W.
First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS and
named for Terence M. Randall, FIDS radio opera-
tor at Stonington I., 1947-49.
RANVIKA: cove indenting the E. coast of Peter
I Island, near the NE. corner of the island; in
about 68°46’S., 90°25’W. Disc. in 1927 by Nor. exp.
under Tofte in the Odd I. The name may derive
from the estate of Lars Christensen, sponsor of
the exp., situated at the head of Ranvik, a bay in
Norway. The word vik or vika are Norwegian for
bay or cove. Not adopted: Ranvik, Ranvik Bay.
Ranvik Bay: see Ranvika.
RANVIK BAY: open bay, about 13 mi. wide,
lying between Rauer Is. and Ranvik Ice Tongue,
along Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°02’S.,
77°30’E. Disc. and charted in February 1935 by
a Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen in the Thorshavn.
Named for the estate of Lars Christensen, sponsor
of the exp., situated at the head of Ranvik, a bay
in Norway. Not adopted: Ranvik [Norwegian].
Ranvikbreen: see Ranvik Ice Tongue.
RANVIK ICE TONGUE: small ice tongue, about
4 mi. long and from 4 to 6 mi. wide, extending NW.
from the continental ice overlying Ingrid Chris-
tensen Coast and filling the SE. portion of Ranvik
Bay; in about 69°10’S., 77°20’E. Charted by Nor-
wegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under
253
Lars Christensen, and named Ranvikbreen because
of its close association with Ranvik Bay. The
generic ice tongue is approved as a more appro-
priate term on the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952
compilation from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs
taken in March 1947. Not adopted: Ranvikbreen
[Norwegian].
RANVIK ISLAND: small, rocky island, about 1.7
mi. long, which rises to about 400 ft. in el., mark-
ing the second largest of the Rauer Is. and lying
near the S. end of the group, close NW. of Brown
Gl. on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°54’S.,
77°43’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers
from aerial photographs taken in January 1937
by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and
named Ranviktangen, as the feature was believed
to form part of a coastal ridge at that time. The
name Ranvik Island was proposed by John H.
Roscoe, who determined, from his 1952 study of
USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March
1947, that the feature lies offshore from the
coastal outcrops. Not adopted: Ranviktangen
[Norwegian].
Ranviktangen: see Ranvik Island.
RASMUSSEN, CAPE: black cliff almost 800 ft.
in el., marking the N. side of the entrance to
Waddington Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°15’S., 64°06’W. Disc. and named by the
BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99.
Rauer Group: see Rauer Islands.
RAUER ISLANDS: group of rocky islands,
islets and rocks, which measures about 9 mi. across,
lying between Sgrsdal Glacier Tongue and Ranvik
Bay, close off Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about
68°50’S., 77°38’E. Disc. and roughly charted in
February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen,
who applied the name Rauer, probably after the
island by that name lying in Oslofjord opposite
Tgnsberg, Norway. Recompiled by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken in
January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen-
sen, and later by John H. Roscoe from USN Op.
Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947.
Not adopted: Rauer [Norwegian], Rauer Group.
RAVN ROCK: submerged rock lying in the cen-
ter of Neptunes Bellows, the entrance to Port
Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
63°00’S., 60°34’W. Charted by the FrAE under
Charcot, 1908-10. Named for the whale catcher
Ravn, based at Deception I. at that time.
RAWSON MOUNTAINS: crescent-shaped range
of tabular, ice-covered mountains about 16 mi.
long which rise to about 9,000 ft. in el., standing
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
SE. of the SE. end of the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns.,
and terminating in Mt. Wyatt; in about 86°43’S.,
155°00’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Quin Blackburn, and
named by Byrd for Frederick H. Rawson, American
banker and contributor to the Byrd Antactic Ex-
peditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Not adopted:
Frederick H. Rawson Mountains.
RAYMOND, MOUNT: peak at the SE. end of the
Dominion Range, rising above the plateau ice
to about 8,500 ft. in el., in the Queen Maud Range;
in about 85°58’S., 174°00’E. Disc. and named in
December: 1908 by the Southern Journey Party of
the BrAE under Shackleton.
Raymond Fosdick Mountains; Raymond Fosdick
Range: see Fosdick Mountains.
RAYNER PEAK: mountain about 5,500 ft. in el.,
visible at sea from a great distance, standing S.
of the head of Edward VII Bay near the junction
of Enderby Land and Kemp Coast; in about
67°27’S., 55°52’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI
personnel on the William Scoresby and named for
George W. Rayner, zoologist on the DI staff and
leader of this expedition. Not adopted: Kjuringen
| Norwegian].
RAYNER POINT: point marked by a rocky peak
forming the N. side of the entrance to Gibbon
Bay, on the E. coast of Coronation I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 45°12’W. Charted in
1912-13 by Capt. Petter Sdrlle, a Norwegian whaler.
Recharted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery II, and named by them for George W.
Rayner.
Razorback Island: see Big Razorback Island;
Little Razorback Island.
REA, MOUNT: prominent mountain about 3,700
ft. in el., with a vertical face on its W. side called
The Billboard, standing between Arthur Davis and
Boyd Glaciers in the Edsel Ford Ranges, and front-
ing on Sulzberger Bay, in Marie Byrd Land; in
about 77°03’S., 145°35’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE
on the Eastern Flight of Dec. 5, 1929, and named
for Mr. and Mrs. Rea, of Pittsburgh, Pa., contribu-
tors to the expedition.
RECLUS, CAPE: cape forming the N. tip of the
peninsula between Wilhelmina Bay and Charlotte
Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°23’S.,
61°48’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache,
1897-99, who named it for Elisée Reclus, noted
French geographer and author.
254
RED BAY: small, open bay lying close S. of the
W. extremity of Red Rock Ridge, along the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°18’S., 67°11’W. First
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The
bay was resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and
so named by them for its association with Red
Rock Ridge.
REDCLIFF NUNATAK: red granite ridge about
1,800 ft. in el., rising about 4 mi. E. of Mt. Suess
along the S. flank of Mackay Gl., in Victoria Land;
in about 77°02’S., 162°04’E. Charted by the BrAE,
1910-13, under Scott, and so named because of
its color. Not adopted: Redcliff, Redcliffs Nunakol.
Redcliffs Nunakol: see Redcliff Nunatak.
RED ISLAND: circular, flat-topped island,
about 1 mi. in diameter and about 1,600 ft. in el.,
with reddish cliffs of volcanic rock, lying about 3.5
mi. NW. of Cape Lachman, James Ross I., close
S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°44’S.,
57°52’W. Disc. and named by the SwedAE under
Nordenskjold, 1901-4. Not adopted: Rodon
[Swedish], Rote Insel [German].
RED ISLAND: conspicuous red lava island,
about 300 ft. in el., which lies about 0.5 mi. N.
of Laurens Pen., Heard I., and to which it is tied
by a low isthmus; in 52°58’S., 73°18’E. It was so
named because of its color, probably by American
sealers at Heard I. in the period following their
initiation of sealing there in 1855. The name ap-
pears on the chart by the Br. exp. under Nares,
which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874
and utilized the names then in use by the sealers.
RED ROCK RIDGE: conspicuous reddish-
colored promontory, about 2,300 ft. in el., which
projects from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and
separates Neny Fjord and Rymill Bay; in 68°18’S.,
67°08’W. Surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill, who so named it because of its color.
Further surveys in 1948 by the FIDS have identi-
fied this ridge as the feature first sighted in 1909
and named “Ile Pavie” or “Cap Pavie” by the FrAE
under Charcot, but the name Red Rock Ridge is
now too firmly established to alter. The name
Pavie Ridge has been assigned to the prominent
rocky ridge at 68°34’S., 66°59’W.
REECE, MOUNT: sharp, ice-free peak about
3,600 ft. in el., standing about 4 mi. W. of Pitt
Point. It is the highest point of a ridge forming
the S. wall of Victory Gl., on the SE. coast of
Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°50’S., 58°32’W. Charted
in 1945 by the FIDS, and named for Lt. A. Reece,
leader of the FIDS Deception I. base in 1945, and
meteorologist and geologist at the Hope Bay base
in 1946.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
REECE PASS: a N.-S. col between the main
massif and the eastern member of the Fosdick
Mtns., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd
Land; in about 76°31’S., 144°35’W. Disc. on aerial
flights made from West Base of the USAS in 1940
and visited by the Edsel Ford Mountains Biological
Party. Named for J. A. Reece, radio operator at
West Base.
REEF POINT: point bounded by a small reef
forming the W. end of Cook I., in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°13’W. Charted and named
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
REEVES, MOUNT: mountain about 5,380 ft. in
el., in the Britannia Range, standing SW. of Cape
Murray on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
79°40’S., 158°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4, who probably named this feature for
Edward Ayearst Reeves, Map Curator and Instruc-
tor in Practical Astronomy and Surveying to the
Royal Geographical Soc., 1900-33.
REEVES, MOUNT: mountain about 6,300 ft. in
el. on the E. side of Adelaide I., standing 5.5 mi.
NE. of Mt. Bouvier and 7 mi. W. of The Gullet; in
67°10’S., 67°58’W. First sighted and roughly sur-
veyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Re-
surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them
for Edward A. Reeves, Map-curator and Instructor
in Survey at the Royal Geographical Soc., 1900-33.
REEVES GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. wide
and 25 mi. long, descending from the high in-
terior upland between Mt. Nansen and Mt. Larsen,
and merging with the confluent ice of Nansen
Sheet along the coast of Victoria Land; in about
74°45’S., 162°27’E. Disc. by the Northern Party of
the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Probably
named for Edward Ayearst Reeves.
REFERENCE ISLET: rocky islet 2 mi. WNW. of
the W. tip of Neny I. and 1.5 mi. SE. of Millerand I.,
lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°10’W. First roughly charted
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The islet was
surveyed by the FIDS in 1947, and so named by
them because it served as a convenient reference
point for survey work.
REFERRING PEAK: conspicuous black peak
about 3,800 ft. in el., standing on the N. side of
Mackay Gl. about 1.5 mi. W. of the mouth of Cleve-
land Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 76°56’S.,
161°54’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13. The name suggests the easy
identification of the peak and its possible use as a
landmark.
255
REFUGE ISLETS: small group of islets lying
about 0.5 mi. from the ice cliffs at the SW. side of
Red Rock Ridge, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°21’S., 67°10’W. Disc. and named by the
BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who used these islets
as a depot for sledge journeys S. from the southern
base in the Debenham Islands. Not adopted:
Refuge Islands.
REGNARD PEAKS: group of rounded, snow-
covered peaks probably over 4,000 ft. in el., stand-
ing about 4 mi. NW. of Mt. Peary and 5 mi. ESE.
of Mt. Scott, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
about 65°11’S., 63°53’W. Disc. and named by the
FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Not adopted:
Regnard Peaks.
Regreso, Cap: see Return Point.
REGULA RANGE: mountain range about 9,500
ft. in el., extending about 30 mi. in a NW.-SE. di-
rection across the mouth of Penck Trough, in New
Schwabenland; in about 72°40’S., 3°30’W. Disc.
by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named
for Herbert Regula, chief meteorologist with the
expedition.
REICHELDERFER, CAPE: rounded headland
which is almost completely ice covered lying at the
W. side of the N. entrance to Stefansson Str., on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°22’S., 62°43’W.
This cape was seen by Sir Hubert Wilkins, who
explored this coast on his aerial flight of Dec. 20,
1928. Charted in 1940 by the USAS, and errone-
ously called Cape Rymill at that time. Resighted
in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, who named it
for Francis W. Reichelderfer, Chief of the U. S.
Weather Bureau, which loaned weather instru-
ments and instructed RARE members in their
operation. Not adopted: Cape Rymill (q.v.).
REID, MOUNT: mountain about 10,160 ft. in el.,
standing about 11 mi. SE. of Mt. Longstaff in the
Queen Alexandra Range, on the W. side of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 83°05’S., 166°00’E. Disc. by the
BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for
Alfred Reid, manager of the expedition.
REID GLACIER: glacier, about 2.5 mi. wide and
at least 5 mi. long, which flows S. to enter Bigour-
dan Fjord opposite The Narrows, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 67°29’S., 67°16’W. First roughly
charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill.
The lower reaches of the glacier were surveyed in
1948-49 by the FIDS, and named by them for Harry
F. Reid (1859-1944), prof. of geology at Johns
Hopkins Univ., Baltimore, noted for his studies of
glacier flow and stratification in Alaska and the
Alps.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
REID GLACIER: steep glacier descending be-
tween Melba and Davis Peninsulas to the Shackle-
ton Ice Shelf, on Queen Mary Coast; in about
66°40’S., 98°30’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the
Eastern Sledge Party under Wild of the AAE,
1911-14, and named for Sir George Reid, Common-
wealth High Commissioner in London in 1911.
REID ISLET: islet at the E. side of the entrance
to Iceberg Bay, along the S. coast of Coronation I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°30’W. The
name Reid appears on a map of these islands by
Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13. Not adopted: Reid
Islets.
REINBOLT HILLS: group of rocky hills, of low
to moderate height, about 3 mi. wide and of un-
determined length, standing at the S. side of the
confluence of Kreitzer and Baker Three Glaciers,
near the junction of Lars Christensen and Ingrid
Christensen Coasts; in about 70°20’S., 72°32’E.
Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947,
and named by him for Lt. Fred L. Reinbolt, USN,
co-pilot on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in
this area and other coastal areas between 14° and
164°, east longitude.
REIST ROCKS: small group of coastal rocks
projecting above the continental ice, fronting on
Knox Coast midway between Robinson and Haw-
kins Glaciers; in about 66°33’S., 107°26’E. De-
lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for
Wilbur H. Reist, tractor driver with USN Op. Wml.,
1947-48, who assisted in transporting shore parties
which established astronomical control stations
from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast.
RELAY BAY: bay on the SW. side of Robertson
Bay, lying between Penelope Pt. and Islands Pt.,
along the coast of northern Victoria Land; in about
71°30’S., 169°32’E. First charted and named in
1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAK, 1910-13,
under Scott.
RELIEF INLET: narrow, winding re-entrant,
about 10 mi. long, in the NE. side of the Drygalski
Ice Tongue, formed along a shear plane caused by
differential ice movement lying along the coast of
Victoria Land; in about 75°18’S., 163°40’E. So
named by the South Magnetic Polar Party of the
BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, because, after al-
most giving up hope of rescue, the Nimrod picked
up the party.
REMENCHUS GLACIER: channel glacier about
4 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, flowing WNW. from the
continental ice overlying Knox Coast and termi-
nating in a small, but prominent tongue at the SE.
256
end of the Highjump Arch.; in about 66°02’S.,
101°22’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the
US-ACAN for John F. Remenchus, chief aviation
pilot, who assisted USN Op. Wml. shore party op-
erations and made photographic flights along Wil-
helm II, Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts in
January-February 1948.
REMUS GLACIER: glacier, about 5 mi. long,
which flows from the N. slopes of Mt. Lupa north-
westward along the NE. end of the Blackwall Mtns.
into Providence Cove, Neny Fjord, on the W. side
of Palmer Pen.; in 68°20’S., 66°43’W. The lower
reaches of the glacier were first roughly surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in
1948-49 by the FIDS, who so named it for its asso-
ciation with Romulus GIl., whose head lies near the
head of this glacier.
RENARD, CAPE: cape forming the S. side of the
entrance to Flandres Bay and separating the Danco
and Graham Coasts, on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°01’S., 63°43’W. Disc. in 1898 by the
BelgAE under De Gerlache, and named for Pro-
fessor Renard, of the Univ. of Gent, a member of
the Belgica Commission and the Belgian Royal
Academy.
RENAUD ISLAND: island about 22 mi. long and
averaging about 6 mi. wide, situated between the
Pitt Is. and Rabat I., in the Briscoe Is., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°40’S., 65°50’W. The
island was roughly charted and named by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot.
Rendezvous Bluff: see Discovery Bluff.
Renier, Cap; Renier, Point: see Pin Point.
RENNICK BAY: extensive embayment of the
Oates Coast immediately W. of Cape Cheetham; in
about 70°10’S., 162°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE under
Scott, when the exp. ship Terra Nova explored west-
ward of Cape North in 1911. Named for Lt. Henry
E. de P. Rennick, RN, an officer on the Terra Nova.
Aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-
47, indicate that this bay extends inland as much
as 50 miles.
Rescapés, Iles des: see Rescapé Islets.
RESCAPE ISLETS: small group of rocky islets
lying in the entrance to Port Martin, about 0.8 mi.
W. of Manchot It. and about 0.6 mi. NW. of Cape
Margerie, off Adélie Coast; in 66°49’S., 141°22’E.
Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-
47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51,
and so named because the small motor boat Skgd-
ern, used with some risk to complete hydrographic
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
and geodetic surveys of the Port Martin area, sank
at her moorings during an extended storm. Res-
capé is the French spelling for escape. Not
adopted: Iles des Rescapés [French].
RESCUE ROCK: submerged rock marked by
breakers, about 1 mi. NE. of Skua Islet, in the
entrance to the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in
54°00’S., 37°14’°W. The rock was charted in 1930
by DI survey personnel. It was so named because
a whale catcher passing near this rock sighted a
flag on Skua Islet, eventually leading to the rescue
of the survey party at Camp Bay where their ves-
sel had run aground.
RESOLUTION POINT: point on the NE. side of
Cook I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S.,
27°07’W. Cook I. was probably first sighted by
Capt. James Cook in 1775. The point was charted
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and
named after Cook’s ship H.M.S. Resolution.
RESSAC ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about
0.9 mi. E. of Houle It. and about 4 mi. NE. of Zélée
Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in about 66°42’S.,
141°14’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Lio-
tard, 1949-51, and so named because the surf
breaks over the islet. Ressac is the French word
for surf.
RESTITUTION POINT: point marking the N.
side of the entrance to South Bay in Prince Olav
Hbr., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S.,
37°09’'W. The name Factory Point, derived from
the nearby whaling station (now no longer operat-
ing) was given for this feature by DI personnel
in 1927. There is also a Factory Point at Leith
Hbr., less than 20 mi. to the NW. Since Factory
Point in Leith Hbr. is better known locally, it has
been retained. To avoid confusion the name Fac-
tory Point is rejected for the feature now described,
and a new name Restitution Point is approved.
The S.S Restitution, a floating factory ship, worked
for many years at Prince Olav Hbr. before the shore
station was built there. Not adopted: Factory
Point.
RETHVAL POINT: ice-free point forming the S.
side of the entrance to Paal Hbr. on the E. side of
Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°36’W.
Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed
in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC in
1954 after the Rethval Whaling Co. of Oslo, the
first company to start whaling in the South Ork-
ney Is. in 1911-12.
RETURN POINT: rocky slope forming the SW.
tip of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°38’S., 46°02’W. Disc. on Dec. 7, 1821 by Capt.
257
George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer.
Named by Powell who, after making a landing on
this point of land, returned directly aboard ship
after viewing the coast to the eastward. Not
adopted: Cap Regreso [French].
REUSCH GLACIER: glacier less than 1 mi. wide
descending into the W. part of Relay Bay, an in-
dentation of Robertson Bay in northern Victoria
Land; in about 71°29’S., 169°25’E. First charted
in 1899 by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E.
Borchgrevink, who named this feature for Dr. H.
Reusch, then Pres. of the Norwegian Geographical
Society. Not adopted: Doctor Rusch Glacier,
Reush Glacier.
Reush Glacier: see Reusch Glacier.
Revelle Bay: see Revelle Inlet.
REVELLE INLET: broad, ice-filled inlet which
recedes W. some 15 mi. between Capes Agassiz and
Keeler, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°40’S., 63°26’W. The inlet lies in the area ex-
plored from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928
and Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, but it was first
charted by the USAS in 1940. It was resighted by
the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it
for Roger Revelle, oceanographer at the Scripps
Inst. for Oceanographic Research, who gave tech-
nical assistance during the fitting out of the Ronne
expedition. Not adopted: Revelle Bay.
REY, CAPE: dark rocky promontory standing
between the SW. side of Marin Darbel Bay and the
NE. side of Lallemand Fjord, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 66°44’S., 66°30’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him
for Lt. Joseph J. Rey, French Navy, meteorologist
of the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5.
REYNOLDS, CAPE: rocky point several hundred
ft. in el., lying along the SW. shore of Geikie Inlet
and marking the W. side of the mouth of Clarke Gl.,
on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°34’S.,
162°48’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, who probably named this feature for
Jeremiah (John) N. Reynolds, who long agitated
for American exploration in the Antarctic, and
who was one of the principal promoters of the
USEE, 1838-42.
REYNOLDS, MOUNT: snow-capped mountain
about 3,700 ft. in el., marked by steep, rocky lower
slopes, standing at the S. side of Violante Inlet, on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°42’S., 61°16’W.
Disc. by members of the USAS in a flight from East
Base on Dec. 30, 1940. Named by the US-SCAN
for Jeremiah (John) N. Reynolds, long-time protag-
onist (1826-38) of American exploration and ex-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
pansion in the Pacific and the Antarctic. Not
adopted: Cape Poindexter, Cape Reynolds.
REYNOLDS TROUGH: low trough about 6 mi.
wide and 65 mi. long, extending WSW. from the
SW. end of Paulding Bay, and situated between a
low, ice-covered ridge on the N. and a moderately
steep, ice-covered escarpment of the interior pla-
teau to the S., close behind the E. end of Sabrina
Coast; centering in about 66°55’S., 121°00’E. The
trough is marked by an elongated series of promi-
nent meltwater ponds along the lower end of its S.
flank, and except for its seaward end close S. of
Cape Southard, the trough is relatively free from
crevasses as it rises gradually westward to the con-
tinental ice slopes. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named
by the US-ACAN for Ens. Allan J. Reynolds, USN,
navigator of one of the three USN Op. Hjp. crews
which completed trimetrogon photographic cover-
age of the major portion of the Antarctic coast be-
tween 15° and 165°, east longitude.
REX, MOUNT: mountain about 10,500 ft. in el.,
standing E. of Mt. Peterson in the Ellsworth High-
land; in about 74°57’S., 76°55’W. Disc. by the
RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this
feature for Lt. Cdr. Daniel F. Rex, USN, of the Of-
fice of Naval Research, who made important con-
tributions to the planning of the scientific research
program and the equipment of the expedition.
Not adopted: Mount Daniel Rex.
RHAMNUS, MOUNT: mountain, about 2,900 ft.
in el., which lies 2 mi. NE. of Mt. Nemesis on the
N. side of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S.,
66°50’W. Seen from the W. it appears as a mainly
snow-covered pyramid. First surveyed in 1936 by
the BGLE under Rymill. It was resurveyed in
1947 by the FIDS, who applied the name. The
name Mount Rhamnus derives from association
with Mt. Nemesis. According to the mythological
story, the Greek goddess Nemesis had a celebrated
sanctuary at Rhamnus in Attica. Not adopted:
Pyramid Mountain, Pyramid Peak.
Rhino Horn Rock: see Rhino Rock.
RHINO ROCK: prominent black rock with steep
sides rising to about 2,300 ft. in el., situated about
5 mi. SSW. of Cape Rymill on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 69°34’S., 62°32’W. It was named
Rhino Horn Rock for its suggestive appearance by
members of the East Base of the USAS who charted
the area on land and from the air in 1940, but the
name has been shortened to Rhino Rock. Not
adopted: Rhino Horn Rock.
258
RHO ISLETS: group of small islets and rocks
which lie immediately N. of Lambda I. and mark
the NW. extremity of the Melchior Is., Palmer
Arch.; in 64°17’S., 63°00’W. The name Rho, de-
rived from the 17th letter of the Greek alphabet,
appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine
govt. chart following surveys of these islets by Arg.
expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted:
Islotes Boulier [Spanish].
RHYOLITE ISLETS: group of islets and rocks,
which extend in an E—W. direction about 4 mi.,
lying about 9 mi. SE. of Powder It. and close off
the N. side of the mouth of Eureka GI. in George
VI Sound; in 69°40’S., 68°35’W. Surveyed in 1948
by the FIDS, and so named by them because the
islets are largely composed of rhyolite.
RICHARD BLACK COAST: that portion of the
E. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Boggs,
in 70°33’S., 61°23’W., to Cape Mackintosh, in
72°53/S., 60°03’W. This coast was disc. and
photographed from the air by members of East
Base of the USAD, 1939-41, on a flight, Dec. 30,
1940. The most southerly point reached was
Wright Inlet in 74°05’S., but features as far S. as
Bowman Pen. are identifiable in the aerial photo-
graphs taken on the flight. Named for Cdr. Rich-
ard B. Black, USNR, leader of the December 30
flight and commanding officer of the East Base.
RICHARDSON, MOUNT: peak on the SE. cor-
ner of the main massif of the Fosdick Mtns., just
W. of Reece Pass, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie
Byrd Land; in about 76°32’S., 144°38’W. Disc. on
aerial flights from West Base of the USAS in 1940
and named for Harrison H. Richardson, meteor-
ological observer of the Edsel Ford Mountains Bio-
logical Party, which visited this area in November-—
December 1940.
Richard Russell, Mount: see Russell, Mount.
Richthofen Sound: see Richthofen Valley.
RICHTHOFEN VALLEY: glacier-filled valley
about 4 mi. wide at its mouth and extending W. for
an undetermined distance, at the N. side of Cape
McCarroll on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about
65°58’S., 62°45’W. Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE
under Nordenskjéld, who named it for Baron Fer-
dinand von Richthofen, German geographer and
geologist. Not adopted: Richthofen Sound.
RIDGE ISLAND: ridge-shaped island about 6 mi.
long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and 1 mi. wide, lying
3 mi. N. of Horseshoe I. in the center of Bourgeois
Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°42’S.,
67°06’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
RIDGE PEAK: pyramidal rocky peak, about
1,700 ft. in el., from which a prominent ridge ex-
tends E., standing 6 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay
and 3 mi. E. of the N. portion of Duse Bay, at the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°31’S., 57°03’W. This
area was first explored by a party of the SwedAE,
1901-4. Ridge Peak was charted and named by
the FIDS, 1946.
RIDLEY BEACH: a cuspate beach feature form-
ing a triangle about 1 mi. long on each side, lying
about 1 mi. S. of Cape Adare, on the W. side of the
peninsula, in northern Victoria Land; in about
71°18’S., 170°13’E. This was the camp site of the
BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, who
gave the camp his mother’s maiden name. The
name was applied to the entire feature in 1911 by
the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, under
Scott.
RIDLEY ISLAND: island about 2 mi. N. of False
Round Pt., northern King George I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in about 61°50’S., 57°57’W. This is-
land was known to both the American and British
sealers as early as 1822, and the name Ridley has
been well established in international usage for
over 100 years. Not adopted: Ridley’s Isle.
RIGHT WHALE BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. wide,
lying S. of Nameless Pt., along the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°41’W. The name
dates back to at least 1922 and is now well estab-
lished in international usage. The right whale is
a species of whale found in this area.
RIGHT WHALE ROCKS: group of rocks about
0.25 mi. N. of Barff Pt., at the E. side of the en-
trance to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in
54°14’S., 36°24"W. The name Merton Rocks was
used for this feature on a chart of Cumberland Bay
by personnel of H.M.S. Sappho in 1906, but the
name Right Whale Rocks is retained because of
wider and more recent acceptance. Not adopted:
Merton Rocks.
RIISER-LARSEN, MOUNT: the highest peak,
about 6,100 ft. in el., of the Tula Range, in Enderby
Land; in about 67°00’S., 50°50’E. Named by the
BANZARE under Mawson, in January 1930, for
Capt. Hjalmar Riiser-Larsen,. leader of a Nor. exp.
in the Norvegia which was also exploring in this
region in that season. Not adopted: Mount Riiser
Larsen.
RIISER-LARSEN PENINSULA: a broad projec-
tion of the continental margin marking the NE.
end of Princess Ragnhild Coast and forming the W.
portal to Ltitzow-Holm Bay; in about 68°30’S.,
33°50’E. Named for Capt. Hjalmar Riiser-Larsen
259
who disc. it in a flight on Feb. 21, 1931.
adopted: Cook Peninsula.
Not
RILEY GLACIER: heavily crevassed glacier,
about 14 mi. long and 17 mi. wide, flowing westward
from the W. side of Palmer Pen. into George VI
Sound between the Traverse Mtns. and Mt. Dixey;
in 70°03’S., 68°10’W. First sighted and surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in
1949 by the FIDS and named for Quintin T. P. M.
Riley, assistant meteorologist of the BGLE,
1934-37.
RIME PEAK: the summit, about 3,700 ft. in el.,
of a mountain at the E. side of Sunshine Gl., Coro-
nation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°26’W.
The name, applied by the FIDS following their
survey of 1948-49, is descriptive of the permanent
appearance of the peak which is heavily covered
with hoarfrost, or rime.
RIO BRANCO, MOUNT: mountain about 3,200
ft. in el., about 2.5 mi. E. of Cape Trois Perez, on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°26’S., 64°01’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and
named by him for Baron Rio Branco, at that time
Minister of Foreign Affairs of Brazil. Not adopted:
Mount Branco, Sommet Rio Branco [French].
Rio Branco, Sommet: see Rio Branco, Mount.
Ritscher-Land: see Ritscher Upland.
RITSCHER PEAK: prominent peak about 9,900
ft. in el., situated about 7 mi. WSW. of Mt. Mentzel
in the NE. portion of the Wohlthat Mtns., in New
Schwabenland; in about 72°22’S., 13°25’E. Disc.
by the GerAE, 1938-39, and named for Captain
Alfred Ritscher, leader of the expedition.
RITSCHER UPLAND: an upland consisting of a
heterogeneous collection of mountain ranges,
peaks, and associated depressions in New
Schwabenland, extending NE. from about 74°30’S.,
9°00’W. along the W. border of the Mihlig-Hof-
mann Mtns. to about 71°00’S., 1°00’W. Disc. by
the GerAE, 1938-39, and named for Capt. Alfred
Ritscher, leader of the expedition. Not adopted:
Ritscher-Land [German].
RIVETT, MOUNT: bare, rugged peak about
1,900 ft. in el., the most northern and eastern of
the Gustav Bull Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast;
in about 67°49’S., 66°13’E. Early in January 1930,
the BANZARE under Mawson sighted land in this
area and made an aerial observation flight. The
exp. landed on nearby Scullin Monolith on Feb.
13, 1931 and named this peak, probably for Sir
A. C. David Rivett, Deputy Chairman and Chief
Executive Officer of the Commonwealth (Aus-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
tralia) Council for Scientific and Industrial Re-
search since 1927. Not adopted: Rivett Mountain.
Ronald Amundsen Sea: see Amundsen Sea.
ROALD GLACIER: glacier which flows from the
S. slopes of Mt. Noble into Gibbon Bay on the
E. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in
60°40’S., 45°15’W. The glacier was charted and
named by the Norwegian whaling captain Petter
S¢rlle in the period 1912-15. It was surveyed in
1948-49 by the FIDS.
Robben Nunataks: see Seal Nunataks.
ROBERT, CAPE: ice-covered point at the W.
side of Marret Gl., on Adélie Coast; in about
66°23’S., 137°39’E. Disc. and named by the Fr.
exp. under D’Urville in 1840. The cape was
roughly charted by the AAE under Mawson,
1911-14, and more recently delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
Robert English Coast: see Eights Coast.
ROBERT ENGLISH COAST: that portion of the
coast of Antarctica extending from the base of
Palmer Pen., in about 67°W. to the cape at the
W. side of the entrance to Carroll Inlet in 79°W.
Disc. and explored, in December 1940, on the
ground by Finn Ronne and Carl R. Eklund, and
in flights by other members of the East Base of
the USAS. Named for Capt. Robert A. J. English,
USN, Executive Sec. of the Executive Committee,
USAS, 1939-41, and captain of the Bear of Oak-
land on the ByrdAE, 1933-35.
ROBERT ISLAND: island about 12 mi. long and
6 mi. wide, lying between Nelson I. and Green-
wich I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°24’S.,
59°34’W. The name dates back to at least 1821
and is now established international usage. Not
adopted: Mitchells Island, Polotsk Island, Roberts
Island, Robert’s Island.
Robert Palmer Bay: see Palmer Inlet.
ROBERT POINT: point marking the SE. tip of
Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S.,
09°23’W. This point, which probably has been
known to sealers and whalers in the area for over
100 years, takes its name after the island. Not
adopted: Cape Roberts, Roberts Point.
ROBERTS CAPE: cape at the S. side of the en-
trance to Granite Hbr., on the E. coast of Victoria
Land; in about 77°00’S., 162°50’E. Disc. by the
BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it
for William C. Roberts, asst. zoologist and cook
to the expedition.
260
ROBERTS, MOUNT: dark, mostly ice-free rock
peak with a flat, sloping top, about 3,200 ft. in el.,
which is isolated from the Detroit Plateau to the
W. and lies about 3 mi. inland from Prince Gustav
Chan., some 14 mi. N. of Sjogren Gl., on the SE.
side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 64°00’S., 58°49’W.
First charted by the FIDS, in 1945, and named for
D. W. Roberts, Manager of the Falkland Islands
Co. in 1945, who was of assistance to the expedition.
ROBERT SCOTT, MOUNT: mountain in the
Commonwealth Range, lying between Mt. Har-
court and Mt. Kathleen and overlooking the E.
side of Beardmore Gl. at its junction with Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 83°43’S., 174°00’E. Disc. by
the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named
this feature for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN.
Shackleton had been a member of the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott. Not adopted: Mount Scott.
ROBERT SCOTT GLACIER: major glacier, from
5 to 15 mi. wide and about 90 mi. long, descending
from the polar plateau in long sweeping curves to
the head of Ross Ice Shelf between Amundsen and
Leverett Glaciers; in about 85°40’S., 152°00’W.
Disc. in December 1929 by the ByrdAE geological
party under Gould. Named by the US—ACAN for
Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN, leader of the BrNAE,
1901-4, and the BrAE, 1910-13, who lost his life
in March 1912 on the return journey from the
South Pole, which he had reached on Jan. 18,
1912. Not adopted: Scott Glacier (q.v.), Thorne
Glacier.
ROBERTS ICE PIEDMONT: large ice piedmont,
about 20 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about
15 mi. wide, lying to the N. and NW. of Mt. Calais
and occupying the NE. corner of Alexander I Is-
land; in 69°00’S., 70°20’W. First seen from a dis-
tance and roughly surveyed by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot. It was photographed from the
air by the BGLE during a flight on Aug. 15, 1936,
and roughly mapped from these photographs.
Named by the Br—APC in 1955 for Brian B. Roberts,
ornithologist of the BGLE, 1934-37, and later Sec-
retary of the British Antarctic Place-names Com-
mittee.
ROBERTSON, CAPE: cape about 1 mi. E. of
Route Pt., marking the NE. end of Mackenzie Pen.,
which forms the W. part of Laurie I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°48’W. On the map of
Laurie I. by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, the
name Cape Robertson appears in the position of
Route Pt., previously named by Capt. George
Powell and Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer in 1821.
The name Route Pt. is retained for the NW. end
of Mackenzie Pen.; Cape Robertson is the NE. end
of this peninsula. The name commemorates
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Thomas Robertson, captain of the Scotia, exp. ship
of the ScotNAE, 1902-4. Not adopted: Route
Point (q.v.).
ROBERTSON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,100
ft. in el., lying NW. of the head of Gardner Inlet,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 74°41’S.,
64°14’°W. Disc. by the RARE 1947-48, under
Ronne, who named this feature for James B.
Robertson, aviation mechanic with the expedition.
Not adopted: Mount James Robertson.
ROBERTSON BAY: bay about 23 mi. wide and
25 mi. long, lying between Cape Barrow and Cape
Adare, in northern Victoria Land; in about
71°20’S., 170°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under
Ross, who named it for Dr. John Robertson, sur-
geon on the exp. ship Terror.
ROBERTSON ISLAND: ice-covered island, about
12 mi. long in a NW.-SE. direction and 6 mi. wide,
lying at the E. end of the Seal Nunataks and some
30 mi. S. of Cape Sobral, off the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°10’S., 59°40’W. Disc. on Dec. 9, 1893
by Capt. C. A. Larsen, who named it for William
Robertson, co-owner of the firm of Woltereck and
Robertson of Hamburg which sent out Larsen’s
ship, the Jason.
ROBERTSON ISLANDS: group of islands ex-
tending about 2 mi. southward of the SE. end of
Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S.,
45°10’W. Disc. and roughly charted by Capt.
George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in De-
cember 1821. Recharted and named by James
Weddell in 1823. Not adopted: Robertsons Islands,
Robertson’s Islands.
ROBERTSON POINT: point forming the E. side
of the entrance to Fortuna Bay, on the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 36°46’W. Robertson
Point is an established name which dates back to
at least 1920. Not adopted: Cape Robertson.
ROBILLARD GLACIER: narrow glacier flowing
ENE. and entering the N. side of the head of Sol-
berg Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°19’S., 65°30’W. Disc. by members of East Base
of the USAS, 1939-41. It was photographed from
the air in 1947 by the RARE, under Ronne, and
charted in 1948 by the FIDS. Named by Ronne
for Capt. George Robillard, USN, of the legal sec-
tion of the Bureau of Ships, who assisted in gain-
ing Congressional support which resulted in pro-
curing the expedition ship.
ROBIN PEAK: sharply defined rocky summit,
about 900 ft. in el., which is the northernmost peak
on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°38’W.
Named by the Br-APC in 1954 for Gordon de
261
Quetteville Robin of the FIDS, leader at Signy I.
base in 1947, who made the first detailed survey of
the island.
ROBINSON, CAPE: cape marking the E. end of
an icecapped promontory between Cabinet and
Mill Inlets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
66°52’S., 63°43’W. Sir Hubert Wilkins, while on
his flight of Dec. 20, 1928 along this coast, named
an island for W. S. Robinson of London and Aus-
tralia, which he reported to lie in about 67°20’S.,
61°40’W. Absence of photographs of this island
by Wilkins has prevented its positive re-identifica-
tion. For this reason, and for the sake of his-
torical continuity, it is recommended that the E.
end of the promontory in 66°52’S. be given the
name Cape Robinson. This cape was charted by
the FIDS and photographed from the air by the
RARE in 1947. Not adopted: Cape Duemler.
ROBINSON, MOUNT: peak about 10,000 ft. in
el., standing S. of Robertson Bay in northern Vic-
toria Land; in about 71°45’S., 169°43’E. Disc. in
January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named
this feature for the Reverend Dr. Robinson, of
Armagh, one of the more active promoters of mag-
netic research in the Antarctic.
ROBINSON BAY: glacier-filled embayment,
about 11 mi. wide at its entrance between Cape De
Gerlache and Cape Harrisson, along Queen Mary
Coast; in about 66°40’S., 98°50’E. Disc. by the
Eastern Sledge Party operating from the West
Base of the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and
named for Lionel Robinson of Australia, a patron of
the expedition.
ROBINSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 2
mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the
continental ice to the Knox Coast, midway be-
tween Merritt It. and Reist Rocks; in about
66°32’S., 107°18’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named
by the US-ACAN for R. P. Robinson, pursers stew-
ard on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USHE
under Wilkes, 1838-42.
ROBINSON GROUP: group of two large and sevy-
eral small islands, from 100 to 200 ft. in el., lying
off Mac-Robertson Coast about 3 mi. W. of Cape
Daly; in about 67°28’S., 63°48’E. Disc. on about
Feb. 15, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who
applied the name.
Robinson Island: see Francis Island.
Robinson Island: (in about 67°20’S., 63°40’W.)
the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since
subsequent survey has shown that no island exists
in the position indicated. Instead, the name Rob-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
inson has been applied to a cape in 66°52’S.,
63°43’W.
Robke Berg: see Ropke, Mount.
ROCA, CAPE: cape about 1.8 mi. NW. of Cape
Davidson at the W. end of Laurie I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°49°W. The W. end of
Laurie I. was sighted by Capt. George Powell and
Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise
in December 1821. Cape Roca was charted by the
ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named for
Julio A. Roca, Pres. of Argentina, 1880-86 and
1898-1904. Not adopted: Cape Rock.
ROCA ISLETS: group of islets about 2 mi. NW.
of the Argentine Is.; lying off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°12’S., 64°20’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for Julio A. Roca, Pres. of Argentina, 1880-86 and
1898-1904. Not adopted: Roca Islands, Rocca
Islands.
Roca Nueva: see New Rock.
Roca Reef; Roca Rock: see Rocca Reef.
Rocca Islands: see Roca Islets.
ROCCA REEF: two small, low rocks which lie
4.5 mi. WSW. of Cape Alexandra, and 1.5 mi. off
the S. coast of Adelaide I., in the N. part of Mar-
guerite Bay; in 67°47’S., 68°47’W. Disc. in 1909
by the FrAE under Charcot, and named by him
for Monsieur Rocca, an acquaintance in Punta
Arenas. Not adopted: Roca Reef, Roca Rock.
Rocher Conique: see Conical Rock.
Rocher Noir: see Tristan Islet.
Rocher Nouveau: see New Rock.
Rochers de VOrn: see Ornen Rocks.
Rocher Voile: see Sail Rock.
Rock, Cape: see Roca, Cape.
Rockby: see Rocky Bay.
ROCKEFELLER MOUNTAINS: group of low-
lying, scattered granite peaks and ridges, almost
entirely snow-covered, lying in the interior of Ed-
ward VII Pen.; in about 78°00’S., 155°22’W. Disc.
by the ByrdAE on Jan. 26, 1929, and named by
R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd for John D. Rockefeller,
Jr., a patron of the expedition.
262
ROCKEFELLER PLATEAU: the Marie Byrd
Land portion of the Antarctic plateau; centering
in about 80°S., 135°W. Much of its extensive, ice-
covered surface averages from 2,500 to 4,500 ft. in
elevation. Disc. by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, in
1934 and named for John D. Rockefeller, Jr., patron
of the Byrd expeditions.
ROCK PILE PEAKS: small peninsula consisting
of a jumbled mass of rocky peaks and ridges jut-
ting from the E. coast of Palmer Pen. between
Mobiloil and Solberg Inlets; in 68°25’S., 65°10’W.
This feature was photographed from the air by
Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928, and by Lin-
coln Ellsworth on his flight of Nov. 23, 1935. Much
greater detail, however, was obtained in aerial and
trail pictures taken in 1940 by members of the
East Base of the USAS. The name was given by
the US-SCAN for this feature which, because of
its peculiarly jumbled appearance, stood out as a
notable and easily distinguishable landmark on
the aerial photographs of the USAS. As such, it
was particularly valuable in the work of correla-
tion. Not adopted: Rock Pile Point.
Rock Ridge: see Red Rock Ridge.
Rock X: see X, Rock.
ROCKY BAY: small bay, with numerous rocks
lying in the bay and at its entrance, situated im-
mediately N. of Ducloz Head, along the S. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 36°39’W. The pres-
ence of this bay seems to have been first noted in
1819 by Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen, who
roughly charted a small inlet in this approximate
position. The name was in use prior to 1930,
and was probably applied by sealers and whalers
working in the area. Not adopted: Rockby, Rok-
Bucht [German].
Rocky Point: see Carey Point; Dunlop, Cape;
Kanin Point. ;
ROCKY POINT: rocky point marking the SE.
extremity of Vindication I., South Sandwich Is.;
in 57°04’S., 26°45’W. It was named by DI per-
sonnel following their survey in 1930.
Rodeada, Isla: see Beta Island.
R6don: see Red Island.
ROGERS GLACIER: channel glacier about 10
mi, wide and of undetermined length, flowing NW.
from the continental ice and entering the E. side
of Baker Three Gl. close S. of McKaskle Hills, on
Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 170°00’S.,
72°30’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in March 1947, and named by him for Lt. Cdr.
William J. Rogers, Jr., USN, plane commander of
one of three aerial crews which obtained photo-
graphic coverage of this area and other coastal
areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude.
ROGERS HEAD: conspicuous headland marking
the N. extremity of the peninsula between Atlas
Cove and Corinthian Bay on the N. coast of Heard
I.; in 53°00’S., 73°24’E. Named for the Rogers
family of New London, Conn., including Capt.
Erasmus Darwin Rogers, who in 1855 made the
first landing on Heard I. in the ship Corinthian,
Capt. James H. Rogers, master of the brig Zoe, and
Henry Rogers, first mate of the Zoe, who in 1856
was leader of the first party to winter on the island.
The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under
Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in
1874 and utilized the names then in use by the
sealers. Not adopted: Rogers’ Head, Roger’s Head.
ROGET, CAPE: cape in northeastern Victoria
Land, formed by the termination of Mt. Hershel
and marking the N. side of the entrance to Mou-
bray Bay; in about 72°05’S., 170°58’E. Disc. in
1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross and named for Dr.
Peter Mark Roget, noted English lexicographer
who was Sec. of the Royal Society.
ROGGED BAY: small bay lying immediately N.
of Cape Disappointment, near the S. tip of South
Georgia; in 54°52’S., 36°07’W. The name Rogged
Bay, which was probably used by early sealers, was
recorded by Arnaldo Faustini on a 1906 map, and
applied to a wider embayment in this vicinity.
Following its survey in 1951-52, the SGS reported
that the small bay immediately N. of Cape Disap-
pointment required a name. The existing name
Rogged Bay was recommended, as limited to this
small bay, by the Br—APC in 1954.
ROHSS BAY: bay about 11 mi. wide at its mouth,
decreasing to 3 mi. wide near its head, which re-
cedes NE. for about 12 mi. between Capes Broms
and Obelisk in the SW. part of James Ross I., close
S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°12’S.,
58°16’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under
Nordenskjold, and named by him for August and
Wilhelm Rohss, patrons of the expedition.
Roi Georges, Ile du: see King George Island.
Roi Oscar, Terre du: see Oscar II Coast.
Rok-Bucht: see Rocky Bay.
ROLAND BAY: a cove, the S. shore of which is
Hervéou Pt., indenting the W. end of the peninsula
that separates Port Charcot from Salpétriére Bay,
on the W. side of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer
263
Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°03’W. First charted by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for F. Roland, a seaman on the exp. ship Francais.
ROLAND BONAPARTE POINT: point on the SW.
coast of Anvers I., about 6 mi. NW. of Cape Lan-
caster and marking the W. side of the entrance to
Biscoe Bay, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S.,
63°55’'W. The point was charted by the FrAH,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for
Prince Roland Bonaparte, then Pres. of the Paris
Geographical Society. Not adopted: Bonaparte
Point.
ROLF ROCK: small isolated rock in Hound Bay,
about 1.5 mi. SSE. of Tijuca Pt., along the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°12’W. Named by
the Br—APC, following mapping by the SGS, 1951-
52, after the Rolf, one of the vessels of the Com-
pania Argentina de Pesca which participated in es-
tablishing the first permanent whaling station at
Grytviken, South Georgia, in 1904.
Roman Figure Four Mountain; Roman Four
Rock: see Roman Four Promontory.
ROMAN FOUR PROMONTORY: rocky promon-
tory about 2,700 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the
entrance to Neny Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°13’S., 66°58’W. The promontory was
first charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill.
The name appears to have been applied by members
of East Base of the USAS, 1939-41, whose base was
located on nearby Stonington I., and derives from
snow-filled clefts along the face of the promontory
giving the appearance of a Roman numeral IV.
Not adopted: Roman Figure Four Mountain,
Roman Four Rock.
Romero, Cape; Romerof, Cape; Romeroff, Cape:
see Romerof Head.
ROMEROF HEAD: prominent headland, with
steep rock cliffs, forming the W. side of the entrance
to Schlieper Bay, on the S. coast and near the W.
end of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°53’W. The
name, which probably was given by early whalers,
dated back to at least 1912. Not adopted: Cape
Romero, Cape Romerof, Cape Romeroff.
ROMNAES, MOUNT: prominent isolated moun-
tain between the shore and the S¢r Rondane Mtns.,
on Princess Ragnhild Coast; in about 71°395’S.,
22°55’E. Disc. and charted on Feb. 6, 1937, by
members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen and
named for Nils Romnaes, aerial photographer of
this expedition.
ROMULUS GLACIER: glacier, about 7 mi. long
and 2 mi. wide, which flows from the N. slopes of
Mt. Lupa westward to Rymill Bay between the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Blackwall Mtns. and Black Thumb Mtn., on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°23’S., 66°50’W. First
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re-
surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, who so named it
for its association with Remus Gl., whose head lies
near the head of this glacier.
RONDE ISLET: small rocky islet lying close off
the NE. side of Zélée Glacier Tongue, about 2.6 mi.
WNW. of Rescapé Islets, off Adélie Coast; in about
66°47’S., 141°15’E. Photographed from the air by
USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE
under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because of
its round shape.
Ronne Bay: see Ronne Entrance.
RONNE ENTRANCE: the broad SW. entrance of
George VI Sound where it opens on Bellingshausen
Sea between Alexander I Island and Robert English
Coast; in about 72°00’S., 76°00’W. This feature
was disc. on a sledge journey through the sound in
December 1940 by Finn Ronne and Carl Eklund of
the USAS, 1939-41. At that time it was named
Ronne Bay, the feature forming an open bay front-
ing on the ice shelf at the SW. end of the sound.
Since 1940, the head of Ronne Bay has receded east-
ward into George VI Sound altering the relation-
ships on which the name Ronne Bay was based.
The name Ronne Bay has therefore been dropped
and the name Ronne Entrance applied to the broad
SW. entrance of George VI Sound in keeping with
the physical characteristics of the feature. Named
for the Ronne family, of which the father, Martin
Ronne, was a member of the Nor. exp. under
Amundsen, 1910-12, and the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and
the son, Finn Ronne, was a member of the ByrdAE,
1933-35, and the USAS, 1939-41, and leader of the
RARE, 1947-48. Not adopted: Ronne Bay.
Roocker, Mount: see Rucker, Mount.
Rookery Islands: see Haswell Islets.
Roosen Channel: see Neumayer Channel.
ROOSEVELT ISLAND: ice-covered island, about
90 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and about 40 mi.
wide, lying in the E. part of the Ross Ice Shelf, with
its N. extremity about 3 mi.S. of the Bay of Whales;
in about 79°30’S., 162°00’W. Disc. in 1934 by the
ByrdAE, and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Franklin
D. Roosevelt, then President of the United States.
Roosevelt Sea: see Amundsen Sea.
ROOTS, MOUNT: mainly snow-covered moun-
tain in the Allardyce Range, South Georgia, stand-
ing near the head of Nordenskjéld Gl., about 6 mi.
ESE. of Mt. Paget; in 54°28’S., 36°24’W. Its west-
264
ern peak rises to about 7,500 ft. in el.; its eastern
peak to about 7,000 ft. The mountain is a promi-
nent feature and presumably was known to whalers
and sealers in South Georgia at an early date. It
was roughly surveyed in the period 1925-30 by DI
personnel, and resurveyed by the SGS, 1951-52.
Named by the Br—APC for James W. Roots, a mem-
ber of the SGS, 1951-52.
ROPKE, MOUNT: mountain spur about 8,200 ft.
in el., on the W. side of the range forming the W.
wall of Penck Trough, in New Schwabenland; in
about 72°22’S., 5°30’W. Disc. by the GerAE under
Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Karl-Heinz
Ropke, second officer of the exp. ship Schwaben-
land. Not adopted: RobKe Berg [German], Ropke
Mountain.
ROQUEMAUREL, CAPE: prominent rocky head-
land on the W. coast of Louis Philippe Pen., about
16 mi. NE. of Cape Kjellman; in 63°33’S., 58°56’W.
Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and
named by him for Lt. Louis De Roquemaurel,
second-in-command of the exp. ship Astrolabe.
ROSA, CAPE: cape marking the S. side of the en-
trance to King Haakon Bay, on the S. coast of South
Georgia; in about 54°13’S., 37°22’W. The name
first appears about 1920 on charts of South Georgia
and has since become established by usage.
ROSCOE GLACIER: channel glacier about 12 mi.
long and 3 to 5 mi. wide, flowing N. from the con-
tinental ice overlying Queen Mary Coast, and de-
bouching from a small valley onto the W. portion
of Shackleton Ice Shelf, midway between Cape
Moyes and Junction Corner; in about 66°495’S.,
95°30’E. Charted as a valley depression during a
southern reconnaissance in March 1912 by F. Wild
and other members of the Western Base Party of
the AAE under Mawson. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for John H. Roscoe, geog-
rapher, author of Antarctic Bibliography (Wash-
ington, 1951), and scientific advisor to the director
of United States Antarctic Programs. Roscoe
served as photogrammetrist with the central task
group of USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and with USN Op.
Wmil., 1947-48, and assisted the latter group in es-
tablishing astronomical control stations along Wil-
helm II, Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts.
ROSENWALD, MOUNT: prominent peak in the
higher foothills of the Queen Maud Range, stand-
ing NNW. of Mt. Black, on the W. side of Shackleton
Gl.; in about 85°08’S., 178°00’E. Disc. by R. Adm.
Byrd on ByrdAE flights to the Queen Maud Range
in November 1929, and named by him for Julius
Rosenwald of Chicago, contributor to the Byrd Ant-
arctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Rosita Bay: see Sunset Fjord.
ROSAMEL ISLAND: circular island about 1 mi.
in diameter with precipitous cliffs of voleanic rock
rising to a snow-covered peak about 1,400 ft. in el.,
lying W. of Dundee I. at the E. side of the S. en-
trance to Antarctic Sound, off the NE. end of
Palmer Pen.; in 63°34’S., 56°17’W. Disc. by the
Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by
him for V. Adm. Claude de Rosamel, French Min-
ister of Marine under whose orders the exp. sailed.
ROSENTHAL ISLETS: string of N.-S. trending
islets fringing the W. coast of Anvers I. between
De Gerlache Pt. and Cape Albert de Monaco at a
distance of about 1 mi., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°38’S., 64°12’W. Disc. by the Ger. exp., 1873-74,
under Dallmann, and named by him for Albert
Rosenthal, Dir. of the Soc. for Polar Navigation,
who with the society sponsored the expedition.
Not adopted: Rosenthal Islands.
ROSITA HARBOR: small bay lying 1 mi. N. of
Camp Bay in the W. side of the Bay of Isles, South
Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°27’W. The names Rosita
Harbor and Allardyce Harbor were given for this
bay in the period 1905-12, and both names have
since appeared on maps for this feature. Follow-
ing a survey of South Georgia in 1951-52, the SGS
reported that this feature is known locally as Rosita
Harbor. This latter name is approved on the basis
of local usage. The name Allardyce is rejected as
applied to this feature; the main mountain range at
South Georgia is already named for William L.
Allardyce. The name Rosita Harbor is named after
the Rosita, one of the whale catchers of Messrs.
Salvesen and Co., which started operating with the
company in 1905, and which anchored in this bay.
Not adopted: Allardyce Harbor.
ROSS, CAPE: granite headland, 200 ft. in el.,
about 10 mi. NE. of Granite Hbr., on the coast of
Victoria Land; in about 76°45’S., 163°02’E. First
charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton,
who named this feature for Sir James Clark Ross,
noted British Antarctic explorer.
Ross, Mount: see Haddington, Mount.
ROSS GLACIER: glacier flowing E. to the head
of Royal Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°32’S., 36°06’W. Charted by a Ger. exp.,
1882-83, under Schrader, and named for Sir James
Clark Ross.
Ross Ice Barrier: see Ross Ice Shelf.
ROSS ICE SHELF: vast ice shelf, to a large part
grounded, occupying the entire S. part of the Ross
Sea embayment and ending seaward in a cliffed
424589 O -57 -18
265
ice front about 400 mi. long; in 81°30’S., 175°00’W.
Disc. by Capt. (later Sir) James Clark Ross, RN,
for whom it is named, on Jan. 28, 1841. Ross
mapped the ice front eastward to 160°W. Not
adopted: Grosse Eisebene [German], Ross Ice
Barrier, Ross Shelf Ice.
Ross Island: see James Ross Island.
ROSS ISLAND: island about 43 mi. long and 45
mi. wide, located E. of McMurdo Sound at the
outer edge of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 77°30’S.,
168°00’E. Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott,
who named it for Sir James Clark Ross.
ROSS PASS: narrow but well-defined pass be-
tween the SE. end of the Allardyce Range and the
NW. end of the Salvesen Range, South Georgia;
in 54°32’S., 36°16’W. It is about 2,000 ft. in el.,
and provides a sledging route between Ross Gl.
and Brogger Gl. The feature was first charted
by the Ger. exp. under Schrader in 1882-83. The
name Ross Pass, which derives from association
with nearby Ross GIl., was given by the SGS fol-
lowing their survey of 1951-52. Not adopted:
Gletcher-Joch [German], Royal Pass.
ROSS POINT: point on the SW. side of Nelson
I., about 1.5 mi. SE. of Harmony Cove, in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°21’S., 59°09’W. The point was
charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in
1935. Probably named for Sir James Clark Ross.
ROSS SEA: large embayment of the Pacific
Ocean, extending deeply into Antarctica between
Cape Adare on the W. and Cape Colbeck on the
E.; in about 75°S., 175°W. Named for Sir James
Clark Ross.
Ross Shelf Ice: see Ross Ice Shelf.
Rote Insel: see Red Island.
Rothschild, Cape; Rothschild, Mount: see Roths-
child Island.
ROTHSCHILD ISLAND: island lying W. of the
N. end of Alexander I Island in the N. entrance to
Wilkins Str.; in about 69°25’S., 72°45’W. Disc.
from a distance and named by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot. Examination of aerial photo-
graphs of this feature taken by the USAS, 1939-41,
suggests that it may be connected by a low ice-
covered land mass at its E. side to a mountainous
mass, making this island much larger than 10 mi.
in extent as previously represented. Not adopted:
Cape Rothschild, Mount Rothschild.
Rouge Island: see De Rongé Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ROULLIN POINT: point marking the S. tip of
Booth I., which is separated from the W. coast of
Palmer Pen. by Lemaire Chan.; in 65°07’'S.,
64°02’W. This point was probably first seen by
the Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. It was
charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and
named by him for Capt. Roullin, French Navy.
Not adopted: Point Roullin.
ROUND ISLAND: circular islet about 0.5 mi.
in diameter, lying 1.5 mi. W. of Hummock I. and
8 mi. NW. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°54’S., 65°37’W. Disc. and named by
the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37.
ROUND POINT: point about 10 mi. WSW. of
False Round Pt., on the N. coast of King George
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°55’S.,
58°16’W. The name dates back to at least 1822
and is established international usage.
ROUSE, CAPE: ice-covered cape, fronted by ice
cliffs, lying about 14 mi. ENE. of Murray Mono-
lith on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°45’S.,
67°10’E. Named by the BANZARE under Maw-
son, who disc. this feature on about Feb. 13, 1931.
Not adopted: Point Rouse.
ROUSE ROCKS: small group of rocks fringing
Mac-Robertson Coast close S. of Welch I.; in about
67°35°S., 62°58’E. Discovered and named by the
BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson.
Route Point: see Robertson, Cape.
ROUTE POINT: rocky point marking the NW.
end of Mackenzie Pen., which forms the W. part
of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
44°50’W. Disc. and named by Capt. George Powell
and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint
cruise in December 1821.
ROUX, CAPE: cape marking the NW. extremity
of Pasteur Pen., northern Brabant I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°01’S., 62°36’W. Disc. by the FrAB,
1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for
Emile Roux, noted French physician and bacteri-
ologist, then Dir. of the Pasteur Inst., Paris. Not
adopted: Cap E. Roux [French].
Roux Island: see Charles-Roux Island.
Rowe Island: see Row Island.
ROWETT ISLET: rocky islet about 1 mi. long,
about 2 mi. SW. of Cape Lookout, Elephant I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°20’S., 55°20’W.
This islet was known to both the American and
British sealers as early as 1822. It was named by
members of a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1921-22,
266
for John Quiller Rowett, the chief patron of that
expedition. Not adopted: Rowett Island.
ROW ISLAND: one of the Balleny Is., small, flat,
and ice-covered, about 0.5 mi. long and about 600
ft. in el., lying about 1 mi. S. of Young I.; in about
66°32’S., 162°50’E. John Balleny assigned the
name in 1839 to an island which he reported to
be about 10 mi. N. of Young I.; naming it for Mr.
J. Row, one of the merchants who united with
Charles Enderby, Esq., in sending out the expedi-
tion. Since the island reported by Balleny has
not been found by other explorers in the vicinity,
the name was assigned to another island, disc. by
DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1936. Not
adopted: Rowe Island.
Royal, Cape: see Harcourt, Cape.
ROYAL BAY: bay, about 4 mi. wide and indent-
ing 6 mi., entered between Capes Charlotte and
Harcourt along the N. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°32’S., 36°00’W. Disc. and named by a Br.
exp. under Cook in 1775. Royal Bay was surveyed
by a Ger. exp. under Schrader, which was based
on the N. shore of the bay in 1882-83.
Royal Pass: see Ross Pass.
ROYAL SOCIETY RANGE: range of mountains
lying near the head of McMurdo Sound, between
Koettlitz Gl. and Ferrar Gl.; in about 78°10’S.,
163°00’E. Disc. in January 1902 by the BrNAE
under Scott, who named it in honor of the Royal
Society, giving names of its members to the indi-
vidual peaks.
ROYDS, CAPE: dark rock cape forming the W.
extremity of Ross I.; in about 77°33’S., 166°07’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who
named this feature for Lt. Charles W. R. Royds,
RN, who acted as meteorologist for the expedition.
ROZO POINT: point marking the NW. end of
Cholet Islet, an islet which lies immediately N. of
the NW. part of Booth I. and forms the W. limit of
Port Charcot, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
65°03’S., 64°02’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot, and named by him for M. Rozo, the
cook on the exp. ship Francais. Not adopted:
Point Rozo.
Rubbenspitze: see Seal Point.
RUCKER, MOUNT: mountain about 11,260 ft. in
el., in the Royal Society Range, lying SW. of Mc-
Murdo Sound, along the W. side of Ross Sea; in
about 78°11’S., 162°39’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named this feature for
Sir Arthur Riicker, Honorary Sec. of the Royal So-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ciety. Not adopted: Mount
Rucker.
Mount Roocker,
RUDMOSE BROWN PEAK: peak about 5 mi.
SSW. of Mt. Hurley and 7 mi. back of the coast, in
Enderby Land; in about 66°22’S.,51°05’E. Disc. in
January 1930 by the BANZARE, 1929-1931, under
Mawson, who named this feature for Dr. R. N. Rud-
mose Brown, naturalist of the ScotNAEH, 1902-4,
member of the Scott Polar Research Committee,
1939-41, and author of numerous books and articles
on Antarctica.
RUDMOSE ROCKS: group of rocks about 0.3 mi.
NNW. of Cape Geddes, off the N. coast of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°35’W. The
rocks were first charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4,
under Bruce, who named them for R. N. Rudmose
Brown, naturalist of the expedition.
Rugged Harbor: see New Plymouth.
RUGGED ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and
2 mi. wide, lying W. of Livingston I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°36’S.,61°17’W. This island was
known to both the American sealers and the Brit-
ish as early as 1820, and the name Rugged has been
well established in international usage for over 100
years. Not adopted: Lloyds Island, Lloyd’s Island,
Ragged Island.
RUGGED ROCKS: small group of rocks at the
W. side of the S. entrance to McFarlane Str., ex-
tending about 1 mi. in a NW. direction from Pin
Pt., Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°37’S., 59°50’W. These rocks were known to
early sealers in the area and are roughly charted
on Powell’s map of 1822. They were accurately
charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II and given this descriptive name.
RUHNKE, MOUNT: peak projecting through the
icecap between the Sauter and Preuschoff Ranges
at the N. edge of the polar plateau in New Schwa-
benland; in about 72°25’S., 3°30’E. Disc. by the
GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for
Herbert Ruhnke, radio operator on the flying boat
Passat used by the expedition.
RUMBOLDS POINT: point which marks the E.
side of thie entrance to Doubtful Bay, at the SE.
end of South Georgia; in 54°52'S., 36°02’W. The
name appears on a chart based upon surveys of
this area in 1930 by DI personnel, but may reflect
an earlier naming.
RUNAWAY ISLET: rocky islet 0.7 mi. W. of the
W. tip of Neny I. and 0.2 mi. NW. of Surf Rock,
lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°07’W. The islet was roughly
267
charted in 1936 by the BGLE, and was surveyed in
1947 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because a
runaway dog team left this islet and returned to
base.
RUNCIMAN ROCK: rock marked by breakers,
lying about 300 yards E. of Black I. at the SE. ap-
proach to Black Island Chan., in the Argentine Is.;
in 65°16’S., 64°17’W. Disc. in 1935 by the BGLE
under Rymill, who named it for Philip Runciman,
Chairman of the Board of Directors of Whites
Southhampton Yachtbuilding and Engineering
Company Limited, where the exp. ship Penola was
refitted before sailing south in 1934.
RUND BAY: semicircular bay about 3 mi. wide,
indenting the SE. shore of Edward VIII Bay im-
mediately E. of Kvarsnes Foreland, along Kemp
Coast; in about 67°04’S., 57°10’E. Mapped by Nor-
wegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January—
February 1937, and so named by them because of
its round shape.
Rundneset: see Green Point.
RUNNELSTONE ROCK: rock lying in Grandidier
Chan., about 2.5 mi. NW. of Larrouy I. and some
17 mi. WSW. of Cape Garcia, Palmer Pen.; in
65°47’S., 65°22’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE,
1934-37, under Rymill.
RUPPERT COAST: that portion of the coast of
Marie Byrd Land extending from the northern en-
trance of Paul Block Bay, in about 76°S., 147°W..,
east-northeastwards to Emory Land Bay at about
75°45’S., 140°30’W. Named for Col. Jacob Ruppert,
of New York, a supporter of the ByrdAE, 1933-35.
Not adopted: Jacob Ruppert Coast.
RUSSELL, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen
Maud Range, on the E. flank of Robert Scott Gl.,
in about 86°18’S., 148°45’W. Disc. by members of
the Southern Sledge Party of the ByrdAE, 1933-35,
and named for Richard S. Russell, Jr., one of the
members of that party, and his father, Richard S.
Russell, Sr., a supporter of the Byrd Antarctic Ex-
peditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Not adopted:
Mount Richard Russell.
RUSSELL OWEN, MOUNT: mountain standing
W. of Hilton Inlet and inland from the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in about 71°50’S., 63°00’W. Disc. by
the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this
mountain for Russell Owen, newspaper correspond-
ent with the ByrdAE, 1928-30,
Russell Peak: see Brown Peak.
Rusty, Cape: see Howard, Cape.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
RUSTY BLUFF: prominent cliffs rising to a
rounded summit, about 740 ft. in el., on the W. side
of Paal Hbr. on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in
60°44’S., 45°37’W. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS.
The name, given by FIDS, was suggested by the
color of the bluff and by a rusty iron post found on
the summit.
Ruth, Cape: see Ruth Ridge.
RUTH BLACK, MOUNT: ridge-shaped mountain
about 6,000 ft. in el., standing about 3 mi. W. of
Mt. Gardiner, at the SE. side of the lower reaches
of Bartlett Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about
86°17’S., 151°35’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the
ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn,
and named at that time by R. Adm. Byrd for Mrs.
Ruth Black, deceased wife of Richard B. Black, exp.
member who assisted with seismic, survey, and ra-
dio operations in the vicinity of Little America II.
Ruth Bugge Islands: see Bugge Islands.
RUTH GADE, MOUNT: pyramidal massif, about
11,960 ft. in el., standing in the Queen Maud Range
between Cooper and Isaiah Bowman Glaciers, at
the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°40’S.,
163°30’W. Disc. in November 1911 by Capt. Roald
Amundsen who named it for one of the daughters
of the Norwegian Minister to Brazil, a strong sup-
porter of Amundsen.
RUTH RIDGE: black, rocky ridge about 1.5 mi.
long in a NNE.-SSW. direction, terminating at its
S. end in a small peak about 4,500 ft. in el. The
ridge forms part of the plateau escarpment along
the E. coast of Palmer Pen. and marks a change
in direction of the escarpment where it turns W.
to form the N. wall of Drygalski Gl.; in about
64°40’S., 60°49’W. Dr. Otto Nordenskjold, leader
of the SwedAE, 1901-4, gave the name Cape Ruth
in honor of his sister, to what appeared to be a cape
at the N. side of Drygalski Gl. The feature was
determined to be a ridge in 1947 by the FIDS, and
the name is approved accordingly. Not adopted:
Cape Ruth.
Ruth Siple, Mount: see Siple, Mount.
RYAN REEF: isolated reef lying off the N. coast
of South Georgia, about 0.75 mi. N. of the E. en-
trance point of Doris Bay; in 54°26’S., 36°08’W.
The reef appears on a chart based upon surveys by
DI personnel in the period 1925-31, but it may have
been charted earlier. It was named by the Br—APC,
following a survey by the SGS, 1951-52, for Alfredo
R. C. Ryan, Pres. of the Compania Argentina de
Pesca, which operates the whaling station at Gryt-
viken, South Georgia.
268
RYDER BAY: bay, about 6 mi. wide at its mouth
and indenting 5 mi., situated 5 mi. E. of Mt. Gaudry
on the SE. coast of Adelaide I.; in 67°34’S., 68°22’W.
The Léonie Is. lie across the mouth of this bay.
Disc. and first surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under
Charcot. Resurveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill, and in 1948 by the FIDS. The bay is
named for Lisle C. D. Ryder, second mate on the
Penola during the BGLE, 1934-37.
RYDER GLACIER: gently sloping glacier, about
13 mi. long and wide, flowing W. from the Dyer
Plateau of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound to
the S. of Gurney Pt.; in 71°07’S., 67°20’W. First
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and
later named for Capt. Robert E. D. Ryder, RN, who
as Lieutenant, was commander of the Penola dur-
ing the BGLE, 1934-37.
Rymill, Cape: see Reichelderfer, Cape.
RYMILL, CAPE: steep, metamorphic rock cliff
about 700 ft. in el., lying opposite Hearst I. and
jutting out from the icecap along the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 69°30’S., 62°25’W. The cape was
named for John Rymill by members of the East
Base of the USAS who charted this coast by land
and from the air in 1940. Rymill was the leader
of the BGLE, 1934-37, and in 1936 sledged eastward
across Palmer Pen. to 69°45’S., 63°28’W.
RYMILL BAY: bay, about 9 mi. wide at its mouth
and indenting 5 mi., entered between Red Rock
Ridge and the Bertrand Ice Piedmont along the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°24’S., 67°05’W.
Probably first seen from a distance by the FrAE
under Charcot in 1909. The bay was first surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE, and was resurveyed in 1948
by the FIDS. The name, proposed by members of
the BGLE, is for John R. Rymill, Australian leader
of the BGLE, 1934-37.
Rymill’s Col: see Safety Col.
RYRIE ROCK: isolated rock, about 30 ft. in el.,
lying about 12 mi. NE. of Kidson I., off Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°00’S., 61°25’E. Disc.
and named by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under
Mawson.
SABINE, MOUNT: mountain about 10,000 ft. in
el., standing N. of Mt. Herschel in the Admiralty
Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about
72°05’S., 169°10’E. Disc. in 1841 by the Br. exp.
under Ross, and named by him for Lt. Col. (later
Gen. Sir) Edward Sabine of the Royal Artillery,
and Foreign Secretary of the Royal Society.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
SABRINA COAST: that portion of the coast of
Antarctica lying between Cape Waldron, in about
116°02’E., and Cape Southard, in about 122°05’E.
A Br. exp. under John Balleny has long been cred-
ited with having seen land in March 1839 in about
117°E. The USEE under Wilkes approached this
coast in February 1840 and indicated its general
configuration as shown, in part, by his ‘‘Totten High
Land” landfall on his 1840 chart. In 1931 the
BANZARE under Mawson saw what appeared to be
land in this longitude about one degree farther
south than that reported by Balleny and Wilkes.
In recognition of Balleny’s effort, Mawson retained
the name of the cutter Sabrina, one of Balleny’s
ships which was lost in a storm in 95°EH. in the
latter part of March 1839. Not adopted: Sabrina
Land, Totten High Land (in part).
SABRINA ISLET: largest of three islets lying
about 2 mi. S. of Cape McNab on Buckle I., in the
Balleny Is.; in about 66°55’S., 163°20’E. Named
after the cutter Sabrina, commanded by H. Free-
man, which sailed with John Balleny’s schooner
Eliza Scott in 1839 when the Balleny Is. were dis-
covered.
Sabrina Land: see Sabrina Coast.
Sacramento Bay: see Sacramento Bight.
SACRAMENTO BIGHT: an open bight, about 3
mi. wide, between Calf Head and Cape Harcourt on
the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 36°01’W.
The name “Pinguin-Bay” was given by a Ger. exp.
under Schrader, 1882-83, to a small bay within the
bight now described. The SGS, 1951-52, reported
that a name is not necessary for this bay, and that
the bight, which is known to whalers and sealers
as Sacramento Bay, does requirea name. In order
to indicate the correct nature of the feature, and
at the same time to conform to local usage, the
name Sacramento Bight is approved. Not
adopted: Pinguin-Bay, Sacramento Bay.
SADDLE BLUFF: point about 1.3 mi. NW. of
Irving Pt. on the NE. coast of Visokoi I., South
Sandwich Is.; in 56°42’S., 27°09’W. It was named
by DI personnel following their survey in 1930.
SADDLE ISLAND: small island, consisting of
twin summits which are almost separated by a nar-
row channel strewn with boulders, lying about 6
mi. N. of the W. end of Laurie I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 44°50’W. Disc. in 1823 by
a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell, and so named be-
cause of its unusual shape. Not adopted: Ile Mon-
tura [French], Saddle Islands.
Saddle Island: see Brutus Island.
269
SADDLE POINT: point separating Corinthian
Bay and Mechanics Bay on the N. coast of Heard
I., in 53°01’S., 73°29’E. The name was applied by
American sealers at Heard I. following their initia-
tion of sealing there in 1855. The name appears on
the chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited
the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the
names then in use by the sealers.
Saens Pena, Cape: see Saenz Pena, Cape.
Saens Valiente, Mount; Saens Valiente, Sommet:
see Saenz Valiente Peak.
SAENZ PENA, CAPE: cape surmounted by a con-
ical peak about 4,200 ft. in el., forming the N. side
of the W. entrance to Bigourdan Fjord, on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°34’S., 67°37’/W. Disc.
by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named
by him for Dr. Roque Saenz Pena, Pres. of the Ar-
gentine Republic, 1910-13. Not adopted: Cape
Saens Pena.
SAENZ VALIENTE PEAK: peak about 7,100 ft.
in el., being the more westerly of two snow-capped
peaks lying at the SE. end of the long ridge which
separates Trooz Gl. from Beascochea Bay, about
10 mi. ESE. of Cape.Trois Pérez on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°28’S., 63°42’W. Disc. by the
FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named by him,
probably for Capt. J. P. Saenz Valiente of Argen-
tina. The feature was re-identified and precisely
located by the BGLE under Rymill during surveys
in Beascochea Bay in August 1935, and on a journey
to Trooz Gl. in January 1936. Not adopted: Mount
Saens Valiente, Sommet Saens Valiente [French].
SAFETY COL: snow-covered col, about 600 ft.
in el., between Red Rock Ridge and the Blackwall
Mtns., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°20’S.,
66°57’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS,
and so named by them because the col affords a safe
sledging route between Neny Fjord and Rymill Bay
when there is open water off the W. end of the Red
Rock Ridge. Not adopted: Bingham Col, Rymill’s
Col.
SAIL ROCK: insular rock about 180 ft. in el.,
lying about 7 mi. WSW. of the SW. part of Decep-
tion I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°02’S.,
60°58’W. This name, which dates back to at least
1822, was probably given by sealers. From a dis-
tance, the rock is reported to resemble a ship under
sail, but at close range it is more like a house with
a gable roof. Not adopted: Rocher Voile [French],
Sail Rocks, Steeple Rock.
Sail Rocks: see Sail Rock.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
SAILS, BAY OF: bay about 7 mi. wide, which
recedes W. about 2.5 mi. between Spike Pt. and
Gneiss Pt., along the E. coast of Victoria Land; in
about 77°22’S., 163°42’E. The name was suggested
by members of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, who
while sledging across the ice at the mouth of the
bay erected makeshift sails on their man-drawn
sledge, thereby increasing their speed.
SAINT ANDREWS BAY: small bay between Mt.
Skittle and Doris Bay, along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°26’S., 36°11’W. This bay was prob-
ably first sighted by a Br. exp. under Cook who ex-
plored the N. coast of South Georgia in 1775. The
name dates back to at least 1920 and is now well
established in international usage. On charts
where abbreviations are used, the name may be
abbreviated to St. Andrews Bay. Not adopted:
Little Bucht [German], St. Andrew Bay.
SAINT MICHAEL, MOUNT: prominent rocky
point at the head of the bay lying immediately SW.
of Broka I., on Kemp Coast; in about 67°09’S.,
58°27’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby, and probably named by
them for its resemblance to Mont Saint Michel on
the French coast. Not adopted: Skagen [Nor-
wegian].
SALPETRIERE BAY: embayment about 1 mi.
wide and receding about 0.75 mi. between Hervéou
Pt. and Poste Pt., along the W. side of Booth L., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°01’W.
First charted by the FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Char-
cot, 1903-5, and named by him after the Hopital
de la Salpétriére, a Paris hospital where his father,
Dr. Jean Martin Charcot, founded a clinic for the
treatment of nervous diseases. Not adopted:
Salpétriére Bay.
SALTONSTALL, MOUNT: tabular mountain
about 8,500 ft. in el., standing about 2 mi. S. of Mt.
Innes-Taylor which lies at S. side of the junction of
Robert Scott and Poulter Glaciers, in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 86°52’S., 153°30’W. Disc. in
December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party
under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for
John Saltonstall, contributor to the expedition.
Salvesen Bay; Salveson Cove: see Salvesen Cove.
SALVESEN COVE: cove about 6 mi. SW. of
Brialmont Cove, forming the S. extremity of
Hughes Bay, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 64°20’S., 61°22’W. ‘The cove was partially out-
lined on the charts of the BelgAE under De Ger-
lache, 1897-99. Probably named by whalers oper-
ating in this vicinity after Salvesen and Company,
whalers of Leith, Scotland. Not adopted: Salvesen
Bay, Salveson Cove.
270
SALVESEN RANGE: rocky mountain range,
about 18. mi. long and 7,000 ft. in el., which ex-
tends from Ross Pass in a SE. direction to a point
about 6 mi. W. of Cape Vahsel; in 54°40’S., 36°07’W.
This range is roughly delineated on several charts
of South Georgia. It was surveyed by the SGS,
1951-52, and named for Sir Harold Salvesen, a
director of Messrs. Chr. Salvesen and Co., Leith,
who gave great assistance to the SGS, 1951-52 and
1953-54.
Sanctuary Pinnacle: see Spire, The.
SANDEFJORD BAY: narrow body of water, about
2 mi. long, extending in a general N.—S. direction
between the W. end of Coronation I. and Monroe I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°03’W. The
northern entrance is narrow and has Spine It. in
the middle. Disc. and roughly charted by Capt.
George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during
their joint cruise in December 1821. The name
Sandefjord, presumably for Sandefjord, Norway,
center of the Norwegian whaling industry, appears
to have been first used on a 1912 chart by Petter
S¢rlle, Norwegian whaling captain. The feature
was surveyed by DI personnel in 1933. Not
adopted: Sandefjord.
SANDEFJORD BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. wide,
lying between Cape Ingrid and Tofte Gl. along the
W. side of Peter I Island; in about 68°50’S., 90°44’W.
In 1821 the Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen ap-
proached the island from the SW. and sketched
the coast from a distance. A Nor. exp. under Tofte
in the Odd I circumnavigated the island in 1927.
The bay was charted by the Nor. exp. under Nils
Larsen, 1928-29, and named for Sandefjord, Nor-
way, center of the Norwegian whaling industry.
Not adopted: Sandefjords Bay.
Sandefjord Bay: see Sandefjord Ice Bay.
SANDEFJORD ICE BAY: a bay formed in ice,
whose limits are restricted by the Amery Ice Shelf
on the W., Ingrid Christensen Coast on the S.,
and a group of glacier tongues on the E., forming
the narrow SW. portion of Prydz Bay; in about
69°35/S., 73°45’E. Disc. and named Sandefjord
Bay in February 1935 by a Nor. exp. under Mikkel-
sen in the Thorshavn, a whaling ship sent out by
Lars Christensen. Further delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The
term “ice bay’ is applied to this feature because
of its formation in ice and to eliminate duplica-
tion with Sandefjord Bay at Peter I Island. Named
for the town of Sandefjord, Norway. Not adopted:
Sandefjord Bay (q.v.).
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
SANDEFJORD PEAKS: two conical peaks, the
highest about 2,100 ft. in el., marking the SW. end
of Pomona Plateau at the W. end of Coronation
I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°01’W. The
more southern and lower of these two peaks was
named Sandefjord Peak after nearby Sandefjord
Bay by DI personnel in 1933. The collective name,
Sandefjord Peaks, way recommended by the Br-
APC following a survey of the peaks by the FIDS
in 1950. Not adopted: Sandefjord Peak.
Sandell, Mount: see Wood, Mount.
Sanders, Mount: see Saunders, Mount.
SANDFORD GLACIER: channel glacier about 8
mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing WNW. from the
continental ice to the E. side of Porpoise Bay, about
12 mi. SSW. of Waldron GIl., on Banzare Coast; in
about 66°35’/S., 129°50’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for Joseph P. Sandford,
passed midshipmen on the brig Porpoise of the
USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
SANDOW, MOUNT: rocky summit about 4,000
ft. in el., protruding above the continental ice about
10 m. SSW. of Mt. Amundsen, at the E. side of
Denman Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about
67°29’S., 100°15’E. Disc. in December 1912 by
Frank Wild and other members of the Western
Base party of the AAE under Mawson. Named by
Mawson for Eugene Sandow, of London, patron of
the expedition.
Sandwich Bay: see Iris Bay.
SANDWICH BLUFF: flat-topped mountain about
2,000 ft. in el., broken sharply at its W. side by a
steep dark bluff, standing slightly W. of center on
Vega I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°50’S., 57°30’W. Disc. by the SwedAE
under Nordenskjold, 1901-4. Charted in 1945 by
the FIDS, and so named because a horizontal snow-
holding band of rock breaks the western cliff
giving it the appearance of a sandwich when viewed
from the north.
Sandwich Group; Sandwich Islands; Sandwich
Land: see South Sandwich Islands.
SANTA ROCK: rock about 120 ft. in el., lying
about 1.5 mi. NNW. of Vindication I., in the South
Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S., 26°48’W. Charted and
named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
SAPPHO POINT: point which marks the W.
side of the entrance to Cumberland East Bay, on
the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°28’W.
Probably first sighted by a Br. exp. under Cook,
271
who explored the N. coast of South Georgia in
1775. Named for H.M.S. Sappho, British ship used
in charting portions of Cumberland Bay in 1906.
Sarg-Berg. see Coffin Top.
Sartorius Island: see Greenwich Island.
SASTRUGI, CAPE: sharply projecting point
forming the SW. extremity of a small plateau
lying close W. of Campbell Gl., in Victoria Land;
in about 74°44’S., 163°32’E. First explored by the
Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13,
and so named because sastrugi impeded the ap-
proach to this point.
SATELLITE, THE: small rock peak about 4,200
ft. in el., protruding slightly above the icecap about
4 mi. SSW. of Pearce Peak and about 7 mi. E. of
Baillieu Peak, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about
67°51’S., 61°09’E. Disc. and named by the BAN-
ZARE under Mawson on about Feb. 17, 1931. The
approximate position of this peak was verified in
aerial photographs taken by the USN Op. Hjp. on
Feb. 26, 1947.
SATURN GLACIER: glacier in SE. Alexander I
Island, at least 9 mi. long and about 9 mi. wide
at its mouth, flowing E. into the ice shelf of George
VI Sound between Two-Step Clifis and Corner
Cliffs; in 71°59’S., 68°30’W. The coast in this
vicinity was first explored from the air and par-
tially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov.
23, 1935, and was roughly surveyed from the
ground in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This
glacier was surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and
was named by them after the planet Saturn.
SAUNDERS, CAPE: cape forming the W. side
of the entrance to Stromness Bay, on the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°38’W. Disc. in
1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook and named for
his close friend Sir Charles Saunders, First Lord
of the Admiralty.
SAUNDERS, MOUNT: peak about 10,500 ft. in
el., standing about 6 mi. SE. of Mt. Mills, in the
N. part of the Dominion Range; in about 85°18’S.,
167°30’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton,
1907-9, and named for Edward Saunders, secre-
tary to Shackleton, who assisted in preparing the
narrative of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount
Sanders.
SAUNDERS, MOUNT: rugged, serrated mass of
peaks about 4,450 ft. in el., standing W. of Mounts
Stancliff and Passel in the Edsel Ford Ranges,
in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°52’S., 145°45’W.
Disc. by the ByrdAE in a flight on Dec. 5, 1929,
and named by Byrd for Capt. Harold E. Saunders,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
USN, chief cartographer of the Byrd Antarctic
Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Not adopted:
Saunders Mountain, Saunders Mountains.
SAUNDERS ISLAND: an arc-shaped island
about 5.5 mi. long and 3 mi. in its greatest width,
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°47’S., 26°27’W.
Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named
it for Sir Charles Saunders, First Lord of the
Admiralty. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on
the Discovery II.
SAUNDERS POINT: the S. point of the islet
lying 1 mi. W. of Tophet Bastion, along the S.
coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.;
in 60°42’S., 45°20’W. Charted in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II, who named it for
A. Saunders, who took numerous photographs of
these islands at this time.
SAUTER RANGE: range of mountains project-
ing through the icecap of New Schwabenland at
the N. edge of the polar plateau. The range ex-
tends about 12 mi. in an E._W. direction, transverse
to the general structural grain of the area, and
rises to about 10,500 ft. in el. near the W. end;
centering near 72°30’S., 2°20’E. Disc. by the
GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for
Seigfried Sauter, aerial photographer on the
Boreas, one of the exp. flying boats.
SAW ROCK: rock about 80 ft. in el., lying about
0.4 mi. NNW. of Vindication I. in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 57°03’S., 26°47’W. Charted and named
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
Sawtooth: see Armadillo Hill.
SCAIFE MOUNTAINS: group of mountains on
Joerg Plateau, lying S. of Gardner Inlet and im-
mediately W. of the Orville Escarpment; in about
75°30’S., 63°25’°W. Disc. by the RARE under
Ronne, 1947-48, who named these mountains for
A. M. Scaife, of Pittsburgh, a contributor to the
expedition.
SCAR HILLS: small ridge of hills, with nu-
merous glacial striae, extending from the E. side
of the head of Hope Bay about 1 mi. NE. along
the SE. shore, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°25/S., 57°01’W. Disc. and named by a party
under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4.
Not adopted: Schrammenhtgel [German].
SCARLETT POINT: point forming the W. side
of Phyllis Bay at the S. end of Montagu I., in the
South Sandwich Is.; in 58—28’S., 26°20’W. Disc.
in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. Charted in 1930
by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named
272
for E. W. A. Scarlett, accountant on the staff of
the Discovery Committee.
SCHIRMACHER PONDS: group of shallow ponds
of melt-water on the surface of the icecap, situated
at the foot of the minor escarpment close N. of
the Wohlthat Mtns., in New Schwabenland; in
about 70°30’S., 11°40’E. Disc. by the GerAE under
Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Richardheinrich
Schirmacher, pilot of the Boreas, one of the exp.
seaplanes.
SCHIST POINT: conspicuous point about 2 mi.
NW. of The Divide on the S. coast of Coronation I.,
South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°15’W. First sur-
veyed by DI personnel in 1933. The name, applied
by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49,
marks the eastern limit at sea level of the meta-
morphic rocks in this part of Coronation Island.
SCHLIEPER BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. wide, en-
tered between Romerof Head and Weddell Pt.,
along the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S.,
37°52’W. Schlieper Bay was named between
1905-12 after the director of the Compania Argen-
tina de Pesca.
SCHLOSSBACH, CAPE: cape forming the S. side
of the entrance to Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in about 75°09’S., 62°54’W. Disc.
by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named
it for Cdr. Isaac Schlossbach, USN (Ret.), second-
in-command of the exp. and commander of the
Port of Beaumont, Texas.
SCHLOSSBACH, MOUNT: peak standing about
1.3 mi. SE. of Mt. Nilsen, near the S. end of the
N. group of the Rockefeller Mtns., on Edward VII
Pen.; in about 78°02’S., 155°16’W. Disc. by the
ByrdAE in a flight on Jan. 27, 1929, and named
for Cdr. Isaac Schlossbach, USN, member of the
Ice Party on the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and member
of the USAS party which occupied the Rockefeller
Mountains seismic station during November and
December 1940.
Schneider Range: (in about 73°40’S., 3°20’W.)
the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as
it is not possible to correlate the feature with sub-
sequent survey work.
SCHOKALSKY BAY: bay, about 9 mi. wide at
its entrance and indenting 6 mi., between Mt.
Calais and Cape Brown along the E. coast of Alex-
ander I Island; in 69°15’S., 69°55’W. Hampton
Gl. discharges tremendous amounts of ice into
the head of Schokalsky Bay at a steep gradient
causing the ice there to be extremely broken
and irregular, and discourages use of this bay and
glacier as an inland sledging route onto NE. Alex-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ander I Island. This feature was first sighted
from a distance and roughly charted by the FrAE
under Charcot who, thinking it to be a strait,
gave the name “Détroit Schokalsky” after Yuliy
M. Shokal’skiy, Russian geographer, meteorologist
and oceanographer. In giving this name he fol-
lowed the spelling Schokalsky used by the man
himself when writing in Roman script. The coast
in this vicinity was photographed from the air
and this bay roughly charted in 1937 by the BGLE,
but Charcot’s “Détroit Schokalsky” was not iden-
tified. Further surveys by FIDS in 1948 have defi-
nitely identified this bay as the feature originally
named by Charcot. Not adopted: Détroit Scho-
kalsky [French], Shokalski Strait.
SCHOLLAERT CHANNEL: channel between
Anvers I. on the SW. and Gand and Brabent
Islands on the NE., connecting Dallmann Bay and
De Gerlache Str., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S.,
62°50’W. Disc. in 1898 by the BelgAE under De
Gerlache, who named it for Francois Schollaert,
1851-1917, Belgian statesman.
SCHOTT GLACIER: glacier which flows in a
NW. direction to the SE. side of Wilson Hbr., about
1 mi. SW. of Schrader Gl., on the S. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°07’S., 37°43’W. Charted by the
GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, and named for
Gerhard Schott, oceanographer at the German
Hydrographic Office, Hamburg.
SCHOTT INLET: small ice-filled inlet indenting
the E. side of Merz Pen. immediately S. of Cape
Darlington, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
72°10’S., 60°52’W. Disc. and photographed from
the air in December 1940 by the USAS. Charted
in 1947 by a joint party consisting of members
of the RARE under Ronne and the FIDS. Named
by the FIDS for Gerhard Schott.
SCHRADER GLACIER: glacier which flows in
a W. direction to the head of Wilson Hbr., on the
S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 37°42’W.
Charted by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12,
and named for Dr. K. Schrader, leader of the Ger.
exp. based at Royal Bay in 1882-83.
Schrammenhiigel: see Scar Hills.
Schubert Peak: (in about 72°54’S., 3°20’W.) the
decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as it
is not possible to correlate the feature with sub-
sequent survey work.
SCHULZ MOUNTAINS: mountains about 40 mi.
SW. of Mt. Rodpke, in New Schwabenland; in about
72°45’S., 6°40’W. Disc. by the GerAE under
Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Robert Schulz,
273
second engineer of the exp. ship Schwabenland.
Not adopted: Schulz Mountain.
Schwarze Insel: see Black Island.
SCHWEITZER GLACIER: northern of two gla-
ciers descending from the interior heights of Luit-
pold Coast to Duke Ernst Bay; in about 77°48’S.,
34°40’W. Disc. in January-February 1912 by the
GerAE under Filchner, who named it for Major
Schweitzer, first president of the German Antarc-
tic Expedition Society.
SCORESBY, CAPE: cape marking the N. end
of Borradaile I., in the Balleny Is.; in about
66°33’S., 162°50’E. Charted by DI personnel on
the Discovery II who made running surveys of the
N. portion of the Balleny Is. in 1936-38. Named
for the William Scoresby, companion ship of the
Discovery II in carrying out oceanographic work
in Antarctic waters at that time.
Scoresby Bay: see William Scoresby Bay.
SCOTIA BAY: bay about 2.5 mi. wide, lying im-
mediately E. of Mossman Pen. along the S. side
of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S.,
44°40’W. Disc. and roughly charted during the
joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer in 1821. More accurately
charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and
named for the exp. ship Scotia.
SCOTIA SEA: a sea which lies between South
Georgia and the South Orkney Is., and is bounded
on the E. by the South Sandwich Is. and on the
W. by the meridian of 55°W. It centers near
57°30’S., 40°00’W. Named in about 1932 after
the Scotia, exp. ship of the ScotNAE under Bruce,
1902-4. Not adopted: Sudantillen See [German].
SCOTT, CAPE: cape, with an ice tongue extend-
ing about 15 mi. northward, lying about 6 mi. ESE.
of Cape Oakeley, on the N. coast of Victoria Land;
in about 71°S., 168°E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross, who named it for Peter A. Scott, mate
on the exp. ship Terror.
Scott, Mount: see Robert Scott, Mount.
SCOTT, MOUNT: horseshoe-shaped massif
about 3,400 ft. in el., open to the SW. with its
convex side fronting on Girard Bay and its NW.
side on Lemaire Chan., on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°10’S., 64°04’W. Disc. by the BelgAE
under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Named by the FrAE
under Charcot, 1908-10, for Capt. Robert F. Scott,
leader of the BrNAE, 1901-4, and the BrAE,
1910-13, who lost his life in March 1912 on the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
return journey from the South Pole, which he
had reached on Jan. 18, 1912.
SCOTT CONE: conical hill about 100 ft. in el.,
standing about 2 mi. NNE. of Cape McNab on
Buckle I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°48’S.,
163°09’E. Located adjacent to Eliza Cone, the two
features appear to have been named after the
schooner Eliza Scott, exp. ship of the Br. exp.
under Balleny, 1839.
SCOTT GLACIER: glacier about 7 mi. wide and
over 20 mi. long, flowing in a NNW. direction to
the Queen Mary Coast between Capes Hoadly and
Grace, and terminating in part in Edisto Ice
Tongue and in another large ice tongue to the
westward; in about 66°35’W., 100°09’E. Disc. in
November 1912 by the Main Base party led by
Frank Wild of the AAE under Mawson, and named
for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN.
Scott Glacier: see Robert Scott Glacier.
SCOTT ISLAND: island about 0.25 mi. long and
about half as wide, lying about 315 mi. NE. of
Cape Adare, the NE. extremity of Victoria Land;
in about 67°24’S., 179°55’W. Disc. in December
1902 by Capt. William Colbeck, RNR, commander
of the BrNAE relief ship Morning, who named it
for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Not adopted: Scott
Islands.
SCOTT ISLAND BANK: submarine bank lying
N. of Ross Sea and surrounding Scott I.; in about
67°24’S., 179°55’W.
SCOTT KELTIE, CAPE: rounded headland with
vertical cliffs which rise to a small ice dome about
1,300 ft. in el., forming the NW. end of Vega I.,
south of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°47’S.,
57°41’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Norden-
skj6ld, 1901-4, and named by him for Sir John
Scott Keltie, Sec. of the Royal Geographical Soc.,
1892-1915.
SCOTT KELTIE GLACIER: small glacier de-
scending steeply to Robertson Bay about 2 mi. SE.
of Penelope Pt., on the N. coast of Victoria Land;
in about 71°32’S., 169°49’E. First charted in 1899
by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named
it for Sir John Scott Keltie, then secretary of the
Royal Geographical Society.
Scott Mountains: see Scott Range.
SCOTT NUNATAKS: conspicuous twin eleva-
tions, rising to about 1,700 ft., which form the N.
end of the Alexandra Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.;
in about 77°10’S., 153°35’W. , Disc. in 1902 by the
BrNAE under Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN, and named
274
in his honor by Lt. K. Prestrud, leader of the East-
ern Sledge Party of the Nor. exp. under Amundsen,
who ascended the features while exploring Edward
VII Pen. in 1911. Not adopted: Scott Nunatak,
Scotts Nunataks, Scott’s Nunataks.
SCOTT RANGE: range of mountains at the
head of Ice Bay, lying SSW. of the Tula Range
on the coast of Enderby Land; in about 67°40’S.,
50°00’E. Disc. on Jan. 13, 1930 by the BANZARE
under Sir Douglas Mawson, and named by Mawson
for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Not adopted: Scott
Mountains.
SCREE PEAK: conspicuous, flat-topped peak
with talus-covered slopes, about 1,800 ft. in el.,
standing at the NE. end of Eagle I. in Prince Gustav
off the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°38’S.,
57°27’W. Disc. by the FIDS and so named follow-
ing their 1945 survey. The name is descriptive
of the slopes of the peak.
Scripps Island; Scripps Peninsula: see Scripps
Ridge.
SCRIPPS RIDGE: rocky divide which is largely
ice covered, lying between Casey and Lurabee
Glaciers on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°06’S.,
63°35’W. Deeply scarred by tributary glaciers,
it terminates on the E. in Cape Walcott. Disc. by
Sir Hubert Wilkins in his pioneer flight on Dec. 20,
1928. Thinking it was a large island lying between
two great transverse channels which completely
severed Palmer Pen., he named it Scripps Island
for William Scripps of Detroit, Mich. Correlation
of aerial photographs taken by Lincoln Ellsworth
in 1935 and preliminary reports of the findings
of the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, led W. L. G.
Joerg to interpret this to be a peninsula. In pub-
lished reports, members of the BGLE have con-
curred in this interpretation which was also borne
out by the results of subsequent flights and a sledge
trip from East Base by members of the USAS in.
1940. The ridge was surveyed by the joint party
consisting of members of the FIDS and RARE in
1947-48. Not adopted: Scripps Island, Scripps
Peninsula.
SCRIVENER GLACIER: small tributary glacier
flowing in a SE. direction from the vicinity of
Mounts Woolnough and Morrison to the N. side
of Mackay Gl. immediately W. of Mt. Allan Thom-
son, in Victoria Land; in about 76°57’S., 161°50’E.
Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott,
1910-13.
SCRYMGEOUR, CAPE: high conspicuous cliffs
of red colored volcanic rock, forming the E. end
of Andersson I., lying in Antarctic Sound off the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°36’S., 56°22’W. The
cape was named by Thomas Robertson, captain of
the Active of Dundee, Scotland, in 1893. It was
re-identified and charted by the FIDS during 1947.
Scullin Monolith: see Mikkelsen Peak.
SCULLIN MONOLITH: crescent-shaped rock
fronting the sea about 2.5 mi. W. of Torlyn
Mtn., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S.,
66°43’E. Early in January 1930 the BANZARE
under Mawson made an aerial flight from the exp.
ship Discovery and reported a mountainous shore-
line in this area. Mawson landed on the rock on
Feb. 13, 1931 and named it for James Henry Scullin,
Prime Minister of Australia, 1929-31. Charted in
January-February 1931 from Norwegian whale
catchers exploring along this coast, and named
Mount Klarius Mikkelsen for Capt. Klarius Mikkel-
sen, master of the whale catcher Torlyn. Mikkel-
sen Peak is hereby retained as the name of the
highest peak of this feature. Not adopted: Mount
Klarius Mikkelsen.
SEAL BAY: bay lying in the corner of the ice
cliffs SW. of Cape Norvegia, along Princess Martha
Coast; in about 71°45’S., 12°20’W. Discovered in
1930 by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen, and so
named because of the abundance of seals in the bay.
Not adopted: Sel Bucht [German], Selbukta [Nor-
wegian].
SEA LEOPARD FJORD: inlet about 1 mi. wide,
between Bellingshausen and Luck Points, in the SE.
part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°04'S.,
37°15’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman
Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig
Daisy, who gave this name because he observed
sea leopards there. Not adopted: Sealeopard
Fjord, Seeleoparden Fjord [German].
SEA-LEOPARD PATCH: shoal near the center
of Visca Anchorage, Admiralty Bay, in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°23’W. Charted and
probably named by DI personnel on the Discovery
who took soundings in Visca Anchorage during
1927.
Sealer Cove: see Diaz Cove.
Seal Island: see Seal Islands.
SEAL ISLANDS: group of small islands lying
from 3 to 5 mi. NW. of Elephant I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in about 61°03’S., 55°43’W. The
group takes its name from the largest island, which
Capt. William Smith named Seal Island in 1820
because of the number of seals caught there. Not
adopted: Iles des Phoques [French], Seal Island,
Seal Rocks.
275
SEAL NUNATAKS: chain of nunataks extend-
ing in a WNW. direction from Robertson I., and
protruding above Larsen Ice Shelf off the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; centering in 65°03’S., 60°18’W.
Disc. and named Seal Islands in December 1893 by
a Nor. whaling exp. under C. A. Larsen, who also
named several individual features in the group.
They were more accurately charted in 1902 by the
SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who determined
them to be nunataks, and by the FIDS in 1947.
Not adopted: Robben Nunataks [German], Sel
Oene [Norwegian].
SEAL POINT: point which extends N. from the
SE. shore of Hope Bay between Eagle Cove and
Hut Cove, at the NE. end of the Palmer Pen.; in
63°24’S., 56°59’W. Disc. by a party under J. Gun-
nar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4, and so
named because the party relieved their shortage of
food and fuel by killing a seal on this point. Not
adopted: Robbenspitze [German].
SEAL POINT: point lying about 3.7 mi. S. of
Ridley Beach on the W. side of the peninsula ter-
minating in Cape Adare, in northern Victoria
Land; in about 71°22’S., 170°14’E. Charted and
named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE
under Scott.
Seal Rocks: see Seal Islands.
SEAL ROCKS: rocks, about 50 ft. in el., lying
about 0.3 mi. NE. of Cape Ellsworth, the N. end of
Young I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°15’S.,
162°25°R.
SEA SERPENT COVE: small-cove about 1 mi.
SE. of Vulcan Pt. on the W. side of Candlemas I.,
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S., 26°42’W.
Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II.
SEAWARD ROCK: northernmost and most sea-
ward rock in a group of islands which occupy the
central part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia,
lying immediately NE. of Mollyhawk It.; in
54°00’S., 37°19’W. First charted in 1912-13 by
Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist
aboard the brig Daisy. Probably named by DI
personnel who surveyed the Bay of Isles in 1929-30.
SECOND MILESTONE: rock marked by break-
ers, about 1.25 mi. ESE. of Robertson Pt., off the
N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 36°44’W.
Charted and named by DI personnel during the
period 1927-30.
SEDGWICK GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast
of Alexander I Island, about 7 mi. long and 2 mi.
wide, which flows E. from the foot of Mt. Stephen-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
son into George VI Sound immediately N. of Mt.
King; in 69°51’S., 69°22’W. First roughly surveyed
in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed
in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them for Adam
Sedgwick, English geologist and prof. of geology
at Cambridge Univ., 1818-73.
Seeleoparden Fjord: see Sea Leopard Fjord.
Seilkopf Mountains: (in about 72°45’S., 3°30’W.)
the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as it
is not possible to correlate the feature with subse-
quent survey work.
SELBORNE, CAPE: steep, rounded snow cape
with high cliffs from which hills rise to the moun-
tains about 30 mi. southwestward, forming the S.
side of the entrance to Barne Inlet, on the W. edge
of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°20’S., 160°50’E.
Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott. William Waldegrave Palmer Selborne, 2d
Earl of Selborne, entered the Cabinet as First Lord
of the Admiralty in 1900. Not adopted: Cape
Selbourne.
Selbourne, Cape: see Selborne, Cape.
Sel Bucht; Selbukta: see Seal Bay.
SELIGMAN INLET: broad inlet which recedes
about 6 mi. inland between Capes Choyce and Free-
man, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°50’S.,
65°30’W. The inlet was photographed from the
air by the USAS in 1940. It was charted by the
FIDS in 1947 and named for Gerald Seligman,
founder and president of the British Glaciological
Society.
Sel Oene: see Seal Nunataks.
SENTINEL ISLETS: small group of rocky islets,
lying immediately off the coastal ice cliffs about 2
mi. E. of the E. end of the Curzon Its., off Adélie
Coast; in 66°47’S., 141°42’E. Photographed from
the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the
FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, who established an
astronomical control station here, and so named
because these islets mark the easternmost rock
outcrops, as yet known, along Adélie Coast.
SENTINEL MOUNTAINS: group of high moun-
tains projecting through the icecap in Ellsworth
Highland between 77°S. and 78°S., and between
86°00’W. and 92°30’W. They consist of a major
NE.-SW. trending range, flanked by subranges and
outliers. Near the N. end of the main range Mt.
Ulmer reaches an estimated el. of 12,500 ft. First
sighted and photographed from the air, on Nov. 23,
1935, by Lincoln Ellsworth who in naming them
recognized their prominent position as a landmark
276
on an otherwise featureless ice surface. Not
adopted: Sentinel Range.
SENTINEL NUNATAK: black, pyramid-shaped
nunatak, about 2,100 ft. in el., which is the eastern-
most of the Tillberg Nunataks, lying in the mouth
of Drygalski Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
64°47’S., 60°46’W. The nunatak was charted by
the FIDS in 1947 and so named because of its
commanding position at the mouth of Drygalski
Glacier.
SENTINEL PEAK: conspicuous, pointed peak
about 6,200 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of
Ferrar Gl. and forming the highest point in the
south-central part of the Kukri Hills, in Victoria
land; in about 177°46’S., 162°38’E. Disc. and
named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott.
Sentinel Range: see Sentinel Mountains.
SENTINELS, THE: small group of rocks lying
in the entrance to Godthul, a bay along the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°17’W.
Rocks in this approximate position have been indi-
cated on charts since about 1912, but they were
first accurately charted by personnel of the Nor.
exp., 1927-28. The name appears to have been
applied by DI personnel who recharted this area in
1929.
SERAPH BAY: broad bay formed by the E. coast
of Thurston Pen. where it joins Eights Coast on
the SW. side of Bellingshausen Sea, lying close S.
of the Fletcher Is.; in about 72°15’S., 95°00’W.
Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on
Feb. 27, 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for the
brig Seraph, of Stonington, Conn., which in 1830,
under the command of Capt. Benjamin Pendleton,
participated in a private exp. to the SW. of the
South Shetland Is., southward of 60°S., and as far
west as 101°W.
SEVEN BUTTRESSES: series of seven rock but-
tresses, about 500 ft. in el., which are separated by
narrow icefalls and extend for about 4 mi. along
the S. part of the W. coast of Tabarin Pen., at the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°36’S., 57°10’W.
Probably first sighted by a party under J. Gunnar
Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. The Seven
Buttresses were surveyed and named by the FIDS,
1946.
SEWARD MOUNTAINS: isolated mountains,
about 5,000 ft. in el., standing about 20 mi. S. of
Goodenough Gl. on the SW. shore of Palmer Pen.;
in about 72°26’S., 66°15’W. Disc. in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Named by Rymill for Sir
Albert Charles Seward, Prof. of Botany at Cam-
bridge, 1906-36. Not adopted: Seward Nunataks.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Seward Nunataks: see Seward Mountains.
SEYMOUR ISLAND: island about 10 mi. long
and about 5 mi. wide at its greatest breadth, lying
1 mi. NE. of Snow Hill I. and S. of the NE. end of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°17’S., 56°45’W. The NE. end
of this feature was sighted by a Br. exp. under
Ross, Jan. 6, 1843, and named Cape Seymour after
R. Adm. George Francis Seymour. Its insular
nature was determined by Capt. C. A. Larsen in
1892-93 and the name Seymour has since been
extended to the entire island.
SHACKLETON GLACIER: major glacier, about
12 mi. wide at its mouth and perhaps 80 to 100 mi.
long, descending from the polar plateau, approxi-
mately along the 175th meridian west longitude, to
the head of Ross Ice Shelf. Disc. by the USAS on
the flight of February 29-March 1, 1940. Named
by the US-SCAN for Sir Ernest H. Shackleton, fa-
mous British Antarctic explorer. Not adopted:
Wade Glacier.
SHACKLETON ICE SHELF: an extensive ice
shelf fronting for about 105 mi. on the Queen Mary
Coast from about 94°55’E. to about 99°25’E., and
projecting seaward in the west-central portion for
an undetermined distance of more than 60 miles.
The extreme W. portion, namely the 20-mile section
fronting on the coast between Junction Corner and
Roscoe Gl., was determined from USN Op. Hjp.
aerial photographs taken in February to extend
seaward for about 20 mi. to a point close S. of
Bigelow Rock. The E. end was determined from
these photographs to extend seaward for about 33
mi. from the 20-mile section between Davis Pen.
and Delay Point. Additional study is required to
determine whether the large tongue opposite Den-
man Gl. should be included as forming the E. end
of the ice shelf, as small open water areas (dead
water) lie within the portion of the tongue close
NNE. of Jones Ridge, a prominent nunatak stand-
ing above the lower reaches of Denman Glacier.
The existence of this ice shelf was first made known
by the USEE under Wilkes, who explored along its
E. and NE. front in the Vincennes in February
1840. It was named by the AAE under Mawson,
1911-14, for Sir Ernest Shackleton. Not adopted:
Shackleton Shelf, Shackleton Shelf Ice, Termina-
tion Barriere Eis [German].
SHACKLETON INLET: a re-entrant about 10
mi. wide, with Nimrod Gl. at its head, lying between
Cape Wilson and Cape Lyttelton, at the W. side of
Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°22’S., 163°00’E. Disc.
by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, and named for
Lt. (later Sir) Ernest Shackleton, RNR, who, with
Dr. Edward A. Wilson, accompanied Scott on his
attempted journey to the pole.
277
SHACKLETON PEAK: mountain with perpen-
dicular cliffs facing W., about 4,800 ft. in el., stand-
ing about 2 mi. E. of Chaigneau Peak on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°13’S., 63°56’W. Disc.
by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named
by him for Sir Ernest Shackleton.
Shackleton Shelf Ice: see Shackleton Ice Shelf.
SHAGNASTY ISLET: small, rocky ice-free islet
lying about 0.4 mi. W. of Lenton Pt. in the N. part
of Clowes Bay, close off the S. coast of Signy I.,
South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°38’W. Roughly
charted in 1933 by DI personnel, and surveyed in
1947 by the FIDS. The name, applied by FIDS,
arose from the unpleasant state of the islet due to
its occupation by a large colony of blue-eyed shags
(Phalacrocoraz atriceps) .
SHAG ROCK: rock about 0.1 mi. ESE. of Cliff
Islet and some 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°42’W.
Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under
Rymill.
SHAG ROCKS: group of insular rocks about 240
ft. in el., lying some 115 mi. WNW. of South Geor-
gia; in about 53°33’S., 42°02’W. Shag Rocks, prob-
ably so named because shags and other sea birds
frequent them, were known to sealers prior to 1823
and probably are identical with the ‘Aurora
Islands” reported in this vicinity by the ship
Aurora in 1762. They were charted by DI person-
nel on the William Scoresby in 1927.
SHALLOW BAY: bay about 10 mi. wide formed
by a recession of limited depth in the ice cliffs in
the E. part of Mac-Robertson Coast; in about
67°48’S., 67°36’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under
Mawson on Feb. 12 or 13, 1931 and so named be-
cause it formed only a shallow indentation in the
coast line. (
SHAMBLES GLACIER: steep glacier with very
prominent hummocks and crevasses, about 6 mi.
wide and of undetermined length, flowing SE. be-
tween Mt. Bouvier and Mt. Mangin to Stonehouse
Bay on the E. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°20’S.,
68°15’W. The lower reaches of the glacier were
first sighted and surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE
under Charcot, and resurveyed in 1948 by the
FIDS. So named by FIDS because of the very
broken nature of its surface.
SHANNON POINT: point marking the W. side
of the entrance to Esbensen Bay, at the SE. end of
South Georgia; in 54°52’S., 36°00’W. The point
was charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby. Named for Lt. Cdr. R. L. V. Shannon,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
RN, captain of the William Scoresby at the time of
the survey.
SHARBONNEAU, CAPE: rounded, snow-covered
headland forming the S. side of the entrance to
Lehrke Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen:; in
70°50’S., 61°27’W. Members of the East Base of
the USAS who explored this coast in 1940 charted
this feature as an island, which they named for
Charles W. Sharbonneau, carpenter at East Base.
It was determined to be a cape of Palmer Pen. in
1947 by a joint sledge party consisting of members
of the RARE and the FIDS. Not adopted: Shar-
bonneau Island.
Sharbonneau Island: see Sharbonneau, Cape.
SHARP PEAK: sharp peak about 1,500 ft. in el’,
situated in the NE. part of Livingston I., about 2.5
mi. NW. of High Pt., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°31’S., 60°07’'W. The name was applied by DI
personnel on the Discovery II who charted the peak
in 1935.
SHARP PEAK: peak probably over 4,000 ft. in
el., about 4 mi. S. of Ferin Head, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 66°03’S., 65°18’W. Disc. and
named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. The
name is descriptive.
SHEEHAN ISLANDS: group of small islands in
the William Scoresby Arch., the highest about 300
ft. in el., lying E. of the entrance to William
Scoresby Bay off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about
67°22’S., 59°51’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under
Mawson on Feb. 18, 1931, but erroneously charted
as Sheehan Nunatak, lying behind the coast line.
Their insularity was determined by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby on Feb. 27, 1936. They
were more fully mapped by Norwegian cartogra-
phers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp.
under Lars Christensen in January and February
1937. Not adopted: Hamarggalten [Norwegian],
Sheehan Nunatak.
Sheehan Nunatak: see Sheehan Islands.
SHEEP POINT: point along the S. side of Cook
Bay, marking the S. side of the entrance to Prince
Olav Hbr., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in
54°04’S., 37°08’W. The name appears on a chart
based upon a 1929 survey of Prince Olav Hbr. by DI
personnel, but may reflect an earlier naming.
SHEILA COVE: cove in the SW. part of Jessie
Bay on the N. coast of Laurie I., South Orkney Is.;
in 60°45’S., 44°46’W. Surveyed and named by the
ScotNAE, 1902-4, for Sheila Bruce, daughter of
William S. Bruce, leader of the expedition.
- 1939-41.
278
SHELBY, MOUNT: mountain about 5,000 ft. in
el., standing between Daspit Gl. and Bills Gulch at
the head of Trail Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°09’S., 65°50’W. Disc. by members of
East Base of USAS, 1939-41. It-was photographed
from the air in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne,
and charted in 1948 by the FIDS. Named by
Ronne for Marjorie Shelby who contributed her
services as typist and editor in drafting the RARE
prospectus, and assisted in general exp. work prior
to departure.
Shelby Glacier: see East Gould Glacier.
SHELTER ISLANDS: group of islets about 0.5
mi. W. of Winter I., in the Argentine Is., off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°18’W.
Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under
Rymill.
SHELTER POINT: point on the W. side of Blue
Whale Hbr., about 0.3 mi. S. of the entrance, on the
N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°01’W.
Charted by DI personnel in 1930, and so named
because the point affords shelter to vessels anchor-
ing on the S. side of it. ;
SHEPARD ISLAND: small island lying at the
W. edge of the Getz Ice Shelf off the E. extremity
of Hobbs Coast; in about 74°25’S., 132°00’W. Disc.
in December 1940 by the USAS and named for
John Shepard, Jr., a contributor to the USAS,
Not adopted: John Shepard Island.
SHEPPARD NUNATAK: conical nunatak about
200 ft. in el., standing near Sheppard Pt., the N.
side of the entrance to Hope Bay, at the NE. end
of Palmer Pen.; in 63°22’S., 56°59’W. This area
was first explored by a party of the SwedAE,
1901-4. The nunatak was charted by the FIDS
and named for R. Sheppard, master of the ship
Eagle, who landed the party which established the
FIDS base at Hope Bay in 1945.
SHEPPARD POINT: point marking the N. side
of the entrance to Hope Bay, at the NE. end of
Palmer Pen.; in 63°22’S., 56°58’W. Disc. by a
party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE,
1901-04, who wintered at Hope Bay in 1903. Named
by the FIDS for R. Sheppard.
Sheriff, Cape; Shireff, Cape: see Shirreff, Cape.
Shetland du Sud, Iles; Shetland Islands: see
South Shetland Islands.
Shetland Islands: see South Shetland Islands.
SHIDELER, MOUNT: peak standing about 1.2
mi. SE. of Mt. Fitzsimmons in the northern group
of the Rockefeller Mtns., on Edward VIII Pen.;
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in about 77°55’S., 155°15’W. Disc. on Jan. 27,
1929 by members of the ByrdAE on an exploratory
flight over this area.
SHINGLE COVE: small, sheltered cove in the
NW. corner of Iceberg Bay, on the S. coast of
Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S.,
45°35’W. First surveyed by DI personnel in 1933.
The name, applied by the FIDS following their
survey of 1948-49, arose from the fine shingle on
the landing beach on the S. shore of the cove.
SHIPLEY GLACIER: glacier descending from
the high plateau of northern Victoria Land to the
W. side of Robertson Bay, where it fronts on
Pressure Bay and against Flat and Turret Islands;
in about 71°25’S., 169°12’E. This feature was
charted by the Northern Party of the BrAE,
1910-13, under Scott.
SHIRLEY, MOUNT: crescent-shaped summit-
ridge resulting from the glacial sculpturing of a
prominent snow-covered cirque overlooking Emory
Land Bay, on Ruppert Coast; in about 75°40’S.,
142°00’W. Disc. and mapped by the USAS in 1940.
Named for Charles C. Shirley, chief photographer
at the USAS West Base. Not adopted: Mount Ann
Shirley.
SHIRREFF, CAPE: cape at the N. tip of the
small rocky peninsula which separates Blythe and
Barclay Bays, lying near the W. end of the N.
coast of Livingston I.; in 62°27’S., 60°48’W. Named
by Edward Bransfield in 1820 for Capt. William
H. Shirreff, at that time the British commanding
officer in the Pacific. Not adopted: Cape Sheriff,
Cape Shireff.
SHIRREFF COVE: small cove or anchorage,
situated immediately SW. of Cape Shirreff, along
the N. side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°49’W. Edward Bransfield,
Master, RN, named a cove in this vicinity for Capt.
William H. Shirreff, British commanding officer
in the Pacific in 1820. Present application of the
name is based upon the location shown on Capt.
George Powell’s map published by Laurie in 1822.
Not adopted: Shirreff’s Cove.
Shiskoff’s Island: see Clarence Island.
SHIVER POINT: point, surmounted by a peak
about 2,100 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the
entrance to Evans Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°03’S., 61°25’W. Evans Inlet was first
sighted from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec.
20, 1928. The point was charted during 1947 by
the FIDS and named by the Br—APC in 1950. The
name is not a personal name.
279
SHMIDT, CAPE: cape on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen., marking the NW. extremity of the peninsula
which separates Hanusse Bay and Lallemand
Fjord; in 66°55’S., 67°06’W. First seen and rough-
ly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It
was sketched from the air in 1937 by the BGLE
under Rymill. Named in 1954 by the Br—APC for
Prof. Otto Yu. Shmidt, Dir. of the Arctic Inst. at
Leningrad, 1930-32, Head of the Chief Administra-
tion of the Northern Sea Route, 1932-39, and leader
of many Arctic expeditions.
Shokalski Strait: see Schokalsky Bay.
SHROVE POINT: the SE. tip of Candlemas I.,
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°39’W.
The name of the point derives from the day on
which it was charted by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery II, Shrove Tuesday, March 4, 1930.
Sibbald, Cape: see Johnson, Cape.
SIBBALD, CAPE: sheer, bare cliffs, 2,000 ft. in
el., at the S. margin of Lady Newnes Ice Shelf, in
Victoria Land; in about 74°00’S., 166°50’E. Named
in February 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross for
Lt. (later Cdr.) John Sibbald, of the Erebus.
SICKLE MOUNTAIN: mountain standing on the
S. side of Clarke Gl. and about 13 mi. E. of Cape
Berteaux, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°53’S., 66°50’W. So named by Finn Ronne of the
East Base of the USAS, 1939-41, because its peculiar
shape was suggestive of that of a sickle.
Sidders, Islotes: see Pi Islets.
SIDLEY, MOUNT: peak about 12,000 ft. in el.,
the most imposing summit of the Executive Com-
mittee Range, in Marie Byrd Land; in about
77°25’S., 129°00’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Richard E.
Byrd, Nov. 18, 1934, and named by him for Mrs.
Mabelle Sidley, the daughter of William Horlick,
manufacturer, who was a contributor to the Byrd-
AE, 1933-35. Not adopted: Mount Mabelle Sidley,
Mount Maybelle Horlick Sibley, Mount Maybelle
Horlick Sidley, Mount Maybelle Sidley.
SIDNEY HERBERT SOUND: a sound extending
from Capes Lachman and Scott Keltie on the NW.
to the narrows between The Naze and False Island
Pt. on the SE., separating Vega I. from James Ross
I. and connecting Prince Gustav Chan. with
Erebus and Terror Gulf; in about 63°55’S., 57°40’W.
On Jan. 6, 1843 Capt. James Clark Ross disc. a broad
embayment E. of the sound, which he named
Sidney Herbert Bay after the Hon. Sidney Herbert,
M.P., First Secretary to the Admiralty. The sound
proper was disc. and charted by the SwedAE,
1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, who included it with
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the broad embayment under the name Sidney
Herbert Sound. The recommended application
restricts the name of the area W. of the narrows be-
tween The Naze and False Island Pt.; the embay-
ment disc. by Ross forms the W. margin of Erebus
and Terror Gulf. Not adopted: Herbert Sound,
Sydney Herbert Sound.
Sierra du Fief: see Du Fief, Sierra.
SIFFREY, CAPE: cape about 7 mi. NW. of Mt.
Bransfield, forming the extreme N. tip of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°13’S., 57°19’W. Disc. and named by
the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville.
SIGHING PEAK: prominent, isolated, rocky
peak, about 2,100 ft. in el., marking the S. side
of the entrance to Stonehouse Bay on the E. side
of Adelaide I.; in 67°24’S., 67°59’'W. First sighted
and surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot.
Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by
them because of the persistent sighing of wind
from the summit-of this peak even when appar-
ently calm at sea level.
SIGMA ISLETS: group of small islets and rocks
which lie about 2.5 mi. N. of Eta I. and mark the
N. limit of the Melchior Is., in the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°16’S., 62°55’W. The name Sigma, derived
from the 18th letter of the Greek alphabet, appears
to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt.
chart following surveys of these islets by Arg.
expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islotes
Avion [Spanish].
SIGNY ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long and
less than 3 mi. wide, lying close S. of the middle
of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°43’S.,. 45°38’W. Unnamed, the appearance of
this island was first roughly plotted in 1823 by
Matthew Brisbane, under the direction of James
Weddell. It was more carefully charted by Capt.
Petter Sgrlle, who made a running survey of the
island in the 1912-13 season. Named after Capt.
Sgrlle’s wife, Mrs. Signy Sgrlle. The island was
roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II, and was surveyed by the FIDS in
the period 1947-50.
SILLARD ISLETS: two ice-covered islets lying
about 1 mi. NW. of Cape Mascart, the NE. ex-
tremity of Adelaide I.; in 66°40’S., 67°45’W. Disc.
by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Named for
Director Sillard of the French Montevideo Co.,
Montevideo, Uruguay, whose company made re-
pairs on Charcot’s exp. ship, the Powrquoi-Pas?.
Not adopted: Sillard Islands.
Silveyra, Islas: see Omicron Islets.
280
SIMMERS PEAKS: group of three peaks rising
above the icecap in Enderby Land to about 2,700
ft. in el., about 17 mi. SE. of Cape Close and about
12 mi. N. of Mt. Codrington; in about 66°06’S.,
52°45’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson
in January 1930, and named for R. G. Simmers,
meteorologist of the expedition.
SIMPSON, CAPE: conspicuous rock bluff on the
N. end of Ufs I., which rises to a sharp peak about
920 ft. in elevation. This cape forms the E. side
of the entrance to Howard Bay along Mac-Robert-
son Coast; in about 67°27’S., 61°09’E. Disc. by
the BANZARE under Mawson on about Feb. 18,
1931.
SIMPSON GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue
projecting about 2.5 mi. from the N. coast of Vic-
toria Land, between Nelson Cliffs and Atkinson
Cliffs; in about 71°15’S., 168°47’E. Charted in
1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13, and named for Dr. (later Sir)
George C. Simpson, then meteorologist of the expe-
dition. He was Dir. of the Meteorological Office,
1920-38, and Pres. of the Royal Meteorological
Soc., 1940-42.
SIMPSON HEAD: conspicuous promontory
about 3,500 ft. in el., which projects S. into the
N. side of New Bedford Inlet about 4 mi. NW. of
Cape Kidson, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 73°21’S., 60°59’'W. Disc. and photographed
from the air in December 1940 by members of the
USAS. During 1947 the promontory was pho-
tographed from the air by members of the RARE,
who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it
from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Sir
George C. Simpson.
Simpson Islands: see Simpson Rocks.
SIMPSON ROCKS: group of rocks, some of
which are submerged, lying about 6 mi. NE. of
Cape Melville, King George I., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 61°57’S., 57°23’W. The name Simpson
appears on a chart of August 1825 by the British
sealer James Weddell, and is now well established
in international usage. Not adopted: Simpsons
Islands.
SIMS ISLAND: small but conspicuous island
about 0.5 mi. long and 1,000 ft. in el., lying in
Carroll Inlet along George Bryan Coast; in about
73°15’S., 78°45’W. Sighted from the air by mem-
bers of the USAS, in December 1940, and named
for Lt. (jg) L. S. Sims, USMC, surgeon on the
expedition.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
SINBAD ROCK: low rock about 1.25 mi. WNW.
of Square End I., off the NW. side of King George I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°09’S., 59°02’W.
The rock was charted in 1935 by DI personnel on
the Discovery II, but the name appears to be first
used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon this
survey.
SINKER ROCK: rock lying off the N. tip of
Goudier Islet, near the center of the harbor of
Port Lockroy, in the Palmer Arch; in 64°50’S.,
63°31’W. Rocks were charted in this position by
the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. So named by
the FIDS in 1944 because a sinker was laid near
this rock for a boat mooring.
SIPLE, MOUNT: massive, conical, snow-covered
mountain, about 10,200 ft. in el., lying in the angle
of the coast line at the E. side of the entrance
of Wrigley Gulf, in Marie Byrd Land; in about
73°15/S., 123°00’W. Disc. in December 1940 by
members of the USAS in a flight from West Base.
Paul A. Siple, for whom the mountain is named,
served on the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and 1933-35, and
was in command of the West Base of the USAS,
1939-41. He was navigator on all major explora-
tory flights from the base, including that on which
Mount Siple was first sighted. Not adopted:
Mount Ruth Siple, Mount Walker.
SIREN BAY: small bay lying in front of Shipley
Gl. between Flat and Turret Islands, in northern
Victoria Land; in about 71°22’S., 169°12’E.
Charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the
BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and so named by them
because they heard a noise like a ship’s siren
while surveying this area. Not adopted: Syren
Bay.
Sir George Newnes Glacier: see Newnes Glacier.
SIRIUS KNOLL: conspicuous, ice-covered knoll
about 3,500 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of
West Russell Gl. and marking the NE. end of the
Detroit Plateau, in the central part of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°43’S., 58°36’W. Charted in
1946 by the FIDS and named after Sirius, the
dog star.
Sir John Murray Glacier: see Murray Glacier.
Sisters, The: see Sgstrene Islands.
SISTERS, THE: two stacks, or pillar rocks,
lying close to the N. tip of Cape Adare, in north-
ern Victoria Land; in about 71°17’S., 170°15’E.
First charted and named in 1899 by the BrAE,
1898-1900, under Borchgrevink. Not adopted:
Sisters, Sisters’ Rocks.
424589 0-57-19 281
Sisters Point: see Three Sisters Point.
Sisters’ Rocks: see Sisters, The.
SITKA BAY: small bay about 1 mi. W. of Cape
Buller, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in
53°59’S., 37°24’°W. The names Sitka Bay and
Buller Bay have both appeared on maps for this
feature for many years. Following a survey of
South Georgia in 1951-52, the SGS reported that
this feature is known locally as Sitka Bay. This
latter name is approved on the basis of local usage.
Not adopted: Buller Bay.
Sjogren Fiord: see Sjogren Glacier.
SJOGREN GLACIER: glacier at the SE. end
of Louis Philippe Pen. on Palmer Pen., that is
nurtured by numerous radial tributaries at its W.
side, which merge and move E. to Prince Gustav
Chan. some 15 mi. S. of Mt. Roberts; in 64°14’S.,
58°52’W. This feature was disc. and charted as
a fjord by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under the Norden-
skjold. Its true nature was determined in a sur-
vey by the FIDS during August 1945. The name
commemorates Hj. Sjogren, a patron of Norden-
skjold’s expedition. Not adopted: H. J. Sjogren
Fiord, Hj. Sjogren Fiord, Sjorgren Fiord, Sjogren
Fiord.
Skagen: see Saint Michael, Mount.
SKELTON INLET: a re-entrant about 10 mi.
wide, lying in the NW. part of the Moore Em-
bayment between Mt. Cocks and the Worcester
Range, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in
about 78°50’S., 161°45’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who named this feature for
Lt. Reginald W. Skelton, RN, chief engineer of
the exp. ship Discovery.
SKILLING ISLET: islet lying immediately NE.
of Atriceps It., in the Robertson Is. group of the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 45°09’W. Although
roughly charted at a much earlier date, the islet
was first surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel. Named
by the Br—-APC after Charles J. Skilling (1931-52)
of the FIDS, general assistant at Signy I., 1949,
and member of the sledge party which visited
the Robertson Is. in 1949. Skilling died aboard
the John Biscoe on April 17, 1952.
SKITTLE, MOUNT: prominent rocky moun-
tain, about 1,500 ft. in el., forming the N. limit
of Saint Andrews Bay on the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°24’S., 36°11’W. The name “Kegel-
Berg” (meaning skittle mountain) was given for
this feature by a Ger. exp. under Schrader in
1882-83. During the SGS, 1951-52, the moun-
tain was identified and located. The English form
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
of the name, Mount Skittle, was recommended
by the Br—-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Kegel-Berg
[German].
Sknapsskjar Rocks: see Skrap Skerries.
Skollsberg, Cap: see Skottsberg, Cape.
Skomaker Hullet: see Cobblers Cove.
SKONTORP COVE: cove in Paradise Hbr., lying
about 2 mi. SE. of Bryde I. along the W coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°54’S., 62°53’W. Probably
named for Edvard Skontorp, an outstanding Nor-
wegian whale gunner, who commanded a whaler
for Salvesen and Co. of Leith, Scotland. Not
adopted: Skontrop Cove.
Skontrop Cove: see Skontorp Cove.
SKOTTSBERG, CAPE: cape forming the S. end
of Trinity I., which is separated from the W. coast
of Palmer Pen. by Orléans Chan.; in 63°53’S.,
60°47’W. The cape was first charted by the Swed-
AE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, and named by
him for Carl Skottsberg, botanist of the expedition.
Not adopted: Cap Skollsberg [French].
Skrabskjaer Ricks; Skrapskjar: see Skrap Sker-
ries.
SKRAP SKERRIES: two small groups of islets
and rocks lying midway between Cape George
and Barff Pt., close off the N. coast of South
Georgia; centering in about 54°15’S., 36°19’W. The
present name, which dates back to about 1930,
derives from the Norwegian term “skrapskjaer” or
“skrapskjar” formerly used for these islets. Not
adopted: Skrabskjaer Ricks, Skrapskjar, Sknaps-
skjar Rocks.
SKUA CREEK: narrow channel between Skua
I. and Winter I. in the Argentine Is., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. Charted
and named Skua Inlet in 1935 by the BGLE under
Rymill, but in recent years the name Skua Creek
has overtaken the earlier name in usage. Not
adopted: Skua Inlet.
SKUA GULL PEAK: peak, probably about 2,000
ft. in el., with a small lake enclosed near the summit
which partially thaws during the summer and
is bordered by a skua gull rookery, standing
about 12 mi. ENE. of Mt. Saunders, in the Edsel
Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°49’S.,
145°29’W. Disc. and named in November 1934 by
the Marie Byrd Land Sledging Party of the Byrd-
AE, 1933-35.
282
Skua Inlet: see Skua Creek.
SKUA ISLAND: triangular islet lying between
Black I., to the SW., and Winter I. and Galindez
I., to the N. and NE., in the Argentine Is., off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W.
Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under
Rymill.
SKUA ISLET: islet immediately NE. of Prion I.,
in the entrance to the Bay of Isles, South Georgia;
in 54°01’S., 37°15’W. The islet was charted in
1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American
naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. Named by DI
personnel following their 1929-30 survey of the
Bay of Isles. Not adopted: Skua Island.
Skuary: see Evans, Cape.
SKY ROCK: smali rock marking the southern
extent of the Welcome Its., off the N. coast of
South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°29’W. Charted
and named by DI personnel in 1930.
SLADEN, MOUNT: conspicuous pyramid-shaped
mountain, about 3,000 ft. in el., standing 1.5 mi.
NW. of Saunders Pt. on the S. side of Coronation
I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°18’W. Sur-
veyed by the FIDS in 1948-49. Named by the
Br-APC for Dr. William J. L. Sladen of the FIDS,
medical officer and biologist at Hope Bay in 1948,
and at Signy I. in 1950.
SLEIPNIR GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long,
flowing in an easterly direction close S. of Mt. Odin
into the W. side of Cabinet Inlet between Balder
and Spur Points, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 66°29’S., 63°59’W. Charted in 1947 by the
FIDS, who named it after the horse of the mytho-
logical Norse god Odin. It was photographed from
the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne.
SLESSOR PEAK: a mainly ice-covered peak,
about 7,600 ft. in el., standing at the SW. end of
Bruce Plateau on Palmer Pen., and close N. of
West Gould GIl.; in 66°31’S., 64°58’W. It rises
about 1,000 ft. above the general level of the
plateau ice sheet and has a steep rock face on
its N. side. First surveyed in 1946-47 by a FIDS
sledge party led by Robert S. Slessor, FIDS medical
officer at Stonington I., for whom the peak is
named,
Slosarczyk Bay; Slossarczyk Bay: see Doubtful
Bay.
Smaaland Bay: see Doubtful Bay; Smaaland
Cove.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
SMAALAND COVE: cove lying 1.5 mi. WSW. of
Doubtful Bay (q.v.) along the SE. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°53’S., 36°05’W. The name Doubt-
ful Bay was given to this feature during the survey
by DI personnel in 1927, and the name Smaaland
Bay appeared on their chart for the bay 1.5 mi.
ENE. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the names
Doubtful Bay and Smaaland Bay are both well
established locally, but that they are always used
in the reverse positions shown on the DI chart.
In order to conform to local usage, the name Smaa-
land is approved for the feature now described,
and the name Doubtful Bay as applied to this fea-
ture, is rejected. Cove is considered a more suitable
descriptive term than bay. Not adopted: Doubtful
Bay (q.v.), Smaaland Bay.
SMALL ISLAND: island about 1 mi. in extent,
lying 1 mi. S. of Intercurrence I. in the Christi-
ania Is., at the NE. end of the Palmer Arch.; in
63°57’S., 61°25’W. Though the origin of this name
is unknown, it has appeared on maps for over 100
years and its usage has been established inter-
nationally.
Small Razorback Island: see Little Razorback
Island.
SMALL ROCK: small rock about 0.2 mi. N. of
Berntsen Pt., lying in the entrance to Borge Bay, off
the E. side of Signy I. in the South Orkney Is.;
in 60°43’S., 45°36’/W. The name was probably
applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who
charted Borge Bay in 1933.
Smedland Bay: see Doubtful Bay.
SMILLIE PEAK: rock peak, about 5,800 ft. in
el., which lies on the S. side of the Kohl-Larsen
Plateau, at the western end of the Allardyce Range
in South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°57’W. The peak
was surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52. Named by the
Br-APC for Gordon Smillie, surveyor with the
SGS, 1951-52.
SMITH, CAPE: cape forming the NE. end of
Smith I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°52’S.,
62°20’W. The discovery of the South Shetland
Is. was first reported in 1819 by Capt. William
Smith, for whom the cape is named. Not adopted:
Smiths Cape.
SMITH, MOUNT: peak in the Prince Albert
Mtns., about 4,500 ft. in el., rising above a moun-
tain mass about 10 mi. inland from the coast of
Victoria Land; in about 76°03’S., 161°45’E. Disc.
by the BrAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who probably
named this peak for W. E. Smith, Chief, Naval
Constructor, who prepared the plans and super-
283
vised construction of the exp. ship Discovery. Not
adopted: Smith Mountains.
Smith, Mount: see Barr Smith, Mount.
Smith Bay: see Smith Inlet.
SMITH INLET: ice-filled inlet receding about
15 mi. in a westerly direction between Cape Boggs
and Cape Collier, along the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 72°25’S., 62°00’W. This inlet was disc. and
charted in 1940 by the USAS, but it was later
erroneously shown on charts as “Stefansson In-
let.” During 1947 the inlet was photographed from
the air by the RARE, under Ronne, who in con-
junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground.
Named by Ronne for R. Adm. Edward H. Smith,
USCG, noted Arctic oceanographer and explorer,
leader of the Marion expedition to Labrador Sea
and Baffin Bay in 1928, and Dir. of the Woods Hole
Oceanographic Institute. Not adopted: Smith Bay,
Stefansson Inlet.
SMITH INLET: inlet about 8 mi. wide, lying
between Capes Moore and Oakeley, in Victoria
Land; in about 70°55’S., 167°30’E. Disc. in 1841
by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Alex-
ander J. Smith, mate on the exp. ship Erebus. Not
adopted: Smyth Inlet.
SMITH ISLAND: island about 15 mi. long and
about 6.5 mi. wide, lying about 42 mi. W. of Decep-
tion I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S.,
62°32’W. The discovery of the South Shetland Is.
was first reported in 1819 by Capt. William Smith,
for whom this island was named. This island was
known to both the American sealers and the Brit-
ish as early as 1820, and the name Smith has been
established in international usage for over 100
years. Not adopted: Borodino Island, James Is-
land, Mount Pisgah Island, Smith’s Isle.
SMITH PENINSULA: ice-covered, ‘‘dog-legged”’
peninsula about 25 mi. long and 10 mi. wide, ex-
tending in an easterly direction between Keller
and Nantucket Inlets, on the E. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 74°25’S., 61°15’W. The peninsula was
photographed from the air in December 1940 by
members of the USAS, and in 1947 by members of
the RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with
the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by
Ronne for Walter Smith, ship’s mate, navigator,
and trail man with Ronne’s expedition.
SMITH POINT: small point about 150 yards NE.
of Besnard Pt. on the SE. side of the harbor’ of
Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°50’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5,
under Charcot. The name appears on a chart
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the
Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming.
Smiths Island: see Livingston Island.
Smitty, Cape: (in about 74°40’S., 61°43’W.) the
decision of August 1949 has been VACATED, since
no prominent cape exists in the position indicated.
Instead, the name Smith has been applied to the
peninsula in 74°25’S., 61°15’W.
SMOKY WALL: a prominent mountain block,
about 6,100 ft. in el., in the Salvesen Range, South
Georgia; in 54°35/S., 36°11’W. The descriptive
name “Wetterwand” (meaning Weather Wall) was
given to this mountain by a Ger. exp., 1882-83,
under Schrader. It was surveyed by the SGS,
1951-52. When viewed from the NE., its summit is
level and regular and has the appearance of a wall.
The descriptive name Smoky Wall was recom-
mended by the Br-APC in 1954. Not adopted:
Wetterwand [German].
Smolensk Island: see Livingston Island.
SMYLEY, CAPE: cape marking the SW. side of
the entrance to Ronne Entrance, lying at the W.
side of the N. end of the large, irregular-shaped
island fronting on Bellingshausen Sea between
Carroll Inlet and Ronne Entrance; in about
72°26’S., 78°10’W. Disc. by members of the USAS
in December 1940 and named after Capt. William
H. Smyley, American master of the sealing vessel
Ohio during 1841-42. Capt. Smyley, in February
1842, recovered the self-recording thermometer
left at Pendulum Cove, Deception I., by Capt.
Henry Foster of the Chanticleer, in 1829. The
minimum reading was reported to be —5° F.
SMYTH, CAPE: the S. tip of Sturge I., in the
Balleny Is.; in about 67°37’S., 164°35’E. In 1841,
Capt. James Clark Ross, viewing Sturge I. from a
considerable distance, thought it a group of three
islands and named the southernmost Smyth
Island, after his friend Capt. William Henry
Smyth, RN, Pres. of the Royal Astronomical Soc.
Ross’ error was discovered in 1904 by Capt. Robert
F. Scott, who applied the name to the southern-
most point on Sturge Island.
Smyth Inlet: see Smith Inlet.
SNEDEKER GLACIER: channel glacier about 5
mi. wide and 10 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the
continental ice to Knox Coast, about 6 mi. E. of
DuBeau Gl.; in about 66°28’S., 106°30’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for
Robert H. Snedeker, photo interpreter with USN
284
Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in establishing
astronomical control stations along the coast from
Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast.
SNIPE PEAK: peak, about 740 ft. in el., which
is the main peak on Moe I., situated close SW. of
Signy I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
45°41’W. Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel. Re-
surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, and so named by
them after H.M.S. Snipe, under Cdr. J. G. Forbes,
RN, which visited Signy I. on Feb. 7, 1948.
SNOW HILL: snow-covered peak about 800 ft.
in el., about 0.3 mi. W. of the S. part of Borge Bay,
in the east-central part of Signy I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°37’W. Charted and
named by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1933.
SNOW HILL ISLAND: an almost completely
snow-capped island, about 20 mi. long, in a NE.-
SW. direction, and 6 mi. wide, lying immediately
SE. of James Ross I., from which it is separated by
Admiralty Sound, and S. of the NE. end of Palmer
Pen.; in 64°28’S., 57°12’W. It was disc. on Jan. 6,
1843 by a Br. exp. under Ross who, thinking it a
part of the mainland, named it Snow Hill because
its snow cover stood out in contrast to the bare
ground of nearby Seymour Island. Its insular
character was determined in 1902 by the SwedAE
under Nordenskjold.
SNOW ISLAND: a completely ice-covered island
about 11 mi. long and 8 mi. wide, lying about 5 mi.
S. of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°45’S., 61°23’W. This island was known to both
the American sealers and the British as early as
1820, and the name Snow has been well established
in international usage for over 100 years. Not
adopted: Basil Halls Island, Monroe Island, Snow
Isle.
Snow Nunataks: see Ashley Snow Nunataks.
SNOW PEAK: conspicuous, snow-covered peak
about 2,700 ft. in el., about 2 mi. ESE. of Cape
Pride, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°01’S.,
37°57’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in
the period 1926-27.
SNOWY POINT: point forming the SE. end of
the small plateau lying W. of Campbell G1., in Vic-
toria Land; in about 74°45’S., 163°43’E. Charted
and named by the Northern Party of the BrAE
under Scott, 1910-13.
SNYDER ROCKS: small group of coastal rocks
projecting above the continental ice, fronting on
Knox Coast at the N. end of the ice-covered escarp-
ment along the W. side of Underwood Gl.; in about
66°37’S., 107°53’W. Delineated from aerial photo-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
graphs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named
by the US-ACAN for Mark G. Snyder, who assisted
USN Op. Wml. parties which established astro-
nomical control along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd
Coasts in January-February 1948.
SOBRAL, CAPE: cape about 2,000 ft. in el.,
which is almost entirely snow-covered, marking
the W. side of the entrance to Larsen Inlet, on the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°37’S., 59°40’W. Disc.
by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, who
named it for Lt. José M. Sobral of the Argentine
Navy, asst. physicist and meteorologist with the
expedition. The cape was recharted by the FIDS
in 1947, but at that time it could not be determined
whether the cape formed the S. tip of an island or a
promontory projecting from the mainland.
Sobral, Isla: see Omega Island.
Society Range: see Royal Society Range.
SOCKS GLACIER: small glacier entering the W.
side of Beardmore Gl., about 18 mi. up the glacier
from the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°47’S.,
170°20’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton, and named for one of the ponies taken
with the South Pole Party. Socks, the last pony
to survive the journey, fell into a crevasse, and was
lost on Beardmore Gl. near Socks Glacier.
SOGEN ISLET: islet forming the E. side of Fran-
cais Cove, lying in the SW. extremity of Port
Charcot, which indents the N. part of Booth L., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°0i1’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and
named for one of the exp. dogs which died and was
buried here. The name has been approved because
of its long-time use. Not adopted: Sogen Islet.
SOLBERG INLET: ice-filled inlet about 6 mi.
wide, which recedes W. about 10 mi. between Rock
Pile Peaks and Joerg Pen., along the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 68°19’S., 65°10’W. Disc. by mem-
bers of the USAS in 1940. It was resighted in 1947
by the RARE under Ronne, who named it for
R. Adm. Thorvald A. Solberg, USN, Chief of Naval
Research, who was of assistance to the expedition.
SOLVAY MOUNTAINS: mountains, probably
over 5,000 ft. in el., extending in a NE.—SW. direc-
tion along the SE. side of Brabant I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°17’W. Disc. by the BelgAE,
1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him
for Ernest Solvay, a supporter of the expedition.
Not adopted: Monts Solway [French].
Solway, Monts: see Solvay Mountains.
285
SOMERVILLE ISLET: the southwesterly of a
pair of islets situated about 3 mi. NW. of Darboux
I. and about 6 mi. WNW. of Cape Tois Pérez, off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°23’S., 64°20’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and
named by him for Crichton Somerville, a resident
of Kristiania, Norway (now Oslo), who selected
and supervised the making of much of the polar
clothing and equipment used by the expedition.
Sommet: for names beginning thus see under
the specific part of the name. For example, for
Sommet Gravier see Gravier, Sommet. (Sommet
is a French word for “peak.”)
S@RKAMMEN CREST: crescent-shaped range
about 3,500 ft. in el., lying close SW. of Mekammen
Crest and extending 3 mi. in a NE.-SW. arc, in the
Masson Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°53’S., 62°50’E. It
was mapped by Norwegian cartographers from
aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under the
direction of Lars Christensen in January 1937.
The name is descriptive, meaning “south comb.”
Not adopted: Sdérkammen [Norwegian], South
Crest.
S@RLLE, CAPE: rocky bluff marking the S. end
of Fredriksen I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°46’S., 45°00’W. ‘The cape was charted in 1933
by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for
Capt. Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaler who made a
running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13.
Not adopted: Cape Sorlle.
SORN and BERNT: two conspicuous rocks lying
close offshore, about 2 mi. NE. of Cape Pride, off
the N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°55’ W.
The name appears on a chart based upon surveys
by DI personnel in the period 1926-30, but may
reflect an earlier naming. Not adopted: The
Brothers.
S@R RONDANE MOUNTAINS: irregular escarp-
ment assumed to be the front of the polar plateau
which has been mapped from 21°40’E. to 25°30'E.,
in about 72°15’S., inland from Princess Ragnhild
Coast. The plateau edge, which rises to an esti-
mated 8,000 or 9,000 ft. as a southern wall back of
the mountain-studded coastal piedmont, consists
of the major re-entrants bordered by massive
northward projections. Four of these latter have
been mapped and named. From west to east these
are Mt. Widerge, Mt. Walnum, Mefjell Mtn., and
Mt. Bergersen. Disc. and photographed from the
air by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen
on Feb. 6, 1937 and named after Rondane, a moun-
tain massif in southern Norway. Not adopted:
Sor-Rondane [Norwegian], Southern Escarpments.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Sorrowness Bay: see Stromness Bay.
S@RSDAL GLACIER: channel glacier, about 8
mi. wide and some 20 mi. long, flowing WNW. from
the continental ice overlying Ingrid Christensen
Coast, and terminating in a prominent tongue at
the SE. side of Krok Inlet and the Vestfold Hills;
in about 68°42’S., 78°30’E. Disc. and roughly
charted in February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under
Mikkelsen, and named by him for Lief S¢rsdal,
Norwegian dentist and member of the party which
landed at the N. side of the Vestfold Hills. Re-
charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor.
exp. under Lars Christensen. Not adopted:
Sorsdal Glacier, Sdrsdal Glacier.
S@RSDAL GLACIER TONGUE: prominent gla-
cier tongue, about 7 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, ex-
tending W. from S¢rsdal Gl., at the S. side of Krok
Inlet and the Vestfold Hills, along Ingrid Christen-
sen Coast; in about 68°43’S., 78°05’E. Disc. in
February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen.
Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor.
exp. under Lars Christensen, and named for Lief
S¢grsdal.
S@RTINDANE PEAKS: two peaks about 5,000
ft. in el., lying S. of Tritoppen Pk. in the S. part of
David Range in the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 68°09’S., 62°29’E.
Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under the direc-
tion of Lars Christensen in January 1937. The
name, meaning “the southern peaks,” was applied
because of the extreme S. position of the peaks in
the area mapped. Not adopted: Sdrtindane [Nor-
wegian].
S@MSTRENE ISLANDS: island group, including
Debutante I. and a small chain of islets and rocks
close N. which extend about 5 mi. in an E—W.
direction, lying about 5 mi. W. of Ingrid Christen-
sen Coast, between Polar Record and Polararboken
Glacier Tongues; in about 65°35’S., 75°00’E. Disc.
and charted in February 1935 by the Nor. exp.
under Mikkelsen, who applied the name S¢strene,
after the islands by that name lying in the en-
trance to Oslofjord, Norway. Not adopted: Sés-
trene [Norwegian], Sostrene Islands, Sostvene
Islands, The Sisters.
Sostvene Islands: see Sdstrene Islands.
SOUND, THE: a passage, about 3 mi. long and
0.5 mi. wide, which extends in a N.-S. direction
between the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S.,
62°58’W. It separates the Melchior Is. into West
286
Melchior Islands and East Melchior Islands. It
was first roughly charted by the FrAE under Char-
cot, 1903-5. The name was probably given by DI
personnel who roughly surveyed the feature in
1927. It was resurveyed by Argentine expeditions
in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Canal Prin-
cipal [Spanish].
Sourrie, Ile: see Lambda Island.
SOUTHARD, CAPE: ice-covered cape, separating
Banzare and Sabrina Coasts, which marks the NE.
end of the low, ice-covered ridge forming the W.
side of Paulding Bay and the N. flank of Reynolds
Trough; in about 66°35’S., 122°05’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Samuel
Lewis Southard, Sec. of the Navy under Pres. John
Quincy Adams. Southard was instrumental in
initiating interest in a governmental scientific exp.
and gaining congressional authorization of the
USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42, while serving as
Senator from New Jersey during the Van Buren
Administration.
South Arms: see Ferrar Glacier.
South Bay: see Cumberland East Bay.
SOUTH BAY: bay about 2.5 mi. wide, lying NW.
of False Bay on the S. side of Livingston I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°38’S., 60°30’W. This bay
was known to both the American sealers and the
British as early as 1820, and the name South has
been well established in international usage for
over 100 years. Not adopted: Erebus Bay.
SOUTH BAY: small bay forming the S. head of
Prince Olav Hbr., along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. Probably named
by DI personnel who charted Prince Olav Hbr. in
1929.
SOUTH CAPE: cape marking the S. extremity
of the Robertson Is., immediately S. of the SE. tip
of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°48’S., 45°09’W. Named by Capt. George Powell
and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, who disc. the South
Orkney Is. while on a joint cruise in December
1821. Not adopted: South Point.
South Crest: see S6rkammen Crest.
SOUTH EAST POINT: point about 1 mi. ENE. of
Neptunes Bellows, marking the SE. point of Decep-
tion I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S.,
60°31’W. The point was charted by a Br. exp.,
1828-31, under Foster. The name was proposed in
1949 by the Hydrographic Dept., Admiralty, follow-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
ing a survey of the island by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold,
RN, in 1948-49.
Southern Escarpments: see Sér Rondane Moun-
tains.
Southern Foothills: see Inexpressible Island.
SOUTHERN THULE: group of islands Consisting
of Thule, Cook, and Bellingshausen Islands, at the
S. end of the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S.,
27°12’W. Southern Thule was named by Capt.
James Cook, who disc. and roughly outlined its
northern portions in 1775. Adm. Thaddeus Bel-
lingshausen’s report, published about 1831, stating
that Southern Thule consists of one high rock and
three small islands, was confirmed in a survey by
DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1930. Not
adopted: Southern Thule Group.
Southern Thule Island: see Thule Island.
South Foreland: see Melville, Cape.
SOUTH GEORGIA: island about 105 mi. long
and 20 mi. wide, with steep glaciated mountains
and deeply indented coasts, extending in a
NW.-SE. arc between about 54°00’S. and 54°55’S.,
and 35°45’W. and 38°05’W. It is generally ac-
cepted that-South Georgia may have been sighted
by Antonio de la Roche sailing an English mer-
chant vessel in 1675, and by the Spanish ship
Leon in 1756. The island was explored and
roughly charted by Capt. James Cook in the Reso-
lution in January 1775, and named for King
George III of Great Britain. The S. coast was
first explored and charted by a Russ. exp. under
Bellingshausen in 1819. Substantial additional
mapping was accomplished by sealers, whalers and
private expeditions. The coastal areas were
roughly surveyed by DI personnel in the period
1925-30. The SGS continued the surveys, includ-
ing inland areas, in 1951-52 and 1953-54. Not
adopted: Isla Georgia Del Sur [Spanish], Isle of
Georgia, South Georgia Island, Siid-Georgien
[German].
SOUTH ORKNEY ISLANDS: a group of two
larger and several smaller mountainous barren
islands covered with ice and snow and surrounded
by many rocks, lying NE. of Palmer Pen. between
60°20’S. and 60°50’S., and 44°20’W. and 46°45’W.
Disc. on the occasion of the joint cruise by Capt.
George Powell, a British sealer in the sloop Dove,
and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, an American sealer
in the sloop James Monroe, in December 1821. The
islands were named Powell’s Group on Powell’s
chart, published in England, Nov. 1, 1822. The
islands were explored and roughly recharted by
James Weddell, Master, RN, who as a British seal-
287
ing captain visited them in 1823. Weddell’s chart
carried the name South Orkney Islands, which
became accepted internationally. Subsequent
charts of the islands were published by the Fr.
exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40, and by the Nor-
wegian whaling captain Petter Sgrlle, 1912-13.
A running survey of the islands was completed
in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Fur-
ther surveys were made by the FIDS in the period
1947-50. ‘Not adopted: Powell Group, Powell
Islands, Powell’s Group, Siid-Orkney Inseln [Ger-
man].
SOUTH POINT: point about 1.4 mi. SW. of
Entrance Pt., marking the southernmost point of
Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°01'S.,
60°37’W. The point was charted by a Br. exp.,
1828-31, under Foster. The name was proposed
in 1949 by the Hydrographic Dept., Admiralty, fol-
lowing a survey of the island by Lt. Cdr. D. N.
Penfold, RN, in 1948-49.
SOUTH POINT: point marking the S. end of
Moe I., about 0.2 mi. SW. of Signy I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°41’W. Named by DI
personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the
South Orkney Is. in 1933.
South Point: see South Cape.
South Sandwich Group: see South Sandwich
Islands.
SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS: chain of vol-
canic islands lying N. of Weddell Sea; extending
from 56°18’S. to 59°27’S., in about 26°30’W. Disc.
and first roughly charted on Jan. 31, 1775 by Capt.
James Cook, who gave them the name “Sandwich
Land,” for the fourth Ear] of Sandwich, then First
Lord of the Admiralty. Cook concluded that he
had charted a group of islands or else a point of
a continent. The islands were first roughly sur-
veyed by Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen in 1819.
The Traverse Islands, three islands forming the
N. end of the chain, were not sighted by Cook but
were disc. and first mapped by Bellingshausen in
1819. The South Sandwich Islands were surveyed
by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1930. Not
adopted: Sandwich Group, Sandwich Islands,
Sandwich Land, South Sandwich Group, Sud-
Sandwich Inseln [German].
SOUTH SHETLAND ISLANDS: group of islands
lying N. of Palmer Pen. between 61°S. and 63°S.,
and extending about 280 mi. in an ENE.—WNW.
direction between 54°W. and 63°W. Named by
Capt. William Smith of the brig Williams in 1819
while cruising close to the N. edge of the islands.
Not adopted: Iles Shetland du Sud [French], New
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
South Shetland, Shetland Islands, South Shet-
land, Siid-Shetland Inseln [German], Sydshet-
land [Norwegian].
South Victoria Land: see Victoria Land.
SOUTH WEST POINT: the southwest point of
Annenkov I., off the south-central coast of South
Georgia; in 54°30’S., 37°06’W. Annenkov I. was
disc. by Capt. James Cook in 1775, and re-sighted
by Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen in 1819. The
point appears to be first named on a chart based
upon DI surveys undertaken in the period 1926-30.
Not adopted: S. W. Point.
SPAYD ISLAND: ice-covered island with promi-
nent rock exposures, about 1 mi. long and 0.5 mi.
wide, protruding above the main flow of Baker
Three Gl. about 0.3 mi. SE. of the S. end of Gil-
lock I., lying close W. of Ingrid Christensen Coast
at the head of Amery Ice Shelf; in about 70°21’S.,
71°11’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.
in March 1947, and named by him for A. W. Spayd,
air crewman on USN Op Hijp. photographic flights
in this area and other coastal areas between 14°
and 164°, east longitude. Not adopted: Spayd
Outlier.
Spayd Outlier: see Spayd Island.
Speiss Peak: see Spiess Peak.
SPENCE HARBOR: small bay about 1.5 mi. S.
of The Turret, along the E. coast of Coronation I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°10’W.
Disc. in December 1821 by Capt. George Powell,
a British sealer in the sloop Dove, who named the
bay, and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, an American.
sealer in the sloop James Monroe.
Spence’s Harbor.
Not adopted:
SPENCER, CAPE: cape lying about 10 mi. W. of
Buckley Bay and forming the E. corner of the
depression occupied by the Ninnis Gl., on George
V Coast; in about 68°23’S., 147°30’E. Disc. in
1912 by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who
named this point for Sir Baldwin Spencer, Dir.
of the National Museum of Melbourne in 1911.
SPENCER, MOUNT: peak in the Allegheny
Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges
in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°17’S., 143°13’W.
Disc. on aerial flights made from West Base of
the USAS in 1940 and named for Herbert R.
Spencer, of Erie, Pa., the sea scout commander
of Paul Siple, leader of the West Base party of
that expedition.
288
Spencers Straits: see English Strait; Lewthwaite
Strait.
SPERM BLUFF: dark bluff about 4,000 ft. in
el., standing at the N. side of Cotton Gl. about 2
mi. SW. of Mt. Suess, in Victoria Land; in about
77°04’S., 161°42’E. The bluff, which protrudes
about 1,500 ft. above the ice, is essentially flat in
the central portion, but tapers eastward ending
in a low rounded spur. Charted and named by
the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. When viewed
from the E., the N. face of the bluff suggests the
blunt head of the sperm whale.
SPERRING POINT: rocky point about midway
along the W. side of William Scoresby Bay, on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°25’S., 59°33’E.
Named by personnel on the William Scoresby who
charted this area in February 1936.
SPEYER, MOUNT: mountain, about 8,900 ft.
in el., lying between Mt. Harmsworth and Mt.
Dawson-Lambton in the Worcester Range, and
surmounting the W. side of Moore Embayment,
on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°45’S.,
160°20’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott,
who named this feature for Sir Edgar Speyer, a
contributor to the expedition.
Sphinz: see Beehive Hill.
SPHINX HILL: conspicuous, isolated black hill,
standing 1.5 mi. NNW. of Demay Pt. on King
George I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°11’S., 58°27’W.
First charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10.
The descriptive name was given by the Br—APC fol-
lowing a survey by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, in
1951-52.
SPHINX ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long, in
a NW.-SE. direction, and 0.5 mi. wide, having a
bare rocky summit with vertical faces on all four
sides, lying in the SW. half of the entrance to
Barilari Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°53’S., 64°52’W. Disc. and named by the
BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill.
SPHINX ROCK: rock which lies immediately
off the SW. end of Monroe I., in the South Orkney
Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°05’W. Charted and named by
DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1933.
SPHINX ROCK: rock about 170 ft. in el. lying
in front of Islands Point, along .the W. side of
Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in
about 71°28’S., 169°28’E. Charted and named in
1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1910-13,
under Scott.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
SPIEDEN, CAPE: cape marking the NE. end of
a low, ice-covered ridge separating Holmes Gl., on
the SE., and a small glacier, on the NW., which
terminates in a prominent tongue close E. of Cape
Goodenough, fronting on Porpoise Bay, on Ban-
zare Coast; in about 66°20’S., 127°00’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for William
Spieden, purser on the sloop of war Peacock of
the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
SPIESS PEAK: peak about 12,100 ft. in el., in
New Schwabenland; in about 72°55’S., 3°50’W.
Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and
named for R. Adm. F. A. Spiess, oceanographer,
leader of the Meteor exp. of 1925-26, and Dir. of the
Deutsche Seewarte (German Hydrographic Office)
in Hamburg. Not adopted: Speiss Peak.
SPIKE CAPE: bare rocky point lying about 6 mi.
S. of Dunlop I. and 13 mi. N. of Cape Bernacchi,
in front of the Wilson Piedmont Glacier along
the coast of Victoria Land; in about 177°18’S.,
163°34’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1910-13,
under Scott. Probably so named because of its
appearance. Not adopted: Spike Point.
SPINDRIFT ROCKS: group of ice-free rocks,
about 50 ft. in el., lying 0.75 mi. SW. of North Pt.,
and close to the W. coast of Signy I., South Orkney
Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°40’W. Surveyed and named in
1947 by the FIDS. The name is descriptive of the
spindrift, or sea spray, which forms over these
rocks during westerly gales.
SPINE ISLET: narrow islet composed of sev-
eral aligned rock segments, lying between the W.
end of Coronation I. and Monroe I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 46°02’W. The islet was
roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel B. Palmer in 1821. It was so named
because of its appearance by DI personnel on the
Discovery II, who charted the islet in 1933. Not
adopted: Spine Island.
SPIRE, THE: isolated rock pinnacle at the NW.
end of the Blackwall Mtns. on the S. side of Neny
Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°18’S., 66°53’W. Prob-
ably first seen by BGLE sledging parties in 1936-37,
though not specifically mapped. First climbed on
Jan. 17, 1948 by members of FIDS and RARE.
The name, The Spire, was first used in 1949 by
William Latady, aerial photographer with RARE.
Not adopted: Needle, Pinnacle, Sanctuary Pin-
nacle, The Needle.
SPIT BAY: an open bight formed by the NE.
coastline of Heard I. and Spit Pt., the E. extremity
of the island; in 53°06’S., 73°45’E. The name
derives from the conspicuous spit which forms the
289
S. and E. shore of the bight, and was applied by
American sealers at Heard I. in the period fol-
lowing their initiation of sealing there in 1855.
The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp.
under Nares, which visited the island in the
Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then
in use by the sealers.
SPIT POINT: the E. tip of a conspicuous spit,
about 4 mi. long and averaging about 0.25 mi.
wide, which marks the E. extremity of Heard I.;
in 53°07’S., 73°51’E. The feature was roughly
charted by Br. exp. under Nares which visited the
island in the Challenger in 1874. The descriptive
name was apparently given some years later and
is now well established in usage. The spit was
surveyed by the ANARE in 1948.
SPIT POINT: narrow gravel spit forming the S.
side of the entrance to Yankee Hbr., Greenwich I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°32’S., 59°48’W.
Yankee Hbr. was known to American and British
sealers as early as 1820. Spit Point was charted
by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935 and
given this descriptive name.
SPIT POINT: a spit forming the N. tip of
Candlemas I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in
57°01’S., 26°40’W. Charted and named by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II in 1930.
SPIVEY, MOUNT: flat-topped, mainly ice-cov-
ered mountain, about 7,000 ft. in el., standing on
the W. side of Toynbee GI., and 9 mi. S. of Mt.
Nicholas, in the N. part of the Douglas Range of
Alexander I Island; in 69°31’S., 69°50’W. First
photographed from the air in 1937 by the BGLE
under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948
by the FIDS, and named for Robert E. Spivey,
general assistant at Stonington I., who took part
in the FIDS sledge journey to George VI Sound
in 1949.
SPRING, CAPE: point forming the S. side of
the entrance to Brialmont Cove, on the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 64°15’S., 61°11’W. Disc. in
1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, and named
for Prof. W. Spring, of the Univ. of Liége, a mem-
ber of the Belgica Commission. Not adopted:
Cape W. Spring.
SPUR POINT: point at the E. end of a black,
rocky spur which extends SE. from a highland
at the S. side of Sleipnir Gl. to the W. side of
Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 66°36’S., 63°48’W. This descriptive name was
given by the FIDS following their survey in 1947.
The feature was photographed from the air during
1947 by the RARE under Ronne.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
SQUARE BAY: a roughly rectangular-shaped
bay about 10 mi. wide, indenting the W. coast of
Palmer Pen. for about 8 mi. in the NE. part of
Marguerite Bay; in 67°51’S., 67°00’W. Most of the
entrance to the bay is occupied by Horseshoe I.,
which limits access to a narrow southern strait
opening onto Marguerite Bay and a narrower
northwestern strait opening onto the mouth of
Bourgeois Fjord. Disc. and named by the BGLE,
1934-37, under Rymill.
SQUARE END ISLAND: small island about 4.5
mi. NNE. of the W. tip of King George I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°09’S., 58°59’W. The
name appears to have been applied by DI personnel
on the Discovery II who charted the island in 1935.
Not adopted: Square-end Island.
STAHLMAN, MOUNT: mountain with a pre-
cipitous western face, rising to about 4,500 ft. in el.,
standing close NNE. of Mt. Hamilton at the E.
side of the lower reaches of Robert Scott Gl., in the
Queen Maud Range; in about 85°37’S., 151°40’W.
Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological
party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd
for James G. Stahlman, newspaper publisher of
Nashville, Tenn., a supporter of the expedition.
STANCLIFF, MOUNT: peak. about 2,000 ft. in
el., at the E. side of Mt. Saunders, in the Edsel
Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°49’S.,
145°23’W. Disc. by the Marie Byrd Land Sledging
Party of the ByrdAE in November 1934, and named
for Olin D. Stancliff, a member of that party. Not
adopted: Mount Stancliffe, Mount Starcliffe.
Stancliffe, Mount: see Stancliff, Mount.
STANCOMB-WILLS ICE TONGUE: (in about
74°10’S., 25°00’W.) the decision of May 1947 has
been VACATED, as this tongue was found to be
nonexistent in January 1955.
St. Andrew Bay: see Saint Andrews Bay.
STANLEY ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and
about 1,700 ft. in el., lying 4 mi. NE. of Spur Pt.
in the W. part of Cabinet Inlet, off the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°32’S., 63°40’W. Charted by
the FIDS in 1947 and named for Rt. Hon. F. G.
Stanley, M. P., Sec. of State for the British Colonies,
who played an important part in establishing the
survey. This island was photographed from the
air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. Not
adopted: Bertrand Island.
STANLEY KEMP PEAK: mountain peak, about
2,500 ft. in el., forming a break in the skyline SW.
of Stefansson Bay, on Kemp Coast; in about
67°30’S., 59°00’E. Disc. Jan. 4, 1930 by the
290
BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson and named for
Dr. Stanley W. Kemp, British marine biologist and
oceanographer who was Dir. of Research of the
Discovery Investigations, 1924-36. Not adopted:
Kemp Peak.
STANLEY PATCH: shoal lying in Port Foster,
about 2 mi. WNW. of Fildes Pt., Deception I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°38’W.
Named after Port Stanley, Falkland Islands by Lt.
Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, following his survey in
1948-49.
STANTON GROUP: group of small rocky islets
lying about 3 mi. off Mac—Robertson Coast, about
7 mi. NE. of Falla Bluff; in about 67°27’S., 61°41’E.
Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on about
Feb. 17, 1931 and named for A. M. Stanton, a mem-
ber of the expedition. Not adopted: Einstodingane
[Norwegian].
Starcliffe, Mount: see Stancliff, Mount.
STARFISH COVE: small cove close N. of Balin
Pt. on the E. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.;
in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933
by DI personnel. So named by the FIDS, following
their survey of 1947, because of the large number
of starfish in the bottom fauna.
START POINT: point marking the NW. end of
Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°31’S.,
61°08’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Bransfield in
January 1820. It was so named by him because
of its resemblance to a point on the S. coast of
England by the same name and because it was
the place where his operations began.
STATION NUNATAK: isolated ice-free nunatak
near the N. coast of Snow Hill I., in the James Ross
I. group; in 64°23’S., 57°03’W.’ It is nearly 500
ft. in el. and stands 4.5 mi. SW. of the NE. end
of the island. First seen and surveyed in 1902 by
the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who so named it
because of its proximity to the expedition’s winter
station. Not adopted: Stations Nunatak.
STATLER HILLS: small group of low, rocky
hills, standing close N. of Rogers Gl. and fronting
on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°54’S.,
72°38’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.
in March 1947, and named by him for L. R. Statler,
air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights
in this area and other coastal areas between 14°
and 164°, east longitude.
STEELE ISLAND: a snow-covered mound, about
12 mi. long from east to west and about 10 mi.
wide, rising above the ice off the E. coast of Palmer
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Pen. about 12 mi. SE. of Cape Sharbonneau; in
71°00’S., 60°40’W. The steeply-sloping sides of the
island are crevassed, but no rock is exposed. Disc.
by members of East Base of the USAS in 1940.
Named for Clarence E. Steele, tractor driver for
the East Base.
STEEPHOLM: the southernmost islet in the
northern group of the Robertson Is., South Orkney
Is.; in 60°47’S., 45°09’W. The islet lies close N. of
Skilling It. and marks the N. side of the navigable
channel through the Robertson Is. The Robertson
Is. were disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt.
Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. The north-
ern group, consisting of three islets, was named
“Bratholm” by Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13. The name
was later corrected to the plural form, “Bratthol-
mene” (Steep Islets), by S¢grlle. Subsequently
“Bratholm” was restricted by others to the one islet
described. The name Steepholm, derived from the
forms used by S¢rlle but restricted to the one islet,
was recommended by the Br—APC following surveys
by the FIDS in 1948-49. Not adopted: Bratholm.
STEEPLE, THE: rocky ridge, about 1,600 ft. in
el., forming the NW. arm of horseshoe-shaped Mt.
Carrel, which is on the E. side of Depot Gl., about
1.5 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay, at the NE. end
of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 57°03’W. Disc. by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. The de-
scriptive name was applied by the FIDS, 1945.
Steeple Rock: see Sail Rock.
STEFANSSON BAY: a more-or-less landlocked
pay at the E. edge of Kemp Coast, about 10 mi.
WNW. of William Scoresby Bay. Stefansson Bay
is about 6 mi. wide between Tryne Pt. on the W. and
Cape Wilkins on the E., but widens to about 12 mi.
in its upper reaches; in about 67°20’S., 59°12’E.
Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson, on about
Feb. 18, 1931, and named for Vilhjalmur Stefans-
son, Arctic explorer.
Stefansson Inlet: see Smith Inlet; Stefansson
Strait.
Stefansson Sound: see Stefansson Strait.
STEFANSSON STRAIT: an ice-filled strait about
40 mi. long, lying between the E.; coast of Palmer
Pen. and Hearst Island.. It is omly 4 mi. wide at
Cape Rymill near its center; in about 69°26’S.,
62°25’W. This strait was first sighted by Sir
Hubert Wilkins at the S. end of his flight of Dec.
20, 1928, and was named by him for Vilhjalmur
Stefansson. He believed it to be,a strait cutting
off what is now known to be the Palmer Pen. from
the main land mass of Antarctica. The true orien-
291
tation of the strait was determined by members of
the USAS who charted this coast by land and from
the air in 1940. Not adopted: Boggs Strait, Stef-
ansson Inlet, Stefansson Sound.
STEIN NUNATAKS: group of low nunataks pro-
jecting from the piedmont ice in New Schwaben-
land and scattered over an area about 20 mi. long;
in about 71°40’S., 1°20’W. They lie about 75 mi.
inland from the coast. Disc. by the GerAE under
Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Willy Stein,
coxswain of the expedition.
STELLA CREEK: narrow winding passage ex-
tending from Thumb Islet to the SE. end of Winter
I. and lying between Winter I. and Galindez I.
in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. Charted and named
in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. The expedi-
tion motor boat was named the Stella. Not
adopted: Stella Inlet.
Stella Inlet: see Stella Creek.
STENE POINT: point lying 1.5 mi. W. of Cape
Vik on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney
Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°44’W. Surveyed by DI person-
nel in 1933, and resurveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49.
Named by the Br—APC for K. O. Stene, captain of
the floating factory Normanna which operated in
the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13.
STENHOUSE BLUFF: southern face of a rocky
knoll at the head of Visca Anchorage, Admiralty
Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°02’S., 58°22’W. First charted by the
FrAE 1908-10, under Charcot. Named for Car. J.
W. Stenhouse, RNR, captain of the Discovery in
these waters in 1927.
Stephen Austin, Mount: see Austin, Mount.
Stephenson, Cape: (in about 72°25’S., 68°00’W.)
the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since
subsequent survey has shown that no cape exists
in the position indicated.
STEPHENSON, MOUNT: highest mountain in
the Douglas Range, about 9,800 ft. in el., standing
at the heads of Toynbee and Sedgwick Glaciers
about 8 mi. W. of George VI Sound, on the E. side
of Alexander I Island; in 69°49’S., 69°43’W. Prob-
ably first seen in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot,
but not recognized as part of the Douglas Range.
First surveyed in 1936 by Stephenson, Fleming,
and Bertram of the BGLE under Rymill. The E.
side of the mountain was resurveyed in 1948 by the
FIDS, who named the feature for Alfred Stephen-
son, surveyor and leader of the BGLE party to
George VI Sound in 1936.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
STEPHENSON NUNATAK: prominent, pyra-
mid-shaped rock nunatak, about 2,100 ft. in el.,
which rises 1,000 ft. above the surrounding ice,
standing at the NW. side of Kirwan Inlet and W. of
George VI Sound in the SE. part of Alexander I
Island; in 72°11’S., 69°05’W. Disc. and roughly
surveyed in 1940-41 by members of the USAS.
Resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS and named for
Alfred Stephenson, surveyor with the BGLE,
1934-37, who led a sledge party S. into George VI
Sound to about 72°S. in 1936.
STERNECK, CAPE: bold, black cliff, 1,500 ft. in
el., on a projecting point of land forming the N.
side of the entrance to Hughes Bay, on the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°05’S., 61°12’W. In
1898 the BelgAEK under De Gerlache explored this
area and named this cape for the German geo-
physicist whose apparatus was used on the expe-
dition. Not adopted: Cape Charles, Cape von
Sterneck.
Sterneck, Cape von: see Charles, Cape; Sterneck,
Cape.
STEVENSON GLACIER: channel glacier about
2 mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing
NW. from the continental ice to the E. side of Baker
Three Gl., between Peterson Ice Falls and Bran-
stetter Rocks on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about
70°08’S., 71°59’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H.
Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for Lt.
James C. Stevenson, co-pilot on USN Op. Hjp. pho-
tographic flights in this area and other coastal
areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude.
STEVENSON ISLAND: steep pinnacle rock
about 300 ft. in el., lying off Mac-Robertson Coast
about 4 mi. NNE. of Cape Simpson; in about
67°23’S., 61°14’E. Disc. on about Feb. 18, 1931 by
the BANZARE, under Mawson, who applied the
name.
STEVENS ROCK: small bare rock about 25 ft.
in el., lying off Mac-Robertson Coast about 5 mi.
E. of the small glacier tongue at the mouth of
Strahan Gl. and about 3 mi. N. of the coast; in
about 67°37’'S., 64°56’E. Disc. and named in Feb-
ruary 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson.
STEWART STRAIT: strait about 2 mi. wide
between Bird I. and the Willis Is., off the W. end
of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°10’W. The strait
was navigated by Capt. James Cook in 1775, but the
name seems to have been applied by DI personnel
in the period 1926-30.
St. Georges, Baie: see King George Bay.
292
St. George’s Bay: see King George Bay.
St. Georges Bay: see George Bay; Hound Bay.
STIGANT POINT: conspicuous point about 200
ft. in el., about 12 mi. WSW. of Round Pt., on the
N. coast of King George I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in about 61°59’S., 58°42’W. Charted and
named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery
II, Probably named for G. B. Stigant, long-time
member of the Hydrographic Department of the
Admiralty.
STILLWELL ISLAND: largest islet in the Way
Arch., situated about 1.5 mi. NE. of Garnet Pt., off
George V Coast; in about 66°55’S., 143°50’E. Disc.
in 1912 by the AAK under Mawson, and named for
Frank L. Stillwell, geologist with the expedition.
STIPPLE ROCKS: compact group of more than
twenty rocks, lying 3 mi. NW. of Millerand I. in
Marguerite Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°06’S., 67°22’W. First surveyed in 1936 by
the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949
by the FIDS. The name, applied by FIDS, is de-
scriptive of the representation on a map of the
numerous rocks in this group.
ST. LOUIS, MOUNT: mountain, about 4,200 ft.
in el., which is mainly ice covered and forms a
prominent landmark immediately E. of The Gullet,
on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°09’S.,
67°30’W. First sighted and roughly charted in
1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Surveyed in
1948 by the FIDS who named it for Peter B. St.
Louis, Canadian pilot who flew from the Argentine
Is. to Stonington I. in January and February 1950
to relieve the FIDS base.
STONEHOUSE BAY: bay, about 5 mi. wide and
indenting 4.5 mi., entered between Hunt Pt. and
Sighing Peak on the E. coast of Adelaide I.; in
67°21’S., 68°05’W. First sighted and surveyed in
1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Named for
Bernard Stonehouse, meteorologist in 1947 and
1948 and biologist in 1949 at Stonington I., and
leader of the FIDS sledge party which resurveyed
the bay in 1948.
STONE POINT: point, with a small islet lying
off it, which marks the S. side of the entrance to
Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°24’S., 56°56’°W. Named by the Br—APC for
H. W. Stone, First Mate on the Trepassey, 1946-47,
following a survey by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, in
1952.
STONINGTON ISLAND: rocky islet lying about
1 mi. N. of the E. extremity of Neny I., in the E.
part of Marguerite Bay and on the W. side of
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. This islet, 2,500
ft. from NW. to SE. and 1,000 ft. wide, is connected
by a drifted snow slope to Northeast Glacier on the
mainland. It was chosen as the site for the East
Base of the USAS, 1939-41, and named after
Stonington, Conn., home port of the sloop Hero,
in which Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer first sighted
the Antarctic continent in 1820.
STORE POINT: northernmost point of Neny I.,
lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°02’W. Surveyed in 1947 by
the FIDS, who so named it because FIDS main-
tained an emergency food store on this point.
STORER REEF: an isolated reef lying about 3
mi. SE. of Aspasia Pt. and about 1.5 mi. off the S.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 37°04’W.
Named by the Br-APC, following mapping by the
SGS, 1951-52, for Capt. Nathaniel Storer of New
Haven, Conn., who in 1801 built a small schooner
on the coast of Patagonia, sailed her to South
Georgia, and spent two seasons taking 45,000 fur
seal skins.
STOR HANAKKEN MOUNTAIN: prominent
mountain about 6,400 ft. in el., standing in the
central part of the Napier Mtns. in Enderby Land;
in about 66°33’S., 53°30’E. The mountain was
charted from aerial photographs taken in January—
February 1937 by members of a Nor. exp. under
Christensen and named “Stor Hanakken,” prob-
ably by H. E. Hansen, cartographer of the expedi-
tion. Not adopted: Great Hanakken, Stor Hanak-
ken [Norwegian].
Strachans Island: see Nelson Island.
STRAHAN GLACIER: glacier on Mac-Robertson
Coast, lying midway between Cape Daly and Cape
Fletcher; in about 67°39’S., 64°44’E. Disc. and
named by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson.
Stranded Moraines: see Strand Moraines, The.
STRAND MORAINES, THE: moraines, about 3
mi. long and reaching elevations of 100 to 150 ft.,
deposited at the edge of the piedmont ice on the
W. shore of McMurdo Sound, about 6 mi. SSE.
of New Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about 77°34’S.,
164°26’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott,
who first named this feature “‘The Eskers,” later
learning its true nature. Not adopted: Eskers,
Stranded Moraines, Strand Moraines, The Eskers,
The Stranded Moraines.
STRATHCONA, MOUNT: massive mountain
about 4,000 ft. in el., which is surmounted by a
prominent group of peaks which rise above the
continental ice aiong the W. side of middle reaches
293
of Denman Gl., standing about 12 mi. S. of Mt.
Barr Smith on Queen Mary Coast; in about
67°22’S., 98°58’E. Disc. by the AAE under Maw-
son, 1911-14, and named for Lord Strathcona,
High Commissioner for Canada in 1911 and a
patron of the expedition.
STRIPED HILL: small, ice-free hill, about 300
ft. in el., on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.,
some 7 mi. NNW. of Cape Lachman, the N. tip of
James Ross I.; in 63°40’S., 57°53’W. Charted and
named by the FIDS, 1946. The name is descrip-
tive and is derived from the stratifications on a
small cliff on the seaward side of the hill.
STROM GLACIER: steep valley glacier flowing
NE. from the N. side of Mt. Fridtjof Nansen to
the head of the Ross Ice Shelf, flanked on the NW.
by the Duncan Mtns. and on the SE. by the
mountainous ridge terminating in Mt. Betty; in
about 85°12’S., 165°15’W. The glacier derives its
name from “Strom Camp” near its foot, occupied
at various times during December 1929 by the
ByrdAE geological party under Gould. Strom
Camp was named by that party for Sverre Strom,
first mate of the exp. ship City of New York, who
remained ashore as a member of the winter party
and headed the snowmobile party which hauled
supplies in support of the two field parties.
Stromnes Bay; Stromnes Bucht: see Stromness
Bay.
STROMNESS BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, lying
about 3 mi. W. of Cumberland Bay along the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°38’W. This
bay was probably first seen in 1775 by Capt. James
Cook. Named prior to 1912, probably by whalers
who frequented its harbors. Not adopted: Sorrow-
ness Bay, Str6émnes Bucht [German], Stromnes
Bay.
STROMNESS HARBOR: central of three harbors
in the W. side of Stromness Bay, South Georgia;
in 54°09’S., 36°41’W. This harbor was shown as
Nansen Harbour on some early charts, but since
about 1920 the name Stromness Harbor has been
consistently used. Not adopted: Fridtjof Nansen
Hafen [German], Nansen Harbour.
Stuart Doyle Point: see Doyle Point.
STUART POINT: ice-covered point on the head-
land at the E. side of the entrance to Maury Bay,
on Banzare Coast; in about 66°20’S., 125°35’E. De-
lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN
for Frederick D. Stuart, captains clerk on the
sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42, who assisted Wilkes with correction of
the survey data obtained by the expedition.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
STUMP ROCK: rock in the W. portion of King
George Bay which lies close offshore about 0.8 mi.
NW. of Martello Tower, in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°05’S., 58°10’W. Charted and named during
1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
STURGE ISLAND: the largest of the Balleny
Is., about 27 mi. long and 8 mi. wide; in about
67°24’S., 164°15’E. Disc. in February 1839 by
John Balleny, who named it for T. Sturge, one
of the merchants who united with Charles En-
derby, Esq., in sending out the expedition.
STYGIAN COVE: cove lying immediately W. of
Berry Head on the E. side of Signy I., South Ork-
ney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. On its W. side steep
rock clifis rise to Robin Peak. Roughly surveyed
in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling
captain, and again in 1933 by DI personnel. Re-
surveyed and named in 1947 by the FIDS. The
name arose from the fact that this cove is so
overshadowed by the Cliffs of Robin Peak that a
sense of stygian gloom is felt.
SUCCESSION CLIFFS: a line of steep clifis,
about 1.5 mi. long, on the E. coast of Alexander I
Island. They face eastward onto George VI Sound,
to the S. of Pluto Gl., about 10 mi. N. of Fossil
Bluff; in 71°11’S., 68°16’W. This feature was prob-
ably first sighted by Lincoln Ellsworth, who pho-
tographed segments of the coast in this vicinity
on Nov. 23, 1935. The cliffs were first roughly
surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill, and were resurveyed in 1948 by the
FIDS. So named by FIDS because a geologic
succession, or depositional sequence, is revealed
by the accessible rock exposures of these cliffs.
SUDAN BEACH: small shingle beach lying about
700 yards S. of Dartmouth Pt., on the E. side of
Moraine Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°27’W.
This vicinity was roughly surveyed by the SwedAE,
1901-4, under Nordenskj6ld. The beach was
sketch surveyed and named by the FIDS in 1951.
The name is one in a group in the vicinity of Dart-
mouth Pt., derived from the chemical stains used
in preparation for histological examination of bio-
logical material collected there by FIDS.
Sudantillen See: see Scotia Sea.
Sud-Georgien: see South Georgia.
Stud-Orkney Inseln: see South Orkney Islands.
Sud-Sandwich Inseln: see South Sandwich
Islands.
Sid-Shetland Inseln; Sydshetland: see South
Shetland Islands.
294
SUESS, MOUNT: conspicuous mountain, capped
by three black peaks about 3,700 ft. in el., situated
on the S. side of Mackay Gl., in Victoria Land; in
about 77°02’S., 161°47’E. Disc. by the BrAE,
1907-9, under Shackleton, and named for Prof.
Eduard Suess, noted Austrian geologist and paleon-
tologist.
SUFFIELD POINT: conspicuous bluff about 2
mi. SW. of Collins Hbr., at the SW. end of King
George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°11’S.,
58°56’W. The name appears to have been ap-
plied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who
charted the bluff in 1935.
SUGARLOAF ISLET: the southernmost of two
islets lying about 1 mi. off the E. coast of Clarence
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°09’S.,
53°52’W. This islet was known to both the Ameri-
can and British sealers as early as 1822, and the
name Sugarloaf has been well established in inter-
national usage for over 100 years. Not adopted:
Sugarloaf Island, Zuckerhut Insel [German].
SUGARTOP, MOUNT: prominent partly snow-
covered mountain, about 7,600 ft. in el., standing
5 mi. NW. of Mt. Paget in the Allardyce Range of
South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°38’W. The name
Sugarloaf Peak has appeared on maps for this
feature for many years, but the SGS, following a
survey of South Georgia in 1951-52, reported that
the name Mount Sugartop is well established
locally for this mountain. This latter name is
approved on the basis of local usage. Not adopted:
Mount Sugar Top, Sugarloaf Peak, Sukkertoppen
[Norwegian].
Sukkertoppen; Sugarloaf Peak: see Sugartop,
Mount.
SULLIVAN, MOUNT: mountain about 6,800 ft.
in el., standing at the S. side of Bingham Gl. about
15 mi. NE. of Mt. Wakefield, inland from the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°39’S., 63°49’'W. This
feature lies in the area explored from the air by
Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928 and Lincoln Ellsworth
in 1935, but it was first charted by the BGLE in
1936-37. It was photographed from the air in
1940 by the USAS and in 1947 by the RARE under
Ronne. Named by Ronne for Col. H. R. Sullivan
of the Office of Research and Development of the
then USAAF, which furnished equipment for the
expedition.
Sullivan Inlet: see Mill Inlet.
SULPHUR POINT: prominent bluff lying 1.5 mi.
N. of Wordie Pt. on the W. coast of Visokoi I.,
South Sandwich Is.; in 56°42’S., 27°16’W. It was
named West Bluff, because of its position, by DI
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
personnel following their survey in 1930, but that
name has been rejected because there is a West
Bluff at nearby Zavodovski Island. The name Sul-
phur Point was recommended in 1953 by the
Br-APC. The ground here is reddish in color with
patches and streaks of sulphur, and strong sul-
phurous fumes have been noted by all visitors
to this island. Not adopted: West Bluff.
SULZBERGER BAY: large bay, about 100 mi.
wide, in the NW. coast of Marie Byrd Land, lying
between the NE. shore of Edward VII Pen. and
the line defined by Guest I. and the peninsula on
which Mt. Iphigene stands; in about 77°S., 151° W.
Disc. by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd on Dec. 5, 1929
and named by him for Arthur H. Sulzberger, pub-
lisher of the New York Times and a supporter of
the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and 1933-35. Not adopted:
Arthur Sulzberger Bay, Biscoe Bay, Sulzberger
Embayment.
Sulzberger Embayment: see Sulzberger Bay.
SUMMIT PASS: a col, about 1,200 ft. in el.,
between Passes Peak and Summit Ridge, situated
about 2.5 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay and 3.5
mi. NE. of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°27’S., 57°02’W. This area was first
explored by the SwedAE, 1901-4. Summit Pass
was first charted and named by the FIDS, 1945.
It is the highest point on the sledge route between
Hope Bay and Duse Bay.
SUMMIT RIDGE: ridge about 1,300 ft. in el.,
with a steep ice slope on the N. side and a rock cliff
on the S. side, extending about 0.5 mi. E. from
Passes Peak, situated about 2.5 mi. SSE. of the head
of Hope Bay and 4 mi. NE. of Duse Bay, at the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°27’S., 57°02’W. This
area was first explored by the SwedAE, 1901-4.
Summit Ridge was first charted and named by the
FIDS, 1945. The feature takes its name from near-
by Summit Pass.
Sundholmen: see Hum Islet.
SUNSET FJORD: inlet about 1 mi. wide, in the
SW. corner of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in
54°03’S., 37°28’W. Sunset Fjord was charted in
1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American
naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. So named by
Murphy because from his anchorage in the Bay
of Isles the sun appeared to set directly behind
this feature. Not adopted: Rosita Bay.
SUNSHINE GLACIER: glacier, about 5 mi. long
and 3 mi. wide, flowing S. into Iceberg Bay on the
S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in
60°39’S., 45°30’W. It is the largest glacier on
the S. side of Coronation I. and terminates in ice
295
cliffs up to 200 ft. high. Surveyed in 1948-49 by
the FIDS, and so named by them because, when
all else was in shadow, small gaps in the clouds
above frequently allowed patches of sunshine to
appear on the surface of this glacier.
SUPPORTING PARTY MOUNTAIN: peak stand-
ing at the W. end of the Harold Byrd Mtns. which
lie between the head of Ross Ice Shelf and Leverett
Gl.; in about 85°27’S., 147°50’W. Disc. by the
ByrdAE, 1928-30, and named by the Geological
Sledging Party of that exp. in honor of the splendid
cooperative work of their Supporting Party. Not
adopted: Supporting Party Mountains.
SURF ROCK: low rock 0.5 mi. W. of the W. tip
of Neny I. and 0.2 mi. SE. of Runaway It., lying in
Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
68°12’S., 67°06’W. First roughly charted in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. It was surveyed in
1947 by the FIDS who so named it because of the
noise of the surf breaking.
SUSA POINT: low rocky point marking the sea-
ward end of a small E.—W. ridge separating two
tussock grass covered flats, lying 0.25 mi. S. of the
S. side of the entrance to King Edward Cove in
Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S.,
36°30’W. The point was roughly surveyed by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. Named by
the FIDS following their sketch survey in 1951.
The name is one of a group in the vicinity of Dis-
covery Pt., derived from the chemical fixatives used
there in biological work by the FIDS.
Svarthovden: see Falla Bluff.
Svart Oya: see Black Island.
SVART PEAK: peak with rock outcropping
about 15 mi. WNW. of Stefansson Bay, on Kemp
Coast; in about 67°15’S., 58°33’E. Mapped by
Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January—
February 1937 and so named by them because of
its black appearance.
Svend Foyn Coast: see Foyn Coast.
SVENNER ISLETS: small group of rocky islets
and rocks, marked by a large islet at its NE. end and
extending about 4 mi. to the SW., lying about 13
mi. N. of Hovde Ice Tongue, off Ingrid Christensen
Coast; in about 69°01’S., 76°35’E. Disc. in Febru-
ary 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, who
charted the two main islets in the group and ap-
plied the name Svenner, after the islands by that
name lying off Sandefjordsfjord, Norway. Not
adopted: Svenner [Norwegian], Svenner Islands.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Sverre Hassel, Mount: see Hassel, Mount.
SVIP ROCKS: group of submerged rocks re-
ported to lie about 10 mi. WNW. of Rugged I., in
the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°31’S., 61°40’W.
The name seems first to appear on the charts of
the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. It probably
derives from the Svip, a whale catcher operating in
the area at that time. Not adopted: Svip Rock.
SWANN GLACIER: broad glacier of undeter-
mined length flowing E. into Wright Inlet, to the
N. of Mt. Tricorn, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 73°53°S., 61°48’W. The glacier was disc. and
photographed from the air in December 1940 by
members of East Base of the USAS. During 1947
it was photographed from the air by members of
the RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with
the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by
Ronne for W. F. G. Swann, Dir. of the Barthol Re-
search Foundation of Franklin Inst. of Swarth-
more, Pa., a contributor to the expedition.
SWANSON MOUNTAINS: range of mountains
about 8 mi. long and about 3,000 ft. in el., lying
about 8 mi. ENE. of Mt. Rea, in the Edsel Ford
Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°58’S.,
145°00’W. Disc. on aerial flights by the ByrdAE
in 1934 and named for the Hon. Claude A. Swanson,
Sec. of the Navy, 1933-39. Not adopted: Claude
Swanson Mountains.
SWARTLEY, MOUNT: peak in the Allegheny
Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges in
Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°15’S., 143°00’W.
Disc. in aerial flights from West Base of the USAS
in 1940 and named for Prof. Stanley Swartley, of
Allegheny College, Pennsylvania.
SWEENEY MOUNTAINS: group of mountains
rising above Joerg Plateau; in about 75°45’S.,
67°40’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under
Ronne,, who named these mountains for Mrs. Ed-
ward C. Sweeney, a contributor to the expedition.
Not adopted: Catherine Sweeney Mountains.
SWELL POINT: small, narrow point, about 1.2
mi. S. of Resolution Pt., along the E. coast and
near the SE. extremity of Cook I., South Sandwich
Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°06’W. It was named by DI
personnel following their survey in 1930.
Swift Balch, Mount: see Balch, Mount.
SWINE HILL: the southernmost of two rugged,
rocky knolls, about 1,800 ft. in el., standing about
10 mi. WNW. of the summit of Mt. Bagshawe on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and overlooking Gada-
rene Lake and George VI Sound; in 71°24'S.,
67°33’W. This feature was first seen and photo-
296
eraphed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln
Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photo-
graphs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly sur-
veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and re-
surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who erected a cairn
on the summit. Named by FIDS for its association
with Gadarene Lake (q.v.) and the incident of the
Gadarene swine.
Swinford Glacier: see Berwick Glacier.
SWINFORD GLACIER: tributary glacier enter-
ing the W. side of Beardmore Gl. between Mt.
Adams and the Marshall Mtns.; in about 84°37’S.,
165°45’W. This glacier was named Berwick Gla-
cier by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, but a
subsequent cartographic error exchanging the po-
sitions of the Berwick and Swinford Glaciers on the
charts of the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, has
caused the name Swinford to become well estab-
lished for this glacier. The Berwick Glacier lies
about 10 mi. SW. of Swinford Glacier. Not
adopted: Berwick Glacier (q.V.).
S.W. Point: see South West Point.
Sydney Herbert Sound:
Sound.
see Sidney Herbert
Syd Victoria Land: see Victoria Land.
Syren Bay: see Siren Bay.
SYREZOL, CAPE: cape at the E. side of the en-
trance to Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the
South Shetland Islands; in 62°11’S., 58°17'W.
Charted and probably named by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot.
TABARIN PENINSULA: peninsula about 14 mi.
long and 10 mi. wide, lying S. of the trough be-
tween Hope Bay and Duse Bay and forming the S.
portion of the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.; in
63°30’S., 57°00’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjold. It was charted in 1946 by
the FIDS and named after Operation Tabarin, the
naval code name for the FIDS from 1943 to 1945.
TABLE ISLAND: conspicuous flat-topped island
about 2.5 mi. NW. of Cape Morris, the NW. tip of
Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S.,
59°52’W. This name, which is descriptive, dates
back to at least 1822 and is now established inter-
national usage.
Table Mountain: see Two-Step Cliffs.
TABLE NUNATAK: flat-topped, rectangular
nunatak lying about 0.5 mi. E. of Cape Agassiz, on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°30’S., 62°57’W.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
This is probably the feature first seen in 1940 by
members of the USAS and described as a snow-
covered island close EH. of Cape Agassiz. The
nunatak was again sighted by Lt. Charles J.
Adams, of the then USAAF, pilot with the RARE
on a flight in September 1947. The name is de-
scriptive.
TAIL ISLAND: circular island about 1.25 mi. in
diameter and 500 ft. in el., lying about midway be-
tween Egg I. and Eagle I. in the NE. part of Prince
Gustav Chan.; in 63°40’S., 57°37’W. Islands in
this area were first seen by a party under J. Gunnar
Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Tail Island was
charted by the FIDS in 1945, and so named by
them because of its relative position to Eagle and
Beak Islands.
TANGLEFOOT PEAK: prominent rocky peak,
about 2,200 ft. in el., standing E. of Wyatt I. and
7 mi. NNE. of Longridge Head on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 67°22’S., 67°32’W. Probably first
sighted by members of the FrAE under Charcot
who roughly charted this area in 1909. Surveyed
in 1948 by the FIDS and given this descriptive
name because the peak is associated (jointly by a
spur) with a very rugged and broken ridge which
extends SE. and S. from it.
Tannaron, Cap: see Thanaron Hill.
TAPLEY MOUNTAINS: mountain group of tri-
angular platform, extending about 30 mi. in an
E.-W. direction and marked by a base of about 18
mi. which fronts on the E. side of Robert Scott GL.,
standing between Albanus and Leverett Glaciers in
the Queen Maud Range, near the head of Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 85°40’S., 150°00’W. Disc. in De-
cember 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under
Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for the Hon.
Harold L. Tapley, of Dunedin, New Zealand, agent
for the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and
1933-35.
Tapley Plateau: (in about 76°30’S., 145°00’W.)
the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as
this feature does not conform to a plateau descrip-
tion as originally reported.
TAU ISLETS: small group of islets and rocks
which lie immediately off the NE. extremity of Eta
I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S.,
62°55’W. The name Tau, derived from the 19th
letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been
first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following
surveys of the islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942
and 1943. Not adopted: Islotes Trio [Spanish].
424589 O-57 -20
297
TAY, FIRTH OF: sound, about 12 mi. long and
averaging about 6 mi. wide, extending in a
NW.-SE. direction between the NE. side of Dundee
I. and the E. portion of Joinville I.; in 63°22’S.,
55°45’W. It merges to the NW. with Active Sound
with which it completes the separation of Dundee
and Joinville Islands. Disc. in 1892-93 by Capt.
Thomas Robertson of the Dundee whaling expedi-
tion. Named by Robertson after the Firth of Tay
of Scotland.
TAYLOR, MOUNT: large, flat-topped mountain,
about 3,200 ft. in el., having steep cliffs on the NE.
side, standing 2 mi. WSW. of the head of Hope Bay
and 2.5 mi. N. of the NE. end of Duse Bay, at the
NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 57°08’W. Disc.
by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjdld. The
mountain was charted by the FIDS, 1946, and
named for Capt. A. Taylor, commander of the FIDS
and leader of its base at Hope Bay in 1945.
TAYLOR GLACIER: glacier about 2 to 3 mi.
wide, lying E. of Hayes Peak on Mac-Robertson
Coast and flowing N. into the sea just E. of Cape
Bruce; in about 67°28’S., 60°53’E. Disc., Feb. 18,
1931, by the BANZARE under Mawson, who applied
the name.
TAYLOR GLACIER: glacier at least 35 mi. long
and varying from 2 to 10 mi. wide, flowing from
the plateau of Victoria Land into the W. end of
Taylor Glacier Dry Valley, north of the Kukri
Hills; in about 77°43’S., 162°14’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and at that time
thought to be the upper part of Ferrar Glacier.
The Western Journey Party of the BrAE, 1910-13,
under Scott, determined that the upper and lower
portions of what was then known as Ferrar Glacier
are apposed, i.e., joined in Siamese-twin fashion,
north of Knobhead. With this discovery Scott
named the upper portion for Griffith Taylor, ge-
ologist of the exp. and leader of the Western
Journey Party. Not adopted: North Fork, Upper
Ferrar Glacier (in part).
TAYLOR GLACIER DRY VALLEY: valley about
20 mi. long once occupied by the receding Taylor
Gl., lying N. of the Kukri Hills between the Taylor
Gl. and New Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about
77°40’S., 162°52’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4, and more fully explored by the
BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and the BrAE
under Scott, 1910-13. Named after the Taylor
Glacier. Not adopted: Dry Valley, New Harbour
Dry Valley.
TAYLOR ISLETS: group of rocky islets and rocks
about 4 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, lying at the W.
side of Edisto Ice Tongue and marking the W. end
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
of the Highjump Arch., off the W. end of Knox
Coast; in about 66°10’S., 100°09’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named for Richard Spence Taylor,
who served as surveyor with the USN Op. Wml.
parties which established astronomical control sta-
tions from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast in
January-February 1948.
Teale, Cape: see Teall, Cape.
TEALL, CAPE: low, rocky headland forming the
N. side of the entrance to Mulock Inlet, along the
W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°00’S.,
161°15’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott, who probably named this cape for Sir Jethro
Justinian Harris Teall, Dir. of the Geological Sur-
vey and Museum of Practical Geology, London,
1901-13. Not adopted: Cape Teale.
TEALL NUNATAK: rock outcrop at the mouth
of Reeves Gl., about 5 mi. SE. of Hansen Nunatak,
in Victoria Land; in about 74°48’S., 162°35’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. The area
was more fully explored by the BrAE, 1907-9, un-
der Shackleton, who named this feature for Sir
Jethro Justinian Harris Teall. Not adopted: Bee-
hive Nunatak.
TEAL PONDS: series of ponds in a tussock grass
covered valley about 600 yards S. of Dartmouth
Pt., on the E. side of Moraine Fjord, South Georgia;
in 54°19’S., 36°27’W. A sketch survey of this vi-
cinity was made in 1951 by the FIDS, who so named
the ponds because they are frequented by flocks
of teal.
TELEFON BAY: small bay in the NW. side of
Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°56’S., 60°40’W. The name appears on the
chart of the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and de-
rives from the Telefon, a salvaged vessel moored in
the bay in 1909 awaiting repairs.
TELEFON ROCKS: group of rocks about 1 mi.
S. of Demay Pt., at the W. side of the entrance to
Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in 62°13’S., 58°27’W. Named after the
Telefon, a vessel which grounded there in 1908.
Teil Island: see Deception Island.
Tejas Glacier: see Beaumont Glacier.
TENNANT, MOUNT: conspicuous peak about
4,300 ft. in el., situated on De Rongé I., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°42’S., 62°41’W. Disc.
by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, who photo-
graphed and charted De Rongé I. in 1898. Named
by members of H.M.S. Snipe, following an Antarctic
298
cruise in January 1948, for V. Adm. Sir William
Tennant, then Commander-in-Chief of the America
and West Indies Station.
TENNANT PEAK: peak standing about 2.5 mi.
SW. of Charles Gould Peak in the S. part of the
Rockefeller Mtns., on Edward VII Pen.; in about
78°08’S., 155°44’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, 1928-30,
and named for George W. Tennant, cook on the ex-
pedition. Not adopted: Mount Tennant.
TENNIEL, MOUNT: mountain about 5,300 ft. in
el., standing about 7 mi. WNW. of the mouth of
Clifford Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
70°20’S., 62°48’W. Disc. in 1936 by a BGLE sledge
party under Rymill. During 1947 it was photo-
graphed from the air by the RARE under Ronne,
who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from
the ground. Named by Sir Miles Clifford, Gov.
of the Falkland Islands, for his great-uncle Sir
John Tenniel, 1820-1914, noted English illustrating
artist, humorist, and political cartoonist.
TENNYSON, CAPE: cape on the N. coast of Ross
I., about 25 mi. SE. of Cape Bird; in about 77°20’S.,
168°15’E. Disc. in February 1900 by the BrAE,
1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, and named
by him for the English poet Alfred Tennyson. Not
adopted: Cape Campbell.
TENT ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, the
largest of the Dellbridge Is., lying S. of Cape Evans,
Ross I., in McMurdo Sound; in about 77°41’S.,
166°22’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under
Scott, who so named this island because of its tent-
like appearance.
TENT NUNATAK: conspicuous pyramidal nuna-
tak marking the S. limit of Whirlwind Inlet, on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°36’S., 65°21’W.
First seen and photographed from the air by the
USAS, in 1940, and described as a “distinctive tent-
shaped rock nunatak.” It was charted by the
FIDS in 1947.
Termination Barriere Eis: see Shackleton Ice
Shelf.
TERMINUS NUNATAK: conspicuous nunatak,
about 2,200 ft. in el., standing between Eureka and
Riley Glaciers and about 0.5 mi. inland from
George VI Sound, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 69°52’S., 68°20’W. This nunatak was first
photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by
Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these
photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. First surveyed in
1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in
1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because
the nunatak marks the end of the sledge route from
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the Wordie Ice Shelf, down Eureka Gl., to George
VI Sound.
TERN COVE: small cove, the entrance to which
is blocked by submerged rocks, lying immediately
SE. of Berry Head on the E. side of Signy I., South
Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. The cove con-
tains three islets, and an area near the head dries
at low water. Roughly charted in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel. Named by the FIDS, following their sur-
vey of 1947, after the colony of terns (Sterna vit-
tata) on the southernmost islet in the cove.
TERN ISLET: small, tussock grass covered islet,
lying 1 mi. S. of Albatross I. and 0.5 mi. E. of Dot
It. in the S. part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia;
in 54°03’S., 37°20’W. First charted in 1912-13 by
Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist
aboard the brig Daisy. It was surveyed in 1929-30
by DI personnel, who named it Tern Island in as-
sociation with Albatross I., Prion I. and other nat-
ural history names in the Bay of Isles given by
Murphy in 1912-13. The name Tern Islet is ap-
proved because of the small size of the feature.
Not adopted: Tern Island.
TERNYCK NEEDLE: conspicuous nunatak
standing about 2.5 mi. E. of Ullmann Range, at the
base of the small peninsula separating Admiralty
and King George Bays, on King George I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°15’W. Charted
in December 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, who
presumably applied the name.
Terrace Island: see Dunlop Island.
TERRA FIRMA ISLANDS: small group of islands
lying about 7 mi. N. of Cape Berteaux, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°42’S., 67°32’W. Disc.
and named on June 18, 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill.
Terra Firma II island: see Twig Rock.
TERRA NOVA, MOUNT: snow-covered mountain
standing between Mt. Erebus and Mt. Terror on
Ross I.; in about 77°31’S., 168°05’E. First charted
by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it
for the Terra Nova, relief ship for this exp.; also,
exp. ship for the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott.
TERRA NOVA BAY: bay, often ice free, about
55 mi. long, lying between Cape Washington and
Drygalski Ice Tongue along the E. coast of Vic-
toria Land; in about 74°45’S., 164°15’E. Disc. by
the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named by him
for the Terra Nova, one of the relief ships for this
expedition.
299
TERRAPIN HILL: rounded, reddish-colored hill,
1,600 ft. in el., standing at the S. end of The Naze,
a peninsula of northern James Ross I., close S. of
the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°58’S., 57°32’W.
This area was first explored by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskjold. Terrapin Hill was first
charted by the FIDS, 1945, who applied this de-
scriptive name.
Terre du Roi Oscar: see Oscar II Coast.
Terre Otto Nordenskjold: see Nordenskj6ld Coast.
TERROR, MOUNT: an extinct volcano, about
10,750 ft. in el., standing about 20 mi. E. of Mt.
Erebus on Ross I.; in about 77°30’S., 168°40’E.
Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named
it for his second exp. ship, the Terror.
TETHYS NUNATAKS: group of about five rock
nunataks, lying 2 mi. NE. of Stephenson Nunatak
near the SE. corner of Alexander I Island; in
72°10’S., 68°59’W. ‘These rocks were presumably
first seen by members of the USAS who sledged
through George VI Sound in 1940-41. They were
visited and surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. Named
by the FIDS for their association with nearby
Saturn Glacier; Tethys being one of the satellites
of Saturn.
Teufelsinsel: see Devil Island.
THANARON HILL: ice-covered hill, 2,900 ft. in
el., which with two lower summits forms an isolated
mountain, about 4 mi. SE. of Cape Roquemaurel,
on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°35’S.,
58°48’W. Capt. Dumont D’Urville, leader of the
Fr. exp., 1837-40, originally gave the name Than-
aron, after Lt. Charles Thanaron of the exp. ship
Zélée, toa cape in this area. A survey by the FIDS
in 1946 determined that no cape exists. The name
Thanaron, however, is retained for the ice-covered
hill in the same area. Not adopted: Cap Tannaron
[French].
THEODOLITE HILL: hill, about 2,600 ft. in el.,
with a small rock outcrop at its summit, standing
at the SE. corner of a plateau-type mountain, about
4.5 mi. W. of the NW. end of Duse Bay and about
7 mi. NW. of View Pt., near the NE. end of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°29’S., 57°35’W. Disc. by the FIDS,
1946, and so named during their survey of the
area because it served as an important theodolite
station.
THEODOR ROCK: rock approximately midway
between Annenkov I. and Pickersgill Is., off the S.
coast of South Georgia; in about 54°36’S., 37°02’W.
It was charted by DI personnel in 1930 and named
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
for Theodor Hansen, gunner on the Southern
Pride, Norwegian whale catcher used in the survey.
THETA ISLETS: several small islets and rocks
which lie close W. of Kappa I. at the W. extremity
of the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S.,
63°01’W. The islets were roughly charted by DI
personnel in 1927. The name Theta, derived from
the eighth letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to
have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart
following surveys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expe-
ditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islas
Alzogaray [Spanish].
THIL ISLET: rocky islet about 0.4 mi. long, pro-
truding above the E. flank of Baker Three Gl. about
1.5 mi. N. of the N. end of Jennings Promontory,
close off the W. end of Ingrid Christensen Coast;
in about 70°08’S., 71°49’E. Delineated in 1952 by
John H. Roscoe from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photo-
graphs taken in March 1947, and named by him for
R. B. Thil, air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photo-
graphic flights in this area and other coastal areas
between 14° and 164°, east longitude. Not adopted:
Thil Island.
THIMBLE PEAK: truncated cone, about 1,500
ft. in el., consisting of rock and ice, standing about
3 mi. SW. of the head of Hope Bay and 1.5 mi. NE.
of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in
63°28’S., 57°06’W. First charted by the FIDS,
1946. The descriptive name was proposed by the
Br-—APC in 1948.
THOMAS, CAPE: a projection of the edge of
Amery Ice Shelf in the S. part of MacKenzie Bay,
separating Douglas Bay from Thorshavn Bay, along
Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°43’S., 70°50’E.
The name was given by the BANZARE under Maw-
son, who disc. this feature during a flight over Mac-
Kenzie Bay on Feb. 10, 1931.
THOMAS, POINT: point marking the S. side of
the entrance to Ezcurra Inlet in Admiralty Bay, on
King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°08’S., 58°29’W. Point Thomas was charted by
the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by
him for a member of the expedition.
THOMAS ISLAND: largest island in Highjump
Arch, about 5 mi. long and from 1 to 3 mi. wide,
lying near the center of the main cluster of islands
off the N. flank of the Bunger Hills, off Knox Coast;
in 66°07’S., 100°57’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US—ACAN for Lt. (j.g.) Randolph G.
Thomas, USN hydrographic officer with USN Op.
Wml., 1947-48, who served as surveyor with the
astronomical control parties.
300
Thomas Mountains: see Lowell Thomas Moun-
tains.
Thomas Watson Escarpment: see Watson Es-
carpment.
THOMPSON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,600 ft.
in el., standing NW. of Lehrke Inlet and surmount-
ing the central part of the base of Eielson Pen.,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°40’S., 62°20’W.
Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who
named this feature for Andrew A. Thompson, geo-
physicist with the expedition.
THOMPSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 4
mi. wide and 8 mi. long, flowing N. from the con-
tinental ice overlying Banzare Coast to the S. side
of Paulding Bay; about 15 mi. SW. of Clark Pt.;
in about 66°45’S., 123°20’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for Egber Thompson,
midshipman on the sloop of war Peacock of the
USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
Thompson Point: see Thomson Point.
THOMSON HEAD: steep, rocky headland, about
3,000 ft. in el., standing at the E. side of Bourgeois
Fjord, Palmer Pen., about 4 mi. E. of the SE. ex-
tremity of Blaiklock I.; in 67°35’S., 66°45’W. First
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re-
surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS and named for
William H. Thomson, FIDS air pilot at Stonington
I. in 1947.
THOMSON POINT: point on the E. side of Pirie
Pen., about 1.7 mi. SE. of Cape Mabel, on the N.
coast of Laurie I. in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°42’S., 44°38°W. Charted by the ScotNAE,
1902-4, under Bruce, and named for J. A. (later
Sir Arthur) Thomson, Regius Prof. of Natural His-
tory, Univ. of Aberdeen, at Aberdeen, Scotland.
Not adopted: Thompson Point.
Thorfin Islands: see Colbeck Archipelago.
THORGAUT ISLANDS: large group of small
islands, up to 100 ft. in el., lying off Mac-Robert-
son Coast to the N. and NW. of Cape Daly and
the Robinson Group. The islands lie in an area
about 13 mi. long in an E.-W. direction, from about
63°25’E. to 63°58’E., and in about 67°27’S. Disc.
by the crew of the Norwegian .whale catcher
Thorgaut in late January 1931. The positions of
the islands in the group were plotted by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken on
Jan. 31, 1937 by a Nor. exp. under Christensen.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
THORNE, MOUNT: peak in the Will Hays Mtns.
of the Queen Maud Range, standing about 7 mi.
NW. of Mt. Goodale on the W. side of Robert Scott
Gl. and rising to about 6,000 ft. in el.; in about
85°56’S., 155°45’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, 1928-30,
on the South Polar Flight of Nov. 28-29, and
mapped by the Southern Sledging Party of the
ByrdAE, 1933-35. Named for George A. Thorne,
topographer and dog driver of the Geological Party
of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, which visited this region.
Thorne Glacier: see Robert Scott Glacier.
Thorold Nielsen, Mount; Thorold Nilsen, Mount;
Thorvold Nilsen, Mount: see Thorvald Nilsen
Mountains.
THORSHAVN BAY: an indentation about 15 mi.
wide in the edge of Amery Ice Shelf between Cape
Thomas and Cape Child in the S. part of Mac-
Kenzie Bay, along Lars Christensen Coast; in
about 68°45’S., 71°15’E. The Norwegian whale
catcher Torlyn reached Thorshavn Bay on Feb.
13, 1931. Named for the Norwegian motor tanker
Thorshavn from which Lars Christensen person-
ally directed exploration in 1930-31, 1932-33,
1933-34, and 1936-37.
THORVALD NILSEN MOUNTAINS: mountain
massif of the Queen Maud Range, about 13,000
ft. in el., standing between the upper reaches of
Robert Scott and Amundsen Glaciers; in about
86°20’S., 158°00’W. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under
Amundsen, in 1911, and named for Capt. Thorvald
Nilsen, commander of the exp. ship Fram. Not
adopted: Mount Nilsen, Mount Thorold Nielson,
Mount Thorold Nilsen, Mount Thorvold Nilsen.
THREE BROTHERS: three mountain peaks
aligned in a N.-S. direction, about 4 mi. W. of the
head of Cumberland West Bay, in the central part
of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°48’W. Probably
named by DI personnel following their surveys of
South Georgia in 1926-30. Not adopted: The
Three Brothers.
THREE BROTHERS HILL: conspicuous hill
about 700 ft. in el., which is the remnant neck of
an extinct volcano, situated at the S. side of Potter
Cove, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°14’S., 58°40’W. The name seems to have
been first used by the Scottish geologist David
Ferguson in a 1921 report based upon his in-
vestigations of King George I. in 1913-14, but may
reflect an earlier naming by whalers. The name
may be suggestive of the summit, which resembles
the knuckles of a firmly clenched fist.
301
THREE LAKES VALLEY: low valley, contain-
ing three freshwater lakes, extending from the
vicinity of Elephant Flats northward to Stygian
Cove on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S.,
45°37’W. Surveyed and given this descriptive
name by the FIDS in 1947.
THREE LITTLE PIGS: three islets about 0.5
mi. NW. of Winter I., in the Argentine Is., off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°17’W.
Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under
Rymill. Not adopted: The Three Little Pigs.
Three Point Island: see Jomfruene Island.
THREE SISTERS POINT: point marked by three
conspicuous boulders about 20 ft. in el., situated
on the S. side of King George I. about 1 mi. NE.
of Penguin I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°03’S., 57°54’W. The point was charted and
named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery II.
Three Slice Island: see Three Slice Nunatak.
THREE SLICE NUNATAK: conspicuous
nunatak about 1,650 ft. in el., marking the low,
ice-covered NE. extremity of Joerg Pen., on the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°02’S., 64°57’W. This
distinctive landmark, in the form of a serrated
NE.-SW. ridge about 2 mi. long, is snow covered,
except for the three almost vertical rock faces
which suggest its name. Disc. by members of East
Base of the USAS who surveyed this area on land
and from the air in 1940. Not adopted: Three
Slice Island.
THULE ISLAND: westernmost island of South-
ern Thule, a group of three small islands at the
S. end of the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°27’'S.,
27°19’W. Southern Thule was disc. and named by
Capt. James Cook in 1775. The westernmost island
was named Thule Island by Adm. Thaddeus Bell-
ingshausen, who made an accurate sketch of these
islands in 1820. Not adopted: Morrel Island, Mor-
rell Island, Southern Thule Island.
THULE ISLETS: group of islets and rocks lying
about 0.25 mi. SW. of Balin Pt. in the NW. part
of Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in
60°42’S., 45°37’W. The name Thule Rocks was
used as early as 1916, and appears to refer at least
in part to this group. The Thule, one of the first
floating factories to flense whales at sea, belonged
to the Thule Whaling Co. of Oslo. It operated
in the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13 and 1913-14
and anchored on the E. side of Signy I. during
January 1913. The altered form of the name was
recommended by the Br—APC following a survey
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Thule Rock,
Thule Rocks.
Thule Rocks: see Thule Islets.
THULLA POINT: ice-free point lying 1 mi. NE.
of Jebsen Pt. on the W. coast of Signy I., South
Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°40’W. Roughly sur-
veyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and surveyed in
1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC in 1954
after the Norwegian steamship Thulla, which
searched for suitable anchorages for whale factory
ships in the South Orkney Is. in 1911-12.
Thumb, The: see Little Thumb.
THUMB ISLET: islet lying between Winter I.
and the NW. end of Galindez I., in the Argentine
Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S.,
64°16’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE
under Rymill.
THUNDER GLACIER: a through glacier, about
4 mi. long, which extends in an EW. direction
across Wiencke I. between the Sierra Du Fief and
the Wall Range, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S.,
63°24’W. The glacier has probably been known
since the discovery of Wiencke I. by the BelgAE
in 1898. It was charted in 1944 by the FIDS, and
so named by them because a survey party was
nearly overwhelmed there by an avalanche.
Thurston, Mount: see Hjalmar Johansen, Mount.
THURSTON PENINSULA: the peninsula be-
tween Bellingshausen Sea and Amundsen Sea, at
the NE. end of Marie Byrd Land, which terminated
in about 71°50’S., 100°50’W. Disc. in flights from
the Bear by members of the USAS in February
1940. Named by Byrd for W. Harris Thurston, of
New York City, textile manufacturer and designer
of the windproof “Byrd cloth,” and contributor to
the expedition. Not adopted: Eights Peninsula.
THWAITES ICE TONGUE: extensive ice tongue
about 30 mi. wide, which is believed to be fed by
a large continental glacier descending to the Wal-
green Coast close SE. of Mt. Murphy, extending
N. into Amundsen Sea for about 60 mi.; in about
74°15/S., 105°30’W. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946.
Named by the US—ACAN for Fredrik T. Thwaites,
glacial geologist, geomorphologist and professor
emeritus at the Univ. of Wisconsin.
TIBER ROCKS: group of about five rocks lying
near the head of Rymill Bay, close W. of the mouth
of Romulus Gl. and 2.5 mi. NW. of the highest
summit of Black Thumb Mtn., off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 68°23’S., 66°59’W. First seen
302
and roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under
Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and
so named by them because of the association of
these rocks with nearby Romulus and Remus Gla-
ciers.
TICKLE CHANNEL: narrow channel in the S.
part of Hanusse Bay, about 0.5 mi. wide and 2 mi.
long, extending northward from The Gullet and
separating Hansen I. from the E. extremity of
Adelaide I.; in 67°08’S., 67°40’W. First seen from
the air by the BGLE on a flight in February 1936.
Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS,
who applied this descriptive name. In Newfound-
land and Labrador a tickle is a narrow water
passage as between two islands.
TIJUCA POINT: prominent rock point forming
the NW. side of the entrance to Hound Bay, on the
N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°20’S., 36°13’W.
The name Penguin Point was probably applied to
this feature by DI personnel who made a running
survey of this coast in 1930. Following the SGS,
1951-52, it was recommended that this name be
altered to avoid confusing this feature with the
many other “Penguin” names. The name Tijuca
Point was given by the Br—APC after the Tijuca,
a three-masted barque built at Nantes in 1866.
From 1908 onwards, she was used as a transport
vessel by the Compania Argentina de Pesca, ply-
ing between Buenos Aires and the whaling station
at Grytviken. She foundered in 1946. Not
adopted: Penguin Point.
Tillberg Islands: see Tillberg Nunataks.
TILLBERG NUNATAKS: group of four promi-
nent nunataks, the highest about 2,800 ft. in el.,
lying at the S. side of Drygalski Gl., on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 64°48’S., 60°51’W.
Dr. Otto Nordenskj6ld gave the name Tillberg
Islands, after Judge Knut Tillberg, contributor to
the SwedAE, 1901-4, to what appeared to be a
group of islands at the mouth of Drygalski Gla-
cier. These islands were determined to be
nunataks protruding through the ice by the FIDS
in 1947. Not adopted: Tillberg Islands.
TILLETT ISLANDS: group of small islands, the
largest of which rises about 230 ft. above the sea,
lying about 5 mi. NNE. of Cape Wilkins, off Kemp
Coast; in about 67°11’S., 59°25’E. Disc. in Febru-
ary 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby.
Not adopted: Tillet Isles, Tilletoéyane [Norwegian].
Tilletoyane: see Tillett Islands.
TILLEY, MOUNT: flat-topped, ice-capped moun-
tain, about 6,300 ft. in el., standing 7 mi. S. of
Mt. Tyrrell and 3 mi. inland from George VI Sound
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
in the E. part of Alexander I Island: Despite its
height, it is best described as a foothill of the
Douglas Range, from which it is separated by
Toynbee Gl.; in 69°45’S., 69°29’W. First photo-
graphed from the air in 1936 by the BGLE. Sur-
veyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS and
named by them for Cecil E. Tilley, prof. of miner-
alogy and petrology at Cambridge University.
TILLEY NUNATAK: bold outcrop about 300 ft.
in el., lying at the edge of the ice cliffs on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 67°24’S., 60°07’E. Disc.
in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby and named by them for Prof. C. E. Tilley,
who studied the rock specimens brought back by
the expedition. Not adopted: Nabbodden [Nor-
wegian].
TILT ROCK: isolated rock mass, about 2,200 ft.
in el., which rises 2 mi. inland from the ice shelf
of George VI Sound and stands 2 mi. NE. of Block
Mtn., with which it forms the S. limit of Sedgwick
Gl., on the E. side of Alexander I Island; in
70°27’S., 68°44’°W. First photographed from the
air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and later
mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg.
Roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1948-49
by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because of the
tilted appearance of the whole mass. Not adopted:
Pyramid Point.
TINSEL DOME: small, ice-covered hill about
2,300 ft. in el., standing between Aureole Hills and
the mouth of West Russell Gl., on the NW. side of
Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°43’S., 58°52’W. Charted
in 1948 by the FIDS who gave this descriptive
name.
TIOGA HILL: rounded summit, about 950 ft. in
el., standing at the W. side of the head of McLeod
Gl. on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S.,
45°39’W. The hill is the highest point on the
island. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by
the Br—APC in 1954 after the Tioga, owned by
Messrs. Christensen and Co., Corral, Chile, which
was one of the first floating factories to flense
whales at sea. It was wrecked at nearby Port
Jebsen during a gale on Feb. 4, 1913.
TITAN NUNATAK: broad, rather fliat-topped
nunatak, about 1,500 ft. in el., standing between
Coal Nunatak and Tethys Nunataks in the SE.
corner of Alexander I Island; in 72°09’S., 68°43’W.
This nunatak was first photographed from the air
by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. Observ-
ing this feature from the NW. (the direction from
which Ellsworth photographed this nunatak) only
the summit protrudes above the coastal ice, and
303
it was uncertain at that time whether this was
a peak on Alexander I Island or an island in George
VI Sound. Its true nature was determined by the
FIDS who visited and surveyed this nunatak in
1949. Named by FIDS for its association with
nearby Saturn Glacier; Titan being one of the
satellites of Saturn.
TOE, THE: point marking the S. side of the en-
trance to Harmony Cove on the W. side of Nelson
I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S., 59°10’W.
This descriptive name seems first to appear on a
chart based upon a 1935 survey by DI personnel
on the Discovery II.
TOFE GLACIER: glacier immediately S. of
Sandefjord Bay, descending between high, rocky
cliffs to the W. coast of Peter I Island; in about
68°51’S., 90°44’W. Disc. in 1927 by a Nor. exp.
in the Odd I and named for Eyvind Tofte, leader
of the expedition.
Tokroningen: see Kroner Lake.
TOLLEY, MOUNT: peak in the Allegheny Mtns.,
in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie
Byrd Land; in about 77°17’S., 143°00’W. Disc.
on aerial flights from the West Base of the USAS,
in 1940, and named for Pres. William Pearson
Tolley, of Allegheny College, Pennsylvania. Not
adopted: Mount Tolly.
Tolly, Mount: see Tolley, Mount.
TOMBSTONE HILL: hill about 170 ft. in el.
on the N. side of the harbor of Port Lockroy,
Wiencke I., about 0.25 mi. E. of Damoy Pt., in the
Palmer Arch; in 64°49’S., 63°32’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who surveyed Port
Lockroy. Named by the FIDS in 1944. The name
is descriptive of some rocks on the top of the hill.
TONKIN ISLAND: snow-capped island about 4
mi. long in a N.-S. direction, marked by ice-free
peaks at each end, about 11 mi. SE. of Cape
Choyce, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°49’S.,
65°03’W. The island was disc. and photographed
from the air by the USAS in 1940. It was charted
by the FIDS in 1947, and named for J. E. Tonkin,
member of the FIDS at the Stonington Island
base. Not adopted: Lewis Island.
Tonsberg Fiord: see Ténsberg Fjord.
TONSBERG FJORD: small recession in the W.
end of the bight between Penguin Pt. and Con-
ception Pt., on the N. coast of Coronation I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°32’S., 45°55’W. Charted
in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling
captain. Probably named for the Tgnsberg
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Hvalfangeri, of Tgnsberg, Norway, a company
which operated a permanent whaling base in the
South Orkney Is. in the period 1920-30. Not
adopted: Tonsberg Fiord, Toénsberg Fjord.
TONSBERG POINT: eastern extremity of a low
rock peninsula projecting into Stromness Bay,
separating Stromness Hbr. on the N. from Husvik
Hbr. on the S., in South Georgia; in 54°10’S.,
36°39’'W. The name was in use as early as 1912
and derives from the Ténsberg Hvalfangeri, Nor-
wegian whaling company with works at Husvik
Harbor. Not adopted: Tonsberg Point, Tonsberg
Point.
TOPHET BASTION: conspicuous, ice-capped
rock wall, nearly 1 mi. long, with an apron of
talus, lying 1 mi. E. of Saunders Pt. on the S. coast
of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S.,
45°18’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel. The name, which is Biblical, was applied
by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49.
TORLYN MOUNTAIN: rugged, bare ridge about
1,400 ft. in el., of which Murray Monolith is the
detached front, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about
67°47’S., 66°55’E. In January and February 1931
several Norwegian whale catchers explored along
this coast, making sketches of the land from their
vessels. They named the mountain for their whale
catcher, the Torlyn, from whose deck it was seen
in February, although the coast was sketched as
early as January 19 from the Bouvet II, another
Norwegian whaler. The BANZARE under Maw-
son, made an airplane flight over this area in Janu-
ary 1930, returning for further exploration in Feb-
ruary 1931. They named the mountain Murray
Monolith, which name is hereby retained for the
detached front. Not adopted: Mount Torlyn, Mur-
ray Monolith.
TORNQUIST BAY: small bay between Cape Con-
stance and Antarctic Pt. along the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°04’S., 36°59°W. The bay was
charted in 1929-30 by DI personnel. They called
it Windy Cove, because of strong gusts of wind
experienced there, but the name Windy Hole was
subsequently used on charts for the bay. Follow-
ing a survey of South Georgia in 1951-52, the SGS
reported that this feature is known to the whalers
and sealers as Tornquist Bay, because the wreck
of the Ernesto Tornquist, transport vessel which
ran aground on Cape Constance on Oct. 16, 1950,
liés near its W. shore. This latter name is ap-
proved on the basis of local usage; the name Windy
Hole is never used locally. The name Windy Cove,
originally applied to this bay, has been transferred
in local usage to the bay immediately SE. of Ant-
arctic Pt. and it has since become established there.
Not adopted: Windy Cove (q.v.), Windy Hole.
304
TORTULA COVE: cove close S. of Mai Pt., on
the E. side of Maiviken in Cumberland Bay, South
Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°30’W. Roughly surveyed
by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. Re-
surveyed in 1929 by DI personnel, and in 1951 by
the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC after the moss
(genus Tortula) which grows in this vicinity.
Totten Coast: (in vicinity of 120°E.) the decision
of May 1947 has been VACATED, since the config-
uration of the coast does not permit delimitation
of a segment of adequate length, and the name
Totten has been applied to a large glacier in this
approximate position. See: Totten Glacier.
TOTTEN GLACIER: massive glacier about 20
mi. wide and 45 mi. long, flowing NE. from the
continental ice overlying the upland behind the E.
end of Budd Coast, and terminating in a prominent
tongue at the W. end of Sabrina Coast; in about
66°25’S., 116°45’E. Totten Gl. resembles a valley
glacier near its terminus, but in its upper reaches
it closely resembles a channel glacier, a faster-
moving ice stream in the continental icecap flow-
ing at essentially the same level as the icecap
itself. Delineated from aerial photographs taken
by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—
ACAN for George M. Totten, passed midshipman
on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under
Wilkes, 1838-42, who assisted Wilkes with correc-
tion of the survey data obtained by the expedition.
TOTTEN GLACIER TONGUE: prominent glacier
tongue about 22 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, extend-
ing N. from Totten Gl., along Sabrina Coast; in
about 66°10’S., 116°45’E. Delineated from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and
named by the US-ACAN for George M. Totten.
Totten High Land: see Sabrina Coast.
TOURING CLUB, MOUNT: snow-capped peak
about 4,000 ft. in el., standing at the SW. side of Mt.
Peary and about 3.5 mi. E. of Waddington Bay, on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°17’S., 63°53’W.
Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot and
named by him, probably for the Touring Club of
France.
TOW BAY: small bay about 0.2 mi. S. of Vulcan
Pt. on the W. side of Candlemas I., in the South
Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S., 26°42’W. Charted and
named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
TOWER, THE: mountain about, 1,300 ft. in el.,
which is snow covered except at the summit, sur-
mounting Demay Pt. at the W. side of the entrance
to Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South
Shetland Is.; in 62°12’S:, 58°30’W. Charted and
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
given this descriptive name by the FrAE, 1908-10,
under Charcot. Not adopted: La Tour [French].
TOWER HILL: sharp conical summit about 3,700
ft. in el., near the center of Trinity I., which is sepa-
rated from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. by Orléans
Chan.; in 63°46’S., 60°39’W. The origin of the
name is not known, but it may be associated with
the voyage in 1824-25 of the British sealer
Sprightly under Capt. Edward Hughes.
TOWER ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long, lying
NE. of Trinity I., about 11 mi. off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 63°33’S., 59°51’W. Named on Jan.
30, 1820 by a Br. exp. under Bransfield. Not
adopted: Pendleton Island.
TOWER PEAK: peak, about 2,800 ft. in el., whose
rock exposure stands out clearly from an evenly
contoured ice field, standing about 9 mi. SW. of
Sjogren Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
64°22’S., 59°08’W. First charted and given this
descriptive name by the FIDS, 1945.
TOYNBEE GLACIER: glacier in NE. Alexander
I Island, about 20 mi. long and 5 mi. wide, lying
between the mountains of the Douglas Range on
the W. and Mt. Tyrrell and Mt. Tilley on the E. and
flowing N. from Mt. Stephenson to George VI
Sound; in 69°35’S., 69°35’W. First photographed
from the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill.
Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS,
and named for Patrick A. Toynbee, FIDS air pilot
at Stonington I. in 1948 and 1949.
TRACY GLACIER: channel glacier about 7 mi.
wide and 8 mi. long, marked by prominent ice falls
along its E. flank, flowing NNW. from the conti-
nental ice to the Knox Coast, about 8 mi. SW. of
Cape Elliott, in about 66°02’S., 102°08’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Lt.
Lloyd W. Tracy, USN, pilot with USN Op. Wml.,
1947-48, who assisted in operations which resulted
in the establishment of astronomical control sta-
tions from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast.
TRAFFIC CIRCLE, THE: an ice-filled depression
at an elevation of 2,800 ft. centered in about
68°37’S., 66°00’W. on Palmer Pen., between Mar-
guerite Bay and Mobiloil Inlet. From this depres-
sion five glacier-filled troughs radiate like the
spokes of a wheel. One connects on the N. with
Neny Trough. Another is filled by Lammers Gl.
and trends W. to an ice-covered upland in 66°40’W.
which also nourishes the west-flowing glacier filling
Windy Valley. A third trends SW. to the S. end
of the ice-covered upland in 66°40’W. which nour-
ishes the southwest-flowing glacier along the E.
side of Sickle Mtn. The fourth, filled by Weyer-
305
haeuser Gl., trends SSW. to the N. flank of Bing-
ham Gl. The fifth, filled by the outflow from
Weyerhaeuser and Lammers Glaciers and the gla-
cier filling Neny Trough, broadens as it descends
E. to the head of Mobiloil Inlet. Disc. in 1940 by
members of the East Base of USAS who used this
system of troughs in traveling across the upland,
hence its name.
Trail Bay: see Trail Inlet.
TRAIL INLET: ice-filled inlet which recedes SW.
about 15 mi. between Three Slice Nunatak and
Cape Freeman, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 68°05’S., 65°20’W. The inlet was sighted by Sir
Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928. The
width of Palmer Pen. is reduced to 20 mi. between
the head of Trail Inlet on the east and Neny Fjord
on the west. So named by the US-SCAN because
it formed a natural route of travel for flights and
sledge trips from the East Base of the USAS,
1939-41, to the E. coast of Palmer Peninsula. Not
adopted: Trail Bay.
TRANSITION GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast
of Alexander I Island, about 8 mi. long and 2 mi.
wide, which flows E. to George VI Sound along
the N. side of Block Mtn. and Tilt Rock; in 70°26’S.,
68°49’°W. This glacier was first photographed
from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth,
and was mapped from these photographs by W. L.
G. Joerg. Surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and so
named by them because this glacier marks the
transition between igneous rocks to the north and
sedimentary rocks to the south.
TRAVERSE ISLANDS: group of three islands,
consisting of Zavodovski, Leskov, and Visokoi Is-
lands, at the N. end of the South Sandwich Is.;
centering in 56°36’S., 27°43’W. The group was
disc. in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen,
who named them for Baron de Traversey, Russian
naval minister who aided in the organization of
the exp. The present spelling omitting the “y”’ is
due to the variation in the form of Russian family
names resulting from the type of Western Euro-
pean transliteration used by the bearers of a given
name and is now well established in international
usage.
TRAVERSE MOUNTAINS: group of almost ice-
free mountains, about 4,100 ft. in el., standing at
the S. side of Eureka GI., about 6 mi. inland from
George VI Sound, on the W. side of Palmer Pen.;
in 69°51’S., 68°02’W. These mountains were first
photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by
Lincoln Ellsworth, and were mapped from these
photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. First surveyed in
1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
1948 by the FIDS. The name was first used by
BGLE: sledging parties because these mountains
are an important landmark in the overland trav-
erse from the Wordie Ice Shelf, down Eureka Gl.,
to George VI Sound.
TRENCH GLACIER: deeply entrenched glacier
on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 6 mi.
long and 2 mi. wide, which flows eastward into
George VI Sound immediately S. of Mt. Athelstan,
in 70°12’S., 69°11’W. The mouth of this glacier
was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23,
1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and it was mapped from
these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. Trench
Glacier was surveyed in 1948 and 1949 by the
FIDS, who applied this descriptive name.
TREPASSEY ISLETS: two small rocky islets 0.6
mi. SE. of Stonington I. in Neny Bay, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 66°59’W. The
islets were presumably first sighted in 1936 by the
BGLE, and were roughly charted by them and by
the USAS, 1939-41. They were surveyed in 1947
by the FIDS and named for the M.V. Trepassey,
ship used by the FIDS in establishing a base on
Stonington I. in 1946.
TRETHEWRY POINT: rocky promontory about
400 ft. in el., projecting about 1 mi. N. into the sea
along Mac-Robertson Coast, about 5 mi. E. of Wil-
liam Scoresby Bay; in about 67°24’S., 59°51’E.
Disc. and named in February 1936 by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby. Not adopted: Hamre-
hovden [Norwegian].
TRIANGLE POINT: triangular headland form-
ing the outer NW. side of the entrance to Yankee
Hbr. on Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.;
62°31’S., 59°52’W. Charted by DI personnel on
the Discovery II in 1935 and given this descriptive
name.
TRICORN, MOUNT: distinctive massif whose
vertical faces rise to about 4,000 ft. in el., and sur-
round a snow-covered interior which is lower ex-
cept for a 5,300 ft. peak in the NW. portion, stand-
ing at the head of Wright Inlet on the E. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 73°58’S., 61°45’W. Disc. by mem-
bers of the USAS in a flight from East Base on
Dec. 30, 1940, and named for its resemblance to a
gigantic tri-cornered hat.
Tricorn Inlet, Mount: see Wright Inlet.
TRIGONIA ISLET: islet immediately off the S.
tip of Beer I., lying about 9 mi. W. of Ferin Head,
off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°01'S.,
65°44’‘W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934—
37, Rymiill.
Trillingnutane: see Trilling Peaks.
TRILLING PEAKS: a series of three N.-S.
trending ‘peaks, the highest about 4,400 ft. in el.,
standing in the S. part of the Masson Range of
the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in
about 67°58’S., 62°47’E. Mapped by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a
Nor. exp. under Christensen in January 1937.
The name is descriptive, meaning “the triplet
peaks.” Not adopted: Trillingnutane [Norwegian].
Trinité, Ile de la: see Trinity Island.
TRINITY ISLAND: island about 15 mi. long and
13 mi. wide, which is separated from the W. coast
of Palmer Pen. by Orléans Chan.; in 63°45’S.,
60°40’W. Named by Dr. Otto Nordenskjéld, leader
of the SwedAE, 1901-4, in commemoration of Ed-
ward Bransfield’s Trinity Land of 1820, which is
now thought to be this island. Not adopted: Ie
de la Trinité [French].
TRINITY ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. NE. of the
NE. end of Main I., in the Willis Is. at South
Georgia; in 54°00’S., 38°13’W. Charted and
named by DI personnel in the period 1926-30. Not
adopted: Trinity Island.
Trinity Peninsula: see Louis Philippe Peninsula;
Palmer Peninsula.
Trio, Islotes: see Tau Islets.
TRIPLE ISLETS: three small rocky islets, lying
in a closely-spaced chain close E. of the tip of
Zélée Glacier Tongue, about 0.4 mi. SSE. of Double
Its., off Adélie Coast; in about 66°46’S., 141°12’E.
Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-
47. Charted and named by the FrAE under Lio-
tard, 1949-51.
TRIPLETS, THE: a three-pointed peak at the
SE. side of Coppermine Cove, near the NW. end of
Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°23’S.,
59°45’W. The name appears to have been applied
by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted
the peak in 1935.
Tripode, Islote: see Tripod Islet.
TRIPOD ISLET: small islet which lies close S.
of the W. extremity of Eta I. and marks the N.
side of the western entrance to Andersen Harbor
in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S.,
62°57’W. The name was probably given by DI
personnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927.
The islet was surveyed by Argentine expeditions in
1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Islote Tripode
[Spanish].
306
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
TRIPP, MOUNT: mountain about 7,880 ft. in el.,
standing in the Queen Alexandra Range about
midway between Shackleton Inlet and Beardmore
Gl., on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
83°09’S., 166°25’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton who named this feature for
Leonard Tripp, of New Zealand, who was of as-
sistance to this exp. and to Shackleton’s ship-
wrecked exp. of 1914-16.
TRIPP BAY: bay about 5 mi. long and wide,
formed by a recession in the coastal piedmont at
the foot of Albrecht Penck and Fry Glaciers, along
the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°398’S.,
162°50’E. This bay was first charted by the BrAE,
under Shackleton. The name Tripp Bay appears
to have been first used by the BrAE under Scott,
1910-13, and derives from Tripp Island, which lies
within the bay.
TRIPP ISLAND: glaciated island in the center
of Tripp Bay, lying about 2 mi. from the shore on
either side, off the coast of Victoria Land; in about
76°38’S., 162°37’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, un-
der Shackleton, and named by him for Leonard
Tripp.
TRISTAN ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about
0.7 mi. W. of Yseult It. and about 0.3 mi. NNW. of
the W. point on Cape Jules, off Adélie Coast; in
66°44’S., 140°54’E. Photographed from the air by
the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, and so named be-
cause of its twin relationship with Yseult It.
Tristan is the popular spelling of Tristram, leg-
endary hero incorporated into Arthurian legend
and later popularized by Wagner’s opera “Tristan
und Isolde.” Not adopted: Rocher Noir [French].
TRITON POINT: rocky point forming the E.
end of the high ridge separating Venus and Nep-
tune Glaciers, on the E. coast of Alexander I Is-
land; in 71°42’S., 68°12’W. The coast in this
vicinity was first explored from the air and partially
photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23,
1935, and was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. The point was surveyed in
1949 by the FIDS, and was named by them for its
association with Neptune Glacier; Triton being a
satellite of Neptune.
TRITOPPEN PEAK: a triple-summit peak about
4,400 ft. in el., standing S.-of Mt. Hordern in the
David Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-Robert-
son Coast; in about 68°00’S., 62°32’E. Mapped by
Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January
1937. The name is descriptive, meaning “the
three-peaked mountain.” Not adopted: Tritoppen
[Norwegiar].
307
TROIS PEREZ, CAPE: promontory forming the
N. side of the entrance to Beascochea Bay, on the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°26’S., 64°06’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99,
but apparently not named by them until about
1904, when in working up their scientific reports
they gave to it the name Trooz. In the meantime,
the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, left for the Ant-
arctic and in November 1904 re-sighted the same
cape, to which they gave the name Trois Pérez, for
the brothers Fernando, Leopoldo, and Manuelo
Pérez of Buenos Aires. Maurice Bongrain in his
report of 1914 acknowledges the Belgian name
Trooz for this cape. However, the US-ACAN has
retained the Charcot name of Trois Pérez because
of its long usage, and has applied the name Trooz
Glacier (q.v.) to the large glacier immediately N.
of Cape Trois Pérez. Not adopted: Cap de Trooz
[French], Cape Perez, Cape Trois Perez.
TROOZ GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide and
some 15 mi. long, flowing W. and entering Gran-
didier Chan. between Cape Tuxen and Cape Trois
Pérez, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°22’S.,
63°55’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char-
cot. Named for J. de Trooz, Belgian Minister of
the Interior and Public Instruction, who was
instrumental in procuring funds for the publica-
tion of the scientific results of the BelgAE, 1897-99,
under De Gerlache. This name was suggested by
the US-ACAN because of duplication of naming
for what is now known as Cape Trois Pérez (q.v.).
TROUBRIDGE, MOUNT: prominent mountain
peak of the Admiralty Range in northern Victoria
Land; in about 71°12’S., 168°00’E. Disc. in Janu-
ary 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it
for R. Adm. Sir Edward Thomas Troubridge, one
of the Junior Lords of the Admiralty at that
time. Not adopted: Mount Trowbridge.
TROUSERS ROCK: rock with a prominent wave-
cut arch, lying immediately W. of Cook Rock, about
0.3 mi. NE. of Vindication I. in the South Sandwich
Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°45°W. Charted in 1930 and
-given this descriptive name by DI personnel on the
Discovery II.
Trowbridge, Mount: see Troubridge, Mount.
TRUMP ISLETS: group of islets between Ex-
tension Reef and Turtle Islet, lying some 11 mi.
WNW. of Black Head, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 66°02’S., 66°05’W. Disc. and named by
the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not adopted:
Trump Islands.
Tryggve Gran, Mount: see Gran, Mount.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
TRYGGVE POINT: rocky point about 0.75 mi.
NW. of Turks Head, on the W. side of Ross I.; in
about 77°39’S., 166°42’E. First charted by the
BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, who named it for
Tryggve Gran, Norwegian ski expert with the ex-
pedition.
TRYNE CHANNEL: small channel, between the
W. side of Tryne I. and Langnes Pen., which merges
at its S. end with Tryne Inlet, lying off the Vest-
fold Hills area of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in
about 68°27’S., 78°19’E. Charted in 1952 by John
H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and so named by him
because of the close association of this feature
with Tryne Island.
TRYNE INLET: irregular-shaped inlet, whose
entrance is largely occupied by Tryne I., marked
by three divergent coves at its S. end, indenting
the N. side of Langnes Pen., along Ingrid Christen-
sen Coast; in about 68°28’S., 78°24’E. Charted by
Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars
Christensen, and named Tryne Fjord after nearby
Tryne Island (then Langnestrynet). The generic
inlet is approved as a more appropriate term on
the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in
March 1947. Not adopted: Tryne Fjord [Norwe-
gian].
TRYNE ISLAND: low, rocky island, about 2 mi.
long, marked by a prominent cove indenting its
W. side, lying in the entrance to Tryne Inlet along
the N. side of Langnes Pen., off the Vestfold Hills
area of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°27’S.,
78°23’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers
from aerial photographs taken in January 1937
by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and
named Langnestrynet, as this feature was believed
to form the NE. end of Langnes Pen. In 1952 this
extremity was determined to be an island by John
H. Roscoe, following his study of USN Op. Hip.
aerial photographs taken in March 1947, who
named it Tryne Island. Tryne is a Norwegian word
meaning snout. Not adopted: Langnestrynet
[Norwegian].
TRYNE POINT: rocky point forming the W.
side of the entrance of Stefansson Bay, on Kemp
Coast; in about 67°17’S., 59°07’E. Charted by Nor-
wegian cartographers from aerial photographs
taken by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen in
January-February 1937, and named Trynet, a Nor-
wegian word meaning “the snout.” The form
Tryne, dropping the definite article, is approved
with the added generic term point. Not adopted:
Trynet [Norwegian], Trynet Point.
308
TRYNE STRAIT: small, narrow strait, between
the E. side of Tryne I. and Langnes Pen., which
merges at its S. end with Tryne Inlet, lying off the
Vestfold Hills area of Ingrid Christensen Coast;
in about 68°27’S., 78°25’E. Charted by Norwegian
cartographers from aerial photographs taken “in
January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Chris-
tensen, and named Tryne Sund after nearby Tryne
Island (then Langnestrynet). The generic strait
is approved as a more appropriate term on the basis
of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from aerial
photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March
1947. Not adopted: Tryne Sund [Norwegian].
Tryne Sund: see Tryne Strait.
Trynet; Trynet Point: see Tryne Point.
TUCKER INLET: inlet in the coast of Victoria
Land, between Capes Wheatstone and Diniell; in
about 72°45’S., 170°00’E. Disc. in February 1841
by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Charles
T. Tucker, master of the Erebus.
TULA, CAPE: cape forming the NE. extremity
of Renaud I. in the Biscoe Is.; in 65°33’S., 65°34’W.
The Biscoe Is. were disc. in February 1832 by a
Br. exp. under John Biscoe, and were first roughly
surveyed by the FrAE, 1903-5, and FrAE, 1908-10,
both under Charcot. Renaud I. was again roughly
surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill.
The cape was named in 1954 by the Br—APC after
the Tula, one of the two vessels of Biscoe’s 1830-32
expedition.
TULA RANGE: range of mountains reaching an
el. of 6,100 ft. at its highest point, Mt. Riiser-
Larsen. This range lies NE. of Ice Bay in Enderby
Land; in about 67°S., 51°E. Disc. on Jan. 14,
1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson. Named
for John Biscoe’s brig, the Tula, from which Bis-
coe disc. Enderby Land in 1831.
TUMBLE GLACIER: glacier on the E. side of
Alexander I Island, about 7 mi. long and 3 mi.
wide, which flows E. from the cliffs of Mounts Eg-
bert, Ethelwulf and Ethelred into the W. side of
George VI Sound immediately S. of Mt. King; in
69°57’S., 69°20’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948
by the FIDS, and so named by them because of
the extremely broken condition of the lower
reaches of the glacier.
TUPINIER ISLETS: group of pyramid-shaped
islets lying off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe
Pen., about 3 mi. NW. of Cape Ducorps; in 63°22’S.,
58°16’W. Disc. by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under
D’Urville, who named them for an Official of the
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
French Navy Dept. who was instrumental in ob-
taining government support for the expedition.
The islets were charted by the FIDS, 1945-47. Not
adopted: Tupinier Islands.
TURKS HEAD: bold, rocky promontory about
520 ft. in el., situated about 5 mi. ESE. of Cape
Evans, on the W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°40’S.,
166°44’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4,
under Scott. Not adopted: Turk’s Head.
TURNABOUT ISLET: snow-capped islet lying
about 2.5 mi. NW. of Black Head, off the W. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 66°05’S., 65°45’W. Disc. and
named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. So
named because it represents the turning point of a
BGLE sledge journey in August 1935, when open
water was encountered SW. of this islet. Not
adopted: Turnabout Island.
TU ROCKS: two low rocks lying in Fildes Str.
about 3 mi. WSW. of Marian Cove, off the SW. end
of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°13’S., 58°33’W. The name appears to have been
given by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who
charted the rocks in 1935.
TURQUET POINT: point marking the N. end of
Booth I., located off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 65°03’S., 63°58’W. Probably seen by the Ger.
exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann. The point was
charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and
named by him for J. Turquet, naturalist of the
expedition. Not adopted: Point Turquet.
TURRET, THE: conspicuous rocky headland,
about 1,700 ft. in el., at the S. side of the entrance
to Gibbon Bay, on the E. coast of Coronation I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°11’W.
This headland was probably first sighted by Capt.
George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, who
disc. these islands in December 1821. It was
charted and given this descriptive name by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II in 1933.
TURRET ISLAND: small island, ice-covered ex-
cept for the NE. face, lying about 1 mi. NW. of
Flat I., off the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about
71°22’S., 169°12’E. Charted and named by the
BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott.
TURRET ROCKS: group of rocks lying close off
the S. coast of King George I. at the E. side of
King George Bay and about 0.5 mi. NW. of the
N. end of Penguin I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°04’S., 57°57’W. Charted and named during
1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
Turtle Back Island: see Turtle Rock.
309
TURTLE ISLET: islet about 3 mi. ESE. of
Trump Islets and 11 mi. WNW. of Black Head,
lying in Grandidier Chan., off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 66°04’S., 65°56’W. Disc. and
named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not
adopted: Turtle Island.
TURTLE ROCK: islet about 100 ft. in el. lying
in Erebus Bay close W. of Hut Point Pen., Ross
I.; in about 77°44’S., 166°44’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and so named because
of its low rounded appearance. Not adopted:
Turtle Back Island.
TUVE, MOUNT: mountain above 9,000 ft. in el.,
lying inland from the W. end of George Bryan
Coast; in about 74°S., 85°W. Disc. by the RARE,
1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for
Merle A. Tuve, Dir. of the Dept. of Terrestrial Mag-
netism of Carnegie Inst., Washington, D. C., who
furnished instruments for the expedition.
TUXEN, CAPE, rocky promontory forming the
S. side of the entrance to Waddington Bay, on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°16’S., 64°08’W.
Disc. and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under
De Gerlache.
TVISTEIN PILLARS: two dark pillars, the larger
being conspicuously flat topped, about 1 mi. SW.
of Cape Eva, the NW. extremity of Peter I Island;
in about 68°42’S., 90°39’W. The rocks were sighted
and described by a Nor. exp. in the Odd I. under
Tofte, which circumnavigated the island in 1927.
The name Tvistein (two stones) was applied by a
Nor. exp. in the Norvegia, under Nils Larsen, which
charted the island in 1929. Not adopted: Tvistein
[Norwegian], Tvistern.
Tvistern: see Tvistern Pillars.
TVITOPPEN PEAK: peak with twin summits
about 5,000 ft. in el., standing in the S. part of
the David Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-
Robertson Coast; in about 68°06’S., 62°27’E.
Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen-
sen in January 1937. The name is descriptive,
meaning “the twin peak.” Not adopted: Tvitoppen
[Norwegian], Tvistern.
TWIG ROCK: small rocky mass, more than 300
ft. in el., between Alamode I. and Hayrick It. in
the Terra Firma Is., off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°42’S., 67°31’W. The Terra Firma Is.
were first visited and surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Twig Rock was surveyed in
1948 by the FIDS, who named it because of the
branching nature of the dike system exposed on
its N. face. Not adopted: Terra Firma II Island.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
TWIN PEAKS: two sharply defined peaks, about
2,300 ft. in el., standing together about 1.5. mi.
N. of Mt. Taylor and 2 mi. W. of the head of Hope
Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S.,
57°07’°W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under
Nordenskj6ld. Named by the FIDS following their
survey of the area in 1946.
TWIN PINNACLES: rock about 75 ft. in el.
marked by two summits, lying 0.1 mi. NE. of Cape
Lions Rump, at the W. side of the entrance to
King George Bay, in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°07’S., 58°06’°W. Charted and named during
1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
TWINS, THE: two close-lying rocks, about 0.5
mi. S. of the S. end of Monroe I., off the W. end
of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°37’S., 46°04’°W. Charted and named in 1933
by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
TWITCHER GLACIER: glacier, about 4 mi. long,
which flows eastward to the E. coast of South
Georgia, immediately S. of Iris Bay; in 54°43’S.,
35°56’°W. The glacier was surveyed in 1951-52 by
the SGS. Named by the Br-APC after John
Montagu, fourth Earl of Sandwich, First Lord of
the Admiralty, 1771-82, who was popularly known
as “Jemmy Twitcher.”
TWITCHER ROCK: rock about 180 ft. in el.
lying in Douglas Str., about 0.7 mi. NE. of Hewison
Pt., Thule I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in
59°28’S., 27°14’W. The rock was disc. by a Russ.
exp. under Bellingshausen in 1820. It was charted
in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who
named it for John Montagu, fourth Earl of Sand-
wich, who was popularly known by the nickname
“Jemmy Twitcher.”
Two Hammock Insel: see Two Hummock Island.
TWO HUMMOCK ISLAND: ice-covered island,
about 5 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and 2 mi.
wide, conspicuous because of two rocky summits
about 2,500 ft. in el., lying some 12 mi. WSW. of
Cape Sterneck, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
64°08’S., 61°40’W. This name has appeared on
maps for over 100 years and its usage has become
established internationally. Not adopted: Ile des
deux Hummocks [French], Two Hammock Insel
[German].
Two Hummock Island: see Two Summit Island.
TWO-STEP CLIFFS: east face of an almost flat-
topped sedimentary block, about 2,200 ft. in el.,
situated immediately E. of Mars Gl. and close N.
of the mouth of Saturn GIl., on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island; in 71°54’S., 68°13’W. The
310
coast in this vicinity was first explored from the
air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ells-
worth on Nov. 23, 1935. These cliffs were first
roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1940-41 by
the USAS, who used the names Two Step Moun-
tains and Table Mountain for this feature. The
name Two-Step Clifis derives from the original
name used by USAS, and was proposed by FIDS
following surveys in 1949 as being particularly de-
scriptive of this feature. Not adopted: Table
Mountain, Two Step Mountains.
Two Step Mountains: see Two-Step Clifis.
TWO SUMMIT ISLAND: small island marked by
two prominent summits, lying at the E. side of the
entrance to Fildes Strait in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°15’S., 58°57’'W. It was named Two Hum-
mock Island by DI personnel following their survey
in 1935, but this name has been rejected because
of probable confusion with Two Hummock Island
in the N. entrance to De Gerlache Strait. The
name Two Summit Island, which is equally de-
scriptive of the feature, was recommended by the
Br-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Two Hummock
Island.
TYRRELL, MOUNT: mountain with two sum-
mits, the highest about 4,300 ft. in el., standing 3
mi. inland from the E. coast of Alexander I Island,
on the E. side and near the mouth of Toynbee Gl1.;
in 69°38’S., 69°31’W. First photographed from the
air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed
from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS and named
by them for George W. Tyrrell, British geologist at
Glasgow University.
UFS ISLAND: rocky island about 2 mi. in diam-
eter and about 900 ft. in el., lying at the E. side of
Howard Bay, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about
67°28’S., 61°09’E. Cape Simpson, the N. end of
this island, was disc. by the BANZARE under
Mawson .on about Feb. 18, 1931, but the island
nature of this feature was first recognized by Nor-
wegian cartographers, working from aerial photo-
graphs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in
January-February 1937. The word “Ufs’” means
bluff in Norwegian.
Ufsdyvdgen: see Howard Bay.
UHLIG PEAK: mountain spur about 10,500 ft.
in el., lying close NE. of Kleinschmidt Peak and
projecting N. from the edge of the polar plateau
in New Schwabenland; in about 73°10’S., 3°20’W.
Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and
named for Karl Uhlig, chief engineer of the expe-
dition.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Uksvika: see Oom Bay.
ULLMANN POINT: point marking the SW. end
of Ullmann Range, situated centrally at the head
of Martel Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°21’W.
The point was charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under
Charcot, but was named for the Ullmann Range.
Not adopted: Ullman Point.
ULLMANN RANGE: mountainous ridge about
1,200 ft. in el., situated centrally at the head of
Martel Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I.,
in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°21’W.
Ullmann Range was charted and probably named
by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Not
adopted: Ullman Range.
Ullman Point: see Ullmann Point.
Uliman Range: see Ullmann Range.
ULMER, MOUNT: sharp peak marking the high-
est elevation, estimated at 12,500 ft., of the Sen-
tinel Mtns. in Ellsworth Highland; in about
77°30’S., 86°00’W. Disc. in his trans-Antarctic
flight, Nov. 23, 1935, by Lincoln Ellsworth who
called it Mount Mary Louise Ulmer, after his wife.
Not adopted: Mount Mary Louise Ulmer, Mount
Mary Ulmer.
UNDERWOOD GLACIER: channel glacier about
15 mi. long and from 3 to 5 mi. wide, flowing NNW.
from the continental ice to the Knox Coast between
Cape Nutt and Reist Rocks; in about 66°43’S.,
108°04’E. Delineated from aerial photographs
taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by
the US—ACAN for Lt. Joseph A. Underwood, USN,
who served on the sloop of war Vincennes of the
USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
UNDINE HARBOR: small harbor along the S.
coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in
54°02’S., 37°59°W. This may be the harbor
charted as Adventure Bay by James Weddell in
1823. The recommended name Undine Harbor,
after the sealing ship Undine of the Cia. Argen-
tina de Pesca, has been consistently used for this
harbor since about 1912. Not adopted: Adventure
Bay, Adventure Harbor, North Undine Harbour.
UNDINE SOUTH HARBOR: bay, about 7 mi.
wide and indenting 2 mi., which is entered between
Ducloz Head and Leon Head along the S. coast of
South Georgia; in 54°31’S., 36°33’°W. The name
appears to have been given by the GerAE under
Filchner, 1911-12. The Undine was a sealing ship
of the Cia. Argentina de Pesca whaling station at
Grytviken.
311
Ungvar Neilsen Glacier: see Nielsen Glacier.
Upper Ferrar Glacier: see Taylor Glacier.
UPPER ISLET: narrow islet at the NE. side of
Mutton Cove, lying between Cliff and Harp Islets,
about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°42’W. Charted and
named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not
adopted: Upper Island.
URANUS GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island, about 6 mi. long and 6 mi.
wide at its mouth, flowing E. into George VI Sound
to the S. of Fossil Bluff; in 71°24’S., 68°20’W. The
coast in this vicinity was first explored and par-
tially photographed from the air by Lincoln Ells-
worth on Nov. 23, 1935. This glacier was first
roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Ry-
mill. The name, after the planet Uranus, was
given by the FIDS following their surveys in 1948
and 1949.
URUGUAY COVE: cove at the head of Jessie Bay,
E. of Mt. Ramsay, along the N. coast of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°43’W. The
cove was charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under
Bruce, and named for the Argentine corvette
Uruguay, which for many years after 1904 was
used in carrying relief parties to the Argentine
meteorological station near the cove.
Uruguay Island: see Andersson Island.
URUGUAY ISLAND: islet with a cove indenting
its W. side, lying between Irizar I. and the Corner
Is. in the NE. part of the Argentine Is., off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S., 64°14’W. Disc.
by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by
him after the Argentine corvette Uruguay, which
effected the rescue of the SwedAE in 1903. The
island was charted during 1935 by the BGLE under
Rymill.
U. S. Army Range: see Le May Range.
USEFUL ISLET: islet about 2 mi. W. of De
Rongé I., with a string of islets between, lying off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°44’S., 62°52’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache.
The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927
survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may
reflect an earlier naming by whalers.
USHER, MOUNT: mountain about 9,500 ft. in
el., standing at the S. end of the Commonwealth
Range and along the NE. side of Keltie Gl., near
its confluence with Beardmore GIl.; in about
84°55’S., 172°00’E. This mountain is charted on
the map of the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton,
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
but the name Mount Usher is there applied to the
peak situated southeastward at the head of Keltie
Gl. The recommended application of this name
follows the chart of the BrAE, 1910-13, under
Scott, and is consistently used on recent maps.
U. S. Navy Range: see Colbert Range.
UTSTIKKAR BAY: an indentation about 5 mi.
wide in Mac-Robertson Coast, at the head of which
lies Falla Bluff; in about 67°30’S., 61°30’E. Mapped
by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photo-
graphs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in
January-February 1937, and named after the
Utstikkar Glacier Tongue which borders the bay
on the west.
UTSTIKKAR GLACIER: broad glacier flowing
N. from the vicinity of Moyes Pk. and terminating
in Utstikkar Glacier Tongue on the Mac-Robertson
Coast; in about 67°33’S., 61°19’E. This glacier was
mapped, and named Utstikkarbreen (out-jutting
glacier), by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen-
sen in January-February 1937.
UTSTIKKAR GLACIER TONGUE: a glacier
tongue forming the seaward extension of Utstikkar
Gl., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°28’S.,
61°24’"E. The glacier tongue was mapped and
named by Norwegian cartographers from aerial
photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen-
sen in January-February 1937. The word Utstik-
kar refers to something jutting out and is descrip-
tive of the conspicuous projection of the glacier
tongue.
VAHSEL, CAPE: cape formed by an angle of the
ice wall along Luitpold Coast, located about 25 mi.
SW. of Dawson-Lambton Gl.; in about 76°41’S.,
30°25’W. Named by the GerAE under Filchner,
1911-12, for Capt. Richard Vahsel.
VAHSEL, CAPE: cape forming the E. tip of
South Georgia; in 54°45’S., 35°47’W. This cape
was roughly charted by Capt. James Cook in 1775.
It was remapped by the GerAE under Filchner,
1911-12, and named for Capt. Richard Vahsel,
master of the exp. ship Deutschland.
Vahsel Bay: see Duke Ernst Bay.
VAKOP, CAPE: cape between Hound Bay and
Luisa Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia; in
54°22’S., 36°10’W. Charted by the GerAE, 1911-12,
under Filchner. The name appears on a chart
based upon surveys of South Georgia in 1926-30 by
DI personnel, but may represent an earlier naming.
312
VALAVIELLE, CAPE: cape marking the N. end
of Watson Pen., on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the
South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 44°32’,W. Charted
and named by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville.
Not adopted: Cape Buchanan.
VALENTINE, CAPE: cape forming the NE. ex-
tremity of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in about 61°03’S., 54°47’W. This cape was known
to both the American sealers and the British as
early as 1822, and the name Valentine has been well
established in international usage for over 100
years.
VALETTE ISLAND: islet about 0.2 mi. long lying
at the W. side of the entrance to Mill Cove, off the
S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in
60°46’S., 44°36’W. Charted by the ScotNAE,
1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for L. H. Valette,
Argentine meteorologist at the Laurie Island sta-
tion during 1904.
Vallavielle, Cape: see Buchanan Point.
VAN BENEDEN, CAPE: cape on the W. side of
Arctowski Pen., forming the E. side of the entrance
to Andvord Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
64°46’S., 62°42’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99,
under De Gerlache, who named it for Prof. E. Van
Beneden, president of the Belgica Commission and
author of several of the zoological reports of the
expedition.
VANDERFORD GLACIER: channel glacier about
5 mi. wide and over 12 mi. long, flowing NW. from
the continental ice overlying Budd Coast to the
E. side of Vincennes Bay, close S. of the Windmill
Is.; in about 66°35’S., 110°35’E. Delineated from
aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47,
and named by the US-ACAN for Benjamin Vander-
ford, pilot of the sloop of war Vincennes of the
USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
VANG, MOUNT: isolated mountain, about 8,000
ft. in el., standing southward of George VI Sound
and Robert English Coast; in about 173°50’S.,
69°15’W. Disc. by Finn Ronne and Carl R. Eklund
of the USAS, 1939-41, during their sledge journey
through George VI Sound. It was resighted from
the air during a flight on Dec. 3, 1947 by the RARE
under Ronne. Named by Ronne for Knut Vang of
Brooklyn, N. Y., who contributed photographic ma-
terials to the RARE, 1947-48, and who was of great
assistance to RARE before its departure and on its
return.
VAN RYSWYCK POINT: rocky ridge marking
the E. extremity of Anvers I. and the S. side of the
SE. entrance to Schollaert Chan., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°34’S., 62°48’W. Disc. and named by
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Not
adopted: Van Ryswycke Point.
Vanssay, Point de: see Vanssay Point.
VANSSAY POINT: extremity of a small penin-
sula which extends N. into the W. portion of Port
Charcot, lying about 0.25 mi. NW. of Mt. Jeanne
in the N. part of Booth I., off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°01’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for Monsieur De Vassay de Blavous. Not adopted:
Point de Vanssay.
VAN VALKENBURG, MOUNT: mountain in the
S. part of the Clark Mtns., at the edge of the
Rockefeller Plateau in Marie Byrd Land; in about
77°18’S., 141°59’W. Disc. on aerial flights from
the West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for
Prof. Samuel Van Valkenburg, Dir. of the School
of Geography of Clark University.
Van Wyck Island: see Wyck Island:
VARTDAL, MOUNT: snow-capped peak about
5,300 ft. in el., surmounting and forming part of
the plateau escarpment along the E. coast of
Palmer Pen., about 4 mi. NE. of Karpf Pt. on the
N. side of Mill Inlet; in 66°51’S., 64°23’W. Charted
by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Hroar Vartdal,
Norwegian polar bibliographer. This feature was
photographed from the air during 1947 by the
RARE under Ronne.
VAUGHAN, MOUNT: peak about 8,200 ft. in el.,
standing between Mounts Goodale and Crockett
in the Will Hays Mtns., which lie between Amund-
sen and Robert Scott Glaciers in the Queen Maud
Range; in about 85°58’S., 155°10’W. Disc. by the
Geological Party of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and
named for Norman D. Vaughan, dog driver for
the geological party. Not adopted: Mount
Vaughn.
Vaughn, Mount: see Vaughan, Mount.
VAUREAL, CAPE: cape about 1 mi. WNW. of
Cape Syrezol, at the E. side of the entrance to Ad-
miralty Bay, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S.,
58°19’W. Charted and probably named by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Not adopted: Cape
Vaureal.
Veddels: see Weddell Islands.
VEDEL ISLETS: group of islets in the Danne-
brog Is., lying about 3 mi. W. of Hovgaard I., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 64°15’W.
The largest islet of this group was disc. in 1898
and given the name Vadel by the BelgAK under
424589 O -57 - 21
313
De Gerlache. Dr. Jean B. Charcot charted the
remaining islets in 1904, and again in 1909 when
he extended the name Vedel to include the entire
islet group. Not adopted: Vedel Islands, Wedel
Islands.
VEGA ISLAND: island some 17 mi. long, in an
E.-W. direction, and about 6 mi. wide, which is
the northernmost of the James Ross I. group and
lies in the W. part of Erebus and Terror Gulf; in
about 63°50’S., 57°25’W. It is separated from
James Ross I. by Sidney Herbert Sound and from
the NE. end of Palmer Pen. by Prince Gustav
Channel. The island was named by Dr. Otto
Nordenskjéld, leader of the SwedAE, 1901-4, ap-
parently for the ship Vega used by his uncle, Baron
A. E. Nordenskidld, in making the first voyage
through the Northeast Passage, 1878-79.
VEGETATION ISLAND: narrow island about 1
mi. long, lying N. of Inexpressible I. and W. of
Mt. Abbott peninsula, along the coast of Victoria
Land; in about 74°55/S., 163°39’E. Disc. by the
Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13,
and probably so named by them because of the
lichens found on this island. Not adopted: Lichen
Island.
Veier Island: see Jason Island.
VEITCH POINT: point situated centrally along
the NE. end of Monroe I., off the W. end of Corona-
tion I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S.,
46°03’W. The point was charted in 1933 by DI
personnel on the Discovery II, and named for
R. S. Veitch, sounding machine technician of the
ship.
VELAIN, MOUNT: mountain with an isolated,
black triangular summit showing through its snow
mantle, about 2,300 ft. in el., standing in the NE.
end of Adelaide I.; in about 66°49’S., 67°51’W.
This mountain may have been seen by John Bis-
coe, who disc. Adelaide I. in 1832. First charted
and named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot,
for Charles Vélain, French geologist and geog-
rapher, and professor of physical geography at
the Sorbonne. Not adopted: Mount Velain, Vélain
Peak.
VENUS GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of
Alexander I Island, about 6 mi. long and 6 mi.
wide at its mouth, flowing E. into George VI Sound
between Keystone Cliffs and Triton Pt.; in 71°38’S.,
68°12’W. The coast in this vicinity was first
explored from the air and partially photographed
by Lincoln Ellsworth, on Nov. 23, 1935, and was
roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill. This glacier was first sur-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
veyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and named by them
after the planet Venus.
VERDANT ISLET: islet about 1 mi. E. of the
NE. end of Main I., in the Willis Is. at South
Georgia; in 54°00’S.,38°13’W. Charted and named
by DI personnel in the period 1926-30. Not
adopted: Verdant Island.
VERNE, MOUNT: mountain, about 5,400 ft. in
el., standing about 6.5 mi. E. of Cape Bongrain
and dominating the S. part of Pourquoi Pas I., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°45’S., 67°29’W.
First sighted and roughly surveyed in 1909 by the
FrAE under Charcot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the
FIDS, and named by them for Jules Verne, author
of Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea.
Other features on Pourquoi Pas I. are named after
characters in this book.
VERNON HARCOURT, MOUNT: conical peak
standing N. of Mt. Northampton in the Admiralty
Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about
72°32’S., 169°10’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a
Br. exp. under Ross, who named this feature for
the Reverend W. Vernon Harcourt, one of the
founders of the British Association.
VER-SUR-MER INLET: small inlet in the E.
portion of the Bay of Whales, indenting Ross Ice
Shelf; in about 78°40’S., 164°10’W. Little Amer-
ica, the base for the ByrdAE, 1928-30 and 1933-35,
was located at the head of this inlet. Although
forward movement of the ice shelf is constantly
changing the detailed configuration of the Bay
of Whales, the general outlines remain essentially
unchanged. Named by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd
in 1929 for the village in France where he landed
at the end of his trans-Atlantic flight in 1927.
VERTE ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about
1 mi. N. of Double Its. and about 1.5 mi. ENE. of
the tip of Zélée Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast;
in about 66°44’S., 141°11’E. Photographed from
the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the
FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named be-
cause of its greenish appearance. Verte is the
French word for green.
Veslekulten: see Hayes Peak.
VESTFOLD HILLS: barren, rounded hills, from
150 to 450 ft. in el., extending about 15 mi. NNE.
from the N. side of Sgrsdal Glacier Tongue, situ-
ated on Ingrid Christensen Coast and marked by
three small peninsulas which extend W. into Prydz
Bay; in about 68°33’S., 78°15’E. Disc. and named
by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, who landed in
this area at the reported position of about 68°29’S.,
78°11’E. Vestfold is a county in Norway where
314
Sandefjord, headquarters of the whaling industry,
is located. Not adopted: Vestfold Mountains.
Vestfold Mountains: see Vestfold Hills.
Vestskotet: see West Stack.
VICARS ISLAND: island lying about 10 mi. E.
of Proclamation I. and about 5 mi. off the coast
of Enderby Land; in about 65°50’S., 54°15’E.
Disc. and named in January 1930 by the BANZARE
under Mawson.
VICTOR BAY: bay about 16 mi. wide and 7 mi.
long, indenting the W. end of Adélie Coast close
W. of Mathieu Rock, and marked by an extensive
chain of icebergs breaking away from the high
tongue of Commandant Charcot Gl. at the SE.
side of the bay; in 66°20’S., 136°30’E. Delineated
from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip.,
1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Paul-
Emile Victor, Director of the Expéditions Polaires
Francaises, who organized E.P.F. expeditions to
Greenland in 1948-51 and Antarctica in 1948-53
and 1955-56. Victor served as leader of French
expeditions to Greenland in 1934-35 and 1936-37,
and as leader of the summer parties of the E.P.F.
Greenland operations.
VICTOR HUGO ISLAND: ice-covered island,
about 1 mi. in extent, with several rocky islets
and pinnacles off its E. side, lying in the W.
approach to Bismarck Str. and some 42 mi. WSW.
of Cape Albert de Monaco, Anvers I.; in about
64°58’S., 65°46’W. Probably disc. by C. J. Even-
sen, captain of the Hertha, who explored along
the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in 1893, because an
unnamed island of similar extent and location first
appeared on the charts at that time. The island
was sighted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot,
who named it for the French poet and novelist
Victor Hugo.
VICTORIA, MOUNT: snow-covered peak about
2,500 ft. in el., situated about 2 mi. BE. of Mt.
Bulcke in southern Brabant I., in the Palmer
Arch.; in 64°30’S., 62°35’W. First seen and photo-
graphed by the BelgAEH, 1897-99, under De Ger-
lache. The name seems to have first appeared on
charts in about 1921 and has since become estab-
lished through common usage.
VICTORIA LAND: that part of Antarctica which
fronts on the W. side of the Ross Sea, extending
northward from about 78°00’S. to 70°30’S., in
about 164°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under
Ross, and named for Queen Victoria. Not adopted:
South Victoria Land, Syd Victoria Land [Nor-
wegian].
ag” NN
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
VICTORY GLACIER: gently sloping glacier,
about 8 mi. long, flowing ESE. from the N. end
of the Detroit Plateau on Louis Philippe Pen. and
opening on Prince Gustav Chan. immediately N.
of Pitt Pt.; in 63°49’S., 58°25’W. Disc. by the
FIDS, who so named it because the discovery was
made in the week following the surrender of Japan
in World War II, in August 1945.
VIEUGUE ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long
and about 1,000 ft. in el., lying in Grandidier
Chan. about 1 mi. NW. of Duchaylard I. and some
14 mi. WNW. of Cape Garcia, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 65°40’S., 65°13’W. Disc. by the
FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him
for Monsieur Vieugué, then French Chargé d’Af-
faires at Buenos Aires. Not adopted: Vieugue
Island.
VIEVILLE GLACIER: glacier lying between
Cape Vauréal and Point Hennequin and terminat-
ing in Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°08’S., 58°20’W. Viéville
Glacier was charted and named by the FrAk,
1908-10, under Charcot.
VIEW POINT: eastern tip of a promontory,
about 500 ft. in el., forming the W. side of the
entrance to Duse Bay, near the NE. end of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°33’S., 57°22’W. Disc. by a party under
J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. So
named by the FIDS following their survey of the
area in 1945, because from this promontory, good
panoramic photographs were obtained.
VIK, CAPE: cape marking the W. side of the
entrance to Marshall Bay on the S. coast of Coro-
nation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S.,
45°41’W. The cape appears to be first shown and
named on a chart made by the Norwegian whaler
Capt. Petter Sgrile in 1912-13.
VINCENNES BAY: large, V-shaped bay, about
65 mi. wide at its entrance between Cape Nutt
and Cape Folger, marked by several large, steep
glaciers near its head, lying between Knox and
Budd Coasts; in about 66°35’S., 109°00’E. Photo-
graphed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47.
The bay was entered in January 1948 by USN Op.
Wmil. icebreakers Burton Island and Edisto which
assisted in establishing astrenomical stations in
the Windmill Is. in the NE. portion of the bay.
Named by the US-ACAN for the sloop of war
Vincennes, flagship of the USEE under Wilkes,
from which a series of coastal landfalls along
Wilkes Land were disc. and plotted during Janu-
ary—February 1840. Wilkes’ chart suggests a pos-
sible coastal recession corresponding closely with
the longitudinal limits for Vincennes Bay, al-
424589 O -57 - 22
315
though pack ice conditions prevented close recon-
naissance by the USEE of the coast in this imme-
diate area. Not adopted: Kreitzer Bay.
Vincent Astor, Mount: see Astor, Mount.
Vincent Gutenko Mountains: see Gutenko Moun-
tains.
VINDICATION ISLAND: island about 1 mi. in
diameter, lying about 2 mi. SW. of Candlemas I.
in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°46’W.
Vindication Island was disc. in 1775 by Capt.
James Cook, who reported it to be one of the two
Candlemas Islands. Reports indicating that the
Candlemas Islands contained three islands or a
single island for many years overshadowed Cook’s
earlier description. A survey in 1930 by DI per-
sonnel on the Discovery II confirmed Cook’s report,
thus suggesting the name for this island.
VIOLANTE INLET: ice-filled inlet about 15 mi.
long, in an E.-W. direction, and 12 mi. wide, lying
between Cape Fanning and Cape Herdman along
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°35’S., 61°05’W.
Disc. and photographed from the air in Decem-
ber 1940 by members of the USAS and named for
Maj. (later Col.) Andre L. Violante, USA, who
designed the prefabricated buildings used by the
expedition. Particularly because of a false floor,
they proved to be the most satisfactory quarters
used by American Antarctic expeditions.
VISCA ANCHORAGE: northwestern portion of
Martel Inlet, Admiralty Bay, which is entered
between La Plaza Pt. and Ullmann Pt., on King
George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S.,
58°23’W. Visca Anchorage was charted by the
FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him
for Dr. Visca, an acquaintance in Montevideo.
Not adopted: North Anchorage.
VISOKOI ISLAND: island about 4.5 mi. long
and 3 mi. wide, capped by Mt. Hodson, a volcanic
peak about 3,000 ft..in el., in the South Sandwich
Is.; in 56°42’S., 27°12’W. Disc. in 1819 by a Russ.
exp. under Bellingshausen, who named the island
Visokoi (High), because of its conspicuous height.
Vogel Insel: see Bird Island.
Voile, Rocher: see Sail Rock.
von Sterneck, Cape: see Charles, Cape; Sterneck,
Cape.
Vorgebirge der guten Begegnung: see Well-met,
Cape.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
VORPOSTEN PEAK: isolated peak about 7,200
ft. in el., rising through the icecap at the N. edge
of the polar plateau in New Schwabenland; in
about 71°20’S., 16°00’E. Disc. by members of the
GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, who gave the
name Vorposten (the outpost) because of the
marginal location of this peak with respect to the
German area of operations. Not adopted: The
Outpost, Vorposten [German].
VORTEX ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. long and
800 ft. in el., lying in the NE. part of Prince Gustav
Chan. about 2 mi. WSW. of Corry I., close S. of
the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°44’S., 57°38’W.
Islands in this area were first seen by a party
under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4.
Vortex Islet was first charted by the FIDS in
August 1945. The FIDS survey party was forced
to lie idle there by a whirlwind snowstorm, thus
suggesting the name.
VULCAN POINT: northwestern point of Candle-
mas I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S.,
26°43’W. The point was charted in 1930 by DI
personnel on the Discovery II, and so named be-
cause a lava plateau occupies the N. portion of the
island, giving evidence of earlier volcanic activity.
WADDINGTON BAY: bay about 2 mi. long, in
a NW.-SE. direction, and 1 mi. wide, indenting
the W. coast of Palmer Pen. between Cape Ras-
mussen and Cape Tuxen: in 65°16’S., 64°05’W.
This bay is partially defined on the charts of the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. It was more
fully delineated by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char-
cot, who named it for Senator Waddington, Pres.
of the Chamber of Commerce at Rouen.
WADE, MOUNT: massive mountain about 15,000
ft. in el., standing in the Prince Olav Mtns. of the
Queen Maud Range and dominating the E. flank
of Shackleton Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf;
in about 84°40’S., 173°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE
on several flights to the Queen Maud Range in
November 1929. Named by the US-SCAN for F.
Alton Wade, geologist with the ByrdAE, 1933-35,
and senior scientist at the West Base of the USAS,
1939-41. Not adopted: Mount Bush.
Wade, Mount: see Gray, Mount.
Wade Glacier: see Shackleton Glacier.
WADE POINT: rocky mass, more than 3,000 ft.
in el., marking the W. extremity of the rock ridge
separating Millett and Bertram Glaciers on Palmer
Pen., overlooking George VI Sound; in 70°41’S.,
67°40’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill, and later named by the members
316
of the expedition for Mrs. Muriel H. Wade, who
was secretary to the BGLE.
Wadsworth, Cape: see Wadworth, Cape.
WADWORTH, CAPE: northern tip of Coulman
I., in the Ross Sea just off Victoria Land; in about
73°20’S., 169°30’E. Disc. on Jan. 17, 1841 by a
Br. exp. under Capt. James Clark Ross, who named
it in compliment to his wife’s uncle, Robert John
Coulman, Esq., of Wadworth Hall, Doncaster. Not
adopted: Cape Wadsworth.
WAESCHE, MOUNT: snow-covered summit
standing at the SW. end of the Executive Commit-
tee Range, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°30’S.,
130°00’W. Disc. by the USAS on a flight, Dec. 15,
1940, and named for V. Adm. Russell R. Waesche,
U. S. Coast Guard, member of the USAS Execu-
tive Committee.
WAGER GLACIER: small, heavily crevassed gla-
cier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, which
occupies a trench-like valley and flows E. into
George VI Sound immediately S. of Marr Bluff;
in 69°48’S., 69°23’W. Surveyed in 1948 by the
FIDS and named by them for Lawrence R. Wager,
prof. of Geology at Oxford University.
WAIFS, THE: group of islets and rocks lying in
the middle of the SE. entrance to Schollaert Chan.,
in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°33’S., 62°42’W. Disc.
by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The
name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 sur-
vey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may
reflect an earlier naming. Not adopted: Les Waifs
[French].
WAITABIT CLIFFS: a line of sedimentary cliffs
on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, which face
eastward onto George VI Sound and extend 3 mi.
N. from the mouth of Mercury Gl.; in 71°3V’S.,
68°14’°W. The coast in this vicinity was first ex-
plored from the air and partially photographed by
Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. The cliffs
were first roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE
under Rymill. They were resurveyed in 1949 by
the FIDS, at which time the rock strata were in-
dependently examined by members of the party
at two different points; an important investigation
causing the delay which gave rise to the name.
WAKEFIELD, MOUNT: prominent mountain
about 9,400 ft. in el., standing S. of the great trans-
verse depression occupied by Fleming and Bing-
ham Glaciers, on Palmer Pen.; in 69°46’S., 64°34’W.
This mountain and the prominent peaks immedi-
ately to the N. and S. were sighted from the air
by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, and are probably
synonymous with the feature which he called
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
“Eternity Range.” Mount Wakefield was charted
in 1936 by a BGLE sledge party under Rymill, and
named for Viscount Wakefield of Hythe, a contribu-
tor to the expedition.
WALCOTT, CAPE: bold, ice-covered headland
about 2,000 ft. in el., forming the E. end of Scripps
Ridge on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°05’S.,
63°18’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928 and
named by him for Frederic C. Walcott, of the Coun-
cil of the American Geographical Society.
Waldeck Island: see Waldeck-Rousseau Peak.
Waldeck-Rousseau, Cap; Waldeck Rousseu Peak:
see Waldeck-Rousseau Peak.
Waldeck Rousseau, Cape: see Evensen, Cape.
WALDECK-ROUSSEAU PEAK: conspicuous
monolith about 4 mi. ENE. of Cape Evensen, on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°09’S., 65°39’W.
The FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, observed a cape
in this area which they named for Pierre Wal-
deck-Rousseau, noted French statesman. On re-
exploring this area the FrAE under Charcot,
1908-10, applied the name to a small island off the
coast. The BGLE under Rymill charted this por-
tion of the coast by land and from the air in 1935,
correlating their work with that of Charcot.
Waldeck-Rousseau Peak as here applied is in ac-
cord with the interpretation of the BGLE. Not
adopted: Cap Waldeck-Rousseau [French], Mount
Waldeck Rousseau, Pillar Peak, Waldeck Island,
Waldeck Rousseau Peak, Waldeck Rousseu Peak.
WALDRON, CAPE: ice-covered cape, separating
Budd Coast and Sabrina Coast, which marks the N.
end of the ice-drowned escarpment bounding the
W. side of Totten Gl.; in about 66°05’S., 116°05’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN
for R. R. Waldron, purser on the sloop of war
Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
WALDRON GLACIER: channel glacier about 5
mi. wide and 10 mi. long, flowing NW. from the
continental ice to the E. side of Porpoise Bay, mid-
way between Sandford and Mose Glaciers, on Ban-
zare Coast; in about 66°20’S., 129°55’E. Delin-
eated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
Thomas W. Waldron, captain’s clerk on the brig
Porpoise of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
Walgreen Coast: see Eights Coast.
WALGREEN COAST: that portion of the coast
of Marie Byrd Land terminating on the E. in Cape
Flying Fish, in about 100°50’W., and extending S.
317
and W. from Thurston Peninsula. The W. bound-
ary is to be determined after more detailed in-
formation is available. Disc. by the USAS in a
flight from the Bear on Dec. 27, 1940. Named by
Byrd for Charles R. Walgreen, Pres. of the Wal-
green Drug Co. of Chicago, who was a supporter
of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and who assisted in
equipping the Bear for the USAS, 1939-41.
Walker, Mount: see Sible, Mount.
WALKER MOUNTAINS: range of mountains
about 3,000 ft. in el., which forms the axis of
Thurston Pen.; in about 72°05’S., 98°30’W. Disc.
by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on Feb. 27,
1940. Named by the US-SCAN for Lt. William M.
Walker, captain of the USEE ship Flying Fish
which reached within 100 mi. of the peninsula in
March 1839. Not adopted: Demas Mountains.
WALKER POINT: point marking the S. extrem-
ity of the E. end of Elephant I., in the South Shet-
land Is.; in about 61°08’S., 54°46’°W. The name
appears on Powell’s map of 1822, based upon the
joint cruise of Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, in the
sloop James Monroe, and Capt. John Powell, in the
sloop Dove, in December 1821. Probably named
for Capt. John Walker, whose assistance in the
construction of the map was acknowledged by
Powell. Not adopted: Pointe Walter [French],
Walker’s Point.
WALLACE, CAPE: cape marking the SEH. end
of Low I., the southwesternmost of the South Shet-
land Is.; in 63°21’S., 62°17’W. Though the origin
of the name Cape Wallace is unknown, it has ap-
peared on charts for over a hundred years and its
usage has been established internationally.
Wallaston, Cape; Walleston, Cape: see Wollaston,
Cape.
Wallis Island: see Willis Islands.
WALLOWS, THE: low-lying area about 0.3 mi.
S. of Berry Head in the NE. part of Signy I., South
Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. It is sheltered by
low ridges on all sides, and has a small freshwater
pond in the center. This area was roughly sur-
veyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in
1947 by the FIDS. The name, given by the FIDS,
arose because the bulk of moulting elephant seals
on Signy I. wallow here in the summer.
WALL RANGE: mountainous ridge, about 3 mi.
long in a NE._SW. direction, with steep wall-like
cliffs and jagged peaks about 3,600 ft. in el., stand-
ing about 1 mi. NE. of the Sierra Du Fief near the
center of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in
64°49’S., 63°22’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
under De Gerlache. Charted in 1944 by the FIDS,
who applied this descriptive name.
WALNUM, MOUNT: mountain mass in the cen-
tral portion of the Sgr Rondane Mtns., on Prin-
cess Ragnhild Coast; in about 72°10’S., 23°00’E.
Disc. and charted by members of a Nor. exp. under
Christensen on Feb. 6, 1937, and named for Ragn-
vald Walnum, one-time chairman of the Nor-
wegian Whaling Board, who prepared an ice chart
of Antarctica.
Walter, Pointe: see Walker Point.
Walter Kohler Range: see Kohler Range.
WALTON MOUNTAINS: mountains on the
northern coast of the western part ‘of Alexander I
Island; in about 71°15’S., 74°20’W. Disc. by the
RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named these
mountains for Lt. Col..R. C. Walton, USMC, of
the Office of Naval Research, who was instru-
mental in obtaining the loan of the exp. ship from
the Navy, and in securing Navy assistance for the
expedition.
WALTON PEAK: sharp peak, about 2,700 ft. in
el., which stands 2 mi. NNE. of Mt. Rhamnus and
is part of the irregular ridge separating Northeast
Gl. from Neny Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 68°09’S., 66°48’W. First surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1946
and 1948 by the FIDS, and named for Eric W. K.
Walton, FIDS engineer at Stonington I. in 1946
and 1947, who in 1946 rescued J. E. Tonkin of FIDS
from a crevasse in Northeast Glacier.
Wandel Island: see Booth Island.
WARD, MOUNT: mountain about 8,500 ft. in el.,
standing SE. of the Batterbee Mtns. in the S. part
of Palmer Pen.; in about 71°55’S., 66°00’W. Disc.
by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it
for W. W. Ward, editor of the Beaumont Journal,
Beaumont, Texas, and a supporter of the expe-
dition.
WARD, MOUNT: peak about 10,500 ft. in el.,
standing about 9 mi. SE. of Mt. Nimrod, in the
Dominion Range; in about 85°33’S., 169°15’E.
Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton.
WARNER, MOUNT: isolated L-shaped mountain
near the head of Arthur Davis Gl., in the Edsel Ford
Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°05’S.,
143°55’W. Disc. by members of the Edsel Ford
Mountains Geological Survey Party of the USAS,
1939-41, and named for Lawrence A. Warner, geol-
318
ogist at the USAS West Base and leader of the
survey party which visited this mountain.
WARNING GLACIER: glacier descending steeply
from the Cape Adare peninsula into the E. part of
Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about
71°31’S., 170°22’E. First charted in 1899 by the
BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, who so
named it because southerly gales at Cape Adare
were always heralded by a cloud of snow sweeping
over this glacier into Robertson Bay.
WARNOCK ISLANDS: two small offshore islands
north of the William Scoresby Arch., lying about
1 mi. S. and SW. of Dales I. and about 12 mi. N. of
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°12’S., 59°47’E.
Disc. and named in February 1936 by DI person-
nel on the William Scoresby.
Warpasgiljo Glacier: see Arthur Davis Glacier.
WARREN ISLET: islet lying in William Scoresby
Bay immediately S. of the W. end of Bertha L., off
Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°24’S., 59°38’E.
Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby in February 1936.
WASHINGTON, CAPE: bold truncated headland,
about 1,000 ft. in el., with vertical sides, forming
the tip of the long peninsula which separates Wood
Bay and Terra Nova Bay, in Victoria Land; in
about 74°42’S., 165°45’E. Disc. by a Br. exp. under
Ross, Feb. 18, 1841, and named for Captain Wash-
ington, a former secretary of the Royal Geographi-
cal Society.
Washington, Mount: see Helen Washington,
Mount.
WASHINGTON STRAIT: passage about 2 mi.
wide between Laurie I. and Powell I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°55’W. Disc. in December
1821 on the occasion of the joint cruise by Capt.
George Powell, a British sealer in the sloop James
Monroe. Supposedly, it was named for George
Washington, first President of the United States.
WATCHKEEPER, THE: low rock fringed on the
N. side by sunken rocks, lying about 2 mi. N. of
Table I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°18’S.,
59°52’W. This feature was known to early sealers
in the area as Flat Isle, but in recent years the
name The Watchkeeper has overtaken the early
name in usage. It was charted by DI personnel
on the Discovery II in 1935. Not adopted: Flat Isle.
WATERFALL BAY: small, unsheltered bay,
marked by a conspicuous waterfall at its head, lying
about 1.5 mi. SW. of Blue Whale Hbr. in the E. side
of Possession Bay, along the N. coast of South
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Georgia; in 54°05’/S., 37°03’W. Named by DI per-
sonnel who charted Possession Bay in 1930.
Waterloo Island: see King George Island.
WATERPIPE BEACH: flat shingle beach on the
W. side of Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in
60°43’S., 45°37’W. Suryeyed in 1933 by DI per-
sonnel. Resurveyed and named in 1947 by the
FIDS. An old pipe line from a pumping station
by the southernmost lake in Three Lakes Valley
leads down to this beach and was used by the
Tgnsberg Hvalfangeri for watering whaling vessels
during the period 1920-30.
WATKINS ISLAND: low, ice-covered island
about 8 mi. long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and 3 mi.
wide, lying SSW. of Nansen I. in the Biscoe Is., off
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°22’S., 67°05’W.
This island was first charted by the FrAE under
Charcot, in 1903-05 and 1908-10, but it remained
unnamed until resighted by the. BGLE under
Rymill, 1934-37, who gave the name Mikkelsen Is-
land after Ejnar Mikkelsen, Danish Arctic ex-
plorer. When applying the name, however, they
were unaware of the existence of the Mikkelsen
Islets about 75 mi. south-southwestward, named in
1908-10 by Charcot. The US-ACAN concurs in
the opinion of the Br—-APC that these two names
are so close together and so similar that the re-
tention of both of them will lead to confusion.
Since Mikkelsen Islets, to the south, were named
earlier and have had wider usage, the name Mik-
kelsen Island is withdrawn from the northern fea-
ture. The new name Watkins Island, commemo-
rating Henry G. Watkins, British Arctic explorer
and leader of the British Arctic Air Route Expedi-
tion, 1930-31, is reeommended for this island. Not
adopted: Mikkelsen Island.
WATSON BLUFF: dark bluff about 900 ft. in el.,
forming the E. end of David I., off Queen Mary
Coast; in about 66°28’S., 98°52’E. Disc. by the
AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson and named for
Andrew D. Watson, geologist with the expedition.
WATSON ESCARPMENT: a scarp beginning E.
of Robert Scott Gl., and standing at the S. side of
Albanus GI. in the Queen Maud Range; in about
86°S., 148°W. and extending E. to about 130°W.
Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934 and named for Thomas
J. Watson, American business executive, a patron
of this expedition. Not adopted: Thomas Watson
Escarpment.
WATSON PENINSULA: narrow peninsula about
1.8 mi. long terminating in Cape Valavielle, sep-
arating Macdougal and Marr Bays on the N. coast
of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S.,
44°32’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under
319
Bruce, who named it for G. L. Watson, yacht builder
and redesigner of Bruce’s exp. ship, the Scotia.
WATT BAY: bay about 12 mi. wide lying W. of
Cape De la Motte, along George V Coast; in about
67°00’S., 144°00’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE,
1911-14, under Mawson, who named the bay for
W. A. Watt, Premier of Victoria in 1911.
WAUTERS, CAPE: ice-covered cape forming the
N. end of Two Hummock I., lying in the NE. part
of DeGerlache Str., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in 64°06’S., 61°42’,W. Cape Wauters was charted
by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and
named by him for a supporter of the expedition.
Wauwermanns Islands: see Wauwermans Is-
lands.
WAUWERMANS ISLANDS: string of small, low,
snow-covered islands lying in Bismarck Str. and
extending from about 3 mi. WSW. to about 11 mi.
W. of the S. end of Wiencke I., off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°55’/S., 63°53’W. The islands
were disc. by a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann.
They were sighted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under
De Gerlache, and named for Lieutenant General
Wauwermans, Pres. of the Societe Royale de Geo-
graphie, Antwerp, and a supporter of the expedi-
tion. Not adopted: Wauwermann Island, Wauwer-
manns Islands.
WAVE PEAK: conspicuous peak, about 3,300 ft.
in el., which rises precipitously from the head of
Laws Gl., about 2 mi. inland from the S. coast of
Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S.,
45°37’W. The feature has a prominent ridge run-
ning in a southwesterly direction. To the north
and east it slopes gently to the level of Brisbane Pla-
teau. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so
named by them because of the resemblance of this
peak to a wave about to break.
WAVERLY GLACIER: narrow glacier flowing
along the SE. flank of Mt. Tricorn and entering
Wright Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
74°01’/S., 61°38’W. This glacier was photographed
from the air by members of the USAS in December
1940, and by the RARE under Ronne in 1947.
Named by Ronne after Waverly, New York, home
of the Kasco Mills. Mr. Marc Ivy and Mr. Edwin
Knapp, officers of the Kasco Mills, contributed
twenty tons of dog food to Ronne’s expedition. Not
adopted: Kasco Glacier.
WAY ARCHIPELAGO: scores of islets and rocks
skirting George V. Coast in the form of an arc at
a distance of 1 to 4 mi., lying in the vicinity of Cape
Gray, at the E. side of the entrance to Common-
wealth Bay, and extending E. to the vicinity of
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Cape-Pigeon Rocks on the W. side of Watt Bay;
centering in about 66°51’S., 143°38’E. Disc. from
the Aurora in January 1912 by the AAE under
Mawson, and later charted and photographed from
the ground by the AAE party under F. L. Stillwell.
Named by Mawson for Sir Samuel Way, Chancellor
of Adelaide University.
W. Christopherson, Mount: see Engelstad, Mount.
WEAVER, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen
Maud Range, about 10,000 ft. in el., marking the
S. portal of Robert Scott Gl. at the south polar pla-
teau; in about 86°57’S., 153°00’W. Disc. by the
ByrdAE, 1933-35. Named for Charles E. Weaver,
Prof. of Paleontology at the Univ. of Washington.
WEBB, CAPE: cape separating Ainsworth Bay
and Doolette Bay, on the George V Coast; in about
67°50’S., 146°51’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE,
1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for E. N.
Webb, chief magnetician of the Main Base Party
of the expedition.
WEBB ISLAND: rocky island about 1 mi. long,
lying in Laubeuf Fjord about 2 mi. S. of the
entrance to Stonehouse Bay, Adelaide I.; in
67°27’S., 67°57’W. Disc. by the FrAE tinder Char-
cot, 1908-10, and named by him for Capt. (later
Adm. Sir) Richard C. Webb, RN, commanding
officer of an English cruiser in Argentine waters
at that time. Not adopted: Webb Islet.
WEBSTER KNOB: prominent rock outcrop,
about 8,000 ft. in el., which lies on the NE.
shoulder of Mt. Fridtjof Nansen, in the Queen
Maud Range; in about 85°21’S., 166°10’W. Disc.
and visited in November 1929 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Laurence Gould and named
by Byrd for Mrs. Laurence J. Webster, contributor
to the expedition.
WEBSTER PEAKS: group of four rocky peaks
about 3,000 ft. in el., standing about 3 mi. W. of
Whitecloud Cove, the S. head of Charcot Bay, on
the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°53’S.,
59°37 W. Charted by the FIDS in 1948, and
named for W. H. B. Webster, medical officer and
naturalist on the Chanticleer, which approached
Tower and Trinity Islands off this coast in 1829.
Weddell, Cape: see Weddell Point.
WEDDELL GLACIER: glacier flowing in a N.
direction to the S. side of Royal Bay, about 4 mi.
SE. of Ross Gl., on the N. coast of South Georgia;
in 54°35’S., 36°00’W. ‘The glacier was charted by
the Ger. exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, and named
for James Weddell, Master, RN, who as a British
sealing captain visited South Georgia in 1823.
320
WEDDELL ISLANDS: two islands fringed by
rocks, lying about 2 mi. S. of Saddle I. and some
6 mi. E. of Cape Faraday, Powell I., in the South
Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 44°51’W. These islands
were probably first sighted on the occasion of a
joint cruise by Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer and
Capt. George Powell in December 1821. The name
first appears on James Weddell’s chart, made fol-
lowing his voyage to the South Orkney Is. in 1823.
Not adopted: Veddels [Norwegian], Weddell Island.
WEDDELL POINT: low tussock grass covered
point forming the E. side of the entrance to Schlie-
per Bay, on the S. coast and near the W. end of
South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°51’W. The name
“Cape Weddell” was given by David Ferguson,
Scottish geologist, during his visit to South Georgia
in 1911-12, after James Weddell, Master, RN, who
visited South Georgia in 1823. The term point
is a more suitable descriptive term for this feature
than cape. Not adopted: Cape Weddell.
WEDDELL SEA: great ice-filled sea which in-
dents Antarctica between Palmer Pen. and Coats
Land; centering in about 73°S., 45°W. This sea
was disc. in 1823 by James Weddell, Master, RN,
who named it George IV Sea. The present name,
honoring the discoverer, was proposed by Dr. Karl
Fricker in 1900, and it has been universally
accepted. Not adopted: George IV Sea.
Weddell Shelf Ice: see Filchner Shelf Ice.
Wedel Islands: see Vedel Islets.
WEDEL-JARLSBERG, MOUNT: mountain ris-
ing to about 11,500 ft. in el., standing about 3 mi.
SSW. of Mt. Ruth Gade, between Isaiah Bowman
and Cooper Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range;
in about 85°42’S., 164°20’W. Disc. in December
1911 on the journey to the South Pole by the Nor.
exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Alice
Wedel-Jarlsberg, wife of the Norwegian diplomat
and one of the last members of the Norwegian
nobility. Not adopted: Mount Alice Wedel-Jarls-
berg.
WEDNESDAY ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi.
long, which is the easternmost of the Wauwermans
Is., lying about 3 mi. WSW. of Cape Errera,
Wiencke I., at the SW. end of the Palmer Arch.;
in 64°56’S., 63°45’W. The Wauwermans Is. were
disc. by the Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74,
and were later roughly charted by the BelgAE
under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and the FrAE under
Charcot, 1903-5. Wednesday Island was charted
by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and so
named because Rymill’s exp. first sighted the
island on a Wednesday.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
WEIR GLACIER: glacier, about 6 mi. long,
flowing N. into the SE. corner of Barilari Bay, on
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°01’S., 64°42’W.
First sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the
FrAE under Charcot. It was surveyed in 1935-36
by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for
William D. Weir, 1st Viscount Weir of Eastwood
and his son, the Hon. James K. Weir, who con-
tributed toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37.
Weisse Insel: see White Island.
WELCH ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long with
a prominent pinnacle rock about 400 ft. in el.,
lying about 20 mi. W. of Cape Daly and about
2 mi. off the shore of Mac-Robertson Coast at the
E. side of Holme Bay; in about 67°34’S., 62°57’E.
Disc. by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson.
B. F. Welch was the ship’s second engineer on this
expedition.
WELCHNESS: gravel spit forming the W. ex-
tremity of Dundee I., located off the NE. end of
Palmer Pen.; in 63°29’S., 56°14’W. The feature
was probably first sighted by the Dundee whaling
exp., 1892-93, and is described in the report of
Dr. C. W. Donald who sailed on the Active.
WELCOME ISLETS: group of rocky islets lying
about 4 mi. WNW. of Cape Buller, off the N. coast
of South Georgia; in 53°58’S., 37°29’W. These
islets were disc. by Capt. James Cook in 1775.
The name dates back to at least 1912 and is
now well established in international usage. Not
adopted: Welcome Islands.
Welhelmina Bay: see Wilhelmina Bay.
WELL-MET, CAPE: dark, conspicuous headland
near the center of the N. side of Vega I., close S.
of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°47’S., 57°19’W.
Cape Well-met was disc. and named by the
SwedAE, 1901-4, and commemorates the long
delayed union at this point of a relief party under
J. Gunnar Andersson and the winter party under
Dr. Otto Nordenskjold after twenty months of
enforced separation. Not adopted: Cape Well-
Met, Motesudden [Swedish], Vorgebirge der guten
Begegnung [German].
WELLS RIDGE: rocky ridge about 2.5 mi. long
rising to an estimated 2,000 ft. in el., lying a few
miles N. of the Swanson Mtns. on the N. side of
Arthur Davis Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in
Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°57’S., 144°50’W.
Disc. in aerial flights made from the West Base of
the USAS in 1940 and named for Loran Wells,
photographer and observer of the Edsel Ford
321
Mountains Geological Survey Party which visited
this mountain in November—December 1940.
Wensley Beacon: see Wensleydale Beacon.
WENSLEYDALE BEACON: hill about 325 ft. in
el., situated about 1.5 mi. SSW. of Telefon Bay,
on the W. side of Port Foster, Deception I., in the
South Shetland Is.; in 62°57’S., 60°42’W. The
hill was charted by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under
Foster. Named by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN,
following his survey of the island in 1948-49, after
Wensleydale in Yorkshire, England. Not adopted:
Wensley Beacon.
WEST BALCH GLACIER: glacier, about 10 mi.
long and 3 mi. wide, lying S. of West Gould Gl.
on Palmer Pen. and flowing WNW. into Marin
Darbel Bay; in 66°42’S., 65°25’W. This glacier
together with East Balch Gl1., to the E., fill a trans-
verse depression across Palmer Pen. Partially sur-
veyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS and named by them,
like its counterpart, for Edwin Swift Balch, Ameri-
can Antarctic historian.
West Barrier: see West Ice Shelf.
WEST BAY: small bay on the S. coast and
near the W. end of Heard I., indenting the base
of Laurens Pen. about 0.5 mi. W. of Atlas Cove;
in 53°02’S., 73°21’E. The name was applied by
American sealers at Heard I. in the period follow-
ing their initiation of sealing there in 1855. So
named because of its position. The name appears
on a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which
visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and
utilized the names then in use by the sealers.
West Bay: see Cumberland West Bay.
WEST BLUFF: conspicuous bluff marking the
W. extremity of Zavodovski I., in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 56°20’S., 27°38’W. West Bluff was
charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II.
West Bluff: see Sulphur Point.
West Cumberland Bay: see Cumberland West
Bay.
WEST GOULD GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi.
long and 6 mi. wide, lying immediately S. of Bruce
Plateau on Palmer Pen. and flowing W. into Marin
Darbel Bay; in 66°34’S., 65°15°W. This glacier
together with East Gould Gl., to the E., fill a trans-
verse depression across Palmer Pen. Partially
surveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS and named by
them, like its counterpart, for Lt. Cdr. Rupert T.
Gould, British polar historian and cartographer.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
WEST ICE SHELF: an ice shelf of undetermined
extent, projecting northward from the coast to
approximately the 66th parallel, and bordering
Wilhelm II Coast from about 88°30’E. for an un-
determined distance westward. Disc. and named
by the GerAE, 1901-3, under Drygalski. Not
adopted: West Barrier, West Shelf Ice.
West Melchior Archipelago: see West Melchior
Islands.
WEST MELCHIOR ISLANDS: a group of small
ice-covered islands and rocks which lie W. of The
Sound in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in
64°19’S., 63°00’W. The islands E. of The Sound
are called East Melchior Islands. The name was
probably given by DI personnel who roughly sur-
veyed these islands in 1927. The islands were sur-
veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and
1948. Not adopted: West Melchior Archipelago.
WESTMINSTER, MOUNT: peak about 11,500 ft.
in el. standing at the W. side of Mt. Kinsey be-
tween Keltie Gl. and Mill Gl. and overlooking the
E. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 85°00’S.,
170°20’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9,
under Shackleton, probably after Westminster, a
borough in the central part of London containing
the Houses of Parliament and other civic buildings.
WEST RUSSELL GLACIER: glacier, about 11
mi. long and 4 mi. wide, which lies immediately
N. of Detroit Plateau and flows from Mt. Canicula
westward into Bone Cove on the W. side of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°40’S., 50°50’W. This glacier
together with East Russell Glacier, which flows
eastward into Prince Gustav Channel on the E.
side of Louis Philippe Pen., form a through glacier
across the N. part of Palmer Pen. It was first
surveyed in 1946 by the FIDS. Named by the
Br-APC for V. I. Russell, surveyor and leader of
the FIDS base at Hope Bay in 1946.
West Shelf Ice: see West Ice Shelf.
WEST SKERRY: small group of islets and rocks,
forming the W. part of Skrap Skerries, about 2.5
mi. ESE. of Barff Pt., off the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°20’.W. The name appears
on a chart based upon a survey of this area by
DI personnel in the period 1926-30, but it may
reflect an earlier naming by whalers. Not adopted:
West Skrapskjar.
West Skrapskjar: see West Skerry.
WEST STACK: a rock outcrop, about 450 ft. in
el., on the W. side of an ice-covered promontory on
Kemp Coast that lies about 25 mi. SE of the en-
trance of Edward VIII Bay; in about 67°04’S.,
322
58°07’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby, and probably so named by
them because of its distinctive appearance. Not
adopted: Vestskotet [Norwegian].
Westye Egeberg Glacier: see Egeberg Glacier.
WETMORE GLACIER: large glacier flowing in
a SSE. direction and paralleling in its lower reaches
the W. side of Irvine Gl. The two glaciers merge
northward of Mt. Austin before entering the head
of Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.;
in about 74°38’S., 63°35’W. Disc. by the RARE,
1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for
Dr. Alexander Wetmore, Sec. of the Smithsonian
Inst., who assisted Ronne in laying out the scien-
tific research program of the expedition. Not
adopted: Alexander Wetmore Glacier.
Wetterwand: see Smoky Wall.
WEYERHAEUSER GLACIER: large glacier flow-
ing in a NE. direction and merging with several
other large glaciers close W. of Mobiloil Inlet, on
the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 68°45’S.,
66°00’W. This glacier lies in the area first ex-
plored from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928
and Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, but it was first
clearly delineated in aerial photographs taken by
the USAS in 1940. The glacier was resighted in
1947 by the RARE under Ronne, who named it for
F. K. Weyerhaeuser of the Weyerhaeuser Lumber
Co., which contributed lumber and insulating ma-
terial to the expedition.
WEYPRECHT MOUNTAINS: mountain group
about 9,500 ft. in el., standing immediately W. of
the N. edge of the polar plateau in New Schwaben-
land; centering in about 71°55’S., 13°30’E. Disc.
by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named
for Karl Weyprecht, Austrian polar explorer who
in company with Julius Payer discovered Franz
Josef Land in 1873, and initiator of the first Inter-
national Polar Year expedition in 1882-83.
Whaleback: see Marston, Mount.
WHALEBACK ISLET: low, rounded rocky islet
lying about 2 mi. SSW. of Blake Islet and close
SW. of Bone Cove, off the NW. coast of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°40’S., 59°00’W. Charted in
1948 by members of the FIDS who gave this descrip-
tive name.
WHALE BAY: small bay along the S. coast of
Coronation I., about 2 mi. NW. of the SE. end of
the island, in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S.,
45°11’W. The bay was charted and named on a
map based upon a running survey of the South
Orkney Is. in 1912-13 by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, a
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Norwegian whaler.
[Norwegian].
Not adopted: Hvalbugten
WHALE ROCK: rock lying about 4 mi. S. of
Signy I. and some 4 mi. E. of Cachalot Rock, in
the South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 45°40’W. Whale
Rock appears to be first charted and named on a
map based upon a survey of the South Orkney
Is. in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II.
WHALERS BAY: small bay entered between
Fildes Pt. and Penfold Pt. at the E. side of Port
Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.;
in 62°59’S., 60°34’W. The bay was so named by
the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot because of its
use at that time by whalers. Not adopted: Anse
des Baleiniers [French].
WHALES, BAY OF: natural harbor indenting
Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°35’S., 164°20’W. The
configuration of the bay is continually changing.
It served as a base for Amundsen’s successful dash
to the South Pole, 1911, the Byrd Antarctic Ex-
peditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35, and for the West
Base of the USAS, 1939-41. So named by the
BrAE under Shackleton, Jan. 24, 1908, because of
the large number of whales found there. Not
adopted: Hval Bukta [Norwegian].
WHALE SKERRIES: small group of islets and
rocks in Lewthwaite Strait, South Orkney Is., ly-
ing close W. of Cape Disappointment, Powell I.;
in 60°42’S., 45°07’W. First surveyed and named
“Hvalskjaer” by Petter Sgrile in 1912-13. The
name was later corrected to the plural form,
“Hvalskjaerene” (Whale Skerries), by Sgrille. The
English form of the name was recommended by
the Br—-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Hvalskjaer
[Norwegian], Hvalskjaerene [Norwegian].
WHARTON, MOUNT: mountain about 8,850 ft.
in el., standing about 12 mi. SW. of Mt. Field and
about 30 mi. WSW. of Cape Douglas, on the W.
side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°06’S., 157°30’E.
Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who
named this mountain for Sir William Wharton,
Hydrographer to the Navy, 1884-1904.
Whatahope Bay: see Windy Cove.
WHEATSTONE, CAPE: steep rogky bluff capped
by a dome of ice, marking-the N: side of the en-
trance to Tucker Inlet, in Victoria Land; in about
72°42’S., 170°48’E. Disc., Jan. 15, 1941, by a Br.
exp. under Ross, who named it for Sir Charles
Wheatstone, English physicist and inventor.
WHEELER, CAPE: abrupt rock scarp about 1,500
ft. in el., marking the S. end of the ice-covered ridge
which forms the N. side of the entrance to Wright
323
Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°58’S.,
61°05’W. The cape was photographed from the
air in 1940 by the USAS, and in 1947 by the RARE
under Ronne. Named by Ronne for John N.
Wheeler, Pres. of the North American Newspaper
Alliance and a contributor to the expedition. Not
adopted: Cape John Wheeler.
WHETTER NUNATAK: conspicuous rock out-
crop protruding through the continental ice over-
lying George V Coast, standing about 8 mi. NE. of
Cape Denison along the E. side of Commonwealth
Bay; in about 66°57’S., 142°58’E. Disc. by the
AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named it for
Dr. Leslie H. Whetter, surgeon with the expedi-
tion.
WHEWELL, MOUNT: prominent peak standing
NE. of Mt. Sabine in the Admiralty Range, in north-
ern Victoria Land; in about 71°54’S., 169°35’E.
Disc. in January 1841 by Br. exp. under Ross, who
named this mountain for the Reverend Dr. William
Whewell, Master of Trinity College, Cambridge.
WHIRLWIND GLACIERS: four prominent con-
verging glaciers flowing into the W. side of Whirl-
wind Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
67°24’S., 65°32’W. The glaciers were disc. by Sir
Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928 and
so named because their relative position was sug-
gestive of the radial cylinders of his Wright Whirl-
wind engine. The Whirlwind Glaciers, comprising
the Flint, Demorest, Matthes, and Chamberlin
Glaciers, were photographed from the air by the
USAS in 1940, and charted by the FIDS in 1948.
WHIRLWIND INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 7
mi. long in an E.—W. direction, and about 12 mi.
wide at its entrance between Cape Northrop and
a small cape close W. of Tent Nunatak, along the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°30’S., 65°25’W. Sir
Hubert Wilkins disc. the inlet on his flight of Dec.
20, 1928. Wilkins reported four large glaciers
flowing into the inlet, which he named Whirlwind
Glaciers because their relative position was sug-
gestive of the radial cylinders of his Wright Whirl-
wind engine. The inlet was photographed from
the air by the USAS in 1940, and charted by the
FIDS in 1947.
WHISNANT NUNATAK: small coastal nunatak
protruding above the terminus of Rogers Gl., mid-
way between McKaskle Hills and Maris Nunatak
on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°59’S.,
72°26’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe
from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in
March 1947, and named by him for J. R. Whisnant,
air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights
in this area and other coastal areas between 14°
and 164°, east longitude.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
WHISTLING BAY: an open bay, about 4 mi.
wide and indenting 2.5 mi., between Longridge
Head and Cape Saens Pena, along the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 67°30’S., 67°35’W. First roughly
surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re-
surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so named by
them because of the curious and unidentified
whistling sounds heard there at the time of the
survey.
WHITE, MOUNT: peak, probably 10,000 ft. in
el., standing E. of Mt. Iveagh and Beardmore Gl.
between the Keltie and Mill Glaciers; in about
85°08’S., 172°00’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE,
1907-9, under Shackleton.
WHITECLOUD COVE: cove about 2 mi. wide,
situated immediately W. of Almond Pt. at the head
of Charcot Bay, along the NW. side of Louis Phil-
ippe Pen.; in 63°52’S., 59°28’W. Charted and
named in 1948 by the FIDS. The name is descrip-
tive of prevailing cloud conditions in the vicinity
during the survey.
White Cross Mountain: see Guernsey, Mount.
WHITE ISLAND: island about 10 mi. long and
about 2,300 ft. in el., protruding through Ross Ice
Shelf close S. of Ross I. and about 3 mi. E. of Black
I.; in about 78°10’S., 167°20’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, who so named it because of
its mantle of snow. Not adopted: Hvit Gen [Nor-
wegian], Weisse Insel [German].
WHITESIDE, MOUNT: low, conical peak about
620 ft. in el. on Fold I., about 0.5 mi. W. of Green
Pt. off Kemp Coast; in about 67°20’S., 59°32’E.
Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby in February 1936.
WHITESIDE POINT: wedge-shaped point
covered by ice, about 1,100 ft. in el., marking the
S. side of the entrance to Evans Inlet, on the E.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 61°35’W. Evans
Inlet was first sighted from the air by Sir Hubert
Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928. The point was charted
during 1947 by the FIDS and given this descriptive
name by the Br—APC in 1950.
WHITSON, CAPE: cape at the S. end of the pen-
insula separating Methuen and Aitken Coves, on
the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.;
in 60°46’S., 44°32’W. Charted by the ScotNAE,
1902-4, under Bruce, and named for T. B. (later
Sir Thomas) Whitson, treasurer of the expedition.
WHITTEN PEAK: pyramidal peak, about 1,500
ft. in el., forming the NE. end of Blade Ridge at the
W. side of the head of Hope Bay, on the NE. end
of the Palmer Pen.; in 63°25’S., 57°04’W. Disc. by
324
the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Named
by the FIDS for R. Whitten, first mate of the ship
Eagle, which participated in FIDS operations in
194445.
WHITTLE GLACIER: channel glacier about 4
mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing NE. from the con-
tinental ice which drains into the head of Col-
vocoresses Bay, and terminating in a small tongue
about 6 mi. NW. of Williamson Glacier Tongue,
on Budd Coast; in about 66°00’S., 114°40’E. De-
lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN
for Dr. J. S. Whittle, asst. surgeon on the sloop
of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes,
1838-42.
WHITTLE GLACIER TONGUE: small glacier
tongue about 4 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, extending
NE. from Whittle Gl. into Colvocoresses Bay, which
is generally ice filled, along Budd Coast; in about
65°55’S., 114°45’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named
by the US—ACAN for Dr. J. S. Whittle.
WIDER@E, MOUNT: mountain mass, about 5,000
ft. in el. or more, standing in the W. portion of the
Sgr Rondane Mtns. near the W. edge of Princess
Ragnhild Coast; in about 72°15’S., 22°00’E. Disc.
and charted on Feb. 6, 1937 by members of a Nor.
exp. under Christensen and named for Viggo
Widerge, airplane pilot of the expedition. Not
adopted: Wider6e Fjell [Norwegian].
Wider6e Fjell: see Widerge, Mount.
WIEDENMANN GLACIER: glacier lying N. of the
Moltke Nunatak and descending W. from the in-
terior heights of Luitpold Coast to merge with the
Filchner Ice Shelf; in about 78°05’S., 36°00’W.
Disc. by the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner, who
named this feature for Baron von Wiedenmann,
supporter of the expedition.
WIENCKE ISLAND: the southernmost of the
major islands of the Palmer Arch., lying between
Anvers I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
64°50’S., 63°25’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99,
under De Gerlache and named for Auguste-Karl
Wiencke, a seaman who lost his life on the ex-
pedition.
WIENER PEAKS: group of nunataks rising on
the S. side of Crevasse Valley Gl. and representing
a portion of a submerged ridge which separates the
main glacier from a southern tributary, in the Edsel
Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°45’S.,
144°23’W. Disc. by members of the USAS, 1939-41,
on flights over this area and named for Murray
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
A. Wiener, auroral observer of the West Base of this
expedition.
WILBUR, MOUNT: flat-topped, irregular mass
rising to about 9,000 ft. in el., standing about 4
mi. E. of Mt. Weaver, at the head of Robert Scott
Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°58’S.,
151°45’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE
geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named
by Byrd for the Hon. Curtiss D. Wilbur, Sec. of the
Navy from 1925 to 1929.
WILCOX, MOUNT: mountain with a sharp,
rocky, triangular peak, about 4,600 ft. in el., sur-
mounting the SE. corner of Square Bay, 9 mi. E. of
Camp Pt., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
67°58’S., 66°55’W. The mountain was apparently
first seen and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE
under Charcot. It was first surveyed in 1936 by the
BGLE under Rymill, and was photographed from
the air in 1940 by the USAS. The name, proposed
by Col. Lawrence Martin, is for Phineas Wilcox,
mate on the Hero, in which Capt. Nathaniel B.
Palmer explored the Antarctic mainland S. of
Deception I. in 1820.
WILD, CAPE: prominent cape lying about 30 mi.
E. of Ninnis Gl. along George V Coast; in about
68°20’S., 149°10’E. This is probably the cape
viewed from the Vincennes on Jan. 19, 1840 from
a great distance, as a result of “looming” or a
superior mirage, by the USEE under Wilkes, and
named by him for then Lt. George F. Emmons on
the Vincennes. Its location was more accurately
determined in December 1912 by the Eastern
Coastal Party of the AAE under Mawson. Frank
Wild was leader of the AAE Western Base and later
a member of two expeditions under Shackleton in
1914-16 and 1921-22. Not adopted: Point Em-
mons.
WILD, MOUNT: sharply defined rock ridge about
5 mi. long, with several summits, the highest about
3,100 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Sjogren
Gl. on the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in
64°12’S., 58°50’W. First charted by the FIDS in
1945, and named for Frank Wild.
WILD, POINT: small point marked by a low
rocky hill at its N. end, located about 1 mi. SE. of
Cape Belsham, on the N. side of Elephant I., in the
South Shetland I.; in about 61°02’S., 54°59’W.
This point was named Cape Wild by the Br. exp.
under Shackleton, 1914-16, but the name Point
Wild is recommended because of the small size of
the feature and to avoid confusion with Cape Wild
on the George V Coast. Named for Frank Wild,
leader of the party from Shackleton’s shipwrecked
exp. which camped at this site for four months
325
during the 1916 winter season before being rescued.
Not adopted: Cape Wild.
Wilh. Carlson Island: see Carlson Island.
Wilh. Carlsons O: see Carlson Island.
Wilhelm Barrier; Wilhelm Shelf Ice: see Filchner
Shelf Ice.
Wilhelm Christophersen, Mount: see Engelstad,
Mount.
WILHELM CHRISTOPHERSEN, MOUNT:
mound-shaped knob rising to about 11,000 ft. in el.
from the edge of the polar plateau at the head of
Axel Heiberg Gl., standing between Mount Fridtjof
Nansen and Mount Engelstad in the Queen Maud
Range; in about 85°30’S., 168°20’W. Disc. by a
Nor. exp., 1910-12, under Amundsen, and named
by him for Wilhelm C. C. Christophersen, Nor-
wegian diplomat and Minister of Foreign Affairs,
1908-10. Apparently an error in the position of
Mount Wilhelm Christophersen and Mount Engel-
stad on the map in Amundsen’s book, Sydpolen,
gave rise to transposition in subsequent carto-
graphic application of these names. The US-—
ACAN application of these names is based on an
analysis of Amundsen’s narrative. Not adopted:
Mount Engelstad (q.v.), Mount Englestad, Mount
Ole Engelstad.
WILHELM II COAST: that portion of Antarctica
lying between Cape Penck, in about 66°40’S.,
87°35’E., and Cape Filchner, in about 66°28’S.,
92°18’E. Named for Kaiser Wilhelm II by the
GerAE under Drygalski who landed in the vicinity
of Gaussberg, in 89°19’E., in February 1902. Not
adopted: Kaiser Wilhelm II Coast, Kaiser Wilhelm
II Land.
WILHELMINA BAY: bay about 20 mi. wide,
entered between Cape Reclus and Cape Anna along
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°35’S., 62°05’W.
Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache,
and named for Wilhelmina, Queen of the Nether-
lands, 1890-1948. Not adopted: Welhelmina Bay,
Baie de Wilhelmine [French].
Wilhelmine, Baie de: see Wilhelmina Bay.
WILKES LAND: a large area in Antarctica, as
yet not fully delimited, fronting on the Indian
Ocean between Queen Mary Coast and George V
Coast, extending from about 100°26’E. to about
142°05’E. Named for R. Adm. Charles Wilkes,
American explorer who was in command of the
USEE in 1838-42. The name has been applied
over this extent in recognition of the fact that
Wilkes recognized the phenomena of the conti-
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
nental margin over a distance of 1,500 miles of
coast and thus first provided substantial proof
that Antarctica is a continent. This definition of
extent excludes the area E. of 142°05’E. which was
sighted by Wilkes but has been shown by later
expeditions to be farther S. than the positions
originally assigned by him.
WILKINS, CAPE: the extreme NW. tip of Fold
I., forming the E. side of the entrance to Stefans-
son Bay, off Kemp Coast; in about 67°15/S.,
59°19’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby and named by them for
Sir Hubert Wilkins, Arctic and Antarctic explorer.
Not adopted: Cape Hearst.
WILKINS COAST: that portion of the E. coast
of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Agassiz, in
68°30’S., 62°58’W., to Cape Boggs, in 70°33’S.,
61°23’W. Named by the US—ACAN for Sir Hubert
Wilkins, who in a pioneer Antarctic exploratory
flight on Dec. 20, 1928 flew southward from Decep-
tion I., crossed the Palmer Pen. to the E. side,
and continued southward to Stefansson Str. and
Hearst I. which lie midway along Wilkins Coast.
Wilkins Island: see Hearst Island.
WILKINS MOUNTAINS: mountains on Joerg
Plateau lying SSW. of Scaife Mtns., immediately
back of the Orville Escarpment; in about 75°54’S.,
64°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under
Ronne, who named these mountains for Sir Hubert
Wilkins.
WILKINS STRAIT: that body of water lying
between the concave W. coastline of Alexander I
Island and Charcot Island, in the E. part of
Bellingshausen Sea; in about 70°30’S., 72°30’W.
This strait was determined by exploratory flights
by the members of the East Base of the USAS in
November and December 1940, and was named
by the exp. after Sir Hubert Wilkins, who in 1929
first proved Charcot Land to be an island and
who, therefore, indirectly discovered this strait.
WILLEMS, CAPE: cape forming the N. side of
the entrance to Flandres Bay, on the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°56’S., 63°13’W. First charted
by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and
named by him for Pierre Willems. Not adopted:
Cap Pierre Willems [French].
WILL HAYES MOUNTAINS: mountain group of
the Queen Maud Range, surmounting the divide
between the lower ends of Robert Scott Gl. and
Amundsen Gl.; in about 85°57’S., 155°20’W. Disc.
by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd on the South Polar
Flight of Noy. 28-29, 1929, and mapped by the
326
Southern Sledging Party of the ByrdAE, 1933-35.
Named for Will Hays, former head of Motion Pic-
ture Producers and Distributors.
WILLIAM, MOUNT: prominent snow-covered
mountain about 5,300 ft. in el., standing about 5
mi. NNE. of Cape Lancaster, the S. extremity of
Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°42’W.
This feature was disc. by John Biscoe on Feb. 21,
1832. He believed it to be part of the mainland of
Palmer Peninsula. Biscoe named the mountain
for King William IV, then King of England.
William Bay: see Borgen Bay.
WILLIAM BLOCK, MOUNT: peak rising to about
10,200 ft. in el., standing about 10 mi. SSE. of Mt.
Pratt, in one of the southern ridges of the Gros-
venor Range; in about 86°05’S., and on the 180th
meridian. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE
flight to the South Pole in November 1929, and
named by him at that time for William Block, son
of Paul Block, patron of the expedition.
WILLIAM BRUCE, CAPE: cape at the head of
Charcot Bay, at approximately the point where
Mawson Gl. forms the Nordenskjéld Ice Tongue, on
the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°09’S.,
162°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott,
who named this feature for Dr. William S. Bruce,
leader of the ScotNAE, 1902-4.
WILLIAM GLACIER: glacier flowing S. from the
interior highlands of Anvers I. to the head of
Borgen Bay on the SE. coast of the island, in the
Palmer Arch; in 64°42’S., 63°28’W. This glacier
was disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Ger-
lache, and charted by them simply as a “grand gla-
cier.’ The name first appears on a chart based
upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Dis-
covery.
WILLIAM HENRY MAY, CAPE: conspicuous
rocky point marked by sheer red granite cliffs, lying
below Mt. Christmas along the W. edge of Ross
Ice Shelf; in about 81°55’S., 162°00’E. Disc. by the
BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Admiral of the Fleet
Sir William Henry May was a Lord of the Admiralty
and Controller of the Navy 1901-5. Not adopted:
Cape May. ~
WILLIAMS, CAPE: headland at the E. end of
Bowers Hills, on the Oates Coast; in about 70°08’S.,
163°15’E. Disc. in February 1911 by the BrAE,
1910-13, under Scott, when the Terra Nova ex-
plored westward of Cape North. William Williams,
Engineer, RN, was Chief Engineer-room Artificer on
the Terra Nova. Not adopted: Williams Head.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
WILLIAMS, POINT: bluff point. forming the E.
side of the entrance to Shallow Bay, on the E. part
of Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°48’S., 67°50’E.
Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson, on Feb. 12
or 13, 1931, and named for A. J. Williams, wireless
officer on the exp. ship Discovery.
Williams, Port: see FoSter, Port.
WILLIAM SCORESBY ARCHIPELAGO: group
of islands lying off Mac-Robertson Coast just E. of
the entrance to William Scoresby Bay, extending
about 7 mi. in a NW.-SE. direction, the largest of
which are Islay, Gouling Island, and the Sheehan
Islands; centered in about 67°20’S., 59°47’E. Most
of the islands in this archipelago were disc. in
February 1936 by DI personnel on the William
Scoresby who named them for the exp. ship.
WILLIAM SCORESBY BAY: bay about 5 mi.
long and about 3.5 mi. wide, with shores marked by
steep rock headlands and snow-free hills rising to
about 700 ft. in el., lying at the junction of Kemp
and Mac-Robertson Coasts; in about 67°25’S.,
59°37’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel
on the William Scoresby, for which the bay was
named. Not adopted: Innfjorden [Norwegian],
Scoresby Bay.
Williams Head: see Williams, Cape.
WILLIAMSON GLACIER: channel glacier about
3 mi. wide and 10 mi. long, flowing NE. from the
continental ice which drains into the head of Colvo-
coresses Bay, and terminating in a prominent
tongue, on Budd Coast; in about 66°05’S., 114°50’E.
Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN
Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for
John G. Williamson, gunner on the sloop of war
Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42.
Williamson reported that he was sure of sighting
land on Jan. 19, 1840 in the Oates Coast region.
Work by later expeditions has shown that land does
not exist as far northward as the Oates Coast posi-
tions reported by the USEE, although adequate
surveys of this coast have not been undertaken.
WILLIAMSON GLACIER TONGUE: prominent
glacier tongue about 3 mi. wide and 12 mi. long,
extending NE. from Williamson Gl. into Colvo-
coresses Bay, which is generally ice filled, along
Budd Coast; in about 66°00’S., 115°10’E. Delin-
eated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for
John G. Williamson.
WILLIAMSON HEAD: prominent headland lying
W. of Cape Kinsey along Oates Coast; in about
69°05’S., 158°10’E. Disc. in February 1911 by the
BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, when the Terra Nova
327
explored westward of Cape North. Thomas S. Wil-
liamson was a petty officer on the Terra Nova. Not
adopted: Williamson Point.
Williamson Point: see Williamson Head.
WILLIAMSON ROCK: rock lying about 7 mi.
ESE. of Cape Campbell, close off the NE. coast of
Ross I.; in about 77°23’S., 168°46’E. Charted by
the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Named for
Thomas S. Williamson, who as able seaman and
petty officer accompanied Scott’s expeditions of
1901-4 and 1910-13.
WILLIAMS POINT: point forming the NE. tip
of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in
62°26’S., 60°11’W. The discovery of the South
Shetland Is. was first reported by William Smith,
master of the brig Williams, in 1819. In John
Miers’ account of Smith’s voyage, published in 1820,
he states that Smith gave the name Williams to a
point of land in this vicinity. In recent years the
name Williams Point has been established in inter-
national usage for the NE. tip of Livingston Is-
land. Not adopted: William’s Point.
WILLIS ISLANDS: group of islands and rocks
lying about 3 mi. W. of Bird I., off the W. end of
South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°15’'W. The Willis
Islands were discovered in 1775 by Capt. James
Cook and named for the crew member who first
sighted them. Not adopted: Wallis Island, Willis
Island, Willis’s Island.
WILSON, CAPE: cape at the E. side of the en-
trance to the Bay of Isles, on the N. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°11’W. The Bay of Isles
was charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman
Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig
Daisy. The cape was named by Murphy for Wood-
row Wilson, President of the United States, 1913-21.
WILSON, CAPE: bold, rocky, snow-covered cape,
forming the N. side of the entrance to Shackleton
Inlet, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about
82°17’S., 163°00’E. Disc. by Capt. Robert F. Scott,
RN, in December 1902, while on his attempted trip
to the South Pole. He was accompanied on this
trip by S. Lt. (later Sir) Ernest H. Shackleton, RNR,
and Dr. Edward A. Wilson, for whom the cape was
named.
WILSON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,500 ft. in
el., surmounting the base of Rock Pile Peaks, on the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°27’S., 65°35’W. This
mountain appears indistinctly in a photograph
taken by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec.
20,1928. The feature was rephotographed in 1935
by Lincoln Ellsworth, in 1940 by the USAS, and in
1947 by the RARE under Ronne, and was charted
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
by the FIDS in 1948. Named by Ronne for Maj.
Gen. R. C. Wilson, chief of staff to Lt. Gen. Curtis
LeMay, head of the Office of Research and Develop-
ment of the then Army Air Forces, which furnished
equipment for the RARE.
Wilson Glacier: see Breitfuss Glacier.
WILSON HARBOR: bay about 1.5 mi. wide which
recedes eastward for about 3 mi., lying immedi-
ately S. of Ice Fjord along the S. coast of South
Georgia; in 54°07’S., 37°45’W. This coast was
roughly charted by a Russ. exp. under Bellings-
hausen in 1819. Wilson Harbor was named about
1912, probably for J. Innes Wilson, who sketched
some of the inland portions of the island at about
that time.
WILSON HILLS: hills which trend west-north-
westward, lying back of Archer Pt. along Oates
Coast; in about 69°10’S., 158°00’E. Disc. in Feb-
ruary 1911 by the BrAE under Scott, when the
Terra Nova explored westward in Cape North.
Named for Dr. Edward A. Wilson who perished with
Scott on the return journey from the South Pole.
WILSON PIEDMONT GLACIER: a great pied-
mont glacier, varying in width from 6 to 14 mi. and
extending about 36 mi. between Granite Hbr. and
Marble Pt., along the coast of Victoria Land; in
about 77°15’S., 163°20’E. This piedmont glacier
was disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott.
Scott’s second exp., the BrAE, 1910-13, named the
feature for Dr. Edward A. Wilson, surgeon and
artist with Scott’s first expedition and chief of the
scientific staff of the second. Not adopted: Great
Piedmont Glacier, Wilson Piedmont.
WILSON: ROCK: rock about 500 ft. in el., lying
about 1.4 mi. W. of Bristol I., in the South Sand-
wich Is.; in 59°03’S., 26°39’W. Charted in 1930 by
DI personnel on the Discovery II and named for Sir
Samuel H. Wilson, Permanent Under-Secretary of
State for the British Colonies.
WILTON BAY: bay lying between Cape Davidson
and Cape Hartree along the SW. coast of Laurie I.,
in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°45’W.
Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who
named it for D. W. Wilton, zoologist of the expe-
dition.
WIMPLE DOME: ice-covered hill about 2,500 ft.
in el., standing about 2 mi. S. of Thanaron Hill and
2 mi. E. of Bone Cove, on the NW. side of Louis
Philippe Pen.; in 63°37’S., 58°49°W. The name was
applied by members of the FIDS following their
survey in 1948 and is descriptive of the shape of the
feature, a wimple being a type of headdress worn
by nuns.
328
WINDMILL ISLANDS: a group of rocky islands,
islets and rocks, about 6 mi. wide and paralleling
the coast immediately N. of Vanderford Gl. for
about 15 mi., lying off Budd Coast close inside the
E. side of the entrance to Vincennes Bay; in
66°20’S., 110°28’E. Delineated from aerial photo-
graphs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and so
named by the US-ACAN because personnel with
USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, landed on Holl I. at the
SW. end of the group to establish ground control for
USN Op. Hjp. photographs. The term Operation
Windmill is a popular expression which developed
after the exp. disbanded, and refers to the extensive
use of helicopters made by this group. The official
title of this exp. was Second Antarctic Development
Project, U.S. Navy Task Force 39, 1947-48.
WINDS, BAY OF: embayment about 19 mi. wide
between Cape Dovers and Jones Rocks, indenting
the Queen Mary Coast about 10 mi.; in about
66°35’S., 97°35’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14,
under Mawson, who so named it because of the
almost constant outflow of cold dense air from the
plateau into the bay.
WINDVANE HILL: small hill about 0.2 mi. NE.
of the extremity of Cape Evans, Ross I.; in about
77°38’S., 166°24’E. Windvane Hill was charted
by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and so named
because an anemometer station was established
at this site.
WINDY COVE: small bay close NW. of Antarctic
Bay, entered 1 mi. SE. of Antarctic Pt. on the N.
coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 36°58’W. The
bay was named Whatahope Bay, probably by DI
personnel who charted this coast in 1929. How-
ever, this feature is known locally as Windy Cove.
It is probable that this latter name, which was
originally given by DI personnel in 1929 to the next
bay to the northwest (now Tornquist Bay, q.v.),
was erroneously transferred to this feature. Since
Whatahope Bay is unknown locally, the name
Windy Cove as applied to this feature is approved.
Not adopted: Whatahope Bay.
Windy Cove; Windy Hole: see Tornquist Bay.
WINDY GAP: pass about 3,200 ft. in el., lying
about 3 mi. SSE. of Mt. D’Urville and forming the
meeting place of three valleys of- Louis Philippe
Pen., namely Broad Valley leading eastward to Duse
Bay, a valley leading northward to Bransfield Str.,
and another southward to Prince Gustav Chan.; in
63°34’S., 58°09’W. Disc. by the FIDS and so
named because of the very bad weather experienced
by them in the pass during a survey journey in
April 1946.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
WINDY VALLEY: glacier-filled valley opening
onto Marguerite Bay on the W. coast of Palmer
Pen. and providing access via its head to the pla-
teau and The Traffic Circle area; in 68°37’S.,
66°50’W. So named by the BGLE under Rymill,
1934-37, because of the strong winds which descend
from the high plateau and blow out of this valley
with great force.
Winifred Cumming, Mount: see Cumming,
Mount.
WINTER ISLAND: islet about 0.5 mi. long, lying
0.1 mi. N. of Skua I., in the Argentine Is., off the
W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W.
Winter Island was named by the BGLE, 1934-37,
under Rymill, who made this islet the site of their
winter base during 1936.
WINTER QUARTERS BAY: small bay imme-
diately E. of Hut Pt., at the S. end of Ross I.; in
about 77°51’S., 166°37’E. Disc. by the BrNAE,
1901-4, under Scott, and so named because their
exp. ship Discovery was moored in the bay and
“frozen-in” during the winter seasons of 1902 and
1903.
Winter Quarters Peninsula: see Hut Point Pen-
insula.
WISTING, MOUNT: one of a group of low-lying
peaks barely protruding through the ice of the
south polar plateau, rising to about 10,700 ft. in
el. about 6 mi. NW. of the group containing Mounts
Hassel, Bjaaland and Prestrud, which stand about
20 mi. SW. of the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. in the
Queen Maud Range; in about 86°28’S., 163°45’W.
Disc. in November 1911 by the Nor. exp. under
Amundsen, and named by him for Oscar Wisting, a
member of the South Pole Party. Not adopted:
Mount Oscar Wisting, Mount O. Wisting.
WITTE PEAKS: group of two or three small
peaks, standing at the N. side of Stein Nunataks
and rising above the piedmont ice in New
Schwabenland; in about 71°30’S., 1°00’W. Disc.
by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named
for Dietrich Witte, motor mechanic on the expe-
dition.
WOHLTHAT MOUNTAINS: large group of asso-
ciated mountain features, including such major
ranges as the Petermann Range and the Alexander
Humboldt Mtns., lying immediately N. of the polar
plateau in the E. part of New Schwabenland; cen-
tering in about 71°30’S., 11°30’E. Disc. by the
GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for
Councilor of State Helmuth C. H. Wohlthat, who
in his capacity as economist and fiscal officer dealt
with the organization of the expedition.
329
WOLLASTON, CAPE: cape forming the eastern-
most point of Trinity I., off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 63°43’S., 60°21’W. The name was origi-
nally applied to the N. tip of Trinity I. on a map by
the Br. exp. in the Chanticleer, 1829-31, under
Capt. Henry Foster, but in recent years usage has
restricted the name to the E. tip of the islAnd.
Named by Foster for William Hyde Wollaston, com-
missioner of the Royal Society on the Board of
Longitude, 1818-28. Foster’s early experience with
astronomical and pendulum observations (an ob-
jective of the Chanticleer voyage) was facilitated
by a loan of astronomical instruments from the
Board of Longitude to his former ship, the Conway.
Not adopted: Cape Wallaston, Cap Walleston
[French].
WOOD, CAPE: point which marks the SE. ex-
tremity of Flat I., at the W. side of the entrance to
Robertson Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 71°21’S.,
169°10’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross and named after Charles Wood, Esq.,
First Secretary of the Admiralty.
WOOD, MOUNT: mountain about 4,000 ft. in el.,
standing W. of Gardner Inlet and about 15 mi. W.
of Mt. Austin, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
about 74°51’S., 64°07’W. Disc. by the RARE,
1947-48, under Ronne, who named this mountain
for E. A. Wood, ship’s engineer with the expedition.
Not adopted: Mount Sandell.
WOOD BAY: bay lying between Cape Johnson
and Cape Washington, along the coast of Victoria
Land; in about 74°20’S., 165°40’E. Disc. in 1841 by
a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for Lt.
James F. L. Wood, of the exp. ship Erebus.
WOODWARD, MOUNT: mountain with broad
twin summits, about 2,500 ft. in el., standing be-
tween Hammond Gl. and Boyd Gl. in the Edsel
Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°17'S.,
145°45’W. Disc. on Dec. 5, 1929 by the ByrdAE,
1928-30, and named for Donald Woodward, a
patron of the expedition. Not adopted: Donald
Woodward Mountains, Mount Donald Woodward.
WOOLNOUGH, MOUNT: mountain about 4,700
ft. in el., situated about 3 mi. N. of Mackay Gl.
and about midway between Mt. Morrison and Mt.
Gran, in Victoria Land; in about 76°56’S., 161°20’E.
Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under
Scott. Probably named for Dr. Walter G. Wool-
nough, British geologist who assisted in writing the
scientific reports of the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton.
WOOLPACK ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long,
lying in Grandidier Chan. about 5 mi. E. of the N.
end of Vieugué I. and 9 mi. NW. of Cape Garcia, off
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°40’S., 64°59’W.
Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under
Rymill.
WORCESTER RANGE: a coastal range about 30
mi. long, with steep sharp peaks, lying W. of Moore
Embayment along the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf;
in about 78°50’S., 160°30’E. Disc. by the BrNABE,
1901-4, under Scott. The name seems to be first
applied on the charts of the BrAE, 1907-9, under
Shackleton.
WORDIE ICE SHELF: a confluent glacier pro-
jecting as an ice shelf into the SE. part of Mar-
guerite Bay, between Cape Berteaux and Mt.
Edgell, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in
69°15’S., 67°45’W. Disc. by the BGLE under Ry-
mill, 1934-37, who named this feature for James
M. Wordie, Honorary Sec. (later Pres.) of the Royal
Geographical Soc., member of the Discovery Com-
mittee, and Chairman of the Scott Polar Research
Institute. He also had been geologist and Chief
of the Scientific Staff of the Br. exp., 1914-16, un-
der Shackleton. Not adopted: Wordie Shelf Ice.
WORDIE NUNATAK: rock outcrop lying about
10 mi. E. of Mt. Biscoe, in Enderby Land; in about
66°19’S., 51°50’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the
BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, and named
for James M. Wordie.
WORDIE POINT: the SW. tip of Visokoi I., in
the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°44’S., 27°15’W. The
point was charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the
Discovery II and named for James M. Wordie.
Wordie Shelf Ice: see Wordie Ice Shelf.
WORSLEY, CAPE: dome-shaped cape about 700
ft. in el., with snow-free cliffs on the S. and E.
sides, standing about 22 mi. WSW. of Cape Sobral,
on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°39’S., 60°25’ W.
Charted by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Cdr.
Frank A. Worsley, British polar explorer and mem-
ber of Sir Ernest Shackleton’s expeditions of
1914-16 and 1921-22.
WORSWICK HILL: rounded summit, more than
2,000 ft. in el., at the W. end of Brisbane Plateau,
Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°34’S.,
45°46’W. The peak appears on some early charts
of the South Orkney Is. but is not accurately lo-
cated. It was roughly surveyed by DI personnel
in 1933, and resurveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49.
Named by the Br-APC for Robert F. Worswick of
the FIDS, meteorologist at Signy I. in 1950 and
1951, who reached this hill during a sledge journey
in 1950.
330
WRIGHT, MOUNT: peak in the Admiralty Range
in northern Victoria Land, standing NE. of Mt.
Adam; in about 71°20’S., 169°20’E. This peak was
charted by the Northern Party of the BrAE under
Scott, 1910-13, and named for Charles S. Wright,
physicist with the expedition.
WRIGHT GLACIER: glacier flowing into the S.
part of Wilson Piedmont Gl., on the coast of Vic-
toria Land; in about 77°30’S., 163°08’E. This fea-
ture appears on the charts of the BrNAE under
Scott, 1901-4, and the BrAE under Shackleton,
1907-9. It was recharted by the BrAE under Scott,
1910-13, and named for Charles S. Wright.
WRIGHT INLET: ice-filled inlet receding west-
ward between Capes Little and Wheeler, along the
E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°00’S., 61°20’W. The
inlet was photographed from the air in 1940 by the
USAS, and 1947 by the RARE under Ronne.
Named by Ronne for John K. Wright, Dir. of the
American Geographical Soc., which lent its aus-
pices to Ronne’s expedition. Not adopted: Mount
Tricorn Inlet.
WRIGLEY GULF: an embayment E. of Hobbs
Coast, in Marie Byrd Land, the greater part of
which appears to be occupied by Getz Ice Shelf; in
about 74°S., 129°W. The topographical definition
of this feature must remain indefinite until clari-
fied by further exploration. Disc. in December
1940 by the USAS. Named for Philip Wrigley,
Chicago manufacturer who helped support the ex-
pedition. Not adopted: Philip Wrigley Gulf.
W. Spring, Cape: see Spring, Cape.
WUST INLET: ice-filled inlet about 5 mi. wide,
indenting the E. side of Merz Pen. between Cape
Christmas and Old Mans Head, along the E. coast
of Palmer Pen.; in 72°20’S., 60°50’W. This inlet
was photographed from the air in 1940 by mem-
bers of the USAS. During 1947 the inlet was pho-
tographed from the air by members of the RARE,
who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from
the ground. Named by the FIDS for Prof. Georg
Wiist, German oceanographer.
WYATT, MOUNT: fiat-topped mountain rising
to about 9,000 ft. in el., standing at the SE. end of
the Rawson Mtns., in the Queen Maud Range; in
about 86°46’S., 153°15’W. Disc. in December
1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin
Blackburn, and named at that time by R. Adm.
Byrd for Miss Jane Wyatt, friend of Richard S.
Russell, Jr.,a member of that party. Not adopted:
Mount Jane Wyatt.
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
WYATT ISLAND: island, about 5 mi. long and
2 mi. wide, lying 2 mi. S. of Day I. near the center
part of Laubeuf Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer
Pen.; in 67°20’S., 67°40’W. First surveyed in 1936
by the BGLE under Rymill, who used the provi-
sional name South Island for this feature. The is-
land was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and re-
named by them for V. Adm. Sir Arthur G. N. Wyatt,
Hydrographer to the Navy, 1945-50. Not adopted:
South Island.
WYCK ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, lying
about 1 mi. S. of the W. part of Brooklyn I. in the
E. portion of Wilhelmina Bay, off the W. coast of
Palmer Pen.; in 64°36’S., 61°54’W. Disc. by the
BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named
on the recommendation of Dr. Frederick A. Cook,
surgeon of the exp.; in honor of R. A. Van Wyck,
first mayor of Greater New York City. Not
adopted: Van Wyck Island.
X, ROCK: prominent, offshore rock about 0.4
mi. long, lying close inside the E. side of the en-
trance to Victor Bay, about 1 mi. NW. of Gravenoire
Rock, off Adélie Coast; in 66°20’S., 136°42’E.
Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hijp.,
1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Marret,
1952-53, and so named because the rock was indi-
cated by a cross or “xX” mark in selected prints of
the Operation Highjump photographs for the pur-
pose of identifying it to the FrAEK party which
established an astronomical control station there.
X-Ray Range; X-Ray, Mount: see Kohler Range.
YALOUR ISLETS: group of islets and rocks
about 1.5 mi. in extent, lying in the middle of Penola
Str. about 1 mi. NW. of Cape Tuxen, off the W.
coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°10’W. Disc.
by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by
him for Lt. Jorge Yalour, Argentine Navy, an officer
of the Argentine corvette Uruguay, which came to
the rescue of the shipwrecked SwedAE in Novem-
ber 1903. Not adopted: Jallour Islands, Jallour
Isles, Jallour Islets, Jalour Islets.
YANKEE HARBOR: circular harbor indenting
the W. coast of Greenwich I., in the South Shetland
Is.; in 62°32’S., 59°49’W. Yankee Harbor was
known to both American sealers and the British
as early as 1820, and this name is now established
international usage. Port Foster, the crater har-
bor of Deception I., has at times also been referred
to as Yankee Harbor. Not adopted: Fannings
Harbor, Hospital Cove.
Yankee Harbor: see-Foster, Port.°
Yankee Sound: see McFarlane Strait.
331
Yngvar Nielsen Glacier; Yugvar Nielsen Glacier:
see Nielsen Glacier.
YOUNG ISLAND: island about 19 mi. long and
5 mi. wide which rises to a plateau about 4,000 ft.
in el., lying in the NW. extremity of the Balleny Is.;
in about 66°25’S., 162°30’E. Disc. in February 1839
by a Br. exp. under Balleny who named it for G. F.
Young, one of the merchants who united with
Charles Enderby in sending out the expedi:ion.
YOUNG POINT: rocky point forming the N. side
of the entrance to Bone Cove, on the NW. coast of
Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°36’S., 58°55’W. Charted
by the FIDS in 1948 and named for Dr. Adam
Young, surgeon on the brig Williams which made
explorations in the South Shetland Is. and Brans-
field Str. in 1820.
YSEULT ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about
0.7 mi. E. of Tristan It. and about 0.4 mi. NNE. of
the E. point on Cape Jules, off Adélie Coast; in
66°44’S., 140°56’E. Photographed from the air by
USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE
under Barré, 1951-52, and so named because of its
twin relationship with Tristan It. Yseult is the
French spelling of Isolde, legendary heroine incor-
porated into Arthurian legend and later popular-
ized by Wagner’s opera “Tristan and Isolde.”
YULE BAY: bay between Cape Hooker and Cape
Dayman, lying about 19 mi. ESE. of Cape North,
along the northern coast of Victoria Land; in about
70°40’S., 166°30’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp.
under Ross who named it for Henry B. Yule, second
master on the ship Erebus.
ZANUCK, MOUNT: large mountain, about 4 mi.
wide and 10 mi. long surmounted by three sharp
peaks in an E.—-W. line, the highest of which rises
to about 7,500 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of
Albanus GI. at the point where it joins the E. side
of Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range;
centering in about 85°58’S., 150°04’W. Disc. by
R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South
Pole in November 1929, and visited in December
1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin
Blackburn. Named by Byrd for Darryl F. Zanuck,
official of Twentieth Century-Fox Pictures, who
assisted the ByrdAE, 1933-35, in assembling
motion-picture records, and later supplied the
USAS, 1939-41, with motion-picture projectors.
Zavodovskii Island; Zavodovsk Island: see Zavo-
dovski Island.
ZAVODOVSKI ISLAND: circular island about 3
mi. in diameter surmounted by an active volcanic
cone about 1,600 ft. in el., in the South Sandwich
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA
Is.; in 56°20’S., 27°35’W. Disc. in 1819 by a Russ.
exp. under Bellingshausen, and named by him for
Ivan Zavodovski, second-in-command of the exp.
ship Vostok. Not adopted: Zavodovskii Island,
Zavodovsk Island.
ZEBRA RIDGE: small but prominent rock ridge,
about 2 mi. long and 2,500 ft. in el., situated 3
mi. S. of the mouth of Tumble Gl. where it rises
above the coastal ice piedmont of eastern Alexan-
der I Island; in 70°02’S., 69°14’W. First surveyed
in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them
because of the striped appearance of the rock
strata.
ZED ISLANDS: small group of islands, the west-
ernmost rising to about 950 ft. in el., lying about
1.5 mi. NW. of Williams Pt., the NE. tip of Living-
ston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°25’S.,
60°12’W. The name appears to have been applied
by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted
the islands in 1935.
ZELEE GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide and
6 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the continental ice
along the W. side of Lacroix Nunatak and termi-
nating in a prominent tongue at the W. side of
Port Martin, on Adélie Coast; in 66°52’S., 141°16’E.
Probably first sighted in 1840 by the Fr. exp. under
D’Urville, although no glaciers were noted on
D’Urville’s chart of this coast. Photographed from
the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the
FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and named for the
Zélée, corvette which accompanied D’Urville’s flag-
ship, the Astrolabe. Not adopted: Zelee Glacier.
332
ZELEE GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue
about 2 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, extending NW.
from Zélée Gl. into the W. portion of Port Martin,
along Adélie Coast; in 66°47’S., 141°10’E. Deline-
ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op.
Hjp., 1946-47, and named for the French corvette
Zélée. Not adopted: Zelee Glacier Tongue.
ZELEE ROCKS: group of rocks, some of which
are above water and others near the surface, lying
about 17 mi. N. of Cape Siffrey, the extreme N. tip
of Palmer Pen.; in 62°54’S., 57°18’W. Disc. by the
Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by
him after the exp. ship Zélée. Not adopted: Zelee
Rocks, Zelée Rocks.
ZENKER RIDGE: low moraine ridge extending
NE. from Osmic Hill to Discovery Pt., in Cumber-
land East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°30’W.
This moraine was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4,
under Nordenskj6ld. Named by the FIDS follow-
ing their sketch survey in 1951. The name is one
of a group in the vicinity of Discovery Pt., derived
from the chemical fixatives used there in biological
work by the FIDS.
ZIMMERMANN, MOUNT: mountain about 9,200
ft. in el., standing immediately E. of the N. end
of the Petermann Range, at the seaward edge of
the bastion extension of the polar plateau that is
formed by the Wohlthat Mtns. of New Schwaben-
land; in about 71°18’S., 13°24’E. Disc. by the
GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for
the vice-president of the Deutschen Forschungs-
gemeinschaft (German Research Society).
Zuckerhut Insel: see Sugarloaf Islet.
GPO—DSSO—5522
U, S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1957 O -424589
eet
ey
ise 4
ENON
a.
{
\
Pate
{ eae
~